Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds

OXFORD MATHEMATICAL MONOGRAPHS Series Editors J. M. BALL W. T. GOWERS N. J. HITCHIN L. NIRENBERG R. PENROSE A. WILES ...

Author: Józef Ignaczak | Martin Ostoja-Starzewski

27 downloads 628 Views 3MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

OXFORD MATHEMATICAL MONOGRAPHS Series Editors J. M. BALL W. T. GOWERS N. J. HITCHIN L. NIRENBERG R. PENROSE A. WILES

OX FO R D M AT H E M ATI C A L M O N O G R A P H S For a full list of titles please visit http://www.oup.co.uk/academic/science/maths/series/omm/ Donaldson and Kronheimer: The geometry of four-manifolds, paperback Woodhouse: Geometric quantization, second edition, paperback Hirschfeld: Projective geometries over finite fields, second edition Evans and Kawahigashi: Quantum symmetries of operator algebras Klingen: Arithmetical similarities: Prime decomposition and finite group theory Matsuzaki and Taniguchi: Hyperbolic manifolds and Kleinian groups Macdonald: Symmetric functions and Hall polynomials, second edition, paperback Catto, Le Bris, and Lions: Mathematical theory of thermodynamic limits: Thomas-Fermi type models McDuff and Salamon: Introduction to symplectic topology, paperback Holschneider: Wavelets: An analysis tool, paperback Goldman: Complex hyperbolic geometry Colbourn and Rosa: Triple systems Kozlov, Maz’ya and Movchan: Asymptotic analysis of fields in multi-structures Maugin: Nonlinear waves in elastic crystals Dassios and Kleinman: Low frequency scattering Ambrosio, Fusco and Pallara: Functions of bounded variation and free discontinuity problems Slavyanov and Lay: Special functions: A unified theory based on singularities Joyce: Compact manifolds with special holonomy Carbone and Semmes: A graphic apology for symmetry and implicitness Boos: Classical and modern methods in summability Higson and Roe: Analytic K-homology Semmes: Some novel types of fractal geometry Iwaniec and Martin: Geometric function theory and nonlinear analysis Johnson and Lapidus: The Feynman integral and Feynman’s operational calculus, paperback Lyons and Qian: System control and rough paths Ranicki: Algebraic and geometric surgery Ehrenpreis: The radon transform Lennox and Robinson: The theory of infinite soluble groups Ivanov: The Fourth Janko Group Huybrechts: Fourier-Mukai transforms in algebraic geometry Hida: Hilbert modular forms and Iwasawa theory Boffi and Buchsbaum: Threading homology through algebra Vazquez: The Porous Medium Equation Benzoni-Gavage and Serre: Multi-dimensional hyperbolic partial differential equations Calegari: Foliations and the geometry of 3-manifolds Boyer and Galicki: Sasakian Geometry Choquet-Bruhat: General Relativity and the Einstein Equations Ignaczak and Ostoja-Starzewski: Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds

Thermo elasticity with Finite Wave Sp eeds Jó zef Ignaczak Institute of Fundamental Technological Research Polish Academy of Sciences Warsaw, Poland

Martin Osto ja-Starzewski Department of Mechanical Science and Engineering, Institute for Condensed Matter Theory, and Beckman Institute University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign Urbana, USA

1

3

Great Clarendon Street, Oxford ox2 6dp Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers the University’s objective of excellence in research, scholarship, and education by publishing worldwide in Oxford New York Auckland Cape Town Dar es Salaam Hong Kong Karachi Kuala Lumpur Madrid Melbourne Mexico City Nairobi New Delhi Shanghai Taipei Toronto With offices in Argentina Austria Brazil Chile Czech Republic France Greece Guatemala Hungary Italy Japan Poland Portugal Singapore South Korea Switzerland Thailand Turkey Ukraine Vietnam Oxford is a registered trade mark of Oxford University Press in the UK and in certain other countries Published in the United States by Oxford University Press Inc., New York c J´ ozef Ignaczak and Martin Ostoja-Starzewski 2010 The moral rights of the author have been asserted Database right Oxford University Press (maker) First published 2010 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior permission in writing of Oxford University Press, or as expressly permitted by law, or under terms agreed with the appropriate reprographics rights organization. Enquiries concerning reproduction outside the scope of the above should be sent to the Rights Department, Oxford University Press, at the address above You must not circulate this book in any other binding or cover and you must impose the same condition on any acquirer British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data Data available Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data Data available Typeset by SPI Publisher Services, Pondicherry, India Printed in Great Britain on acid-free paper by MPG Books, King’s Lynn, Norfolk ISBN 978–0–19–954164–5 1 3 5 7 9 10 8 6 4 2

CONTENTS

PREFACE INTRODUCTION 1

2

3

4

Fundamentals of linear thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds 1.1 Fundamentals of classical thermoelasticity 1.1.1 Basic considerations 1.1.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) 1.1.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , qi ) 1.2 Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with one relaxation time 1.2.1 Basic considerations 1.2.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) 1.2.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , qi ) 1.3 Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with two relaxation times 1.3.1 Basic considerations 1.3.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) 1.3.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , ϑ) Formulations of initial-boundary value problems 2.1 Conventional and non-conventional characterization of a thermoelastic process 2.1.1 Two mixed initial-boundary value problems in the L–S theory 2.1.2 Two mixed initial-boundary value problems in the G–L theory 2.2 Relations among descriptions of a thermoelastic process in terms of various pairs of thermomechanical variables Existence and uniqueness theorems 3.1 Uniqueness theorems for conventional and non-conventional thermoelastic processes 3.2 Existence theorem for a non-conventional thermoelastic process Domain of influence theorems 4.1 The potential–temperature problem in the Lord–Shulman theory 4.2 The potential–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory 4.3 The natural stress–heat-flux problem in the Lord–Shulman theory

x xii

1 1 1 7 9 11 11 14 15 18 18 25 26 30 30 31 33 34 37 37 43 51 51 59 65

vi

Contents

4.4 4.5

The natural stress–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory The displacement–temperature problem for an inhomogeneous anisotropic body in the L–S and G–L theories 4.5.1 A thermoelastic wave propagating in an inhomogeneous anisotropic L–S model 4.5.2 A thermoelastic wave propagating in an inhomogeneous anisotropic G–L model

71 80 80 83

5 Convolutional variational principles 86 5.1 Alternative descriptions of a conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory 86 5.2 Variational principles for a conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory 93 5.3 Variational principle for a non-conventional thermoelastic process in the Lord–Shulman theory 103 5.4 Variational principle for a non-conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory 106 6 Central equation of thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds 6.1 Central equation in the Lord–Shulman and Green–Lindsay theories 6.2 Decomposition theorem for a central equation of Green–Lindsay theory. Wave-like equations with a convolution 6.3 Speed of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space of constitutive variables 6.4 Attenuation of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space of constitutive variables 6.4.1 Behavior of functions kˆ1.2 for a fixed relaxation time t0 6.4.2 Behavior of functions kˆ1.2 for a fixed 6.5 Analysis of the convolution coefficient and kernel ˆ at fixed t0 6.5.1 Analysis of λ ˆ 6.5.2 Analysis of λ at fixed 6.5.3 Analysis of the convolution kernel

111 111 114 127 139 140 141 143 143 144 146

7 Exact aperiodic-in-time solutions of Green–Lindsay theory 7.1 Fundamental solutions for a 3D bounded domain 7.2 Solution of a potential–temperature problem for a 3D bounded domain 7.3 Solution for a thermoelastic layer 7.4 Solution of Nowacki type; spherical wave of a negative order 7.5 Solution of Danilovskaya type; plane wave of a negative order 7.6 Thermoelastic response of a half-space to laser irradiation

152 152 164 170 175 192 197

8 Kirchhoff-type formulas and integral equations in Green–Lindsay theory 8.1 Integral representations of fundamental solutions

217 217

Contents

8.2 8.3 8.4

Integral equations for fundamental solutions Integral representation of a solution to a central system of equations Integral equations for a potential–temperature problem

9 Thermoelastic polynomials 9.1 Recurrence relations 9.2 Differential equation 9.3 Integral relation 9.4 Associated thermoelastic polynomials 10

11

12

Moving discontinuity surfaces 10.1 Singular surfaces propagating in a thermoelastic medium; thermoelastic wave of order n (≷ 0) 10.2 Propagation of a plane shock wave in a thermoelastic half-space with one relaxation time 10.3 Propagation of a plane acceleration wave in a thermoelastic half-space with two relaxation times Time-periodic solutions 11.1 Plane waves in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times 11.2 Spherical waves produced by a concentrated source of heat in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times 11.3 Cylindrical waves produced by a line heat source in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times 11.4 Integral representation of solutions and radiation conditions in the Green–Lindsay theory 11.4.1 Integral representations and radiation conditions for the fundamental solution in the Green–Lindsay theory 11.4.2 Integral representations and radiation conditions for the potential–temperature solution in the Green–Lindsay theory Physical aspects and applications of hyperbolic thermoelasticity 12.1 Heat conduction 12.1.1 Physics viewpoint and other theories 12.1.2 Consequence of Galilean invariance 12.1.3 Consequence of continuum thermodynamics 12.2 Thermoelastic helices and chiral media 12.2.1 Homogeneous case 12.2.2 Heterogeneous case and homogenization 12.2.3 Plane waves in non-centrosymmetric micropolar thermoelasticity 12.3 Surface waves

vii

221 222 232 241 241 249 252 254 257 257 261 270 280 280 294 302 310

310

314 321 321 321 323 325 329 329 332 333 336

viii

Contents

12.4

12.5

13

Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators 12.4.1 Flexural vibrations of a thermoelastic Bernoulli–Euler beam 12.4.2 Numerical results and discussion Fractional calculus and fractals in thermoelasticity 12.5.1 Anomalous heat conduction 12.5.2 Fractal media

Non-linear hyperbolic rigid heat conductor of the Coleman type 13.1 Basic field equations for a 1D case 13.2 Closed-form solutions 13.2.1 Closed-form solution to a time-dependent heat-conduction Cauchy problem 13.2.2 Travelling-wave solutions 13.3 Asymptotic method of weakly non-linear geometric optics applied to the Coleman heat conductor

339 339 342 343 343 346 352 352 355 355 358 366

REFERENCES

383

ADDITIONAL REFERENCES

392

NAME INDEX

404

SUBJECT INDEX

408

J´ ozef Ignaczak dedicates the book to Krystyna on the 45th anniversary of their marriage. Martin Ostoja-Starzewski dedicates the book to his wife Iwona.

PREFACE

This book focuses on a generalized dynamic coupled thermoelasticity theory of solid materials, free of the classical paradox of infinite propagation speeds of thermal signals. As is well known, that paradox is caused by the Fourier model of heat conduction. Dating back to Maxwell (late nineteenth century) and Cattaneo (mid-twentieth century), several models have been developed and intensively studied over the past four decades, and it is now time to write an up to date monograph on this subject. Besides a few monographs on extended rational continuum mechanics and thermodynamics, which only touch upon the dynamic thermoelasticity of solid materials per se, let us mention a book on generalized dynamic thermoelasticity by Podstrigach and Kolano (in Russian) and a book on classical and generalized dynamic thermoelasticity by Dhaliwal and Singh, both published in the late 1970s. That is, our book focuses on dynamic thermoelasticity governed by hyperbolic equations, rather than on a wide range of continuum theories. Hence the title: Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds. Besides the paradox of infinite propagation speeds, the classical dynamic thermoelasticity theory offers either unsatisfactory or poor descriptions of a solid’s response to a fast transient loading (say, due to short laser pulses) and at low temperatures. Such drawbacks have led many researchers to advance various generalized thermoelasticity theories. Following in the steps of Maxwell and Cattaneo, they proposed thermoelastic models with one or two relaxation times, focused on low temperatures, absence of energy dissipation, a dual-phaselag theory, or even anomalous heat conduction described by fractional calculus. The present book concentrates on the two leading theories of hyperbolic thermoelasticity: that of Lord–Shulman (with one relaxation time), and that of Green–Lindsay (with two relaxation times). They are both set in small strains, and so, the resulting field equations are linear partial differential ones. The complexity of theories is due to the coupling of mechanical with thermal fields. The book is concerned with the mathematical aspects of both theories – existence and uniqueness theorems, domain of influence theorems, convolutional variational principles – as well as with the methods of dealing with a range of initial/boundary value problems. In the latter respect, following the establishment of the central equation of thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds, we consider: the exact, aperiodic-in-time solutions of the Green–Lindsay theory; Kirchhofftype formulas and integral equations in the Green–Lindsay theory; thermoelastic polynomials; moving discontinuity surfaces; and time-periodic solutions. This is followed by a chapter on the physical and microstructural aspects of generalized thermoelasticity, where we review other models and theories. We conclude with

Preface

xi

a chapter on a non-linear hyperbolic theory of a rigid heat conductor for which a number of asymptotic solutions are obtained using a method of weakly non-linear geometric optics. The book we present is a monograph. It may be used to augment graduatelevel courses on advanced continuum mechanics, elasticity, and thermoelasticity. It also offers a basis for lab tests, as well as a basis for further research in the area, indeed an area that is actively being developed in several research centers in Europe, America and Asia. Acknowledgements We warmly acknowledge the support of Professor Richard B. Hetnarski who prompted the authors to write this book, and thank Professor Bruno A. Boley for comments on an earlier version of the manuscript. Through the years the work of both authors was partly facilitated by grants from the National Science Foundation, the Polish Academy of Sciences and the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada.

INTRODUCTION

This book focuses on a generalized dynamic coupled thermoelasticity theory of solid materials, free of the classical paradox of infinite propagation speeds of thermal signals. As is well known, that paradox is caused by the Fourier model of heat conduction, first observed in rigid isotropic conductors, qi = −k

∂θ , ∂x i

(1)

which leads to a diffusion (i.e. parabolic-type) equation k 2 ∂θ = ∇ θ. ∂t ρcp

(2)

In eqns (1) and (2), qi is the heat flux, θ is the temperature, k is the thermal conductivity, ρ is the mass density and cp is the specific heat at constant pressure. The first equation above also introduces the index notation, which we follow throughout the book when dealing with tensors. To remove the said paradox, following the proposal dating back to Maxwell (1867) and Cattaneo (1948), one should replace eqn (1) by ∂θ ∂ qi = −k , (3) 1 + t0 ∂t ∂x i whereupon, instead of eqn (2), there holds a telegraph (i.e. hyperbolic type) equation t0

k 2 ∂ 2 θ ∂θ = + ∇ θ. ∂t2 ∂t ρcp

(4)

Clearly, this models heat conduction as a wave, often called a second sound. In eqns (3) and (4) t 0 is a relaxation time, and cT = (k/ρcp t 0 )1/2 represents the speed of the second sound. Properties of this model as well as a wealth of other, more complex models, all in the setting of rigid conductors, were developed and intensively studied over the past half a century (Joseph and Preziosi, 1989, 1990), and the trend continues. Over the same time period, parallel to this activity, there has been a major growth of thermoelasticity accounting for non-Fourier-type heat conduction in elastic bodies. Besides the paradox of infinite propagation speeds, the classical dynamic thermoelasticity theory offers either unsatisfactory or poor descriptions of a solid’s response to a fast transient loading (say, due to short laser pulses) and at

Introduction

xiii

low temperatures. Such drawbacks have led many researchers to advance various generalized thermoelasticity theories. Following in the steps of Maxwell and Cattaneo, they proposed thermoelastic models with one or two relaxation times, models focused on low temperatures, models with absence of energy dissipation, a dual-phase-lag theory, or even anomalous heat conduction described by fractional calculus. A number of reviews on the subject, already sometimes in a book form, have appeared over the past two decades (Chandrasekharaiah, 1986, 1998; Ie¸san, 2004; Ignaczak, 1980b, 1989a,b, 1991; Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 1999, 2000). One should also mention here a book on generalized thermoelasticity (Podstrigach and Kolano, 1976) and a book on classical and generalized dynamic coupled thermoelasticity (Dhaliwal and Singh, 1980). In the past two decades there has been an increased research activity in generalized thermoelasticity – among others, in Germany, India, Iran, Japan, Poland, Spain, UK, USA, and several Arabic countries, to name a few. Besides numerous technological applications we mention here the interest in modelling heat ransfer in living tissues, e.g. (Dai et al., 2008). Overall, it is now time to write an up-to-date monograph on the subject of hyperbolic thermoelasticity, or dynamic thermoelasticity governed by hyperbolic equations, which represents a subset of generalized thermoelasticity, the latter being part of a wide range of continuum theories. A contact with such theories occurs in a handful of monographs on extended rational continuum mechanics and thermodynamics (M¨ uller and Ruggeri, 1993, 1998; Wilma´ nski, 1998). Our book’s title, Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds, reflects the defining concept of a domain of influence, D (t), in dealing with the paradox of infinite propagation speeds of thermal signals. Dating back to Zaremba (1915), D (t) is a generalization of the concept of support of a function f (t), which is a set of all the points in the body that may be reached by the thermomechanical disturbances propagating from the locus of the disturbance with a speed not greater than a finite υ, see Fig. I.

Figure I A schematic showing the evolution of the domain of influence via Huygens’ principle from time t to t + ∆t.

xiv

Introduction

The following example illustrates the concept of a domain of influence (DOI). Example 0.1 Cauchy problem for a hyperbolic equation. Consider the following one-dimensional (1D) initial-boundary value problem. Find a solution of the wave equation 2 1 ∂2 ∂ u(x, t) = 0, |x| < ∞, t ≥ 0, c > 0, (5) − ∂x2 c2 ∂t2 subject to the initial conditions u(x, 0) ≡ η(x) = u0 [H(x + x0 ) − H(x − x0 )] ∂ u(x, 0) = 0 ∂t

|x| < ∞,

|x| < ∞,

where H = H(t) is the Heaviside function 1 for x > 0, H(t) = 0 for x < 0.

x0 > 0 (6)

(7)

and u0 is a constant. A unique solution to the problem (5)–(7) takes the form 1 [η(x + ct) + η(x − ct)] 2 1 = u0 [H(x + x0 + ct) − H(x − x0 + ct) 2 + H(x + x0 − ct) − H(x − x0 − ct)] ,

u(x, t) =

(8)

and it follows from eqn (8) that u(x, t) = 0

for |x| > x0 + ct.

(9)

A motion produced by the rectangular initial “disturbance” over the interval [−x0 , x0 ] (see eqn (6)) is a sum of two rectangular waves, each moving with velocity c > 0, one to the right and the other to the left, and in such a way that for fixed t > 0 the points x > x0 + ct and x < −x0 − ct are undisturbed. Therefore, the interval [−x0 − ct, x0 + ct] represents a domain of influence (DOI) of the initial data at time t > 0 for the problem (5)–(7). And this example, related to a Cauchy problem for classical wave equation, clearly illustrates the concept of DOI. The concept is extended in the book to include the hyperbolic thermoelastic L–S and G–L theories. To illustrate the concept of “infinite velocity” of a temperature field governed by a parabolic equation consider another example. Example 0.2 Cauchy problem for a parabolic equation. Find a solution of the temperature equation 2 1 ∂ ∂ T (x, t) = 0, |x| < ∞, t ≥ 0, − ∂x2 κ ∂t

(10)

Introduction

xv

subject to the initial condition T (x, 0) ≡ T0 (x) = T0∗ [H(x + x0 ) − H(x − x0 )] ,

|x| < ∞,

x0 > 0.

(11)

T0∗

> 0. In eqns (10) and (11) κ > 0, To find a solution of the problem (10) and (11) we use the Laplace transform method, and obtain ∂2 ¯ 1 ¯ (12) T − (pT − T0 ) = 0, ∂x2 κ where the bar indicates the Laplace transform and p is the transform parameter. An equivalent form of eqn (12) reads T0 d p ¯ T =− , D= . (13) D2 − κ κ dx Consider now a Green’s function f¯ that satisfies the equation ∞ p ¯ 1 D2 − cos α(x − ξ)dα. (14) f (x, p) = −δ(x − ξ) = − κ 2π −∞ We look for f¯ in the form f¯(x, p) =

∞ −∞

A(α, p) cos α(x − ξ)dα,

and substituting eqn (15) into eqn (14) we obtain √ κ exp[−|x − ξ| p/κ] 1 ∞ cos α(x − ξ) ¯ dα = . f (x, p) = √ π 0 α2 + p/κ 2 p Taking the inverse Laplace transform of eqn (16) we obtain √ −(x − ξ)2 κ f (x, t) = √ exp . 4κt 2 πt

(15)

(16)

(17)

As a result, the only solution of the Cauchy problem (10) and (11) takes the form x0 T0∗ −(x − ξ)2 T (x, t) = √ dξ. (18) exp 4κt 4κπt −x0 The formula (18) implies that, for every t > 0 and |x| < ∞, the temperature T = T (x, t) takes positive values, meaning it propagates with an infinite velocity. Remark 0.1 The field equations in Examples 1 and 2 can be treated as particular cases of the wave equation with dissipation 2 ∂ 1 ∂2 ∂ u(x, t) = 0 |x| < ∞, t ≥ 0, (19) − 2 2 − 2h ∂x2 c ∂t ∂t where h > 0. An asymptotic analysis of a solution to a Cauchy problem for eqn (19) [when c → ∞, h > 0, or c > 0, h → 0] provides the concept of an

xvi

Introduction

asymptotic domain of influence (ADOI) for a classical wave equation and of a temperature speed tending to infinity for a parabolic equation. The concept of ADOI is a natural one when formulating a Saint Venant’s Principle [Sternberg, 1954; Boley, 1955; Boley and Weiner, 1960; Chirita, 1995, 2007; Ignaczak, 1998, 2002; Quintanilla, 2001], or identifying the role of inertia terms by means of a so-called Boley’s number [Boley, 1972; Boley and Barber, 1957]. The present book concentrates on the two leading theories of hyperbolic thermoelasticity: that of Lord–Shulman (1967) – also called a theory with one relaxation time – and that of Green–Lindsay (1972) – also called a theory with two relaxation times. They are both set in small strains and small departures from equilibrium temperatures, and so, the resulting field equations are linear partial differential ones. The complexity as well as the richness – and, therefore, the attractiveness of these theories – is due to the coupling of mechanical with thermal fields. The book is concerned with the mathematical aspects of both theories – existence and uniqueness theorems, domain of influence theorems, convolutional variational principles – as well as with the methods of dealing with a range of initial-boundary value problems. In the following we give an overview of the book’s contents. The first chapter reviews the basic equations of classical thermoelasticity and, then, gives the corresponding equations of the thermoelasticity with one relaxation time (or the L–S theory), followed by an analogous set of equations of thermoelasticity with two relaxation times (or the G–L theory). In each case the global balance laws are stated in terms of a displacement–temperature pair or, alternatively, a stress–heat-flux pair, or in terms of another pair of thermomechanical variables. This provides an Ansatz for the entire book. The second chapter first presents a conventional and non-conventional characterization of a thermoelastic process, giving the mixed initial-boundary value problems: displacement–temperature and stress–heat–flux of the L–S theory, and displacement–temperature and stress–temperature of the G–L theory. This is followed by a discussion of the relations among descriptions of a thermoelastic process in terms of various pairs of thermomechanical variables. The third chapter gives the existence and uniqueness theorems for conventional and non-conventional thermoelastic processes. On this basis, the fourth chapter expounds the domain of influence theorems characteristic of both theories for: the potential–temperature problem, the natural stress–heat–flux problem, the natural stress-temperature problem, and the displacement–temperature problem. The fifth chapter is devoted to convolutional variational principles in the L–S and G–L theories. It first presents the alternative descriptions of a conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory, and then gives the variational principles for a conventional and non-conventional thermoelastic processes in the L–S and G–L theories. The sixth chapter is focused on a central equation of thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds, i.e. a partial differential equation that, most remarkably, has

Introduction

xvii

a similar form for both theories. We then develop a decomposition theorem for a central equation of the Green–Lindsay theory, the wave-like equations with a convolution, and the speed and attenuation of thermoelastic disturbances. We end with an analysis of the convolution coefficient and kernel. The seventh chapter opens with fundamental solutions for a three-dimensional (3D) bounded domain, and then develops solutions for several key problems of thermoelasticity: the potential–temperature problem for a 3D bounded domain, a thermoelastic layer, the Nowacki-type solution, Danilovskaya-type solution, and a thermoelastic response of a half-space to laser irradiation. The eighth chapter deals with integral representations and integral equations for fundamental solutions, integral representation of a solution to a central system of equations, and integral equations for a potential–temperature problem. In the ninth chapter we start from the observation that the fundamental solutions of the G–L theory may be determined with the help of polynomial sequences on the time axis, the so-called polynomials of thermoelasticity. Here, we give a number of recurrence relations describing these polynomials and then show that a pair of thermoelastic polynomials can be identified with an element of the null space of a linear ordinary differential operator. From this are developed an integral relation, and associated thermoelastic polynomials. The tenth chapter focuses on singular surfaces propagating in a thermoelastic medium, and studies the propagation of a plane shock wave in a thermoelastic half-space with one relaxation time, as well as the propagation of a plane acceleration wave in a thermoelastic half-space with two relaxation times. On the other hand, the eleventh chapter studies time-periodic plane, spherical, and cylindrical waves as well as the fundamental solutions and for the potential– temperature solution, all in the setting of the G–L theory. The twelfth chapter first provides a brief review of several other theories, all classified as generalized thermoelasticity and due to Green and Naghdi. Next, follows a justification of the presence of the material time derivative rather than the partial time derivative in the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation (3); this is done following the recent work by Christov and Jordan (2005). We thus see that a partial derivative may be employed in a theory focused on solid mechanics in infinitesimal strains. Another way to see how the material time derivative in eqn (3) arises naturally is to take the thermodynamics with internal variables as a starting point for the derivation of constitutive laws – this is done in the subsequent section of Chapter 12. What follows next is an account of some applications of the L–S and G–L theories: to helices and chiral media, both with homogeneous as well as composite structures; to surface waves; and to thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators. The chapter culminates with a thermoelasticity with anomalous heat conduction treated via fractional calculus, and a formulation of thermoelasticity of fractal media in the vein of dimensional regularization.

xviii

Introduction

While Chapters 1 through 12 are devoted to linear hyperbolic theories of thermoelasticity, the thirteenth chapter concerns a rigid but non-linear hyperbolic heat conductor due to Coleman et al. (1982, 1983, 1986). This particular material model obeys the law of conservation of energy, the dissipation inequality, Cattaneo’s equation, and a generalized energy–entropy relation with a parabolic variation of the energy and entropy along the heat-flux axis. Following a review of the field equations for a 1D case, a number of closed-form solutions to the non-linear governing equations are obtained, and then a method of weakly nonlinear geometric optics is applied to obtain an asymptotic solution to the Cauchy problem with a weakly perturbed initial condition associated with the nonlinear model. Given the book’s focus on two special theories in the first 11 chapters, accompanied by an account of only some further models in Chapters 12 and 13, a Reference Supplement is given at the book’s end. It collects much of the existing literature on hyperbolic linear and non-linear thermoelastic models and their various generalizations. Finally, we would like to point out the well-known analogy of classical thermoelasticity to mass transfer in strained elastic solids, which is based on the even more basic analogy of Fourier-type heat conduction to Fick-type diffusion. Thus, a paradox of infinite propagation speeds arises also in those classical masstransfer and diffusion problems, so that its resolution may be offered by a range of models already developed in theories of generalized thermoelasticity. Such a resolution has been proposed recently by Sherief et al. (2004), Aouadi (2007, 2008) and Sharma et al. (2008).

1 FUNDAMENTALS OF LINEAR THERMOELASTICITY WITH FINITE WAVE SPEEDS

1.1 Fundamentals of classical thermoelasticity 1.1.1 Basic considerations The theory of classical (linear) thermoelasticity is the starting point for a number of various generalizations including: visco-thermoelasticity, thermoelasticity with diffusion, electro-magneto-thermoelasticity, or thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds. Thus, before proceeding with the exposition of the latter of these theories, it is beneficial to review the derivation of fundamental equations of classical thermoelasticity (Carlson, 1972). Given the fact that the concept of a thermoelastic body may be defined in various ways, 1 let us begin by stating that in this book it is reserved for a body B in which there occurs a coupled dynamical process of an exchange of mechanical energy into thermal energy under the action of externally applied thermomechanical loadings. This process is accompanied by strains and temperature changes within the body, all of which vanish upon the removal of the said thermomechanical loadings. Notably, this process is described in terms of the field variables 2 by the set of relations: the strain–displacement relations Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.1)

the dynamic equilibrium equations Sij , j + bi = ρ¨ ui ,

Sij = Sji ,

(1.1.2)

the energy conservation law e˙ = Sij E˙ ij − qi , i + r, 1

(1.1.3)

One can deal with a static thermoelasticity, uncoupled quasi-static thermoelasticity, coupled quasi-static thermoelasticity, uncoupled dynamic thermoelasticity, and coupled dynamic thermoelasticity; see e.g. (Nowacki, 1975). 2 By the field variables we mean the physical fields that characterize a thermoelastic process: the displacement ui , strain tensor Eij , temperature change ϑ, and others.

2

Fundamentals of linear thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds

the dissipation inequality

q

r i ,i + (θ > 0) , (1.1.4) θ θ and the (yet to be specified) constitutive relations. Employing the standard tensor notation in the above, ui , Eij , Sij , qi , θ, η and e denote, respectively, the displacements, strains, stresses, heat flux, absolute temperature, entropy and internal energy of the body. Moreover, bi , r and ρ stand for the body forces, external heat sources and mass density of the body, respectively; here we use the standard notations: η˙ = ∂η/∂t, (·), i = ∂/∂xi (·). 3 As is well known, the relations (1.1.3) and (1.1.4) are also called the first and second laws of thermodynamics, respectively. Introducing the free energy ψ through η˙ −

ψ = e − ηθ,

(1.1.5)

and combining eqn (1.1.3) with eqn (1.1.4), we arrive at the dissipation inequality involving ψ: qi θ, i 0. (1.1.6) ψ˙ + η θ˙ − Sij E˙ ij + θ A classical thermoelastic body is a body in which, besides relations (1.1.1)– (1.1.6), Sij =

∂ψ , ∂Eij

(1.1.7)

∂ψ , (1.1.8) ∂θ where ψ = ψ(Eij , θ) is a function given a priori. With the thus chosen free energy, we have ∂ψ ˙ ∂ψ ˙ (1.1.9) Eij + ψ˙ = θ = Sij E˙ ij − η θ˙ ∂Eij ∂θ η=−

and eqn (1.1.6) takes the form qi θ, i 0.

(1.1.10)

Moreover, the relation (1.1.5) implies e˙ = Sij E˙ ij + ηθ, ˙

(1.1.11)

and the energy conservation law (1.1.3) may be written as θη˙ = −qi , i + r.

(1.1.12)

For a linear thermoelastic body we assume that ˙ |θ, i | ˆ, |Eij |, |E˙ ij |, |θ − θ0 |, |θ|,

(1.1.13)

3 The relations (1.1.1)–(1.1.4) constitute a linear version of the basic laws of mechanics and thermodynamics of a continuum written in index notation.

Fundamentals of classical thermoelasticity

3

where ˆ is a small number, while θ0 > 0 is a constant reference temperature, such that 4 Sij (0, θ0 ) = 0,

η (0, θ0 ) = 0.

(1.1.14)

A classical linear thermoelastic anisotropic body is the body in which relations (1.1.1)–(1.1.14) hold along with this choice of free energy ψ(Eij , θ) =

1 CE 2 Cijkl Eij Ekl + Mij Eij ϑ − ϑ , 2 2θ0

(1.1.15)

whereby ϑ = θ − θ0 .

(1.1.16)

Here, Cijkl , Mij and CE denote the elasticity tensor, the stress–temperature tensor and the specific heat at zero strain, respectively. These quantities satisfy the following relations Cijkl = Cjikl = Cijlk = Cklij , Mij = Mji ,

CE > 0,

Cijkl Eij Ekl > 0.

(1.1.17) (1.1.18) (1.1.19)

Evidently, the dissipation inequality (1.1.10) is to be satisfied by an appropriate heat flux qi , independent of the choice of ψ. We do so by choosing qi = −kij ϑ, j ,

(1.1.20)

where kij is the thermal conductivity tensor, such that kij = kji ,

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j > 0.

(1.1.21)

It follows from the relations (1.1.7), (1.1.8) and (1.1.15)–(1.1.18) that the constitutive relations for a linear thermoelastic body are Sij = Cijkl Ekl + Mij ϑ,

(1.1.22)

CE ϑ, θ0

(1.1.23)

η = −Mij Eij +

while the energy equation for such a body is obtained upon replacing θ η˙ in ˙ We thus arrive at the following alternative definition of eqn (1.1.12) by θ0 η. a linear thermoelastic body: it is a body in which the process of exchange of 4 Since the function ψ depends on (E , θ), the functions S ij ij and η in eqns (1.1.7), (1.1.8) and (1.1.14) are also viewed as functions of (Eij , θ). In the following, when we deal with a thermoelastic process taking place in a body B, the functions Sij and η are also treated as fields on B × [0, ∞), where B is a domain occupied by the body, and [0, ∞) is the time interval.

4


mechanical and thermal energies is described by the equations Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.24)

ui , Sij , j + bi = ¨

(1.1.25)

θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r,

(1.1.26)

Sij = Cijkl Ekl + Mij ϑ,

(1.1.27)

θ0 η = −θ0 Mij Eij + CE ϑ,

(1.1.28)

qi = −kij ϑ, j .

(1.1.29)

The system of functions [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ] satisfying eqns (1.1.24)–(1.1.29) on B × [0, ∞), where B is a domain occupied by the body and [0, ∞) is a time interval, is called a classical thermoelastic process corresponding to a body force bi and a heat source r. When the tensors Cijkl and kij are invertible, then, using notations Kijkl = (Cijkl )

−1

−1

, λij = (kij )

,

Aij = −Kijkl Mkl , CS = CE − θ0 Mij Aij ,

(1.1.30) (1.1.31)

we arrive at an alternative form of eqns (1.1.24)–(1.1.29): Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.32)

ui , Sij , j + bi = ¨

(1.1.33)

θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r,

(1.1.34)

Eij = Kijkl Skl + Aij ϑ,

(1.1.35)

θ0 η = θ0 Aij Sij + CS ϑ,

(1.1.36)

ϑ, i = −λij qj .

(1.1.37)

Here, Kijkl is the elastic compliance tensor, Aij is the thermal expansion tensor, λij is the thermal resistivity tensor, and CS is the specific heat at zero stress. These quantities satisfy the following relations Kijkl = Kjikl = Kijlk = Kklij ,

(1.1.38)

Aij = Aji , CS > 0,

(1.1.39)

Kijkl Sij Skl > 0,

(1.1.40)

λij = λji , λij qi qj > 0.

(1.1.41)

In the case of an inhomogeneous anisotropic body, the quantities , CE , kij , Mij , and Cijkl as well as their counterparts −1 , CS−1 , λij , Aij , and Kijkl depend on the location in the body, but not on time. They describe the physical properties


5

of the body, and are therefore called material functions of the thermoelastic medium. Clearly, a thermoelastic process corresponding to the loading (bi , r) may be described by eqns (1.1.24–1.1.29) or (1.1.32–37). Since both equation systems are quite complex, we usually reduce them to simpler ones involving a minimum of unknown fields. For instance, by eliminating the entropy η from eqns (1.1.24)– (1.1.29) or eqns (1.1.32)–(1.1.37), we find that the process [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, qi ] is described by the equations Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.42)

ui , Sij , j + bi = ¨

(1.1.43)

−qi , i + r = CE ϑ˙ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij ,

(1.1.44)


(1.1.45)

qi = −kij ϑ, j ,

(1.1.46)

or by the equations Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.47)

ui , Sij , j + bi = ρ¨

(1.1.48)

−qi , i + r = CS ϑ˙ + θ0 Aij S˙ ij ,

(1.1.49)


(1.1.50)

ϑ, i = −λij qj .

(1.1.51)

For an isotropic thermoelastic body we have Cijkl Ekl = 2µEij + λEkk δij ,

(1.1.52)

Mij = − (3λ + 2µ) αδij , kij = kδij ,

(1.1.53)

and Kijkl Skl =

1 2µ

Sij −

Aij = αδij ,

λ Skk δij , 3λ + 2µ

λij =

1 δij , k

CS = CE + 3θ0 (3λ + 2µ) α2 ,

(1.1.54) (1.1.55) (1.1.56)

where λ and µ are the Lamé moduli, α is the coefficient of thermal expansion, and k is the thermal conductivity coefficient. In this particular case, in place of

6


the system (1.1.42–46) we obtain Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2


(1.1.57) (1.1.58)

.

−qi , i + r = CE ϑ + (3λ + 2µ) αθ0 E˙ kk ,

(1.1.59)

Sij = 2µEij + λEkk δij − (3λ + 2µ) αϑδij ,

(1.1.60)

qi = −kϑ, i ,

(1.1.61)

while in place of the system (1.1.47–51) we obtain Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.1.62)


(1.1.63)

−qi , i + r = CS ϑ˙ + θ0 αS˙ kk , 1 λ Sij − Skk δij + aϑδij , Eij = 2µ 3λ + 2µ

(1.1.64)

1 ϑ, i = − qi . k

(1.1.65) (1.1.66)

The restrictions on the material functions of an isotropic body are ρ > 0, µ > 0, 3λ + 2µ > 0, k > 0, CE > 0, α = 0.

(1.1.67)

The field equations (1.1.42–1.1.46) or (1.1.47–1.1.51) for an anisotropic body, as well as eqns (1.1.57–1.1.61) or eqns (1.1.62–1.1.66) for an isotropic body, still represent complex systems of equations. However, a number of field variables may be eliminated out of each of these systems in such a way as to obtain a description of the thermoelastic process in terms of a pair. For example, the system (1.1.42– 46) may be reduced to that involving a pair (ui , ϑ), while the system (1.1.47–51) may be reduced to that involving a pair (Sij , qi ). Other possible pairs are either (ui , qi ) or (Sij , ϑ). When working with the pair (ui , ϑ), we employ a so-called displacement– temperature description, which is obtained by eliminating Eij , Sij , and qi from eqns (1.1.42–1.1.46) ui + (Mij ϑ) , j = −bi , (Cijkl uk , l ) , j − ρ¨ (kij ϑ,j ) , i − CE ϑ˙ + θ0 Mij u˙ i , j = −r.

(1.1.68)

Analogously, when working with the pair (Sij , qi ), we employ a so-called stress– heat-flux description, which is obtained by eliminating ui , Eij , and ϑ from


7

eqns (1.1.47–1.1.51) 5 (ρ−1 S(ik , k ), j) − Kijkl ˙ S¨kl + CS−1 Aij q˙k , k = −(ρ−1 b(i ), j) + CS−1 Aij r,

(CS−1 qk , k ), i − λij q˙j + θ0 (CS−1 Apq S˙ pq ), i = (CS−1 r), i ,

(1.1.69)

where

Kijkl = Kijkl − θ0 CS−1 Aij Akl .

(1.1.70)

The field equations described in terms of other pairs – such as (Sij , ϑ) – will be discussed later in this book. Let us note that the eqns (1.1.68) and (1.1.69) represent necessary conditions for a thermoelastic process to be satisfied on B × (0, ∞). A question arises whether these conditions are also sufficient. The answer to this question is simple relative to the system (1.1.68). Indeed, if (ui , ϑ) is a solution of eqn (1.1.68), then specifying the dependent variables Eij , Sij , and qi with the help of formulas (1.1.42), (1.1.45) and (1.1.46), we conclude that the system [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, qi ] satisfies eqns (1.1.42–1.1.46), i.e. it is a thermoelastic process. Thus, we obtain sufficiency. The related issue with respect to eqn (1.1.69) is more complex. A solution was given (Nickell and Sackman, 1968) based on the assumption that the initial conditions for the pair (Sij , qi ) are generated from the conventional initial values of the pair (ui , ϑ). This solution consists in writing down the relations specifying ui , Eij and ϑ in terms of the pair (Sij , qi ) in such a way that the system [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, qi ] is a thermoelastic process. Since a general thermoelastic process does not need to be consistent with conventional initial values of the pair (ui , ϑ), we shall return to the issue of sufficiency of field equations in terms of one pair of thermomechanical variables when formulating the initial-boundary value problems. At this point, we derive the basis for such problems, i.e. the global balance laws in terms of (ui , ϑ) and (Sij , qi ), corresponding, respectively, to eqns (1.1.68) and (1.1.69). 1.1.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) Multiplying eqn (1.1.43) through by u˙ i , we obtain ï , u˙ i Sij , j + u˙ i bi = ρu˙ i u

(1.1.71)

from which, in view of eqn (1.1.42), 1 ∂ (u˙ i Sij ) , j − E˙ ij Sij + u˙ i bi = ρ u˙ i u˙ i . 2 ∂t

(1.1.72)

5 In eqn (1.1.69) the parentheses on the index level indicate the symmetric part of a secondorder tensor; e.g. b(i,j) = (bi,j + bj,i ) /2, (ρ−1 S(ik,k ),j) = [(ρ−1 Sik,k ),j + (ρ−1 Sjk,k ),i ]/2; see (Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 2004).

8


Next, integrating over B, and employing the divergence theorem, we find

u˙ i Sij nj da + B

∂B

1 d E˙ ij Sij dv + 2 dt

u˙ i bi dv = B

ρu˙ i u˙ i dv.

(1.1.73)

B

Here, ni is the outer normal to the boundary ∂B. Noting from eqns (1.1.45) and (1.1.17) that 1 ∂ (Cijkl Eij Ekl ) + Mij E˙ ij ϑ, E˙ ij Sij = Cijkl E˙ ij Ekl + Mij E˙ ij ϑ = 2 ∂t

(1.1.74)

eqn (1.1.73) may be written as

u˙ i Sij nj da +

u˙ i bi dv =

1 d 2 dt

B

∂B

Mij E˙ ij ϑdv.

(Cijkl Eij Ekl + ρu˙ i u˙ i )dv + B

B

(1.1.75) Introducing qi from eqn (1.1.46) into eqn (1.1.44), we obtain CE ϑ˙ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij = (kij ϑ, j ) , i + r,

(1.1.76)

from which 1 Mij E˙ ij ϑ = [CE ϑϑ˙ − (kij ϑ, j ) , i ϑ − rϑ] θ0 1 1 rϑ 1 ∂ CE ϑ2 − (kij ϑ, j ϑ) , i + kij ϑ,j ϑ, i − . = 2θ0 ∂t θ0 θ0 θ0

(1.1.77)

Integration of this equation over B gives

1 d Mij E˙ ij ϑdv = 2θ0 dt

B

1 − θ0

B

CE ϑ2 dv + B

1 rϑdv − θ0

1 θ0

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv B

(1.1.78)

ni kij ϑ, j ϑda. ∂B

Replacing the last integral on the right-hand side of eqn (1.1.75) by the righthand side of eqn (1.1.78), we obtain the global form of the balance law in terms


9

of the pair (ui , ϑ) 6   1 1 d 1 ρu˙ i u˙ i dv + Cijkl Eij Ekl dv + CE ϑ2 dv  dt 2 2 2θ0 B

+

B

1 θ0

B

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv =

B

u˙ i Sij nj da +

+

1 θ0

ni kij ϑ, j ϑda +

(1.1.79)

B

∂B

u˙ i bi dv

1 θ0

∂B

rϑdv. B

Note that eqn (1.1.79) was obtained only from the field eqns (1.1.42–1.1.46), similar to the derivation of field eqns (1.1.68) in terms of (ui , ϑ). Thus, eqn (1.1.79) represents an integral of thermoelastic energy associated with eqn (1.1.68). 1.1.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , qi ) In order to obtain an integral of energy associated with the thermoelastic process in terms of (Sij , qi ), we multiply eqn (1.1.69)1 by S˙ ij and eqn (1.1.69)2 by q˙i so as to obtain 7 S˙ ij S¨kl + CS−1 Aij S˙ ij q˙k , k (ρ−1 Sik , k ), j S˙ ij − Kijkl

= −(ρ−1 bi ), j S˙ ij + CS−1 Aij S˙ ij r˙

(1.1.80)

and −1 CS qk,k , i q˙i − λij q˙i qj + θ0 (CS−1 Apq S˙ pq ), i q˙i = (CS−1 r), i q˙i .

(1.1.81)

Given that (ρ−1 Sik,k ), j S˙ ij = (ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij ), j − ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij , j ,

(1.1.82)

(CS−1 qk , k ), i q˙i = (CS−1 qk , k q˙i ), i − CS−1 qk , k q˙i , i ,

(1.1.83)

(CS−1 Apq S˙ pq ), i q˙i = (CS−1 Apq S˙ pq q˙i ), i − CS−1 Apq S˙ pq q˙i , i ,

(1.1.84)

6 In eqn (1.1.79), the fields E and S are defined in terms of the pair (u , ϑ) by eqns (1.1.42) ij ij i and (1.1.45), respectively. They have been left in the global law for simplicity. 7 We use the following result: if S ij is a symmetric tensor, and Tij is an arbitrary secondorder tensor, then T(ij) Sij = Tij Sij .

10


by integrating eqns (1.1.80) and (1.1.81), and using the divergence theorem, we find ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij nj da − ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij , j dv ∂B

S˙ ij S¨kl dv + − Kijkl B

B

CS−1 Aij S˙ ij q˙k , k dv

B

=−

ρ−1 bi , j S˙ ij dv +

B

and 1 θ0

1 θ0

CS−1 Aij S˙ ij rdv ˙

B

CS−1 qk , k q˙i ni da −

∂B

−

(1.1.85)

λij q˙i q˙j dv +

1 θ0

CS−1 qk , k q˙i , i dv

B

CS−1 Apq S˙ pq q˙i ni da

(1.1.86)

B ∂B 1 −1 −1 ˙ CS r , i q˙i dv. − CS Apq Spq q˙i , i dv = θ0 B

B

Upon adding eqns (1.1.85) and (1.1.86), after rearranging the terms, we arrive at    d 1 1 1 ρ−1 Sik , k Sij,j dv + Kijkl CS−1 (qk , k )2 dv S˙ ij S˙ kl dv +  dt  2 2 2θ0 B

+

1 θ0

B

B

. (ρ−1 bi ), j S˙ ij − CS−1 Aij S˙ ij r − θ0−1 (CS−1 r), i q˙i dv

λij q˙i q˙j dv = B

B

+

ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij nj + CS−1 (Apq S˙ pq + θ0−1 qk , k )q˙i ni da.

(1.1.87)

∂B

This is the sought for global balance law in terms of the pair (Sij , qi ). 8 Overall, the balance laws (1.1.79) and (1.1.87) pertain to a general anisotropic thermoelastic body. Their counterparts for an isotropic body can be readily obtained using the relations (1.1.52–56) and (1.1.70). A general analysis of local equations (1.1.42–46) or (1.1.47–51) indicates that these equations are of a hyperbolic-parabolic type (Kupradze et al., 1979), that is, they describe thermoelastic disturbances “propagating” with infinite speeds. This result is also confirmed by inspection of explicit solutions of a number of typical problems of classical thermoelasticity (Nowacki, 1975). Let us note that this is at odds with a fundamental fact in physics: for a finite time interval [0, t], a disturbance of 8 The global stress–heat-flux law of classical thermoelasticity (1.1.87) is obtained here for the first time.

Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with one relaxation time

11

a bounded support may only generate the response of a bounded support. In order to eliminate this paradox (or inconsistency) a number of modifications of classical thermoelasticity have appeared in the literature over the past one hundred years or so. The next part of this chapter will treat one such modified theory: thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. 1.2 Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with one relaxation time 1.2.1 Basic considerations The theory of thermoelasticity with one relaxation time arose as a result of a modification of the equation of heat conduction (1.1.29) in Section 1.1, originally proposed by Maxwell (1867) in the context of theory of gases, and later by Cattaneo (1948) in the context of heat conduction in rigid bodies. Accounting for such a change in the description of a thermoelastic process in a deformable body – as proposed among others by Lord and Shulman (1967) 9 – leads to the following system of equations, corresponding to eqns (1.1.24–1.1.29): Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2 ..

Sij , j + bi = ρui , .

(1.2.1) (1.2.2)

θ0 η = −qi , i + r,

(1.2.3)


(1.2.4)

θ0 η = −θ0 Mij Eij + CE ϑ,

(1.2.5)

Lqi = −kij ϑ, j ,

(1.2.6)

where L is an operator of the form L = 1 + t0 ∂/∂t,

(1.2.7)

and t0 is the so-called relaxation time, satisfying the condition t0 > 0.

(1.2.8)

The L–S theory described by the relations (1.2.1)–(1.2.8) is confined to the case when a second-order tensor of relaxation times is reduced to a spherical part; in this case eqn (7) of (Lord and Shulman, 1967) can readily be reduced to eqn (1.2.6). In eqns (1.2.1–1.2.6) all the symbols have the meaning similar to those of the system (1.1.24–29). In particular, we assume that all the material functions are restricted by the same constitutive inequalities as in the classical theory. It follows from the analysis of Section 1.1 that a thermoelastic process described by eqns (1.2.1–1.2.6) satisfies identical strain–displacement relations, dynamic equilibrium equations, energy conservation law, and dissipation inequality just 9 A survey of results related to the L–S theory can be found in (Ignaczak, 1981, 1987, 1989a) (see also (Lebon, 1982; Pao and Banerjee, 1978; Kaliski, 1965)).

12


as the classical thermoelastic process. This holds with one caveat: The dissipation inequality qi ϑ, i ≤ 0 is satisfied so long as the term t0 q˙i ϑ, i is “small” relative to the term kij ϑ, i ϑ, j , and this is true provided t0 is a small parameter. Remark 1.1 The L–S theory obeys the governing equations of a linear extended thermoelasticity in which the first and second laws of thermodynamics are satisfied identically in the following sense. We extend a domain of the free energy ψ to include the heat flux vector qi into a set of independent variables. In other words, we postulate that ψ = ψ(Eij , θ, qi ).

(R1.1.1)

Then, the internal energy e is also a function of these variables e = e(Eij , θ, qi ),

(R1.1.2)

and proceeding along the lines of obtaining the field equations of classical thermoelasticity [see eqns (1.1.1)–(1.1.12)] we find that the extended second law of thermodynamics takes the form [see eqn (1.1.10)] qi θ, i ∂ψ ≤ 0, q˙i + ∂qi θ

(R1.1.3)

while the extended energy conservation law is written as [see eqn (1.1.12)] θη˙ = −qi , i + r −

∂ψ q˙i . ∂qi

(R1.1.4)

Next, by letting ψ = ψ(Eij , θ, qi ) in the form [see eqn (1.1.15)] ψ(Eij , θ, qi ) =

1 CE 2 t0 Cijkl Eij Ekl + Mij Eij ϑ − ϑ + λij qi qj , 2 2θ0 2θ0

(R1.1.5)

we recover eqns (1.2.1), (1.2.2), (1.2.4), and (1.2.5). To recover the linear energy conservation law (1.2.3) we replace the term θη˙ by θ0 η, ˙ and ignore a second-order term on the RHS of eqn (R1.1.4). Finally, to show that the second law of thermodynamics [eqn (R1.1.3)] is satisfied we use eqns (R1.1.3) and (R1.1.5), and obtain qi θ, i t0 ≤ 0, λij qj q˙i + θ0 θ or

qi

t0 θ,i λj i q˙j + θ0 θ

(R1.1.6)

≤ 0.

(R1.1.7)

Since [see eqn (1.2.6)] qi + t0 q˙i = −kij θ, j ,

(R1.1.8)

therefore, multiplying eqn (R1.1.8) by λia = λai = (kai )−1 , we obtain λai qi + t0 λai q˙i = −θ, a ,

(R1.1.9)


13

or 1 t0 λij q˙j θ, i = − λij qj − + θ0 θ θ0

1 1 − θ0 θ

θ, i .

(R1.1.10)

Next, multiplying eqn (R1.1.10) by qi and letting θ ≈ θ0 in the second term on the RHS of the resulting equation, we obtain 1 t0 λij q˙j θ,i = − λij qi qj . + (R1.1.11) qi θ0 θ θ0 Equation (R1.1.11) together with the positive-definiteness of the tensor λij implies that the extended second law of thermodynamics in the form (R1.1.7) is identically satisfied. As a result, the L–S theory represents a linear extended thermoelasticity for which the extended 1st and 2nd laws of thermodynamics are satisfied identically. Equation (1.2.6) is often called the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation, and the theory defined by eqns (1.2.1–1.2.6) the thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. An alternative form of that system of equations is the following system (recall eqns (1.1.32–37)): Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ), 2

(1.2.9)


(1.2.10)

θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r,

(1.2.11)


(1.2.12)

θ0 η = θ0 Aij Sij + CS ϑ,

(1.2.13)

ϑ, i = −λij (qj + t0 q˙j ).

(1.2.14)

Just like in Section 1.1, we introduce here the concept of a thermoelastic body with one relaxation time and a thermoelastic process with one relaxation time. Now, by eliminating the variables Eij , Sij , η and qi from eqns (1.2.1–1.2.6), we obtain the the displacement–temperature field equations ui + (Mij ϑ) , j = −bi , (Cijkl uk , l ), j − ρ¨ ˙ (k ij ϑ, j ) , i − CE ϑˆ + θ0 Mij u r, ˆ˙ i , j = −ˆ

(1.2.15)

where a hut denotes action of the operator L, that is, for a function f on B × (0, ∞), fˆ = Lf.

(1.2.16)

14


Furthermore, upon eliminating ui , Eij , η and ϑ from the system (1.2.9–14), we obtain the field equations in terms of the pair (Sij , qi ) (ρ−1 S(ik , k ), j) − Kijkl ˙ S¨kl + CS−1 Aij q˙k , k = −(ρ−1 b(i ), j) + CS−1 Aij r,

(CS−1 qk , k ), i − λij qˆ˙j + θ0 (CS−1 Apq S˙ pq ), i = (CS−1 r), i .

(1.2.17)

Comparing eqns (1.1.68) and (1.1.69) with eqns (1.2.15) and (1.2.17) we observe a formal similarity of these two sets of equations, whereby eqn (1.2.15) appears to introduce a “larger” modification than eqn (1.2.17) relative to eqns (1.1.68) and (1.1.69), respectively. 1.2.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) This balance law is associated with the systems (1.2.1–6) and (1.2.15). Operating with L on (1.2.1–5) and employing notation (1.2.16), we arrive at 10 îj = 1 (ˆ ui , j + u E ˆj , i ), 2 ¨ Sîj , j + ˆbi = ρu î ,

(1.2.19)

θ0 ηˆ˙ = −ˆ qi , i + rˆ,

(1.2.20)

ˆ ˆkl + Mij ϑ, Sîj = Cijkl E

(1.2.21)

ˆ îj + CE ϑ, θ0 ηˆ = −θ0 Mij E

(1.2.22)

qî = −kij ϑ, j .

(1.2.23)

(1.2.18)

Proceeding in a way analogous to that involving eqns (1.1.71–1.1.75) – that is, employing eqns (1.2.18), (1.2.19) and (1.2.21) – we obtain u ˆ˙ i Sîj nj da + ˆbi u ˆ˙ i dv 1 d = 2 dt

∂B

B

îj E ˆkl + ρu (Cijkl E ˆ˙ i u ˆ˙ i )dv + B

ˆ ˆ˙ ij ϑdv. Mij E

(1.2.24)

B

From eqns (1.2.20), (1.2.22) and (1.2.23) we next find ˙ ˆ˙ ij = −ˆ qi , i + rˆ, CE ϑˆ − θ0 Mij E

(1.2.25)

˙ ˆ˙ ij = (kij ϑ, j ), i + rˆ. CE ϑˆ − θ0 Mij E

(1.2.26)

and

10 To obtain eqns (1.2.18)–(1.2.22) we also use the hypothesis that the material functions in eqns (1.2.1)–(1.2.6) do not depend on time, and L commutes with the spatial partial derivatives.


15

Hence, ˆ ˆ ˆ˙ ij ϑˆ = CE ϑˆ˙ ϑˆ − (kij ϑ,j ), i ϑ − rˆϑ , Mij E θ0 θ0 θ0

(1.2.27)

or ˆ˙ ij ϑˆ = 1 ∂ (CE ϑˆ2 ) Mij E 2θ0 ∂t ˆ i t0 ∂ (kij ϑ, j ϑ), rˆϑˆ 1 (kij ϑ, i ϑ, j ) − − . + kij ϑ, i ϑ, j + θ0 2θ0 ∂t θ0 θ0

(1.2.28)

Integration of eqn (1.2.28) over B, and use of the divergence theorem, yields t0 d 1 d ˙ ˆ 2 ˆ ˆ Mij Eij ϑdv = CE ϑ dv + kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv 2θ0 dt 2θ0 dt B

B

1 + θ0

B

1 kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv − θ0

B

ˆ ij ϑ, j ni da − 1 ϑk θ0

(1.2.29)

ˆ rˆϑdv. B

∂B

Finally, combining eqn (1.2.24) with eqn (1.2.29), we arrive at  1 d 1 îj E ˆkl dv ρu ˆ˙ i u Cijkl E ˆ˙ i dv + dt  2 2 B

+

1 2θ0

CE ϑˆ2 dv + B

=

t0 2θ0

 

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv



B

u ˆ˙ i Sîj nj da +

∂B

B

B

1 u ˆ˙ iˆbi dv + θ0

+

1 θ0

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv

B

ˆ ij ϑ, j ni da + 1 ϑk θ0

∂B

(1.2.30)

ˆ rˆϑdv. B

In comparison with the analogous relation (1.1.79) of classical thermoelasticity, the relation (1.2.30) is the global balance law containing the thermoelastic energy of higher order in time. 11 1.2.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , qi ) This law is associated with eqns (1.2.17). Given the fact that eqns (1.2.17) constitute only a small modification of eqns (1.1.69), a global energy integral for eqns (1.2.17) is obtained by a small modification of the method leading to 11 The global displacement–temperature law (1.2.30) is obtained here for the first time. A particular form of eqn (1.2.30) related to a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body can be found in (Ignaczak, 1982).

16


the result (1.1.87). Proceeding in that way, we obtain the global balance law in terms of (Sij , qi ) for thermoelasticity with one relaxation time 12  1 1 d 1 −1 ˙ ˙ ρ Sik , k Sij , j dv + Kijkl Sij Skl dv + CS−1 (qk , k )2 dv dt  2 2 2θ0 B

B

+ =

t0 2θ0

λij q˙i q˙j dv B

B

  

+

1 θ0

λij q˙i q˙j dv

B

(1.2.31)

{(ρ−1 bi ), j S˙ ij − CS−1 Aij S˙ ij r˙ − θ0−1 (CS−1 r), i q˙i }dv

B

+

{ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij nj + CS−1 (Apq S˙ pq + θ0−1 qk , k )q˙i ni }da.

∂B

Although there exists a formal similarity between the local and global balance laws of classical thermoelasticity and thermoelasticity with one relaxation time, those laws describe qualitatively different processes so long as the relaxation time is positive. Indeed, one may show that the field equations (1.2.15) are of hyperbolic type – that is, they describe a thermoelastic disturbance propagating with finite speeds – in contradistinction to eqns (1.1.68). Remark 1.2 In an attempt to model ultrafast processes of thermoelasticity Tzou (1997) proposed a dual-phase-lag model (DPLM) of thermoelasticity in which the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation (1.2.6) is replaced by the relation ˙ j qi + τq q˙i = −kij (ϑ + τT ϑ),

(R1.2.1)

while eqns (1.2.1)–(1.2.5) remain the same; in eqn (R1.2.1) τq and τT stand for the heat flux and temperature gradient phase-lags, respectively, and τq ≥ 0, τT ≥ 0. Clearly, a DPLM covers the hyperbolic L–S model when τq = t0 > 0, and τT = 0. And, by letting kij = kδij , τT = τq ξ in eqn (R1.2.1), where k > 0 and 0 < ξ < 1; and, confining to a rigid body, a Jeffrey’s isotropic rigid heat conductor is obtained. Also, one can show that a DPLM, restricted to an isotropic rigid heat conductor, reduces to: (i) a hyperbolic heat conductor if τ = τq − τT > 0, (ii) a parabolic heat conductor if τ = τq − τT = 0, and (iii) an elliptic heat conductor if τ = τq − τT < 0. To show this, introduce the phase shift t ∗ = t + τT ,

(R1.2.2)

12 The global stress–heat-flux law (1.2.31) is obtained here for the first time. For a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body the law is obtained in (Ignaczak, 1979).


17

and for any function f = f (x, t∗ ) define the notations [x ∈ B, t∗ ≥ τT ] ∂ ˆ (R1.2.3) f = 1 + τ ∗ f, ∂t ∂ (R1.2.4) f˜ = 1 − τT ∗ f, ∂t where τ = τ q − τT .

(R1.2.5)

qi (x, t + τq ) = −kT, i (x, t + τT )

(R1.2.6)

qi (x, t∗ + τ ) = −kT, i (x, t∗ ),

(R1.2.7)

Cp T˙ (x, t) = −qi , i (x, t)

(R1.2.8)

Cp T˙ (x, t∗ − τT ) = −qi , i (x, t∗ − τT ).

(R1.2.9)

Then, the equation

takes the form

while the energy equation

is reduced to

Expanding equations (R1.2.7) and (R1.2.9) in the Taylor’s series in a neighborhood of τ ≈ 0 and τT ≈ 0, and using the notations (R1.2.3) and (R1.2.4) we obtain qî (x, t∗ ) = −kT, i (x, t∗ )

(R1.2.10)

−˜ qi , i (x, t∗ ) = Cp T˜˙(x, t∗ ).

(R1.2.11)

and

Applying the “hut” operator [see eqn (R1.2.3)] to (R1.2.11) we obtain ˜˙ −q˜ î , i (x, t∗ ) = Cp Tˆ(x, t∗ ).

(R1.2.12)

Also, applying the “div” operator to eqn (R1.2.10) and substituting the result into eqn (R1.2.12) we obtain ˜˙ k T˜, ii (x, t∗ ) = Cp Tˆ (x, t∗ ),

(R1.2.13)

or dividing by k and using the definition of “∼ ” operator [see eqn (R1.2.4)] we obtain ∂ 1 ∂ ∂ ∇2 T − 1 + τ T = 0, κ = k/Cp . 1 − τT ∗ (R1.2.14) ∂t κ ∂t∗ ∂t∗

18


In addition, for a model with a quiescent past for which T (x, τT ) = T˙ (x, τT ) = T¨(x, τT ) = 0 (· = ∂/∂t∗ )

(R1.2.14)

eqn (R1.2.14) is equivalent to ∇2 T −

1 ∂ κ ∂t∗

∂ 1 + τ ∗ T = 0. ∂t

(R1.2.14)

As a result, the following theorem holds true Theorem 1.1 In the time frame t∗ = t + τT (t ≥ 0) the temperature of a dualphase lag model with a quiescent past is governed by a hyperbolic equation if τ = τq − τT > 0, by an elliptic equation if τ = τq − τT < 0, and by a parabolic equation if τ = τq − τT = 0. Since a type of the equation is invariant with respect to a phase shift, the dual-phase lag model is hyperbolic, elliptic, and parabolic for τ > 0, τ < 0, and τ = 0, respectively. Finally, note that the case of τ < 0 describes an ultrafast phonon–electron interaction model on a microscale where the values of τT and τq are of the order of picoseconds to femtoseconds. For a gold film subjected to a short-pulse laser heating, according to Table 5.1 in (Tzou, 1997) we obtain: τT = 89.28 ps, τq = 0.74 ps and τ = −88.54 ps. At this point we shall move to the setup of another modification of classical thermoelasticity, which also eliminates the paradox of infinite speeds of propagation. This theory is based on a generalized dissipation inequality and introduces two relaxation times in the description of a thermoelastic process. Its foundations were given by Green and Lindsay (1972), 13 and, in the following, we shall refer to it as the G–L theory or a thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. 1.3 Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with two relaxation times 1.3.1 Basic considerations In the place of eqns (1.1.1–1.1.4) we now have the relations Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.3.1)


(1.3.2)

e˙ = Sij E˙ ij − qi , i + r, r qi ,i + , η˙ ≥ − φ φ

(1.3.3) (1.3.4)

13 See also (M¨ uller, 1971; Green and Laws, 1972; S ¸ uhubi, 1975; and Erbay and S ¸ uhubi, 1986).

Fundamentals of thermoelasticity with two relaxation times

19

where ˙ >0 φ = φ(θ, θ)

(1.3.5)

is a scalar function of two independent variables to be specified in the following. Clearly, the laws (1.3.1–3) are identical with eqns (1.1.1–1.1.3), whereas the inequality (1.3.4) reduces to eqn (1.1.4), providing φ is set equal to θ. In that sense, eqn (1.3.4) is a generalization of the classical dissipation inequality. Besides the foregoing, we introduce a generalized free energy ψ = e − ηφ,

(1.3.6)

˙ ψ˙ = e˙ − ηφ ˙ − η φ,

(1.3.7)

from which

and the relations (1.3.3–4), written in terms of functions φ and ψ, take the forms ψ˙ + ηφ ˙ + η φ˙ = Sij E˙ ij − qi , i + r,

(1.3.8)

ψ˙ + η φ˙ − Sij E˙ ij + qi φ, i φ−1 ≤ 0.

(1.3.9)

In comparison with the classical thermoelasticity, we also extend the domain of ψ by taking ˙ θ, i ). ψ = ψ(Eij , θ, θ,

(1.3.10)

∂ψ ˙ ∂ψ ¨ ∂ψ ˙ ∂ψ ˙ Eij + θ+ θ, k . ψ˙ = θ+ ˙ ∂Eij ∂θ ∂θ, ∂θ k

(1.3.11)

From this, we obtain

Moreover, the derivatives of φ are expressed as ∂φ ˙ ∂φ ¨ θ, θ+ φ˙ = ∂θ ∂ θ˙ ∂φ ∂φ ˙ θ, i + θ, i . φ, i = ∂θ ∂ θ˙

(1.3.12) (1.3.13)

Employing eqns (1.3.11–1.3.13) we can now reduce eqns (1.3.8) and (1.3.9) to the forms ∂φ ˙ ∂ψ ∂ψ ˙ +η θ − Sij Eij + ∂Eij ∂θ ∂θ (1.3.14) ∂ψ ∂φ ¨ ∂ψ ˙ + ˙ = −qi , i + r, +η θ+ θ, k + ηφ ∂θ, k ∂ θ˙ ∂ θ˙

20


and

∂φ ˙ ∂ψ ∂φ ¨ ∂ψ ∂ψ ˙ +η θ+ − Sij Eij + +η θ ∂Eij ∂θ ∂θ ∂ θ˙ ∂ θ˙ qk ∂φ ˙ qk ∂φ ∂ψ θ, k ≤ 0. + θ, k + + ∂θ, k φ ∂ θ˙ φ ∂θ

(1.3.15)

Let us now postulate the constitutive equations in the forms ∂ψ , ∂Eij −1 ∂ψ ∂φ η=− , ∂ θ˙ ∂ θ˙ −1 1 ∂φ ∂ψ , qk = − ∂θ, k φ ∂ θ˙ Sij =

and reduce eqns (1.3.14) and (1.3.15) to ∂φ ˙ ∂ψ ˙ ∂ψ +η θ+ ˙ = −qi , i + r, θ, k + ηφ ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ, k ∂ψ ∂φ ˙ qk ∂φ +η θ, k ≤ 0. θ+ ∂θ ∂θ φ ∂θ

(1.3.16) (1.3.17) (1.3.18)

(1.3.19) (1.3.20)

We will now prove that, for a linear thermoelastic body, relations (1.3.19) and (1.3.20) are satisfied, if 14 ˙ φ = θ0 + ϑ + t1 ϑ,

(1.3.21)

1 ˙ Cijkl Eij Ekl + Mij Eij (ϑ + t1 ϑ) 2 CE t1 CE 2 CE ϑ − t1 ϑϑ˙ − t0 t1 ϑ˙ 2 + kij ϑ, i ϑ, j , − 2θ0 θ0 2θ0 2θ0

(1.3.22)

ψ=

where t0 and t1 are parameters with dimension of time, satisfying the inequalities 15 t1 ≥ t0 > 0,

(1.3.23)

whereby the remaining symbols appearing in eqns (1.3.21) and (1.3.22) have the same meaning as in the classical thermoelasticity. Note that, as t1 → 0, φ → θ and ψ tends to the free energy of the classical thermoelastic body, recall eqn (1.1.15). Considering that ϑ = θ − θ0 ,

(1.3.24)

14 Functions (1.3.21) and (1.3.22) are restrictions of those proposed by Green and Lindsay (1972). 15 The relaxation time t in eqn (1.3.23) is, in general, different from that of Section 1.2. 0


21

and using eqns (1.3.21) and (1.3.22), we find that ∂φ = 1, ∂θ

∂φ = t1 , ∂ θ˙

CE ∂ψ ˙ = Mij Eij − (ϑ + t1 ϑ), ∂θ θ0 CE ∂ψ ˙ (ϑ + t0 ϑ)], = t1 [Mij Eij − ˙ θ0 ∂θ t1 ∂ψ = kki ϑ, i , ∂θ, k θ0 ∂ψ ˙ = Cijkl Ekl + Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ). ∂Eij

(1.3.25) (1.3.26) (1.3.27) (1.3.28) (1.3.29)

From the relations (1.3.16) and (1.3.29) we obtain ˙ Sij = Cijkl Ekl + Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ),

(1.3.30)

whereas, in view of eqns (1.3.17), (1.3.25)2 and (1.3.27), there is ˙ θ0 η = −θ0 Mij Eij + CE (ϑ + t0 ϑ).

(1.3.31)

Furthermore, eqns (1.3.18), (1.3.21), (1.3.25)2 and (1.3.28) lead to ˙ qk t1 = −(θ0 + ϑ + t1 ϑ)

t1 kki ϑ, i . θ0

(1.3.32)

˙ i may be neglected Since for a linear thermoelastic body the terms ϑϑ, i and ϑϑ, 16 relative to ϑ, i , the formula (1.3.32) results in qk = −kkj ϑ, j .

(1.3.33)

In order to demonstrate the validity of eqns (1.3.19) and (1.3.20), we now calculate the term ∂φ ∂ψ ∂ψ +η = + η. (1.3.34) ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ In view of eqns (1.3.26) and (1.3.31), we get ∂φ CE ∂ψ ˙ +η =− (t1 − t0 ) ϑ, ∂θ ∂θ θ0 from which

16

∂φ ∂ψ +η ∂θ ∂θ

CE θ˙ = − (t1 − t0 ) ϑ˙ 2 , θ0

(1.3.35)

(1.3.36)

Equation (1.3.33) represents the classical Fourier law of heat conduction [see eqn (1.1.20)].

22


so that the energy balance equation (1.3.19) may be written as −

t1 CE ˙ (t1 − t0 ) ϑ˙ 2 + kkj ϑ, j ϑ, θ0 θ0

k

˙ = −qi , i + r. + η(θ ˙ 0 + ϑ + t1 ϑ)

(1.3.37)

Neglecting on the left-hand side of the above all the terms proportional to ˙ k , ϑE˙ ij and ϑϑ˙ as small relative to those proportional to E˙ ij , ϑ˙ and ϑ˙ 2 , ϑ, j ϑ, ¨ ϑ, we find the following linear form of energy balance θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r.

(1.3.38)

In order to prove the validity of the dissipation inequality (1.3.20), we first note that 1 1 ∂φ ∼ , φ ∂θ θ0

(1.3.39)

which, together with eqn (1.3.33), leads to 1 qk ∂φ θ, k = − kij ϑ, i ϑ, j . φ ∂θ θ0

(1.3.40)

Adding eqn (1.3.36) and eqn (1.3.40) gives

∂ψ ∂φ +η ∂θ ∂θ

qk ∂φ CE 1 θ˙ + θ, k = − (t1 − t0 ) ϑ˙ 2 − kij ϑ, i ϑ, j . φ ∂θ θ0 θ0

(1.3.41)

Observe now that, the left-hand side of eqn (1.3.41) is identical with the lefthand side of inequality (1.3.20). Thus, noting eqn (1.3.23) and the inequalities postulated for CE , θ0 and kij in Section 1.1, the right-hand side of eqn (1.3.41) is non-positive. This then implies that the dissipation inequality (1.3.20) is satisfied. As a result, a linear thermoelastic body with two relaxation times can be defined as the one in which a thermoelastic process [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ] satisfies the field equations [see also eqns (1.3.1), (1.3.2), (1.3.30), (1.3.31), (1.3.33) and (1.3.38)] Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ) , 2

(1.3.42)


(1.3.43)

θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r,

(1.3.44)

˙ Sij = Cijkl Ekl + Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ),

(1.3.45)

˙ θ0 η = −θ0 Mij Eij + CE (ϑ + t0 ϑ),

(1.3.46)

qi = −kij ϑ, j .

(1.3.47)


23

The following is an alternative system of equations describing a thermoelastic body with two relaxation times Eij =

1 (ui , j + uj , i ), 2

(1.3.48)


(1.3.49)

θ0 η˙ = −qi , i + r,

(1.3.50)

˙ Eij = Kijkl Skl + Aij (ϑ + t1 ϑ),

(1.3.51)

˙ θ0 η = θ0 Apq Spq + CS (ϑ + t(0) ϑ),

(1.3.52)

ϑ, i = −λij qj ,

(1.3.53)

where t(0) is a reduced relaxation time, defined through t(0) =

CE CE t1 + 1− t0 , CS CS

(1.3.54)

and all the remaining symbols in eqns (1.3.48–1.3.53) have the same meaning as those in eqns (1.1.32–1.1.37). Given that CS ≥ CE > 0,

(1.3.55)

and that the inequality (1.3.23) is satisfied, we have t1 ≥ t(0) ≥

CE t1 > 0. 1− CS

(1.3.56)

Of course, in the case of an anisotropic inhomogeneous body, the scalars CS and CE are functions of position, and so t(0) is also a function of position. The system of functions [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ] satisfying either eqns (1.3.42–1.3.47) or eqns (1.3.48–1.3.53) on B × (0, ∞) will be called a thermoelastic process with two relaxation times. Upon elimination of Eij , Sij , η and qi from eqns (1.3.42–1.3.47), we obtain the system of field equations in terms of (ui , ϑ): ·· ˙ j = −bi , (Cijkl uk , l ), j − ρui + [Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)], ¨ + θ0 Mij u˙ i , j = −r. (kij ϑ, j ), i − CE (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

(1.3.57)

In order to obtain a description of a thermoelastic process with two relaxation times in terms of a pair (Sij , ϑ), we consider the system of eqns (1.3.48–1.3.53),

24


in which eqn (1.3.53) is replaced by the equivalent eqn (1.3.47). Eliminating the variables ui , Eij , η and qi , we arrive at (ρ−1 S(ik , k ), j) − Kijkl S¨kl + Aij L1 ϑ¨ = −(ρ−1 b(i ), j) , (kij ϑ, j ), i − CS L(0) ϑ˙ − θ0 Apq S˙ pq = −r,

(1.3.58)

where L1 = 1 + t1 ∂/∂t,

(1.3.59)

L(0) = 1 + t(0) ∂/∂t.

(1.3.60)

... Clearly, the tensorial eqn (1.3.58)1 contains ...ϑ . We will now show that the system (1.3.58) may be replaced by one without ϑ . To that end, let us differentiate eqn (1.3.58)2 with respect to time, so as to get ... −1 −1 ˙ j ), i − r· , (1.3.61) ϑ = −t(0) ϑ¨ + CS θ0 Apq S¨pq − (kij ϑ, and ... ¨ L1 ϑ¨ = ϑ¨ + t1 ϑ = −t−1 (0) (t1 − t0 ) ϑ −1 ˙ j ), i − r˙ . θ0 Apq S¨pq − (kij ϑ, −t1 t−1 (0) CS

(1.3.62)

Substituting eqn (1.3.62) into eqn (1.3.58)1 , we now find the following form of field equations in terms of (Sij , ϑ) 17 ˙ q ), p − t1 − t(0) ϑ] ¨ = −˜b(ij) , ijkl S¨kl − Aij t−1 [t1 C −1 (kpq ϑ, (ρ−1 S(ik , k ), j) − K S (0) ¨ − θ0 C −1 Apq S˙ pq = −C −1 r, CS−1 (kpq ϑ, q ), p − (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ) S S (1.3.63) where ijkl = Kijkl − t1 θ0 Aij Akl , K t(0) CS

(1.3.64)

˜b(ij) = (ρ−1 b(i ), j) − t1 r˙ Aij . t(0) CS

(1.3.65)

Since we are aiming at the formulation of initial-boundary value problems in the G–L theory, we shall now write down the global balance laws associated with the field equations (1.3.57) and (1.3.63).

17 A restriction of eqns (1.3.63) to a homogeneous isotropic body is obtained in (Ignaczak, 1978c).


25

1.3.2 Global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ) 18 Multiplying eqn (1.3.43) through by u˙ i , and integrating over B, as well as using eqns (1.3.42) and (1.3.45), we arrive at    1 d  1 ˙ ρu˙ i u˙ i dv + Cijkl Eij Ekl dv + Mij E˙ ij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)dv  dt  2 2 B B B (1.3.66) =

u˙ i Sij nj da +

u˙ i bi dv. B

∂B

Equations (1.3.44) and (1.3.46–47) imply that ·

˙ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij = (kij ϑ, j ) , i + r. CE (ϑ + t0 ϑ)

(1.3.67)

˙ we obtain Next, multiplying eqn (1.3.67) through by (ϑ + t0 ϑ), ·

·

˙ (ϑ + t0 ϑ) ˙ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij (ϑ + t0 ϑ) ˙ CE (ϑ + t0 ϑ)

(1.3.68)

˙ = [(kij ϑ,j ), i + r](ϑ + t0 ϑ), or CE ∂ ˙ 2 − θ0 Mij E˙ ij (ϑ + t1 ϑ) ˙ (ϑ + t0 ϑ) 2 ∂t ˙ +θ0 Mij E˙ ij (t1 − t0 )ϑ˙ = [(kij ϑ,j ), i + r] (ϑ + t0 ϑ).

(1.3.69) ·

On the other hand, multiplying eqn (1.3.67) through by (t1 − t0 )ϑ, we obtain ·

˙ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij (t1 − t0 )ϑ˙ CE (t1 − t0 )ϑ˙ (ϑ + t0 ϑ)

(1.3.70)

˙ = [(kij ϑ,j ), i + r] (t1 − t0 )ϑ. Now, adding eqn (1.3.69) to eqn (1.3.70), we find CE ∂ ˙ 2 + CE t0 (t1 − t0 ) ∂ ϑ˙ 2 (ϑ + t0 ϑ) 2 ∂t 2 ∂t 2 ˙ ˙ ˙ +(t1 − t0 )CE ϑ + kij ϑ, j (ϑ + t1 ϑ), i − θ0 Mij E˙ ij (ϑ + t0 ϑ)

(1.3.71)

˙ i + r(ϑ + t1 ϑ). ˙ = [kij ϑ, j (ϑ + t1 ϑ)],

18

The law in terms of (ui , ϑ) was obtained for the first time in (Green and Lindsay, 1972).

26


Integrating over B and using the divergence theorem, we convert this to 1 1 ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ Mij Eij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)dv = − (ϑ + t1 ϑ)ni kij ϑ, j da − (ϑ + t1 ϑ)rdv θ0 θ0 B

B

∂B

   1 d  ˙ 2 dv + t0 (t1 − t0 ) CE ϑ˙ 2 dv + t1 kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv + CE (ϑ + t1 ϑ)  2θ0 dt  B

+

t1 − t0 θ0

B

1 CE ϑ˙ 2 dv + θ0

B

B

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv. B

(1.3.72) Finally, by eliminating from eqns (1.3.66) and (1.3.72) the volume integral containing the tensor Mij , we obtain the following global balance law in terms of (ui , ϑ)  1 d 1 ρu˙ i u˙ i dv + Cijkl Eij Ekl dv dt  2 2 B

+

1 2θ0

˙ 2 + t0 (t1 − t0 ) ϑ˙ 2 ]dv + CE [(ϑ + t0 ϑ) B

+

=

u˙ i Sij nj da + ∂B

B

B

1 θ0

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv + B

1 u˙ i bi dv + θ0

t 1 − t0 θ0

t1 2θ0

 

kij ϑ, i ϑ, j dv

CE ϑ˙ 2 dv B

1 ˙ ni kij ϑ, j (ϑ + t1 ϑ)da + θ0

∂B



B

˙ (ϑ + t1 ϑ)rdv. B

(1.3.73) 1.3.3 Global balance law in terms of (Sij , ϑ) 19 This law represents the energy integral associated with the field equations (1.3.63). It will be derived assuming that t(0) does not depend on position. This hypothesis is satisfied either when the quotient CE /CS does not depend on position or when t1 = t0 ; in the latter case t(0) = t1 . Multiplying eqn (1.3.63)1 through by S˙ ij , we arrive at 1 ∂ 1 ∂ −1 ˙ q ), p ijkl S˙ ij S˙ kl + Aij S˙ ij t−1 t1 C −1 (kpq ϑ, ρ Sik , k Sij , j + K S (0) 2 ∂t 2 ∂t − t1 − t(0) ϑ¨ = bij S˙ ij + (ρ−1 Sik , k S˙ ij ), j . (1.3.74) 19 The law is presented here for the first time. A restriction of the law to a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body was obtained in (Bialy, 1983).


27

˙ s, Next, taking the gradient of eqn (1.3.63)2 and multiplying through by kis ϑ, we find ˙ s − (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ), ¨ i kis ϑ, ˙ s CS−1 (kpq ϑ, q ) , p − θ0 Apq S˙ pq , i kis ϑ, ˙ s. = −(CS−1 r), i kis ϑ,

(1.3.75)

Also, employing eqn (1.3.63)2 , we obtain ˙ s ), i − kis ϑ, ˙ i ϑ, ˙ s − t(0) kis ϑ, ¨ i ϑ, ˙ s −CS−1 (kpq ϑ, q ) , p − θ0 Apq S˙ pq (kis ϑ, ˙ s , i − (C −1 r), i kis ϑ, ˙ s. = − ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ¨ − CS−1 r kis ϑ, (1.3.76) S From this follows −1 −1 −1 ˙ ˙ t1 t−1 (0) CS Apq Spq (kis ϑ, s ), i = t1 t(0) θ0

1 ∂ −1 C [(kpq ϑ, q ), p ]2 2 ∂t S

1 ∂ ˙ ˙ ˙ i ϑ, ˙ s kis ϑ, i ϑ, s + kis ϑ, + t(0) 2 ∂t −1 −t1 t−1 (0) θ0

(1.3.77)

˙ s , i + (C −1 r), i kis ϑ, ˙ s . (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ¨ − CS−1 r)kis ϑ, S

Clearly, the left-hand side of eqn (1.3.77) is identical with the third term on the left-hand side of eqn (1.3.74). We shall now use eqn (1.3.63)2 to determine the fourth term on the left-hand side of eqn (1.3.74): multiplying eqn (1.3.63)2 ¨ we obtain by CS−1 ϑ, ¨ (kpq ϑ, q ), p ϑ¨ − θ0 Apq S˙ pq ϑ¨ − CS (ϑ˙ ϑ¨ + t(0) ϑ¨2 ) = rϑ.

(1.3.78)

Since ∂ ˙ q ), p ϑ˙ (kpq ϑ, q ) , p ϑ˙ − (kpq ϑ, (kpq ϑ, q ), p ϑ¨ = ∂t ∂ ˙ q ϑ), ˙ p + kpq ϑ, ˙ q ϑ, ˙ p, (kpq ϑ, q ) , p ϑ˙ − (kpq ϑ, = ∂t

(1.3.79)

in view of eqn (1.3.78), the fourth term on the left-hand side of eqn (1.3.74) becomes ∂ −1 −1 ¨ ˙ (kpq ϑ, q ) , p ϑ˙ −t−1 (t − t )A t (t − t ) S ϑ = −θ pq pq (0) (0) 0 (0) 1 (0) 1 ∂t (1.3.80) 2 ¨ ˙ ¨ ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ ¨ −(kpq ϑ, q ϑ), p + kpq ϑ, q ϑ, p + rϑ − CS (ϑϑ + t(0) ϑ ) .

28


Adding the sides of eqns (1.3.77) and (1.3.80), we obtain −1 ¨ ˙ Apq S˙ pq t−1 (0) t1 CS (kpq ϑ, q ), p − (t1 − t(0) )ϑ 1 ∂ = 2θ0 ∂t

2 t1 [(kpq ϑ, q ) , p ] ˙ i ϑ, ˙ s − 2 t1 − t(0) (kpq ϑ, q ) , p ϑ˙ + t1 kis ϑ, t(0) CS t(0)

t1 − t(0) ˙ 2 ϑ + CS t(0)

+

1 ˙ p ϑ, ˙ q + CS (t1 − t(0) )ϑ¨2 kpq ϑ, θ0 θ0

· 1 t1 − t(0) ¨ t1 t1 r 1 −1 ˙ ¨ ˙ kis ϑ, s , i . − (C r), i kis ϑ, s − ϑ + t1 ϑ − ϑ+ θ0 t(0) t(0) S θ0 t(0) CS (1.3.81) Now, since 2 t1 − t(0) ˙ 2 t1 t1 [(kpq ϑ, q ) , p ] −2 − 1 [(kpq ϑ, q ) , p ] ϑ˙ + CS ϑ t(0) CS t(0) t(0) (1.3.82) 2 2 t1 − t(0) (kpq ϑ, q ) , p [(k ϑ, ) , ] pq q p √ = − CS ϑ˙ + , t(0) CS CS the relation (1.3.81) may be written as −1 ¨ ˙ Apq S˙ pq t−1 (0) t1 CS (kij ϑ,j ),i − (t1 − t(0) )ϑ   2 1 ∂  t1 (kpq ϑ, q ), p √ = −1 − CS ϑ˙ 2θ0 ∂t  CS  t(0) 2

+

−

(kpq ϑ,q ),p CS

˙ p ϑ, ˙ q + t1 kpq ϑ,

    

+

1 ˙ p ϑ, ˙ q + CS t1 − t(0) ϑ¨2 kpq ϑ, θ0

t1 1 t1 − t(0) ¨ t1 r ˙ s − 1 ˙ s , i. ϑ˙ + t1 ϑ¨ − kis ϑ, rϑ + (CS−1 r), i kis ϑ, θ0 t(0) t(0) θ0 t(0) CS (1.3.83)

Finally, integrating eqn (1.3.74) and (1.3.83) over B, employing the divergence theorem, and eliminating from these equations the volume integral containing


29

the tensor Aij , we obtain the following global balance law in terms of (Sij , ϑ)  1 d 1 −1 ρ Sik , k Sij , j dv + Kijkl S˙ ij S˙ kl dv dt  2 2

+

1 2θ0

B

B

B

2

t1 − t(0) (kpq ϑ, q ) , p [(kpq ϑ, q ) , p ] ˙ p ϑ, ˙ q √ − CS ϑ˙ + + t1 kpq ϑ, t(0) CS CS 1 ˙ p ϑ, ˙ q + CS t1 − t(0) ϑ¨2 dv + kpq ϑ, θ0 B

−1

=

ρ

ni S˙ ij Sjk , k da +

∂B

1 + θ0

 

dv



t1 r˙ −1 ˙ Aij dv Sij (ρ b(i ), j) − t(0) CS

B

˙ s ϑ˙ + t1 ϑ¨ − t1 r da ni kis ϑ, t(0) CS

∂B

1 + θ0

2

t1 − t(0) t(0)

rϑ¨ +

t1 t(0)

r CS

˙ s dv. , i kis ϑ,

B

(1.3.84) Noting that t1 → 1 + 0 for t1 → t0 + 0, t(0)

(1.3.85)

one may then obtain the global law for a body in which t1 = t0 > 0, as well as for the special case of a classical thermoelastic body.

2 FORMULATIONS OF INITIAL-BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS

2.1 Conventional and non-conventional characterization of a thermoelastic process In Section 1.1, focused on the classical theory, we defined the thermoelastic process corresponding to a loading (bi , r) as a system of functions [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ] satisfying field equations (1.1.24–29) or (1.1.32–37). In Sections 1.2 and 1.3 we have similarly defined thermoelastic processes with relaxation times. It was noted there that, by eliminating four out of six field variables describing the process, one can write field equations in terms of various thermomechanical pairs such as (ui , ϑ) , (ui , qi ) , (Sij , ϑ), and (Sij , qi ). The thermomechanical pair created from the variables describing a given process will be called a pair corresponding to that process, provided all other field variables may be recovered from it. 1 For instance, a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying eqns (1.1.68) is such a pair because it generates fields Eij , Sij , ϑ and η, so that [ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ] is a classical thermoelastic process corresponding to the loading (bi , r). Clearly, the definition of a thermoelastic process introduced in Chapter 1 does not uniquely determine that process, because in the case of a specific bounded body B, this process depends not only on the body forces bi and heat sources r, but also on the initial thermomechanical load and the boundary thermomechanical load. It is common in the classical thermoelasticity (Carlson, 1972; Nowacki, 1975) to describe an initial state of the body in terms of a pair (ui , ϑ), assuming that the fields ui (·, 0) , u˙ i (·, 0) and ϑ (·, 0) are known at time t = 0. These assumptions are analogous to those appearing in classical (Newtonian) mechanics, in which the motion of a material particle is determined by its initial position and velocity, as well as in classical heat-conduction theory for a rigid conductor with an initial temperature. Also, in classical thermoelasticity it became an accepted practice to specify a boundary loading in terms of the pair (ui , ϑ). Thus, a thermoelastic process corresponding to the loading (bi , r), and the initial and boundary conditions in terms of the pair (ui , ϑ) will be called 1 The definition is an extension of that involving a pair corresponding to solution of a mixed conventional problem of classical thermoelasticity [see Theorem 1 on p. 355 in (Carlson, 1972); see p. 18 in (Nickell and Sackman, 1968)].

Conventional and non-conventional characterization

31

a conventional thermoelastic process, while the formulation of the associated initial-boundary value problem will be called a conventional description of a thermoelastic process. A thermoelastic process corresponding to the loading (bi , r), and the initial and boundary conditions not in terms of the pair (ui , ϑ) will be called a nonconventional thermoelastic process, while the formulation of the associated initialboundary value problem will be called a non-conventional description of a thermoelastic process. In classical thermoelasticity the conventional thermoelastic process may be described in terms of various pairs of thermomechanical variables. Most commonly, this is done with the help of (ui , ϑ), see page 335 in (Carlson, 1972). Its description in terms of (ui , qi ) and (Sij , ϑ) may be found in (Ie¸san, 1966), and in terms of (Sij , qi ) in (Nickell and Sackman, 1968). The non-conventional thermoelastic process remains so far little known even in the realm of classical thermoelasticity. The known cases involve some results for an associated initial-boundary value problem in terms of the pair describing the initial thermomechanical state of the body. However, the recovery from the pair of all other field variables remains an open problem. Also, alternative descriptions of this non-conventional process in terms of various thermomechanical pairs are unknown. In this chapter we shall formulate two conventional and two non-conventional initial-boundary value problems, corresponding to the global conservation laws of Sections 1.2 and 1.3, as well as analyze some relations among these formulations. 2.1.1 Two mixed initial-boundary value problems in the L–S theory In order to formulate an initial-boundary value problem, we divide the boundary ∂B into two parts in two different ways: ∂B = ∂B1 ∪ ∂B2 = ∂B3 ∪ ∂B4 ,

(2.1.1)

∂B1 ∩ ∂B2 = ∂B3 ∩ ∂B4 = ∅.

(2.1.2)

where

Mixed displacement–temperature problem in the L–S theory Find a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying the field equations 2 (Cijkl uk ,l ) ,j −ρ¨ ui + (Mij ϑ) ,j = −bi on B × [0, ∞), ˙ (kij ϑ,j ) ,i −CE ϑˆ + θ0 Mij u r ˆ˙ i ,j = −ˆ

(2.1.3)

the initial conditions ui (·, 0) = ui0 , u˙ i (·, 0) = u˙ i0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0 2

See eqns (1.2.15).

(2.1.4)

32

Formulations of initial-boundary value problems

and the boundary conditions ui = ui

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞), (Cijkl uk ,l +Mij ϑ) nj = si on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), ϑ = ϑ on ∂B3 × [0, ∞), −kij ϑ,j ni = q on ∂B4 × [0, ∞).

(2.1.5)

Here, (ui0 , u˙ i0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 ) and (ui , si , ϑ , q ) are prescribed functions determining the initial and boundary loadings of the body, respectively. Thus, the thermoelastic process corresponding to the problem (2.1.3–5) is caused by the thermomechanical loading represented by a system of functions (bi , r, ui0 , u˙ i0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 , ui , si , ϑ , q ).

(2.1.6)

One can show that a pair (ui , ϑ) that satisfies (2.1.3–5) corresponds to the conventional thermoelastic process defined in Section 1.2. Also, one can demonstrate that the problem (2.1.3–5) is associated with the global balance law (1.2.30). Mixed stress–heat-flux problem in the L–S theory Find a pair (Sij , qi ) satisfying the field equations 3 (ρ−1 S(ik ,k ),j) −Kijkl ˙ ij S¨kl + CS−1 Aij q˙k ,k = −(ρ−1 b(i ),j) +CS−1 rA −1 −1 −1 ˙ ˙ (C qk ,k ),i −λij qˆj + θ0 (C Apq Spq ),i = (C r),i S

(2.1.7)

on B,

(2.1.8)

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞), Sij nj = si on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), qk ,k +θ0 Apq S˙ pq = ϑ on ∂B3 × [0, ∞), on ∂B4 × [0, ∞). qi ni = q

(2.1.9)

S

S

on B × [0, ∞), the initial conditions (0)

(0)

Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (0)

qi (·, 0) = qi ,

(0)

q˙i (·, 0) = q˙i

and the boundary conditions Sik ,k = pi

(0) (0) (0) (0) Here, (Sij , S˙ ij , qi , q˙i ) and (pi , si , ϑ , q ) are prescribed functions determining the initial and boundary loadings of the body, respectively. Thus, the thermoelastic process corresponding to the problem (2.1.7–9) is caused by the thermomechanical loading represented by a system of functions (0) (0) (0) (0) (bi , r, Sij , S˙ ij , qi , q˙i , pi , si , ϑ , q ).

3

See eqns (1.2.17).

(2.1.10)

Conventional and non-conventional characterization

33

Given the non-conventional initial conditions (2.1.8) and boundary conditions (2.1.9)1 and (2.1.9)3 , this thermoelastic process is a non-conventional one. These conditions are dictated by the global conservation law (1.2.31) of Section 1.2. 2.1.2 Two mixed initial-boundary value problems in the G–L theory Mixed displacement–temperature problem in the G–L theory Find a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying the field equations 4 ˙ j = −bi (Cijkl uk ,l ),j −ρ¨ ui + [Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)], on B × [0, ∞), ¨ + θ0 Mij u˙ i ,j = −r (kij ϑ,j ),i −CE (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

(2.1.11)

the initial conditions ui (·, 0) = ui0 , u˙ i (·, 0) = u˙ i0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

(2.1.12)

and the boundary conditions ui = ui

on ˙ j = s on [Cijkl uk ,l +Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)]n i on ϑ = ϑ on −kij ϑ,j ni = q

∂B1 × [0, ∞), ∂B2 × [0, ∞), ∂B3 × [0, ∞), ∂B4 × [0, ∞).

(2.1.13)

Here, the external thermomechanical loading causing this thermoelastic process, in accordance with eqns (2.1.11–13), is represented by a system of functions (bi , r, ui0 , u˙ i0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 , ui , si , ϑ , q ).

(2.1.14)

One can show that a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying eqns (2.1.11–13) corresponds to a conventional thermoelastic process with two relaxation times. Also, the problem (2.1.11–13) is associated with the global balance law (1.3.73) of Section 1.3. Mixed stress–temperature problem in the G–L theory Find a pair (Sij , ϑ) satisfying the field equations 5 ¨ ˙ q ),p −(t1 − t(0) )ϑ] ijkl S¨kl − Aij t−1 [t1 C −1 (kpq ϑ, (ρ−1 S(ik ,k ),j) −K S (0) −1 = −[(ρ−1 b(i ),j) −t−1 ˙ ij ] (0) t1 CS rA ˙ ¨ (kpq ϑ,q ),p −CS (ϑ + t(0) ϑ) − θ0 Apq S˙ pq = −r

on B × [0, ∞), (2.1.15)

the initial conditions (0) (0) Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij on B, ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0 4 5

See eqns (1.3.57). See eqns (1.3.63).

(2.1.16)

34


and the boundary conditions Sik ,k = pi

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞), on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), Sij nj = ϑ=ϑ on ∂B3 × [0, ∞), −kij ϑ,j ni = q on ∂B4 × [0, ∞). si

(2.1.17)

Here, the external thermomechanical loading causing this thermoelastic process, in accordance with eqns (2.1.15–17), is represented by a system of functions (0) (0) (bi , r, Sij , S˙ ij , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 , pi , si , ϑ , q ).

(2.1.18)

We note that this process also belongs to non-conventional processes – this is due to the non-conventional initial conditions (2.1.16)1 and the boundary condition (2.1.17)1 . The latter has no physical interpretation if not referred to a displacement vector. Furthermore, we observe that the problem described by eqns (2.1.15–17) is associated with the global balance law (1.3.84) of Section 1.3. The formulated four mixed initial-boundary value problems contain as special cases the so-called natural problems. If the mixed displacement–temperature problem is denoted by MDTP, the following terminology is introduced:

r A natural displacement–temperature problem (NDTP) in the L–S or G–L theory is defined as a limiting case of MDTP when ∂B2 = ∂B4 = ∅.

r A natural stress–heat flux problem (NSHFP) in the L–S theory is defined as a limiting case of MSHFP when ∂B1 = ∂B3 = ∅.

r A natural stress–temperature problem (NSTP) in the G–L theory is defined as a limiting case of MSTP when ∂B1 = ∂B4 = ∅. Clearly, in the case of NSHFP in the L–S theory, as well as in the case of NSTP in the G–L theory, the thermomechanical loading possesses a natural physical interpretation, even though the initial data are non-conventional. 2.2 Relations among descriptions of a thermoelastic process in terms of various pairs of thermomechanical variables Proceeding similarly as in the case of classical thermoelasticity (e.g. Nickell and Sackman, 1968; Ie¸san, 1966), one can prove the following theorem: Theorem 2.1 A conventional thermoelastic process in the L–S as well as G–L theory, described in terms of (ui , ϑ) through eqns (2.1.3–5) and (2.1.11–13), respectively, may also be described in terms of the pairs (Sij , ϑ) , (Sij , qi ), or (ui , qi ); each of these alternative descriptions contains data that are uniquely determined by those of the conventional process.

Relations among descriptions of a thermoelastic process

35

An analogous theorem for a non-conventional process is not known as yet. Note here that a non-conventional process is associated with the initial-boundary value problem for the pair of variables that belongs to a certain vector space of a higher dimension than that of the conventional process. 6 For example, a process associated with NSHFP in the L–S theory is consistent with the pair (Sij , qi ) that belongs to a vector space of dimension 9, whereas a process associated with NSTP in the G–L theory is consistent with the pair (Sij , ϑ) that belongs to a vector space of dimension 7. Furthermore, a non-conventional thermoelastic process is generated by a thermomechanical loading that is more general than that generating a conventional process. With reference to the four mixed initial-boundary value problems of Section 2.1, we have these two theorems: Theorem 2.2 MSHFP in the L–S theory is more general than MDTP in that theory, i.e. M DT P ⊆ M SHF P . Theorem 2.3 MSTP in the G–L theory is more general than MDTP in that theory, i.e. M DT P ⊆ M ST P . A proof of these theorems is based on the two observations: (i) the thermomechanical loading in MSHFP (or MSTP) is more general than that in MDTP; (ii) there is equivalence of the two problems in the case of a particular loading in MSHFP (or MSTP). Observation (i) follows from the fact that the thermomechanical loading in MDTP in both theories belongs to a vector space of dimension 20, whereas the thermomechanical loading in a MSHFP of the L–S theory belongs to a vector space of dimension 30, and the thermomechanical loading in a MSTP of the G–L theory belongs to a vector space of dimension 26. In order to justify the second observation, we first show that a MSHFP, for an appropriately restricted thermomechanical loading of the L–S theory, is equivalent to a MDTP of that theory. To this end, we multiply the field equations (2.1.7) by t in the sense of convolution to include the initial conditions (2.1.8). Next, restricting the non-conventional initial and boundary conditions7 to those that appear in a MSHFP equivalent to a MDTP of the L–S theory, we conclude that MSHFP = MDTP. 6

A set of all pairs (ui , ϑ) can be identified with a vector space of dimension 4. The non-conventional initial and boundary conditions are defined by eqns (2.1.8), (2.1.9) 1 and (2.1.9)3 . The initial conditions (2.1.8) are replaced by those consistent with eqns (2.1.4) and (1.2.1)–(1.2.6) at t = 0. The boundary conditions (2.1.9)1 and (2.1.9)3 are replaced by those equivalent to eqns (2.1.5)1 and (2.1.5)3 . And to define the displacement and temperature in terms of (Sij , qi ) we use eqns (1.2.1)–(1.2.6). 7

36


The proof that a MSTP for a thermomechanical loading in the G–L theory is equivalent to a MDTP in that theory is completely analogous. This completes the proof of Theorems 2.2 and 2.3. On this basis we formulate: Corollary 2.1 Each non-conventional thermoelastic process in the L–S (or G–L) theory is more universal than the conventional thermoelastic process in the L–S (or G–L) theory. Corollary 2.2 Each natural non-conventional thermoelastic process in the L–S (or G–L) theory, restricted to a pair of thermomechanical variables that describe it, possesses an equally good physical interpretation as that of a conventional thermoelastic process in the L–S (or G–L) theory.

3 EXISTENCE AND UNIQUENESS THEOREMS

3.1 Uniqueness theorems for conventional and non-conventional thermoelastic processes We now state four uniqueness theorems corresponding to the four mixed initialboundary value problems of Chapter 2. Theorem 3.1

MDTP in the L–S theory has at the most one solution.

Proof. MDTP in the L–S theory is described by eqns (2.1.3–5) of Section 2.1. Now, assume there exist two solutions of this problem. Their difference (ui , ϑ) corresponds to the null initial conditions ui (·, 0) = 0, u˙ i (·, 0) = 0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = 0, ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0

(3.1.1)

the null boundary conditions ui = 0 on ∂B1 × [0, ∞), Sij nj = 0 on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), ϑ = 0 on ∂B3 × [0, ∞), −kij ϑ,j ni = 0 on ∂B4 × [0, ∞),

(3.1.2)

and the null body force and heat source fields bi = 0, r = 0 on B × [0, ∞).

(3.1.3)

It follows from eqns (1.2.1), (1.2.2) and (1.2.4), taken for the difference of solutions and for t = 0 that ! u ï (·, 0) = ρ−1 Cijkl u(k,l) + Mij ϑ ,j (·, 0) on B,

(3.1.4)

38

Existence and uniqueness theorems

so that, in view of the definition of the hut operator (recall eqn (1.2.16)) and conditions (3.1.1–4), ˆ˙ i (·, 0) = 0 u î (·, 0) = 0, u on B, ϑ (·, 0) = 0, ϑˆ (·, 0) = 0

(3.1.5)

u ˆ˙ i = 0 on ∂B1 × [0, ∞), Sîj nj = 0 on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), ϑˆ = 0 on ∂B3 × [0, ∞),

(3.1.6)

−kij ϑ,j ni = 0 on ∂B4 × [0, ∞), and ˆbi = 0, rˆ = 0 on B × [0, ∞).

(3.1.7)

Given eqns (3.1.6) and (3.1.7), the global conservation law (1.2.30), associated with MDTP of Section 2.1 and applied to the difference (ui , ϑ), takes on the form    1 1 t d 1 0 ρu ˆ˙ i u Cijkl u î ,j u ˆk ,l dv + CE ϑˆ2 dv + kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv ˆ˙ i dv +  dt  2 2 2θ0 2θ0 B B B B 1 + kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv = 0. θ0 (3.1.8) B Now, integrating over time, and using conditions (3.1.5), we find 1 1 1 t0 2 ˙ ˙ ˆ ρu î u Cijkl u î ,j u ˆk ,l dv + CE ϑ dv + kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv î dv + 2 2 2θ0 2θ0 B B B B 1 t kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dvdτ = 0. + θ0 0 (3.1.9) B Since ρ > 0, CE > 0 on B,

(3.1.10)

θ0 > 0, t0 > 0 on B,

(3.1.11)

¯ × [0, ∞), Cijkl Eij Ekl > 0 ∀Eij = E(ij) on B

(3.1.12)

¯ × [0, ∞), kij ti tj > 0 ∀ti on B

(3.1.13)

each integral appearing on the left-hand side of eqn (3.1.9) is non-negative. Thus, in view of eqns (3.1.9–13), we get ¯ × [0, ∞), u ˆ˙ i = 0, ϑˆ = 0 on B

(3.1.14)

Uniqueness theorems

39

or, on the basis of eqn (3.1.5), ¯ × [0, ∞). u î = 0, ϑ = 0 on B

(3.1.15)

Thus, using eqn (3.1.1), we arrive at ¯ × [0, ∞), (ui , ϑ) = (0, 0) on B

(3.1.16)

which completes the proof of Theorem 3.1. 1

Prior to formulating a uniqueness theorem for MSHFP in the L–S theory, in the place of constitutive inequalities (3.1.10–13), we assume 2 ρ−1 > 0, CS−1 > 0 on B,

(3.1.17)

θ0 > 0, t0 > 0,

(3.1.18)

Sij Skl Kijkl

¯ × [0, ∞), > 0 ∀Sij = S(ij) on B

¯ × [0, ∞). λij ti tj > 0 ∀ti on B

(3.1.19) (3.1.20)

Observe that the inequalities (3.1.17–20) are an alternative to eqns (3.1.10–13). Theorem 3.2

MSHFP in the L–S theory has at the most one solution.

Proof. MSHFP in the L–S theory is described by eqns (2.1.7–9) of Section 2.1. Now, assume there exist two solutions of this problem. Their difference (Sij , qi ) corresponds to the null initial data Sij (·, 0) = 0, S˙ ij (·, 0) = 0 on qi (·, 0) = 0, q˙i (·, 0) = 0

B,

(3.1.21)

the null boundary conditions Sik ,k = 0 on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), Sij nj = 0 on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), qk ,k +θ0 Apq S˙ pq = 0 on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(3.1.22)

qi ni = 0 on ∂B4 × (0, ∞), and bi = 0, r = 0 on B × (0, ∞).

(3.1.23)

On the basis of eqns (3.1.22) and (3.1.23), the global conservation law (1.2.31), associated with the MSHFP described by eqns (2.1.7–9) of Section 2.1, applied 1 Theorem 3.1 is proved here for the first time. The proof is similar to that of a homogeneous isotropic thermoelasticity with one relaxation time presented in (Ignaczak, 1982). 2 In the second part of this chapter we show that the hypothesis (3.1.19) restricted to a homogeneous isotropic thermoelasticity is implied by the inequalities (1.1.67).

40


to the difference (Sij , qi ) takes the form  1 d 1 S˙ ij S˙ kl dv ρ−1 Sik ,k Sij ,j dv + Kijkl dt  2 2 B

+

1 2θ0

B

CS−1 (qk ,k )2 dv +

t0 2θ0

 

B

λij q˙i q˙j dv



+

1 θ0

B

(3.1.24)

λij q˙i q˙j dv = 0. B

Henceforth, integrating eqn (3.1.24) over the time interval (0, t) and using eqns (3.1.21), we obtain 1 1 −1 ρ Sik ,k Sij ,j dv + Kijkl S˙ ij S˙ kl dv 2 2 1 + 2θ0

B

CS−1

B

t0 (qk ,k ) dv + 2θ0

2

B

1 λij q˙i q˙j dv + θ0

B

t

(3.1.25) λij q˙i q˙j dvdτ = 0.

0

B

The last relation and the inequalities (3.1.17–20) imply that ¯ × [0, ∞). S˙ ij = 0, q˙i = 0 on B

(3.1.26)

Thus, using eqns (3.1.21), we arrive at ¯ × [0, ∞), (Sij , qi ) = (0, 0) on B

(3.1.27)


The next two uniqueness theorems pertain to thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. Theorem 3.3

MDTP in the G–L theory has at the most one solution.

Proof. This problem is described by eqns (2.1.11–13). Let us assume there exist two solutions of this problem. Their difference (ui , ϑ) corresponds to the null data ui (·, 0) = 0, u˙ i (·, 0) = 0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = 0, ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0 ui = 0 on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), Sij nj = 0 on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), ϑ = 0 on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(3.1.28)

(3.1.29)

−kij ϑ,j ni = 0 on ∂B4 × (0, ∞), 3 Theorem 3.2, restricted to an isotropic thermoelastic body with one relaxation time, was proved in (Ignaczak, 1979).

Uniqueness theorems

41

and ¯ × [0, ∞). bi = 0, r = 0 on B

(3.1.30)

On the basis of eqns (3.1.29) and (3.1.30), the global conservation law (1.3.73), associated with the problem at hand, and applied to the difference (ui , ϑ) takes the form  1 d 1 ρu˙ i u˙ i dv + Cijkl ui ,j uk ,l dv dt  2 2 B B   t 1 (3.1.31) ˙ 2 + t0 (t1 − t0 )ϑ˙ 2 ]dv + 1 kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv CE [(ϑ + t0 ϑ) +  2θ0 2θ0 B B 1 t 1 − t0 + kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv + CE ϑ˙ 2 dv = 0. θ0 θ0 B

B

Henceforth, integrating this equation over the time interval (0, t) and using eqns (3.1.28), we obtain 1 1 ρu˙ i u˙ i dv + Cijkl ui ,j uk ,l dv 2 2 B B t1 1 2 2 ˙ ˙ CE [(ϑ + t0 ϑ) + t0 (t1 − t0 ) ϑ ]dv + kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dv + (3.1.32) 2θ0 2θ0 B B t t t1 − t0 1 kij ϑ,i ϑ,j dτ dv + CE ϑ˙ 2 dτ dv = 0. + θ0 θ 0 0 0 B

B

The left-hand side of eqn (3.1.32) represents the total energy of the thermoelastic body with two relaxation times, expressed in terms of the pair (ui , ϑ). Since ρ > 0, CE > 0 on B,

(3.1.33)

θ0 > 0, t1 > t0 > 0 on B,

(3.1.34)

¯ × [0, ∞), Cijkl Eij Ekl > 0 ∀Eij = E(ij) on B

(3.1.35)

¯ × [0, ∞), kij pi pj > 0 ∀pi on B

(3.1.36)

each term appearing on the left-hand side of eqn (3.1.32) is non-negative. Thus, we conclude that ¯ × [0, ∞). u˙ i = 0, ϑ˙ = 0 on B

(3.1.37)

Relations (3.1.37) and (3.1.28) imply ¯ × [0, ∞), (ui , ϑ) = (0, 0) on B which completes the proof of Theorem 3.3.

(3.1.38)

42

Theorem 3.4


MSTP in the G–L theory has at the most one solution.

Proof. MSTP is described by eqns (2.1.15–17). Similar to what was done in the proofs of Theorems 3.1–3.3, let us assume there exist two solutions of this problem. Their difference (Sij , ϑ) corresponds to the null data Sij (·, 0) = 0, S˙ ij (·, 0) = 0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = 0, ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0 Sik,k = 0 on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), Sij nj = 0 on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), ϑ = 0 on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(3.1.39)

(3.1.40)

−kij ϑ,j ni = 0 on ∂B4 × (0, ∞), and ¯ × [0, ∞). bi = 0, r = 0 on B

(3.1.41)

On the basis of eqns (3.1.40 and 3.1.41), the global conservation law (1.3.84), associated with the problem at hand, and applied to the difference (Sij , ϑ) takes the form  1 d 1 −1 Kijkl S˙ ij S˙ kl dv ρ Sik ,k Sij ,j dv + dt  2 2 B B  2  2 t1 (kpq ϑ,q ) ,p [(k ϑ, ), ] 1 pq q p ˙ i ϑ, ˙ j dv √ −1 − CS ϑ˙ + + t1 kij ϑ, +  2θ0 t(0) CS CS B 1 ˙ i ϑ, ˙ j +CS (t1 − t(0) )ϑ¨2 dv = 0. kij ϑ, + θ0 B

(3.1.42) Henceforth, integrating eqn (3.1.42) over the time interval (0, t) and using eqns (3.1.39), we obtain 1 1 ρ−1 Sik ,k Sij ,j dv + Kijkl S˙ ij S˙ kl dv 2 2 B 2B 2 t1 1 (kpq ϑ,q ),p [(k ϑ, ), ] pq q p ˙ i ϑ, ˙ j dv √ + −1 − CS ϑ˙ + + t1 kij ϑ, 2θ0 t(0) CS CS B t 1 ˙ p ϑ, ˙ q +CS t1 − t(0) ϑ¨2 dτ dv = 0. kpq ϑ, + θ0 0 B

(3.1.43)

Existence theorem for a non-conventional thermoelastic process

43

The left-hand side of eqn (3.1.43) represents the total energy of the thermoelastic body with two relaxation times, expressed in terms of the pair (Sij , ϑ). Because 4 ρ−1 > 0, CS−1 > 0 on B,

(3.1.44)

θ0 > 0, t1 > t(0) > 0 on B,

(3.1.45)

ijkl Sij Skl > 0 ∀Sij = S(ij) on B ¯ × [0, ∞), K

(3.1.46)

¯ × [0, ∞), kij pi pj > 0 ∀pi on B

(3.1.47)

each term appearing on the left-hand side of eqn (3.1.43) is non-negative, so that ¯ × [0, ∞). S˙ ij = 0, ϑ˙ = 0 on B

(3.1.48)

These relations together with eqns (3.1.39) imply ¯ × [0, ∞), (Sij , ϑ) = (0, 0) on B

(3.1.49)


3.2 Existence theorem for a non-conventional thermoelastic process In this section we formulate and prove an existence theorem for a generalized solution to NSHFP of Section 2.1 under the following hypotheses: (i) there is a classical solution of the problem; (ii) the body is homogeneous and isotropic; and (iii) the thermomechanical boundary loading vanishes. In the classical formulation this problem hinges on finding a pair (Sij , qi ) satisfying the field equations 6 1 ¨ λ α 2 θ0 ¨ Sij − S¨kk δij − ρ−1 S(ik ,kj) − Skk δij 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS α on B × [0, ∞), (3.2.1) + q˙k ,k δij = −F(ij) CS 1 1 (qk ,k +αθ0 S˙ kk ),i − (q˙i + t0 qï ) = −gi CS k 4 The inequality (3.1.45) is equivalent to eqn (1.3.56). The inequality (3.1.46), restricted 2 to an isotropic thermoelastic body, is implied by the conventional constitutive inequalities of the G–L theory. 5 For a particular natural stress–temperature problem of homogeneous isotropic thermoelasticity with two relaxation times, Theorem 3.4 was proved in (Ignaczak, 1978). Theorem 3.4 in the general form is formulated here for the first time. Other uniqueness theorems of the L–S and G–L theories can be found in (Wojnar, 1984, 1985a, 1985b, 1985c; Chandrasekharaiah, 1984). 6 See eqns (2.1.7–9) in which ∂B = ∂B = ∅, s = 0, q = 0, A = αδ , λ = k −1 δ , 1 3 ij ij ij ij i Skl = Kijkl

1 2µ

Sij −

and the material functions are constant.

λ Skk δij 3λ + 2µ

−

α2 θ0 Skk δij , CS

44


the initial conditions (0) (0) Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (0)

qi (·, 0) = qi ,

(0)

on B,

(3.2.2)

q˙i (·, 0) = q˙i

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = 0 on ∂B × (0, ∞), qi ni = 0 on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(3.2.3)

Here, F(ij) = ρ−1 b(i ,j) −CS−1 αrδ ˙ ij gi = −CS−1 r,i

on B × [0, ∞).

(3.2.4)

CS = CE + 3 (3λ + 2µ) α2 θ0 The material constants appearing in eqns (3.2.1) satisfy the inequalities ρ > 0, CE > 0, t0 > 0, θ0 > 0, µ > 0, 3λ + 2µ > 0, k > 0,

(3.2.5)

|α| > 0.

Observe that the inequalities (3.2.5) jointly imply the inequality 7 1 λ α 2 θ0 Sij − Skk δij − Skk δij Sij 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS 1 1 1 ∀Sij on B × [0, ∞). Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij = 2µ 3 3 +

(3.2.6)

1 CE 2 S ≥0 3 (3λ + 2µ) CS kk

For further convenience we transform eqns (3.2.1–4) to a non-dimensional form. Thus, let x0 , ρ0 , µ0 , and θ0 denote, respectively, the units of length, density, stress, and temperature. Next, introduce the notations t0

1

−1

r0

b 0 = µ0 x−1 0 ,

−1

= x0 ρ02 µ0 2 , q 0 = µ0 x0 t 0 ,

C S0 = µ0 θ0−1 ,

−1

= µ0 t 0 ,

(3.2.7)

−1

k 0 = x20 C S0 t 0 .

7 The inequality (3.2.6) can also be written in the form K ¯ ijkl Sij Skl ≥ 0 ∀Sij on B × [0, ∞), that is equivalent to the inequality (3.1.19).


45

Clearly, the parameters t 0 , q 0 , b 0 , r 0 , C S0 , and k 0 have, respectively, the dimensions of time, heat flux, body force, heat source, specific heat, and thermal conductivity. Assuming those parameters as reference units for respective quantities appearing in eqns (3.2.1–4), and keeping the same notations as in eqns (3.2.1–4), we pass to the following non-dimensional form of that problem 8 1 ¨ λ α2 ¨ α Sij − S¨kk δij − ρ−1 S(ik ,kj) − q˙k ,k δij = −F(ij) Skk δij + 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS CS 1 1 (qk ,k +αS˙ kk ),i − (q˙i + t0 qï ) = −gi CS k

on B × [0, ∞), (3.2.8)

(0) (0) Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (0)

qi (·, 0) = qi ,

(0)

on B,

(3.2.9)

q˙i (·, 0) = q˙i

Sij nj = 0, qi ni = 0 on ∂B × (0, ∞),

(3.2.10)

where F(ij) = ρ−1 b(i ,j) −CS−1 αrδ ˙ ij gi = −CS−1 r,i CS = CE + 3 (3λ + 2µ) α2

¯ × [0, ∞). on B

(3.2.11)

In the following, we restrict a domain of the pair (Sij , qi ) to the Cartesian product ¯ × [0, T ], where T is a non-dimensional finite time. Let L2 (t) , t ∈ [0, T ], denote B ¯ × [0, T ], a linear space of the dimensionless pairs p = U(ij) , vi defined over B 9 whose norm is 12 (3.2.12) pL (t) = (Uij Uij + vi vi ) dv ∀t ∈ [0, T ] . 2

B

Let E2 (t) denote a linear space of the dimensionless pairs p = U(ij) , vi defined ¯ × [0, T ], whose norm is over B   [Uij Uij + vi vi + ρ−1 Uik ,k Uij ,j pE2 (t) =  B 1 1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ CE ˙ 2 ˙ ˙ Uij − Ukk δij Uij − Ukk δij + + U ∀t ∈ [0, T ]. 2µ 3 3 3(3λ + 2µ) CS kk 1/2  1 t0 2 t 2 + (vk ,k ) + v˙ i v˙ i + v˙ i v˙ i dτ ]dv  CS k k 0 (3.2.13) 8 Equations (3.2.8–11) are obtained formally by letting θ = 1 in eqns (3.2.1–4). The 0 coefficient α in eqns (3.2.8–11) is equal to αθ0 . 9 In the following we write p = (U , v ) since U = U ij i ij (ij) .

46


Thus, L2 (t) and E2 (t) are Banach spaces parameterized by t ∈ [0, T ], whereby the time differentiation and integration in eqn (3.2.13) is understood in a classical sense, whereas the spatial differentiation is understood in a generalized sense. One can show that if E (t) denotes the total thermoelastic energy of B at time t associated with eqns (3.2.8–11) and p = (Sij , qi ), then E (t) =

1 1 2 2 pE2 (t) − pL2 (t) . 2 2

(3.2.14)

We now introduce the notations

(n)

p1 = (F(ij) , gi ), (0)

(0)

(n)

(n)

(n)

(n)

p(n) = (Sij , qi ),

p = (Sij , qi ),

p1

= (F(ij) , gi ),

(n)

= (Sij

(n)

= (S˙ ij

p0 = (Sij , qi ),

p0

(0) (0) p˙0 = (S˙ ij , q˙i ),

p˙0

(0)(n)

, qi

(0)(n)

, q˙i

(3.2.15)

(0)(n)

),

(0)(n)

),

where the pairs p, p1 , p0 and p˙0 are constructed from the tensor and vector (n) (n) fields appearing in the problem (3.2.8–11), while the pairs p(n) , p1 , p0 and (n) p˙0 are constructed from the analogous tensor and vector fields for n = 1, 2, 3, . . . In the following, we identify a thermoelastic process associated with the problem (3.2.8–11) with a pair (Sij , qi ). Definition 3.1 A thermoelastic process p corresponding to the thermomechanical loading (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ) and satisfying eqns (3.2.8–3.2.11) pointwise will be called a classical one. Definition 3.2 A thermoelastic process p corresponding to the thermoelastic loading (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ) will be called a generalized one provided it is a limit in E2 (t) of a sequence of classical processes p(n) (n = 1, 2, 3, . . .) corresponding to the (n) (n) (n) thermomechanical loading (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ) such that (n)

lim p1 − p1 L2 (t) = 0

n→∞

∀t ∈ [0, T ] ,

lim p(n) − pE2 (0) = 0.

n→∞

(3.2.16) (3.2.17)

Clearly, the generalized thermoelastic process corresponds to a situation in which the thermomechanical loading is generally discontinuous (nondifferentiable in a classical sense) on certain surfaces within the domain B × [0, T ]. Theorem 3.5 (On a continuous dependence of a classical thermoelastic process on the thermomechanical loading) 10 If p(1) is a classical thermoelastic process (1) (1) (1) corresponding to a thermomechanical loading (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ) and p(2) is another 10

See (Bem, 1982).


47

classical thermoelastic process corresponding to a thermomechanical loading (2) (2) (2) (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ), and if p(1) − p(2) E2 (0) ≤ 1 , (1) p1

−

(2) p1 L2 (t)

≤ 2

∀t ∈ [0, T ] ,

(3.2.18) (3.2.19)

where 1 and 2 are small positive numbers, then p(1) − p(2) E2 (t) ≤

∀t ∈ [0, T ] ,

(3.2.20)

where is a small positive number. Proof. Let p = (Sij , qi ) be a classical thermoelastic process corresponding to the thermomechanical loading (p1 , p0 , p˙0 ). On the basis of eqn (1.2.31), specialized to eqns (3.2.8–11), we obtain d E (t) = (Fij S˙ ij + gi q˙i )dv, (3.2.21) dt B

where E (t) is the total thermoelastic energy associated with p at time t. On the other hand, differentiating eqn (3.2.14) with respect to time, we obtain 1 d 1 d d E (t) = p2E2 (t) − p2L2 (t) . dt 2 dt 2 dt

(3.2.22)

Using the formula (3.2.12) with p = (Sij , qi ), on the basis of eqns (3.2.21) and (3.2.22), we obtain d p2E2 (t) = 2 (Fij S˙ ij + gi q˙i + Sij S˙ ij + qi q˙i )dv. (3.2.23) dt B

From this, with the inequalities 2Uij Vij ≤ Uij Uij + Vij Vij ∀ Uij , Vij , ∀ pi , qi , 2pi qi ≤ pi pi + qi qi

(3.2.24)

we arrive at the estimate d p2E2 (t) ≤ p2L2 (t) + 2p ˙ 2L2 (t) + p1 2L2 (t) , dt

(3.2.25)

p˙ = (S˙ ij , q˙i ).

(3.2.26)

where

Since S˙ ij S˙ ij ≤ a

1 2µ

1 1 CE ˙ 2 1 S˙ ij − S˙ kk δij S˙ ij − S˙ kk δij + Sij , 3 3 3 (3λ + 2µ) CS (3.2.27)

48


where

CE a = max 2µ, (3λ + 2µ) CS and

q˙i q˙i dv ≤

,

k p2E2 (t) , t0

(3.2.28)

(3.2.29)

B

therefore, in view of eqn (3.2.25), we get

where

d p2E2 (t) − mp2E2 (t) ≤ p1 2L2 (t) , dt

(3.2.30)

m = 2 1 + a + kt−1 . 0

(3.2.31)

Integrating the inequality (3.2.30) over (0, t), we obtain t p2E2 (t) ≤ emt p2E2 (0) + em(t−τ ) p1 2L2 (τ ) dτ.

(3.2.32)

0

From the definition of processes p(1) and p(2) appearing in Theorem 3.5, it follows (1) (2) (1) that p(1) − p(2) is a process corresponding to the loading (p1 − p1 , p0 − (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) p0 , p˙0 − p˙ 0 ). Thus, setting p = p1 − p1 in eqn (3.2.32), we find t (1) (2) (1) (2) 2 mt (1) (2) 2 em(t−τ ) p1 − p1 2L2 (τ ) dτ. p − p E2 (t) ≤ e p − p E2 (0) + 0

(3.2.33) From this, in view of eqns (3.2.18 and 3.2.19), we get p(1) − p(2) 2E2 (t) ≤

∀t ∈ [0, T ] ,

(3.2.34)

where =

!1 21 + T 22 exp (mT ) 2 .

(3.2.35)

Theorem 3.6 (On the existence of a generalized solution to problem (3.2.8– 11)) 11 The problem (3.2.8–11) possesses a generalized solution in the space E2 (t) provided that p1 L2 (t) < ∞,

(3.2.36)

pE2 (0) < ∞.

(3.2.37)

and

11

See (Bem, 1982).


49

Proof. Given that E2 (t) is a Banach space ∀t ∈ [0, T ], it suffices to show that the sequence p(n) appearing in the Definition 3.2 is a fundamental sequence in E2 (t). To this end let p(n) be a sequence from the Defnition 3.2. Then it follows (3.2.8–11) corresponding that p(n) − p(k)is a classical solution of the problem (n) (k) (n) (k) (n) (k) for n, k = 1, 2, 3 . . . Furtherto the loading p1 − p1 , p0 − p0 , p˙0 − p˙0 more, in view of eqn (3.2.36) " " " " " (n) " " (n) (k) " = "(p1 − p1 ) + (p1 − p1 )" . (3.2.38) "p1 − p(k) " L2 (t)

L2 (t)

From this, and on the basis of the triangle inequality in L2 (t), and using eqn (3.2.16), we obtain " " " (n) (k) " ≤ ˆ1 ∀t ∈ [0, T ] , (3.2.39) "p1 − p1 " L2 (t)

where ˆ1 is a small positive number. Also, in view of eqn (3.2.37), " " " " " " (n) " " = " p(n) − p + p − p(k) " . "p − p(k) " E2 (0)

(3.2.40)

E2 (0)

The latter relation, the triangle inequality, and the condition (3.2.17) jointly imply that " " " " (n) ≤ ˆ2 , (3.2.41) "p − p(k) " E2 (0)

where ˆ2 is a small positive number. As a result, the hypothesis of Theorem 3.5 in which p(1) = p(n) and p(2) = p(k) are satisfied, and on account of eqn (3.2.20), we obtain " " " " (n) ≤ ˆ ∀t ∈ [0, T ] , (3.2.42) "p − p(k) " E2 (t)

where ˆ is a small positive number. The inequality (3.2.42) means that p(n) is a fundamental sequence in E2 (t) 12 . Clearly, Theorem 3.6 concerns the existence of a generalized solution to eqns (3.2.8–11), which is defined as a limit of a sequence of classical solutions to this problem in a functional space. Analogous existence theorems in the G–L theory are given in (Bem, 1982, 1983). Remark 3.1 The uniqueness results of Section 3.1 are based on the hypothesis that there is a classical solution to an initial-boundary value problem. Also, the existence theorem of Section 3.2, related to a generalized solution of an initialboundary value problem, is proved under the hypothesis that there is a classical solution to the problem. In this sense, Sections 3.1 and 3.2 should be viewed as introductory to a vast literature on the existence and uniqueness in the L–S 12 The proof of Theorem 3.6 is based on the Theorem 3.5 in which m < ∞, that is, for k > 0, a > 0, and t0 > 0. If t0 → 0 + 0, then m → ∞ and Theorem 3.6 is no longer true, i.e. Theorem 3.6 does not imply an existence theorem of classical thermoelasticity when t0 → 0 + 0.

50


and G–L theories, and in their extensions, in which the refined results have been obtained. See, for example, the existence and uniqueness results obtained in (Gawinecki, 1987; Burchuladze, 1997; Bem, 1988; De Cicco and Diaco, 2002; Karakostas and Massalas, 1991; Chirita, 1988; Sherief, 1987; Quintanilla and Straughan, 2000; Wang and Dhaliwal, 1993; Chandrasekharaiah, 1996a; Ie¸san, 2004; Ezzat and El-Karamany, 2002).

4 DOMAIN OF INFLUENCE THEOREMS

In what follows, a solution to an initial-boundary value problem associated with a thermoelastic process will also be called a thermoelastic disturbance. In particular, a solution to NDTP of the L–S (or G–L) theory is to be called a displacement–temperature disturbance of the L–S (or G–L) theory, and a solution to NSHFP of the L–S theory is to be called a stress–heat-flux disturbance of this theory. In this chapter we shall formulate a number of theorems that imply that the thermoelastic disturbances described by the L–S and G–L theories have a character of waves propagating in B with finite wave speeds. Such theorems are called the domain of influence theorems. 1 The first part of this chapter concerns a domain of influence theorem for a potential–temperature disturbance, which is a particular form of a displacement– temperature disturbance in the L–S theory. The second part of this chapter concerns an analogous theorem for the G–L theory. In the third part we formulate a domain of influence theorem for a natural stress–heat flux disturbance in the L–S theory. In the fourth part we present a domain of influence theorem for a natural stress–temperature disturbance in the G–L theory. Parts 1–4 are restricted to the setting of a homogeneous and isotropic thermoelastic body. Finally, in the fifth part we formulate a number of domain of influence theorems for a nonhomogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic solid in the L–S and G–L theories. 4.1 The potential–temperature problem in the Lord–Shulman theory That problem represents a restriction of a NDTP of the L–S theory in which the displacement is taken as a gradient of a scalar field. Let us recall the formulation of this problem for a homogeneous and isotropic medium. 2 Find a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying the field equations ui − (3λ + 2µ)αϑ,i = −bi µui ,kk +(λ + µ)uk ,ki −ρ¨ ¨ kϑ,ii −CE (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

on B × [0, ∞),

(4.1.1)

¨k ,k ) = −(r + t0 r) ˙ −(3λ + 2µ)αθ0 (u˙ k ,k +t0 u 1 The domain of influence theorems motivates the concept of “thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds” appearing in the title of the book. 2 See eqns (2.1.3–5) reduced to a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic solid for which ∂B = 2 ∂B4 = ∅.

52

Domain of influence theorems

the initial conditions .

.

ui (·, 0) = ui0 , ui (·, 0) = ui0 . . on B, ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0

(4.1.2)

and the boundary conditions ui = ui , ϑ = ϑ on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(4.1.3)

Now, if we take bi = 0 on B × [0, ∞) and let ui = φ,i on B × [0, ∞),

(4.1.4)

where φ is a scalar field defined on B × [0, ∞), then the system (4.1.1) is satisfied as long as the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the system of equations ∇2 φ −

ρ ¨ 3λ + 2µ αϑ = 0 φ− λ + 2µ λ + 2µ

CE ˙ ¨ (ϑ + t0 ϑ) on B × [0, ∞). k 3λ + 2µ ¨ = − 1 (r + t0 r) αθ0 ∇2 (φ˙ + t0 φ) ˙ − k k ∇2 ϑ −

(4.1.5)

At this point, let us introduce the notations 3 x ˆ0 =

k k , tˆ0 = , CE C1 CE C12

(4.1.6)

where ρ 1 , = C12 λ + 2µ and (3λ + 2µ) αθ0 2 φˆ0 = x ˆ0 , λ + 2µ

ϑˆ0 = θ0 ,

rˆ0 =

kθ0 . x ˆ20

(4.1.7)

Clearly, x ˆ0 and tˆ0 have the dimensions of length and time, respectively, while φˆ0 , ϑˆ0 and rˆ0 have the dimensions of potential, temperature and heat source. Taking these parameters as units of reference for respective quantities appearing in eqns (4.1.5) and keeping there the same notations for dimensionless quantities, we pass to the dimensionless form of eqns (4.1.5) ∇2 φ − φ¨ − ϑ = 0 on B × [0, ∞), ˙ ∇2 ϑ − Lϑ˙ − ∇2 Lφ˙ = −(r + t0 r) 3

(4.1.8)

The huts over the symbols x0 and t0 in eqn (4.1.6) must not be confused with the operator

# in eqn (1.2.16).

The potential–temperature problem in the Lord–Shulman theory

53

where L = 1 + t0

∂ , ∂t

(4.1.9)

2

=

(3λ + 2µ) α2 θ0 . (λ + 2µ) CE

(4.1.10)

We now formulate the potential–temperature problem (PTP) in the L–S theory, with no heat sources (r = 0) and body forces (bi = 0). Find a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the field equations ∇2 φ − φ¨ − ϑ = 0 on B × [0, ∞), ∇2 ϑ − Lϑ˙ − ∇2 Lφ˙ = 0

(4.1.11)

the initial conditions φ (·, 0) = φ0 , ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 ,

φ˙ (·, 0) = φ˙ 0 ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

on B,

(4.1.12)

and the boundary conditions φ,k nk = f, ϑ = g on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(4.1.13)

The pair (φ, ϑ) describes a thermoelastic process caused by a thermomechanical loading (φ0 , φ˙ 0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 , f, g). It is evident that the initial conditions (4.1.12) are consistent with the conditions (4.1.2) and the hypothesis (4.1.4) for ui0 = φ0 ,i and u˙ i0 = φ˙ 0 ,i . Moreover, the boundary conditions (4.1.3) and (4.1.13) are identical if eqn (4.1.3)1 is replaced by the conditions for the normal component of the displacement vector, and g = ϑ . The system of equations (4.1.11) is called a central system of equations in the L–S theory, while the problem described by eqns (4.1.11–13) is called a central problem of that theory. 4 The role of the central problem of the L–S theory in solving a general problem of the theory is similar to that of an initial-boundary value problem for the classical wave equation in solving a general problem of linear isothermal elastodynamics. Definition 4.1

Let t ∈ (0, ∞) be a fixed time. The set

¯ : (1) if x ∈ B, then φ0 = 0 or φ˙ 0 = 0 or ϑ0 = 0 or ϑ˙ 0 = 0, D0 (t) = {x ∈ B (2) if (x, τ ) ∈ ∂B × [0, t], then f (x, τ ) = 0 or g (x, τ ) = 0} (4.1.14) is called the support of a thermomechanical load of PTP in the L–S theory. 4 Another central problem of the L–S theory is obtained if the boundary conditions (4.1.13) are replaced by the conditions φ = f and ϑ = g on ∂B × [0, ∞).

54


This definition is a generalization of the concept of the support of a function. 5 It is apparent that, if the domain B fills the entire E 3 space, then in the central problem (4.1.11–13) there are no functions f and g. In such a case the PTP of the L–S theory is a Cauchy problem for an unbounded space and the set D0 (t) does not depend on time. Definition 4.2

Let υ > 0 be a number satisfying the inequality , υ ≥ max 2, 1 + , t−1 0

(4.1.15)

and let Συt (x) be an open ball of radius υt, centered at x. The domain of influence for the thermomechanical load at time t for the PTP (4.1.11–13) is the set ¯ : D0 (t) ∩ Συt (x) = ∅}. D (t) = {x ∈ B

(4.1.16)

Clearly, D (t) is a set of all the points of B that may be reached by the thermomechanical disturbances propagating from D0 (t) with a speed not greater than υ. We shall now formulate a theorem stating that the thermomechanical load restricted to the interval [0, t] does not influence the points outside the domain D (t). Theorem 4.1 (On the domain of influence for a PTP in the L–S theory 6 ) If the pair (φ, ϑ) is a smooth solution of PTP (4.1.11–13) and if D (t) is the domain of influence for the thermomechanical load at time t, then $ % ¯ − D (t) × [0, t] . φ = ϑ = 0 on B (4.1.17) The proof of this theorem is based on the following lemma: ¯ Lemma 4.1 Let (φ, ϑ) be a solution to eqns (4.1.11–13), and let p ∈ C 1 (B) denote a scalar field such that the set $ % ¯ : p (x) > 0 (4.1.18) E0 = x ∈ B is bounded. Then 1 2

p(x)

[P (x, p(x)) − P (x, 0)] dυ + B

Q(x, t)dtdυ B

0

p(x) Ri (x, t)ni (x)dtda, + Ri (x, p(x)) p,i (x)dυ = B 5

(4.1.19)

∂B 0

The support of a function f (x) is a set of points on which f does not vanish, i.e. supp f = {x : f (x) = 0}. 6 See (Ignaczak and Bialy, 1980). Theorem 4.1 generalizes a domain of influence result for a classical scalar wave equation obtained by Zaremba (1915). An analogous extension of Zaremba’s result to include a displacement problem of classical isothermal elastodynamics is due to Gurtin (1972). See also (Eringen and S ¸ uhubi, 1975).


55

where ˆ˙ i )2 + ϑˆ2 + t0 (ϑ,i )2 , ˆ 2 + (φ, P (x, t) = (∇2 φ)

(4.1.20)

Q(x, t) = (ϑ,i )2 ,

(4.1.21)

ˆ˙ i ) ∀ (x, t) ∈ B ˆ φ, ˆ˙ i +ϑˆ (ϑ,i −φ, ¯ × [0, ∞), Ri (x, t) = (∇2 φ)

(4.1.22)

and the hut denotes the operator L 7 , that is φˆ = Lφ,

¯ × [0, ∞). ϑˆ = Lϑ on B

(4.1.23)

Proof of Lemma 4.1 Applying the operator L to both sides of eqn (4.1.11)1 , and taking the gradient, we infer that the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the equations ¨ ˆ i −ϑ, î=0 ˆ i −φ, (∇2 φ), ¯ × [0, ∞). on B ˙ ˙ ∇2 ϑ − ϑˆ − ∇2 φˆ = 0

(4.1.24)

ˆ˙ i and using the identities Multiplying eqn (4.1.24)1 through by φ, ˆ˙ i ∇2 φ), ˆ i = (φ, ˆ i − 1 ∂ (∇2 φ) ˆ 2, ˆ˙ i (∇2 φ), φ, 2 ∂t ¨ ˆ˙ i )2 , ˆ˙ i φ, ˆ i = 1 ∂ (φ, φ, 2 ∂t

(4.1.25) (4.1.26)

we get ∂ ˆ˙ i )2 } + φ, ˆ˙ i ϑ, ˆ˙ i ∇2 φ), ˆ 2 + (φ, ˆ i = (φ, ˆ i. {(∇2 φ) 2 ∂t

(4.1.27)

Next, multiplying eqn (4.1.24)2 through by ϑˆ and using the relations ˆ 2 ϑ = (ϑˆ ϑ,k ),k −ϑ, ˆ k ϑ,k , ϑ∇

(4.1.28)

ˆ k φ, ˆ 2 φˆ˙ = (ϑˆ φ, ˆ˙ k , ˆ˙ k ),k −ϑ, ϑ∇

(4.1.29)

1 ∂ ˆ2 ˆ ˆ˙ k ϑ, ˆ k −φ, ˆ˙ k )],k . ˆ k = [ϑ(ϑ, ϑ + ϑ,k ϑ,k −φ, 2 ∂t

(4.1.30)

we arrive at

Now, adding eqns (4.1.27) and (4.1.30), and recalling the definition of the hut operator, we obtain 1 ∂ P (x, t) + Q(x, t) = Ri ,i (x, t), 2 ∂t

7

See eqn (1.2.16).

(4.1.31)

56


where P, Q and Ri are defined by eqns (4.1.20), (4.1.21) and (4.1.22), respectively. Since   p(x) p(x)   Ri ,i (x, t) dt =  Ri (x, t)dt ,i −Ri (x, p(x))p,i (x) , (4.1.32) 0

0

the integration of eqn (4.1.31) from t = 0 up to t = p (x), will result in 1 [P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] + 2   + Ri (x, p (x)) p,i (x) = 

p(x)

Q(x, t)dt 0 p(x)

  Ri (x, t)dt ,i .

(4.1.33)

0

Since the set E0 defined by eqn (4.1.18) is bounded, each term in eqn (4.1.33) has a bounded support. Therefore, integrating eqn (4.1.33) over B and using the divergence theorem, we obtain eqn (4.1.19). Remark 4.1 The relation (4.1.19) is called a generalized energy identity for the problem (4.1.11–13). Setting p (x) = t, we obtain the classical energy identity for that problem. 8 Proof of Theorem 4.1

Let (z, λ) ∈ {B − D (t)} × (0, t) be a fixed point. Let Ω = B ∩ Συλ (z)

and let

pλ (x) =

λ−

1 | x − z | for x ∈ Ω, υ 0 for x ∈ / Ω,

(4.1.34)

(4.1.35)

where υ is a parameter defined by the inequality (4.1.15). Since λ < t, it follows from the definitions of D (t) and Ω (recall eqns (4.1.16) and (4.1.34)) that the sets D0 (t) and Ω are disjoint: Ω ∩ D0 (t) = ∅.

(4.1.36)

Hence, φ,i ni = 0,

ϑ = 0 on (Ω ∩ ∂B) × [0, t],

(4.1.37)

ˆ˙ k nk = 0, φ,

ϑˆ = 0 on (Ω ∩ ∂B) × [0, t].

(4.1.38)

and

8 The classical energy identity for the problem described by eqns (4.1.11–13) implies that the problem has at most one solution.


57

Furthermore, φ (·, 0) = φ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0 on Ω.

(4.1.39)

Thus, in view of eqns (4.1.35), (4.1.38), and (4.1.22), we obtain

pλ (x) Ri (x, t) ni (x) dtda = 0.

∂B

(4.1.40)

0

Also, eqns (4.1.39) and (4.1.11)1 imply that ˆ 0) = ϑ(·, ˆ 0) = 0 on Ω, ∇2 φ(·,

(4.1.41)

ˆ˙ i (·, 0) = ϑ,i (·, 0) = 0 on Ω. φ,

(4.1.42)

Thus, from the definitions of P (x, t) and pλ (x) we get P (x, pλ (x)) for x ∈ Ω, P (x, pλ (x)) − P (x, 0) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω.

(4.1.43)

Upon substitution of pλ (x) into eqn (4.1.19), and using eqns (4.1.40) and (4.1.43), we find 1 2

p λ (x)

P (x, pλ (x)) dυ + Ω

Ω

Q (x, t) dtdυ = − Ri (x, pλ (x)) pλ ,i (x) dυ.

0

Ω

(4.1.44) Since Q ≥ 0 on Ω, from eqns (4.1.35) and (4.1.44) we obtain 1 1 P (x, pλ (x)) dυ ≤ |Ri (x, pλ (x))| dυ. 2 υ Ω

(4.1.45)

Ω

From the definition of Ri (recall eqn (4.1.22)) we obtain ˆ ˆ˙ ˆ φ, ˆ˙ i | + |ϑ|(|ϑ, |Ri (x, pλ (x))| ≤ |∇2 φ|| i | + |φ,i |) ≤ 2

2

2ˆ

∇ φ

ˆ˙ i + 2 φ,

2

+ ϑˆ2

1 ˆ2 2 + ϑ + (ϑ,i ) . 2

(4.1.46)

Therefore, from the definition of P (x, t), and in view of the inequalities (4.1.45) and (4.1.46), we arrive at 1 2 ˆ2 2 ˆ˙ 2 1− ∇ φ + 1− φ,i 2 υ 2 υ Ω (4.1.47) 1 + ˆ2 1 1 1 2 1− t0 − (ϑ,i ) dυ ≤ 0. + ϑ + 2 υ 2 υ

58


The definition of υ (recall eqn (4.1.15)) implies that the integrand of eqn (4.1.47) is a sum of non-negative terms. Thus, the inequality (4.1.47) implies that each of those terms must vanish in Ω. In particular, we have ∇2 φˆ (x, pλ (x)) = 0,

ϑˆ (x, pλ (x)) = 0 on Ω.

(4.1.48)

In view of the definition of pλ (x) (recall eqn (4.1.35)), and since the pair (φ, ϑ) is sufficiently smooth, we also have ∇2 φˆ (x, pλ (x)) −→ ∇2 φˆ (z, λ) as x → z. ϑˆ (x, pλ (x)) −→ ϑˆ (z, λ)

(4.1.49)

Hence, taking the limits in eqns (4.1.48) as x → z, we find ∇2 φˆ (z, λ) = ϑˆ (z, λ) = 0.

(4.1.50)

Since (z, λ) is an arbitrary point in {B − D (t)} × (0, t), and since (φ, ϑ) is sufficiently smooth, hence $ % ¯ − D (t) × (0, t) . (4.1.51) ∇2 φˆ = ϑˆ = 0 on B Thus, eqns (4.1.51) and (4.1.11)1 imply that $ % ¨ ¯ − D (t) × (0, t) , φˆ = ϑˆ = 0 on B from which ¨ τ ) = φ(·, ¨ 0) exp(−τ t−1 ) φ(x, ϑ(x, τ ) =

0 ϑ(·, 0) exp(−τ t−1 0 )

$ % ¯ − D (t) × (0, t) . for (x, τ ) ∈ B

(4.1.52)

(4.1.53)

In view of the definition of domain D (t) and eqn (4.1.11)1 , φ¨ (·, 0) = ϑ (·, 0) = 0 on B − D (t) , so that, from eqns (4.1.53) we obtain φ¨ = ϑ = 0 on

$

% B − D (t) × [0, t] .

(4.1.54)

(4.1.55)

Finally, recalling the definition of D (t) once again, and using eqn (4.1.55), we obtain % $ (4.1.56) φ = ϑ = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] . This theorem implies that, for a finite time t and a bounded support of the thermomechanical loading (that is, for a bounded set D0 (t), recall eqn (4.1.14)), a thermoelastic disturbance generated by the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the system (4.1.11–13) vanishes outside the bounded set D (t), which depends on the support of the load, the material constants, and the relaxation time. In other words, the said disturbance is propagated with a finite speed, bounded from above by the speed υ. If t0 → 0, then in view of the definition of υ, it

The potential–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory

59

follows that υ → ∞. Thus, for a vanishing relaxation time, the thermoelastic disturbance described by the pair (φ, ϑ) attains an infinite speed, a fact that may well have been expected since the PTP of the L–S theory reduces to a potential–temperature problem of classical thermoelasticity.

4.2 The potential–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory That problem is an analog of the PTP in the L–S theory (recall eqns (4.1.11– 13)) and the related theorem on the domain of influence of Section 4.1. Hence, both the formulation and proof of the theorem are similar to what was given in Section 4.1. For a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body, the NDTP in the G–L theory is formulated as follows: 9 Find a pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying the field equations ˙ i = −bi µui ,kk + (λ + µ) uk ,ki −ρ¨ ui − (3λ + 2µ) α(ϑ + t1 ϑ), ¨ − (3λ + 2µ) αθ0 u˙ k ,k = −r kϑ,ii −CE (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

on B × 0, ∞), (4.2.1)

the initial conditions ui (·, 0) = ui0 , ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 ,

u˙ i (·, 0) = u˙ i0 ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

on B,

(4.2.2)

and the boundary conditions

ui = ui , ϑ = ϑ on ∂B × (0, ∞) .

(4.2.3)

Setting bi = 0 on B × 0, ∞), and ui = φ,i on B × [0, ∞),

(4.2.4)

where φ is a potential on B × [0, ∞), we conclude that eqns (4.2.1) are satisfied so long as the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the equations ∇2 φ −

ρ ¨ 3λ + 2µ ˙ =0 α(ϑ + t1 ϑ) φ− λ + 2µ λ + 2µ

on B × [0, ∞). (4.2.5) CE ˙ 3λ + 2µ r 2 ¨ − (ϑ + t0 ϑ) αθ0 ∇ φ˙ = − ∇ ϑ− k k k Transforming eqns (4.2.5) into a dimensionless form, in a way similar as in Section 4.1, and keeping the same notations for dimensionless quantities, we obtain ˙ =0 ∇2 φ − φ¨ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ) on B × [0, ∞). (4.2.6) ¨ − ∇2 φ˙ = −r ∇2 ϑ − (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ) 2

9 See eqns (2.1.11)–(2.1.13) restricted to a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body with ∂B2 = ∂B4 = ∅.

60


The potential–temperature problem in the G–L theory with null body forces and null heat sources is now formulated as follows: Find a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the field equations ˙ =0 ∇2 φ − φ¨ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ) on B × [0, ∞), 2 ˙ ¨ ∇ ϑ − (ϑ + t0 ϑ) − ∇2 φ˙ = 0

(4.2.7)

the initial conditions φ (·, 0) = φ0 ,

φ˙ (·, 0) = φ˙ 0

ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 ,

ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0

on B,

(4.2.8)

φ,k nk = f, ϑ = g on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(4.2.9)

.

.

and the boundary conditions

All the symbols here have the analogous meaning as in Section 4.1. Relations (4.2.7) represent a central system of equations of the G–L theory, while a PTP described by the eqns (4.2.7–9) is a central problem of that theory. Clearly, the set D0 (t) of Section 4.1 is a support of the thermomechanical load for that problem (see eqn (4.1.14)), while the concept of a domain of influence for that problem is contained in the following definition. Definition 4.3

Let υ > 0 be a number satisfying the inequality t1 1 , υ ≥ max 2, (1 + ) , t0 t1

(4.2.10)

and let Συt (x) be a ball of radius υt and center at point x. The domain of influence of a thermomechanical loading at time t for the central problem (4.2.7–9) is the set (4.2.11) D (t) = x ∈ B : D0 (t) ∩ Συt (x) = ∅ . Here, D0 (t) is given by the formula (4.1.14). Using this definition, we shall now prove Theorem 4.2 (On the domain of influence for a PTP in the G–L theory) 10 If the pair (φ, ϑ) is a smooth solution of PTP (4.2.7–9) and if D (t) is the domain of influence for the thermomechanical load at time t, then % $ (4.2.12) φ = ϑ = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] . The proof of this theorem is analogous to the proof of Theorem 4.1 of Section 4.1, and is based on the following lemma: 10

This theorem is a modification of that from (Ignaczak, 1978b).


61

Lemma 4.2 Let (φ, ϑ) be a solution of (4.2.7–9) and let p be a scalar field of Lemma 4.1. Then, the following generalized energy identity holds true 1 2

p(x)

[P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] dυ + B

+ Ri (x, p (x)) p,i (x) dυ = B

∂B

Q (x, t) dtdυ B

p(x)

0

(4.2.13)

Ri (x, t) ni (x)dtda, 0

where

2

+t1 (ϑ,i ) +

t0 t1

˙ i )2 P (x, t) = (∇2 φ)2 + (φ, (4.2.14) ˙ 2 + t1 − 1 ϑ2 (ϑ + t1 ϑ) ∀ (x, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞), t0

Q (x, t) = (ϑ,i )2 + (t1 − t0 ) ϑ˙ 2

∀ (x, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞),

(4.2.15)

˙ i +[∇2 φ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ)] ˙ φ, ˙ i ∀ (x, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞). Ri (x, t) = (ϑ + t1 ϑ)ϑ, (4.2.16) Similar to what was done in Section 4.1, for convenience we have dropped (x, t) in the right-hand sides of eqns (4.2.14–16). Proof. By assumption, the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the system (4.2.7). Taking the ˙ i , we obtain gradient on both sides of eqn (4.2.7)1 and multiplying through by φ, ˙ i φ, ˙ i (ϑ + t1 ϑ), ¨ i −φ, ˙ i = 0, ˙ i ∇2 φ,i −φ, φ,

(4.2.17)

from which 1 ∂ ˙ 2 1 ∂ ˙ i (ϑ + t1 ϑ), ˙ i ϑ, ˙ i ∇2 φ),i . ˙ i +(t1 − t0 )φ, ˙ i = (φ, (φ,i ) + (∇2 φ)2 + φ, 2 ∂t 2 ∂t (4.2.18) ˙ we obtain On the other hand, multiplying eqn (4.2.7)2 through by (ϑ + t0 ϑ), ˙ (ϑ − φ), ˙ ii −(ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ) ¨ = 0, (ϑ + t0 ϑ) (4.2.19) so that 1 ∂ ˙ i = [(ϑ + t0 ϑ)(ϑ ˙ 2 + (ϑ + t0 ϑ), ˙ i (ϑ − φ), ˙ ˙ i ],i , (ϑ + t0 ϑ) − φ), 2 ∂t or 1 ∂ ˙ 2 + t0 ∂ (ϑ,i )2 + (ϑ,i )2 (ϑ + t0 ϑ) 2 ∂t 2 ∂t ˙ ˙ ˙ ˙ i ],i . −φ,i (ϑ + t0 ϑ),i = [(ϑ + t0 ϑ)(ϑ − φ),

(4.2.20)

(4.2.21)

62


˙ we get Then, multiplying eqn (4.2.7)2 through by ϑ, ¨ = 0, ˙ ˙ ii −(ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)] ϑ[(ϑ − φ),

(4.2.22)

so that t0 ∂ ˙ 2 1 ∂ ˙ − φ), ˙ i ],i . ˙ i = [ϑ(ϑ ϑ + (ϑ,i )2 + ϑ˙ 2 − φ,i ϑ, 2 ∂t 2 ∂t

(4.2.23)

Now, adding eqn (4.2.18) multiplied through by with eqns (4.2.21) and (4.2.23) multiplied through by (t1 − t0 ), we obtain 1 ∂ ˙ i )2 + (∇2 φ)2 ] + (ϑ + t0 ϑ) ˙ 2 + t0 (ϑ,i )2 + (t1 − t0 )[t0 ϑ˙ 2 + (ϑ,i )2 ]} {[(φ, 2 ∂t ˙ i +[∇2 φ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ)] ˙ φ, ˙ i },i . +(ϑ,i )2 + (t1 − t0 )ϑ˙ 2 = {(ϑ + t1 ϑ)ϑ, (4.2.24) The latter relation may also be written in the form 1 ∂ P (x, t) + Q (x, t) = [R,i (x, t)] ,i , 2 ∂t

(4.2.25)

where P, Q and R are defined by eqns (4.2.14–16), respectively. Now, integrating eqn (4.2.25) from t = 0 to t = p (x), and using eqn (4.1.32), we arrive at p(x) 1 [P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] + Q (x, t) dt 2 0   p(x)   Ri (x, t) dt ,i −Ri (x, p(x))p,i (x) . =

(4.2.26)

0

Finally, integrating eqn (4.2.26) over B and using the divergence theorem, we obtain eqn (4.2.13). Proof of Theorem 4.2 Similarly to Section 4.1, we fix a point (z, λ) ∈ {B − D (t)} × (0, t) and introduce the set Ω = B ∩ Συλ (z). Moreover, we define a scalar function pλ (x) using the formula λ − υ −1 |x − z| for x ∈ Ω, pλ (x) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω.

(4.2.27)

(4.2.28)

Then, pλ (x) > 0 on Ω and |pλ ,i (x)| =

υ −1 on Ω, 0 on B − Ω.

(4.2.29)


63

Using the definitions of domains D (t) and Ω, and the inequality λ < t, we conclude that D0 (t) and Ω are disjoint, that is Ω ∩ D0 (t) = ∅,

(4.2.30)

˙ i ni = 0, ϑ + t1 ϑ˙ = 0 on (Ω ∩ ∂B) × [0, t] , φ,

(4.2.31)

φ (·, 0) = φ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0 on Ω.

(4.2.32)

so that

From the definition of R i (recall eqn (4.2.16)), and from the formulas (4.2.28) and (4.2.31), we find

p λ (x)

Ri (x, t) ni (x) dtda = 0. ∂B

(4.2.33)

0

Also, from the definition of P (recall eqn (4.2.14)), and from the formulas (4.2.28) and (4.2.32), we find P (x, pλ (x)) for x ∈ Ω, P (x, pλ (x)) − P (x, 0) = (4.2.34) 0 for x ∈ / Ω. Clearly, pλ (x) satisfies the assumptions of Lemma 4.2, and so, substituting p(x) ≡ pλ (x) into eqn (4.2.13), as well as making use of eqns (4.2.33–34) and (4.2.29)2 , we obtain 1 2

p λ (x)

P (x, pλ (x)) dυ + Ω

Q (x, t) dtdυ Ω

0

(4.2.35)

= − Ri (x, pλ (x)) pλ ,i (x) dυ. Ω

Since Q ≥ 0 (t1 > t0 ), the relations (4.2.29)1 and (4.2.35) imply the inequality 1 1 P (x, pλ (x)) ≤ |Ri (x, pλ (x))| dυ. (4.2.36) 2 υ Ω

Ω

From the definition of Ri (recall eqn (4.2.16)) we get ˙ i | + |∇2 φ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ)|| ˙ φ, ˙ i| |R,i | ≤ |ϑ + t1 ϑ||ϑ, 2 ˙ i |(|∇ φ| + |ϑ + t1 ϑ|) ˙ i | + |φ, ˙ ≤ |ϑ + t1 ϑ||ϑ, 2 ˙ ˙ ˙ = |ϑ + t1 ϑ|(|ϑ, i | + |φ,i |) + |φ,i ||∇ φ|

≤

1 ˙ i )2 + 2(∇2 φ)2 }. ˙ 2 + (ϑ,i )2 + 2(φ, {(1 + )(ϑ + t1 ϑ) 2

(4.2.37)

64


Thus, the definition of P (recall eqn (4.2.14)) and the inequalities (4.2.36) and (4.2.37) lead to the relation 2 ˙ i )2 dυ + 1 t1 − 1 1− (∇2 φ)2 + (φ, (ϑ,i )2 dυ 2 υ 2 υ Ω Ω (4.2.38) 1+ 1 t0 ˙ 2 dυ + 1 1 − t0 − (ϑ + t1 ϑ) ϑ2 dυ ≤ 0. + 2 t1 υ 2 t1 Ω

Ω

The definition of the parameter υ (recall eqn (4.2.10)) implies that the coefficients in front of the integrals in the inequality (4.2.38) are non-negative. With these integrals being non-negative as well, the inequality (4.2.38) implies ∇2 φ (x, pλ (x)) = 0, ϑ (x, pλ (x)) = 0 x ∈ Ω.

(4.2.39)

Hence, in view of the definition of pλ (x) and the continuity of ∇2 φ and ϑ, ∇2 φ (x, pλ (x)) → ∇2 φ (z, λ) ϑ (x, pλ (x)) → ϑ (z, λ)

as x → z.

(4.2.40)

Thus, taking the limit x → z in eqns (4.2.39), we obtain ∇2 φ (z, λ) = 0, ϑ (z, λ) = 0.

(4.2.41)

Since (z, λ) is an arbitrary point of the set {B − D (t)} × (0, t) and the pair (φ, ϑ) is sufficiently smooth on B × [0, ∞), the relations (4.2.41) imply $ % (4.2.42) ϑ = ∇2 φ = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] . From this and eqn (4.2.7)1 we find φ¨ = 0 on

% $ B − D (t) × [0, t] .

(4.2.43)

Now, since φ (·, 0) = φ˙ (·, 0) = 0 on B − D (t) , the relation (4.2.43) yields φ = 0 on

$ % B − D (t) × [0, t] ,

(4.2.44)

(4.2.45)

which, in view of eqns (4.2.42)1 and (4.2.45) gives eqn (4.2.12), thus completing the proof of Theorem 4.2. Theorem 4.2 implies that a potential–temperature disturbance described by eqns (4.2.7–9) propagates with a speed not greater than υ specified by eqn (4.2.10). The maximum speed of the disturbance propagating out of the domain D0 (t) depends on both relaxation times t0 and t1 , and on the parameter of thermoelastic coupling . The speed υ becomes unbounded in two cases: (a) for t1 → 0; (b) for t1 > 0 with t0 → 0.

The natural stress–heat-flux problem in the Lord–Shulman theory

65

Clearly, the thermoelastic disturbances governed by eqns (4.2.7–9) are generally different from those governed by eqns (4.1.11–13). However, these disturbances have a number of common characteristics. For instance, for t1 = t0 > 0 the potential–temperature disturbances of the G–L theory possess the same domain of influence as the potential–temperature disturbances of the L–S theory; compare here the Definition 4.3 of Section 4.2 with the Definitions 4.1 and 4.2 of Section 4.1. Also note that, proceeding in the same manner as in Sections 4.1 and 4.2, we can formulate a number of general theorems on the domain of influence for the conventional and non-conventional thermoelastic processes both in the L–S and the G–L theories. In particular, these general theorems may be formulated for the mixed displacement–temperature problems of Section 2.1, see (Ignaczak et al., 1986). 4.3 The natural stress–heat-flux problem in the Lord–Shulman theory First, we note that a NSHFP for a homogeneous isotropic body with one relaxation time involves finding a pair (Sij , qi ) satisfying the field equations 11 1 ¨ λ α 2 θ0 ¨ −1 ¨ Sij − Skk δij − ρ S(ik ,kj) − Skk δij 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS α q˙k ,k δij = −F(ij) + on B × [0, ∞), CS 1 1 (qk ,k +αθ0 S˙ k ,k ),i − (q˙i + t0 qï ) = −gi CS k (4.3.1) the initial conditions (0)

Sij (·, 0) = Sij , (0)

qi (·, 0) = qi ,

(0) S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (0)

on B,

(4.3.2)

q˙i (·, 0) = q˙i

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si qi ni = q

on ∂B × (0, ∞) .

(4.3.3)

In eqns (4.3.1) we have set 12 F(ij) = ρ−1 b(i ,j) −CS−1 αrδ ˙ ij gi = −CS−1 r,i

on B × [0, ∞).

(4.3.4)

Certainly, the stress–heat-flux thermoelastic disturbances described by the eqns (4.3.1–4) are more general than those studied in Sections 4.1 and 4.2. 11 See eqns (2.1.6–8) particularized for a homogeneous isotropic body for which ∂B = 1 ∂B3 = ∅. 12 See eqn (3.2.4).

66


Therefore, the domain of influence is also more general here than the previous ones. The set (0) (0) (0) (0) D0 (t) = {x ∈ B : (1) If x ∈ B then Sij = 0 or S˙ ij = 0 or qi = 0 or q˙i = 0; (2) If (x, τ ) ∈ B × [0, t], then F(ij) = 0 or gi = 0;

(3) If (x, τ ) ∈ ∂B × [0, t], then si = 0 or q = 0} (4.3.5) is called a support of the thermomechanical loading at time t for the problem (4.3.1–3). The domain of influence of the thermomechanical loading at time t for the problem (4.3.1–3) is the set (4.3.6) D (t) = x ∈ B : D0 (t) ∩ Συt (x) = ∅ , where υ is a parameter with dimension of velocity, satisfying the inequality 13 υ ≥ max (υ1 , υ2 , υ3 ) ,

(4.3.7)

where 1 2µ 2 , ρ  1 ( 12 )−1  2  3λ + 2µ C CE S υ2 = 1− 1− ,   ρ CE CS

υ1 =

υ3 =

( 1 ) 12 CS CE 2 k 1 1− 1+ . t0 CS CE CS

(4.3.8)

(4.3.9)

(4.3.10)

The following theorem holds true: Theorem 4.3 (On the domain of influence for a NSHFP in the L–S theory) 14 If the pair (Sij , qi ) is a smooth solution of NSHFP described by eqns (4.3.1–3) and if D (t) is given by the formula (4.3.6), then $ % (4.3.11) Sij = 0, qi = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] . The proof of the theorem is based on the following lemma of Zaremba type: 13 Contrary to the dimensionless velocity υ of Sections 4.1 and 4.2, the formulation of problem (4.3.1–3) is dimensional; in particular, υ in eqn (4.3.7) and υ1 , υ2 , and υ3 in eqns (4.3.8–10) have the dimensions of m/s. 14 The theorem was proved in (Bialy, 1983). Here, we present another proof of the theorem.


67

Lemma 4.3 Let (Sij , qi ) be a solution of eqns (4.3.1–3) and let p be a scalar field of Lemma 4.1 of Section 4.1. Then, the following generalized energy identity holds true for the problem (4.1.1–3) 15 1 2

p(x)

[P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] dυ + B

B

p(x)

Q (x, t) dtdυ +

0

B

0

B

p(x)

S (x, t) dtdυ +

=

Ri (x, p (x)) p,i (x) dυ

Ri (x, t) ni (x)dtda, ∂B

0

(4.3.12) where

1 λ 2 ˙ ˙ ˙ Sij Sij − S P (x, t) = ρ Sik ,k Sij ,j + 2µ 3λ + 2µ kk on B × [0, ∞), 2 α θ0 ˙ 2 1 t0 (q˙i )2 − Skk + (qk ,k )2 + CS θ0 CS θ0 k (4.3.13) −1

Q (x, t) =

1 (q˙i )2 on B × [0, ∞), θ0 k

Ri (x, t) = ρ−1 S˙ ij Sjk ,k +CS−1 (θ0−1 qk ,k +αS˙ kk )q˙i on B × [0, ∞), S (x, t) = F(ij) S˙ ij + θ0−1 gi q˙i on B × [0, ∞).

(4.3.14) (4.3.15) (4.3.16)

Proof of Lemma 4.3 Multiplying eqn (4.3.1)1 through by S˙ ij and eqn (4.3.1)2 through by θ0−1 q˙i , and adding the results, we obtain 1 ∂ P (x, t) + Q (x, t) = [Ri (x, t)],i + S (x, t) , 2 ∂t

(4.3.17)

where P, Q, Ri , S are given by formulas (4.3.13–16). Next, we integrate eqn (4.3.17) from t = 0 to t = p (x) with the use of formula (4.1.32). Finally, integrating the result over B and using the divergence theorem, we obtain the required identity (4.3.12). Proof of Theorem 4.3 Proceeding in a way similar to that employed in the proof of Theorem 4.1 of Section 4.1, we fix a point (z, λ) ∈ {B − D (t)} × (0, t), and introduce the set Ω = B ∩ Συλ (z). Moreover, we define a scalar function pλ (x) using the formula λ − υ −1 |x − z| for x ∈ Ω, pλ (x) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω. 15

(4.3.18)

(4.3.19)

The generalized energy identity (4.3.12) is similar to eqn (4.1.19) or eqn (4.2.13).

68


where υ is specified by eqn (4.3.7). Then, pλ (x) > 0 on Ω and Ω ∩ D0 (t) = ∅.

(4.3.20)

S˙ ij ni = 0, q˙i ni = 0 on (Ω ∩ ∂B) × (0, t) ,

(4.3.21)

F(ij) = 0, gi = 0 on Ω × (0, t) ,

(4.3.22)

From this,

Sij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (·, 0) = qi (·, 0) = q˙i (·, 0) = 0 on Ω,

(4.3.23)

as well as ∂B

B

p λ (x)

Ri (x, t) ni (x) dtda = 0,

(4.3.24)

S (x, t) dtdυ = 0.

(4.3.25)

0 p λ (x)

0

Next, using the definitions of P (x, t) and pλ (x), we obtain P (x, pλ (x)) for x ∈ Ω, P (x, pλ (x)) − P (x, 0) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω.

(4.3.26)

Thus, putting pλ (x) into the identity (4.3.12), and exploiting eqns (4.3.24–26) along with the non-negative character of Q (recall eqn (4.3.14)), we arrive at the estimate 1 1 P (x, pλ (x)) dυ ≤ |Ri (x, pλ (x))| dυ. (4.3.27) 2 υ Ω

Ω

From the definition of Ri (recall eqn (4.3.15)) there follows * * * * ** q˙ ** *˙ * 1 * i * −1 * −1 −1 * Sij ˙ |Ri | ≤ ρ * Sjk ,k * + CS *θ0 qk ,k +αSkk * ** ** * υ * υ υ * * * * * ** q˙ ** * * S˙ * * q˙i * * i * * ij * ≤ ρ−1 * * |Sjk ,k | + CS−1 θ0−1 |qk ,k | ** ** + CS−1 |α| *S˙ kk * ** ** . * υ * υ υ

(4.3.28)

The first two terms on the right-hand side of eqn (4.3.28) are estimated from above using the relations * * * S˙ * 1 1 * ij * (4.3.29) * |S , | ≤ (Sij ,j Sik ,k + 2 S˙ ij S˙ ij ), * * υ * jk k 2 υ * * * q˙i * * * |qk ,k | ≤ 1 (qk ,k )2 + 1 (q˙i )2 . (4.3.30) *υ* 2 υ2


69

In order to estimate the last term of the inequality (4.3.28), we use the relation √ 1 εâ + εˆ−1 b , ab ≤ (4.3.31) 2 which is true for arbitrary non-negative (physical) fields a and b having the same dimension, as well as for a non-dimensional positive parameter εˆ. Setting a = (S˙ kk )2 , b =

1

2 2 (q˙i ) ,

υ 2 (αθ0 )

(4.3.32)

and CE εˆ = CS

CE 1− CS

− 12 (4.3.33)

in eqn (4.3.31), we obtain − 12 12 * * 1 CE C 1 CE C 1 *˙ * S E 2 2 1− 1− . |q˙i | ≤ q˙ S˙ kk + *Skk * υ |α| θ0 2 CS CS CE CS υ 2 α2 θ02 i (4.3.34) Thus, in view of eqns (4.3.28–30) and eqn (4.3.34), we obtain 1 1 1 ˙ ˙ 2 −1 |Ri | ≤ ρ Sij,j Sik,k + 2 Sij Sij + CS−1 θ0−1 (qk ,k ) + q˙i2 /υ 2 υ 2 υ (

) − 12 12 C 1 CE C S E 2 2 1− 1− . q˙ S˙ kk + CS CE CS υ 2 α2 θ02 i (4.3.35) Finally, from the definition of P (x, t) and the inequalities (4.3.27) and (4.3.35), we find 1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ 1 ˙ ˙ − Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij dυ 2µ ρυ 2 3 3 Ω ( ) 1 1 CE 2 1 1 CE 2 + 1− 1− − 2 dυ S˙ kk (4.3.36) 3 3λ + 2µ CS CS ρυ Ω ( 1 ) 1 CE 2 1 t0 CS − 1− + 1+ q˙i2 dυ ≤ 0. θ0 k CS υ 2 CE CS +CS−1 α2 θ0−1

CE CS

Ω

It follows from eqn (4.3.7) that the coefficients in front of the integrals in eqn (4.3.36) are non–negative. Since these integrals are also non-negative, the inequality (4.3.36) is satisfied iff S˙ ij (x, pλ (x)) = 0, q˙i (x, pλ (x)) = 0 on Ω.

(4.3.37)

70


Using the definition (4.3.19) of pλ (x) and passing in eqn (4.3.37) to the limit x → z, we obtain S˙ ij (z, λ) = 0,

q˙i (z, λ) = 0.

(4.3.38)

Since (z, λ) is an arbitrary point of the Cartesian product {B − D (t)} × (0, t), and since the pair (Sij , qi ) is smooth in B × [0, ∞), from eqn (4.3.38) we infer that $ % (4.3.39) S˙ ij = 0, q˙i = 0 on B − D (t) × (0, t) . Finally, given the definition of D (t), qi (·, 0) = 0 on B − D (t) ,

(4.3.40)

so that, from eqns (4.3.39 and 40) we obtain $ % Sij = 0, qi = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] .

(4.3.41)

Sij (·, 0) = 0,

This completes the proof of Theorem 4.3.

This theorem implies that the stress–heat-flux disturbances described by eqns (4.3.1–3) propagate in the thermoelastic body with speeds not greater than υ specified by eqn (4.3.7). In order to illustrate the order of magnitude of υ, let us consider an aluminum alloy [p. 36 in (Bialy, 1983)], for which θ0 = 25 [o C] , t0 = 8 · 10−12 s, (4.3.42) 2.7 kG · s2 kG kG 5 5 · 10−3 ρ= , λ = 5.707 · 10 , µ = 2.686 · 10 , 981 cm4 cm2 cm2 (4.3.43) ! kG , α = 23.86 · 10−6 o C−1 , (4.3.44) k = 23.884 o C·s kG kG , CS = 24.739 o . (4.3.45) CE = 24.643 o C · cm2 C · cm2 Substituting these material parameters in the formulas (4.3.8–10), we find cm cm cm , υ2 = 9.358 · 105 , υ3 = 3.581 · 105 . (4.3.46) υ1 = 4.418 · 105 s s s Thus, υ2 is an upper bound of speeds of the stress–heat-flux disturbances. (0) (0) 1/2 In general, that bound depends on the speeds υ1 = (2µ/ρ) , υ2 = (0) 1/2 1/2 [(3λ + 2µ) /ρ] , υ3 = (k/t0 CS ) , and on the ratio CE /CS . For t0 → 0 that bound tends to infinity. For α = 0 (CE = CS ), the NSHFP described by eqns (4.3.1–4) separates into two problems: (a) the problem of propagation of isothermal stress disturbances described by eqns (4.3.1)1 , (4.3.2)1 , (4.3.3)1 , and (4.3.4)1 ; at α = 0; (b) the problem of propagation of heat flux in a rigid conductor described by eqns (4.3.1)2 , (4.3.2)2 , (4.3.3)2 , and (4.3.4)2 ; at α = 0. In the context of the first problem we have a theorem on the domain of influence

The natural stress–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory

71

(0) (0) with a speed υ ≥ max υ1 , υ2 , 16 while for the second problem we have a (0)

theorem on the domain of influence with a speed υ ≥ υ3 . 17 4.4 The natural stress–temperature problem in the Green–Lindsay theory Let us assume, similarly to what was done in Sections 4.1–3, that the thermoelastic body is homogeneous and isotropic. In that case, a NSTP of the G–L theory hinges on finding a pair (Sij , ϑ) satisfying the field equations 18 1 ¨ λ α 2 θ 0 t1 ¨ −1 ¨ Sij − Skk δij − ρ S(ik ,kj) − Skk δij 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS t(0) −1 ˙ on B × [0, ∞), ¨ −αt−1 (0) t1 CS k ϑ,pp − t1 − t(0) ϑ δij = −b(ij) ¨ = −C −1 r CS−1 (kϑ,ii −αθ0 S˙ kk ) − (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ) S (4.4.1) the initial conditions (0)

Sij (·, 0) = Sij , ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 ,

(0) S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij on B, ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

(4.4.2)

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si , ϑ = ϑ on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(4.4.3)

−1 ˙ ij on B × [0, ∞). b(ij) = ρ−1 b(i ,j) −t−1 (0) t1 CS αrδ

(4.4.4)

Here,

The set (0) (0) 0; D0 (t) = {x ∈ B : (1) If x ∈ B, then Sij = 0 or S˙ ij = 0 or ϑ0 = 0 or ϑ˙ 0 = (2) If (x, τ ) ∈ B × [0, t], then b(ij) = 0 or r = 0; (3) If (x, τ ) ∈ ∂B × [0, t], then si = 0 or ϑ = 0} (4.4.5) is called a support of the thermomechanical loading at time t for the problem (4.4.1–3). The domain of influence of the thermomechanical loading at time t for the problem (4.4.1–3) is the set (4.4.6) D (t) = x ∈ B : D0 (t) ∩ Συt (x) = ∅ , 16

This theorem was proved in (Ignaczak, 1974). See pp. 37–38 in (Bialy, 1983). 18 Equations (4.4.1–4) are obtained by restricting eqns (2.1.15–17) to a homogeneous isotropic body with ∂B1 = ∂B4 = ∅. 17

72


where υ is a constant speed satisfying the inequality υ ≥ max (υ1 , υ2 , υ3 ) ,

(4.4.7)

while 1 2µ 2 , ρ 1 ( 1 ) − 12 t1 CE 2 CE 3λ + 2µ 2 1− 1− 1− 1− , υ2 = ρ CS CS t(0)

υ1 =

υ3 =

k t(0) CS

12

t1 t(0)

32

(4.4.8)

(4.4.9)

1 −1 12 t1 CE 2 CE t1 CS 1− 1− + 1− . t(0) CE CS CS t(0) (4.4.10)

The following theorem holds true: Theorem 4.4 (On the domain of influence for NSTP in the G–L theory) 19 If the pair (Sij , ϑ) is a smooth solution of NSTP described by eqns (4.4.1–3) and if D (t) is given by the formula (4.4.6), then $ % (4.4.11) Sij = 0, ϑ = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t] . The proof of this theorem is based on the following: Lemma 4.4 Let (Sij , ϑ) be a solution of eqns (4.4.1–3) and let p = p (x) be a scalar field of Lemma 4.1. Then 1 2

p(x)

[P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] dυ + B

p(x)

Q (x, t) dtdυ +

B

0

p(x)

S (x, t) dtdυ +

= 0

B

Ri (x, p (x)) p,i (x) dυ B

Ri (x, t) ni (x)dtda, ∂B

0

(4.4.12) where the functions P, Q, Ri and S are given by the formulas P (x, t) = ρ−1 Sik ,k Sij ,j 1 λ α 2 θ 0 t1 ˙ 2 2 S˙ ij S˙ ij − S˙ kk − + Skk 2µ 3λ + 2µ CS t(0) 2 2 t1 kϑ,ii (kϑ ) 1 ,ii 2 ˙ i) , √ + −1 − CS ϑ˙ + + t1 k(ϑ, θ0 t(0) CS CS

19

This theorem was proved in (Bialy, 1983).

(4.4.13)


˙ i )2 + CS (t1 − t(0) )ϑ¨2 , Q (x, t) = θ0−1 k(ϑ, ˙ i (ϑ˙ + t1 ϑ), ¨ Ri (x, t) = ρ−1 S˙ ij Sjk ,k +kθ0−1 ϑ, t1 r t1 k ˙ ¨ ˙ S (x, t) = b(ij) Sij + −1 ϑ− ϑ,ii . θ0 t(0) t(0) CS

73

(4.4.14) (4.4.15) (4.4.16)

Proof of Lemma 4.4 Proceeding in a manner similar to that used when deriving eqn (4.3.17), for the field equations (4.4.1) we construct the local conservation law 1 ∂ P (x, t) + Q (x, t) = [Ri (x, t)] ,i +S (x, t) , 2 ∂t

(4.4.17)

where P, Q, Ri and S are given by formulas (4.4.13–16). Next, we integrate eqn (4.4.17) from t = 0 to t = p (x) with the use of formula (4.1.32), so as to get p(x)

1 [P (x, p (x)) − P (x, 0)] + 2   =

Q (x, t) dt + Ri (x, p (x)) p,i (x) 0

p(x)



 Ri (x, t) dt ,i +

0

(4.4.18)

p(x)

S (x, t) dt. 0

Finally, integrating eqn (4.4.18) over B and using the divergence theorem, we obtain the required identity (4.4.12); this is a generalized energy identity for the problem (4.4.1–3). Proof of Theorem 4.4 introduce the set

For a fixed point (z, λ) ∈ {B−D (t)} × (0, t), we Ω = B ∩ Συλ (z),

(4.4.19)

where υ is determined by the inequality (4.4.7). Furthermore, we introduce a function pλ (x) using this formula λ − υ −1 |x − z| for x ∈ Ω, (4.4.20) pλ (x) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω. Then, pλ (x) > 0 in Ω and Ω ∩ D0 (t) = ∅.

(4.4.21)

From this and the definitions of Ri and S, we get

p λ (x)

Ri (x, t) ni (x) dtda = 0, ∂B

0

(4.4.22)

74


and

p λ (x)

S (x, t) dtdυ = 0. B

(4.4.23)

0

Next, using the definitions of P (x, t) and pλ (x), we obtain P (x, pλ (x)) for x ∈ Ω, P (x, pλ (x)) − P (x, 0) = 0 for x ∈ / Ω.

(4.4.24)

Thus, putting pλ (x) into the identity (4.4.12), and using eqns (4.4.22–24) along with the non-negative character of Q, we arrive at the estimate 1 1 P (x, pλ (x)) dυ ≤ |Ri (x, pλ (x))| dυ. (4.4.25) 2 υ Ω

Ω

From the field equation (4.4.1)2 , there follows ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ¨ = CS−1 (kϑ,ii −αθ0 S˙ kk ) on Ω × (0, t) , whence t1 −1 C (kϑ,ii −αθ0 S˙ kk ) − ϑ˙ + t1 ϑ¨ = t(0) S

t1 − 1 ϑ˙ on Ω × (0, t) . t(0)

(4.4.26)

(4.4.27)

Now, in view of eqns (4.4.15) and (4.4.27) an alternative form of the integrand on the right-hand side of the inequality (4.4.25) is |Ri (x, pλ (x))| = ˙ i θ−1 |ρ−1 S˙ ij Sjk ,k +k ϑ, 0

t1 −1 C (kϑ,kk −αθ0 S˙ kk ) + t(0) S

t1 − 1 ϑ˙ |, t(0)

(4.4.28)

which leads to the estimate

* * * * * S˙ * 2 * ˙ * t k * * * ϑ,i * ij 1 υ −1 |Ri (x, pλ (x))| ≤ ρ−1 * * |Sjk ,k | + * * |ϑ,kk | * υ * t(0) θ0 CS * υ * * * * * * k t − t * * * ϑ˙ * ˙ i ** ** t1 1 ** k ϑ, 1 (0) * * * * * ˙ i** + * *αθ0 S˙ kk * + *. *ϑ, * * t(0) υ * t(0) θ0 CS * υ * θ0

(4.4.29)

In order to estimate from above the right-hand side of the inequality (4.4.29), we employ the inequality √ 1 εâ + εˆ−1 b , ab ≤ (4.4.30) 2 where εˆ is a dimensionless positive parameter, while a and b are arbitrary nonnegative physical fields of the same dimension, recall eqn (4.3.31).


Letting in eqn (4.4.30)

+ 2

a = (Sij ,j ) , b = we obtain

S˙ ij υ

75

,2 (4.4.31)

, εˆ = 1,

* * * S˙ * 1 1 ˙ ˙ * ij * Sij ,j Sik ,k + 2 Sij Sij . * * |Sjk ,k | ≤ * υ * 2 υ

(4.4.32)

Letting in eqn (4.4.30) + 2

a = (ϑ,ii ) , b =

˙i ϑ, υ

,2 ,

CE εˆ = CS

t(0) t1

2 ,

(4.4.33)

we obtain

  * * 2 + ˙ ,2 * 1 C t 2 * ϑ, ˙ t C ϑ, (0) * i* E E 1 i 2 . (ϑ,kk ) + |ϑ,kk | * * ≤  * υ * 2 CS t1 CS t(0) υ

(4.4.34)

To estimate the third term on the right-hand side of inequality (4.4.29), we set in eqn (4.4.30) 20 ,2 + ˙i k ϑ, 2 ˙ 2 a = (αθ0 ) Skk , b = , υ (4.4.35) −1/2 t(0) t1 CE CE 1− 1− 1− > 0, εˆ = t1 CS CS t(0) and obtain * * −1/2 * k ϑ˙ * * * 1 t t1 CE CE (0) * ,i * * * 2 ˙ 1− 1− 1− α2 θ02 S˙ kk * * *αθ0 Skk * ≤ * υ * 2 t1 CS CS t(0) 1/2 −1 2 2 t1 t1 k CE CE ˙i ϑ, 1− 1− 1− . + 2 t(0) CS CS t(0) υ (4.4.36) Finally, letting in eqn (4.4.30) + ,2 2 t(0) −1 ϑ˙ ˙ (4.4.37) a= , b = ϑ,i , εˆ = 1 + , t(0) υ t1 we obtain   * * −1 + ˙ ,2 * ϑ˙ * * * 1 2 t t ϑ (0) (0) ** ˙ * * ˙ i . ϑ, + 1+ * *ϑ,i * ≤  1 + * * t(0) υ * 2 t1 t(0) υ t1 20

(4.4.38)

The inequality εˆ > 0 in eqn (4.4.35) is implied by the inequalities (1.3.55) and (1.3.56).

76


Thus, in view of eqns (4.4.29), (4.4.32), (4.4.34), (4.4.36) and (4.4.38), we arrive at 1 υ −1 |Ri (x, pλ (x))| ≤ ρ−1 Sik ,k Sij ,j 2 1 ρ−1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ 1 ˙2 ˙ ˙ Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij + Skk + 2 υ2 3 3 3   2 2 + ˙ ,2 1 t1 k 2  CE t(0) CS t1 ϑ,i  2 + (ϑ,kk ) + 2 t(0) CS θ0 CS t1 CE t(0) υ − 12 t(0) 1 t1 1 CE CE t1 2 1− 1− 1− α2 θ02 S˙ kk + 2 t(0) CS θ0 t1 CS CS t(0) 1/2 −1 2 t1 t1 k ˙ 2 CE CE 1− 1− 1− + (ϑ,i ) t(0) CS CS t(0) υ2   + ˙ ,2 t(0) −1 t k t1 − t(0) ϑ (0) ˙ i )2  .  1+ (ϑ, + 1+ + 2θ0 t1 t(0) υ t1 If we now employ the identity α 2 θ0 1 = CS 3 (3λ + 2µ)

1−

CE CS

(4.4.39)

,

(4.4.40)

we transform the inequality (4.4.39) to the form 1 υ −1 |Ri (x, pλ (x))| ≤ ρ−1 Sik ,k Sij ,j 2 1 ˙2 1 ρ−1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ ˙ ˙ Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij + Skk + 2 υ2 3 3 3   2 2 + ˙ ,2 t1 1 t1 k 2  CE t(0) CS ϑ,i  2 + (ϑ,kk ) + 2 t(0) CS θ0 CS t1 CE t(0) υ 1 + 2 +

t1 t(0)

1 3 (3λ + 2µ)

2

CE 1− CS

1/2 CE t1 ˙ 2 CE 1− 1− 1− S CS CS t(0) kk −1 t1 k 2 ˙ 2 CE ϑ,i 1− 1− CS t(0) CS θ0 υ 2

1/2

  + ˙ ,2 t(0) −1 t(0) ˙ 2 k t1 − t(0) ϑ  1+ + 1+ + ϑ,i  . 2θ0 t1 t(0) υ t1

(4.4.41)


77

On the other hand, using the definition of P (x, t), and the identity (4.4.40), we obtain 1 1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ 1 −1 ˙ ˙ P (x, pλ (x)) = ρ Sik ,k Sij,j + Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij 2 2 2µ 3 3 CE 1 t1 ˙ 2 t1 2 1 1− 1− + S + k (ϑ,ii )2 3 (3λ + 2µ) CS t(0) kk θ0 CS t(0) t1 t1 2 ˙2 2 ˙ ˙ + − 1 CS ϑ + t1 kCS (ϑ,i ) − 2 − 1 kCS ϑ,ii ϑ . t(0) t(0) (4.4.42) Upon integration of eqns (4.4.41 and 42) over Ω, in light of the inequality (4.4.25), we find 1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ 1 ˙ ˙ − Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij dυ 2µ ρυ 2 3 3 Ω ( 1/2 ) CE t1 CE 1 1 2 1− 1− 1− 1− − S˙ kk dυ + 3 (3λ + 2µ) CS t(0) CS 3ρυ 2 1 + θ0 CS

t1 2 2 k (ϑ,ii ) + t(0)

Ω

−

2

t1 k t(0) θ0 CS

  CE CS

t(0) t1

Ω

−

t1 t(0)

2

CE 1− CS

Ω

t1 2 ˙2 2 ˙ − 1 CS ϑ + t1 kCS (ϑ,i ) dυ t(0)

2 2

(ϑ,kk ) +

CE CS

 2 + ˙ ,2 t1 ϑ,i  dυ t(0) υ

−1 2 + ˙ ,2 t1 k CE ϑ,i 1− 1− dυ CS t(0) θ0 CS υ

1/2

Ω

  + ˙ ,2 t(0) −1 t(0) ˙ 2 k t1 − t(0) ϑ  1+ ϑ,i  dυ + 1+ − θ0 t1 υt(0) t1 Ω t1 2 ˙ −1 kϑ,ii CS ϑdυ. ≤ θ0 CS t(0) Ω

(4.4.43) Letting 2

a = (kϑ,ii ) ,

2 b = CS ϑ˙ ,

εˆ = 1 +

t(0) t1

in the inequality (4.4.30), we obtain * * t(0) −1 2 ˙ 2 t(0) * * 2 2 ˙ k (ϑ,ii ) + 1 + CS ϑ . 2 |kϑ,ii | *CS ϑ* ≤ 1 + t1 t1

(4.4.44)

(4.4.45)

78


Thus, using the inequalities (4.4.43) and (4.4.45), we obtain 1 1 1 ˙ 1 ˙ ˙ ˙ − Sij − Skk δij Sij − Skk δij dυ 2µ ρυ 2 3 3 +

Ω

CE 1 1− 1− 3 (3λ + 2µ) CS

2

+

+

+

k θ0 t(0)

t2(0)

k θ 0 t1

1−

k t(0) θ0 CS t1

t1 −1 t(0)

k CS t(0)

CS t1 + CE t(0)

t1 t(0)

(

1−

1/2 ) 1 CE 2 1− 1− − dυ S˙ kk CS 3ρυ 2

CE CS

Ω

2

(ϑ,ii ) dυ Ω

t(0) t1

, −1 + CS t2(0) 1 +1 − 2 ϑ˙ 2 dυ kt1 υ Ω

3 ( 1 −1 t1 t1 CE 2 CE 1− 1− 1− t(0) CS CS t(0)

1 ) CE 2 1 ˙ i )2 dυ ≤ 0. 1− (ϑ, CS υ2 Ω

(4.4.46) It follows from the definition of υ (recall eqns (4.4.7–10)) that the coefficients of the first two integrals, as well as the coefficient of the last integral in eqn (4.4.46), are non-negative. Since 1−

t(0) CE > 0, > 0, CS t1

(4.4.47)

then also the coefficient of the third integral in eqn (4.4.46) is non-negative. We will now show that the coefficient of the fourth integral in eqn (4.4.46) is non-negative. Indeed, the definition of υ implies that υ 2 ≥ υ32 1/2 −1 t1 t1 k CE CE CS t1 1− 1− . = + 1− CS t(0) t(0) CE t(0) CS CS t(0) (4.4.48) Therefore, since the second term in {} is positive, we obtain 3 t1 CS t1 k . (4.4.49) υ2 ≥ CS t(0) t(0) CE t(0) 3

The latter inequality together with the inequalities t1 CS > 1, ≥1 CE t(0)

(4.4.50)


79

implies that υ2 ≥

kt1 , CS t2(0)

(4.4.51)

so that, the coefficient of the fourth integral in eqn (4.4.46) is non-negative. As a result, the left-hand side of the inequality (4.4.46) is a sum of five non-negative terms. Since, in view of eqn (4.4.46) that sum is non-positive, each of these integrals must vanish. As a result, we find, in particular, that S˙ ij (x, pλ (x)) = 0, ϑ˙ (x, pλ (x)) = 0 in Ω.

(4.4.52)

Using the definition of pλ (x) and passing in eqn (4.4.52) to the limit x → z, we obtain S˙ ij (z, λ) = 0, ϑ˙ (z, λ) = 0.

(4.4.53)

Since (z, λ) is an arbitrary point of the Cartesian product {B − D (t)} × (0, t), and since the pair (Sij , ϑ) is smooth in B × [0, ∞), from eqn (4.4.53) we infer that $ % (4.4.54) S˙ ij = 0, ϑ˙ = 0 on B − D (t) × [0, t]. Finally, integrating these relations over the time and using the conditions Sij (·, 0) = 0, ϑ (·, 0) = 0 on B − D (t) ,

(4.4.55)

$ % B − D (t) × [0, t] .

(4.4.56)

we obtain Sij = 0, ϑ = 0 on

This completes the proof of Theorem 4.4.

This theorem implies that an upper bound of speeds of the stress–temperature (0) (0) 1/2 disturbances described by eqns (4.4.1–3) depends on υ1 = (2µ/ρ) , υ2 = (0) 1/2 1/2 [(3λ + 2µ) /ρ] , υ3 = (k/t0 CS ) , and on the ratios t1 /t(0) and CE /CS . The upper bound goes to infinity as t0 → 0 (t1 > 0) and as t1 → 0, similarly to the case of PTP of the G-L theory in Section 4.2. For t1 = t0 > 0 the speeds υ1 and υ2 given by eqns (4.4.8) and (4.4.9) are identical with the speeds υ1 and υ2 given by eqns (4.3.8) and (4.3.9), while the speed υ3 given by eqn (4.4.10) is greater than υ3 given by eqn (4.3.10). From this, we conclude that, for t1 = t0 > 0, the domain of influence for the NSTP described by eqns (4.4.1–3) is larger than the domain of influence for the SHFP described by eqns (4.3.1–3), provided the supports of thermomechanical loadings are identical and υ = υ3 in both problems. The latter two hypotheses are satisfied for example when in both problems the thermomechanical loading is specified only in terms of the initial stresses and stress rates on the same support, and when t0 is a sufficiently small time. Let us also note that for α = 0 (CE = CS ) the NSTP described by eqns (4.4.1– 3) separates into two problems: (a) the problem of propagation of isothermal, elastic stress disturbances described by eqns (4.4.1)1 , (4.4.2)2 and (4.4.3)1 , at

80


α = 0; (b) the problem of propagation of temperature in a rigid heat conductor described by eqns (4.4.1)2 , (4.4.2)2 and (4.4.3)2 , at α = 0. In the context of the first problem we have a theorem on the domain of influence with a speed (0) (0) υ ≥ max υ1 , υ2 , while for the second problem we have a theorem on the (0)

domain of influence with the speed υ ≥ υ3

(t(0) = t0 ) 21 .

4.5 The displacement–temperature problem for an inhomogeneous anisotropic body in the L–S and G–L theories In this section we describe the domain of influence results for inhomogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic solids of the L–S and G–L theories that have been obtained only recently (Ignaczak et al., 1986; Carbonaro and Ignaczak, 1987). The presentation of the results is confined to a formulation of the domain of influence theorems for a mixed displacement–temperature initial boundary value problem, and no proof of the results is given. Instead, an analysis of the results obtained that should prove useful for a wide range of researchers in the field of thermoelastic waves in the non-homogeneous and anisotropic bodies, is discussed. 4.5.1 A thermoelastic wave propagating in an inhomogeneous anisotropic L–S model A mixed displacement–temperature initial-boundary value problem for an inhomogeneous anisotropic body of the L–S theory is described, in components, by eqns (2.1.3)–(2.1.5). An alternative form of the problem, in which direct notation is used, reads. Find a pair (u, θ) that satisfies the field equations divC(∇u) − ρ¨ u + div(θM) = −b on B × [0, ∞), ˙ ˆ˙ = −ˆ r div(K∇θ) − CE θˆ + θ0 M · ∇u

(4.5.1)

the initial conditions u (·, 0) = u0 , u˙ (·, 0) = u˙ 0 on B, θ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , θ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

(4.5.2)

and the boundary conditions u = u on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), [C(∇u) + θM]n = s on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), θ = θ on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(4.5.3)

−(K∇θ) · n = q on ∂B4 × (0, ∞). Here, u and θ denote the displacement and temperature fields, respectively, ¯ × [0, ∞); B is a region of E3 occupied by the non-homogeneous defined on B anisotropic thermoelastic material, and [0, ∞) is the time interval. In addition, 21 The domain of influence theorem for the problem of propagation of temperature in a rigid heat conductor was proved by Bialy (1983), pp. 52–53.

The displacement–temperature problem

81

θ0 is a fixed uniform reference temperature; ρ = ρ(x) are the mass density, CE = CE (x) the specific heat for zero strain, and r = r(x, t) the heat supply (scalar) fields, respectively; b = b(x, t) is the body force (vector) field; K = K(x) and M = M(x) are the conductivity and stress–temperature (second-order) tensor fields, respectively; and C = C(x) is the elasticity (fourth-order) tensor field. Moreover, the superimposed dot denotes the partial derivative with respect to time t, and the hut operator is defined by fˆ = f + t0 f˙

(4.5.4)

¯ × [0, ∞); the parameter t0 in eqn (4.5.4) is the for any function f = f (x, t) on B relaxation time of the L–S theory; (∂B1 , ∂B2 ) and (∂B3 , ∂B4 ) in eqns (4.5.3) are two partitions of the boundary ∂B of B such that ∂B = ∂B1 ∪ ∂B2 = ∂B3 ∪ ∂B4 , ∂B1 ∩ ∂B2 = ∂B3 ∩ ∂B4 = ∅,

(4.5.5)

and n = n(x) is the unit outward vector normal to ∂B at x. Finally, (u0 , u˙ 0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 ) in eqns (4.5.2) and (u , s , θ , q ) in eqns (4.5.3) are prescribed systems of functions that determine the initial and boundary thermomechanical loads, respectively. Clearly, a displacement–temperature wave corresponding to the problem (4.5.1)–(4.5.3) is produced by an external thermomechanical load that is represented by the system of functions (b, r, u0 , u˙ 0 , ϑ0 , ϑ˙ 0 , u , s , θ , q ).

(4.5.6)

Let B(t) denote a support of the thermomechanical load for a fixed time t, i.e. the ¯ on which the load does not vanish over the time interval [0, t]. set of points of B Let C > 0 be a constant of the velocity dimension that satisfies the inequality C ≥ max(C1 , C2 ),

(4.5.7)

where

   ( )2 1/2   1/2    1 θ 1/2  θ0 1 0 C1 = sup |M| + |A| + |M|     2 ρCE 2 ρCE B,|m|=1      ( )2 1/2   1/2  |K|   1 θ 1/2  θ0 1 0 |M| + + |M| C2 = sup .  t0 CE   2 ρCE B   2 ρCE 

(4.5.8) Here, A = A(x, m) is the (second order) “acoustic tensor in the propagation direction m” that is defined for any unit vector m by the relation A(x, m)a = ρ−1 (x)C[a ⊗ m]m, where a is an arbitrary vector.

(4.5.9)

82


Moreover, let S(x, Ct) denote an open ball in E3 with radius Ct and center at x. We shall call the domain of influence of the thermomechanical load at the instant t for the mixed problem (4.5.1)–(4.5.3) the set ¯ : B(t) ∩ S(x, Ct) = ∅}, B∗ (t) = {x ∈ B

(4.5.10)

where C is defined by eqns (4.5.7)–(4.5.9). The following theorem shows that on [0, t] the thermomechanical load of the mixed prolem has no influence on points outside of B∗ (t). Theorem 4.5 (Domain of influence theorem for MDTP of the L–S theory). Let (u, θ) be a solution to the problem (4.5.1)–(4.5.3). Then u = 0,

θ=0

¯ − B∗ (t)} × [0, t]. on {B

Proof. (see (Ignaczak et al., 1986)).

(4.5.11)

Theorem 4.5 implies that for a finite time t and for a bounded support of the thermomechanical load B(t), the thermoelastic disturbance generated by the pair (u, θ) satisfying eqns (4.5.1)–(4.5.3) vanishes outside of a bounded domain that depends on the load support, the bounds for the thermomechanical constitutive fields, and the relaxation time t0 . This theorem also shows that the thermoelastic disturbance propagates as a wave from the domain B(t) with a finite speed equal to or less than the speed C defined by the relations (4.5.7)–(4.5.8). It follows from the definition of C that C → ∞ as t0 → 0 + 0. Therefore, if the relaxation time tends to zero, the thermoelastic disturbance described by (u, θ) gains an infinite speed, as should be expected since in this case the MDTP of the L–S theory reduces to a MDTP of classical hyperbolic-parabolic thermoelasticity. The definition of velocity C also implies that, for a particular non-homogeneous and anisotropic thermoelastic solid of the L–S theory in which the acoustic and conductivity tensor fields are relatively small, i.e. when θ0 1 t0 θ0 1 |M|2 , |M|2 , |K| (4.5.12) |A| 4 ρCE 4 ρ the maximum speed of a thermoelastic wave is given by the formula 1/2 θ0 C0 = sup |M| . ρCE B

(4.5.13)

This formula shows that for a non-homogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic body in which the acoustic and heat conductivity tensor fields are relatively small, the maximum speed of a thermoelastic wave in the L–S theory is dominated by a suitable scaled stress–temperature tensor field. Also, note that if |M| is relatively small, the formula for C1 reduces to that of a domain of influence theorem of classical isothermal elastodynamics (Gurtin, 1972; Eringen and S ¸ uhubi, 1975), while the formula for C2 reduces to that of


83

a domain of influence theorem for a non-homogeneous anisotropic rigid heat conductor. Finally, for a finite value of |M|, the velocities C1 and C2 represent upper bounds for the velocities of a quasi-mechanical and of a quasi-thermal wave, respectively, propagating in the non-homogeneous anisotropic L–S model. 4.5.2 A thermoelastic wave propagating in an inhomogeneous anisotropic G–L model A mixed displacement–temperature initial-boundary value problem for a nonhomogeneous anisotropic body of the G–L theory is described, in components, by eqns (2.1.11)–(2.1.13); when direct notation is used, the statement of the problem reads: Find a pair (u, θ) that satisfies the field equations ˙ = −b divC(∇u) − ρ¨ u + div[M(θ + t1 θ)] on B × [0, ∞), ¨ + θ0 M · ∇u˙ = −r div(K∇θ) − CE (θ˙ + t0 θ)

(4.5.14)

the initial conditions u (·, 0) = u0 , u˙ (·, 0) = u˙ 0 on B, θ (·, 0) = ϑ0 , θ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

(4.5.15)

and the boundary conditions u = u on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), ˙ = s on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), [C(∇u) + M(θ + t1 θ)]n θ = θ on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(4.5.16)

−(K∇θ) · n = q on ∂B4 × (0, ∞). All the symbols in eqns (4.5.14) and (4.5.16) have similar meanings to those of Section 4.5.1. The existence of two relaxation times t0 and t1 (t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0) in eqns (4.5.14) and (4.5.16) makes a difference between the characterizations (4.5.1)–(4.5.3) and (4.5.14)–(4.5.16). Clearly, the set B(t) from Section 4.5.1 is also a support of the thermomechanical load at an instant t for the problem (4.5.14)–(4.5.16). A domain of influence of the thermomechanical load at an instant t for the mixed problem (4.5.14)–(4.5.16) is defined as ¯ : B(t) ∩ S(x, Ct) = ∅}, B∗ (t) = {x ∈ B

(4.5.17)

where C is a constant of the velocity dimension that satisfies the inequality C ≥ max(C1 , C2 ),

(4.5.18)

84


in which

   )2 1/2  (  1/2    1 θ 1/2  θ0 1 0 C1 = sup |M| + |A| + |M|    2 ρCE B,|m|=1   2 ρCE 

   ( )2 1/2   1/2  |K|   1 t θ 1/2  θ0 1 t1 1 0 |M| + + |M| . C2 = sup  t0 CE   2 t0 ρCE B   2 t0 ρCE  (4.5.19) With regard to the MDTP characterized by eqns (4.5.14)–(4.5.16), the following theorem holds true. Theorem 4.6 (Domain of influence theorem for MDTP of the G–L theory). Let (u, θ) be a solution to the system (4.5.14)–(4.5.16). Then u = 0,

θ=0

¯ − B∗ (t)} × [0, t], on {B

(4.5.20)

∗

where B (t) is given by the relations (4.5.17)–(4.5.19). Proof. (see (Carbonaro and Ignaczak, 1987)).

A physical interpretation of Theorem 4.6 is similar to that of Theorem 4.5. Moreover, the definition of C [see eqns (4.5.18) and (4.5.19)] implies that the velocities C1 and C2 correspond, respectively, to the maximum speed of a quasimechanical and of a quasi-thermal wave propagating in the G–L model; and for |M| = 0 they reduce to the maximum speeds of a pure mechanical and a pure thermal wave, respectively. Also, for a particular non-homogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic solid in which the acoustic and heat conductivity tensor fields are relatively small, i.e. when 2 θ0 t0 θ0 1 t1 1 |M|2 , |M|2 , |K| (4.5.21) |A| 4 ρCE 4 t0 ρ the maximum speed of a thermoelastic wave is given by 1/2 θ0 t1 C0 = sup |M| . t0 ρCE B

(4.5.22)

In addition, if (C1 , C2 ) stands for a pair of velocities in the L–S theory [see, eqn (4.5.8)], and if the thermomechanical constitutive fields of the L–S and G–L models, such as K and M, are identical, we have the results (t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0) C1 = C1

and

C2 ≥ C2

(4.5.23)

and C2 = C2 ⇔ t1 = t0 > 0.

(4.5.24)


85

Therefore, the following observations are in order. If the supports of the thermomechanical load in a MDTP of the L–S and G–L theories are the same, then: (i) the domain of influence of the G–L theory is not smaller than that of the L–S theory, and (ii) the domain of influence of the G–L theory coincides with that of the L–S theory if t1 = t0 . To wind up this section we refer the reader to a survey article on the domain of influence results in generalized thermoelasticity (Ignaczak, 1991) as well as to other survey articles on the subject (Chandrasekharaiah, 1986, 1998). Remark 4.2 Theorems on the domain of influence for a homogeneous isotropic body given in Sections 4.1–4.4 specify the domains that are not reached by fronts of a thermoelastic disturbance for a time t > 0. However, those theorems do not say anything about the nature of these fronts. It follows from the definition of the domain of influence D (t) that this domain contains the support of thermomechanical loading D0 (t) and all (open or closed) fronts of thermoelastic disturbances propagating from D0 (t). Some of those fronts may coincide with the whole or a part of the boundary ∂D (t). In such cases the outer normal vector on ∂D (t) is also the direction of a front of thermoelastic disturbances. Similarly, the domains B (t) and B∗ (t) of Section 4.5 may be used to interpret propagation of thermoelastic waves in a non-homogeneous and anisotropic body.

5 CONVOLUTIONAL VARIATIONAL PRINCIPLES

5.1 Alternative descriptions of a conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory According to the definition introduced in Section 2.1, a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory may be specified as an array of functions (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) on B × [0, ∞), satisfying the relations: 1 the kinematic and thermal equations 1 (ui ,j +uj ,i ) , gi = ϑ,i 2 the equations of motion Eij =

ui Sij ,j +bi = ρ¨

on B × (0, ∞),

on B × (0, ∞),

(5.1.1)

(5.1.2)

the energy balance equation ¨ − θ0 Mij E˙ ij −qi ,i +r = CE (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

on B × (0, ∞),

(5.1.3)

on B × (0, ∞),

(5.1.4)

the constitutive equations ˙ Sij = Cijkl Ekl + Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ) qi = −kij gj the initial conditions ui (·, 0) = ui0 , ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ0 ,

u˙ i (·, 0) = u˙ i0 ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ 0

on B,

(5.1.5)

and the mixed boundary conditions ui = ui Sij nj = si ϑ = ϑ qi ni = q

on ∂B1 × (0, ∞), on ∂B2 × (0, ∞), on ∂B3 × (0, ∞),

(5.1.6)

on ∂B4 × (0, ∞).

1 In Section 1.3 a thermoelastic process of the G–L theory corresponding to a load (b , r) is i defined as an array of functions (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, η, qi ) that satisfies the field equations (1.3.42– 47). Such a definition is equivalent to that in which (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) satisfies (5.1.1–4).

Alternative descriptions of a conventional thermoelastic process

87

In view of eqns (1.3.48–53), the field equations (5.1.1–4) may be written in the alternative form Eij =

1 2

(ui ,j +uj ,i ) , gi = ϑ,i

Sij ,j +bi = ρ¨ ui

on B × (0, ∞),

on B × (0, ∞),

(5.1.7) (5.1.8)

¨ − θ0 Apq S˙ pq −qi ,i +r = CS (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ)

on B × (0, ∞),

(5.1.9)

˙ Eij = Kijkl Skl + Aij (ϑ + t1 ϑ) qi = −λij qj

on B × (0, ∞).

(5.1.10)

and

Thus, a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory is described either by the field equations (5.1.1–4) and conditions (5.1.5 and 6), or by the field equations (5.1.7–10) and conditions (5.1.5–6). Similarly to what was done in the previous chapters, the process is assumed to be sufficiently smooth on B × [0, ∞). This smoothness may be achieved by imposing appropriate conditions on the material functions, thermomechanical loadings and the domain B appearing in the initial-boundary value problem (5.1.1–6) or in the equivalent problem (5.1.7– 10) with conditions (5.1.5 and 6). In order to obtain a variational formulation of the problem (5.1.1–6) we proceed in a way similar to what is done in classical thermoelasticity (Ie¸san, 1966). This involves two stages. First, we reduce the initial-boundary value problem (5.1.1–6) to an equivalent boundary value problem by replacing the field equations (5.1.1–4) and initial conditions (5.1.5) by the integro-differential field equations implicitly containing the initial conditions. Next, we derive a variational principle for this reduced problem. The reduced problem is also called an alternative problem associated with the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory, and the relations describing it provide an alternative description of that process. In order to obtain the alternative description, we employ a Laplace transform. Let us recall that, if f = f (t) is a function defined over [0, ∞), its Laplace transform is the integral ∞ e−pt f (t) dt, (5.1.11) f¯ (p) = 0

where p is the parameter of transformation. Applying that transformation to eqns (5.1.2), (5.1.3) and (5.1.4)1 , and using the initial conditions (5.1.5), we obtain ¯i − u˙ i0 − pui0 ), S¯ij ,j +¯bi = ρ(p2 u 0 ¯ij − Eij r = CE [pϑ¯ − ϑ0 + t0 (p2 ϑ¯ − ϑ˙ 0 − pϑ0 )] − θ0 Mij (pE ), −¯ qi ,i +¯

¯kl + Mij [ϑ¯ + t1 (pϑ¯ − ϑ0 )], S¯ij = Cijkl E

(5.1.12) (5.1.13) (5.1.14)

88

Convolutional variational principles

where 0 = Eij (·, 0) = u(i0 ,j) . Eij

(5.1.15)

We now divide eqn (5.1.12) by p2 , eqn (5.1.13) by p (t0 p + 1), and eqn (5.1.14) by t1 p + 1 to obtain g S¯ij,j + ¯bi − ρui + li = 0,

(5.1.16)

¯ = 0, ¯ij + W −V¯0 q¯i ,i −CE ϑ¯ + θ0 Mij p V¯0 E

(5.1.17)

¯kl ) − Mij ϑ¯ + mij = 0, pV¯1 (S ij − Cijkl E

(5.1.18)

g¯ (p) = p−2 ,

(5.1.19)

where

V¯0 (p) = [p(t0 p + 1)]

−1

V¯1 (p) = [p(t1 p + 1)]

−1

,

(5.1.20)

,

(5.1.21)

li (p) = g¯(¯bi + ρu˙ i0 + ρpui0 ), 0 ¯ (p) = V¯0 {r + [CE t0 ϑ˙ 0 − θ0 Mij Eij + CE (1 + t0 p) ϑ0 ]}, W

m ¯ ij (p) = t1 ϑ0 pV¯1 Mij .

(5.1.22) (5.1.23) (5.1.24)

Applying now the inverse transform to eqns (5.1.16–18), and using the convolution theorem (Mikusi´ nski, 1957), we obtain g ∗ Sij ,j −ρui + li = 0,

(5.1.25)

−V0 ∗ qi ,i −CE ϑ + θ0 Mij V˙ 0 ∗ Eij + W = 0,

(5.1.26)

V˙ 1 ∗ (Sij − Cijkl Ekl ) − Mij ϑ + mij = 0,

(5.1.27)

where, in view of eqns (5.1.19–24), we have g (t) = t, 1 V0 (t) = 1 − e−t/t0 , V˙ 0 (t) = e−t/t0 , t0 1 V1 (t) = 1 − e−t/t1 , V˙ 1 (t) = e−t/t1 , t1

(5.1.28) (5.1.29) (5.1.30)

li = t ∗ bi + ρ(tu˙ i0 + ui0 ),

(5.1.31)

0 ) + CE ϑ0 , W = V0 ∗ r + V0 (CE t0 ϑ˙ 0 − θ0 Mij Eij

(5.1.32)

mij = t1 ϑ0 V˙ 1 Mij ,

(5.1.33)


89

and where ∗ denotes the convolution over time, that is, for any two functions f1 and f2 defined over [0, ∞) we have

t

f1 ∗ f2 =

f1 (τ ) f2 (t − τ ) dτ.

(5.1.34)

0

In this way we arrive at the following lemma [p. 12 in (Gladysz, 1982)]: Lemma 5.1 The array of functions (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) represents a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory iff it satisfies the integrodifferential field equations Eij =

1 (ui ,j +uj ,i ) 2 gi = ϑ,i

on B × [0, ∞),

on B × [0, ∞),

g ∗ Sij ,j −ρui + li = 0

(5.1.36)

on B × [0, ∞),

−V0 ∗ qi ,i −CE ϑ + θ0 Mij V˙ 0 ∗ Eij + W = 0 V˙ 1 ∗ (Sij − Cijkl Ekl ) − Mij ϑ + mij = 0 qi = −kij gj

(5.1.35)

(5.1.37)

on B × [0, ∞), on B × [0, ∞),

on B × [0, ∞),

(5.1.38) (5.1.39) (5.1.40)

subject to the boundary conditions (5.1.6). Lemma 5.1 states that the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory may be treated as a solution of the boundary value problem described by relations (5.1.35–40) and (5.1.6). The variational description of that process reduces therefore to the determination of a functional associated with that boundary value problem. Another, alternative description of the conventional thermoelastic process may be obtained upon taking eqns (5.1.7–10) in place of eqns (5.1.1–4). In the latter case, we apply the Laplace transform to eqns (5.1.8), (5.1.9) and (5.1.10)1 to obtain ¯i − u˙ i0 − pui0 ), S¯ij ,j +¯bi = ρ(p2 u

(5.1.41)

r = CS [(pϑ¯ − ϑ0 ) + t(0) (p2 ϑ¯ − ϑ˙ 0 − pϑ0 )] −¯ qi ,i +¯ 0 , +θ0 Apq pS¯pq − Spq ! ¯ij − Kijkl S¯kl = Aij ϑ¯ + t1 pϑ¯ − ϑ0 , E

(5.1.42) (5.1.43)

where 0 0 Apq Spq = −Mpq Epq + Apq Mpq (ϑ0 + t1 ϑ˙ 0 ).

(5.1.44) Dividing eqn (5.1.41) through by p2 , eqn (5.1.42) by p t(0) p + 1 , and eqn (5.1.43) by (pt1 + 1), we obtain g S¯ij ,j −ρui + li = 0,

(5.1.45)

90


−V¯ p(p−1 q¯i ,i +θ0 Apq S¯pq ) − CS ϑ¯ + d¯ = 0, ¯ij − Kijkl S¯kl − Aij ϑ¯ + n ¯ ij = 0, V¯1 p E

(5.1.46) (5.1.47)

where the symbols g¯ (p) , V 1 (p) and li (p) are defined by the formulas (5.1.19), (5.1.21) and (5.1.22), respectively, while the functions V (p) , d (p) and nij (p) are given by !−1 V (p) = p t(0) p + 1 , (5.1.48) 0 d (p) = V r + CS ϑ0 p−1 + V (t(0) CS ϑ˙ 0 + ϑ0 Apq Spq ),

nij (p) = t1 ϑ0 pV 1 Aij .

(5.1.49) (5.1.50)

Retransforming the relations (5.1.45–47) to the time domain, we find g ∗ Sij,j − ρui + li = 0,

(5.1.51)

−V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qi,i + θ0 Apq Spq ) − CS ϑ + d = 0,

(5.1.52)

V˙ 1 ∗ (Eij − Kijkl Skl ) − Aij ϑ + nij = 0,

(5.1.53)

where the functions g (t) , V1 (t) and li (t) are given by eqns (5.1.28), (5.1.30) and (5.1.31), respectively, while, in light of eqns (5.1.48–50), the functions V (t) , d (t) and nij (t) become 1 −t/t(0) V˙ (t) = e , t(0)

V (t) = 1 − e−t/t(0) ,

(5.1.54)

0 d (t) = V ∗ r + CS ϑ0 + V (CS t(0) ϑ˙ 0 + θ0 Apq Spq ),

(5.1.55)

nij (t) = t1 ϑ0 V˙ 1 Aij .

(5.1.56)

As a result, the following lemma holds true [p. 26 in (Gladysz, 1982)]: Lemma 5.2 The array of functions (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) is a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory iff it satisfies the field equations Eij =

1 (ui,j + ui,j ) 2 gi = ϑ,i

on B × [0, ∞),

on B × [0, ∞),

g ∗ Sij,j − ρui + li = 0

on B × [0, ∞),

−V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qi,i + θ0 Apq Spq ) − CS ϑ + d = 0 V˙ 1 ∗ (Eij − Kijkl Skl ) − Aij ϑ + nij = 0 gi = −λij qj

on B × [0, ∞), on B × [0, ∞),

on B × [0, ∞),

subject to the boundary conditions (5.1.6).

(5.1.57) (5.1.58) (5.1.59) (5.1.60) (5.1.61) (5.1.62)


91

Let us note that the field equations appearing in both lemmas must be satisfied on B × [0, ∞), that is, in particular for t = 0 and x ∈ B. The latter condition and smoothness of the process guarantee that these equations replace the original field equations on B × [0, ∞) along with the initial conditions on B. We shall next formulate three more lemmas allowing one to describe a conventional thermoelastic process in terms of three pairs of thermomechanical variables: (ui , ϑ) , (Sij , ϑ) and (Sij , qi ) 2 . In accordance with the definition introduced in Section 2.1, a thermomechanical pair (·, ·) made of the variables defining a process is the pair corresponding to that process, provided one may reproduce from the pair the remaining variables determined by that process. With respect to the pair (ui , ϑ) we have: Lemma 5.3 The pair (ui , ϑ) corresponds to a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory iff (1) 1 ∗ V1 ∗ (Cijkl uk ,l ) ,j +t ∗ (Mij ϑ),j −V˙ 1 ∗ ρui + li = 0

V0 ∗ (kij ϑj ) ,i −CE ϑ + θ0 Mij V˙ 0 ∗ ui ,j +W = 0

on B × [0, ∞), (5.1.63)

on B × [0, ∞),

(5.1.64)

and ui = ui

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞),

˙ j = s [Cijkl uk ,l +Mij (ϑ + t1 ϑ)]n i ϑ = ϑ

on ∂B2 × [0, ∞),

on ∂B3 × [0, ∞),

−kij ϑ,j ni = q

on ∂B4 × [0, ∞),

(5.1.65) (5.1.66) (5.1.67) (5.1.68)

where (1)

li

= V˙ 1 ∗ li − t ∗ mij ,j .

(5.1.69)

Proof of Lemma 5.3 The proof is based upon the Lemma 5.1. Eliminating the variables Eij , Sij , gi and qi from the system (5.1.35–40), we arrive at the system (5.1.63 and 64). The boundary conditions (5.1.65–68) are obtained by using the conditions (5.1.6) along with eqns (5.1.35,36,39,40). In order to recover the relations (5.1.35–40) and the conditions (5.1.6) from the relations (5.1.63– 69) it suffices to note that the pair (ui , ϑ) satisfying those relations generates the fields Eij , Sij , gi , qi through the relations (5.1.35 ,36,39,40).

2 A conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory may also be described by a pair (ui , qi ) [see p. 24 in (Gladysz, 1982)].

92


Lemma 5.4 The pair (Sij , ϑ) corresponds to a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory iff ! (1) V˙ 1 ∗ t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl − Aij ϑ + nij = 0 on B × [0, ∞), (5.1.70) V˙ ∗ [1 ∗ (kij ϑ,j ) ,i −θ0 Apq Spq ] − CS ϑ + d = 0

on B × [0, ∞),

(5.1.71)

and ρ−1 (t ∗ Sik ,k +li ) = ui Sij nj = si

ϑ=ϑ

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞),

on ∂B2 × [0, ∞), on ∂B3 × [0, ∞),

−kij ϑ,j ni = q

on ∂B4 × [0, ∞),

(5.1.72) (5.1.73) (5.1.74) (5.1.75)

where (1) nij = nij + V˙ 1 ∗ ρ−1 l(i ,j) .

(5.1.76)

Proof of Lemma 5.4 The proof is based upon Lemma 5.2. Elimination of the variables ui , Eij , gi and qi from the system (5.1.57–62), leads to the field equations (5.1.70 and 71). The boundary conditions (5.1.72–75) are obtained by using the conditions (5.1.6) along with the field equations (5.1.58,59,62) extended to the Cartesian product B × [0, ∞). This completes the proof of the first part of Lemma 5.4. In order to prove that the relations (5.1.70–75) imply eqns (5.1.57–62) and the boundary conditions (5.1.6), it suffices to note that the pair (Sij , ϑ) satisfying eqns (5.1.70–75) generates the fields ui , Eij , gi and qi from the relations (5.1.59,57,58,62). This completes the proof of Lemma 5.4. Lemma 5.5 The pair (Sij , qi ) corresponds to a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory iff it satisfies the relations V˙ 1 ∗ [t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl ] (5.1.77) (2) +CS−1 Aij V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) + nij = 0 on B × [0, ∞), [CS−1 V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qk,k + θ0 Apq Spq )],i −λij qj − CS−1 d ,i = 0 on B × [0, ∞), (5.1.78) and ρ−1 (t ∗ Sik ,k +li ) = ui Sij nj =

si

on ∂B1 × [0, ∞),

on ∂B2 × [0, ∞),

−CS−1 V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) + CS−1 d = ϑ qi ni = q

on ∂B3 × [0, ∞),

on ∂B4 × [0, ∞),

(5.1.79) (5.1.80) (5.1.81) (5.1.82)

Variational principles for a conventional thermoelastic process

93

where nij = nij − CS−1 dAij . (2)

(1)

(5.1.83)

Proof of Lemma 5.5 The proof is also based upon Lemma 5.2. In order to show that eqns (5.1.57–62) and the conditions (5.1.6) appearing in Lemma 5.2 imply eqns (5.1.77–82) and (5.1.79–82), we eliminate the variables ui , Eij , ϑ and gi from the relations (5.1.6,57–62), so as to pass to the relations (5.1.77–82). In order to prove the converse implication, it suffices to note that the pair (Sij , qi ) satisfying the relations (5.1.77–83) generates the fields ui , Eij , ϑ and gi from the relations (5.1.59,57,60,62) in such a way that the array (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) is a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. 5.2 Variational principles for a conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory The present section is devoted to the formulation of five variational principles associated with five alternative descriptions of the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory that were derived in the preceding section. First, we give several basic definitions (Ignaczak, 1980a). A functional is a real-valued function whose domain is a subset of a linear space of functions. If L is a linear space, K is a subset of L and Λ (·) is a functional defined over K, then 3 , for p, p˜ ∈ L,

˜ p ∈ K, p + λ˜

˜ ∈ R, ∀λ

we formally define the variation of Λ (p) at p by d ˜p |˜ . Λ p + λ˜ δp˜Λ (p) = λ=0 ˜ dλ This variation vanishes for a certain p ∈ K, and we write δp˜Λ(p) = 0 on K,

(5.2.1)

(5.2.2)

(5.2.3)

iff δp˜Λ (p) exists and equals zero for every p˜ consistent with eqn (5.2.1). An ordered set of functions (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ), in which ϑ is a sufficiently smooth scalar field over B × [0, ∞), while ui , gi and qi are sufficiently smooth vector fields over B × [0, ∞), and Eij and Sij are sufficiently smooth symmetric tensor fields over B × [0, ∞), is called an admissible process. If p = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) is chosen as an admissible process, and if the operations of addition and multiplication by a scalar are defined as gi + g˜i , qi + q˜i , ˜ij , Sij + S˜ij , ϑ + ϑ, ˜i , Eij + E p + p˜ = ui + u (5.2.4) ˜ λg ˜ i , λq ˜ i , ˜ ij, λS ˜ ij , λϑ, ˜ = λu ˜ i, λE λp 3

The symbol R in eqn (5.2.1) stands for a set of all real numbers.

94


then the set of all admissible processes p is a linear space, which may be identified with L. K may then be taken as the set of all p subject to additional restrictions. In the following, we shall denote by pi and p˜i the stress vectors associated with the processes p and p˜, and by q and q˜ the normal components of the heat-flux vectors associated with the processes p and p˜, that is pi = Sij nj ,

p˜i = S˜ij nj ,

(5.2.5)

and q = qi ni , q˜ = q˜i ni .

(5.2.6)

Based on these definitions we shall now prove the following theorem [p. 15 in (Gladysz, 1982)]: Theorem 5.1 Let K be the set of all admissible processes p. Let p = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) and, for every t ∈ [0, ∞), let us define the functional Λt (·) over K through Λt (p) =

1˙ ˙ V1 ∗ Cijkl Ekl − mij ∗ Eij V0 ∗ t ∗ 2

B

1 + ρV˙ 1 ∗ ui ∗ ui − t ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ Sij ∗ Eij − V˙ 1 ∗ (t ∗ Sik ,k +li ) ∗ ui dv 2 1 1 1 − t ∗ V0 ∗ gi ∗ kij gj + CE ϑ ∗ ϑ + V0 ∗ gi ∗ qi θ0 2 2 B

+ (V0 ∗ qk ,k −W ) ∗ ϑ − θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Mij Eij ∗ ϑ dυ V0 ∗ V1 ∗ (pi − si ) ∗ ui da + V0 ∗ V1 ∗ pi ∗ ui da + ∂B1



+

1  θ0

∂B2

∂B3

t ∗ V0 ∗ q ∗ ϑ da +

(5.2.7)

 t ∗ V0 ∗ (q − q ) ∗ ϑda .

∂B4

Then δp˜Λt (p) = 0 on K, t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.2.8)

iff p = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) is a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory.


95

˜ p ∈ K, ∀λ ˜ ∈ R. Then, according to the Proof. Let p, p˜ ∈ K and let p + λ˜ definition (5.2.2), we obtain δp˜Λt (p) = V˙ 0 ∗

V˙ 1 ∗ (ρui − t ∗ Sij ,j −li ) ∗ u ˜i − V˙ 1 ∗ t ∗ ui ∗ S˜ik ,k dυ B

+V˙ 0 ∗ t ∗

˜ij dυ V˙ 1 ∗ (Cijkl Ekl − Sij ) + Mij ϑ − mij ∗ E B

−V˙ 0 ∗ t ∗ V˙ 1 ∗

+

t ∗ θ0

Eij ∗ S˜ij dυ B

˜ −V0 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Mij Eij + W − CE ϑ ∗ ϑdυ

B



t ∗ V0 ∗  θ0

−

(kij gj + qi ) ∗ g˜i dυ +

B

+V0 ∗ V1 ∗

gi ∗ q˜i dυ +

B

  ∂B1

 

t ∗ V0 ∗ +  θ0

∂B2

∂B3

B

  [(q − q´) ∗ ϑ˜ + ϑ ∗ q˜]da . 

ϑ ∗ q˜da +

q˜k ,k ∗ϑdυ 

  [(pi − si ) ∗ u ˜i + ui ∗ p˜i ] da 

ui ∗ p˜i da +





∂B4

(5.2.9) If now we note that

ui ∗ S˜ik ,k dυ = B

p˜i ∗ ui da + ∂B1

B

ϑ ∗ q˜da +

∂B3

u(i ,j) ∗S˜ij dυ,

(5.2.10)

ϑ,i ∗˜ qi dυ,

(5.2.11)

B

∂B2

ϑ ∗ q˜k ,k dυ =

p˜i ∗ ui da − ϑ ∗ q˜da −

∂B4

B

and V˙ 0 ∗ t ∗ V˙ 1 = V0 ∗ V1 ,

(5.2.12)

96


then the formula (5.2.9) becomes ˜i dυ δp˜Λt (p) = −V˙ 0 ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ (t ∗ Sij ,j −ρui + li ) ∗ u +t ∗ V˙ 0 ∗

B

˜ij dυ V˙ 1 ∗ (Cijkl Ekl − Sij ) + Mij ϑ − mij ∗ E

B

(Eij − u(i ,j) ) ∗ S˜ij dυ

−V0 ∗ V1 ∗ +

t ∗ θ0

B

˜ −V0 ∗ qi ,i +θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Mij Eij + W − CE ϑ ∗ ϑdυ

B





(5.2.13)

t ∗ V0 ∗  (kij gj + qi ) ∗ g˜i dυ + (gi − ϑ,i ) ∗ q˜i  dυ θ0 B B   +V0 ∗ V1 ∗  (ui − ui ) ∗ p˜i da + (pi − si ) ∗ u ˜i da

−

 t + ∗ V0 ∗  θ0

∂B1

∂B2

(ϑ − ϑ) ∗ q˜da +

∂B3



˜  (q − q ) ∗ ϑda

∀˜ p ∈ K.

∂B4

Let us first assume that p is a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. Then, in view of the Lemma 5.1, the relations (5.1.35–40) along with the boundary conditions (5.1.6), as well as the formula (5.2.13) yield p∈K δp˜Λt (p) = 0 ∀˜

∀t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.2.14)

that is, eqn (5.2.8) is satisfied. Let us now assume that eqn (5.2.8) is satisfied, i.e. the right-hand side of eqn (5.2.13) vanishes. Since this vanishing occurs for every p˜ ∈ K, then, assuming p˜ = (˜ ui , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), we obtain the field equation (5.1.37) and the boundary ˜ij , 0, 0, 0, 0), then the vanishing of the condition (5.1.6)2 . If we assume p˜ = (0, E right-hand side of eqn (5.2.13) yields the field equation (5.1.39). In a similar manner we recover the remaining field equations and boundary conditions of Lemma 5.1. This completes the proof of Theorem 5.1. Since, for a function f (t), lim V˙ i ∗ f (t) = f (t) ,

ti →0

(5.2.15)

and lim Vi ∗ f (t) = 1 ∗ f (t)

ti →0

(i = 0, 1),

(5.2.16)


97

therefore, passing in the functional (5.2.7) to the limit when (t0 , t1 ) → (0, 0), we obtain a variational principle of classical thermoelasticity [p. 339 in (Carlson, 1972)]. Finally, note that Theorem 5.1 is a variational principle in which the admissible processes do not have to satisfy any field equations, boundary and initial conditions. It is thus the most general variational formulation of a conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory. This description corresponds to the Hu–Washizu variational principle of linear isothermal elastostatics [p. 122 in (Gurtin, 1972)]. The particular variational principles are obtained by placing various restrictions upon the admissible processes. One such “narrower” principle corresponds to that due to Hellinger–Reissner [p. 27 in (Gladysz, 1982)]. Theorem 5.2 Let t(0) = const (recall eqn (1.3.54) 4 ) and let R be the set of all admissible processes satisfying the strain–displacement relations (5.1.57) and the gradient–temperature relations (5.1.58). Let z = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) ∈ R and, for every t ∈ [0, ∞), let us define the functional Γt (z) over R as follows 1˙ V1 ∗ Kijkl Skl − nij ∗ Sij Γt (z) = V˙ ∗ t ∗ 2 B

1 − ρV˙ 1 ∗ ui ∗ ui − 1 ∗ V1 ∗ Eij ∗ Sij + V˙ 1 ∗ li ∗ ui dυ 2 1 1 1 V ∗ λij ∗ qj ∗ qi − CS ϑ ∗ ϑ − t∗ θ0 2 2 B

−θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Aij Sij ∗ ϑ + V ∗ qi ∗ gi + d ∗ ϑ dυ V ∗ V1 ∗ si ∗ ui da + V ∗ V1 ∗ (ui − ui ) ∗ pi da + ∂B1



1 +  θ0

∂B2

t ∗ V ∗ (ϑ − ϑ ) ∗ qda +

∂B3

(5.2.17)

 t ∗ V ∗ q ∗ ϑda .

∂B4

Then δz˜Γt (z) = 0

on R,

t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.2.18)

iff z is a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory.

4 The hypothesis t (0) = const implies that the function V [see eqn (5.1.54)], treated as an operator, commutes with the spatial differentiation.

98


Proof. The proof is analogous to that of Theorem 5.1, and so, we obtain ˜i dυ δz˜Γt (z) = V˙ ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ (t ∗ Sij ,j +li − ρui ) ∗ u −V˙ ∗

B

t ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ (Eij − Kijkl Skl ) − Aij ϑ − nij ∗ S˜ij dυ

B

t − ∗ θ0

{V ∗ (λij qj + gi ) ∗ q˜i B

+ −V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Aij Sij ) − CS ϑ + d ∗ ϑ˜ dυ   (ui − ui ) ∗ p˜i da + (si − pi ) ∗ u ˜i da +V ∗ V1 ∗   +

t ∗ V0  ∗ θ0

∂B1

∂B3

(ϑ − ϑ ) ∗ q˜da +

∂B2

(5.2.19)



˜  (q − q) ∗ ϑda

∀˜ z ∈ R.

∂B4

If z is a conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory, then, in view of Lemma 5.2, the right-hand side of eqn (5.2.19) vanishes, that is, the condition (5.2.18) is satisfied. Conversely, since z˜ is an arbitrary element of R, then, taking z˜ = (˜ ui , 0, 0, 0, 0, 0), from eqn (5.2.18) we infer that eqns (5.1.59) and (5.1.6)2 of Lemma 5.2 are satisfied. Proceeding in a similar way, we reproduce the remaining field equations and boundary conditions appearing in Lemma 5.2. We thus conclude that, if z satisfies eqn (5.2.18), then z is a conventional thermoelastic process. Theorems 5.1 and 5.2 provide variational characterizations of the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory, corresponding to the Lemmas 5.1 and 5.2. We shall now give three more variational descriptions of that process, corresponding to Lemmas 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5. First note that Lemma 5.3 offers a description of the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory in terms of the pair (ui , ϑ). Hence, the variational principle associated with it is called a displacement–temperature variational description of that process. In order to formulate this principle we introduce the concept of a kinematically and thermally admissible process p = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ), satisfying the strain–displacement relations (5.1.35), the gradient–temperature relations (5.1.36), the constitutive relations (5.1.39) and the Fourier law (5.1.40), as well as the displacement and temperature boundary conditions (5.1.6)1,3 . Since the process is described by the fields ui and ϑ only, in the following it is represented by a pair (ui , ϑ). For such a process the following theorem holds true. Theorem 5.3 (p. 19 in (Gladysz, 1982)) Let K be the set of all kinematically and thermally admissible processes p . Let p = (ui , ϑ) ∈ K and for every


99

t ∈ [0, ∞) let us define the functional φt (·) over K as follows 1˙ φt (p ) = V˙ 0 ∗ t ∗ V1 ∗ Cijkl uk ,l −mij ∗ u(i ,j) 2 B 1 + ρV˙ 1 ∗ ui ∗ ui − V˙ 1 ∗ li ∗ ui dυ 2 1 1 1 V0 ∗ kij ϑ,j ∗ϑ,i −θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Mij ui ,j ∗ϑ + CE ϑ ∗ ϑ − W ∗ ϑ dυ − t∗ θ0 2 2 B 1 t ∗ V0 ∗ q ∗ ϑda. + V0 ∗ V1 ∗ si ∗ ui da − θ0 ∂B2

∂B4

(5.2.20) Then p ) = 0 on K , t ∈ [0, ∞), δp˜ φt (˜

(5.2.21)

iff p = (ui , ϑ) is a pair corresponding to a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. Proof. obtain

According to the definition of K , and in view of eqn (5.2.2), we

−V˙ 0 ∗

δp˜ φt (p ) = (1) 1 ∗ V1 ∗ Cijkl u(k ,l) ,j +t ∗ (Mij ϑ) ,j −ρV˙ 1 ∗ ui + li ∗ u ˜i dυ

B

t + ∗ θ0

˜ V0 ∗ (kij ϑ,j ) ,i −CE ϑ + θ0 V˙ 0 ∗ Mij ui ,j +W ∗ ϑdυ

B

+V0 ∗ V1 ∗

(pi − si ) ∗ u ˜i da +

∂B2

t ∗ V0 ∗ θ0

∂B4

˜ (q − q ) ∗ ϑda. (5.2.22)

Let us now assume that p = (ui , ϑ) is a pair corresponding to a conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory. Then, on the basis of Lemma 5.3, the relations (5.1.63–68) are satisfied and the right-hand side of eqn (5.2.22) vanishes, that is, eqn (5.2.21) holds. This completes the proof of the first part of Theorem 5.3. Let us further assume that the relation (5.2.21) is satisfied, that is, the righthand side of eqn (5.2.22) vanishes for every admissible p˜ and p ∈ K . Then, ui , 0) in eqn (5.2.21), we conclude that the field equation (5.1.63) letting p˜ = (˜ and the boundary condition (5.1.66) of Lemma 5.3 hold true. On the other hand, ˜ in eqn (5.2.21), we conclude that the field equation (5.1.64) letting p˜ = (0, ϑ) and the condition (5.1.68) of that lemma hold as well. Hence, given that p ∈ K , we infer that p is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory.

100


In order to give a variational description of the pair (Sij , ϑ) corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory, we introduce the concept of a stress and temperature admissible process. This is an admissible process p = (ui , Eij , Sij , ϑ, gi , qi ) such that the strain–displacement relations (5.1.57), the gradient–temperature relation (5.1.58), the constitutive relations (5.1.61) and the Fourier law (5.1.62), as well as the stress and temperature boundary conditions (5.1.6)2,3 are satisfied. Since that process is determined by the fields Sij and ϑ, it shall be denoted by a pair (Sij , ϑ). We now formulate the following variational principle for that process corresponding to the Lemma 5.4: Theorem 5.4 Let t(0) = const and let R be the set of all stress and temperature admissible processes. Let z = (Sij , ϑ) ∈ R and for every t ∈ [0, ∞) let us define the functional ψt (z) over R as follows 1˙ ˙ V1 ∗ Kijkl Skl − nij ∗ Sij ψt (z ) = V ∗ 2 B 1 t ∗ Sij ,j +li ∗ Sik ,k dυ +ρ−1 V˙ 1 ∗ 2 (5.2.23) 1 1 1 ˙ + V ∗ kij ϑ,j ∗ϑ,i + CS ϑ ∗ ϑ + θ0 V ∗ Aij Sij ∗ ϑ − d ∗ ϑ dυ θ0 2 2 B 1 − V˙ ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ ui ∗ pi da + V ∗ q ∗ ϑda. θ0 ∂B1

∂B4

Then δz˜ ψt (z ) = 0

on R ,

t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.2.24)

iff z = (Sij , ϑ) is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. Proof. Using the definition of R , and computing the variation of the functional ψt (·) according to eqn (5.2.2), we find ! ˙ δz˜ ψt (z ) = −V ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl B (1)

∗ S˜ij dυ 1 (5.2.25) ˜ V˙ ∗ [1 ∗ (kij ϑ,j ) ,i −θ0 Apq Spq ] − CS ϑ + d ∗ ϑdυ − ∗ θ0 B 1 ˜ (ui − ui ) ∗ p˜i da + V ∗ (q − q) ∗ ϑda ∀˜ z ∈ R . +V˙ ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ θ0 −Aij ϑ + nij

∂B1

∂B4


101

If z is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory, then, in view of Lemma 5.4, the right-hand side of eqn (5.2.25) vanishes, that is, the relation (5.2.24) holds true. On the other hand, if z ∈ R and the relation (5.2.24) is satisfied, then an arbitrary choice of z˜ implies that z is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory. Finally, in order to give a variational description of the pair (Sij , qi ) corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process of the G–L theory, we introduce the concept of a stress and heat-flux admissible process. This is a process that satisfies the strain–displacement relations (5.1.57), the gradient– temperature relations (5.1.58), the energy balance (5.1.60), the constitutive relations (5.1.61), as well as the stress and heat-flux boundary conditions (5.1.6)2,4 . That process shall be denoted by a pair (Sij , qi ). We now formulate the following variational principle for that process, corresponding to Lemma 5.5: Theorem 5.5 Let t(0) = const and let Q be the set of all stress and heat-flux admissible processes. Let s = (Sij , qi ) ∈ Q and for every t ∈ [0, ∞) let us define the functional χt (·) on Q as follows 1 ˙ θ0 V ∗ Aij Sij − d ∗ Apq Spq CS−1 χt (s) = 2 B 1˙ 1 −1 ˙ V1 ∗ Kijkl Skl − nij ∗ Sij − ρ V1 ∗ t ∗ Sij ,j +li ∗ Sij ,j dυ − 2 2 1 1 + 1 ∗ λij qj ∗ qi + θ0 CS−1 V˙ ∗ Apq Spq ∗ qk,k θ0 2 B 1 1 V ∗ qk ,k −d ∗ qi ,i dυ + +CS−1 1 ∗ ϑ ∗ qda. V˙ 1 ∗ ui ∗ pi da + 2 θ0 ∂B1

∂B3

(5.2.26) Then, δs˜ χt (s) = 0

on Q, t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.2.27)

iff s = (Sij , qi ) is a pair corresponding to a conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. Proof. In view of the definitions of Q and the first variation of a functional (recall eqn (5.2.2)), we obtain ! V˙ 1 ∗ t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) +Kijkl Skl δs˜ χt (s) = B (2) + CS−1 Aij V˙ ∗ (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) + nij ∗ S˜ij dυ

102


1 − ∗ θ0

! V˙ ∗ CS−1 (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) ,i −λij qj − CS−1 d ,i ∗ q˜i dυ B

+

1 ∗ V˙ 1 ∗ (ui − ui ) ∗ p˜i da + θ0

∂B1

(ϑ − ϑ) ∗ q˜da.

∂B3

(5.2.28) If s = (Sij , qi ) is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory, then, in view of the Lemma 5.5, the right-hand side of eqn (5.2.28) vanishes, that is, the relation (5.2.27) holds. On the other hand, eqn (5.2.27) along with the relation s ∈ Q and the fact that s˜ is arbitrary, imply that s is a pair corresponding to the conventional thermoelastic process in the G–L theory. If ∂B1 = ∂B3 = ∅, the functional (5.2.26) becomes 1 ˙ −1 V1 ∗ ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik ,k +Kijkl Skl ∗ Sij χ ˆt (s) = − 2 B (2) ˙ −V θ0 ∗ CS−1 Aij Sij ∗ Apq Spq − 2nij ∗ Sij dυ 1 λij qj ∗ qi + CS−1 V ∗ qk ,k ∗qi ,i ∗ + 2θ0 B −1 ˙ +2θ0 CS V ∗ (Apq Spq ) ∗ qk ,k +2 CS−1 d ,i ∗qi dυ.

Remark 5.1

(5.2.29)

Passing in the above to the limit (t0 , t1 ) → (0, 0), and denoting the limit on the (0) left by −χt (s), we find 1 −1 (0) (0) ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik,k + Kijkl Skl ∗ Sij − 2nij ∗ Sij dυ χt (s) = 2 B 1 (5.2.30) λij qj ∗ qi + CS−1 ∗ qk ,k ∗qi ,i − ∗ 2θ0 B −1 +2θ0 CS Apq Spq ∗ qk ,k +2 CS−1 d(0) ,i ∗qi dυ, where 5

(0)

nij

Kijkl = Kijkl − CS−1 θ0 Aij Akl , (0) = ρ−1 l(i ,j) −CS−1 Aij 1 ∗ r + θ0 Apq Spq + CS ϑ0 , (0) d(0) = 1 ∗ r + CS ϑ0 + θ0 Apq Spq .

5

Formula (5.2.31) is identical to eqn (1.1.70).

(5.2.31) (5.2.32) (5.2.33)

Variational principle for a non-conventional thermoelastic process

103

The functional (5.2.29) is associated with a conventional stress and heat flux initial-boundary value problem of the G–L theory, while the functional (5.2.30) corresponds to an analogous problem of the classical thermoelasticity. Setting Aij = 0 and qi = 0 in eqn (5.2.30), we obtain a functional appearing in the second variational principle for a stress field in linear adiabatic elastodynamics [p. 230 in (Gurtin, 1972)]. 5.3 Variational principle for a non-conventional thermoelastic process in the Lord–Shulman theory In this section we give a variational description of a pair (Sij , qi ) as a solution to a natural non-conventional initial-boundary value problem of the L–S theory. This problem consists in finding (Sij , qi ) on B × [0, ∞), satisfying the field equations [recall eqns (2.1.7–9) in which ∂B1 = ∂B3 = ∅] −1 ρ S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl S¨kl + CS−1 Aij q˙k ,k = −F(ij) on B × [0, ∞), (5.3.1) [CS−1 (qk,k + θ0 Apq S˙ pq )],i −λij (q˙j + t0 q¨j ) = −fi the initial conditions (0) (0) Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij (0)

qi (·, 0) = qi ,

(0)

on B,

(5.3.2)

q˙i (·, 0) = q˙i

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si qi ni = q

on ∂B × (0, ∞), on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(5.3.3)

Here, we have ˙ ij , F(ij) = ρ−1 b(i ,j) −CS−1 rA −1 fi = − CS r ,i .

(5.3.4) (5.3.5)

To arrive at the variational description of the problem (5.3.1–3) we proceed in a manner analogous to that taken in Sections 5.1 and 5.2. First, we obtain an alternative description of the problem in which the initial conditions are implicitly incorporated in the field equations, and then we formulate a variational principle associated with this alternative description. In order to obtain the alternative description of the problem (5.3.1–3), we apply the Laplace transform to eqns (5.3.1)1,2 , employ the initial conditions (5.3.2), and obtain S¯kl + p−1 CS−1 Aij q¯k ,k +f¯(ij) = 0, p−2 (ρ−1 S¯(ik ,k ),j) −Kijkl ! ¯ i = 0, pV¯0 CS−1 p−1 q¯k ,k +θ0 Apq S¯pq ,i −λij q j + h

(5.3.6) (5.3.7)

104


where (0) (0) (0) S˙ kl − CS−1 Aij qk,k ), f (ij) = p−2 F¯(ij) + p−1 Kijkl Skl + p−2 (Kijkl

(5.3.8)

¯ i = V¯0 f¯i + p−1 λij q (0) + V¯0 [t0 λij q˙(0) − θ0 (C −1 Apq S (0) ),i ], h pq j j S

(5.3.9)

and (recall eqn (5.1.20)) −1 V¯0 (p) = [p (t0 p + 1)] .

(5.3.10)

Applying the inverse Laplace transform to eqns (5.3.6–9), and using the convolution theorem, we obtain t ∗ (ρ−1 S(ik ,k ),j) −K ijkl Skl + CS−1 Aij ∗ qk,k + f(ij) = 0, V˙ 0 ∗ [CS−1 (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq )],i −λij qj + hi = 0,

(5.3.11)

where (0) (0) (0) f(ij) = t ∗ F(ij) + t(K ijkl S˙ kl − CS−1 Aij qk,k ) + K ijkl Skl ,

(5.3.12)

(0) − θ0 (CS−1 Apq Spq ),i ],

(5.3.13)

(0)

hi = V0 ∗ fi + λij qj

(0)

+ V0 [t0 λij q˙j

as well as (recall eqn (5.1.29)) V0 (t) = 1 − exp(−t/t0 ).

(5.3.14)

As a result, we arrive at the following lemma: Lemma 5.6 The pair (Sij , qi ) is a solution of the initial-boundary value problem (5.3.1–3) iff it satisfies the field equations t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) −K ijkl Skl + CS−1 Aij ∗ qk ,k +f(ij) = 0 on B × [0, ∞), ! V˙ 0 ∗ CS−1 (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) ,i −λij qj + hi = 0 (5.3.15) and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si , qi ni = q

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(5.3.16)

Similarly to Sections 5.1 and 5.2 we deal with a smooth pair (Sij , qi ) on B × [0, ∞), satisfying the relations (5.3.1–3) or (5.3.15–16). In order to formulate the variational principle associated with the boundary value problem (5.3.15 and 16), we introduce the notion of a stress and heatflux admissible pair. It is a pair (Sij , qi ) in which Sij is a smooth symmetric tensor field on B × [0, ∞) satisfying the boundary condition (5.3.16)1 , while qi is a smooth vector field on B × [0, ∞) satisfying the boundary condition (5.3.16)2 . We can now formulate the following 6 6

Theorem 5.6 appears here for the first time.


105

Theorem 5.6 Let Q be the set of all stress and heat-flux admissible pairs. Let s = (Sij , qi ) ∈ Q and for every t ∈ [0, ∞) let us define the functional πt (·) over Q as follows πt (s) = −1 Skl ∗ Sij − 2f(ij) ∗ Sij dυ V˙ 0 ∗ ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik ,k +Kijkl B

1 − ∗ 2θ0

(λij qj ∗ qi + CS−1 V0 ∗ qk ,k ∗qi,i

B −1 ˙ +2θ0 CS V0

(5.3.17)

∗ Apq Spq ∗ qk ,k −2hi ∗ qi )dυ.

Then, δs˜πt (s) = 0

on Q, t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.3.18)

iff s = (Sij , qi ) is a solution of the problem (5.3.1–3). ˜ s ∈ Q for every λ ˜ ∈ R. Then Proof. Let s ∈ Q and s + λ˜ S˜ij nj = 0, q˜i ni = 0

on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(5.3.19)

In view of the definition of the first variation of a functional (recall eqn (5.2.2)), we obtain δs˜πt (s) = −1 ˜ ˙ Skl ∗ S˜ij − f(ij) ∗ S˜ij )dυ V0 ∗ (ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sij ,j +Kijkl

B

−

1 ∗ θ0

λij qj ∗ q˜i + CS−1 V0 ∗ qk,k ∗ q˜i,i

(5.3.20)

∗ Apq (Spq ∗ q˜k ,k +S˜pq ∗ qk ,k ) − hi ∗ q˜i dυ. B

+θ0 CS−1 V˙ 0

In view of the divergence theorem and eqn (5.3.19), we obtain −V˙ 0 ∗

−1

t∗ ρ B

1 + ∗ θ0

δs˜πt (s) =

! S(ik,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl + CS−1 Aij ∗ qk ,k +f(ij) ∗ S˜ij dυ

! V˙ 0 ∗ CS−1 (1 ∗ qk ,k +θ0 Apq Spq ) ,i −λij qj + hi ∗ q˜i dυ.

(5.3.21)

B

Let us first assume that s = (Sij , qi ) is a solution of the problem (5.3.1–3). Then, in view of the Lemma 5.6, the relations (5.3.15 and 16) hold, and, given eqn (5.3.21), the condition (5.3.18) holds too. Let us next assume that eqn (5.3.18) holds. Then, the right-hand side of eqn (5.3.21) vanishes, and given the arbitrary character of s˜ ∈ Q, and the fact that s ∈ Q, we conclude that s is a pair satisfying eqns (5.3.15 and 16), i.e. eqns (5.3.1–3).

106


(0)

If t0 → 0 + 0, the functional πt (s) → πt (s) such that

Remark 5.2

(0)

πt (s) =

1

(0) ρ−1 t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik ,k +Kijkl Skl ∗ Sij − 2f(ij) ∗ Sij dυ

2 1 − ∗ 2θ0

B

λij qj ∗ qi + CS−1 ∗ qk ,k ∗qi ,i +2θ0 CS−1 Apq Spq ∗ qk ,k −2hi

(0)

∗ qi dυ,

B

(5.3.22) where (0) (0) (0) (0) f(ij) = t ∗ F(ij) + K ijkl Skl + t(K ijkl S˙ kl − CS−1 Aij qk,k ),

(5.3.23)

and (0)

hi

(0)

= 1 ∗ fi + λij qj

(0) − θ0 (CS−1 Apq Spq ),i .

(5.3.24)

(0)

The functional πt (s) is associated with a natural non-conventional stress– heat-flux problem of classical dynamical thermoelasticity. It is similar to the (0) functional χt (s) (5.2.30). Restricting suitably the initial data in the problem (5.3.1–3), we obtain (0)

(0)

(0)

fij = nij , hi

= −(CS−1 d(0) ),i ,

(5.3.25)

(0)

where nij and d(0) are given by the formulas (5.2.32 and 33). In this case (0)

(0)

πt (s) = χt (s) ∀s ∈ Q, t ∈ [0, ∞).

(5.3.26)

5.4 Variational principle for a non-conventional thermoelastic process in the Green–Lindsay theory In this section we present a variational principle associated with the natural non-conventional stress–temperature initial-boundary value problem of the G–L ¯ × [0, ∞) satisfying theory. This problem consists in finding a pair (Sij , ϑ) on B the field equations 7 −1 ... ρ S(ik,k ,j) −Kijkl S¨kl − Aij (ϑ¨ + t1 ϑ ) = − ρ−1 b(i ,j) on B × [0, ∞), ¨ = −C −1 r CS−1 [(kpq ϑ,q ) ,p −θ0 Apq S˙ pq ] − (ϑ˙ + t(0) ϑ) S (5.4.1) the initial conditions (0) (0) Sij (·, 0) = Sij , S˙ ij (·, 0) = S˙ ij

ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ(0) ,

ϑ˙ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (0)

on B,

(5.4.2)

7 The problem described by eqns (5.4.1–3) is equivalent to that characterized by eqns (2.1.15–17) in which we let ∂B1 = ∂B4 = ∅, since eqn (1.3.58) is equivalent to eqn (1.3.63).


107

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si , ϑ = ϑ on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(5.4.3)

Similar to Section 1.3, we assume t(0) = const. Performing the Laplace transform on eqns (5.4.1), and using the initial conditions (5.4.2), we obtain ! pV¯1 p−2 ρ−1 S¯(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl S¯kl − Aij ϑ¯ + ¯lij = 0 on B × [0, ∞), (5.4.4) ! ¯ q ,p −θ0 Apq S¯pq − CS ϑ¯ + m pV¯ p−1 kpq ϑ, ¯ =0 where ¯lij = pV¯1 [p−2 ρ−1 b(i ,j) +p−2 Kijkl (S˙ (0) + pS (0) )] kl kl +Aij [t1 ϑ¨(0) p−1 V¯1 + p−1 ϑ(0) + p−2 ϑ˙ (0) ], m ¯ = V¯ r¯ + (CS t(0) ϑ˙ (0) + θ0 Apq Spq )V¯ + CS p−1 ϑ(0) .

(5.4.5) (5.4.6)

Here, V¯1 and V¯ have the same meaning as in Section 5.1 (recall eqns (5.1.21,48)), while the field ϑ¨(0) appearing in eqn (5.4.5) is determined by the field equation (5.4.1)2 for t = 0, i.e. it is 8 −1 −1 (0) ˙ (0) }. ˙ (0) ϑ¨(0) = t−1 (0) {CS [(kpq ϑ,q ),p −θ0 Apq Spq ] + CS r (·, 0) − ϑ

An inversion of the relations (5.5.4–6) leads to ! V˙ 1 ∗ t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl − Aij ϑ + lij = 0, V˙ ∗ [1 ∗ (kpq ϑ,q ) ,p −θ0 Apq Spq ] − CS ϑ + m = 0,

(5.4.7)

(5.4.8)

where (0) (0) lij = V˙ 1 ∗ [t ∗ ρ−1 b(i ,j) +Kijkl (Skl + tS˙ kl )] +Aij (t1 ϑ¨(0) ∗ V1 + ϑ(0) + tϑ˙ (0) ), (0) m = V ∗ r + V (CS t(0) ϑ˙ (0) + θ0 Apq Spq ) + CS ϑ(0) .

(5.4.9) (5.4.10)

The functions V1 and V are given by the formulas V1 = 1 − e−t/t1 , V = 1 − e−t/t(0) .

(5.4.11)

We thus arrive at the following lemma 9 8 The field ϑ ¨(0) is defined by the non-conventional thermomechanical load of the problem (0) (5.4.1–3), i.e. by ϑ(0) , ϑ˙ (0) , r(·, 0), and S˙ pq . 9 The lemma is similar to Lemma 5.4 in which we let ∂B = ∂B = ∅. Equations (5.4.12) 1 4 (1) are identical with eqns (5.1.70 and 71) if we let (lij , m) = (nij , d).

108


Lemma 5.7 The pair (Sij , ϑ) is a solution of the initial-boundary value problem (5.4.1–3) iff it satisfies the field equations · ! V 1 ∗ t ∗ ρ−1 S(ik ,k ,j −Kijkl Skl − Aij ϑ + lij = 0 ·

V ∗ [1 ∗ (kpq ϑ,q ) ,p −θ0 Apq Spq ] − CS ϑ + m = 0

on B × [0, ∞), (5.4.12)

and the boundary conditions Sij nj = si ,

ϑ = ϑ on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(5.4.13)

In order to formulate a variational principle for the problem (5.4.12 and 13), we introduce the notion of a stress and temperature admissible pair. It is a pair (Sij , ϑ), in which Sij is a smooth symmetric tensor field on B × [0, ∞) satisfying the boundary condition (5.4.13)1 , while ϑ is a smooth scalar field on B × [0, ∞) satisfying the boundary condition (5.4.13)2 . We can now formulate the following Theorem 5.7 Let R be the set of all stress and temperature admissible pairs. Let s = (Sij , ϑ) ∈ R and, for every t ∈ [0, ∞), let us define the functional Pt (·) over R as follows 1˙ V ∗ 2 1 + 2θ0

Pt (s) = −1 ˙ [V1 ∗ (ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik ,k +Kijkl Skl ∗ Sij ) − 2lij ∗ Sij ]dυ (5.4.14)

B

(V ∗ kpq ϑ,q ∗ϑ,p +CS ϑ ∗ ϑ + 2θ0 V˙ ∗ Apq Spq ∗ ϑ − 2m ∗ ϑ)dυ. B

Then, δs˜Pt (s) = 0 on R, t ∈ [0, ∞),

(5.4.15)

iff s = (Sij , ϑ) is a solution of the problem (5.4.1–3). ˜ s ∈ R for every λ ˜ ∈ R. Then Proof. Let s ∈ R and s˜ be chosen such that s + λ˜ S˜ij nj = 0, ϑ˜ = 0

on ∂B × (0, ∞).

(5.4.16)

In view of the definition of the first variation of a functional (recall eqn (5.2.2)), we obtain V˙ ∗

δs˜Pt (s) = −1 ˙ [V1 ∗ (ρ t ∗ Sij ,j ∗S˜ik ,k +Kijkl Skl ∗ S˜ij ) − lij ∗ S˜ij ]dυ

B

+

1 θ0

˜ p +CS ϑ ∗ ϑ˜ [V ∗ kpq ϑ,q ∗ϑ, B

˜ − m ∗ ϑ]dυ. ˜ +θ0 V˙ ∗ Apq (S˜pq ∗ ϑ + Spq ∗ ϑ)

(5.4.17)


109

In view of the divergence theorem and eqn (5.4.16), we reduce the above to the form −V˙ ∗

δs˜Pt (s) = −1 ˙ V1 ∗ [t ∗ ρ S(ik ,k ,j) −Kijkl Skl ] − Aij ϑ + lij ∗ S˜ij dυ B

1 ˙ ˜ − V ∗ [1 ∗ (kpq ϑ,q ) ,p −θ0 Apq Spq ] − CS ϑ + m ∗ ϑdυ. θ0

(5.4.18)

B

Let us first assume that s = (Sij , qi ) is a solution of the problem (5.4.1–3). Then, in view of the Lemma 5.7, s satisfies the relations (5.4.12 and 13), and the righthand side of eqn (5.4.18) vanishes. Let us next assume that eqn (5.4.15) holds, i.e. the right-hand side of eqn (5.4.18) vanishes. Then, given the arbitrary character of s˜, and since s ∈ R, s satisfies eqns (5.4.1–3). (0)

Remark 5.3 If (t0 , t1 ) → (0, 0), the functional Pt (·) → Pt (0)

Pt

1

−1

ρ

2

(s) such that

(s) =

(0) t ∗ Sij ,j ∗Sik ,k +Kijkl Skl ∗ Sij − 2l(ij) ∗ Sij dυ

B

1 + 1 ∗ kpq ϑ,q ∗ϑ,p +CS ϑ ∗ ϑ + 2θ0 Apq Spq ∗ ϑ − 2m(0) ∗ ϑ dυ, 2θ0

(5.4.19)

B

where (0) (0) (0) (0) l(ij) = t ∗ ρ−1 b(i ,j) +K ijkl (Skl + tS˙ kl ) + Aij (ϑ(0) + tϑ˙ (0) ),

(5.4.20)

and (0) . m(0) = 1 ∗ r + CS ϑ(0) − θ0 Apq Spq

(5.4.21)

(0)

The functional Pt (s) is associated with a natural non-conventional stress– temperature problem of classical dynamical thermoelasticity. Narrowing down (0) suitably the initial data in the problem (5.4.1–3), from the Pt (s) we may easily obtain the functional for a conventional stress–temperature problem of classical dynamical thermoelasticity. Setting ϑ = 0 in eqn (5.4.19) we obtain the functional associated with a non-conventional variational principle for the stress field of linear isothermal elastodynamics (Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 2004). Remark 5.4 The variational principles for a generalized thermoelasticity with microstructure were obtained in (Ciumasu and Vieru, 1993), while the varia-

110


tional principles in thermoelasticity without energy dissipation were presented in (Chandrasekharaiah, 1998). A finite element method was combined with a variational principle of the G–L theory to obtain an approximate solution to a 1D initial-boundary value problem of this theory in (Gladysz, 1986). A variational principle of Hamilton’s type for a micropolar thermo-piezo-electro-elastic solid with a relaxation time was obtained in (El-Karamany, 2007).

6 CENTRAL EQUATION OF THERMOELASTICITY WITH FINITE WAVE SPEEDS

6.1 Central equation in the Lord–Shulman and Green–Lindsay theories In Chapter 4 we formulated a PTP of the L–S as well as the G–L theory, and observed that its role in the analysis of a general problem of that theory is similar to that played by an initial-value problem for the classical wave equation in the analysis of a general problem of isothermal elastodynamics. In particular, certain properties of the solution of PTP carry over onto the solution of the general problem, and some methods of treatment of the PTP may be adapted to a general problem of the L–S and G–L theories. Also, the PTP belongs to one of the few problems of TFWS (thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds) that have been solved in a closed form allowing a full analysis of the thermoelastic process taking place in a given body. In the present chapter we shall undertake an analysis of a solution to the field equations of PTP in either the L–S or G–L theory. Before undertaking that analysis we shall examine the relationship of the field equations of PTP in the L–S theory to those of PTP in the G–L theory. To this end let us first consider the field equations of the L–S theory, corresponding to vanishing body forces and non-zero heat sources (recall eqn (4.1.8) of Section 4.1) ∂2φ −ϑ=0 ∂t2 ∂ ∂ϑ ∂ ∂φ − ∇2 1 + t0 ∇2 ϑ − 1 + t0 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂ = − 1 + t0 r ∂t ∇2 φ −

on B × [0, ∞).

(6.1.1)

In eqns (6.1.1) φ and ϑ denote, respectively, the dimensionless potential of the thermoelastic displacement and the temperature; r is the dimensionless function of heat sources, while and t0 are, respectively, the dimensionless parameter coupling the mechanical field with the temperature field and the relaxation time.

112

Central equation of thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds

By eliminating the function ϑ from eqns (6.1.1), we find the central equation of the L–S theory ∂ r, (6.1.2) Λφ = − 1 + t0 ∂t where ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ 2 2 2 ∂ − ∇ 1 + t0 (6.1.3) ∇ − t0 2 − Λ= ∇ − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t is called the central operator of the L–S theory. On the other hand, an elimination of the function φ from eqns (6.1.1) leads to the following equation for the temperature ϑ ∂2 ∂ 2 ∇ − 2 r, (6.1.4) Λϑ = − 1 + t0 ∂t ∂t which will be called the temperature equation of the L–S theory. Therefore, an alternative form of eqns (6.1.1) is this set of equations ∂ r Λφ = − 1 + t0 ∂t on B × [0, ∞). (6.1.5) ∂2 2 ϑ= ∇ − 2 φ ∂t It follows from eqns (6.1.5) that the knowledge of a function φ satisfying eqn (6.1.5)1 allows the determination of temperature ϑ from eqn (6.1.5)2 . Let us now consider the field equations of a PTP in the G–L theory. In the case of vanishing body forces and non-zero heat sources, these equations take the form (recall eqns (4.2.6) of Section 4.2) ∂2 ∂ ϑ=0 ∇2 − 2 φ − 1 + t1 ∂t ∂t on B × [0, ∞), (6.1.6) ∂ 2 ∂ ∂2 2 ∇ − t0 2 − ϑ − ∇ φ = −r ∂t ∂t ∂t where the pair (φ, ϑ) and the function r have meanings analogous to those of the L–S theory. Moreover, and (t0 , t1 ) denote, respectively, a coupling parameter and two relaxation times in the G–L theory (t1 ≥ t0 > 0). By eliminating the function ϑ from eqns (6.1.6), we obtain the central equation of the G–L theory ∂ r, (6.1.7) Γφ = − 1 + t1 ∂t where

Γ=

∂2 ∇ − 2 ∂t 2

∂ ∂2 ∇ − t0 2 − ∂t ∂t 2

∂ − ∇ ∂t

is called the central operator of the G–L theory.

2

∂ 1 + t1 ∂t

(6.1.8)

Central equation in the Lord–Shulman and Green–Lindsay theories

113

Clearly, the elimination of φ from eqns (6.1.6) leads to the following temperature equation of the G–L theory ∂2 (6.1.9) Γϑ = − ∇2 − 2 r on B × [0, ∞), ∂t and the following being an alternative system of equations ∂ r Γφ = − 1 + t1 ∂t on B × [0, ∞). ∂2 ∂ 2 1 + t1 ϑ= ∇ − 2 φ ∂t ∂t

(6.1.10)

It follows from the definition of Λ and Γ that Λ = Γ whenever t0 = t1 . Thus, we arrive at the following corollary. Corollary 6.1 The central operators of the G–L and L–S theories coincide whenever t1 = t0 > 0 1 . It is seen that the condition t0 = t1 does not imply that the thermodynamic processes are identical in both theories. This follows from the fact that the temperature ϑ in both theories is determined from the function φ satisfying eqn (6.1.5)1 (or eqn (6.1.10)1 for t1 = t0 ) via two different formulas (recall eqn (6.1.5)2 or eqn (6.1.10)2 for t1 = t0 ). The fact that the temperatures in both theories do not coincide for t0 = t1 also follows from two different equations governing the temperature: eqn (6.1.4) and (6.1.9) for t0 = t1 . Now, as the units of the displacement vector, the stress tensor, and the heat flux we take x0 , u ˆ0 = φˆ0 /#

(6.1.11)

Sˆ0 = ρφˆ0 /tˆ02 ,

(6.1.12)

qˆ0 = x ˆ0 r#0 ,

(6.1.13)

where x #0 , tˆ0 , φˆ0 , and r#0 are the units introduced in Section 4.1 with the help of formulas (4.1.6 and 7). Then, for the dimensionless fields of displacement ui , stress Sij , and heat flux qi , which correspond to a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying eqns (6.1.5), we obtain Sij = 2

ui = φ,i 2 C2 ¨ ij (φ,ij − φ,kk δij ) + φδ C1

(6.1.14)

qi + t0 q˙i = −ϑ,i ,

(6.1.16)

(6.1.15)

and

1

Proof of Corollary 6.1 was given by Agarwal (1979).

114


where 1 ρ = . 2 C2 µ

(6.1.17)

Equations (6.1.14–16) are obtained from the fundamental field equations (1.2.1–6) of Section 1.2 by assuming that: (i) the body is homogeneous and isotropic; (ii) the body forces vanish; and (iii) the displacement field is generated by a scalar potential field. Note at this point that eqns (6.1.5) along with eqns (6.1.14–16) represent a complete set of equations allowing one to determine a potential–temperature thermoelastic process in the L–S theory. Using the fundamental equations of the G–L theory [recall formulas (1.3.42–47) of Section 1.3] and taking the same assumptions as introduced in the derivation of eqns (6.1.14–16), we infer that a counterpart of these equations in the G–L theory are the following relations Sij = 2

ui = φ,i , 2 C2 ¨ ij , (φ,ij −φ,kk δij ) + φδ C1 qi = −ϑ,i .

(6.1.18) (6.1.19) (6.1.20)

Thus, a potential–temperature thermoelastic process in the G–L theory is described by eqns (6.1.10) and (6.1.18–20). Since for t1 = t0 the central operators of both theories coincide, then for t0 = t1 the displacements ui and stresses Sij are formally determined via the same formulas (6.1.14 and 15) or (6.1.18 and 19). However, for a uniquely posed PTP, with identical initial-boundary conditions in both theories, and assuming t1 = t0 , the pair (ui , Sij ) of the L–S theory does not coincide with the pair (ui , Sij ) of the G–L theory. When seeking solutions to the central equation of either L–S or G–L theory, the crucial role is played by a theorem on decomposition, the subject of the next part of this chapter. Since the central equation of the L–S theory is a restricted form of the central equation of the G–L theory, we formulate that theorem for the G–L theory only. 6.2 Decomposition theorem for a central equation of Green–Lindsay theory. Wave-like equations with a convolution In the case of r = 0 in eqn (6.1.10)1 , there holds the following: Theorem 6.1

Let φ = φ (x, t) be a solution of the equation Γφ = 0 on B × (0, ∞),

(6.2.1)

Decomposition theorem for a central equation of Green–Lindsay theory

115

satisfying the homogeneous initial conditions ∂k φ (·, 0) = 0 on B, k = 0, 1, 2, 3. ∂tk Let K = K (t) be a function defined by the formula d at J1 (βt) e on [0, ∞), K (t) = 2 dt βt

(6.2.2)

(6.2.3)

where J1 = J1 (t) is the Bessel function of order 1 and of the first kind, and α = − [(1 + ) (t0 + t1 ) − (1 − )] −1 , 1 √ β = 2 [1 + (1 + ) (t1 − t0 )] 2 −1 ,

(6.2.4)

where 2

2

= (1 − t0 + t1 ) + 4t0 t1 = (1 + t0 + t1 ) − 4t0 > 0.

(6.2.5)

Then φ = φ1 + φ2 on B × (0, ∞), where

1 ∂2 ∂ − λ − λK∗ φ1 = 0 − k 1 υ12 ∂t2 ∂t 1 ∂2 ∂ 2 ∇ − 2 2 − k2 + λ + λK∗ φ2 = 0 υ2 ∂t ∂t

(6.2.6)

∇2 −

on B × (0, ∞),

(6.2.7)

on B × (0, ∞).

(6.2.8)

Here, 1 1 (1 + t0 + t1 ± 2 ), 2 1 1 k1.2 = (1 + ∓ α 2 ), 2 1 1 λ = β2 2 , 4 and ∗ denotes the convolution with respect to time t, that is

−2 υ1.2 =

t K ∗ φk (x, t) = K (t − τ ) φk (x, τ )dτ,

k = 1, 2.

(6.2.9)

(6.2.10)

0

Clearly, since t1 > t0 > 0 and > 0, υ2 > υ1 > 0 and λ > 0.

(6.2.11)

Moreover, if (t0 , t1 ) → (0, 0) for t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0, then (υ1 , υ2 ) → (1, ∞) , λ → ,

(k1 , k2 ) → (, 1) , √ α → 1 − , β → 2 ,

(6.2.12)

116


and the theorem reduces to a result of classical thermoelasticity (Brun, 1975; Ignaczak, 1976). A proof of this theorem is based on four lemmas (Ignaczak, 1978) given in the following. Lemma 6.1

Let F1 denote the set of functions F1 =

φ (x, t) :

∂k φ (x, 0) = 0 ∂tk

for

k = 0, 1 ,

(6.2.13)

and let us introduce the operators 2 ˆ 1 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k1 ∂ − λ − λK∗ L 2 υ1 ∂t2 ∂t 2 ˆ 2 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k2 ∂ + λ + λK∗ L υ22 ∂t2 ∂t

(6.2.14)

and ˆ 1 + λK∗, L1 = L

ˆ 2 − λK∗, L2 = L

(6.2.15)

where the parameters υi , ki and λ as well as the function K = K (t) have the same meaning as in Theorem 6.1. Then ˆ2L ˆ2φ = L ˆ1φ ˆ1L L

∀φ ∈ F1 .

(6.2.16)

Proof. Using the definitions (6.2.14 and 15), we obtain ˆ1L ˆ 2 φ = (L1 − λK∗) (L2 + λK∗) φ = L L1 L2 φ + λL1 (K ∗ φ) − λK ∗ (L2 φ) − λ2 K ∗ K ∗ φ, ˆ2L ˆ 1 φ = (L2 + λK∗) (L1 − λK∗) φ = L L2 L1 φ − λL2 (K ∗ φ) + λK ∗ (L1 φ) − λ2 K ∗ K ∗ φ.

(6.2.17)

(6.2.18)

Since for an arbitrary function φ, L1 L2 φ = L2 L1 φ,

(6.2.19)

∇2 (K ∗ φ) = K ∗ ∇2 φ,

(6.2.20)

and


117

then, subtracting eqn (6.2.17) from eqn (6.2.18), and using the definitions of operators L1 and L2 , we find ˆ2L ˆ2φ − L ˆ1φ = ˆ1L L 1 ∂2 1 ∂2 ∂ ∂ φ − K ∗φ + k2 + k2 λ K∗ υ22 ∂t2 ∂t υ22 ∂t2 ∂t 1 ∂2 1 ∂2 ∂ ∂ φ − K ∗ φ . + k + k +K ∗ 1 1 υ12 ∂t2 ∂t υ12 ∂t2 ∂t

(6.2.21)

Moreover, for φ ∈ F1 , we have (overdot denotes ∂/∂t) ·

K ∗ φ˙ = K ∗ φ,

(6.2.22)

··

K ∗ φ¨ = K ∗ φ.

(6.2.23)

The relations (6.2.22) and (6.2.23) imply that the right-hand side of relation (6.2.21) vanishes, that is, the relation (6.2.16) holds. Lemma 6.2 The function K = K (t) defined by eqns (6.2.3–5) satisfies the ordinary differential-integral equation β2 β2 d d2 K (t) + K (t) + K ∗ K (t) = 0 K (t) − α dt2 dt 2 4

∀t ∈ [0, ∞).

(6.2.24)

Proof. A proof of that lemma was given in (Ignaczak, 1978) with the help of recurrence relations for the Bessel functions. Here, we present another proof, based on the Laplace transform. We first note that, from the definition of the function K = K (t) [recall eqn (6.2.3)] it follows that K (t) = G˙ (t) ,

(6.2.25)

J1 (βt) , βt

(6.2.26)

where G (t) = 2eαt

G (0) = 1.

Upon taking the Laplace transform of eqn (6.2.25), we obtain ¯ = pG ¯ − 1, K where (Mikusi´ nski, 1967; Ignaczak, 1981) 2 2 − (p − α) . ¯= 2 G (p − α) + β β2

(6.2.27)

(6.2.28)

The overbar on K and G in eqns (6.2.27 and 28) denotes the Laplace transform with p being the transform parameter. Raising eqn (6.2.28) to the powers

118


k = 1, 2, 3, . . . we obtain k k 2 2 k 2 ¯ G = (p − α) + β − (p − α) , β2

(6.2.29)

from which (Ignaczak, 1981) k ¯ =k Gk (t) = L−1 G

k αt 2 e Jk (βt) , β t

(6.2.30)

where Jk = Jk (x) is the Bessel function of the first kind and order k. From the relations (6.2.27 and 28) we now find ¯ = [·] {2α − [·]} , K β2

(6.2.31)

where [·] denotes the expression standing in the square brackets in eqn (6.2.28), that is 2 β ¯ [·] = G. (6.2.32) 2 From this ¯2. ¯ = αG ¯ − 1 β2G K 4 Using eqn (6.2.30), we invert the relation (6.2.33) to the form K(t) = 2β

ˆ eατ [αJ ˆ 1 (τ ) − J2 (τ )] , τ

(6.2.33)

(6.2.34)

where τ = βt,

α # = α/β.

(6.2.35)

Multiplying eqn (6.2.33) through by p and passing with p to infinity, while noting that ¯ (p) = K (0) , lim pK

p→∞

¯ (p) = G (0) = 1, lim pG

p→∞

(6.2.36)

we find K (0) = α.

(6.2.37)

Squaring both sides of eqn (6.2.33), we obtain 2 ¯3 + ¯ 2 = α2 G ¯ 2 − αβ G K 2

β2 4

2 ¯4. G

(6.2.38)

From this, in view of eqn (6.2.30), K ∗ K = 4β

! eα# τ 2ˆ α2 J2 (τ ) − 3ˆ αJ3 (τ ) + J4 (τ ) . τ

(6.2.39)


119

In order to find K˙ (t), we multiply eqn (6.2.33) through by p and, in view of eqns (6.2.27,33), obtain 2 2 ¯ ¯−β G ¯2 . ¯ = α− β G 1 + αG (6.2.40) pK 4 4 From this and eqn (6.2.37), we arrive at 2 2 2 2 ¯ − K (0) = α2 − β ¯ − αβ G ¯2 + β ¯3. pK G G 4 2 4

(6.2.41)

The inversion of this with the help of eqn (6.2.30) leads to the relation ˆ ! β 2 eατ K˙ = − 1 − 4ˆ α2 J1 (τ ) + 8ˆ αJ2 (τ ) − 3J3 (τ ) . 2 τ

(6.2.42)

By multiplying eqn (6.2.41) through by p and passing with p to infinity, we obtain β2 . K˙ (0) = α2 − 4

(6.2.43)

¨ we multiply eqn (6.2.41) by p and, using Finally, in order to determine K, eqns (6.2.27,33,43), we obtain ¯ − pK (0) − K˙ (0) = p2 K ( ) 2 2 2 2 2 3 β 3 2 ¯ 3 2 2 ¯2 β 2 ¯3 − β ¯4. α α − β G+ 2 − α β G + 3α G G 4 4 4 4 4 (6.2.44) Upon the inverse transformation of eqn (6.2.44), on account of eqn (6.2.30), we find ˆ β 3 eατ [ 3ˆ α − 4ˆ α3 J1 (τ ) K¨ = − 4 τ −2 1 − 6ˆ α2 J2 (τ ) − 9ˆ αJ3 (τ ) + 2J4 (τ )].

(6.2.45)

Now, inserting the functions (6.2.45), (6.2.42), (6.2.34) and (6.2.39) into the left-hand side of eqn (6.2.24), we verify that K satisfies eqn (6.2.24). The above lemma states that the convolution of the kernel K with itself is equivalent to an application of a 2nd-order differential operation to K. Lemma 6.3 Let Γ be a central operator of the G–L theory, that is (recall eqn (6.1.8)) ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂ − 2 1 + t1 . (6.2.46) 2 − t0 2 − Γ≡ 2 − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t

120


Then, for every φ ∈ F1 , ˆ 2 φ, ˆ1L Γφ = L

(6.2.47)

ˆ 1 and L ˆ 2 are defined by formulas (6.2.14). where L Proof. First, note that from eqns (6.2.14 and 15) we obtain 1 1 1 ∂4 ∂ ∂2 − 2 2 + 2 2 4 L1 L2 φ = 4 − (k1 + k2 ) 2 + 2 2 ∂t υ1 υ2 ∂t υ1 υ2 ∂t 3 2 ∂ k1 k2 ∂ 1 1 ∂ 2 − λ φ. + + 2 + k1 k2 − λ − 2 − λ (k1 − k2 ) υ22 υ1 ∂t3 υ12 υ2 ∂t2 ∂t (6.2.48) Next, using the identities k1 + k2 = 1 + ,

(6.2.49)

1 1 + 2 = 1 + t0 + t1 , υ12 υ2

(6.2.50)

1 1 · = t0 , υ12 υ22

(6.2.51)

k2 k1 + 2 = 1, υ22 υ1 −1 1 1 λ = k1 k2 − 2 , υ12 υ2 we reduce eqn (6.2.48) to the form ∂ ∂2 − (1 + t0 + t1 ) 2 2 L1 L2 φ = 4 − (1 + ) 2 ∂t ∂t 4 3 ∂ ∂ ∂ − λ2 φ. +t0 4 + 3 − λ (k1 − k2 ) ∂t ∂t ∂t

(6.2.52) (6.2.53)

(6.2.54)

In view of the definition of operator Γ (recall eqn (6.2.46)), the last of the above equations may be rewritten in the form ∂ L1 L2 φ = Γφ − λ (k1 − k2 ) + λ φ. (6.2.55) ∂t We next evaluate the expression L1 (K ∗ φ) − K ∗ (L2 φ) = (6.2.56) ∂2φ 1 ∂2 ∂φ 1 ∂ − k1 (K ∗ φ) − 2λK ∗ φ. K ∗ 2 − 2 2 (K ∗ φ) + k2 K ∗ 2 υ2 ∂t υ1 ∂t ∂t ∂t


121

Since φ ∈ F1 , then (recall eqns (6.2.22 and 23)) ∂φ ∂ (K ∗ φ) = K ∗ , ∂t ∂t

(6.2.57)

∂2φ ∂2 (K ∗ φ) = K ∗ . ∂t2 ∂t2

(6.2.58)

and

Also, ∂K ∂φ =φ∗ + K0 φ, ∂t ∂t

(6.2.59)

∂2φ ∂2K ∂φ =φ∗ + K˙ 0 φ + K0 , 2 ∂t ∂t2 ∂t

(6.2.60)

K0 = K (0) , K˙ 0 = K˙ (0) .

(6.2.61)

K∗ K∗ where

Thus, eqn (6.2.56) takes the form L1 (K ∗ φ) − K ∗ (L2 φ) = 1 1 ∂φ ∂2K ˙ φ∗ − 2 + K 0 φ + K0 − υ12 υ2 ∂t2 ∂t ∂K + K0 φ − 2λK ∗ φ. − (k1 − k2 ) φ ∗ ∂t

(6.2.62)

ˆ1, L ˆ 2 and Γ (recall eqns (6.2.14 and 46)), we Now, using the definitions of L obtain ˆ 2 φ − Γφ = (L1 − λK∗) (L2 + λK∗) φ − Γφ ˆ1L L = L1 L2 φ + λ [L1 (K ∗ φ) − K ∗ (L2 φ)]

(6.2.63)

−λ2 K ∗ K ∗ φ − Γφ. In view of eqns (6.2.55 and 62), this equation becomes ˆ1L ˆ 2 φ − Γφ = −λ (k1 − k2 ) + 1 − 1 K0 ∂φ L υ12 υ22 ∂t 1 1 −λ λ + (k1 − k2 ) K0 + − 2 K˙ 0 φ υ12 υ2 1 d2 K dK 1 + 2λK + λK ∗ K ∗ φ. − + (k − k ) −λ 1 2 υ12 υ22 dt2 dt

(6.2.64)

122


Since −1 1 1 K0 = α = − (k1 − k2 ) − 2 , υ12 υ2 −2 1 1 1 2 K˙ 0 = α2 − β 2 = (k1 − k2 ) − k1 k2 − , 4 υ12 υ22 −1 1 1 1 2 β =λ − , 4 υ12 υ22

(6.2.65) (6.2.66) (6.2.67)

the first two terms on the right-hand side of eqn (6.2.64) vanish and ˆ 2 φ − Γφ = −λ ˆ1L L

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

β2 β2 d2 K dK + K + K ∗ K ∗ φ. − α dt2 dt 2 4 (6.2.68)

In view of Lemma 6.2, the expression in the square bracket vanishes, and eqn (6.2.68) reduces to eqn (6.2.47). The Lemmas 6.1 and 6.3 jointly imply that the operator Γ restricted to the # 1 and L # 2 , that is domain F1 is a product of two commuting operators L ˆ2L ˆ2φ = L ˆ1φ ˆ1L Γφ = L

∀φ ∈ F1 .

(6.2.69)

Lemma 6.4 Let g = g (x, t) be a function belonging to F1 , and let us define a function φ1 = φ1 (x, t) as follows φ1 =

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1 ∗ eα# τ J0 (τ ) ∗ g,

(6.2.70)

where J0 (τ ) is the Bessel function of the first kind and order zero, with α # and τ being specified through the relations (6.2.35). Then ∂ k φ1 (x, 0) = 0 ∂tk

for

k = 0, 1, 2, 3,

(6.2.71)

and φ1 satisfies the equation

ˆ2 − L ˆ 1 φ1 = g. L

Proof. Let us first introduce the notations −1 1 1 gˆ = − 2 g, υ12 υ2 ˆ hk (t) = eατ Jk (τ ) , k = 0, 1,

(6.2.72)

(6.2.73) (6.2.74)


123

and rewrite eqns (6.2.70 and 72) as φ1 = 1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ,

(6.2.75)

β2 ∂φ1 β2 ∂ 2 φ1 + φ K ∗ φ1 = gˆ. − α + 1 ∂t2 ∂t 2 2

(6.2.76)

In order to show that φ1 specified via eqn (6.2.75) satisfies eqns (6.2.71) and (6.2.76), we again employ the Laplace transform. Thus, from eqn (6.2.74) we obtain (Mikusi´ nski, 1967) ¯0 = h 1 ¯1 = 1 h β (p − α)2 + β 2

1

, (p − α)2 + β 2 (p − α)2 + β 2 − (p − α) .

(6.2.77) (6.2.78)

From this we get the identities ¯0 − βh ¯1, ¯ 0 = 1 + αh ph

(6.2.79)

¯ 1. ¯0 − βh ¯ 1 − βph ¯ 0 = p + α 1 + αh p2 h

(6.2.80)

and

Transforming eqn (6.2.75), we obtain ¯ 0 g#, φ1 = p−1 h

(6.2.81)

which, together with eqns (6.2.79 and 80), leads to ¯ 0 g#, pφ1 = h

(6.2.82)

¯ 0 g# − β h ¯ 1 g#, p2 φ¯1 = g# + αh

(6.2.83)

¯ 1 g# − βph ¯ 1 g#. ¯ 0 g# − αβ h p3 φ¯1 = p# g + α# g + α2 h

(6.2.84)

It follows from the definition of φ1 that φ1 (·, 0) = 0. From this and eqn (6.2.82) we obtain ∂φ1 = h0 ∗ gˆ, ∂t

(6.2.85)

∂φ1 (·, 0) = 0. ∂t

(6.2.86)

which implies

Thus, inverting eqn (6.2.83), we find ∂ 2 φ1 = gˆ + αh0 ∗ gˆ − βh1 ∗ gˆ. ∂t2

(6.2.87)

124


From this and the fact that gˆ ∈ F1 we find ∂ 2 φ1 (·, 0) = 0. ∂t2

(6.2.88)

Finally, since gˆ ∈ F1 and ∂ k φ1 (·, 0) = 0, for ∂tk upon inversion of eqn (6.2.84) we obtain

k = 0, 1, 2,

(6.2.89)

∂ 3 φ1 ∂ˆ g ∂h1 + αˆ g + α2 h0 ∗ gˆ − αβh1 ∗ gˆ − βˆ . (6.2.90) = g∗ 3 ∂t ∂t ∂t The preceding two equations along with the condition gˆ ∈ F1 imply that ∂ k φ1 (6.2.91) (·, 0) = 0, for k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ∂tk i.e. the condition (6.2.71) holds. This completes the first part of the proof of Lemma 6.4. In order to show that φ1 satisfies eqn (6.2.76), let us first note that (recall eqns (6.2.27 and 6.2.28)) ¯ 2 1 K 2 2 = 2 (6.2.92) (p − a) + β − (p − a) − . p β p ¯ 0 and using eqns (6.2.77 and 6.2.78), we Multiplying that relation through by h obtain ¯0 ¯0 ¯h 2¯ K h = h . (6.2.93) 1− p β p From this and the definition of φ1 we find K ∗ φ1 =

2 h1 ∗ gˆ − 1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ. β

(6.2.94)

Thus, in view of eqns (6.2.75, 6.2.85, 6.2.87, 6.2.94), the function φ1 satisfies eqn (6.2.72). Proof. (Proof of Theorem 6.1) Since φ is a given function satisfying eqns (6.2.1 and 6.2.2), it suffices to demonstrate the existence of a field φ1 with the properties ∂ k φ1 (·, 0) = 0 ∂tk

for k = 0, 1, 2, 3,

(6.2.95)

and ˆ 1 φ1 = 0, L

ˆ 2 (φ − φ1 ) = 0. L

(6.2.96)

Indeed, if there exists the field φ1 , then the existence of φ2 follows from φ2 = φ − φ1 .

(6.2.97)


We first note that

125

ˆ 2 φ1 = L ˆ 1 φ1 + L ˆ2 − L ˆ 1 φ1 . L

(6.2.98)

ˆ 1 φ1 = 0, L

(6.2.99)

ˆ 2 φ1 = L ˆ2 − L ˆ 1 φ1 . L

(6.2.100)

Thus, if

then

Hence, eqns (6.2.96) are satisfied so long as ˆ 1 φ1 = 0, ˆ2 − L ˆ 1 φ1 = g, L L

(6.2.101)

where g = g (x, t) is the given function ˆ 2 φ. g=L

(6.2.102)

Since φ satisfies the homogeneous initial conditions (6.2.2), then φ ∈ F1 , and, in view of Lemmas 6.1 and 6.3 (also recall eqn (6.2.69)), we find ˆ2L ˆ2φ = L ˆ 1 φ = Γφ. ˆ1L L

(6.2.103)

ˆ 1 on both sides of Also, since φ satisfies eqn (6.2.1), by operating with L eqn (6.2.102), we find ˆ 1 g = 0. L

(6.2.104)

Moreover, eqns (6.2.2) and (6.2.102) imply g ∈ F1 .

(6.2.105)

Thus, in order to complete the proof of the theorem, it is sufficient to demonstrate a field φ1 that satisfies eqns (6.2.104) and (6.2.105). To this end, we employ Lemma 6.4 and show that the function φ1 appearing in that lemma for g specified via the formula (6.2.102) satisfies all those conditions. First, we verify that, in view of eqn (6.2.105), g satisfies the assumptions of Lemma 6.4. Thus, φ1 satisfies the homogeneous initial conditions (6.2.95) and the second of eqn (6.2.101). Now, let us note that 2 ˆ 1 φ1 = ∇2 φ1 − 1 ∂ φ1 − k1 ∂φ1 − λφ1 − λK ∗ φ1 L 2 υ1 ∂t2 ∂t

1 ∂ 2 φ1 ∂φ1 − λφ1 − λK ∗ φ1 , = 1 ∗ h0 ∗ ∇ gˆ − 2 − k1 2 υ1 ∂t ∂t

(6.2.106)

2

and, in view of eqn (6.2.104), ∇2 gˆ =

1 ∂ 2 gˆ ∂ˆ g + λˆ g + λK ∗ gˆ. + k1 υ12 ∂t2 ∂t

(6.2.107)

126


Hence, ˆ 1 φ1 = 1 ∗ h0 ∗ L −

1 ∂2 ∂ˆ g + λˆ g + λK ∗ g ˆ g ˆ + k 1 υ12 ∂t2 ∂t

1 ∂2 ∂ (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) − k1 (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) υ12 ∂t2 ∂t

(6.2.108)

−λ (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) − λK ∗ (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) . Since gˆ ∈ F1 (recall eqn (6.2.105)), we have 1 ∗ h0 ∗

∂ 2 gˆ ∂2 = (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) , ∂t2 ∂t2

(6.2.109)

∂ ∂ˆ g = (1 ∗ h0 ∗ gˆ) . ∂t ∂t

(6.2.110)

and 1 ∗ h0 ∗

Thus, eqn (6.2.108) reduces to the first equation of eqns (6.2.101), which completes the proof. Remark 6.1 Inequalities (6.2.11) and the limit relations (6.2.12) are a direct consequence of formulas determining the parameters υi , ki , λ, α and β. Moreover, if (t0 , t1 ) → (0, 0), then the theorem on decomposition reduces to the following theorem (Brun, 1975; Ignaczak, 1976): Theorem 6.2 (on decomposition for the central equation of the classical dynamical thermoelasticity) An arbitrary solution of the central equation of the classical dynamical thermoelasticity ∇2 −

∂2 ∂t2

∇2 −

∂ ∂t

− ∇2

∂ f =0 ∂t

≥ 0,

(6.2.111)

satisfying the homogeneous initial conditions ∂kf (·, 0) = 0 ∂tk

for

k = 0, 1, 2,

(6.2.112)

takes the form f = f1 + f2 ,

(6.2.113)

Speed of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space

where

∂2 ∂ − − K − ∗ f1 = 0, 0 ∂t2 ∂t ∂ 2 ∇ − + + K0 ∗ f2 = 0, ∂t √ d (1−)t J1 (2t ) √ e . K0 (t) = 2 dt 2t

∇2 −

127

(6.2.114) (6.2.115) (6.2.116)

# 2 [recall eqns (6.2.14)] # 1 and L Remark 6.2 In the following, we shall call L the wave-like operators with convolution, while eqns (6.2.7 and 8) the wavelike equations with convolution. A thermoelastic disturbance corresponding to the functions φi (i = 1, 2) will be called the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance. For λ > 0 the parameters υi and ki (i = 1, 2) represent the speed and damping of the ith disturbance. The parameter λ and the function K = K (t) # i (note eqn (6.2.14)) will be called, appearing in the definition of the operator L #i . respectively, the coefficient of convolution and the kernel of L Clearly, the parameters υi , ki , λ, and the function K = K (t) for each fixed t depend on the three constitutive variables (, t0 , t1 ) according to the the formulas (6.2.3 and 9). These dependencies are analyzed in the subsequent sections of this chapter. 6.3 Speed of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space of constitutive variables The theorem on decomposition of Section 6.2 implies that a potential– temperature thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory is a sum of two fundamental thermoelastic disturbances propagating with speeds υ1 and υ2 , where (recall eqn (6.2.9)1 ) 1 1 −2 1 + t0 + t1 ± ∆ 2 . (6.3.1) = υ1.2 2 In this equation ∆ is given by the formula 2

∆ = (1 − t0 + t1 ) + 4t1 t0 .

(6.3.2)

It follows from eqns (6.3.1 and 2) that υ1.2 = υ1.2 (t0 , ζ) ,

(6.3.3)

where ζ is the reduced constitutive variable, given as ζ = t1 ,

(6.3.4)

that is, the speeds υ1.2 may be treated as functions of two variables t0 and ζ.

128


In the following, we restrict the domain of functions υ1.2 to the region 2 t0 ≥ 1,

ζ ≥ ≥ 0.

(6.3.5)

Some information on the speeds υ1.2 in the space of t0 and ζ is contained in the following: Theorem 6.3 mates are true

Let Q = {(t0 , ζ) : t0 ≥ 1, ζ ≥ 0}. Then, ∀ (t0 , ζ) ∈ Q the estiυ1 (t0 , ζ) ≤ ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) ,

(6.3.6)

υ2 (t0 , ζ) ≥ ϕ2 (t0 , ζ) , where the functions ϕ1,2 are given by − 12

ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) = (t0 + ζ)

,

1 2

− 12

(6.3.7)

ϕ2 (t0 , ζ) = (t0 + ζ) t0 . Proof. Introduce the notations −2 . V1.2 = υ1.2

(6.3.8)

Then, in view of eqns (6.3.1 and 2), we find 1 1 1 + t0 + ζ ± ∆ 2 , V1.2 = 2 where 2

∆ = [t0 − (1 + ζ)] + 4t0 ζ,

(6.3.9)

(6.3.10)

2

(6.3.11)

2

(6.3.12)

∆ = [t0 + (1 + ζ)] − 4t0 , ∆ = [t0 − (1 − ζ)] + 4ζ. Given eqns (6.2.50 and 6.2.51), we obtain V1 + V2 = 1 + t0 + ζ,

V1 V2 = t0 , 1 2

V1 − V 2 = . Since for every real-valued a and x 1 2 x + a2 2 ≥ |x| ,

(6.3.13) (6.3.14)

(6.3.15)

and |x| ± x ≥ 0,

(6.3.16)

2 As is shown later for an aluminum alloy, the dimensionless time t = 3.728; hence, it makes 0 sense to let t0 ≥ 1. The inequalities t0 ≥ 1, > 0, and t1 ≥ t0 [see eqn (1.3.23)] imply that ζ ≥ > 0.


129

then 1 ϕ (x) ≡ x2 + a2 2 ± x ≥ 0.

(6.3.17)

Setting in eqn (6.3.17) √ a = 2 ζ,

x = [t0 − (1 − ζ)] ,

(6.3.18)

we find (also recall eqn (6.3.12)) ∆1/2 ± [t0 − (1 − ζ)] ≥ 0.

(6.3.19)

From this and the definition of V1,2 (recall eqn (6.3.9)), we arrive at the estimates V1 ≥ 1,

V2 ≤ 1.

(6.3.20)

Adding V1 to both sides of the inequality (6.3.20)2 and using eqn (6.3.13)1 , we obtain V1 ≥ (t0 + ζ) .

(6.3.21)

This and the definition of υ1 leads to υ1 (t0 , ζ) ≤ (t0 + ζ)− 2 , 1

(6.3.22)

that is, the estimate (6.3.6)1 is true. Next, multiplying eqn (6.3.21) through by V2 > 0, and using eqn (6.3.13)2 , we find V2 ≤ t0 (t0 + ζ)−1 .

(6.3.23)

This, and the definition of υ2 , leads to 1

−1

υ2 (t0 , ζ) ≥ (t0 + ζ) 2 t0 2 ,

(6.3.24)

that is, the estimate (6.3.6)2 is true.

Graphs of functions ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) and ϕ2 (t0 , ζ) for a fixed t0 ≥ 1 and ζ ∈ [0, ∞) are shown in Figs. 6.1 and 6.2. It is seen that ∀ (t0 , ζ) ∈ Q − 12

0 ≤ υ1 (t0 , ζ) ≤ t0

≤ 1,

(6.3.25)

1 ≤ υ2 (t0 , ζ) ≤ ∞,

(6.3.26)

lim υ1 (t0 , ζ) = 0 ∀t0 ≥ 1,

(6.3.27)

lim υ2 (t0 , ζ) = ∞

(6.3.28)

whereby ζ→∞

ζ→∞

∀t0 ≥ 1.

130


Figure 6.1 Graphs of the functions ϕ1 = ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) and ϕ2 = ϕ2 (t0 , ζ) for a fixed t0 > 1 and ζ ≥ 0. Moreover, ∀ (t0 , ζ) ∈ Q we have (with = d/dζ) ϕ1 ≤ 0,

ϕ1 > 0,

(6.3.29)

ϕ2 > 0,

ϕ2 < 0.

(6.3.30)

Theorem 6.3 states that the speed υ1 is bounded from above by the function ϕ1 monotonically decreasing along the axis ζ ≥ 0, while υ2 is bounded from below by the function ϕ2 monotonically increasing with ζ. We will now show that, for a fixed t0 ≥ 1, the behavior of υ1 (t0 , ζ) (or υ2 (t0 , ζ)) is similar to that of ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) (or ϕ2 (t0 , ζ)) that is, the following theorem is true: Theorem 6.4

For every (t0 , ζ) ∈ Q υ1 < 0,

υ1 > 0,

(6.3.31)

υ2

υ2

(6.3.32)

> 0,

< 0.

Figure 6.2 Graphs of the functions ϕ1 = ϕ1 (t0 , ζ) and ϕ2 = ϕ2 (t0 , ζ) for t0 = 1 and ζ ≥ 0.


131

Proof. Differentiating eqns (6.3.13) with respect to ζ, we obtain V1 + V2 = 1, (V1 V2 ) = 0,

(6.3.33)

and V1 + V2 = 0, (V1 V2 ) = 0.

(6.3.34)

From this there follows V1 2V1 V2 , V1 = − , V1 − V2 (V1 − V2 )3

V1 = V2 =

V2 , V1 − V2

V2 =

2V1 V2 . (V1 − V2 )3

(6.3.35) (6.3.36)

On account of eqns (6.3.8) we find

υ1.2

1 −3 υ1.2 = − V1.22 V1.2 , 2 3 − 5 2 1 − 32 = V1.22 (V1.2 ) − V1.2 V1.2 . 4 2

(6.3.37) (6.3.38)

Then, given eqns (6.3.35 and 6.3.36), we find 1 −1 1 υ1 = − V1 2 , 2 V1 − V2 −1 V2 3 V1 2 + , υ1 = (V1 − V2 )2 4 V1 − V2

(6.3.39) (6.3.40)

and 1 − 12 1 V , 2 2 V1 − V2 −1 1 3 V2 2 V1 + V 2 . υ2 = − 4 (V1 − V2 )3 3 υ2 =

(6.3.41) (6.3.42)

Since V1 > V2 > 0, the formulas (6.3.39–42) imply that the inequalities (6.3.31 and 32) hold. Graphs of functions υ1 and υ2 for a fixed t0 ≥ 1 and ζ ∈ [0, ∞) are shown in Figs. 6.3 and 6.4. Functions ϕ1 and ϕ2 are graphed there as well. It is seen from Fig. 6.4 that the point (t0 = 1, ζ = 0) is a bifurcation point of the four functions υ1 , υ2 , ϕ1 and ϕ2 . That point should be excluded from an analysis of a thermoelastic body in which > 0 and t1 ≥ 1.

132


Figure 6.3 Graphs of the functions υ1 = υ1 (t0 , ζ) and υ2 = υ2 (t0 , ζ) for a fixed t0 > 1 and ζ ≥ 0. Employing the formulas (6.3.8, 6.3.9, 6.3.39–42), it may easily be shown that, for t0 > 1 and in a neighborhood of ζ = 0, the speeds υ1 and υ2 possess the expansions ) ( 3 ζ2 ζ − 12 + , (6.3.43) 1− (3t0 + 1) + O ζ υ1 = t0 2 (t0 − 1) 8 (t0 − 1)3 υ2 = 1 +

ζ2 ζ − (t0 + 3) + O ζ 3 . 3 2 (t0 − 1) 8 (t0 − 1)

For t0 = 1 and in a neighborhood of ζ = > 0 we find (ζ − ) υ1 = υ1 () 1 − 1/2 41/2 (1 + /4) +

2 + + 1/2 (1 + /4) 323/2 (1 + /4)

1/2

3/2

2

(ζ − ) + O (ζ − )

(6.3.44)

3

(6.3.45)

,

Figure 6.4 Graphs of the functions υ1 = υ1 (t0 , ζ) and υ2 = υ2 (t0 , ζ) for t0 = 1 and ζ ≥ > 0.


υ2 = υ2 () 1 + − where

2 + − 1/2 (1 + /4) 323/2 (1 + /4)

(ζ − ) 41/2

(1 + /4)

1/2

3/2

133

2

1/2

3

(ζ − ) + O (ζ − )

(6.3.46)

,

− 1 1 12 2 . υ1.2 () = 1 + ± 2 1 + 2 4

(6.3.47)

Finally, let us note that for large ζ the following asymptotic formulas apply 1 for ζ → ∞, (6.3.48) υ1 (ζ) = O ζ − 2 1 for ζ → ∞. (6.3.49) υ2 (ζ) = O ζ 2 Thus, for a thermoelastic body in which is a finite positive number, while −1/2 t1 → ∞, the speeds υ1 and υ2 are proportional, respectively, to (t1 ) and 1/2 (t1 ) . Theorems 6.3 and 6.4 and Figs. 6.3 and 6.4 pertain to the dependence of speeds υ1 and υ2 on ζ for a fixed t0 ≥ 1. We now turn to the dependence of υ1 and υ2 on t0 , with a restriction to the domain Q0 = {(t0 , ζ) : t0 > 1, ζ > 0}. First, however, we prove the following theorem. Theorem 6.5 For every fixed ζ > 0 the functions V1 (t0 , ζ) and V2 (t0 , ζ), treated as functions of t0 , satisfy the inequalities V˙ 1 > 0,

V¨1 > 0

V˙ 2 > 0,

V¨1 < 0

∀t0 ≥ 1.5.

(6.3.50)

Here, the dot denotes a differentiation with respect to t0 . Proof. Differentiation of eqn (6.3.13) with respect to t0 yields V˙ 1 + V˙ 2 = 1,

(V1 V2 )· = 1,

(6.3.51)

V¨1 + V¨2 = 0,

(V1 V2 )·· = 0.

(6.3.52)

Solving eqns (6.3.51) for the pair (V˙ 1 , V˙ 2 ), and eqns (6.3.52) for (V¨1 , V¨2 ), we obtain V1 − 1 1 − V2 , V˙ 2 = , V˙ 1 = V1 − V2 V1 − V2 2 V¨1 = 3 (V1 − 1)(1 − V2 ), (V1 − V2 ) 2 V¨2 = − 3 (V1 − 1)(1 − V2 ). (V1 − V2 )

(6.3.53)

(6.3.54)

134


V1(t 0) Ê >0

1+Ê 1.0 V2(t 0)

0

1.0

1.5

t0

2.0

Figure 6.5 Graphs of the functions V1 = V1 (t0 , ζ) and V2 = V2 (t0 , ζ) for a fixed ζ > 0 and t0 > 1.5. Since V1 > 1, 1 − V2 > 0 and V1 − V2 > 0, the relations (6.3.53 and 6.3.54) imply the inequalities (6.3.50). Using the definition of functions V1 and V2 (recall eqns (6.3.9)) and the inequalities (6.3.50), one can readily construct the graphs V1.2 for t0 > 1.5, see Fig. 6.5. In order to examine the dependence of υ1.2 on t0 , we use the relation −1/2

υ1.2 = V1.2

υ¨1.2

,

1 −3/2 υ˙ 1.2 = − V1.2 V˙ 1.2 , 2 3 −5/2 ˙ 2 2 ¨ (V1.2 ) − V1.2 V1.2 . = V1.2 4 3

(6.3.55) (6.3.56) (6.3.57)

Replacing the functions V˙ 1.2 and V¨1.2 appearing on the right-hand sides of eqns (6.3.56 and 6.3.57) by the expressions (6.3.53 and 6.3.54), we find 1 −3/2 V1 − 1 , υ˙ 1 = − V1 2 V1 − V2 3 −5/2 (V1 − 1)(1 − V2 ) V1 − 1 4 V1 υ¨1 = V1 , − 4 (V1 − V2 )2 1 − V2 3 V1 − V2

(6.3.58)

1 −3/2 1 − V2 , υ˙ 2 = − V2 2 V1 − V2 4 V2 3 −5/2 (V1 − 1)(1 − V2 ) 1 − V2 + υ¨2 = V2 . 4 (V1 − V2 )2 V1 − 1 3 V1 − V2

(6.3.59)

and

This leads us to the following:


135

Theorem 6.6 For every (t0 , ζ) ∈ Q0 the speeds υ1 and υ2 , treated as functions of t0 , satisfy the inequalities υ˙ 1 < 0,

υ¨1 > 0,

υ˙ 2 < 0,

υ¨2 > 0.

(6.3.60)

Proof. Using the inequalities V1 − 1 > 0, 1 − V2 > 0, V1 − V2 > 0, and the relations (6.3.58 and 6.3.59), it suffices to demonstrate that V1 − 1 4 V1 − >0 1 − V2 3 V1 − V2

on Q0 .

(6.3.61)

The inequality (6.3.61) may be written in an equivalent form 4 S ≡ (V1 − 1) (V1 − V2 ) − V1 (1 − V2 ) > 0. 3

(6.3.62)

7 1 S = V12 − V1 + V1 V2 + V2 , 3 3

(6.3.63)

Since

then, replacing on the right-hand side of eqn (6.3.63) V1 V2 by t0 and V2 by (1 + ζ + t0 − V1 ) (recall eqns (6.3.13)), we find 10 4 2 (6.3.64) S = V1 − V1 + 1 + ζ + t0 . 3 3 The discriminant of the second-degree polynomial in V1 , given by eqn (6.3.64), is 4 25 − 1 + ζ + t0 . (6.3.65) ∆0 = 4 9 3 Since t0 > 1.5 and ζ > 0, then 4 4 25 < 3 < 1 + t0 < 1 + ζ + t0 9 3 3 and ∆0 < 0.

(6.3.66)

This implies that S > 0.

One can now show that, for a fixed ζ > 0, there exists a point t∗0 < 1, where υ¨1 vanishes. In view of Theorem 6.6 we conclude that, for a fixed ζ > 0 and t0 > 1.5, the functions υ1 and υ2 are decreasing in t0 ; their graphs are shown in Fig. 6.6. Case t0 = t1 In this case the speeds υ1 and υ2 depend on t0 and only. Let us introduce the notations υˆ1.2 (t0 , ) = υ1.2 (t0 , t0 ) ,

Vˆ1.2 (t0 , ) = V1.2 (t0 , t0 ) .

(6.3.67)

136


Ê >0

V2(t0) 1.0 1

(1 + Ê)

– –2

V1(t0) t0+ 1.0

0

1.5

t0

2.0

Figure 6.6 Graphs of the functions υ1 = υ1 (t0 , ζ) and υ2 = υ2 (t0 , ζ) for a fixed ζ > 0 and t0 > 1.5. As a direct consequence of Theorem 6.3 we now obtain the following bounds on υˆ1.2 − 12

υˆ1 (t0 , ) ≤ t0

(1 + )

− 12

1

υˆ2 (t0 , ) ≥ (1 + ) 2 ,

,

(6.3.68)

while the relations (6.3.13) reduce to the forms Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 = 1 + (1 + ) t0 ,

Vˆ1 Vˆ2 = t0 .

(6.3.69)

Henceforth, denoting the differentiation with respect to by , we find Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 = t0 ,

(Vˆ1 Vˆ2 ) = 0,

(6.3.70)

and Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 = 0,

(Vˆ1 Vˆ2 ) = 0. (6.3.71) Solving the systems (6.3.70 and 71) for the pairs Vˆ1 , Vˆ2 and Vˆ1 , Vˆ2 , we obtain Vˆ1 = t0 Vˆ1 = −2t20

Vˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

,

Vˆ1 Vˆ2 , (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )3

Vˆ2 = −t0

Vˆ2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

Vˆ2 = 2t20

,

Vˆ1 Vˆ2 . (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )3

(6.3.72) (6.3.73)

From this we find the inequalities determining the behavior of functions υ #1.2 () Vˆ1 > 0,

Vˆ1 < 0

Vˆ2 < 0, Vˆ2 > 0.

∀t0 > 1.

(6.3.74)


137

For the derivatives of υˆ1.2 () we then get 1 −3/2 = − Vˆ1.2 Vˆ1.2 , υˆ1.2 2 1 −3/2 ˆ −1 ˆ ˆ 3Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 υˆ1 = − Vˆ1 , V 2 V1 V2 4 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 1 −3/2 ˆ −1 ˆ ˆ Vˆ1 + 3Vˆ2 . V 1 V 1 V2 υˆ2 = Vˆ2 4 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

(6.3.75)

(6.3.76)

Thus, the inequalities describing the behavior of functions υ #1.2 () become υˆ1 < 0, υˆ1 > 0 υˆ2 > 0, υˆ2 < 0

∀t0 > 1.

(6.3.77)

The latter inequalities imply that, for a fixed t0 > 1, the functions υˆ1 () and υˆ2 () have the same character as υ1.2 (ζ). In particular, υˆ1.2 (0) = υ1.2 (0) and υ2 ()) is a monotonically decreasing (increasing) function of . The graphs υˆ1 () (# of υˆ1.2 () are similar to the graphs of υ1.2 (ζ) in Fig. 6.3. We will now examine the dependence of functions υˆ1.2 on the parameter t0 , at a fixed > 0. Differentiating eqns (6.3.69) with respect to t0 and denoting the derivative with respect to t0 by a dot, we obtain ˙ ˙ Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 = 1 + ,

(Vˆ1 Vˆ2 )· = 1,

(6.3.78)

and ¨ ¨ Vˆ1 + Vˆ2 = 0, (Vˆ1 Vˆ2 )·· = 0.

(6.3.79)

From eqns (6.3.78) we find (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 ˙ ˙ , Vˆ2 = , Vˆ1 = ˆ ˆ V 1 − V2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

(6.3.80)

whereas from eqns (6.3.79) we find ·

·

Vˆ 1 Vˆ 2 ¨ , Vˆ1 = 2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

·

·

Vˆ 1 Vˆ 2 ¨ Vˆ2 = −2 . Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

(6.3.81)

From the inequalities t0 > 1.5, > 0, and inequalities (6.3.68), there follows Vˆ1 > (1 + ) > (1 + )−1 , Vˆ2 < (1 + )−1 .

(6.3.82)

Hence, (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 > 0,

1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 > 0.

(6.3.83)

138


The inequality Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 > 0 together with the inequalities (6.3.83) and the relations (6.3.80 and 6.3.81) then imply that the functions Vˆ1.2 (t0 ) satisfy the inequalities ¨ ˙ Vˆ1 > 0, Vˆ1 > 0, ¨ ˙ Vˆ2 > 0, Vˆ2 < 0.

(6.3.84)

For the derivatives of functions υˆ1.2 we obtain

υ¨ ˆ1.2

1 −3/2 ˆ˙ V1.2 , υˆ˙ 1.2 = − Vˆ1 2 3 −5/2 ˆ˙ 1 −3/2 ¨ˆ = Vˆ1 (V1.2 )2 − Vˆ1 V1.2 . 4 2

(6.3.85) (6.3.86)

From this, in view of eqns (6.3.80 and 6.3.81), we obtain 1 − υˆ˙ 1 = − Vˆ1 2 2 3

1 − υˆ˙ 2 = − Vˆ2 2 2 3

(

) (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 , Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ( ) 1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 , Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

( ) 3 ˆ − 52 ˆ˙ ˆ˙ (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 4 Vˆ1 ¨ υˆ1 = V1 V1 V2 , − 4 3 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 ( ) 3 ˆ − 52 ˆ˙ ˆ˙ 1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 4 Vˆ2 ¨ . υˆ2 = V2 V1 V2 + 4 (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 3 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

(6.3.87)

(6.3.88)

We will now show that, for t0 > 1.5 and ζ > 0, the expression in square bracket on the right-hand side of eqn (6.3.88)1 is positive. To prove this it suffices to show that 4 (1 + )Vˆ1 − 1 (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) − Vˆ1 1 − (1 + )Vˆ2 > 0, (6.3.89) 3 or 7 1 (1 + )Vˆ12 − Vˆ1 + (1 + )Vˆ1 Vˆ2 + Vˆ2 > 0. 3 3

(6.3.90)

On account of eqn (6.3.69), we reduce eqn (6.3.90) to 10 4 (1 + )Vˆ12 − Vˆ1 + 1 + (1 + )t0 > 0. 3 3

(6.3.91)

Attenuation of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space

139

Figure 6.7 Graphs of the functions υˆ1 = υ1 (t0 , t0 ) and υˆ2 = υ2 (t0 , t0 ) for a fixed > 0 and t0 > 1.5. The left-hand side of the inequality (6.3.91) is a second-order polynomial in Vˆ1 , whose discriminant is 2 10 4 − 4 (1 + ) 1 + (1 + ) t0 ∆0 = 3 3 (6.3.92) 4 25 − (1 + ) 1 + (1 + ) t0 . =4 9 3 Since t0 > 1.5 and > 0, it follows that 4 4 25 4 < 1 + t0 < (1 + ) 1 + t0 < (1 + ) 1 + (1 + )t0 . 9 3 3 3

(6.3.93)

Therefore, ∆0 < 0 and the inequality (6.3.89) holds. From this, in view of the formulas (6.3.87 and 6.3.88), there follow the inequalities υˆ˙ 1 < 0,

υ¨ ˆ1 > 0

υˆ˙ 2 < 0,

υ¨ ˆ2 > 0

∀t0 ≥ 1.5.

(6.3.94)

One can show that, for t0 < 1, the function υˆ1 (t0 ) possesses an inflection point tˆ0 , where υ¨ ˆ1 tˆ0 = 0. Schematic graphs of υˆ1 (t0 ) and υˆ2 (t0 ) are shown in Fig. 6.7. Comparing the graphs of υˆ1.2 (t0 ) with those of υ1.2 (t0 ), we conclude that υˆ1.2 (t0 ) have the same decreasing character as υ1.2 (t0 ). However, one difference is that the upper bound of υˆ1 is greater than that of υ1 (t0 ), while the lower bound of υˆ2 is greater than that of υ2 (t0 ). 6.4 Attenuation of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space of constitutive variables In this section we assume that t0 = t1 , which means taking the attenuation coefficients kˆ1.2 = kˆ1.2 (t0 , ) specified by the formulas (recall eqn (6.2.9)2 for

140


this particular case) 1 kˆ1.2 = 2

1 ˆ2 , 1+∓α ˆ∆

(6.4.1)

! −1 ˆ , α ˆ = 1 − − (1 + )2 t0 ∆

(6.4.2)

ˆ = [1 − (1 − )t0 ]2 + 4t20 . ∆

(6.4.3)

The coefficients kˆ1 and kˆ2 are solutions of a system of linear algebraic equations (recall eqns (6.2.49) and (6.2.52)) kˆ1 Vˆ2 + kˆ2 Vˆ1 = 1, (6.4.4) kˆ1 + kˆ2 = 1 + , where

1 1 ˆ2 . 1 + (1 + ) t0 ± ∆ Vˆ1.2 = (6.4.5) 2 Thus, an analysis of kˆ1 and kˆ2 may be conducted recalling the properties of Vˆ1 and Vˆ2 derived in the preceding section. 6.4.1 Behavior of functions kˆ1.2 for a fixed relaxation time t0 We shall examine that behavior in a small right neighborhood of = 0 for t0 > 2 3 . First, we solve eqns (6.4.4) with respect to (kˆ1 , kˆ2 ) and obtain (1 + ) Vˆ1 − 1 kˆ1 = , Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

1 − (1 + ) Vˆ2 kˆ2 = . Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

From this, we obtain ( = d/d) kˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 = (1 + ) Vˆ1 + Vˆ1 − kˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 , kˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 = (1 + ) Vˆ1 + 2Vˆ1 − kˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 − 2kˆ1 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 , kˆ2 = 1 − kˆ1 ,

kˆ2 = −kˆ2 .

(6.4.6)

(6.4.7) (6.4.8) (6.4.9)

Introducing, for convenience, the notations kˆ1.2 = kˆ1.2 () , Vˆ1.2 = Vˆ1.2 () ,

(6.4.10)

and employing eqns (6.4.5) as well as eqns (6.3.72 and 6.3.73), we find Vˆ1 (0) = t0 , Vˆ1 (0) =

t20 , t0 − 1

Vˆ1 (0) = −2 3

Vˆ2 (0) = 1,

t30 (t0 − 1)

t0 Vˆ2 (0) = − , t0 − 1 3,

Vˆ2 (0) = 2

To justify the hypothesis t0 > 2 see Footnote #2.

t30 (t0 − 1)

3.

(6.4.11)

Attenuation of a fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the space

141

Figure 6.8 Graphs of the functions kˆ1 = k1 (t0 , t0 ) and kˆ2 = k2 (t0 , t0 ) for a fixed t0 > 2 and > 0. From this, on account of eqns (6.4.6–6.4.9), we find kˆ1 (0) = 1,

t0 (t0 − 1) kˆ1 (0) = 2 , (t0 − 1)

kˆ2 (0) = 0,

kˆ2 (0) =

1 (t0 − 1)

2,

kˆ1 (0) =

6t20 (t0 − 1)

kˆ2 (0) = −

4,

(6.4.12)

4.

(6.4.13)

6t20 (t0 − 1)

Therefore, in a small neighborhood of , for kˆ1.2 (), we may write the expansions 3 t0 (t0 − 2) 3t20 2 , kˆ1 () = 1 + 2 + 4 +O (t0 − 1) (t0 − 1) kˆ2 () =

1 (t0 − 1)

2

−

3t20 (t0 − 1)

4

2 + O 3 .

(6.4.14)

Observe that eqns (6.4.14) imply that, for t0 > 2, the functions kˆ1.2 () are monotonically increasing in a sufficiently small right neighborhood of = 0. Schematic graphs of kˆ1.2 () are shown in Fig. 6.8. 6.4.2 Behavior of functions kˆ1.2 for a fixed A comparison of formulas (6.4.6) with eqn (6.3.80) indicates that d ˙ ˙ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ . k1 = V1 , k2 = V2 · = dt0

(6.4.15)

Hence [see eqns (6.3.81)], kˆ1 kˆ2 ˙ ¨ , kˆ1 = Vˆ1 = 2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

kˆ1 kˆ2 ˙ ¨ kˆ2 = Vˆ2 = −2 , Vˆ1 − Vˆ2

(6.4.16)

and ˙ ˙ ¨ Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ˆ˙ Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 + k1 = (kˆ1 kˆ2 )· , kˆ1 2 2

(6.4.17)

142


or ˙ ˙ ¨ Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ˆ˙ kˆ1 − kˆ2 + k1 = kˆ1 kˆ2 + kˆ1 kˆ2 . kˆ1 2 2

(6.4.18)

Since ˙ ˙ kˆ1 = −kˆ2 ,

¨ ¨ kˆ1 = −kˆ2 ,

(6.4.19)

on account of eqn (6.4.18) we obtain 3 ˙ ¨ (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) = − (kˆ1 − kˆ2 )kˆ1 , kˆ1 2 2 3 ˙ ¨ (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) = (kˆ1 − kˆ2 )kˆ1 . kˆ2 2 2 This leads to the following theorem: Theorem 6.7

(6.4.20) (6.4.21)

If > 0 and t0 > 1.5, then kˆ1 > kˆ2 > 0.

(6.4.22)

Proof. The formulas (6.4.1–6.4.5) imply

where

kˆ1 − kˆ2 = −ˆ α(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ),

(6.4.23)

−1 2 ˆ . α ˆ = 1 − − (1 + ) t0 ∆

(6.4.24)

Therefore, eqn (6.4.22) is equivalent to the condition α ˆ < 0, that is 1−

< t0 .

(6.4.25)

< 1 < 1.5 < t0 ,

(6.4.26)

(1 + )

2

Since > 0 and t0 > 1.5, then 1− (1 + )

2

which implies that eqn (6.4.25) holds.

The formulas (6.4.15, 6.4.16, 6.4.20 and 6.4.21) together with Theorem 6.7 imply that ∀ (t0 , ) ∈ (1.5, ∞) the functions kˆ1.2 (t0 ) treated as functions of one variable t0 , satisfy the inequalities ¨ ˙ kˆ1 > 0, kˆ1 < 0, ¨ ˙ kˆ2 < 0, kˆ2 > 0.

(6.4.27)

Graphs of kˆ1 (t0 ) and kˆ2 (t0 ) are displayed in Fig. 6.9, where also the point t∗0 at which kˆ1 = kˆ2 is indicated.

Analysis of the convolution coefficient and kernel

143

Figure 6.9 Graphs of the functions kˆ1 = k1 (t0 , t0 ) and kˆ2 = k2 (t0 , t0 ) for a fixed > 0 and t0 > 1.5. 6.5 Analysis of the convolution coefficient and kernel Similar to Section 6.4, the analysis of the coefficient λ and the function K = K (t) ˆ and K ˆ (t), respectively, the will be restricted to the case t1 = t0 . Denoting by λ value of λ and the function K (t) for t0 = t1 , on account of eqn (6.2.53), we obtain ˆ = kˆ1 kˆ2 (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−1 , λ

(6.5.1)

whereas, on account of, eqn (6.2.34), we have αt ˆ ˆ − βJ ˆ 2 (βt) ˆ , ˆ (t) = 2 e K α ˆ J1 (βt) ˆ βt

(6.5.2)

where (recall eqns (6.2.65) and (6.2.67)) 4 α ˆ = −(kˆ1 − kˆ2 )(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−1 , 1 2

− 12

ˆ (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) βˆ = 2λ

.

(6.5.3) (6.5.4)

ˆ also depends on Since kˆ1.2 = kˆ1.2 (t0 , ) and Vˆ1.2 = Vˆ1.2 (t0 , ), the coefficient λ t0 and , that is ˆ=λ ˆ (t0 , ) . λ

(6.5.5)

ˆ at fixed t0 6.5.1 Analysis of λ Using the formulas (6.4.6) and (6.3.69) we obtain kˆ1 kˆ2 = (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−2 , 4

(6.5.6)

The symbol α ˆ defined by eqn (6.2.35) must not be confused with α ˆ in eqn (6.5.3).

144


ˆ = λ(t0 , t0 ) for a fixed t0 > 1 and > 0. Figure 6.10 Graph of the function λ so that eqn (6.5.1) may be written as ˆ = (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−3 . λ

(6.5.7)

ˆ () for a fixed t0 and computing the first and Denoting the function (6.5.7) by λ second derivatives with respect to ( = d/d), we find ˆ () = (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−4 (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) − 3(Vˆ − Vˆ ) , (6.5.8) λ 1 2 ˆ () = −3(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−5 2(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )(Vˆ − Vˆ ) λ 2 1 2 + (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ) − 4(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )2 .

(6.5.9)

From this, on account of formulas (6.4.11), we obtain for t0 > 1 ˆ (0) = (t0 − 1)−3 , λ

(6.5.10)

ˆ (0) = −6t0 (t0 + 1) (t0 − 1)−5 . λ 2

(6.5.11)

ˆ () has the Therefore, for t0 > 1 in a right neighborhood of = 0, the function λ expansion ˆ () = λ

(t0 − 1)

3

−

3t0 (t0 + 1) (t0 − 1)

5

2 + O 3 .

(6.5.12)

ˆ () is given in Fig. 6.10. The respective graph of λ ˆ at fixed 6.5.2 Analysis of λ ˆ (t0 ) for a fixed , we have this theorem: Denoting the function (6.5.7) by λ Theorem 6.8 For every t0 > 2 and fixed such that 0 < < 1, the function ˆ (t0 ) satisfies the inequalities λ ˆ (t0 ) > 0, λ

ˆ˙ (t0 ) < 0, λ

¨ ˆ (t0 ) > 0. λ

(6.5.13)


145

Proof. The first of the inequalities (6.5.13) is a direct consequence of (6.5.7). In order to prove eqn (6.5.13)2,3 we first differentiate eqn (6.5.7) with respect to t0 and find ˆ˙ = −3(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−4 (Vˆ˙ 1 − Vˆ˙ 2 ), −1 λ ¨ ˆ = 12(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−5 (Vˆ˙ 1 − Vˆ˙ 2 )2 − 3(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−4 (V¨ˆ1 − V¨ˆ2 ). −1 λ

(6.5.14) (6.5.15)

˙ ˙ On account of Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 = kˆ1 − kˆ2 (recall eqns (6.4.15)) and kˆ1 − kˆ2 > 0, by Theorem 6.7, eqn (6.5.14) implies that the inequality (6.5.13)2 holds. Next, to prove eqn (6.5.13)3 we observe that eqn (6.4.16)3 implies ¨ ¨ Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 =

4kˆ1 kˆ2 . (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )

(6.5.16)

Hence, from eqn (6.5.15) we obtain ¨ ˆ = 12(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−5 (kˆ1 − kˆ2 )2 − kˆ1 kˆ2 . −1 λ

(6.5.17)

Next, it follows from the formulas (6.5.3) and (6.5.6) that the expression in square brackets on the right of eqn (6.5.17) may be written as ˆ 2 − ]. [·] = (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−2 [(Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )4 α

(6.5.18)

Since, on account of eqn (6.4.23)

2 ˆ = 1 − − (1 + ) t0 , (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )2 α

(6.5.19)

in order to prove eqn (6.5.13)3 it will suffice to show that 2 2 (1 + ) t0 − (1 − ) − > 0

(6.5.20)

holds. To this end, let t∗0 =

1− (1 + )

2.

(6.5.21)

Then, (1 + ) t0 − (1 − ) = (1 + ) (t0 − t∗0 ) , 2

2

and the inequality (6.5.20) is equivalent to the relation √ √ 2 2 (1 + ) (t0 − t∗0 ) − (1 + ) (t0 − t∗0 ) + > 0.

(6.5.22)

(6.5.23)

Since t∗0 < 1, while t0 > 2 and > 0, the condition (6.5.23) is equivalent to √ ∗ (6.5.24) t0 > t0 + 2. (1 + )

146


ˆ = λ(t0 , t0 ) for a fixed ∈ (0, 1) and Figure 6.11 Graph of the function λ t0 > 2. Furthermore, since √ √ 1 1 (1 + ) − ∗ √ t0 + 2 = 2 + 2 = 2 + ( + ) (1 + ) , (1 + ) (1 + ) (1 + ) (1 + )

(6.5.25)

and 0 < < 1,

√

1 1 < , +

1 2

(1 + )

< 1,

(6.5.26)

from eqn (6.5.25) we find t∗0

√ +

(1 + )

2

< 2 − .

(6.5.27)

With this and the assumption t0 > 2 we conclude that the inequality (6.5.24) holds. ˆ (t0 ) is shown in Fig. 6.11. A graph of λ 6.5.3 Analysis of the convolution kernel On account of eqn (6.5.2) we have the following theorem: ˆ =K ˆ (t) is an analytic function of t ∈ Theorem 6.9 The kernel K ˆ (t) satisfies the [0, ∞) ∀ (t0 , ) ∈ (1, ∞) × (0, ∞). In addition, the function K inequality ˆ (t) | ≤ kˆ0 (t) |K where

∀t ∈ [0, ∞),

1 ˆ |ˆ α| + βˆ2 t . kˆ0 (t) = eαt 4

(6.5.28)

(6.5.29)


147

In particular, ˆ (t) → 0 K

for

t → ∞.

(6.5.30)

ˆ (t) follows from the analytic properties of the Proof. The analyticity of K functions J1 (x) /x and J2 (x) /x ∀x ≥ 0 and from the fact that, for t0 > 1 and > 0, we have α ˆ < 0 (see Theorem 6.7). ˆ (t) (recall The estimate (6.5.28) follows from the definition of the kernel K eqn (6.5.2)) and from the inequality |Jn (x) | ≤

xn 2n n!

∀x ≥ 0,

n ≥ 0.

Passing in the inequality (6.5.28) with t to ∞, we obtain eqn (6.5.30). 5

(6.5.31)

For the function kˆ0 (t) appearing in Theorem 6.9 there holds the following theorem. Theorem 6.10 inequalities

For every t0 > 3 and > 0, the function kˆ0 (t) satisfies the kˆ0 (t) > 0,

˙ kˆ0 (t) < 0,

¨ kˆ0 (t) > 0

∀t ≥ 0.

(6.5.32)

Proof. The first of the inequalities (6.5.32) is a direct consequence of eqn (6.5.29). In order to prove the remaining two we first differentiate eqn (6.5.29) with respect to t and obtain 1 ˆ2 1 ˆ2 ˙ αt ˆ ˆ α ˆ |α ˆ| + β t + β , (6.5.33) k0 = e 4 4 1 ˆ2 1 ˆ2 ¨ˆ αt ˆ 2 α ˆ |ˆ α| + β t + 2ˆ (6.5.34) α β . k0 = e 4 4 Next, using eqns (6.5.1), (6.5.3) and (6.5.4), we get −2 2 −2 1 ˆ2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 ˆ |ˆ α| = kˆ1 kˆ2 Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 − kˆ1 − kˆ2 , β +α 4

(6.5.35)

so that, the inequality (6.5.13)3 of Theorem 6.8 and eqn (6.5.17) imply 1 ˆ2 ˆ |α ˆ | < 0. β +α 4

(6.5.36)

˙ From this and the formula (6.5.33) it follows that kˆ0 (t) < 0 ∀t ≥ 0, i.e. that eqn (6.5.32)2 holds. 5 Theorem 6.9 can be generalized to the case t ≥ t > 1, > 0, if one observes that the 1 0 parameter α, defining the kernel K = K(t) [see eqn (6.2.3)] is negative. In the generalized theorem there occur symbols without huts.

148


Figure 6.12 Graph of the function kˆ0 = kˆ0 (t) for t > 0 and fixed values of t0 and : ∈ (0, 1) and t0 > 3. In order to prove eqn (6.5.32)3 , it will suffice to show that 1 ˆ2 ˆ β > 0. α| + α (6.5.37) α ˆ 2 |ˆ 2 On account of eqns (6.5.1), (6.5.3) and (6.5.4), we rewrite eqn (6.5.37) as (6.5.38) (Vˆ1 − Vˆ2 )−3 (kˆ1 − kˆ2 )3 − 2(kˆ1 − kˆ2 )kˆ1 kˆ2 > 0. In view of Theorem 6.7, this inequality is equivalent to (kˆ1 − kˆ2 )2 − 2kˆ1 kˆ2 > 0,

(6.5.39)

or, given eqns (6.4.23) and (6.4.24) and (6.5.6), it is equivalent to (recall eqn (6.5.23)) √ √ 2 2 (6.5.40) (1 + ) (t0 − t∗0 ) − 2 (1 + ) (t0 − t∗0 ) + 2 > 0, where t∗0 is given by eqn (6.5.21). Since for > 0 t∗0 +

√

2

(1 + )

2

< 3 − ,

and t0 > 3 by assumption, eqn (6.5.40) is true.

(6.5.41)

A graph of kˆ0 (t) for a fixed > 0 and t0 > 3 is shown in Fig. 6.12. ˆ (t) The oscillatory character of the Bessel functions appearing in the kernel K along with the Theorems 6.9 and 6.10 lead to the following corollary. ˆ (t) is an oscillating K Corollary 6.2 For every t0 > 3 and > 0 the kernel function whose amplitudes belong to the interval −kˆ0 (t) , kˆ0 (t) ∀t ∈ [0, ∞). These oscillations tend to zero as t → ∞. In contrast to Corollary 6.2, the following result, based on Theorem 6.2, holds true.


149

Corollary 6.3 For classical dynamical thermoelasticity the kernel K0 = K0 (t) [see eqn (6.2.116)] in which the coupling parameter ranges over the interval (0,1) is an oscillating function that goes to infinity as t → ∞. Remark 6.3 An admissible domain of the constitutive parameters t0 , t1 and is determined by the inequalities t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0,

≥ 0.

(6.5.42)

In the case t1 = t0 = 0, that is for a classical thermoelastic body, the parameter is a number in the interval (0, 1) [note Table 1 in (Chadwick, 1960)]: = 3.56 × 10−2 for aluminum; = 1.68 × 10−2 for copper; = 2.97 × 10−4 for iron; = 7.73 × 10−2 for lead. In the case t1 = t0 > 0 and = 0, that is for a rigid conductor, the thermal relaxation time t˜0 , measured in seconds, has these values [note Table in (Francis, 1972) 6 ]: t˜0 = 8 × 10−12 for aluminum; t˜0 = 1.6 × 10−12 for carbon steel; t˜0 = 1.5 × 10−12 for uranium silicate (U3 Si); t˜0 = 2 × 10−9 for liquid helium II. In order to illustrate an order of magnitude of the dimensionless parameters ˆ and βˆ characterizing a specific thermoelastic body, let us consider υî , kî , λ aluminum, for which: = 3.56 × 10−2 ,

t˜0 = 8 × 10−12 s.

(6.5.43)

As units of length and time we choose (recall eqn (4.1.6)) x ˆ0 =

k CE C1

and tˆ0 =

k . CE C12

(6.5.44)

In the above, k, CE and C1 denote, respectively, the thermal conductivity, the specific heat at zero deformation and the speed of longitudinal waves in aluminum. As a result, we find [recall Table 1 in (Chadwick, 1960)] 11 −1 . x ˆ0 = 1.36 × 10−6 cm, tˆ−1 0 = 4.66 × 10 s

(6.5.45)

A (1 ˚ A= Thus, the chosen units are relatively small: x ˆ0 is of the order of 100 ˚ −10 −12 ˆ ˜ m), while t0 is of the order of 2 ps (1 ps = 10 s). Since t0 is of the order 10 of 8 ps (see (6.5.43)), the dimensionless pair (t0 , ) takes the form (t0 , ) = (3.728, 0.0356) .

(6.5.46)

Clearly, the pair does belong to the domain of constitutive parameters considered ˆ we find ˆ , βˆ and λ, in this chapter. Inserting it into the formulas defining υî , kî , α υˆ1 = 0.5059, kˆ1 = 1.0315,

υˆ2 = 1.0236, kˆ2 = 0.0040, βˆ = 0.0433,

α ˆ = −0.3481, ˆ = 0.0014. λ 6

The symbol t˜0 must not be confused with the dimensionless time t0 of Chapter 4.

150


ˆ i and λ ˆ i , defined by the formulas Hence, for the quantities h ˆ i = λˆ ˆυ2 , ˆ i = υˆ2 kî /2, λ h i i

(6.5.47)

we find ˆ 1 = 0.1320, h ˆ 1 = 3.583 × 10−4 , λ

ˆ 2 = 0.0020, h ˆ 2 = 0.0042. λ

ˆ i , respectively, are called the reduced attenuation ˆ i and λ The parameters h and the reduced convolution coefficients of the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance. These two parameters appear in a natural way in the investigation ˆ i φi = 0; see Section 7.1. of Neumann-type series solutions of the equation L It follows from the numerical values given above that for aluminum the first fundamental thermoelastic disturbance propagates more slowly and is attenuated more strongly than the second one. This result is consistent with the general considerations of the present chapter (recall Figs. 6.7–6.9). Moreover, the reduced attenuation coefficients are smaller than the conventional ones, while the reduced convolution coefficients are relatively small. Remark 6.4

By letting t0 > 1 [see eqn (6.3.5)] and introducing the notations c1 = lim v2 , ε→0

c2 = lim v1 , ε→0

(6.5.48)

from eqns (6.3.1) we obtain c1 = 1,

−1/2

c2 = t0

.

(6.5.49)

Hence, c1 and c2 represent the “first” and “second” sound speeds, respectively. Clearly, c1 is a dimensionless speed of a longitudinal isothermal elastic wave, while c2 is a dimensionless speed of a heat wave in a rigid heat conductor of the Maxwell–Cattaneo type. As a result, the first and second sound speeds represent the limiting values of speeds of the fundamental thermoelastic disturbances of the G–L theory as ε → 0. For aluminum t0 = 3.728 [see eqn (6.5.46)]; therefore substituting this value into eqn (6.5.49)2 we obtain 1 c2 = 0.51791 √ c1 . 3

(6.5.50)

The formula (6.5.50) is an approximation of the result obtained by Landau 1 c2 = √ c1 , 3

(6.5.51)

where c1 and c2 denote the first and second sound velocities in a superfluid helium II in a low temperature (Landau, 1941). Therefore, the velocity formulas of Theorem 6.1 applied for aluminum and taken at ε = 0 lead to an approximate form of the Landau’s result for a superfluid helium II at a low temperature,


151

showing an agreement between the Landau and G–L theories as far as tracking the second sound in solids at low temperatures is concerned. Joseph and Preziosi (1989) expressed some doubts about experiments showing heat waves at low temperatures in liquid helium and in certain dielectric crystals. They wrote there (page 51): “It appears that the response of dielectric crystals to oscillations in temperature is not clear enough to use ultrasound and acoustic methods. The experiments that appear to be successful use pulse inputs whose harmonic content is not perfectly known”. In our opinion, the velocity and attenuation formulas of Theorem 6.1 with the approximate material parameters, referred either to an isothermal elastic solid or to a rigid heat conductor, may be useful in identifying the physical properties of a genuine thermoelastic material tested in a laboratory experiment in a range of low temperatures as well as beyond such a range.

7 EXACT APERIODIC-IN-TIME SOLUTIONS OF GREEN–LINDSAY THEORY

7.1 Fundamental solutions for a 3D bounded domain 1 A solution of the potential–temperature problem of the G–L theory discussed in Chapter 4 may be obtained with the help of so-called fundamental solutions. In this chapter we introduce two such solutions of the G–L theory corresponding to the two fundamental thermoelastic disturbances of that theory already defined in the previous chapter. According to the definition introduced in Section 6.2, the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory is a potential–temperature disturbance corresponding to the potential φi that satisfies the wave-like equation ˆ i φi = 0 (i = 1, 2) , L

(7.1.1)

where (recall eqns (6.2.7), (6.2.8) and (6.2.14)) 2 ˆ 1 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k1 ∂ − λ − λK∗, L υ12 ∂t2 ∂t

(7.1.2)

2 ˆ 2 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k2 ∂ + λ + λK ∗. L 2 υ2 ∂t2 ∂t

(7.1.3)

By virtue of Theorem 6.1 on decomposition a potential–temperature disturbance satisfying homogeneous initial conditions is a sum of two such disturbances. Let B denote a bounded region in a 3D Euclidean space, and let [0, ∞) be a time interval. The function φi satisfying the relations ˆ i φi = 0 on B × [0, ∞), L

(7.1.4)

φi (·, 0) = φ˙ i (·, 0) = 0 on B,

(7.1.5)

φi = fi

on ∂B × [0, ∞),

(7.1.6)

is called the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory. In eqn (7.1.6) fi (i = 1, 2) is an arbitrary function defined on ∂B × [0, ∞). This definition implies that a knowledge of the functional dependence of the first fundamental solution on υ1 , k1 , λ and f1 allows one to determine the second 1

See (Ignaczak, 1981).

Fundamental solutions for a 3D bounded domain

153

fundamental solution as a function of υ2 , k2 , λ and f2 . One can show that for a smooth boundary ∂B and sufficiently smooth functions f1 and f2 there exists exactly one fundamental solution. 2 Our definition of fundamental solutions is motivated by the fact that they may be employed to construct a solution of PTP in the G–L theory, in which the initial conditions are homogeneous and one of the boundary conditions for φ is of Dirichlet type. 3 Using the homogeneous initial conditions (7.1.5), one can show that the relations (7.1.4)–(7.1.6) defining the ith fundamental solution are equivalent to the equations ˆ ∗ φi = 0 on B × [0, ∞), L i

(7.1.7)

φi (·, 0) = φ˙ i (·, 0) = 0 on B,

(7.1.8)

φi = fi

on ∂B × [0, ∞),

(7.1.9)

ˆ ∗ (i = 1, 2) are the wave-like operators where L i 2 ˆ ∗1 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k1 ∂ − λG ∗ ∂ , L υ12 ∂t2 ∂t ∂t

(7.1.10)

2 ˆ ∗2 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k2 ∂ + λG ∗ ∂ , L 2 υ2 ∂t2 ∂t ∂t

(7.1.11)

in which the kernel G = G(t) is (recall eqn (6.2.26)) G (t) = 2eαt

J1 (βt) . βt

(7.1.12)

In the following, while looking for the fundamental solutions, we employ the system (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) rather than eqns (7.1.4)–(7.1.6). Thus, we look for the function φ1 , satisfying eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) for i = 1, in the form of a series . φ1 (x, t) = T1j (t) ϕj (x) , (7.1.13) j

where ϕj (x) (j = 1, 2, 3, . . .) are the eigenfunctions of the operator −∇2 on B satisfying the homogeneous boundary conditions on ∂B, that is [see p. 213 in (Stakgold, 1968)] ∇2 ϕj + λj ϕj = 0 on B,

(7.1.14)

ϕj = 0 on ∂B.

(7.1.15)

2 A uniqueness theorem for the problem (7.1.4)–(7.1.6) is to be proved in the section on expansion of a fundamental solution into a series of eigenfunctions for the operator −∇2 (see eqn (7.1.13)). 3 If a PTP of G–L theory is formulated in such a way that φ satisfies the homogeneous initial conditions, and one of the two boundary conditions is of the Neumann type, a fundamental solution, that satisfies eqns (7.1.4) and (7.1.5) subject to a boundary condition of the Neumann type, may also be defined.

154

Exact aperiodic-in-time solutions of Green–Lindsay theory

The numbers λj (j = 1, 2, 3, . . .) are the eigenvalues of the problem (7.1.14) and (7.1.15) satisfying the inequalities 0 < λ1 < λ2 < λ3 < . . . < λn < . . .

(7.1.16)

The functions T1j (t) depend on time only; they should be chosen in such a way that φ1 given by eqn (7.1.13) satisfies eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) for i = 1 and for an arbitrary function f1 on ∂B × [0, ∞). Assuming that the set {ϕj (x)} forms a complete orthonormal space, from eqn (7.1.13) we obtain (7.1.17) T1j (t) = φ1 (x, t) φj (x) dυ. B

Given that φ1 (x, t) satisfies the inhomogeneous boundary condition (7.1.9) for i = 1, while ϕj (x) vanish at ∂B, the series (7.1.13) cannot be uniformly ¯ × [0, ∞). That is, it cannot be differentiated term by term or convergent on B substituted directly into eqn (7.1.7) for i = 1. In order to obtain an equation governing T1j (t), we multiply by ϕj (x) both sides of eqn (7.1.7) for i = 1, integrate over B so as to find 1 d2 ϕj (x) ∇2 φ1 dυ − 2 2 ϕj (x) φ1 dυ υ1 dt B B (7.1.18) d d ϕj (x) φ1 dυ − λG ∗ ϕj (x) φ1 dυ = 0. −k1 dt dt B

B

On account of eqn (7.1.17), from eqn (7.1.18) we find 1 d2 d d ϕj ∇2 φ1 dυ − 2 2 T1j (t) − k1 T1j (t) − λG ∗ T1j (t) = 0. υ1 dt dt dt

(7.1.19)

B

Since

ϕj ∇ φ1 dυ = B

∂φ1 ∂ϕj − φ1 ϕj ∂n ∂n

φ1 ∇ ϕj dυ +

2

2

B

da,

∂B

∇ ϕj = −λj ϕj 2

(7.1.20) on B,

ϕj = 0 on ∂B, and φ1 = f1

on ∂B × [0, ∞),

(7.1.21)

from eqn (7.1.19) we obtain d 1 d2 d T1j (t) + k1 T1j (t) + λj T1j (t) + λG ∗ T1j (t) = − υ12 dt2 dt dt

f1 (x, t)

∂ϕj da. ∂n

∂B

(7.1.22)


155

The homogeneous initial conditions (7.1.8) for i = 1 together with the formula (7.1.17) imply the homogeneous conditions for T1j (t) T1j (0) =

d T1j (0) = 0. dt

(7.1.23)

We shall now prove that, if there exists a solution T1j = T1j (t) to eqn (7.1.22) under conditions (7.1.23), it is unique (see footnote #2). It will suffice to demonstrate that the equation σ 1 ¨ ˙ (σ) + k (σ) + λ T (σ) + λ G (σ − s) T˙j (s) ds = 0 T T j 1 j j j (7.1.24) υ12 0 for σ ∈ [0, ∞), with the conditions (· = d/dσ) Tj (0) = T˙j (0) = 0,

(7.1.25)

Tj (σ) = 0 for σ ∈ [0, ∞).

(7.1.26)

implies the equation

Upon multiplying eqn (7.1.24) through by T˙j (σ) and integrating over the interval σ ∈ [0, t], on account of eqn (7.1.25), we obtain t 2 2 1 ˙ ˙j (σ) dσ + λj [Tj (t)]2 T T (t) + k j 1 2υ12 2 0 σ (7.1.27) t +λ dσ ds G (σ − s) T˙j (s) T˙j (σ) = 0. 0

0

It follows from the definition of the function G on [0, ∞) that 4 |G (σ − s)| ≤ 1 for 0 ≤ s ≤ σ ≤ t. Thus, from eqn (7.1.27) we obtain the inequality t 2 2 1 ˙ ˙j (σ) dσ + λj [Tj (t)]2 T T (t) + k j 1 2υ12 2 t 0σ * ** * * ** * ≤λ dσ ds *T˙j (s)* *T˙j (σ)* . 0

(7.1.28)

(7.1.29)

0

In the derivation of eqn (7.1.29) we use the fact that λ > 0 (recall eqn (6.2.9)3 ). Now, since t * t ** * 1 t * * 2 *˙ * ** * * dσ ds *T˙j (s)* *T˙j (σ)* = (7.1.30) *Tj (s)* ds , 2 0 0 0 4 The inequality (7.1.28) is implied from the inequalities |J (x)| ≤ |x|/2 and α < 0 (see 1 footnote #5 of Chapter 6).

156


and by the Schwartz inequality t * t * 2 2 * *˙ T˙j (σ) dσ, *Tj (s)* ds ≤ t 0

(7.1.31)

0

and λj > 0 (recall eqn (7.1.16)), from eqn (7.1.29) we obtain t 2 2 λt 1 ˙ Tj (t) + k1 − T˙j (σ) dσ ≤ 0. 2 2υ1 2 0

(7.1.32)

Next, we introduce the functions t pj (t) =

2 T˙j (σ) dσ,

(7.1.33)

0

λt , q (t) = 2υ12 k1 − 2

(7.1.34)

and transform the inequality (7.1.32) to p˙j (t) + q (t) pj (t) ≤ 0. t Multiplying eqn (7.1.35) through by exp 0 q (τ ) dτ we obtain t d pj (t) exp q (τ ) dτ ≤ 0. dt 0

(7.1.35)

(7.1.36)

Integrating this inequality over (0, t) and using the definition of pj (t) (recall eqn (7.1.33)), we obtain pj (t) = 0 for t ∈ [0, ∞),

(7.1.37)

T˙j (t) = 0 for t ∈ [0, ∞).

(7.1.38)

that is

From this and eqn (7.1.25)1 we obtain the desired relation (7.1.26) that ends the proof of uniqueness of the solution of eqn (7.1.22) subject to the conditions (7.1.23). We now turn to the determination of a function T1j (t), satisfying the integrodifferential equation (7.1.22) subject to eqn (7.1.23). We will use the Laplace transform with p being the parameter of transformation ∞ f¯ (p) =

e−pt f (t) dt.

(7.1.39)

0

In the terminology of the operator calculus of (Mikusi´ nski, 1967), the parameter p is to be treated as a differentiation operator, with the relation (7.1.39) written as f¯ (p) = {f (t)} .

(7.1.40)


157

Upon the transformation of eqn (7.1.22), and using the homogeneous initial conditions (7.1.23), we find ) ( 2 ∂ϕj p ¯ da. (7.1.41) + k1 p + λj + λpG T¯1j (p) = − f¯1 υ1 ∂n ∂B

From this there follows

(

T¯1j (p) = (−)

p υ1

)−1

2

+ k1 p + λj )−1 −1 ( 2  p ∂ϕj ¯ da, × 1 + λpG + k1 p + λj f¯1   υ1 ∂n  

(7.1.42)

∂B

or T¯1j (p) = −

∞ .

( k

¯k (−) λ G k

k=0

)k+1 f¯1 ∂ϕj da. 2 p ∂n (p/υ1 ) + k1 p + λj p

∂B

Since (recall eqns (6.2.28)–(6.2.30)) 2 2 2 ¯ (p − α) + β − (p − α) , G (p) = 2 β therefore ! ¯ (p) k = G

(7.1.43)

2 β2

k -

k 2 (p − α) + β 2 − (p − α) ,

and from the Laplace transform tables (Mikusi´ nski, 1967) we obtain !k ¯ (p) = {G (t)}k = {Gk (t)} , G

(7.1.44)

(7.1.45)

(7.1.46)

where G0 (t) = δ (t) , and Gk (t) = k

k αt 2 e Jk (βt) for k = 1, 2, 3, . . . β t

(7.1.47)

(7.1.48)

Here, δ (t) denotes the Dirac delta function, while Jk (x) is the Bessel function of the first kind and kth order. Note that 5 Gk (t) = G ∗ . . . ∗ G2 = G∗k (t). / ∗ G 01

(7.1.49)

k times 5 The notation for the kth convolutional power of a function is introduced in (Brun, 1975). In the Mikusi´ nski notation (1967) we have G∗k (t) = {Gk (t)} = {G(t)}k .

158


Next, we introduce the function 6 ¯ (p; λ, µ) = h

p 2

(p + µ) + λ2

,

(7.1.50)

where µ > 0 and λ is a non-negative number or a purely imaginary one with a non-negative imaginary part. Then,

where

¯ (p; λ, u) = {h (t; λ, u)} , h

(7.1.51)

h (t; λ, µ) = e−µt cos λt − µλ−1 sin λt ,

(7.1.52)

and ¯ (p; λ, µ) h

!n

n

= {h (t; λ, µ)} = {hn (t; λ, µ)} ,

(7.1.53)

hn (t; λ, µ) = h∗n (t; λ, µ) for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .

(7.1.54)

where

7

It is then easy to prove the equality ¯ n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , ¯ n+1 = 1 µ ∂ − ∂ h h 2n λ ∂λ ∂µ

(7.1.55)

which implies hn =

1

1 2n−1 (n − 1)!

µ ∂ ∂ − λ ∂λ ∂µ

n−1 h.

(7.1.56)

Letting hn in the form hn = e−µt (An cos λt + Bn sin λt) ,

(7.1.57)

An = An (t; λ, µ) , Bn = Bn (t; λ, µ) ,

(7.1.58)

where

from eqn (7.1.55) we obtain 1 µ (An ,λ + tBn ) − (An ,µ − tAn ) , 2n λ (7.1.59) 1 µ (Bn ,λ − tAn ) − (Bn ,µ − tBn ) , Bn+1 = 2n λ where the comma indicates a partial differentiation with respect to λ or µ. The relations (7.1.59) allow determination of the pair (An+1 , Bn+1 ) through the pair (An , Bn ) for any n = 1, 2, 3, . . . Introducing the notation An+1 =

ζ = µλ−1 , t = yλ−1 , (λ > 0) , 6

(7.1.60)

The parameters µ and λ in eqn (7.1.50) must not be confused with those introduced earlier. ¯ and h, For simplicity, we omit the variables (p; λ, µ) and (t; λ, µ) of the functions h respectively. 7


159

and employing eqns (7.1.52) and (7.1.57)–(7.1.59), for n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, we find A1 = 1, B1 = −ζ, y 1 1 − ζ 2 , B2 = 1 + ζ 2 − 2ζy , 2λ 2λ ! y A3 = 3ζ 1 + ζ 2 + 1 − 3ζ 2 y , 2 (2λ) 2! ! 1 −3ζ 1 + ζ 2 + 3 1 + ζ 2 y − ζ 3 − ζ 2 y 2 , B3 = 2 (2λ) 2! A2 =

−3 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 + 12ζ 1 + ζ 2 y (2λ) 3! ! + 1 − 6ζ 2 + ζ 4 y 2 , 1 B4 = 3 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 − 12ζ 1 + ζ 2 y 3 (2λ) 3! ! +6 1 − ζ 4 y 2 − 4ζ 1 − ζ 2 y 3 ,

A4 =

A5 =

B5 =

(7.1.61) (7.1.62)

(7.1.63)

y

3

y 4

(7.1.64)

[15ζ 3 + 10ζ 2 + 7ζ 4 − 15 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 y

(2λ) 4! +10ζ 3 + 2ζ 2 − ζ 4 y 2 + 1 − 10ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 y 3 ], 1 4

−15ζ 3 + 10ζ 2 + 7ζ 4 + 15 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 y

(2λ) 4! ! −15ζ 1 − 2ζ 2 − 3ζ 4 y 2 + 10 1 − 2ζ 2 − 3ζ 4 y 3 − ζ 5 − 10ζ 2 + ζ 4 y 4 , (7.1.65) y A6 = [−45ζ 1 + 15ζ 2 + 35ζ 4 + 21ζ 6 5 (2λ) 5! +90ζ 3 + 10ζ 2 + 7ζ 4 y − 15 3 + 15ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 − 7ζ 6 y 2 +60ζ 1 − ζ 4 y 3 + 1 − 15ζ 2 + 15ζ 4 − ζ 6 y 4 ], B6 =

1 5

[45 1 + 15ζ 2 + 35ζ 4 + 21ζ 6 − 90ζ 3 + 10ζ 2 + 7ζ 4 y

(2λ) 5! +30 1 − 15ζ 4 − 14ζ 6 y 2 + 30ζ 1 + 10ζ 2 + 9ζ 4 y 3 ! +15(1 − 5ζ 2 − 5ζ 4 + ζ 6 )y 4 − 2ζ 3 − 10ζ 2 + 3ζ 4 y 5 , y [315ζ 5 + 35ζ 2 + 63ζ 4 + 33ζ 6 A7 = 6 (2λ) 6! −315 1 + 15ζ 2 + 35ζ 4 + 21ζ 6 y +420ζ 2 + 5ζ 2 − 3ζ 6 y 2 − 105 1 + 3ζ 2 − 5ζ 4 − 7ζ 6 y 3

(7.1.66)

160


+21ζ 5 − 5ζ 2 − 9ζ 4 + ζ 6 y 4 + 1 − 21ζ 2 + 35ζ 4 − 7ζ 6 y 5 ], 1 [−315ζ 5 + 35ζ 2 + 63ζ 4 + 33ζ 6 B7 = 6 (2λ) 6! +315 1 + 15ζ 2 + 35ζ 4 + 21ζ 6 y −315ζ 1 − 5ζ 2 − 21ζ 4 − 15ζ 6 y 3 − 420ζ 2 3 + 10ζ 2 + 7ζ 4 y 3 +210ζ 1 + 5ζ 2 + 31ζ 4 − ζ 6 y 4 +21 1 − 9ζ 2 − 5ζ 4 + 5ζ 6 y 5 − ζ 7 − 35ζ 2 + 21ζ 4 − ζ 6 y 6 ].

(7.1.67)

In general, one can show (see Chapter 9) that An and Bn are polynomials in y of degree n − 1 of the form 1

n−1 .

akn (ζ) y k , (n − 1)! k=0 n−1 . 1 bkn (ζ) y k , Bn = n−1 (2λ) (n − 1)! k=0

An =

n−1

(2λ)

(7.1.68)

where akn (ζ) and bkn (ζ) (0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1) are polynomials in ζ of degree ≤ n, determined through the recurrence formulas (n ≥ 2) a1.n+1 + b0.n+1 = 0 (a0.n = 0) , b1.n+1 = (n + 1) b0.n , an.n+1 = ζbn−1.n + an−1.n , bn.n+1 = −ζan−1.n + bn−1.n , (k + 1) ak+1.n+1 + bk.n+1 = (n + k + 1) ak.n − ζak−1.n + bk−1.n for 1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1, (k + 1) bk+1.n+1 − ak.n+1 = (n + k + 1) bk.n − ζbk−1.n − ak−1.n for 1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1.

(7.1.69)

The relations (7.1.69) allow finding the pair (akn , bkn ) for 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1 with the help of the pair (ak.n−1 , bk.n−1 ) for 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 2. Note here that the relations (7.1.68) imply that the functions An (t; λ, µ) and Bn (t; λ, µ) determining the function hn (t; λ, µ) (recall eqn (7.1.57)) are polynomials in t of degree n − 1 of the form An = Bn =

1 n−1

(2λ)

n−1 .

akn

(n − 1)! k=0 n−1 .

1 n−1

(2λ)

(n − 1)! k=0

bkn

µ λ µ λ

λ k tk , (7.1.70) k k

λ t .

These polynomials appear naturally in a construction of the fundamental solutions of the G–L theory. In the following, (An , Bn ) will be called a pair of


161

polynomials of thermoelasticity, whereas (akn , bkn ) for 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1 will be called the associated pair of polynomials of thermoelasticity. Due to a fundamental importance of these polynomials in the G–L theory, in Chapter 9 we derive a number of recurrence relations for An and Bn involving time derivatives of these polynomials, and present a number of general properties of these polynomials. We shall now show how one may use the polynomials An (t; λ, µ) and Bn (t; λ, µ) to obtain a series representation of T1j (t); see eqn (7.1.13). To this end, the expression in square brackets in the sum in eqn (7.1.43) is represented in the form ) ( ) ( p p = υ12 , (7.1.71) 2 2 (p/υ1 ) + k1 p + λj (p + µ1 ) + λ21j where µ1 = υ1 h1 , h1 = (υ1 k1 )/2, λ1j = υ1

λj − h21 .

(7.1.72)

From this, on account of the definitions of An (t; λ, µ) and Bn (t; λ, µ) (recall eqns (7.1.50)–(7.1.57) and (7.1.70)), we find )k+1 ( p 2(k+1) (1) H = υ (t) , (7.1.73) 1 jk 2 (p/υ1 ) + k1 p + λj (1)

in which the function Hjk (t) is given by three different formulas, depending on the range of λj : (1) Hjk (t) = e−µ1 t [Ak+1 t; iλ∗1j , µ1 chλ∗1j t + iBk+1 t; iλ∗1j , µ1 shλ∗1j t] (7.1.74) for 0 < λj < h21 , λ∗1j = −iλ1j , (1) Hjk

(t) = e

−µ1 t

k+1 tk+r r (−) µr1 r (k + r)! r=0 2 for λj = h1 , k+1 .

Hjk (t) = e−µ1 t [Ak+1 (t; λ1j , µ1 ) cos λ1j t + Bk+1 (t; λ1j , µ1 ) sin λ1j t] for λj > h21 .

(7.1.75)

(1)

Thus, using eqns (7.1.43) and (7.1.73), we find ∞ ∂ϕ . j (1) k ˆk da, fˆ1 {T1j (t)} = − (−) λ {G } H k 1 jk ∂n k=0

(7.1.76)

(7.1.77)

∂B

where ˆ 1 = λυ 2 , fˆ1 = f1 υ 2 . λ 1 1

(7.1.78)

162


Dropping the curly brackets in eqn (7.1.77) leads to ∞ . ∂ϕj (1) k ˆk da, T1j (t) = − (−) λ1 Gk ∗ Hjk ∗ fˆ1 ∗ ∂n k=0

(7.1.79)

∂B

which, given eqn (7.1.13), leads to the following form of the first fundamental solution of the G–L theory   ∞ ∞ . . ∂ϕ j (1) k ˆk  da ϕj (x) (−) λ φ1 (x, t) = − fˆ1 ∗ 1 Gk ∗ Hjk ∗ (7.1.80) ∂n j=0 k=0

∂B

¯ × [0, ∞). ∀ (x, t) ∈ B

A consideration of the explicit dependence of φ1 on υ1 , k1 and λ as well as on the function f1 , and a comparison of the definitions of φ1 and φ2 lead to the following formulas for the second fundamental solution of the G–L theory ∞ . ˆ k Gk ∗ H (2) ∗ fˆ2 ∗ ∂ϕj da, (7.1.81) T2j (t) = − λ 2 jk ∂n k=0

and

∂B

  ∞ ∞ . . ˆ k Gk ∗ H (2) ∗ fˆ2 ∗ ∂ϕj da ϕj (x)  λ φ2 (x, t) = − 2 jk ∂n j=0 k=0

(7.1.82)

∂B

¯ × [0, ∞). ∀ (x, t) ∈ B (2)

The function Hjk (t) is given by three different formulas, depending on the range of λj : ! (2) Hjk (t) = e−µ2 t Ak+1 t; iλ∗2j , µ2 chλ∗2j t + iBk+1 t; iλ∗2j , µ2 shλ∗2j t for 0 < λj < h22 , λ∗2j = −iλ2j , (7.1.83) k+1 . k+1 tk+r (2) r (−) µr2 Hjk (t) = e−µ2 t (7.1.84) r (k + r)! r=0

for λj = h22 , Hjk (t) = e−µ2 t [Ak+1 (t; λ2j , µ2 ) cos λ2j t + Bk+1 (t; λ2j , µ2 ) sin λ2j t] for λj > h22 , (2)

(7.1.85)

where µ2 = υ2 h2 , h2 = υ2 k2 /2, λ2j = υ2 λj − h22 .

(7.1.86) (7.1.87)


163

ˆ 2 and function fˆ2 appearing in eqn (7.1.82) are Moreover, the parameter λ given by ˆ 2 = λυ 2 , λ 2

fˆ2 = f2 υ22 .

(7.1.88)

In general, since λj → +∞ for j → ∞3and h2i < ∞ (i = 1, 2), there exists only ∞ a finite number of terms in the series j=1 Tij (t) ϕj (x) for which λj ≤ h2i (i = 1, 2). This means that only a finite number of terms in the series (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) is determined by hyperbolic functions damped on the time axis. An infinite number of terms of eqn (7.1.80) for λj > h21 and eqn (7.1.82) for λj > h22 is dominated by trigonometric functions damped on the time axis. (i) Using the definition of Hjk (t) [see eqns (7.1.74)–(7.1.76) and (7.1.83)– (7.1.85)], it can be shown that (i)

Hjk (t) → 0 for t → ∞ ∀i = 1, 2 j = 1, 2, 3, . . . k = 0, 1, 2, . . .

(7.1.89)

Moreover, from eqn (7.1.48) we find Gk (t) → 0 for t → ∞ ∀k = 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . t1 ≥ t0 > 1,

> 0.

(7.1.90)

Finally, assuming fî (i = 1, 2) to be a sufficiently smooth function on ∂B × [0, ∞), tending to zero for t → ∞, from eqns (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) we find ¯ φi (x, t) → 0 for t → ∞ ∀x ∈ B.

(7.1.91)

One can also show that, if fî is a sufficiently smooth function on ∂B × [0, ∞) and the boundary ∂B itself is a smooth surface, then the series (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) are of the class C 2 on B(0) × [0, t] for any closed domain B(0) contained in B (B(0) ⊂ B) and for any triple of the constitutive parameters (t1 , t0 , ) satisfying the inequalities t1 ≥ t0 > 1, > 0.

(7.1.92)

Furthermore, the series (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) represent classical solutions of the initial-boundary value problems described, respectively, by eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) for i = 1 and by eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) for i = 2. Proofs of these results are based on the fact that the functions (7.1.79) and (7.1.81) are the Neumann-type power series satisfying Volterra-type equations ˆ 2 on the time axis. Thus, these series, as well as the ˆ 1 and λ with parameters λ series obtained by differentiation with respect to time a finite number of times, ˆ 2 , and for any point in [0, t]. ˆ 1 and λ are convergent for any finite λ Remark 7.1 A classical solution φi of eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9) is of the class ¯ , where Q = B × [0, ∞) and Q ¯=B ¯ × [0, ∞). This implies that C 2 (Q) ∩ C 1 Q

164


the necessary condition for the existence of such a solution is ˙ fî (·, 0) = fî (·, 0) = 0 on ∂B ∀i = 1, 2.

(7.1.93)

Remark 7.2 One can show that if fî (i = 1, 2) is a sufficiently smooth function on ∂B × [0, ∞) and the boundary ∂B is a sufficiently smooth surface, then the ¯ . In this case, the series (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) are of the class C 4 (Q) ∩ C 3 Q wave-like equation (7.1.7) and the equation obtained by a differentiation with ¯ respect to time (or to a space co-ordinate) can be extended to Q. 7.2 Solution of a potential–temperature problem for a 3D bounded domain Let us consider the following PTP of the G–L theory: find a pair (φ, ϑ) on ¯ × [0, ∞) satisfying the field equations B ˙ =0 ∇2 φ − φ¨ − (ϑ + t1 ϑ) 2 ¨ − ∇2 φ˙ = 0 ∇ ϑ − (ϑ˙ + t0 ϑ)

on B × [0, ∞),

(7.2.1)

the initial conditions φ (·, 0) = 0, φ˙ (·, 0) = 0 ϑ (·, 0) = 0, ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0

¯ on B,

(7.2.2)

and the boundary conditions φ = f, ϑ = g on ∂B × [0, ∞),

(7.2.3)

where B is a 3D bounded domain, [0, ∞) is the time interval, while f and g are prescribed functions on ∂B × [0, ∞). The problem described by eqns (7.2.1)–(7.2.3) differs from that described by eqns (4.2.7)–(4.2.9) in that it involves the homogeneous initial conditions while the boundary condition (4.2.9)1 has been replaced by eqn (7.2.3)1 . Note that the condition (7.2.3)1 has no direct physical interpretation whenever B is an arbitrary domain in E 3 . In the case B is a layer in E 3 , the condition (7.2.3)1 implies that there is a mechanical loading prescribed on ∂B × [0, ∞); see also Section 7.3. We shall next assume that f and g are sufficiently smooth functions on ∂B × [0, ∞) and the boundary ∂B is a sufficiently smooth surface,sothat a solution to ¯ , where Q = B × the problem (7.2.1)–(7.2.3) exists in the class C 4 (Q) ∩ C 3 Q ¯=B ¯ × [0, ∞). In that case, eqns (7.2.1) and their time derivatives [0, ∞) and Q ¯ and the consistency of the conditions (7.2.2) with thus may be extended onto Q, extended equations at t = 0, leads to the homogeneous initial conditions for the pair (φ, ϑ): ∂k ¯ k = 0, 1, 2, 3. (φ, ϑ) (·, 0) = 0 on B, ∂tk

(7.2.4)

Solution of a potential–temperature problem

165

This implies that a necessary condition for the existence of a solution to the problem (7.2.1)–(7.2.3) takes the form ∂k ¯ k = 0, 1, 2, 3. (7.2.5) (f, g) (·, 0) = 0 on ∂ B, ∂tk In the following, we shall assume that the functions f and g satisfy the conditions (7.2.5). Eliminating ϑ from eqns (7.2.1)–(7.2.3), we find that φ is a solution to the ¯ × [0, ∞) satisfying the equation following problem: find a function φ on B Γφ = 0 on B × (0, ∞),

(7.2.6)

subject to the initial conditions ∂kφ (·, 0) = 0 ∂tk and the boundary conditions

¯ for k = 0, 1, 2, 3, on B

φ = f, ∇2 φ = h˙

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(7.2.7)

(7.2.8)

Here, Γ is the central operator of the G–L theory, determined by the formula (recall eqn (6.1.8)) ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ 2 2 2 ∂ − ∇ 1 + t1 , (7.2.9) ∇ − t0 2 − Γ= ∇ − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t while the function h is given by the formula h = f˙ + 1 ∗ g + t1 g

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(7.2.10)

A knowledge of φ satisfying eqns (7.2.6)–(7.2.8) allows finding ϑ from eqn (7.2.1)1 subject to the condition ϑ (·, 0) = 0. Also, the conditions (7.2.5) imply h (·, 0) = 0 on ∂B.

(7.2.11)

Thus, finding (φ, ϑ) satisfying eqns (7.2.1)–(7.2.3) has been reduced to the solution of problem (7.2.6)–(7.2.8). We shall now show that this solution takes the form φ = φ1 + φ2

¯ × [0, ∞), on B

(7.2.12)

where φi (i = 1, 2) is the ith fundamental solution of the G–L theory corresponding to a particular function fî , which is determined by f and h appearing in the boundary conditions (7.2.8); see the relations (7.1.80)–(7.1.82). We shall first demonstrate that the function given by eqn (7.2.12) satisfies the homogeneous initial conditions (7.2.7). To prove this it will suffice to show that ∂k ¯ φi (·, 0) = 0 on B ∂tk ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3 and i = 1, 2.

(7.2.13)

166


Let us first note that, on account of the definition of the ith fundamental solution of the G–L theory, the conditions (7.1.13) are satisfied for k = 0, 1 and i = 1, 2; recall eqns (7.1.7)–(7.1.9). Thus, taking eqn (7.1.7) at t = 0, we find that the conditions (7.2.13) are satisfied for k = 0, 1, 2 and i = 1, 2. Finally, differentiating eqn (7.1.7) with respect to time, setting t = 0, and noting that the conditions (7.2.13) are satisfied for k = 0, 1, 2 and i = 1, 2, we obtain the condition (7.2.13) for k = 3 and i = 1, 2. Furthermore, note that, on account of Theorem 6.1 on decomposition, the function (7.2.12) satisfies eqn (7.2.6) on B × (0, ∞). We now show how to choose the functions fˆ1 and fˆ2 appearing in the formulas (7.1.80)–(7.1.82) to make the function (7.2.12) satisfy the boundary conditions (7.2.8). To this end, we apply the Laplace transform to eqns (7.1.7)1 and (7.1.7)2 and get, respectively, p ¯ G φ¯1 = 0 on B, ∇2 φ¯1 − p + k + λ (7.2.14) 1 υ12 p ¯ ∇2 φ¯2 − p + k − λ G φ¯2 = 0 on B. (7.2.15) 2 υ22 ¯ and adding on ∂B, we obtain Extending these equations onto B ¯2 φ¯2 = ∇2 φ¯1 + φ¯2 on ∂B, ¯1 φ¯1 + N p N

(7.2.16)

where ¯1 = p + k1 + λG, ¯ N υ12 ¯ ¯2 = p + k2 − λG. N υ22

(7.2.17)

Thus, the function φ determined by eqn (7.2.12) satisfies the boundary conditions (7.2.8) if the functions f¯1 and f¯2 satisfy the system of equations f¯1 + f¯2 = f¯ ¯ ¯2 f¯2 = h ¯1 f¯1 + N N

on ∂B,

(7.2.18)

from which we find ¯2 N 1 ¯ ¯ f¯1 = − ¯ ¯2 f + N ¯2 h, ¯1 − N N1 − N ¯1 N 1 ¯ ¯ f¯2 = ¯ ¯1 − N ¯2 f − N ¯2 h. N1 − N

(7.2.19)

In view of eqn (7.2.17), ( −1 −1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 ¯2 = ¯ . ¯1 − N p + (k1 − k2 ) − 2 − 2 + 2λ − 2 G N υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2 (7.2.20)


From this and from the formulas (6.2.65)–(6.2.67) we obtain β2 ¯ ¯1 − N ¯2 = 1 − 1 N G , p − α + υ12 υ22 2 so that, on account of eqn (6.2.28), 2 ¯1 − N ¯2 = 1 − 1 N (p − α) + β 2 . υ12 υ22

167

(7.2.21)

(7.2.22)

Furthermore, adding eqns (7.2.17) leads to 1 1 ¯ ¯ N1 + N2 = + 2 p + k1 + k2 , (7.2.23) υ12 υ2 ¯2 , yields ¯1 , N and solving eqns (7.2.22) and (7.2.23) for the pair N 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 ¯ N1,2 = + 2 p + (k1 + k2 ) ± − 2 (p − α) + β . (7.2.24) 2 υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2 Substituting that pair into eqn (7.2.19), results in   −1 1 + 1 p + (k + k ) 1 2 1 1 1 1 υ12 υ22  f¯ − 2 f¯1 =  − 2 2 υ12 υ2 2 2 (p − α) + β −1 ¯ 1 h 1 − 2 , + 2 υ1 υ2 2 (p − α) + β 2   −1 1 + 1 p + (k + k ) 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 υ1 υ2  f¯ − 2 f¯2 =  + 2 2 υ12 υ2 2 2 (p − α) + β −1 ¯ 1 h 1 − 2 . − 2 υ1 υ2 2 (p − α) + β 2

(7.2.25)

Finally, using the formula -

1 2

(p − α) + β 2

$ % = eαt J0 (βt) ≡ {H0 (t)} ,

(7.2.26)

where J0 = J0 (x) is the Bessel function of the first kind and order zero, and the condition (note eqn (7.2.5)) f (·, 0) = 0 on ∂B,

(7.2.27)

168


and inverting the relations (7.2.25) we obtain −1 1ˆ 1 1 1 ˆ (k1 + k2 ) H0 ∗ fˆ11 − 2 f1 = f11 − 2 2 υ12 υ2 −1 1 1 1 1 ˙ ˆ ˆ 11 , + + 2 H0 ∗ f11 + − 2 H0 ∗ h υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2 −1 1 1 1 1 (k1 + k2 ) H0 ∗ fˆ22 − fˆ2 = fˆ22 + 2 2 υ12 υ22 −1 1 1 1 1 ˙ ˆ ˆ 22 , H − + + ∗ f − H0 ∗ h 0 22 υ12 υ22 υ12 υ22

(7.2.28)

where ˆ 11 = hυ 2 , fˆ11 = f υ12 , h 1 2 ˆ 22 = hυ 2 , fˆ22 = f υ2 , h 2

(7.2.29)

and (see eqns (7.1.78)2 and (7.1.88)2 ) fˆ1 = f1 υ12 , fˆ2 = f2 υ12 .

(7.2.30)

As a result, the function φ given by eqn (7.2.12), where φ1 and φ2 are determined, respectively, by eqns (7.1.80) and (7.1.82), in which fˆ1 and fˆ2 are given by eqns (7.3.28), is a solution of the initial-boundary value problem (7.2.6)–(7.2.8). The solution may be represented in a somewhat simpler form, if we note that (see the table of operators in Mikusi´ nski, 1967) ¯ k = {H0 } {Gk } ≡ {Qk } , ¯ 0G H

(7.2.31)

k 2 eαt Jk (βt) , k = 0, 1, 2, . . . Qk (t) = β

(7.2.32)

where

Indeed, multiplying eqn (7.2.28)1 through by Gk and eqn (7.2.28)2 by Gk in the convolution sense, and employing eqn (7.2.31), we find for the convolutions Gk ∗ fˆ1 and Gk ∗ fˆ2 appearing in eqns (7.1.80) and (7.1.82) (1) Mk ≡ Gk ∗ fˆ1 = −1 1 1 1 1 ˆ Gk ∗ f11 − (k1 + k2 ) Qk ∗ fˆ11 − 2 2 2 υ12 υ2 −1 1 1 1 1 ˙ ˆ 11 , ˆ Q + + + ∗ − Qk ∗ h f k 11 υ12 υ22 υ12 υ22

(7.2.33)


169

and (2) Mk ≡ Gk ∗ fˆ2 = −1 1 1 1 1 ˆ Gk ∗ f22 + (k1 + k2 ) Qk ∗ fˆ22 − 2 2 2 υ12 υ2 −1 1 1 1 1 ˙ ˆ 22 . ˆ + + 2 Qk ∗ f22 − − 2 Qk ∗ h υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2

(7.2.34)

Therefore, a solution φ of the problem (7.2.6)–(7.2.8) has the form (7.2.12), where φ1 and φ2 are given by   ∞ ∞ . . ∂ϕj  (1) k ˆ k (1)  da ϕj (x) , φ1 (x, t) = − (−) λ Mk ∗ (7.2.35) 1 Hjk ∗ ∂n j=1 k=0

and

∂B

  ∞ ∞ . . ˆ k H (2) ∗ M (2) ∗ ∂ϕj da ϕj (x) .  λ φ2 (x, t) = − 2 jk k ∂n j=1 k=0

(1)

(7.2.36)

∂B

(2)

Here, Hjk and Hjk are given by the formulas (7.1.74)–(7.1.76) as well as by (1)

(2)

(7.1.83)–(7.1.85), while Mk and Mk are specified by eqns (7.2.33) and (7.2.34), respectively. In the case when f = 0 on ∂B × (0, ∞), the series (7.2.35) and (7.2.36) reduce to the forms −

φ1 (x, t) =   −1 . ∞ ∞ . 1 1 ∂ϕ (7.2.37) j k ˆ k (1) ˆ 11 ∗  da ϕj (x) , − 2 (−) λ h 1 Hjk ∗ Qk ∗ 2 υ1 υ2 ∂n j=1 k=0

∂B

and

φ2 (x, t) =   −1 . ∞ ∞ . 1 1 ∂ϕ j (2) ˆ k H ∗ Qk ∗ h ˆ 22 ∗  λ da ϕj (x) , − 2 2 jk υ12 υ2 ∂n j=1 k=0

(7.2.38)

∂B

where ˆ 22 = hυ 2 , ˆ 11 = hυ 2 , h h 1 2

(7.2.39)

h = 1 ∗ g + t1 g.

(7.2.40)

The knowledge of the function φ given by eqn (7.2.12) allows finding ϑ from eqn (7.2.1)1 under the condition ϑ (·, 0) = 0, as well as finding the associated displacements, stresses and heat flux according to the formulas (6.1.18)–(6.1.20).

170


7.3 Solution for a thermoelastic layer In this section we show how an exact solution to a 1D initial-boundary value problem of the G–L theory can be obtained by employing a 3D solution to a PTP of Section 7.2; see (Ignaczak, 1981). First, let us take B a layer described by the inequalities: 0 ≤ x1 ≤ l, |x2 | < ∞, |x3 | < ∞,

(7.3.1)

where l is a dimensionless thickness of the layer. 8 Furthermore, we assume the layer to have a “quiescent past” in the sense that the displacement u, the particle velocity u, ˙ the temperature ϑ and its rate ϑ˙ vanish for t = 0 at every point x ∈ B. Also, we assume the layer to be loaded on its top and bottom surfaces x1 = 0 and l, respectively, by a smooth-in-time normal traction and temperature that are independent of x2 and x3 and have a quiescent past as well, that is they vanish along with their first time derivatives at t = 0. Subject to such loading, the thermoelastic process within the layer is described by a potential φ (x1 , t), which depends on x1 and t only, i.e. it is a 1D process. The potential φ generates a displacement vector ui , a stress tensor Sij and a temperature ϑ according to the formulas (recall eqns (6.1.10) and (6.1.18) and (6.1.19), specialized to a 1D process 9 ) ∂φ , u2 = u3 = 0, ∂x 2 2 ∂2φ ∂2φ C2 ∂ φ = 2 , S22 = S33 = 2 − 2 , ∂t ∂t C1 ∂x2 S12 = S23 = S31 = 0, 2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ϑ= 1 + t1 − 2 φ. ∂t ∂x2 ∂t u1 =

S11

Furthermore, (recall eqn (6.1.10)1 at r = 0) 2 2 ∂ ∂3 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ − 1 + t φ=0 − − t − 0 1 ∂x2 ∂t2 ∂x2 ∂t2 ∂t ∂x2 ∂t ∂t

(7.3.2)

(7.3.3)

(7.3.4)

(7.3.5)

for (x, t) ∈ [0, l] × [0, ∞). The boundary conditions are S11 (0, t) = −σ0 (t) , S11 (l, t) = −σ1 (t) ,

(7.3.6)

ϑ (0, t) = ϑ0 (t) , ϑ (l, t) = ϑ1 (t) ,

(7.3.7)

where σ0 (t) , σ1 (t) , ϑ0 (t) and ϑ1 (t) are functions prescribed on [0, ∞). 8 Since x ˆ0 [see eqn (4.1.6)] is the length unit, for a layer of thickness L, l = L/ˆ x0 . In general, l = 1. For a layer made of aluminum we have l > 1 [see the data on aluminum in Section 6.5]. 9 In the following, we identify x with x, i.e. x = x . 1 1

Solution for a thermoelastic layer

171

The quiescent past of thermomechanical loading of the layer means that σ0 (0) = σ˙ 0 (0) = 0,

σ1 (0) = σ˙ 1 (0) = 0,

(7.3.8)

ϑ0 (0) = ϑ˙ 0 (0) = 0,

ϑ1 (0) = ϑ˙ 1 (0) = 0,

(7.3.9)

These conditions are consistent with the quiescent past conditions for the layer, which in terms of the function φ take the form 10 ∂kφ (x, 0) = 0 k = 0, 1, 2, 3, x ∈ [0, l]. ∂tk

(7.3.10)

The boundary conditions (7.3.6) and (7.3.7), written in terms of φ, take the form 11 φ (0, t) = f0 (t) ,

φ (l, t) = f1 (t) ,

∂2φ (0, t) = h˙ 0 (t) , ∂x2

∂2φ (l, t) = h˙ 1 (t) , ∂x2

(7.3.11)

in which f0 (t) = −t ∗ σ0 , f1 (t) = −t ∗ σ1 , h0 (t) = 1 ∗ (ϑ0 − σ0 ) + t1 ϑ0 , h1 (t) = 1 ∗ (ϑ1 − σ1 ) + t1 ϑ1 .

(7.3.12)

Thus, the problem under consideration reduces to the determination of a function φ = φ (x, t) satisfying eqn (7.3.5), the initial conditions (7.3.10) and the boundary conditions (7.3.11). Clearly, it is a 1D equivalent of a PTP of Section 7.2. The knowledge of the function φ allows one to determine ϑ from eqn (7.3.4) subject to the condition ϑ (·, 0) = 0. The function ϑ is also a solution of eqn (7.3.5) that satisfies the initial conditions 12 ∂k ϑ (x, 0) = 0 for k = 0, 1, 2, 3, x ∈ [0, l] . ∂tk

(7.3.13)

One can show that the necessary conditions for a pair (φ, ϑ) to belong to ¯ , where Q = (0, l) × (0, ∞) and Q ¯ = [0, l] × [0, ∞), are, class C 4 (Q) ∩ C 3 Q besides eqns (7.3.8) and (7.3.9), the following conditions imposed on the surface temperature 13 ... ... (7.3.14) ϑ¨0 (0) = ϑ 0 (0) = 0, ϑ¨1 (0) = ϑ 1 (0) = 0. Thus, for a suitably restricted thermomechanical loading of the layer, the thermoelastic process within it possesses the same smoothness properties as the potential–temperature process of Section 7.2. That is, assuming that the conditions (7.3.8), (7.3.9) and (7.3.14) hold, and proceeding in the same way as 10 11 12 13

The conditions (7.3.10) make a one-dimensional counterpart of eqn (7.2.7). The conditions (7.3.11) make a one-dimensional counterpart of eqn (7.2.8). See eqn (7.2.4). The conditions (7.3.8), (7.3.9) and (7.3.14) correspond to eqn (7.2.5).

172


in Sections 7.1 and 7.2, as a solution of the 1D problem governed by eqns (7.3.5), (7.3.10) and (7.3.11), we obtain ¯ φ (x, t) = φ1 (x, t) + φ2 (x, t) , (x, t) ∈ Q,

(7.3.15)

where [see eqns (7.2.35) and (7.2.36)] ∞ ∞ ξ=l . . (1) k ˆ k (1) φ1 (x, t) = − ϕj (x) , (−) λ1 Hjk ∗ Mk ∗ ϕj (ξ) j=1

∞ ∞ ξ=l . . (2) (2) k ˆ H ∗ M ∗ ϕ (ξ) ϕj (x) . λ φ2 (x, t) = − 2 jk j k j=1

(7.3.16)

ξ=0

k=0

(7.3.17)

ξ=0

k=0

Here, the prime stands for a derivative with respect to ξ ϕj (ξ) =

dϕj (ξ) , dξ

(7.3.18)

ξ=l

while the symbol [q (ξ)]ξ=0 0 denotes ξ=l

[q (ξ)]ξ=0 = q (l) − q (0) .

(7.3.19)

This expression is equivalent to the surface integral appearing in the formulas (7.2.35) and (7.2.36). The eigenfunctions ϕj (x) and their corresponding eigenvalues λj , appearing in the formulas (7.3.16) and (7.3.17), have the form [see p. 216 in (Stakgold, 1968)] 12 2 2 πjx πj , λj = sin . ϕj (x) = l l l ξ=l ξ=l (1) (2) and Mk ∗ ϕj (ξ) The expressions Mk ∗ ϕj (ξ) ξ=0

(7.3.20)

appearing in

ξ=0

eqns (7.3.16) and (7.3.17), are defined by the formulas [see eqns (7.2.33) and (7.2.34)] ξ=l ! 1 (1) = Gk ∗ f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) υ1−2 Mk ∗ ϕj (ξ) 2 ξ=0 −1 ! 1 1 1 − 2 Qk ∗ {(k1 + k2 ) f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) − 2 υ12 υ2 (7.3.21) ! 1 1 + 2 f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) } + υ12 υ2 −1 ! 1 1 − Qk ∗ h1 ∗ ϕj (l) − h0 ∗ ϕj (0) + 2 2 υ1 υ2

Solution for a thermoelastic layer

173

and ξ=l ! 1 (2) υ2−2 Mk ∗ ϕj (ξ) = Gk ∗ f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) 2 ξ=0 −1 ! 1 1 1 + − 2 Qk ∗ {(k1 + k2 ) f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) 2 2 υ1 υ2 ! 1 1 + 2 f1 ∗ ϕj (l) − f0 ∗ ϕj (0) } + 2 υ1 υ2 −1 ! 1 1 − 2 Qk ∗ h1 ∗ ϕj (l) − h0 ∗ ϕj (0) , − 2 υ1 υ2

(7.3.22)

in which the function Qk (t) is given by eqn (7.2.32), while f0 (t) , f1 (t) , h0 (t) and h1 (t) are specified by the formulas (7.3.12). The remaining symbols in the formulas (7.3.16) and (7.3.17) have the same meaning as in eqns (7.2.35) and (7.2.36). The formulas (7.3.15)–(7.3.22) determine the exact solution of the problem described by eqns (7.3.5), (7.3.10) and (7.3.11). Knowing this solution allows the determination of the displacement vector, stress tensor and temperature via the formulas (7.3.2), (7.3.3) and (7.3.4). The solution (7.3.15)–(7.3.22) simplifies considerably if one assumes the thermomechanical loading of the layer to be symmetric or asymmetric with respect to the middle surface x = l/2. In the case of a symmetric loading, that is, for ˆ (t) , ϑ0 (t) = ϑ1 (t) ≡ ϑˆ (t) , σ0 (t) = σ1 (t) ≡ σ

(7.3.23)

on account of eqn (7.3.12), we obtain f0 (t) = f1 (t) ≡ f (t) , h0 (t) = h1 (t) ≡ h (t) .

(7.3.24)

Since ϕj (l) = (−) ϕj (0) , ϕj (0) = j

2λj l

12

(7.3.25)

,

in this case, for the functions φ1 and φ2 , we obtain ∞ ∞ ξ=l . . (1) k ˆ k (1) ϕ2m+1 (x) (−) λ1 H2m+1,k ∗ Mk ∗ ϕ2m+1 (ξ) φ1 (x, t) = − m=0

ξ=0

k=0

(7.3.26) and φ2 (x, t) = −

∞ .

m=0

∞ .

ˆ k H (2) λ 2 2m+1,k k=0

∗

(2) Mk

∗

ϕ2m+1

ξ=l (ξ) ξ=0

ϕ2m+1 (x) , (7.3.27)

174


where ξ=l ∗ (ξ) = −ϕ2m+1 (0) Gk ∗ 1 ∗ f ξ=0 −1 1 1 1 1 ∓ − 2 Qk ∗ (k1 + k2 ) ∗ f + + 2 f υ12 υ2 υ12 υ2 −1 1 1 ±2 − 2 Qk ∗ 1 ∗ h . υ12 υ2

−2 υ1.2

ϕ2m+1

(1.2) Mk

(7.3.28)

If, moreover, σ ˆ (t) = 0, that is when the layer is being heated only at x = 0 and x = l in a symmetric manner, then eqns (7.3.26) and (7.3.27) reduce to the forms

4 2 υ l 1

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1

×

4 − υ22 l

m=0

k=0

(7.3.29)

(2m + 1) πx (2m + 1) π sin , l l

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2 ×

φ1 (x, t) = ∞ ∞ . . (1) k ˆk (−) λ1 H2m+1,k ∗ Qk ∗ 1 ∗ h

φ2 (x, t) = ∞ ∞ . . (2) k ˆ H λ 2 2m+1,k ∗ Qk ∗ 1 ∗ h

−1

m=0

k=0

(7.3.30)

(2m + 1) πx (2m + 1) π sin . l l

On account of eqn (7.3.3)1 , the stress component S11 (x, t) becomes

4 l

S11 (x, t) = ∞ −1 . ∞ . 1 1 k ˆ k 2 (1) k 2 (2) ˆ ˙ (−) λ1 υ1 H2m+1,k − λ2 υ2 H2m+1,k ∗ Qk ∗ h − 2 υ12 υ2 m=0

×

k=0

(2m + 1) πx (2m + 1) π sin , l l

(7.3.31) where ˆ˙ h˙ = ϑˆ + t1 ϑ.

(7.3.32)

Solution of Nowacki type; spherical wave of a negative order

175

Furthermore, for the displacement u1 (x, t), in view of eqn (7.3.2), we obtain 4 l

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

u1 (x, t) =

∞ −1 . ∞ .

k 2 (1) k 2 (2) ˆ ˙ ˆ (−) λ1 υ1 H2m+1,k − λ2 υ2 H2m+1,k ∗ Qk ∗ 1 ∗ h

m=0

k

k=0

(2m + 1) π × l

2

(2m + 1) πx . cos l

(7.3.33) It is seen that

u1

l ,t 2

= 0, u1 (l, t) = −u1 (0, t) ,

(7.3.34)

where 4 l

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

u1 (0, t) =

∞ −1 . ∞ .

k 2 (1) k 2 (2) ˆ ˙ ˆ (−) λ1 υ1 H2m+1,k − λ2 υ2 H2m+1,k ∗ Qk ∗ 1 ∗ h

m=0

k

k=0

×

(2m + 1) π l

2 .

(7.3.35) (i) It follows from the structure of H2m+1,k and Qk [recall the formulas (7.1.74)– (7.1.76), (7.1.83)–(7.1.85) and (7.2.32)] that the boundary displacement of the layer is a superposition of damped oscillating functions whose amplitudes tend to zero as time goes to infinity. 7.4 Solution of Nowacki type; spherical wave of a negative order In Sections 7.2 and 7.3 we presented two exact aperiodic solutions of the G–L theory corresponding to a smooth thermomechanical loading. Now, we turn to the case of a singular thermomechanical loading of a body that produces a closed-form disturbance in the form of a superposition of strong discontinuity thermoelastic waves. This case pertains to a PTP of the G–L theory that in the following will also be called a problem of Nowacki type in the G–L theory. That problem consists in finding a pair (φ, ϑ) that satisfies the field equations 14 0 ∂ δ (x − y) δ (t) Γφ = − 1 + t ∂t on E 3 × (0, ∞) , (7.4.1) 2 ∂ ∂ 2 0 ∇ − 2 φ= 1+t ϑ ∂t ∂t 14 Equations (7.4.1) are obtained from eqn (6.1.10) in which we let t = t0 , r = δ(x − y)δ(t) 1 and B = E3 . The replacement of t1 by t0 is due to a set of notations characteristic for Section 7.4.

176


the initial conditions φ (·, 0) = φ˙ (·, 0) = 0 ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0

on E 3 , x = y,

(7.4.2)

and the appropriate decay conditions at infinity. In eqn (7.4.1) Γ is the central operator of the G–L theory (recall eqn (6.1.8)) ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂ − ∇2 1 + t0 , (7.4.3) ∇2 − t0 2 − Γ = ∇2 − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t where t0 , t0 and are the constitutive parameters satisfying the inequalities (recall Section 6.5) t0 ≥ t0 ≥ 1,

> 0.

(7.4.4)

Moreover, E 3 is a 3D space, y is a point in that space, and δ (x) is the Dirac delta. Thus, the pair (φ, ϑ) generates disturbances in an infinite thermoelastic body due to a concentrated instantaneous heat source at point y. 15 Of course, a solution of the problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) depends on ρ and t only, and, in the following, we let φ = φ (ρ, t) and ϑ = ϑ (ρ, t), where ρ = |x − y| .

(7.4.5)

The radial displacement uρ and the stresses σρ , σθ and σϕ associated with the pair (φ, ϑ) and referred to a spherical co-ordinate system (ρ, θ, ϕ) centered at y are determined by the formulas (recall eqns (6.1.18) and (6.1.19) specialized to spherical co-ordinates) uρ (ρ, t) =

∂φ on E 3 × (0, ∞) . ∂ρ

(7.4.6)

and 2 (1 − 2ν) 1 uρ + φ¨ 1−ν ρ ν ¨ on E 3 × (0, ∞) , (7.4.7) 1 − 2ν 1 ∂ uρ − 1 + t 0 ϑ + σθ (ρ, t) = φ 1−ν ρ ∂t 1−ν σρ (ρ, t) = −

σϕ (ρ, t) = σθ (ρ, t) where ν is the Poisson ratio. Here, σρ = Sρρ , σθ = Sθθ , and σϕ = Sϕϕ . It follows from the formulation (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) that the potential φ is a solution of the following initial-boundary value problem. Find a function φ satisfying the equation 0 ∂ δ (x − y) δ (t) on E 3 × (0, ∞) , (7.4.8) Γφ = − 1 + t ∂t 15 A closed-form solution to the problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) in which t = t0 = = 0 was 1 obtained for the first time by Nowacki (1957); see also (Nowacki, 1962, Parkus, 1959).


177

the initial conditions ∂kφ (·, 0) = 0 on E 3 for x = y ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ∂tk

(7.4.9)

and appropriate decay conditions at infinity. Similarly, the temperature ϑ is a solution of the following initial-boundary value problem. Find a function ϑ satisfying the equation 16 ∂2 2 (7.4.10) Γϑ = − ∇ − 2 δ (x − y) δ (t) on E 3 × (0, ∞) , ∂t the initial conditions ∂kϑ (·, 0) = 0 on E 3 ∂tk

for x = y

∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3,

(7.4.11)

and appropriate decay conditions at infinity. Thus, the order of singularity of φ is lower by one than the order of singularity of the temperature ϑ. Moreover, ϑ may be found from eqn (7.4.1)2 , where φ is a known function satisfying the relations (7.4.8) and (7.4.9), or by directly solving the problem (7.4.10) and (7.4.11). In the following, both problems will be solved in parallel, employing a Laplace transform method presented in (Jakubowska, 1982). Similar to the previous sections, the overbar will denote the transformed function f¯ (p) =

∞ e−pt f (t) dt,

(7.4.12)

0

where f (t) is a function on [0, ∞), while p is the parameter of the transformation. Thus, applying the Laplace transform to eqn (7.4.8) and using the homogeneous initial conditions (7.4.9), we obtain 21 22 φ¯ = − 1 + t0 p δ (x − y) on E 3 , (7.4.13) where 2i = ∇2 − s2i (p) (i = 1, 2) ,

s1.2 (p) =

p 1/2 2

(7.4.14) 1/2 1/2 2 (1 + ) + (1 + t0 + t0 ) p ± ∆1/2 (p − α) + β 2 ,

(7.4.15)

16

See eqn (6.1.9) restricted to the case r = δ(x − y)δ(t).

178


and α, β and ∆ are the symbols appearing in the theorem on decomposition of the G–L theory (recall the formulas (6.2.4) and (6.2.5)) ! α = − (1 + ) t0 + t0 − (1 − ) ∆−1 , !1/2 −1 √ (7.4.16) ∆ , β = 2 1 + (1 + ) t0 − t0 2 ∆ = 1 − t0 + t0 + 4t0 t0 . The only solution of eqn (7.4.13) satisfying the decay conditions at infinity is the function exp [−ρs1 (p)] − exp [−ρs2 (p)] , (7.4.17) φ¯ (ρ, p) = D 4πρ [s21 (p) − s22 (p)] where D = 1 + t0 p,

(7.4.18)

and the complex functions si = si (p) are chosen so that 17 Re [si (p)] > 0 i = 1, 2.

(7.4.19)

Proceeding in the same way when solving the problem (7.4.10) and (7.4.11), we obtain 21 22 ϑ¯ = − ∇2 − p2 δ (x − y) on E 3 , (7.4.20) from which

! ! s21 (p) − p2 exp [−ρs1 (p)] − s22 (p) − p2 exp [−ρs2 (p)] ¯ . ϑ (ρ, p) = 4πρ [s21 (p) − s22 (p)]

(7.4.21)

On account of the definition of si (p), we reduce the formulas (7.4.17) and (7.4.21) to the form −1 ! 1 1 D ¯ 1 ¯ ¯ 2 (ρ, p) , M1 (ρ, p) − M − 2 (7.4.22) φ (ρ, p) = 4πρ υ12 υ2 p ! 1 ¯ ˆ M ¯2 (ρ, p) + (ˆ ¯ 1 (ρ, p) − M ¯ 2 (ρ, p) , N1 (ρ, p) + N ϑ¯ (ρ, p) = α + βp) 8πρ (7.4.23) ¯ i (ρ, p) and N ¯i (ρ, p) are given by where the functions M ¯ i (ρ, p) = exp [−ρsi (p)] M 1/2 (i = 1, 2) , 2 2 (p − α) + β

(7.4.24)

and ¯i (ρ, p) = exp [−ρsi (p)] N 17

(i = 1, 2) .

Re[f¯(p)] stands for the real part of the complex-valued function f¯(p).

(7.4.25)


179

Moreover, recalling eqn (6.2.9)1 , −2 υ1.2 =

1 1 1 + t0 + t0 ± ∆ 2 , 2

(7.4.26)

and 18 α ˆ = (1 + ) ∆1/2 , βˆ = t0 + t0 − 1 ∆1/2 .

(7.4.27)

It follows from the formulas (7.4.22) and (7.4.23) that φ¯ (ρ, p) and ϑ¯ (ρ, p) take the form φ¯ (ρ, p) = φ¯1 (ρ, p) + φ¯2 (ρ, p) ,

(7.4.28)

ϑ¯ (ρ, p) = ϑ¯1 (ρ, p) + ϑ¯2 (ρ, p) ,

(7.4.29)

where φ¯i and ϑ¯i satisfy the equations 2i φ¯i = 0, 2i ϑ¯i = 0 for x = y.

(7.4.30)

ˆ i (recall SecSince the operator 2i corresponds to the wave-type operator L tion 6.2), the inverse transforms of φ¯i and ϑ¯i are to be sought in terms of a ˆ i , that is in terms of a power series with Neumann-type series for the operator L ˆ i (recall eqn (6.5.47)2 ). To respect to the reduced coefficient of the convolution λ ˆ i (recall eqns (7.1.2) and this end let us recall the definition of the operator L (7.1.3)) 2 ˆ 1.2 = ∇2 − 1 ∂ − k1.2 ∂ ∓ λ ∓ K ∗ . L 2 ∂t2 υ1.2 ∂t

(7.4.31)

Here, the parameters υ1.2 are defined by the formulas (7.4.26), while k1.2 and λ are 1 1 1 + ∓ α∆ 2 , (7.4.32) k1.2 = 2 λ=

1 2 12 β ∆ , 4

(7.4.33)

where α, β and ∆ are specified by the formulas (7.4.16). The convolution kernel ˆ i is given by the formula (recall eqn (6.2.3)) of L d αt J1 (βt) K (t) = 2 e . (7.4.34) dt βt

18 The symbols α ˆ and βˆ in eqn (7.4.27) must not be confused with such symbols of Sections 6.4 and 6.5.

180


Applying the Laplace transform to this equation we obtain (see eqns (6.2.27), (6.2.28) and (6.2.31)) 1 ¯ (p) = 2p κ ¯ (p) − 1 = 2 κ ¯ (p) [2α − κ ¯ (p)] , K β2 β 1/2 2 κ ¯ (p) = (p − α) + β 2 − (p − α) .

(7.4.35) (7.4.36)

Upon the introduction of notations ˆ 1 = λυ 2 , h1 = 12 k1 υ12 , λ 1

(7.4.37)

ˆ 1 − h2 , b2 (p) = ω1 + λ ˆ1K ¯ (p) , ω1 = λ 1 1

(7.4.38)

on account of eqn (7.4.15)1 , we obtain 1/2 1 2 (p + h1 ) + b21 (p) . s1 (p) = υ1

(7.4.39)

Similarly, letting ˆ 2 = λυ 2 , h2 = 12 k2 υ22 , λ 2

(7.4.40)

ˆ 2 − h2 , b2 (p) = ω2 − λ ˆ2K ¯ (p) , ω2 = −λ 2 2

(7.4.41)

eqn (7.4.15)2 is reduced to s2 (p) =

1/2 1 2 (p + h2 ) + b22 (p) . υ2

(7.4.42)

Clearly, the function s2 (p) may be obtained from s1 (p) by replacing in the formula (7.4.39) υ1 with υ2 , k1 with k2 , and λ with −λ. Furthermore, the expressions (7.4.37) and (7.4.40) determine, respectively, the damping coefficient and the reduced convolution coefficient for the first and second fundamental thermoelastic disturbances of the G–L theory (recall eqn (6.5.47)). In order to carry out the inverse transforms of φ¯i and ϑ¯i (note eqns (7.4.28) ¯i (ρ, p) defined by eqn (7.4.25) for i = 1. On and (7.4.29)), we first consider N account of eqn (7.4.39), that function is represented in the form ¯1 (ρ, p) = n ¯ 1 (ρ, p + h1 ) , N in which

n ¯ 1 (ρ, p) = exp −ρ1

p + ˆb21 (p) 2

(7.4.43) 1/2 ,

(7.4.44)

and ρ1 = ρ/υ1 ,

(7.4.45)

ˆb2 (p) = ω1 + λ ˆ1K ¯ (p − h1 ) . 1

(7.4.46)


181

Next, we use the fact that, for arbitrary complex numbers b, z and h, and for x > 0, the following formulas are true 19   2 + b2 exp −x p ∂  , (7.4.47) exp −x p2 + b2 = − ∂x p 2 + b2 exp −x p2 + b2 = L J0 b t2 − x2 H (t − x) , p2 + b2

(7.4.48)

and J0

√

∞ n . (−) hn −n/2 √ z z+h = Jn z . 2n n! n=0

(7.4.49)

Here, Jn = Jn (x) (n ≥ 0) is the Bessel function of the first kind of order n, H = H (t) is the Heaviside function, while L is the Laplace transform operator ∞ Lf (t) = f¯ (p) =

e−pt f (t) dt.

(7.4.50)

0

Note here that the formula (7.4.48) holds for an arbitrary complex number b that is not a function of the transform parameter p. Using eqn (7.4.49), we shall now demonstrate that one can generalize that formula onto the case where b is a function of p. Letting ˆ1K ¯ (p − h1 ) (7.4.51) z = t2 − ρ21 ω1 , h = t2 − ρ21 λ in eqn (7.4.49), we obtain . ∞ n ˆn ! (−) λ 1 2 2 ˆ ¯ (p − h1 ) n Aˆn (ρ1 , t) , K J0 b1 (p) t − ρ1 = n 2 n! n=0 where

−n/2 2 2 n/2 2 2 ˆ t − ρ1 An (ρ1 , t) = ω1 Jn ω1 (t − ρ1 ) .

(7.4.52)

(7.4.53)

Multiplying eqn (7.4.52) through by e−pt H (t − ρ1 ) and integrating over time from zero to infinity, we find 2 2 ˆ L J0 b1 (p) t − ρ1 H (t − ρ1 )

=

∞ n ˆn . (−) λ 1

n=0

2n n!

¯ (p − h1 ) K

!n

(7.4.54) L {An (ρ1 , t)} ,

19 The formula (7.4.48) can be found on page 340 in (Mikusi´ nski, 1967), while eqn (7.4.49) is on page 496 in (Watson, 1958).

182


where An (ρ1 , t) = Aˆn (ρ1 , t) H (t − ρ1 ) .

(7.4.55)

Hence, an extension of eqn (7.4.48) to the case b = ˆb1 (p) , x = ρ1 , takes the form exp −ρ1 p2 + ˆb21 (p) ∞ n ˆn . ! (−) λ 1 ¯ (p − h1 ) n L {An (ρ1 , t)} . (7.4.56) K = n 2 n! n=0 p2 + ˆb21 (p) Thus, differentiating eqn (7.4.56) with respect to ρ1 and using eqn (7.4.44), we conclude that the function n ¯ 1 (ρ, p) possesses the series representation ∞ n ˆn ! ∂ . (−) λ 1 ¯ (p − h1 ) n L {An (ρ1 , t)} . K n ¯ 1 (ρ, p) = − ∂ρ1 n=0 2n n!

(7.4.57)

Since, on account of eqn (7.4.35)2 , ! ¯ (p − h1 ) n = K n+k n k . n (−) n−k 2 n −2n 2 α [p − (h1 + α)] + β − [p − (h1 + α)] , 2 β k 2k k=0 (7.4.58) and for any m > 0 and a complex number a (Mikusi´ nski, 1967) L−1

m

p2 + a2 − p

= mam

Jm (at) , t

(7.4.59)

therefore L−1

$

!n %

¯ (p − h1 ) K

(1)

= 2n hn (t) for n ≥ 1,

(7.4.60)

where h(1) n

n k n−k . n (−) α Jn+k (βt) . (t) = exp [(α + h1 ) t] (n + k) k 2k β t

(7.4.61)

k=0

From this, given eqn (7.4.43), we obtain the Neumann-type series representation of N1 (ρ, t): N1 (ρ, t) = δ (t − ρ1 ) exp (−h1 ρ1 ) + P (ρ1 , t) ,

(7.4.62)


where

  P (ρ1 , t) = ρ1 exp (−h1 t)

−ω1

J1



183

ω1 (t2 − ρ21 )

ω1 (t2 − ρ21 )

∞ n ˆn . (−) λ 1 + h(1) n (t − s) n−1 n! ω 1 n=1 t

(7.4.63)

ρ1  n−1  × ω1 (s2 − ρ21 ) Jn−1 ω1 (s2 − ρ21 ) ds H (t − ρ1 ) . 

ˆ 1 , the reduced convolution coefficient for the Evidently, this is a power series in λ ˆ wave-like operator L1 . This series is formally well defined for ω1 ≥ 0, that is for λ ≥ λ0 where λ0 = h21 υ1−2 .

(7.4.64)

One can show that for 0 < λ ≤ λ0 (ω1 ≤ 0) N1 (ρ, t) = δ (t − ρ1 ) exp (−h1 ρ1 ) + Pˆ (ρ1 , t) , where

(7.4.65)

  I1 ω ˆ 1 (t2 − ρ21 ) Pˆ (ρ1 , t) = ρ1 exp (−h1 t) ω ˆ1  ω ˆ 1 (t2 − ρ21 ) ∞ n ˆn . (−) λ 1 + h(1) n (t − s) n−1 n! ω ˆ 1 n=1 t

(7.4.66)

ρ1  n−1  × ω ˆ 1 (s2 − ρ21 ) In−1 ω ˆ 1 (s2 − ρ21 ) ds H (t − ρ1 ) . 

Here, In = In (x) (n ≥ 0) is the modified Bessel function of the first kind of order n, and ω ˆ 1 = −ω1 ≥ 0.

(7.4.67)

In the limiting case λ = λ0 , that is for ω1 = 0, from the formula (7.4.62) or (7.4.65) we obtain N1 (ρ, t) = δ (t − ρ1 ) exp (−h1 ρ1 ) + P0 (ρ1 , t) , where

 ∞ n . (−)

ˆn λ 0 n−1 (n − 1)!  n! 2 n=1  t  2 2 n−1 × h(1) ds H (t − ρ1 ) , n (t − s) s − ρ1 

P0 (ρ1 , t) = ρ1 exp (−h1 t)

ρ1

(7.4.68)

(7.4.69)

184


and ˆ 0 = λ0 υ 2 . λ (7.4.70) 1 ¯ In order to find the inverse transform of N2 (ρ1 , p) given by eqn (7.4.25) for i = 2, it suffices to replace υ1 by υ2 , k1 by k2 , and λ by −λ in eqn (7.4.65). Thus, we obtain N2 (ρ, t) = δ (t − ρ2 ) exp (−h2 ρ2 ) + R (ρ2 , t) , where

  I1 ω ˆ 2 (t2 − ρ22 ) R (ρ2 , t) = ρ2 exp (−h2 t) ω ˆ2  ω ˆ 2 (t2 − ρ22 ) ˆn λ 2 + h(2) n (t − s) n−1 n!ˆ ω 2 n=1 t

∞ .

×

(7.4.71)

n−1

ω ˆ 2 (s2 − ρ22 )

(7.4.72)

ρ2   In−1 ω ˆ 2 (s2 − ρ22 ) ds H (t − ρ2 ) . 

(2)

ˆ 2 and hn (t) appearing in eqn (7.4.72) are given by The symbols ρ2 , ω ρ2 = ρ/υ2 , ω ˆ 2 = −ω2 , n k n−k . n (−) α Jn+k (βt) . (t) = exp [(α + h ) t] (n + k) h(2) 2 n k 2k β t

(7.4.73) (7.4.74)

k=0

ˆ 2 , that Clearly, the function N2 (ρ, t) is a Neumann-type series for the operator L ˆ is a power series in λ2 . In contradistinction to the function N1 (ρ, t), which is determined by two different formulas, each valid separately depending on the ˆ 1 , the function N2 (ρ, t) is represented by a single series range of the parameter λ (7.4.71). ¯ i (ρ, p) using the method analogous to that We shall now invert the function M ¯ used for Ni (ρ, p). First, we note that ¯ 1 (ρ, p) = L {exp (−h1 t) m1 (ρ, t)} , M where

   2 (p)  2 +ˆ   p b exp −ρ 1   1 −1 m1 (ρ, t) = L .   2   [p − (α + h1 )] + β 2  

From this, on account of eqn (7.4.56), we find ∞ . (−)n λ ˆn !n ∂A n 1 −1 ¯ (p) L B , m1 (ρ, t) = −L 2n n! ∂ρ1 n=0

(7.4.75)

(7.4.76)

(7.4.77)


where

−1/2 ! ! ¯ (p) n = K ¯ (p − h1 ) n [p − (α + h1 )]2 + β 2 B .

Since for any complex number a, and for m ≥ 0 (Mikusi´ nski, 1967) m    p2 + a2 − p  L−1 = am Jm (at) ,   p2 + a2

185

(7.4.78)

(7.4.79)

operating with L−1 on eqn (7.4.78) and employing eqn (7.4.58), we obtain n k n−k . $ !n % n (−) α −1 n ¯ B (p) = exp [(α + h1 ) t] 2 Jn+k (βt) . (7.4.80) L k k 2 β k=0

As a result, the operation L−1 on eqn (7.4.75) leads to the following Neumanntype series for M1 (ρ, t) M1 (ρ, t) = exp (−h1 t) J0 [β (t − ρ1 )] exp [(α + h1 ) (t − ρ1 )] ∞ n ˆn . (−) λ 1 +ρ1 gn(1) (t − s) n−1 n!ω 1 n=0 ρ 1 n−1 2 2 2 2 ω1 (s − ρ1 ) Jn−1 ω1 (s − ρ1 ) ds H (t − ρ1 ) , × t

where gn(1) (t)

n k n−k . n (−) α = exp [(α + h1 ) t] Jn+k (βt) . k k 2 β

(7.4.81)

(7.4.82)

k=0

Equation (7.4.81) formally applies for λ ≥ λ0 (ω1 ≥ 0). For 0 < λ ≤ λ0 we find M1 (ρ, t) = exp (−h1 t) J0 [β (t − ρ1 )] exp [(α + h1 ) (t − ρ1 )] ∞ n ˆn . (−) λ 1 +ρ1 gn(1) (t − s) n−1 n!ˆ ω 1 n=0 ρ 1 n−1 2 2 × ω ˆ 1 (s − ρ1 ) In−1 ω ˆ 1 (s2 − ρ21 ) ds H (t − ρ1 ) . t

Taking the limit λ → λ0 in eqn (7.4.81) or eqn (7.4.83), yields   M1 (ρ, t) = exp (−h1 t) J0 [β (t − ρ1 )] exp [(α + h1 ) (t − ρ1 )]   t ∞ n ˆn  . (−) λ0 n−1 gn(1) (t − s) s2 − ρ21 ds H (t − ρ1 ) . +ρ1 n−1  n! (n − 1)! 2 n=0

ρ1

(7.4.83)

(7.4.84)

186


ˆ 1 , a reduced convolution Clearly, the function M1 (ρ, t) is a power series in λ ˆ coefficient for the wave-like operator L1 . In order to find the inverse transform of ¯ 2 (ρ1 , p), it suffices to replace υ1 by υ2 , k1 by k2 , and λ by −λ in eqn (7.4.83). M Thus, we find M2 (ρ, t) = exp (−h2 t) J0 [β (t − ρ2 )] exp [(α + h2 ) (t − ρ2 )] ˆn λ 2 +ρ2 gn(2) (t − s) n−1 n!ˆ ω 2 n=0 t

∞ .

(7.4.85)

ρ2

n−1 2 2 2 2 ω ˆ 2 (s − ρ2 ) In−1 ω ˆ 2 (s − ρ2 ) ds H (t − ρ2 ) , × where gn(2)

n k n−k . n (−) α (t) = exp [(α + h2 ) t] Jn+k (βt) . k k 2 β

(7.4.86)

k=0

Finally, operating with L−1 through on eqns (7.4.22) and (7.4.23), yields the solution to the problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) 1 φ (ρ, t) = 4πρ

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1 0 ∂ [M1 (ρ, t) − M2 (ρ, t)] , ∗ 1+t ∂t

(7.4.87)

and ∂ N1 (ρ, t) + N2 (ρ, t) + α [M1 (ρ, t) − M2 (ρ, t)] . ˆ + βˆ ∂t (7.4.88) Here, the function N1 (ρ, t) is given by the formula (7.4.65) for 0 < λ < λ0 , by eqn (7.4.68) for λ = λ0 , and by eqn (7.4.62) for λ > λ0 . On the other hand, the function M1 (ρ, t) is given by the formula (7.4.83) for 0 < λ < λ0 , by eqn (7.4.84) for λ = λ0 , and by eqn (7.4.81) for λ > λ0 . Finally, N2 (ρ, t) and M2 (ρ, t) are given, respectively, by eqns (7.4.71) and (7.4.85) for every λ > 0. ϑ (ρ, t) =

1 8πρ

Analysis of the solution An analysis of solution to the problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) is to be limited to the case λ > λ0 (ω1 > 0), since for 0 < λ ≤ λ0 (ω1 ≤ 0) it may be conducted in an analogous way. First, note that the formulas (7.4.87) and (7.4.88) may be represented as follows φ (ρ, t) = φ1 (ρ1 , t) + φ2 (ρ2 , t) ,

(7.4.89)

ϑ (ρ, t) = ϑ1 (ρ1 , t) + ϑ2 (ρ2 , t) ,

(7.4.90)


187

where 1 φ1 (ρ1 , t) = 4πυ1

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

−1 0 ∂ ∗ 1+t ∂t

(7.4.91)

× {exp (−h1 t) M1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 )} , 1 φ2 (ρ2 , t) = − 4πυ2

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1 0 ∂ ∗ 1+t ∂t

(7.4.92)

× {exp (−h2 t) M2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 )} , 1 ϑ1 (ρ1 , t) = ρ−1 exp (−h1 ρ1 ) δ (ζ1 ) 8πυ1 1 + exp (−h1 t) N1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 ) ∂ [exp (−h1 t) M1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 )] , + α ˆ + βˆ ∂t 1 ϑ2 (ρ2 , t) = ρ−1 2 exp (−h2 ρ2 ) δ (ζ2 ) 8πυ2 + exp (−h2 t) N2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 ) ∂ [exp (−h2 t) M2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 )] . − α ˆ + βˆ ∂t

(7.4.93)

(7.4.94)

In the above Mi (ρi , t) and Ni (ρi , t) (i = 1, 2) are the following power series î in λ M1 (ρ1 , t) = ρ−1 1 J0 (βζ1 ) exp [(α + h1 ) ζ1 ] ∞ . ˆn (−)n λ

1 + n−1 n!ω 1 n=0

t

gn(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 ) ds,

(7.4.95)

ρ1

M2 (ρ2 , t) = ρ−1 2 J0 (βζ2 ) exp [(α + h2 ) ζ2 ] ˆn λ 2 gn(2) (t − s) z2n−1 In−1 (z2 ) ds, + n−1 n!ˆ ω 2 n=0 ∞ .

t

(7.4.96)

ρ2

∞ n ˆn J1 (ˆ z1 ) . (−) λ 1 n−1 + h(1) Jn−1 (z1 ) ds, (7.4.97) N1 (ρ1 , t) = −ω1 n (t − s) z1 n−1 zˆ1 n!ω 1 n=1 t

ρ1

∞ ˆn I1 (ˆ z2 ) . λ 2 n−1 + h(2) In−1 (z2 ) ds, n (t − s) z2 n−1 zˆ2 n!ˆ ω 2 n=1 t

ˆ2 N2 (ρ2 , t) = ω

ρ2

(7.4.98)

188


in which ζi = t − ρi (i = 1, 2) ,

(7.4.99)

and !1/2 !1/2 , z2 = ω ˆ 2 s2 − ρ22 , z1 = ω1 s2 − ρ21 2 ! 2 ! 2 1/2 2 1/2 zˆ1 = ω1 t − ρ1 , zˆ2 = ω ˆ 2 t − ρ2 .

(7.4.100)

It can be shown that the pair (φ, ϑ) given by the formulas (7.4.89)–(7.4.100) is a solution of the problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2). A proof of this theorem is based on the following lemma. Lemma 7.1 The series Mi (ρi , t) and Ni (ρi , t) and their partial derivatives of a finite order are convergent for every t ≥ ρi > 0 (i = 1, 2). Proof. The proof is limited to the analysis of convergence of the series M1 (ρ1 , t), since the other cases are analogous. To this end consider the series defining M1 (ρ1 , t): 20 Q (ρ1 , t) =

∞ n ˆn . (−) λ

t

1 gn(1) n−1 n!ω 1 n=1 ρ1

(t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 ) ds.

(7.4.101)

Since for every x > 0 [note the formula (9.1.62) on page 362 in (Abramowitz and Stegun, 1965)] |Jm (x)| ≤ therefore

xm , m ≥ 0, 2m m!

* * * (1) t . ∞ ˆ n **gn (t − s) * z 2(n−1) λ1 1 |Q (ρ1 , t)| ≤ ds n−1 n−1 (n − 1)! n! 2 |ω | 1 n=1

(7.4.102)

(7.4.103)

ρ1

or, using the definition of z1 (recall eqn (7.4.100)1 ) n−1 * t . ∞ ˆn 2 * λ1 s − ρ21 * (1) * (t − s) |Q (ρ1 , t)| ≤ *g * ds. n n−1 (n − 1)! n! 2 n=1

(7.4.104)

ρ1

If we introduce the notation e1 (t) = exp [(α + h1 ) t] ,

(7.4.105)

20 The series Q (ρ , t) differs from M (ρ , t) by the first two terms; therefore if Q (ρ , t) 1 1 1 1 converges then M1 (ρ1 , t) also converges.


189

(1)

and use the definition of gn (t) (recall eqn (7.4.82)) and the estimate (7.4.102), we find that n+k * *n−k n * * . n 1 ** α ** [β (t − s)] * * (1) *gn (t − s)* ≤ e1 (t − s) k 2k * β * 2n+k (n + k)! k=0 n n k * *n−k β (t − s) ** α ** [β (t − s)] . n (7.4.106) ≤ e1 (t − s) *β * k 2n 4 k=0 n * * * α * β (t − s) n β (t − s) * * = e1 (t − s) . *β * + 2 4 Thus, on account of eqns (7.4.104) and (7.4.106), we obtain t |Q (ρ1 , t)| ≤

eˆ1 (t − s) ρ1

∞ m . [z (ρ1 , t; s)] m=0

m!

ds,

(7.4.107)

in which

* * β (t − s) ** α ** β (t − s) ˆ , eˆ1 (t − s) = e1 (t − s) λ1 + *β * 2 4

and

ˆ1 z (ρ1 , t; s) = λ

s2 − ρ21 2

β (t − s) 2

* * * α * β (t − s) * *+ . *β * 4

(7.4.108)

(7.4.109)

Since the functions eˆ1 (t − s) and z (ρ1 , t; s), treated as functions of the variable s, are continuous in the interval [ρ1 , t], there exist the functions e1 (t − s)} , eM (ρ1 , t) = max {ˆ

(7.4.110)

zM (ρ1 , t) = max {z (ρ1 , t; s)} .

(7.4.111)

s[ρ1 ,t]

s[ρ1 ,t]

Hence, on account of eqn (7.4.107), we find |Q (ρ1 , t)| ≤ (t − ρ1 ) eM (ρ1 , t) exp [zM (ρ1 , t)] .

(7.4.112)

This means that the series Q (ρ1 , t) is bounded from above by a power series convergent for every t ≥ ρ1 > 0. Thus, Q (ρ1 , t) is uniformly convergent for every t ≥ ρ1 > 0. Note that the uniform convergence of Q (ρ1 , t) holds for the parameters t0 , t0 and satisfying the inequalities 21 t0 ≥ t0 > 1, > 0.

(7.4.113)

Thus, by Lemma 7.1, the thermoelastic disturbances associated with the pair (φ, ϑ) can be represented, outside the surfaces ζi = 0 (i = 1, 2), by a uniformly 21 The inqualities (7.4.113) imply that α < 0, that is a thermoelastic disturbance generated by the pair (φ, ϑ) vanishes as t → +∞.

190


convergent series in the whole space and for a wide range of parameters satisfying the constitutive inequalities (7.4.113). In order to examine the displacement–temperature disturbances in a neighborhood of the surface ζi = 0, we employ the formulas (7.4.89)–(7.4.94) and express the functions uρ (ρ, t) and ϑ (ρ, t) as (1)

(2)

uρ (ρ, t) = uρ (ρ1 , t) + uρ (ρ2 , t) , ϑ (ρ, t) = ϑ1 (ρ1 , t) + ϑ2 (ρ2 , t) , where u(1) ρ (ρ1 , t) =

1 4πυ12

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

(7.4.114)

−1 ∂ ∗ 1 + t0 ∂t

× − ρ−1 1 exp (−h1 ρ1 ) δ (ζ1 ) + exp (−h1 t) M1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 ) , u(2) ρ

× − and

ρ−1 2

1 (ρ2 , t) = − 4πυ22

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

exp (−h2 ρ2 ) δ (ζ2 ) +

−1 0 ∂ ∗ 1+t ∂t

exp (−h2 t) M2

(7.4.115)

(7.4.116)

(ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 ) ,

1 ˆ −1 exp (−h1 ρ1 ) δ (ζ1 ) (1 + β)ρ ϑ1 (ρ1 , t) = 1 8πυ1 ˆ ˙ 1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 ) , + exp (−h1 t) N1 (ρ1 , t) + (ˆ α − h1 β)M1 (ρ1 , t) + βˆM (7.4.117)

1 ˆ −1 exp (−h2 ρ2 ) δ (ζ2 ) ϑ2 (ρ1 , t) = (1 − β)ρ 2 8πυ2 ˆ ˙ ˆ α − h2 β)M + exp (−h2 t) N2 (ρ2 , t) − (ˆ 2 (ρ1 , t) + β M2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 ) . (7.4.118) In the above, the prime denotes a partial derivative with respect to ρi (i = 1, 2), while the dot a derivative with respect to t. The formulas (7.4.115)–(7.4.118) together with the Lemma 7.1 imply that (i) the pair uρ , ϑi represents a wave of strong discontinuity whose wavefront is to be identified with the moving surface ζi and whose jump across the front is infinite. Integrating these formulas over time and computing the jumps of (i) functions 1 ∗ uρ and 1 ∗ ϑi at ζi = 0, we obtain −1 1 t0 1 exp (−h1 t) , (7.4.119) (t) = − − 1 ∗ u(1) ρ 2 2 2 4πυ1 υ1 υ2 t 1 −1 1 t0 1 exp (−h2 t) 1 ∗ u(2) , (7.4.120) (t) = − ρ 4πυ22 υ12 υ22 t 2


191

and exp (−h t) 1 1 , 1 + βˆ 8πυ1 t exp (−h t) 1 2 [[1 ∗ ϑ2 ]]2 (t) = , 1 − βˆ 8πυ2 t [[1 ∗ ϑ1 ]]1 (t) =

(7.4.121) (7.4.122)

where the jump of a function fi (ρi , t) on the surface ζi = 0 is given by the formula [[fi ]]i (t) = fi (t − 0, t) − fi (t + 0, t) .

(7.4.123)

The relations (7.4.119)–(7.4.122) imply that the surface ζi = 0 is a singular (i) surface of the order zero relative to the pair 1 ∗ uρ , 1 ∗ ϑi , so that it is a (i) singular surface of the order n = −1 relative to the pair uρ , ϑi ; see (Ignaczak, 1985). We conclude from this that the following theorem holds. Theorem 7.1 A displacement–temperature wave in the problem of Nowacki type in the G–L theory is a superposition of two spherical waves, each of the order n = −1. Remark 7.3 If in the formulation of the initial-boundary value problem (7.4.1) and (7.4.2) one takes a concentrated heat source whose intensity is a prescribed function of time t ≥ 0, then, proceeding in a similar way as in the problem of Nowacki type, we arrive at the following conclusions. 22 Conclusion 7.1 The inclusion of a concentrated heat source with a time dependence of the Heaviside function type in the infinite thermoelastic body gives rise to a thermoelastic wave in the form of a superposition of two spherical dislocationtype waves, that is, waves of the order zero with respect to the displacement and temperature fields. Conclusion 7.2 The inclusion of a concentrated heat source with a time dependence of the ramp function type in the infinite thermoelastic body gives rise to a thermoelastic wave being a superposition of two spherical shock waves, that is, waves of the order one with respect to the displacement and temperature fields. Conclusion 7.3 Only the inclusion of a concentrated heat source whose intensity and its first derivative vanish at the initial time in the infinite thermoelastic body gives rise to a thermoelastic wave in the form of a superposition of two weak discontinuity spherical waves, that is waves of the order two with respect to the displacement and temperature fields. 22 The conclusions are similar to those obtained by Boley and Hetnarski (1968), where the propagating discontinuities in a thermoelastic half-space with zero relaxation times have been classified according to the discontinuities of a thermomechanical load on the half-space.

192


7.5 Solution of Danilovskaya type; plane wave of a negative order This section is devoted to the analysis of a 1D initial-boundary value problem that consists in determining a thermoelastic disturbance propagating in the interior of a half-space due to a singular thermomechanical loading on the boundary. 23 It is assumed that the load is only thermal in nature: a temperature is applied in the form of a pulse to the stress-free boundary x = 0 of the half-space x ≥ 0. 24 This problem, called a problem of Danilovskaya type, may be reduced to a 1D PTP of the G–L theory for a pair (φ, ϑ). The problem consists in finding a pair (φ, ϑ) for (x, t) ∈ [0, ∞) × [0, ∞), satisfying the field equations

∂2 ∂2 − ∂x2 ∂t2

Γφ = 0 0 ∂ ϑ φ= 1+t ∂t

for (x, t) ∈ [0, ∞) × [0, ∞),

(7.5.1)

the initial conditions φ (x, 0) = φ˙ (x, 0) = 0 ϑ (x, 0) = ϑ˙ (x, 0) = 0

for x ∈ (0, ∞),

(7.5.2)

and the boundary conditions 25 φ (0, t) = 0 ϑ (0, t) = δ (t)

for t ∈ (0, ∞).

(7.5.3)

It is further assumed that, for a fixed time and points sufficiently “far” from the boundary, the solution vanishes. Here, Γ is the central operator of the G–L theory, specialized to the 1D situation (recall eqn (7.3.5)) 2 2 ∂3 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ 0 ∂ − 2 1+t , (7.5.4) − 2 − t0 2 − Γ= ∂x2 ∂t ∂x2 ∂t ∂t ∂x ∂t ∂t and δ (t) is the Dirac delta. The displacement u1 = u1 (x, t) and the stress S11 = S11 (x, t) are calculated with the help of φ from the formulas (recall eqns (7.3.2) and (7.3.3)) u1 =

∂φ ∂2φ , S11 = 2 . ∂x ∂t

(7.5.5)

Proceeding just like in the problem of Nowacki type (recall Section 7.4), we conclude that the problem (7.5.1)–(7.5.3) may be reduced to the following problem for the function φ. Find a function φ that satisfies the equation Γφ = 0 for (x, t) ∈ (0, ∞) × (0, ∞), 23

(7.5.6)

The problem is a counterpart of the one of the dynamical theory of thermal stresses solved in a closed form by Danilovskaya (1950). 24 An analysis of other types of the boundary thermomechanical loads on the half-space can be performed in a similar way. 25 The condition (7.5.3) implies that the boundary x = 0 is free from the stress. 1

Solution of Danilovskaya type; plane wave of a negative order

193

the initial conditions ∂kφ (x, 0) = 0, ∂tk

for x ∈ (0, ∞),

k = 0, 1, 2, 3,

(7.5.7)

the boundary conditions φ (0, t) = 0 ∂2φ (0, t) = δ (t) + t0 δ˙ (t) ∂x2

for t ∈ (0, ∞),

(7.5.8)

and appropriate decay conditions as x → ∞. In view of the singular boundary conditions (7.5.8), the above is a singular initial-boundary value problem. Applying the Laplace transform to eqns (7.5.6) and (7.5.8), and using eqns (7.5.7), we obtain

∂2 − s21 (p) ∂x2

∂2 2 − s2 (p) φ¯ = 0, ∂x2

(7.5.9)

and φ¯ (0, p) = 0, 2¯

∂ φ (0, p) = 1 + t0 p, ∂x2

(7.5.10)

where the functions s1 (p) and s2 (p) are defined through the formulas (7.4.15), and φ¯ (x, p) =

∞ e−pt φ (x, t) dt.

(7.5.11)

0

From this we find exp [−xs1 (p)] − exp [−xs2 (p)] φ¯ (x, p) = D , [s21 (p) − s22 (p)]

(7.5.12)

where (recall eqn (7.4.18)) D = 1 + t0 p.

(7.5.13)

Since the formula (7.5.12) is identical to eqn (7.4.17) assuming ρ = x, with the accuracy of the coefficient itself, then applying the inverse Laplace transform to eqn (7.5.12), and proceeding in a way similar to that of retransforming eqn (7.4.17), we obtain φ (x, t) = φ1 (x, t) + φ2 (x, t) ,

(7.5.14)

194

where


φ1 (x, t) =

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

φ2 (x, t) = −

−1 ∂ ˆ 1 (x1 , t) H(ζˆ1 ) , exp (−h1 t) M ∗ 1 + t0 ∂t

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

(7.5.15)

−1 ∂ ˆ 2 (x2 , t) H(ζˆ2 ) . (7.5.16) exp (−h2 t) M ∗ 1 + t0 ∂t

In the above ˆ 1 (x1 , t) = J0 (β ζˆ1 ) exp(α1 ζˆ1 ) + x1 M

∞ n ˆn . (−) λ

1 n−1 n! ω 1 n=0

t

gn(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 ) ds,

x1

(7.5.17) ˆ 2 (x2 , t) = J0 (β ζˆ2 ) exp(α2 ζˆ2 ) + x2 M

ˆn λ 2 gn(2) (t − s) z2n−1 In−1 (z2 ) ds, n−1 n! ω ˆ 2 n=0 ∞ .

t

x2

(7.5.18) and xi = xυi−1 , ζî = t − xi (i = 1, 2) .

(7.5.19)

The remaining symbols appearing in eqns (7.5.15)–(7.5.19) have the same meaning as in Section 7.4. In particular, we have n k n−k . n (−) α Jn+k (βt) , (7.5.20) gn(i) (t) = exp (αi t) k 2k β k=0

z1 = ω1 s2 − x21

!1/2

!1/2 , z2 = ω ˆ 2 s2 − x22 ,

(7.5.21)

2 ˆ 1 − h2 , ω ˆ ω1 = λ 1 ˆ 2 = λ 2 + h2 ,

(7.5.22)

ˆ i = λυ 2 , hi = ki υ 2 /2, λ i i

(7.5.23)

αi = α + hi (i = 1, 2) .

(7.5.24)

Using eqns (7.5.1)2 and (7.5.12), the transformed temperature is found as ! ! s21 (p) − p2 exp [−xs1 (p)] − s22 (p) − p2 exp [−xs2 (p)] ¯ . (7.5.25) ϑ (x, p) = [s21 (p) − s22 (p)] Since eqn (7.5.25) is identical to eqn (7.4.21) assuming ρ = x, with the accuracy of the coefficient itself, then applying the inverse Laplace transform to eqn (7.5.25), and proceeding in a way similar to that of retransforming eqn (7.4.21), we obtain ϑ (x, t) = ϑ1 (x, t) + ϑ2 (x, t) ,

(7.5.26)

Solution of Danilovskaya type; plane wave of a negative order

where

195

1 ˆ exp (−h1 x1 ) δ(ζˆ1 ) (1 + β) 2 ˆM ˆ 1 (x1 , t) + (ˆ ˆ 1 (x1 , t) + exp (−h1 t) [N α − h1 β) ˆ˙ 1 (x1 , t)]H(ζˆ1 ) , +βˆM

(7.5.27)

1 ˆ exp (−h2 x2 ) δ(ζˆ2 ) (1 − β) 2 ˆM ˆ 2 (x2 , t) − (ˆ ˆ 2 (x2 , t) α − h2 β) + exp (−h2 t) [N ˆ˙ 2 (x2 , t)]H(ζˆ2 ) . −βˆM

(7.5.28)

ϑ1 (x, t) =

ϑ2 (x, t) =

Here,

 t ∞ n ˆn  . J (ˆ z ) (−) λ 1 n−1 (1) ˆ 1 (x1 , t) = x1 −ω1 1 1 + h (t − s) z J (z ) ds , N n−1 1 n 1   zˆ1 n! ω1n−1 n=1  

x1

(7.5.29)   t ∞   I (ˆ n . ˆ λ2 1 z2 ) n−1 (2) ˆ 2 (x2 , t) = x2 ω + h (t − s) z I (z ) ds , ˆ2 N n−1 2 n 2   zˆ2 n! ω ˆ 2n−1 n=1

x2

(7.5.30) in which (recall eqns (7.4.61) and (7.4.74)) n k n−k . n (−) α Jn+k (βt) , (t) = exp (α t) (n + k) h(i) i n k k 2 β t n=1 !1/2 !1/2 zˆ1 = ω1 t2 − x21 , zˆ2 = ω ˆ 2 t2 − x22 .

(7.5.31) (7.5.32)

The remaining symbols appearing in eqns (7.5.26)–(7.5.32) have the same meaning as in Section 7.4. Finally, employing eqns (7.5.5) and (7.5.14), we find (1)

(2)

u1 (x, t) = u1 (x1 , t) + u1 (x2 , t) , where

(7.5.33)

−1 1 1 1 (1) 0 ∂ u1 (x1 , t) = − − ∗ 1 + t υ2 υ12 υ22 ∂t ˆ ˆ × exp (−h1 x1 ) δ(ζ1 ) − exp (−h1 t) M1 (x1 , t) H(ζˆ1 ) ,

(7.5.34)

−1 1 1 1 0 ∂ − ∗ 1 + t υ2 υ12 υ22 ∂t ˆ ˆ × exp (−h2 x2 ) δ(ζ2 ) − exp (−h2 t) M2 (x2 , t) H(ζˆ2 )

(7.5.35)

(2)

u1 (x2 , t) =

196


and (1)

(2)

S11 (x, t) = S11 (x1 , t) + S11 (x2 , t) ,

(7.5.36)

in which −1 1 1 0 ∂ exp (−h1 x1 ) δ(ζˆ1 ) 1+t (x1 , t) = − 2 υ12 υ2 ∂t ˆ˙ 1 (x1 , t) − h1 M ˆ 1 (x1 , t) H(ζˆ1 ) , + exp (−h1 t) M

(1) S11

−1 1 1 0 ∂ exp (−h2 x2 ) δ(ζˆ2 ) 1+t (x2 , t) = − − 2 υ12 υ2 ∂t ˆ˙ 2 (x2 , t) − h2 M ˆ 2 (x2 , t) H(ζˆ2 ) . + exp (−h2 t) M

(7.5.37)

(2) S11

(7.5.38)

The prime and the dot in the formulas (7.5.34) and (7.5.35) and (7.5.37) and (7.5.38) denote, respectively, differentiation with respect to xi and t. It follows from the formulas (7.5.26), (7.5.33) and (7.5.36) that the thermoelastic disturbance propagating in the half-space is a superposition of two plane waves of strong discontinuity whose fronts coincide with the planes ζî = 0 (i = 1, 2) that are moving into the half-space at speeds υi (i = 1, 2) (υ2 > υ1 ). Since −1 1 t0 1 [[1 ∗ u1 ]]1 (t) = − − 2 exp (−h1 t) , (7.5.39) υ1 υ12 υ2 t0 [[1 ∗ u1 ]]2 (t) = υ2

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1 exp (−h2 t) ,

(7.5.40)

and [[1 ∗ ϑ]]1 (t) =

1 1 + βˆ exp (−h1 t) , 2

(7.5.41)

[[1 ∗ ϑ]]2 (t) =

1 1 − βˆ exp (−h2 t) , 2

(7.5.42)

both waves are of the order n = −1 with respect to the displacement and temperature. This leads to the following theorem. Theorem 7.2 A displacement–temperature wave in the problem of Danilovskaya type in the G–L theory, in which the boundary of the halfspace is heated by a temperature pulse, is a superposition of two plane waves of strong discontinuity of the order n = −1 propagating into its interior at speeds υi (i = 1, 2) (υ2 > υ1 ). This thermoelastic wave is described by the formulas (7.5.26), (7.5.33) and (7.5.36).

Thermoelastic response of a half-space to laser irradiation

197

7.6 Thermoelastic response of a half-space to laser irradiation The thermoelastic body of G–L type in which the stresses and entropy are sensitive not only to the changes of deformation and temperature but also to the time rates of temperature is a good model for the description of waves in a thermoelastic body subject to a short laser irradiation. In the present section we consider a 1D initial-boundary value problem for a half-space of G–L type in which the thermoelastic wave is generated by a heat source in the whole half-space due to the irradiation of its boundary by a short burst of light energy. Let us assume the heat source to be represented by r(x, t) = X(x)T (t)

x ≥ 0,

t ≥ 0,

(7.6.1)

where X(x) is an exponential function decreasing with depth, while T (t) is a function having the shape of a short time pulse (Strikverda and Scott, 1984). Consistent with the homogeneous displacement–temperature initial conditions and homogeneous stress–temperature boundary conditions, the problem under consideration can be reduced to the following PTP of the G–L theory for a pair (φ, ϑ). Find a pair (φ, ϑ) defined for (x, t) ∈ [0, ∞) × [0, ∞) and satisfying the field equations 0 ∂ r Γφ = − 1 + t ∂t for (x, t) ∈ (0, ∞) × (0, ∞), (7.6.2) 2 ∂ ∂2 0 ∂ ϑ φ = 1 + t − ∂x2 ∂t2 ∂t the initial conditions ∂k φ (·, 0) = 0 ∂tk ϑ(·, 0) = ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0

for x ∈ (0, ∞),

k = 0, 1, 2, 3,

(7.6.3)

and the boundary conditions φ (0, t) = 0,

ϑ (0, t) = 0

for t ∈ (0, ∞).

(7.6.4)

Furthermore, the pair (φ, ϑ) and its partial derivatives of finite order vanish for x → ∞ and for every fixed t. The operator Γ appearing in eqn (7.6.2)1 has the form (recall eqn (7.5.4)) 2 2 ∂3 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂ ∂2 0 ∂ − 2 1+t . (7.6.5) − 2 − t0 2 − Γ= ∂x2 ∂t ∂x2 ∂t ∂t ∂x ∂t ∂t The pair (φ, ϑ) generates the displacement vector ui , the stress tensor Sij , the heat flux qi (i, j = 1, 2, 3) according to the formulas (recall eqns (6.1.10)

198


and (6.1.18)–(6.1.20)) u ≡ u1 (x, t) =

∂φ , ∂x

u2 (x, t) = u3 (x, t) = 0,

∂φ2 , ∂t2 2 ∂φ2 C2 ∂φ2 S22 (x, t) = S33 (x, t) = 2 − 2 , ∂t C1 ∂x2

(7.6.6)

S ≡ S11 (x, t) =

(7.6.7)

S12 (x, t) = S23 (x, t) = S31 (x, t) = 0, q ≡ q1 (x, t) = −

∂ϑ , ∂x

q2 (x, t) = q3 (x, t) = 0.

(7.6.8)

We assume that the function r(x, t) appearing in eqns (7.6.1) and (7.6.2) is smooth for every x ≥ 0 and t ≥ 0, and that X(0) > 0,

T (0) = 0.

(7.6.9)

The initial-boundary value problem (7.6.2)–(7.6.4) is now solved by a Laplace transform technique. Applying that Laplace transform to eqn (7.6.2)1 and employing the homogeneous initial conditions (7.6.3) and (7.6.9)2 , we obtain 2 2 φ¯ = − 1 + t0 p X(x)T¯(p) x ≥ 0, (7.6.10) 1

2

where 2i =

∂2 − s2i (p). ∂x2

(7.6.11)

Here, si (p) (i = 1, 2) are functions determined by the formulas (7.4.15), while the overbar denotes the Laplace transform. Next, transforming the boundary conditions (7.6.4) we obtain φ¯ (0, p) = 0,

¯ p) = 0. ϑ(0,

(7.6.12)

It is clear that a solution to the boundary value problem (7.6.10)–(7.6.12) can be represented in the form ∞ ¯ ¯ (7.6.13) φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 )X(x0 )dx0 , φ (x, p) = T (p) 0

where the function φ¯∗ = φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) satisfies the conditions 21 22 φ¯∗ = − 1 + t0 p δ(x − x0 ) x0 > 0, ∗ ∗ φ¯ (0, p; x0 ) = ϑ¯ (0, p; x0 ) = 0.

(7.6.14)

Here, δ = δ(x) is the Dirac delta, while ϑ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) is the transform of temperature associated with φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) through eqn (7.6.2)2 , that is 2 ∂ φ 2 1 + t0 p ϑ¯∗ = φ¯∗ . − p (7.6.15) ∂x2


199

¯ p) associated with the transform of the potenThe temperature transform ϑ(x, ¯ p), has the form analogous to eqn (7.6.13), that is tial, φ(x, ∞ (7.6.16) ϑ¯∗ (x, p; x0 )X(x0 )dx0 . ϑ¯ (x, p) = T¯(p) 0

In order to determine the pair (φ¯∗ , ϑ¯∗ ), we now introduce the operator 2 =

∂2 − s2 , ∂x2

(7.6.17)

where s is a real parameter (s > 0). Noting that, for |x| < ∞, 1 1 δ(x − x0 ) = − e−s|x−x0 | , 2 2s and 1 1 = 2 2 2 1 2 s1 − s22

1 1 − 2 2 1 2

(7.6.18)

,

(7.6.19)

we infer that a solution to the problem (7.6.14) takes the form φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) = φ¯N (x, p; x0 ) + φ¯C (x, p; x0 ),

(7.6.20)

where φ¯N is the Laplace transform of the 1D potential of the Nowacki type in the G–L theory (recall Section 7.4) −s1 |x−x0 | e m ¯ e−s2 |x−x0 | ¯ , (7.6.21) − φN (x, p; x0 ) = 2 (s21 − s22 ) s1 s2 while φ¯C is the solution of a homogeneous equation associated with eqn (7.6.14)1 φ¯C (x, p; x0 ) = A1 e−s1 x + A2 e−s2 x .

(7.6.22)

m ¯ = 1 + t0 p,

(7.6.23)

Here,

while the constants A1 and A2 are chosen in such a way that the pair (φ¯∗ , ϑ¯∗ ) satisfies the boundary conditions (7.6.14)2 and the conditions of vanishing at infinity. The temperature transforms ϑ¯N and ϑ¯C associated, respectively, with the functions φ¯N and φ¯C are 2 s1 − p2 −s1 |x−x0 | s22 − p2 −s2 |x−x0 | 1 , (7.6.24) e − e ϑ¯N (x, p; x0 ) = 2 (s21 − s22 ) s1 s2 A1 2 A2 2 s1 − p2 e−s1 x + s2 − p2 e−s2 x . ϑ¯C (x, p; x0 ) = m ¯ m ¯

(7.6.25)

200


It can be easily verified that the boundary conditions (7.6.14)2 uniquely determine the pair (A1 , A2 ) through the pair [φ¯N (0, p; x0 ), ϑ¯N (0, p; x0 )], while the function φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) takes the form 2 s2 − p2 e−s1 x − s21 − p2 e−s2 x ¯ ∗ ¯ ¯ φN (0, p; x0 ) φ (x, p; x0 ) = φN (x, p; x0 ) + s21 − s22 −s1 x m ¯ e − 2 − e−s2 x ϑ¯N (0, p; x0 ). s1 − s22 (7.6.26) From this, and using eqn (7.6.15), we obtain ¯ ϑ¯N (x, p; x0 ) m ¯ ϑ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) = m 2 s − p2 s22 − p2 −s1 x e + 1 − e−s2 x φ¯N (0, p; x0 ) 2 2 s1 − s2 2 ! m ¯ s1 − p2 e−s1 x − s22 − p2 e−s2 x ϑ¯N (0, p; x0 ). − 2 2 s1 − s2 Given that [see eqn (8.3.35)] 2 s1 − p2 s22 − p2 = −mp ¯ 3,

(7.6.27)

(7.6.28)

the formulas (7.6.26) and (7.6.27) can be represented in the form φ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) = φ¯N (x, p; x0 ) − e−s1 x + e−s2 x φ¯N (0, p; x0 ) 2 s − p2 e−s1 x − s22 − p2 e−s2 x ¯ e−s1 x − e−s2 x ¯ + 1 ¯ φN (0, p; x0 ) − m ϑN (0, p; x0 ), 2 2 s1 − s2 s21 − s22 (7.6.29) and e−s1 x − e−s2 x ¯ φN (0, p; x0 ) ϑ¯∗ (x, p; x0 ) = ϑ¯N (x, p; x0 ) − p3 s21 − s22 2 s1 − p2 e−s1 x − s22 − p2 e−s2 x ¯ ϑN (0, p; x0 ). − s21 − s22

(7.6.30)

By retransforming the relations (7.6.13) and (7.6.16), we obtain a formal solution to the problem (7.6.2)–(7.6.4) t ∞ ∗ X(x0 ) φ (x, t − τ ; x0 )T (τ )dτ dx0 , φ (x, t) = 0

ϑ (x, t) =

0

∞

∗

(7.6.31)

ϑ (x, t − τ ; x0 )T (τ )dτ dx0 ,

X(x0 ) 0

t

0

where the pair [φ∗ (x, t; x0 ), ϑ∗ (x, t; x0 )] is to be found by an inverse transformation of eqns (7.6.29) and (7.6.30). Clearly, the formulas (7.6.31) are true for arbitrary smooth functions X(x) and T (x) satisfying the conditions (7.6.9), and such that the double integrals in eqns (7.6.31) exist and are bounded for every x ≥ 0 and t ≥ 0.


201

Let us now assume that the heat source that is due to the surface irradiation has the form (recall eqn (7.6.1)) r (x, t) = r0 t exp(−bt) exp(−ax),

(7.6.32)

where r0 = const, b−1 defines the width of impulse on the time axis, while a−1 is the absorption length of the irradiation on the x-axis (a > 0, b > 0). From this we find (recall eqn (7.6.1)) T¯ (p) = r0 (p + b)−2 , X (x) = exp(−ax). Next, introduce the notations

φ¯0 (x, p) = T¯(p) ϑ¯0 (x, p) = T¯(p)

∞

0 ∞

(7.6.33)

φ¯N (x, p; x0 )X(x0 )dx0 , (7.6.34) ϑ¯N (x, p; x0 )X(x0 )dx0 .

0

Inserting the function φ¯N (x, p; x0 ) specified by the formula (7.6.21) into eqn (7.6.34)1 and integrating over x0 , we obtain e−s1 x e−s2 x 1 T¯(p)m ¯ 1 1 −ax ¯ − . e − 2 − φ0 (x, p) = 2 s1 − s22 s21 − a2 s2 − a2 2 s1 (s1 − a) s2 (s2 − a) (7.6.35) Similarly, inserting the function ϑ¯N (x, p; x0 ) given by eqn (7.6.24) into eqn (7.6.34)2 and integrating with respect to x0 , we obtain T¯(p) 1 1 2 2 ¯ (p − a ) 2 e−ax + − 2 ϑ0 (x, p) = − 2 s1 − s22 s1 − a2 s2 − a2 a p2 a p2 1 1 − e−s1 x − 1+ − e−s2 x . + 1+ 2 s1 − a s1 (s1 − a) 2 s2 − a s2 (s2 − a) (7.6.36) Now, using the identity (recall eqn (7.4.15)) s21 − s22 = ∆1/2 p[(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 ,

(7.6.37)

and the formula specifying T¯(p) (recall eqn (7.6.33)1 ) for the function S¯0 (x, p), which is a transform of the stress associated with the pair (φ¯0 , ϑ¯0 ), we obtain r0 1 S¯0 (x, p) = 1/2 f¯(p) [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 ∆ e−s1 x e−s2 x 1 1 1 −ax − , e × − 2 − s21 − a2 s2 − a2 2 s1 (s1 − a) s2 (s2 − a)

(7.6.38)

in which f¯(p) = p(1 + t0 p)(p + b)−2 .

(7.6.39)

202


Similarly, on account of eqn (7.6.36), we obtain r0 1 ϑ¯0 (x, p) = − 1/2 g¯(p) 2 + β 2 ]1/2 [(p − α) ∆ 1 1 2 2 e−ax × (p − a ) 2 − 2 s1 − a2 s2 − a2 a p2 a p2 1 1 −s1 x −s2 x 1+ − e 1+ − e , + − 2 s1 − a s1 (s1 − a) 2 s2 − a s2 (s2 − a) (7.6.40) where g¯(p) = f¯(p)[mp ¯ 2 ]−1 . (7.6.41) It follows from the relations (7.6.13), (7.6.16), (7.6.29), (7.6.30) and (7.6.34) ¯ p)] corresponding to the distribution of heat sources ¯ p), ϑ(x, that the pair [S(x, (7.6.32) takes the form ¯ p) = S¯0 (x, p) − e−s1 x + e−s2 x S¯0 (0, p) S(x, 2 s1 − p2 e−s1 x − s22 − p2 e−s2 x ¯ e−s1 x − e−s2 x ¯ + S0 (0, p) − mp ¯ 2 ϑ0 (0, p), 2 2 s1 − s2 s21 − s22 (7.6.42) −s1 x

− e−s2 x ¯ S0 (0, p) − s22 2 s1 − p2 e−s1 x − s22 − p2 e−s2 x ¯ − ϑ0 (0, p), s21 − s22

¯ p) = ϑ¯0 (x, p) − p e ϑ(x,

s21

(7.6.43)

where the pair [S¯0 (x, p), ϑ¯0 (x, p)] is specified by the formulas (7.6.38)–(7.6.41). Thus, it is clear that the explicit form of the pair [S(x, t), ϑ(x, t)] is available provided we can invert in a closed form eqns (7.6.38), (7.6.40), (7.6.42) and (7.6.43). To this end, let us now introduce the functions (x ≥ 0) Ni (x, t) = L−1 (e−si x ), recall eqn (7.4.25), e−si x −1 , recall eqn (7.4.24), Mi (x, t) = L 2 [(p − α) + β 2 ]1/2 e−si x −1 Pi (x, t) = L , 2 [(p − α) + β 2 ]1/2 (si − a) e−si x −1 Qi (x, t) = L , 2 [(p − α) + β 2 ]1/2 si (si − a) −si x e Ri (x, t) = L−1 , 2 [(p − α) + β 2 ]1/2 (s2i − a2 )

(7.6.44) (7.6.45)

(7.6.46)

(7.6.47)

(7.6.48)


203

along with the notations Ri (t) = Ri (0, t), σ0 (x, t) ≡

∆1/2 S0 (x, t), r0

∆1/2 S(x, t), σ(x, t) ≡ r0

θ0 (x, t) ≡

∆1/2 ϑ0 (x, t), r0

∆1/2 θ(x, t) ≡ ϑ(x, t). r0

Equations (7.6.38) and (7.6.40) can then be written as ¯ 1 (x, p) − Q ¯ 1 (p) − R ¯ 2 (p)]e−ax − 1 [Q ¯ 2 (x, p)] σ ¯0 (x, p) = f¯(p) [R 2

(7.6.49)

(7.6.50)

(7.6.51)

and ! ! ! ¯ 1 (x, p) + aP¯1 (x, p) ¯ 1 (p) − R ¯ 2 (p) e−ax − 1 g¯(p) M θ¯0 (x, p) = g¯(p)a2 − g¯1 (p) R 2 1 ¯ 2 (x, p) + aP¯2 (x, p)] + 1 g¯1 (p)[Q ¯ 1 (x, p) − Q ¯ 2 (x, p)], + g¯(p)[M 2 2 (7.6.52) where g¯1 (p) = p2 g¯(p). Furthermore, eqns (7.6.42) and (7.6.43) take the form 1¯ ¯2 (x, p) σ ¯ (x, p) = σ ¯0 (x, p) − N1 (x, p) + N 2 ! ˆ M ¯ 2 (x, p) σ ¯ 1 (x, p) − M ¯0 (0, p) −(ˆ α + pβ) 1 ¯ 1 (x, p) − M ¯ 2 (x, p)]θ¯0 (0, p), − γˆ p(1 + t0 p)[M 2

(7.6.53)

(7.6.54)

and ¯ p) = θ¯0 (x, p) − 1 {N ¯1 (x, p) + N ¯2 (x, p) θ(x, 2 ˆ M ¯ 1 (x, p) − M ¯ 2 (x, p)]}θ¯0 (0, p) +(ˆ α + pβ)[ 1 ¯ 1 (x, p) − M ¯ 2 (x, p)]¯ γ [M − ˆ σ0 (0, p), 2

(7.6.55)

where α ˆ and βˆ have the same meaning as in Section 7.4 (recall eqns (7.4.27)) and γˆ = 2∆−1/2 .

(7.6.56)

¯i (x, p) and M ¯ i (x, p) were already deterThe inverse transforms of functions N mined in Section 7.4. Indeed, recalling eqns (7.4.83) and (7.4.85), it follows from the structure of Mi (x, t) that ˆ i (xi , t)H(ζi ), Mi (x, t) = M

(7.6.57)

204


ˆ i (xi , t) is a smooth function of both arguwhere xi = xvi−1 , ζi = t − xi , and M ments. As we shall see in the following, the functions Pi (x, t), Qi (x, t), and Ri (x, t) specified through eqns (7.6.46)–(7.6.48) also have the structure of the form (7.6.57), that is Pi (x, t) = Pî (xi , t)H(ζi ), ˆ i (xi , t)H(ζi ), Qi (x, t) = Q ˆ i (xi , t)H(ζi ), Ri (x, t) = R

(7.6.58)

ˆ i , and R ˆ i being smooth functions of their arguments. Q eqns (7.6.57) and (7.6.58), and inverting the relations (7.6.51) and we obtain t f1 (t − τ )[R1 (τ ) − R2 (τ )]dτ e−ax σ0 (x, t) = t0 [R1 (t) − R2 (t)] + 0 t 1 0ˆ ˆ 1 (x1 , τ )dτ ] − H(ζ1 )[t Q1 (x1 , t) + f1 (t − τ )Q (7.6.59) 2 xt1 1 ˆ 2 (x2 , t) + ˆ 2 (x2 , τ )dτ ], f1 (t − τ )Q + H(ζ2 )[t0 Q 2 x2

with Pî , Using (7.6.52),

and

h(t − τ )[R1 (τ ) − R2 (τ )]dτ

θ0 (x, t) = 1 − H(ζ1 ) 2 1 + H(ζ2 ) 2

t

e−ax

0 t

ˆ 1 (x1 , τ ) + aPˆ1 (x1 , τ )] − g1 (t − τ )Q ˆ 1 (x1 , τ )}dτ {g(t − τ )[M

x1 t

ˆ 2 (x2 , τ ) + aPˆ2 (x2 , τ )] − g1 (t − τ )Q ˆ 2 (x2 , τ )}dτ. {g(t − τ )[M x2

(7.6.60) The functions f1 (t), g1 (t), g(t), and h(t) appearing in eqns (7.6.59) and (7.6.60) are given by the relations f1 (t) ≡ f (t) − t0 δ(t) = [(1 − 2bt0 ) − (1 − bt0 )bt]e−bt , g1 (t) ≡ (1 − bt)e−bt , 1 [(1 − a−bt ) − bte−bt ], b2 a2 a2 b2 − a2 −bt 2 te . h(t) ≡ a g(t) − g1 (t) = 2 − 1 + 2 e−bt + b b b g(t) ≡

(7.6.61) (7.6.62) (7.6.63) (7.6.64)

ˆ i (xi , t) were determined in a closed form in Section 7.4 Given that the functions M (recall eqns (7.4.83) and (7.4.85)), the relations (7.6.59) and (7.6.60) allow one to find a closed form of the pair [σ0 (x, t), θ0 (x, t)] so long as the functions ˆ i (xi , t) and Pî (xi , t) can also be obtained in closed forms. Ri (t), Q


205

Now, the inversion of the relations (7.6.54) and (7.6.55) leads to the equations σ(x, t) = σ0 (x, t) + σ1 (x1 , t) + σ2 (x2 , t), θ(x, t) = θ0 (x, t) + θ1 (x1 , t) + θ2 (x2 , t),

(7.6.65)

where 1 1 σ1 (x1 , t) = − N1 (x, t) ∗ σ0 (0, t) + M1 (x, t) ∗ σ ˜0 (0, t), 2 2 1 1 ˜0 (0, t), σ2 (x2 , t) = − N2 (x, t) ∗ σ0 (0, t) − M2 (x, t) ∗ σ 2 2

(7.6.66)

and 1 1 θ1 (x1 , t) = − N1 (x, t) ∗ θ0 (0, t) − M1 (x, t) ∗ θ˜0 (0, t), 2 2 1 1 θ2 (x2 , t) = − N2 (x, t) ∗ θ0 (0, t) + M2 (x, t) ∗ θ˜0 (0, t). 2 2

(7.6.67)

Here, ˆ σ0 (0, t) + βˆσ˙ 0 (0, t) − γˆ [θ˙0 (0, t) + t0 θ¨0 (0, t)], σ ˜0 (0, t) = α (7.6.68) ˆ θ0 (0, t) + βˆθ˙0 (0, t) + ˆ γ σ0 (0, t). θ˜0 (0, t) = α On account of the relation (0)

ˆ (xi , t)H(ζi ), Ni (x, t) = δ(ζi ) exp(−hi xi ) + N i

(7.6.69)

(0)

ˆ (xi , t) is a smooth function of both arguments [recall the formula where N i ˆ (0) (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), and the for(7.4.65) in which Pˆ (ρ1 , t) is identified with N 1 ˆ (0) (x2 , t)H(ζ2 )], and using mula (7.4.71) in which R(ρ2 , t) is identified with N 2 eqn (7.6.57), we represent the relations (7.6.66) and (7.6.67) in the form 1 σ1 (x1 , t) = − H(ζ1 ) 2

exp(−h1 x1 )σ0 (0, ζ1 )

(0) (0) ˆ ˆ [N1 (x1 , s)σ0 (0, t − s) − M1 (x1 , s)˜ σ0 (0, t − s)]ds , + x1 1 σ2 (x2 , t) = − H(ζ2 ) exp(−h2 x2 )σ0 (0, ζ2 ) 2 t (0) ˆ ˆ (0) (x2 , s)˜ + [N2 (x2 , s)σ0 (0, t − s) + M σ (0, t − s)]ds , 0 2

t

x2

(7.6.70)

206


and

ˆ (0) (x1 , s)θ0 (0, t − s) + M ˆ (0) (x1 , s)θ˜0 (0, t − s)]ds , [N 1 1 x1 1 θ2 (x2 , t) = − H(ζ2 ) exp(−h2 x2 )θ0 (0, ζ2 ) 2

+

1 θ1 (x1 , t) = − H(ζ1 ) exp(−h1 x1 )θ0 (0, ζ1 ) 2

t

t

+

(7.6.71)

ˆ (0) (x2 , s)θ0 (0, t − s) − M ˆ (0) (x2 , s)θ˜0 (0, t − s)]ds . [N 2 2

x2

Given that ˆ 2 (0, t), ˆ 1 (0, t) = M M

ˆ (0) (0, t) = N ˆ (0) (0, t) = 0, N 1 2

(7.6.72)

one can easily verify that the pair [σ(x, t), θ(x, t)] specified by the formulas (7.6.65) satisfies all the conditions of thus formulated initial-boundary value problem. In particular, we have σ(0, t) = θ(0, t) = 0

∀t ≥ 0.

(7.6.73)

Clearly, the solution [σ(x, t), θ(x, t)] takes a closed form so long as the functions ˆ i (xi , t), and R ˆ i (xi , t) defining the pair [σ0 (x, t), θ0 (x, t)] take a closed Pî (xi , t), Q form. In the following, we determine the closed forms of these functions. The function Pi (xi , t) is specified by the relation (recall eqn (7.6.46)) exp[−xsi (p)] (i = 1, 2). (7.6.74) Pi (x, t) = L−1 [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 [si (p) − a] It can be rewritten as Pi (x, t) = e−hi t L−1 [P¯i (x, p − hi )],

(7.6.75)

where P¯i (x, p − hi ) =

exp[−xsi (p − hi )] . [(p − αi )2 + β 2 ]1/2 [si (p − hi ) − a]

(7.6.76)

Here, hi and αi have the same meaning as in Sections 7.4 and 7.5 (recall eqn (7.5.24)). Now, introducing the notations s˜i (p − hi ) = vi si (p − hi ),

a ˜i = vi a,

(7.6.77)

we find P¯i (x, p − hi ) =

vi exp[−xi s˜i (p − hi )] . [(p − αi )2 + β 2 ]1/2 [˜ si (p − hi ) − a ˜i ]

(7.6.78)


207

We shall first carry out an inverse transformation of eqn (7.6.78) for i = 1 and ω1 ≥ 0 (recall eqn (7.4.38)). Let us begin with (recall eqns (7.4.76)–(7.4.78)) exp[−x˜ s1 (p − h1 )] = −

∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 ¯ [K(p − h1 )]n L[An (x1 , t)], n 2 n! n=0

(7.6.79)

ˆ 1 , K, ¯ and An have the same meaning as in Section 7.4, in which the symbols λ while a prime denotes a differentiation with respect to x1 . Multiplying eqn (7.6.79) through by exp(−˜ a1 x1 ) and integrating both sides with respect to x1 in the interval [x1 , ∞), we obtain s1 (p − h1 ) + a ˜1 ]} exp{−x1 [˜ = s ˜ (p − h ) + a ˜ 1 1 1 ∞ ∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 ¯ n −˜ a1 x1 −˜ a1 u [K(p − h1 )] L e An (x1 , t) − a ˜1 e An (u, t)du . 2n n! x1 n=0 (7.6.80) Multiplying the above formula through by exp(˜ a1 x1 ) and replacing a ˜1 by −˜ a1 , we obtain exp[−x1 s˜1 (p − h1 )] = s˜1(p − h1 ) − a ˜1 ∞ ∞ . (−)n λ ˆn 1 ¯ n a ˜1 (u−x1 ) [ K(p − h )] L A (x , t) + a ˜ e A (u, t)du . 1 n 1 1 n 2n n! x1 n=0

(7.6.81)

From this and the definition of P1 (x, t) (recall eqn (7.6.75)), we get ∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 P1 (x, t) = v1 exp(−h1 t) n! ∞ n=0 (1) ˜1 ea˜1 (u−x1 ) An (u, t)du , ×gn (t) ∗ An (x1 , t) + a

(7.6.82)

x1

or (0) P1 (x, t) = Pˆ1 (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ),

(7.6.83)

where ∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x1 n=0 s ˆ ˆ × An (x1 , s) + av1 exp[av1 (u − x1 )]An (u, s)du ds, (0) Pˆ1 (x1 , t) = v1 exp(−h1 t)

(7.6.84)

x1

and Aˆn (x1 , t) = ω1−n

n ω1 (t2 − x21 ) Jn ω1 (t2 − x21 ) .

(7.6.85)

208


The formula (7.6.83) is true for ω1 ≥ 0. For ω1 ≤ 0 we obtain P1 (x, t) = Pˆ1 (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), where

(7.6.86)

∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x 1 n=0 s ˆn (x1 , s) + av1 ˆn (u, s)du ds, × B exp[av1 (u − x1 )]B

Pˆ1 (x1 , t) = v1 exp(−h1 t)

(7.6.87)

x1

and ˆn (x1 , t) = ω ˆ 1−n B

-

n ω ˆ1

(t2

−

x21 )

2 2 In ω ˆ 1 (t − x1 ) ,

(7.6.88)

whereby ω ˆ 1 = −ω1 > 0. Similarly, inverting eqn (7.6.78) for i = 2 we find P2 (x, t) = Pˆ2 (x2 , t)H(ζ2 ), where

(7.6.89)

∞ ˆn t . λ2 gn(2) (t − s) n! x2 n=0 s ˆ ˆ × Cn (x2 , s) + av2 exp[av2 (u − x2 )]Cn (u, s)du ds,

Pˆ2 (x2 , t) = v2 exp(−h2 t)

(7.6.90)

x2

and Cˆn (x2 , t) = ω ˆ 2−n

n ω ˆ 2 (t2 − x22 ) In ω ˆ 2 (t2 − x22 ) ,

(7.6.91)

whereby ω ˆ 2 = −ω2 > 0. Now, we consider the function Qi (x, t) (recall eqn (7.6.47)) exp[−xsi (p)] . Qi (x, t) = L−1 [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 [si (p) − a]si (p) Given that 1 1 = [si (p) − a]si (p) a

1 1 − si (p) − a si (p)

(7.6.92)

,

(7.6.93)

by using a method analogous to that for finding the function Pi (x, t), we obtain

r For ω1 ≥ 0 ˆ (0) (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), Q1 (x, t) = Q 1

(7.6.94)


where

∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x 1 n=0 s × exp[av1 (u − x1 )]Aˆn (u, s)du ds.

209

ˆ (0) (x1 , t) = v12 exp(−h1 t) Q 1

r For ω1 ≤ 0

x1

ˆ 1 (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), Q1 (x, t) = Q where

(7.6.95)

∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x1 n=0 s ˆ × exp[av1 (u − x1 )]Bn (u, s)du ds.

(7.6.96)

ˆ 1 (x1 , t) = v12 exp(−h1 t) Q

(7.6.97)

x1

Furthermore, ˆ 2 (x2 , t)H(ζ2 ), Q2 (x, t) = Q where

∞ ˆn t . λ2 gn(2) (t − s) n! x 2 n=0 s × exp[av2 (u − x2 )]Cˆn (u, s)du ds.

(7.6.98)

ˆ 2 (x2 , t) = v22 exp(−h2 t) Q

(7.6.99)

x2

Finally, let us consider the function (recall eqn (7.6.48)) exp[−xsi (p)] −1 . Ri (x, t) = L [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 [s2i (p) − a2 ] On account of the fact that 1 1 1 1 − , = s2i (p) − a2 2a si (p) − a si (p) + a

(7.6.100)

(7.6.101)

and using the formula for Pi (x, t), we obtain:

r For ω1 ≥ 0

(0)

ˆ (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), R1 (x, t) = R 1 where

∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x 1 n=0 s × cosh[av1 (u − x1 )]Aˆn (u, s)du ds.

(7.6.102)

ˆ (0) (x1 , t) = v 2 exp(−h1 t) R 1 1

x1

(7.6.103)

210


r For ω1 ≤ 0 ˆ 1 (x1 , t)H(ζ1 ), R1 (x, t) = R

(7.6.104)

where ∞ . ˆn t (−)n λ 1 gn(1) (t − s) n! x1 n=0 s ˆ × cosh[av1 (u − x1 )]Bn (u, s)du ds.

ˆ 1 (x1 , t) = v 2 exp(−h1 t) R 1

(7.6.105)

x1

Moreover, ˆ 2 (x2 , t)H(ζ2 ), R2 (x, t) = R

(7.6.106)

where ∞ ˆn t . λ2 2 ˆ R2 (x2 , t) = v2 exp(−h2 t) gn(2) (t − s) n! x 2 n=0 s × cosh[av2 (u − x2 )]Cˆn (u, s)du ds.

(7.6.107)

x2

Thus, the pair [σ(x, t), θ(x, t)] specified by the formula (7.6.65) has been determined in a closed form. Let us now consider the particular case of the solution (7.6.65) in which the width of the laser impulse is small, i.e. b → ∞. We restrict the considerations to the case ω1 ≤ 0. Passing with b to infinity in eqns (7.6.65), and using the relations (recall eqns (7.6.61)–(7.6.64)) f1 (t) → 0, g1 (t) → 0 for b → ∞, t > 0, g(t) → 0, h(t) → 0 for b → ∞, t > 0,

(7.6.108)

we obtain σ(x, t) = σ0 (x, t) + σ1 (x1 , t) + σ2 (x2 , t), θ(x, t) = θ1 (x1 , t) + θ2 (x2 , t),

(7.6.109)

where 1 ˆ 1 (x1 , t) − H(ζ2 )Q ˆ 2 (x2 , t)] , σ0 (x, t) = t0 [R1 (t) − R2 (t)]e−ax − [H(ζ1 )Q 2 (7.6.110)


and

1 σi (xi , t) = − H(ζi ) exp(−hi xi )σ0 (0, ζi ) 2

t

+

(0) ˆ ˆ [Ni (xi , s)σ0 (0, t − s) ∓ Mi (xi , s)˜ σ0 (0, t − s)]ds ,

xi

1 θi (xi , t) = ∓ H(ζi ) 2

211

(7.6.111)

t

ˆ i (xi , s)θ˜0 (0, t − s)ds. M

(7.6.112)

xi

The minus (plus) sign in the formulas (7.6.111) and (7.6.112) corresponds to i = 1 (i = 2). Furthermore, ˆ σ0 (0, t) + β˜σ˙ 0 (0, t), σ ˜0 (0, t) = α γ σ0 (0, t), θ˜0 (0, t) = ˆ

(7.6.113)

σ0 (0, t) = t0 [Z1 (t) − Z2 (t)], σ˙ 0 (0, t) = t0 [Z˙ 1 (t) − Z˙ 2 (t)].

(7.6.114)

where

In the above s ∞ . ˆ i )n t 1 2 (∓λ (i) (i) gn (t − s) Zi (t) = vi exp(−hi t) An (u, s)du ds, 2 n! 0 0 n=0 1 Z˙ i (t) = −hi Zi (t) + vi2 exp(−hi t) 2 s ∞ t . ˆ i )n t (∓λ (i) (i) (i) g˙ n (t − s) A0 (u, t)du + An (u, s)du ds , × n! 0 0 0 n=0 (7.6.115) whereby the minus (plus) sign is taken for i = 1 (i = 2), while the functions (i) An (u, s) are specified by the relations (i) A(i) n (u, s) = An (u, s) exp(−avi u),

in which A(i) ˆ i−n n (u, s) = ω

n ω ˆ i (s2 − u2 ) In ω ˆ i (s2 − u2 ) .

(7.6.116)

(7.6.117)

ˆ i (xi , t) appearing in eqn (7.6.110) are given by the formulas Functions Ri (t) and Q (recall eqns (7.6.104)–(7.6.107) for xi = 0, and eqns (7.6.96)–(7.6.99)) s ∞ . ˆ i )n t (∓λ Ri (t) = vi2 exp(−hi t) gn(i) (t − s) Bn(i) (u, s)du ds, n! 0 0 n=0 (7.6.118)

212


and ˆ i (xi , t) = v 2 exp(−hi t) Q i

s ∞ . ˆ i )n t (∓λ gn(i) (t − s) Cn(i) (xi ; u, s)du ds, n! xi xi n=0 (7.6.119)

where Bn(i) (u, s) = cosh(avi u)A(i) n (u, s), Cn(i) (xi ; u, s) = exp[avi (u − xi )]A(i) n (u, s).

(7.6.120)

ˆ i (xi , t) appearing in eqns (7.6.111) and (7.6.112) ˆ (0) (xi , t) and M Functions N i are given by the formulas (recall eqns (7.4.65) and (7.4.71); and eqns (7.4.83) and (7.4.85)) ˆ (0) (xi , t) = xi exp(−hi t)[A(i) (xi , t) + N −1 i

∞ . ˆ i )n t (∓λ (i) h(i) n (t − s)An−1 (xi , s)ds], n! xi n=1

(7.6.121) and ˆ i (xi , t) = exp(−hi t)[g (i) (ζi ) + xi M 0

∞ . ˆ i )n t (∓λ gn(i) (t − s)A(i) n (xi , s)ds], n! x i n=0

(7.6.122) (i)

(i)

where the functions gn (t) and hn (t) have the same meaning as in Section 7.4. In order to examine the behavior of the pair (σ, θ) in a fixed cross-section of the half-space x = x0 > 0, we adopt the following notations S(t) = σ(x0 , t)/t0 , θ(t) = θ(x0 , t)/(t0 εˆ γ ), S0 (t) = σ0 (x0 , t)/t0 , γ ), Si (t) = σi (x0i , t)/t0 , θi (t) = θ(x0i , t)/(t0 εˆ x0i ≡ t0i = x0 /vi ,

(7.6.123)

ζi0 = t − t0i ,

and, using eqns (7.6.109)–(7.6.112), we obtain S(t) = S0 (t) + S1 (t) + S2 (t),

θ(t) = θ1 (t) + θ2 (t),

(7.6.124)


213

where 1 ˆ 1 (t01 , t) − H(ζ20 )Q ˆ 2 (t02 , t)], S0 (t) = [R1 (t) − R2 (t)] exp(−ax0 ) − [H(ζ10 )Q 2 (7.6.125) 1 Si (t) = − H(ζi0 ) exp(−hi t0i )Σ(ζi0 ) 2 t (7.6.126) (0) 0 ˆ ˆ (0) (t0 , s)Σ(t ˜ − s)]ds , + [Ni (ti , s)Σ(t − s) ∓ M i i t0i

1 θi (t) = ∓ H(ζi0 ) 2

t t0i

ˆ (0) (t0i , s)Σ(t − s)ds. M i

(7.6.127)

˜ = Σ(t) ˜ Functions Σ = Σ(t) and Σ appearing in eqns (7.6.126) and (7.6.127) are given by the formulas Σ(t) = Z1 (t) − Z2 (t), ˜ ˙ Σ(t) = α ˆ Σ(t) + βˆΣ(t).

(7.6.128)

It follows from eqns (7.6.124)–(7.6.127) that the discontinuities of the pair [S(t), θ(t)] may arise at most at the wavefronts t = t0i (i = 1, 2). We shall now demonstrate that also for t = t0i this pair is a continuous function. Since v2 > v1 > 0, then 0 < t02 < t01 and ζ20 > ζ10 , and the time interval [0, ∞) can be represented in the form [0, ∞) = [0, t02 ) ∪ [t02 , t01 ) ∪ [t01 , ∞). Case 1: 0 ≤ t < t02 . In that case ζi0 < 0, and hence (1)

S0 (t) = S0 (t) ∀t ∈ [0, t02 ), Si (t) = θi (t) = 0 ∀t ∈ [0, t02 ), where (1)

S0 (t) = [R1 (t) − R2 (t)] exp(−ax0 ). Hence (1)

S(t) = S0 (t), θ(t) = 0 ∀t ∈ [0, t02 ). Furthermore, (1)

S0 (t02 − 0) = S0 (t02 ), θi (t02 − 0) = 0. Si (t02 − 0) = 0, from which there follows (1)

S(t02 − 0) = S0 (t02 ), θ(t02 − 0) = 0.

(*)

214


Case 2: t02 < t < t01 . In that case ζ20 > 0, ζ10 < 0, and hence (2)

S0 (t) = S0 (t),

S1 (t) = 0,

θ1 (t) = 0,

θ2 (t) = θ2 (t),

(2)

S2 (t) = S2 (t),

(2)

where

1ˆ 0 (2) (1) S0 (t) = S0 (t) + Q 2 (t2 , t), 2 1 (2) exp(−h2 t02 )Σ(t − t02 ) S2 (t) = − 2 t

+ t02

(0)

(0)

ˆ (t0 , s)Σ(t − s) + M ˆ (t0 , s)Σ(t ˜ − s)]ds [N 2 2 2 2 (2) θ2 (t)

1 = 2

t

ˆ (0) (t02 , s)Σ(t − s)ds. M 2

t02

Hence, (2)

(2)

(2)

S(t) = S0 (t) + S2 (t), θ(t) = θ2 (t). Furthermore, (2)

(1)

S0 (t02 + 0) = S0 (t02 ) = S0 (t02 ), S1 (t02 + 0) = 0, S2 (t02 + 0) = 0, θ1 (t02 + 0) = 0, θ2 (t02 + 0) = 0, so that (1)

S(t02 + 0) = S0 (t02 ), θ(t02 + 0) = 0.

(**)

Next, we compute the limits for t → t01 − 0 and obtain (2)

S0 (t01 − 0) = S0 (t01 ), (2) S2 (t01 − 0) = S2 (t01 ). S1 (t01 − 0) = 0, Thus, (2)

(2)

S(t01 − 0) = S0 (t01 ) + S2 (t01 ), (2)

θ(t01 − 0) = θ2 (t01 ).

(***)

Case 3: t01 < t < ∞. In that case ζi0 > 0 and we obtain (3)

(3)

S0 (t) = S0 (t), Si (t) = Si (t), (3) θi (t) = θi (t),


215

where

1ˆ 0 (3) (2) S0 (t) = S0 (t) − Q 1 (t1 , t), 2 1 (3) exp(−hi t0i )Σ(t − t0i ) Si (t) = − 2

t

+ t0i

(0) 0 0 ˆ ˆ ˜ [Ni (ti , s)Σ(t − s) ∓ Mi (ti , s)Σ(t − s)]ds , (3)

θi (t) = ∓

1 2

t

t0i

ˆ i (t0 , s)Σ(t − s)ds. M i

Hence (3)

(3)

(3)

S(t) = S0 (t) + S1 (t) + S2 (t),

(3)

(3)

θ(t) = θ1 (t) + θ2 (t).

Furthermore, (3)

(2)

S0 (t01 + 0) = S0 (t01 ), (3)

S2 (t01 + 0) = S2 (t01 ),

(3)

θ2 (t01 + 0) = θ2 (t01 ),

S1 (t01 + 0) = 0, θ1 (t01 + 0) = 0,

(3)

(3)

(3)

(3)

so that (2)

(3)

S(t01 + 0) = S0 (t01 ) + S2 (t01 ),

(3)

θ(t01 + 0) = θ2 (t01 ).

(****)

Next, we use the definition of a jump of function f (t) given by the formula (recall eqn (7.4.123)) [[f ]] (t) = f (t − 0) − f (t + 0)

t ≥ 0,

from which, on account of (∗ ) and (∗∗ ), we obtain [[S]] (t02 ) = 0,

[[θ]] (t02 ) = 0.

Also, in view of (∗∗∗ ) and (∗∗∗∗ ), we get (2)

(3)

[[S]] (t01 ) = S2 (t01 ) − S2 (t01 ) = 0, (2)

(3)

[[θ]] (t01 ) = θ2 (t01 ) − θ2 (t01 ) = 0, which implies that the pair [S(t), θ(t)] is continuous for t = t01 and t = t02 . Hence, using eqns (7.6.65) and (7.6.109), we infer that the following theorem holds true: Theorem 7.3 A stress–temperature response of the half-space to a laser irradiation corresponding to the heat sources (7.6.32) is a superposition of the three disturbances one of which has a diffusion-type character (for every instant t > 0 it occupies the entire half-space x > 0), while the other two are plane waves propagating from the boundary x = 0 into the half-space at two different speeds vi ,

216


attenuations hi and convolution coefficients λi (i = 1, 2). Each of these disturbances is represented by a power series of the Neumann type involving Bessel functions. For a short laser pulse (b → ∞), a diffusion part of the temperature vanishes, while a diffusion part of the stress field is comparable to its wave part. In that particular case, the stress–temperature response of the half-space is a continuous function for every t ≥ 0. Remark 7.4 A generalization of the solution described in Section 7.6 to include the laser-induced heat of the form r(x, t) = Y (t) exp(−ax), where Y (t) = Y0 tn exp(−btm ),

(m > 0, n > 0, b > 0, a > 0, Y0 > 0),

was obtained in (Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 1993, 1994;). Also, an analysis of the laser-induced thermoelastic waves has been presented in (Strikverda and Scott, 1984; Tzou, 1997; Suh and Burger, 1998; Al-Nimr, and Al-Huniti, 2000; Wang and Xu, 2002; Al-Huniti, Al-Nimr, and Megdad, 2003; Tzou, Chen, and Beraun, 2005; El-Karamany and Ezzat, 2005; Al-Qahtani, Datta and Mukdadi, 2005; Yilbas and Ageeli, 2006; Al-Qahtani and Datta, 2008). Hyperbolic heat conduction in a rigid solid due to a mode-locked laser pulse train is discussed in (Hector et al., 1992). Remark 7.5 A mathematical theory related to the laser-solution obtained by Hetnarski and Ignaczak in 1994 (see Remark 7.4) was presented by the late Prof. Gaetano Fichera in (Fichera, 1997).

8 KIRCHHOFF-TYPE FORMULAS AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS IN GREEN–LINDSAY THEORY

8.1 Integral representations of fundamental solutions In Section 7.1 we presented the series forms of fundamental solutions of the GL theory for a 3D bounded region under the assumption that the eigenfunctions and eigenvalues of the operator −∇2 are known. We now demonstrate how one can obtain the Kirchhoff-type integral representations for both fundamental solutions. These representations will then be used to show that the fundamental solutions may also be obtained by solving a system of singular integral equations. According to the definition of Section 7.1, the ith fundamental solution in the G–L theory satisfies the relations (recall eqns (7.1.4)–(7.1.6)) ˆ i φi = 0 on B × [0, ∞), L

(8.1.1)

φi (·, 0) = φ˙ i (·, 0) = 0 on B,

(8.1.2)

φi = fi

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(8.1.3)

ˆ i (i = 1, 2) is the wave-like operator, defined by the formulas (7.1.2) and Here, L (7.1.3), while fi (i = 1, 2) is an arbitrary function defined on ∂B × [0, ∞). Let ˆ i defined on E3 × Ki = Ki (x, y; t) be the Green’s function for the operator L [0, ∞) and satisfying the relations ˆ i Ki (x, y; t) = −δ (x − y) δ (t) on E3 × (0, ∞), L

(8.1.4)

Ki (x, y; 0) = K˙ i (x, y; 0) = 0

(8.1.5)

on E3 for x = y,

Ki (x, y; t) → 0 for |x| → ∞ and ∀t > 0,

(8.1.6)

3

where y is a fixed point in E . Applying the Laplace transform to eqns (8.1.1) and (8.1.4), and using the homogeneous initial conditions (8.1.2) and (8.1.5), we obtain 2i φ¯i = 0

on B,

¯ i = −δ (x − y) on E3 , 2i K

(8.1.7) (8.1.8)

where (recall eqns (7.4.14) and (7.4.15)) 2i = ∇2 − s2i (p)

i = 1, 2

(8.1.9)

218

Kirchhoff-type formulas and integral equations in Green–Lindsay theory

and the functions s2i (p) are defined by the formula (7.4.15). ¯ i , and eqn (8.1.8) by φ¯i , subtracting one Multiplying eqn (8.1.7) through by K from another, and integrating over B, we obtain (y) φ¯i (y, p) = ¯ ¯i ∂ φi ∂K ¯ ¯ (x, p) − φi (x, p) (x, y; p) da (x) , Ki (x, y; p) ∂n ∂n

(8.1.10)

∂B

where

(y) =

1 for y ∈ B, 0 for y ∈ E3 − B.

(8.1.11)

A solution of eqn (8.1.8) vanishing at infinity takes the form ¯ i = 1 exp [−ρsi (p)] , K 4πρ

(8.1.12)

ρ = |x − y| .

(8.1.13)

where

Employing the same notation as in Section 7.4 (recall eqns (7.4.25), (7.4.45) and (7.4.73)), that is, ¯i (ρ, p) = exp [−ρsi (p)] , N

(8.1.14)

ρi = ρ/υi ,

(8.1.15)

we reduce eqn (8.1.12) to the form ¯i = K

1 4πυi

¯ Ni i = 1, 2. ρi

(8.1.16)

Let us first consider the case i = 1. Then, applying the inverse Laplace transform to eqn (8.1.16) at i = 1 we obtain [recall eqn (7.4.62)], % 1 $ −1 ρ1 exp (−h1 ρ1 ) δ (ζ1 ) + exp (−h1 t) N1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 ) , 4πυ1 (8.1.17) where (recall eqn (7.4.97)) K1 (ρ1 , t) =

∞ n ˆn . J1 (ˆ z1 ) (−) λ 1 n−1 + h(1) Jn−1 (z1 ) ds. N1 (ρ1 , t) = −ω1 n (t − s) z1 n−1 zˆ1 n! ω 1 n=1 t

ρ1

(8.1.18) For i = 2, on account of eqn (8.1.16), we find (recall eqns (7.4.71) and (7.4.98)) K2 (ρ2 , t) =

% 1 $ −1 ρ2 exp (−h2 ρ2 ) δ (ζ2 ) + exp (−h2 t) N2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 ) , 4πυ2 (8.1.19)

Integral representations of fundamental solutions

219

where ∞ . ˆn I1 (ˆ z2 ) λ n−1 2 ˆ2 + h(2) In−1 (z2 ) ds. (8.1.20) N2 (ρ2 , t) = ω n (t − s) z2 n−1 zˆ2 n! ω ˆ 2 n=1 t

ρ2

All the symbols appearing in the above formulas have been explained in Section 7.4. In particular ζi = t − ρi ,

(8.1.21)

and the surface ζi = 0 is a carrier of the singularity of kernel Ki (ρi , t). Furthermore, (recall formulas (7.4.100)) !1/2 !1/2 , z2 = ω ˆ 2 s2 − ρ22 , z1 = ω1 s2 − ρ21 (8.1.22) 2 ! ! 1/2 1/2 , zˆ2 = ω ˆ 2 t2 − ρ22 . zˆ1 = ω1 t − ρ21 Employing the formulas (7.4.17)–(7.4.22) for the partial derivatives ∂Ki /∂ρi , we obtain ∂K1 = exp (−h1 t) N1 (ρ1 , t) H (ζ1 ) ∂ρ1 (8.1.23) ω 1 −1 ˙ 1 −2 −1 − ρ1 − h1 ρ1 δ (ζ1 ) exp (−h1 ρ1 ) , −ρ1 δ (ζ1 ) + + 4πυ1 2 ∂K2 = exp (−h2 t) N2 (ρ2 , t) H (ζ2 ) ∂ρ2 ˆ2 1 −2 −1 ˙ (ζ2 ) − ω + ρ −ρ−1 δ (ζ + + h ρ ) exp (−h2 ρ2 ) . δ 2 2 2 2 2 4πυ2 2

(8.1.24)

Here, the prime indicates a derivative with respect to ρi . Thus, applying the inverse Laplace transform to eqn (8.1.10) and employing eqns (8.1.17), (8.1.19), (8.1.23) and (8.1.24) we obtain 1 1 1 ∂φ1 ∂ [φ1 ]1 exp (−h1 ρ1 ) − (y) φ1 (y, t) = 4πυ1 ρ1 ∂n 1 ∂n ρ1 ∂B∩S(y,υ1 t)

∂ρ1 1 ∂ρ1 ∂φ1 [φ1 ]1 + da (x) ∂n ρ1 ∂n ∂t 1  t  1 exp (−h1 τ ) +  4πυ1 ρ1 ∂B∩S(y,υ1 t)   ∂φ1 ∂N1 (x, t − τ ) − φ1 (x, t − τ ) (ρ1 , τ ) dτ da (x) , × N1 (ρ1 , τ )  ∂n ∂n

+

h1 ω1 − ρ1 2

(8.1.25)

220


and (y) φ2 (y, t) =

1 4πυ2

exp (−h2 ρ2 ) ∂B∩S(y,υ2 t)

1 1 ∂φ2 ∂ [φ2 ]2 − ρ2 ∂n 2 ∂n ρ2

1 ∂ρ2 ∂φ2 ∂ρ2 [φ2 ]2 + da (x) ∂n ρ2 ∂n ∂t 2  t  1 + exp (−h2 τ )  4πυ2 ρ ∂B∩S(y,υ2 t) 2   ∂φ2 ∂N2 (x, t − τ ) − φ2 (x, t − τ ) (ρ2 , τ ) dτ da (x) . × N2 (ρ2 , τ )  ∂n ∂n

+

h2 ω ˆ2 + ρ2 2

(8.1.26) Here, [φ]i denotes the retarded value φ (x, t − ρi ) of a function φ (x, t) relative to the point y. Also, S (y, d) stands for an open ball centered at y having radius d, that is % $ (8.1.27) S (y, d) = x ∈ E 3 : |x − y| < d . Equations (8.1.25) and (8.1.26) are the Kirchhoff-type formulas for the fundamental solutions φ1 and φ2 in the G–L theory. In the case where the wave-like ˆ i (i = 1, 2) reduce to the classical wave operators with speeds υi , that operators L ˆ i = 0, these formulas turn into classical Kirchhoff formulas. is where hi = 0 and λ Let t > 0 be a fixed time instant, and let Bi (t) be the set: Bi (t) = {y ∈ B : y does not belong to a boundary layer of width υi t} . (8.1.28) Then, on account of eqns (8.1.25) and (8.1.26), we obtain φi (y, t) = 0, ∀y ∈ Bi (t) , ∀t > 0.

(8.1.29)

Therefore, a theorem on the domain of influence for the fundamental solution φi holds true, stating that for a fixed instant t > 0 a domain of influence due to the boundary disturbance fi (recall eqn (8.1.3)) is a boundary layer of width υi t, i.e. the set B − Bi (t). Note also that analogous formulas of the Kirchhoff type hold for the “exte(e) (e) rior” fundamental solutions φi of the G–L theory. In that case, φi satisfies 3 ¯ ¯ and eqn (8.1.1) on (E − B) × [0, ∞), the initial conditions (8.1.2) on E3 − B, the boundary condition (8.1.3) on ∂B × [0, ∞). The integral representations for (e) (e) the “exterior” fundamental solutions φ1 and φ2 are obtained upon replacing ∂/∂n by −∂/∂n in eqns (8.1.25) and (8.1.26), and replacing the function (y) ¯ by the characteristic function of the set E3 − B. (e)

For the “exterior” fundamental solution φi there also holds a theorem on the domain of influence, which is analogous to that for the “interior” fundamental solution φi .

Integral equations for fundamental solutions

221

8.2 Integral equations for fundamental solutions We now show that the “exterior” as well as “interior” fundamental solutions of the G–L theory may be found once we can solve a singular integral equation. (i) (e) Let φi and φi denote, respectively, the “interior” and “exterior” fundamental solutions. It follows from the formulas (8.1.10) and (8.1.16) that the following integral representations are true for these solutions (i)

(y) φi (y, t) =

(i) ∂φi ∂Ki (i) (x, t) − φi (x, t) ∗ (x, y; t) da (x) , Ki (x, y; t) ∗ ∂n ∂n

(8.2.1)

∂B

and (e)

0 (y) φi (y, t) =

(e) ∂φi ∂Ki (e) (x, t) − φi (x, t) ∗ (x, y; t) da (x) , Ki (x, y; t) ∗ ∂n ∂n

−

(8.2.2)

∂B

where (y) and 0 (y) denote, respectively, the characteristic functions of the sets ¯ that is B and E3 − B, 1 for y ∈ B, (y) = (8.2.3) ¯ 0 for y ∈ E3 − B, 0 for y ∈ B, 0 (y) = (8.2.4) ¯ 1 for y ∈ E3 − B. Furthermore, the kernel Ki = Ki (x, y; t) appearing in the formulas (8.2.1) and (8.2.2) is defined by eqns (8.1.17) and (8.1.19). Since, on account of the definition of the “interior” and “exterior” fundamental solution (i)

(e)

φi = φi

= fi on ∂B × [0, ∞),

(8.2.5)

where fi is a known function, therefore, adding eqns (8.2.1) and (8.2.2) yields φi (y, t) = Ki (x, y; t) ∗ σi (x, t) da (x) ∀ (y, t) ∈ (E3 − ∂B) × [0, ∞), (8.2.6) ∂B

where

φi (y, t) =

(i)

(y, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞), ¯ × [0, ∞), (y, t) for (y, t) ∈ (E3 − B)

φi (y, t) for (e) φi

and σi (x, t) =

∂ (i) (e) φi (x, t) − φi (x, t) . ∂n

(8.2.7)

(8.2.8)

222


It may be shown that the function φi (y, t) defined by eqn (8.2.6) possesses properties of the potential of a single layer, and, in particular, that is a continuous function for every (y, t) ∈ E3 × [0, ∞). Thus, taking the point y in eqn (8.2.6) to the boundary ∂B and employing the boundary condition (8.2.5), we find the following singular integral equation for the “density” σi Ki (x, y; t) ∗ σi (x, t) da (x) = fi (y, t) ∀ (y, t) ∈ ∂B × [0, ∞). (8.2.9) ∂B

The knowledge of σi satisfying eqn (8.2.9) allows the determination of the “interior” and “exterior” fundamental solutions of the G–L theory with the help of formula (8.2.6). Employing eqns (8.1.17) and (8.1.19), and using the notation ϕi (y, t) = 4πυi fi (y, t) , one can reduce eqn (8.2.9) to the form   exp(−h ρ ) i i ϕi (y, t) = σi (x, t − ρi )  ρi ∂B∩S(y,υi t)  t  + exp (−hi τ ) Ni (ρi , τ ) σi (x, t − τ ) dτ da (x) . 

(8.2.10)

(8.2.11)

ρi

Since the function Ni (ρi , τ ) in eqn (8.2.11) is bounded for every (ρi , τ ) ∈ [0, ∞) × [ρi , t], the kernel of this integral equation has a singularity of order ρ−1 i for ρi → 0 and for every t > 0. 8.3 Integral representation of a solution to a central system of equations We now derive integral representations of Kirchhoff type for the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the relations (recall eqns (7.2.1)–(7.2.3))

∂ 1 + t0 ∂t

Γφ = 0 on B × [0, ∞), ∂2 2 ϑ= ∇ − 2 φ ∂t

(8.3.1)

φ (·, 0) = φ˙ (·, 0) = 0 on B, ϑ (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (·, 0) = 0

(8.3.2)

φ = f, ϑ = g on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(8.3.3)

Here, f and g are given functions and Γ is the central operator of the G–L theory (recall eqn (7.4.3)) ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂ − ∇2 1 + t0 . (8.3.4) ∇2 − t0 2 − Γ = ∇2 − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t

Integral representation of a solution to a central system of equations

223

Let (φN , ϑN ) be a pair of the Nowacki type – that is, a pair of scalar fields defined on E3 × [0, ∞) and satisfying the conditions (recall eqns (7.4.1) and (7.4.2)) 0 ∂ δ (x − y) δ (t) ΓφN = − 1 + t ∂t on E3 × [0, ∞), (8.3.5) 2 ∂ ∂ 0 2 1+t ϑ N = ∇ − 2 φN ∂t ∂t φN (x, y; 0) = φ˙ N (x, y; 0) = 0 on E3 and for x = y, ˙ ϑN (x, y; 0) = ϑN (x, y; 0) = 0

(8.3.6)

(φN , vN ) → (0, 0) as |x| → ∞ ∀t > 0.

(8.3.7)

Here, y is a fixed point in E3 . It follows from eqns (8.3.1) and (8.3.2) that the potential φ satisfies the initial conditions (recall eqn (7.2.4)) ∂kφ (·, 0) = 0 on B ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3. ∂tk

(8.3.8)

Similarly, on account of eqns (8.3.5) and (8.3.6), we obtain (recall eqn (7.4.9)) ∂ k φN (x, y; 0) = 0 on E3 and for x = y ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3. ∂tk

(8.3.9)

Applying the Laplace transform to the system (8.3.1) and employing the homogeneous initial conditions (8.3.2) and (8.3.8), yields 21 22 φ¯ = 0 on B, 1 + t0 p ϑ¯ = ∇2 − p2 φ¯

(8.3.10)

2i = ∇2 − s2i (p) ,

(8.3.11)

where

and the functions si (p) are defined by the formulas (7.4.15). Similarly, applying the Laplace transform to the system (8.3.5) and using the conditions (8.3.6) and (8.3.9), leads to 21 22 φ¯N = − 1 + t0 p δ (x − y) on E3 . (8.3.12) 1 + t0 p ϑ¯N = ∇2 − p2 φ¯N ¯ Furthermore, we multiply eqn (8.3.10)1 through by φ¯N and eqn (8.3.12)1 by φ. Subtracting the resulting equations one from another, upon integration over B, we find 0 ¯ φ¯N 21 22 φ¯ − φ¯ 21 22 φ¯N dυ (x) . (8.3.13) 1 + t p (y) φ (y, p) = B

224


Since

21 22 = ∇4 − s21 + s22 ∇2 + s21 s22 ,

(8.3.14)

there follows φ¯N 21 22 φ¯ − φ¯ 21 22 φ¯N = ¯ 2 φ¯N . φ¯N ∇4 φ¯ − φ¯ ∇4 φ¯N − s21 + s22 φ¯N ∇2 φ¯ − φ∇

(8.3.15)

Also, note that for arbitrary smooth scalar fields ϕ and ψ defined on B we have the integral identities 4 ϕ∇ ϕ − ψ∇4 ϕ dυ (x) = B ∂ 2 2 ∂ψ 2 ∂ϕ ∂ 2 ∇ ψ −ψ ∇ ϕ + ∇ ϕ − ∇ ψ da(x), ϕ ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂n

(8.3.16)

∂B

and

∂ϕ ∂ψ −ψ da (x) . ϕ∇ ψ − ψ∇ ϕ dυ (x) = ϕ ∂n ∂n

2

2

B

(8.3.17)

∂B

Setting ϕ = φ¯N and ψ = φ¯ in these relations, on account of eqns (8.3.13) and (8.3.15), we obtain ∂ φ¯ ¯ ∂ φ¯N −φ da (x) φ¯N 1 + t0 p (y) φ¯ (y, p) = − s21 + s22 ∂n ∂n ∂B ∂ 2 ¯ ¯ ∂ 2 ¯ 2 ¯ ∂ φ¯ 2 ¯ ∂ φ¯N ¯ + ∇ φ −φ ∇ φN + ∇ φN − ∇ φ da (x) . φN ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂B

(8.3.18) Since (recall eqns (7.3.10)2 and (7.3.12)2 ) ∇2 φ¯ = p2 φ¯ + 1 + t0 p ϑ¯ on ∂B, and

∇2 φ¯N = p2 φ¯N + 1 + t0 p ϑ¯N on ∂B,

(8.3.19)

(8.3.20)

from eqn (8.3.18) we obtain

¯ ¯ ¯ N ∂ φ − φ¯ ∂ KN K ∂n ∂n

∂B

where

¯ (y) φ (y,p)= ∂ ϑ¯ ¯ ∂ φ¯N ¯ da (x) + −ϑ da (x) , φN ∂n ∂n

(8.3.21)

∂B

2 2 2 ¯ N = 2p − s1 + s2 φ¯N + ϑ¯N . K 1 + t0 p

(8.3.22)


225

¯ Its inverse Laplace transform Equation (8.3.21) is an integral representation of φ. is the Kirchhoff-type formula for φ. Prior to deriving it we first introduce an ¯ analogous formula for the function ϑ. Applying the operation (∇2 − p2 ) to both sides of eqn (8.3.21), and employing the formulas (8.3.10)2 , (8.3.19), (8.3.20) and (8.3.22), we obtain the following integral representation for ϑ¯ ∂ ϑ¯ ¯ ∂ ϑ¯N ¯ ¯ −ϑ da (x) ϑN (y) ϑ (y, p) = ∂n ∂n ∂B (8.3.23) ¯N ∂ φ¯ ¯ ∂ H ¯ −φ da (x) , HN + ∂n ∂n ∂B

where ¯N = H

! 1 ∇2 − s21 + s22 − p2 ϑ¯N . 1 + t0 p

(8.3.24)

The kernels φ¯N and ϑ¯N appearing in eqns (8.3.21) and (8.3.23) are given by (recall eqns (7.4.22) and (7.4.23)) −1 ! 1 1 1 1 + t0 p ¯ ¯ ¯ 2 (ρ, p) , M1 (ρ, p) − M − (8.3.25) φN (ρ, p) = 4πρ υ12 υ22 p and

! 1 ¯ ˆ ¯2 (ρ, p) + α ¯ 1 (ρ, p) − M ¯ 2 (ρ, p) , N1 (ρ, p) + N ˆ + βp M ϑ¯N (ρ, p) = 8πρ (8.3.26) in which ρ = |x − y| .

(8.3.27)

¯ i and N ¯i appearing in eqns (8.3.25) and (8.3.26) are defined The functions M by eqns (7.4.24) and (7.4.25), while the symbols υi , α ˆ and βˆ are given by eqns (7.4.26) and (7.4.27). Employing the definition of si (p) according to eqn (7.4.15), we obtain 1 1 ˆ p(ˆ α + pβ), (8.3.28) 2p2 − s21 + s22 = − − υ12 υ22 from which, on account of eqns (8.3.22), (8.3.25) and (8.3.26), we find the kernel ¯ N appearing in eqn (8.3.21) in the following form K ! ˆ ¯1 (ρ, p) + N ¯2 (ρ, p) − α ¯ 1 (ρ, p) − M ¯ 2 (ρ, p) . ¯ N (ρ, p) = 1 N ˆ + βp M K 8πρ (8.3.29) ¯ N can be retransformed by the method It is seen that the functions φ¯N , ϑ¯N and K ¯ N defined by the formula (8.3.24) of Section 7.4. In order to reduce the function H

226


to a form that can be retransformed by the same method, we first note that ! 2i ρ−1 exp (−ρsi ) = 0 for x = y, (8.3.30) and, given eqns (8.3.24) and (8.3.26), we find 2 2 2 2 s s − p − p 1 [exp(−ρs1 ) − exp(−ρs2 )] 1 2 ¯N = − H . 4πρ 1 + t0 p s21 − s22 Now, since

2 s1 − p2 s22 − p2 = s21 s22 − s21 + s22 p2 + p4 ,

and, in view of the definition of si (p) (recall eqn (7.4.15)) ! s21 + s22 = p (1 + ) + 1 + t0 + t0 p , s21 s22 then

3

= p (1 + t0 p) ,

(8.3.31)

(8.3.32)

(8.3.33) (8.3.34)

2 s1 − p2 s22 − p2 = −p3 (1 + t0 p) .

(8.3.35)

Hence, since exp(−ρs1 ) − exp(−ρs2 ) = s21 − s22

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1

1¯ ¯2 , M1 − M p

¯ N appearing in eqn (8.3.23) we obtain for the function H −1 ! 1 1 ¯ 1 (ρ, p) − M ¯ 2 (ρ, p) . ¯ − 2 p2 M HN (ρ, p) = 4πρ υ12 υ2

(8.3.36)

(8.3.37)

Thus, all the kernels appearing in the integral representations (8.3.21) and (8.3.22) may be inverted using the method of Section 7.4. This leads to the formal representation of the Kirchhoff type for a pair (φ, ϑ) ∂KN ∂φ −φ∗ da (x) KN ∗ (y) φ (y, t) = ∂n ∂n ∂B (8.3.38) ∂φN ∂ϑ −ϑ∗ da(x), + φN ∗ ∂n ∂n ∂B

and

∂ϑN ∂ϑ −ϑ∗ ϑN ∗ ∂n ∂n

(y) ϑ (y, t) =

∂B

∂HN ∂φ −φ∗ HN ∗ ∂n ∂n

+ ∂B

da (x)

(8.3.39) da(x).


227

Here, the functions KN = KN (x, y; t) , ϑN = ϑN (x, y; t) , φN = φN (x, y; t) and HN = HN (x, y; t) are defined by the formulas 1 ∂ N1 + N2 − α (M1 − M2 ) , ˆ + βˆ 8πρ ∂t 1 ∂ ˆ N1 + N2 + α (M1 − M2 ) , ϑN = ˆ+β 8πρ ∂t

KN =

φN

1 = 4πρ

HN

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2 = 4πρ

−1 0 ∂ (M1 − M2 ) , ∗ 1+t ∂t

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

−1

∂2 (M1 − M2 ) , ∂t2

(8.3.40)

(8.3.41)

(8.3.42)

(8.3.43)

in which N1 = N1 (x, y; t) , N2 = N2 (x, y; t) , M1 = M1 (x, y; t) and M2 = M2 (x, y; t) are defined, respectively, by the formulas (7.4.62), (7.4.71), (7.4.81) and (7.4.85). Of course, the formulas (8.3.38) and (8.3.39) may also be written in the following form φ = φ1 + φ2 ϑ = ϑ1 + ϑ2

on B × [0, ∞),

(8.3.44)

where , , + + (i) (i) ∂KN ∂φN ∂φ ∂ϑ (i) (i) −φ∗ da (x) + −ϑ∗ da (x) , KN ∗ φN ∗ φi = ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂B

∂B

(8.3.45) , , + + (i) (i) ∂ϑN ∂HN ∂ϑ ∂φ (i) (i) ϑi = −ϑ∗ da (x) + −φ∗ da (x) . ϑN ∗ HN ∗ ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂n ∂B

∂B

(8.3.46) (i)

(i)

(i)

(i)

Here, the functions KN , ϑN , φN and HN are defined by the formulas (i) KN (i)

ϑN

1 ∂ ˆ Pi , Qi ∓ α = ˆ+β 8πυi ∂t 1 ∂ Pi , Qi ± α = ˆ + βˆ 8πυi ∂t

(8.3.47) (8.3.48)

228


(i)

−1 0 1 1 t + 1∗ Pi , − 2 2 υ1 υ2 −1 2 1 1 ∂ =± − 2 Pi , 4πυi υ12 υ2 ∂t2

φN = ± (i)

HN

1 4πυi

(8.3.49) (8.3.50)

in which Pi = exp (−hi t) Mi (ρi , t) H (ζi ) , Qi = Mi (ρi , ρi ) exp (−hi ρi ) δ (ζi ) + exp (−hi t) Ni (ρi , t) H (ζi ) ,

(8.3.51) (8.3.52)

with the functions Mi and Ni (i = 1, 2) being defined by eqns (7.4.95)–(7.4.98). The upper (respectively, lower) sign in the formulas (8.3.47)–(8.3.50) stands for i = 1 (i = 2). With the notation (0)

Mi

= Mi (ρi , ρi ) ,

(8.3.53)

and in view of the smoothness, i.e. differentiability of Mi (ρi , t) and Ni (ρi , t) ∀ (ρi , t) ∈ (0, ∞) × (ρi , ∞), on account of eqns (8.3.47)–(8.3.52), we obtain 1 (0) 1 ∓ βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ (ζi ) 8πvi ˙i∓ α + exp (−hi t) Mi ∓ βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi H (ζi ) ,

(8.3.54)

1 (0) 1 ± βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ (ζi ) 8πυi ˙i± α + exp (−hi t) Mi ± βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi H (ζi ) ,

(8.3.55)

(i)

KN =

(i)

ϑN =

(i)

φN = ±

1 4πυi

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1

t0 + 1∗ [exp (−hi t) Mi H (ζi )] ,

−1 1 1 (0) exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ˙ (ζi ) − υ12 υ22 (0) (0) ˙ δ (ζi ) − h M + exp (−hi ρi ) M i i i ¨ i − 2hiM ˙ i + h2 Mi H (ζi ) , + exp (−hi t) M i

(i)

HN = ±

4πυi

(8.3.56)

(8.3.57)

where ˙ (0) = M ˙ i (ρi , ρi ) . M i

(8.3.58)


229

The normal derivatives of the functions (8.3.54)–(8.3.57) are found as follows (i) ∂KN 1 ∂ρi (0) = − 1 ∓ βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ˙ (ζi ) ∂n 8πυi ∂n ∂ (0) (0) (0) ˆ ˆ ˙ (0) M δ (ζi ) − exp (−hi ρi ) Ni ∓ βˆM ∓ α ˆ − h − 1 ∓ β − h β M i i i i i ∂ρi ˙ i ∓ α + exp (−hi t) Ni ∓ βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi H (ζi ) ,

(8.3.59) (i) ∂ϑN 1 ∂ρi (0) = − 1 ± βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ˙ (ζi ) ∂n 8πυi ∂n ∂ (0) (0) (0) ˆ ˆ ˙ (0) ± α M δ (ζi ) − exp (−hi ρi ) Ni ± βˆM ˆ − h − 1 ± β − h β M i i i i i ∂ρi ˆ ˙± α H (ζ + exp (−hi t) Ni ± βˆM ˆ − h ) , β M i i i i

(8.3.60) (i)

×

∂φN 1 =± ∂n 4πυi

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

(0) − exp (−hi ρi ) Mi δ (ζi )

+

−1

t0 + 1∗

∂ρi ∂n

exp (−hi t) Mi H

(8.3.61)

(ζi ) ,

−1 (i) ∂HN 1 1 ∂ρi =± exp (−hi ρi ) − 2 ∂n 4πυi υ12 υ2 ∂n (0) ˙ (0) − ∂ M(0) δ˙ (ζi ) × −Mi δ¨ (ζ1 ) − M i ∂ρi i ∂ ˙ (0) (0) (0) (0) ¨ ˙ Mi − hi Mi δ (ζi ) − Mi − hiMi − ∂ρi −1 1 1 ∂ρi exp (−hi t) ± − 2 4πυi υ12 υ2 ∂n ¨ i − 2hiM ˙ i + h2 M H (ζi ) . × M i i

(8.3.62)

In the above formulas the prime stands for differentiation with respect to ρi , and (0)

Ni

¨ (0) = M ¨ i (ρi , ρi ) . = Ni (ρi , ρi ) , M i

(8.3.63)

Next, we introduce the notations (0)

Ki

(ρi ) =

1 (0) 1 ∓ βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi , 8πυi

(8.3.64)

230


1 (0) ˆ M(0) ˙ (0) (ρi ) = exp (−hi ρi ) Ni ∓ βˆM ∓ α ˆ − h β i i i 8πυi ∂ (0) − 1 ∓ βˆ − hi Mi , ∂ρi 1 ˙i∓ α Ki (ρi , t) = exp (−hi t) Ni ∓ βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi , 8πυi 1 (0) (0) 1 ± βˆ exp (−hi ρi ) Mi , θi (ρi ) = 8πυi 1 (1) (0) (0) ˙ (0) θi (ρi ) = exp (−hi ρi ) Ni ± βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi i ± α 8πυi ∂ (0) ˆ − 1±β − hi Mi , ∂ρi 1 ˙i± α θi (ρi , t) = exp (−hi t) Ni ± βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi , 8πυi −1 1 t0 1 (0) (0) ϕi (ρi ) = ± − exp (−hi ρi ) Mi , 4πυi υ12 υ22 −1 1 1 1 ϕi (ρi , t) = ± − 2 4πυi υ12 υ2   t × t0 exp (−hi t) Mi (ρi , t) + exp (−hi u) Mi (ρi , u) du ,

(1) Ki

(8.3.65)

(8.3.66) (8.3.67)

(8.3.68)

(8.3.69) (8.3.70)

(8.3.71)

ρi

−1 1 1 (0) − exp (−hi ρi ) Mi , 4πυi υ12 υ22 −1 (0) 1 1 (1) ˙ i − hi M(0) , Hi (ρi ) = ± − exp (−hi ρi ) M i 2 2 4πυi υ1 υ2 −1 1 1 ∂ (0) (2) (0) ˙ , − 2 exp (−hi ρi ) Mi − M Hi (ρi ) = ± 4πυi υ12 υ2 ∂ρi i −1 1 1 (3) Hi (ρi ) = ± − 2 exp (−hi ρi ) 4πυi υ12 υ2 (0) (0) ˙ ¨ (0) − hi M(0) − ∂ M , × M − h M i i i i i ∂ρi −1 1 1 ˙ i + h2i Mi . ¨ i − 2hiM − 2 exp (−hi t) M Hi (ρi , t) = ± 2 4πυi υ1 υ2 (0)

Hi

(ρi ) = ±

(0)

(1)

(0)

(1)

(0)

(0)

(1)

(2)

(8.3.72) (8.3.73) (8.3.74)

(8.3.75)

(8.3.76) (3)

Clearly, the kernels Ki , Ki , θi , θi , ϕi , Hi , Hi , Hi and Hi are smooth functions for ρi > 0. Moreover, the kernels Ki , θi , ϕi and Hi are


231

smooth functions for every (ρi , t) ∈ (0, ∞) × [ρi , ∞). Hence, on account of the formulas (8.3.45) and (8.3.46), we infer that the pair (φi , ϑi ) is represented by the following surface integrals

(0)

Ki

(y) φi (y, t) =

(ρi )

∂φ ∂n

+ i

∂ρi ∂φ ∂n ∂y i

∂ρi (1) (0) Ki (ρi ) [φ]i + ϕi (ρi ) [ϑ]i da (x) + ∂n ∂B∩S(y,υi t)

+

  ∂Ki ∂φ (x, t − τ ) − (ρi , τ ) φ (x, t − τ ) dτ da (x) Ki (ρi , τ )  ∂n ∂n

 t  

∂B∩S(y,υi t)

ρi

 t 

+

 ∂B∩S(y,υi t)

ϕi (ρi , τ ) ρi

 

∂ϕi ∂ϑ (x, t − τ ) − (ρi , τ ) ϑ (x, t − τ ) dτ da (x)  ∂n ∂n (8.3.77)

and ∂ϑ ∂ρi ∂ϑ (ρi ) + (y) ϑi (y, t) = ∂n i ∂n ∂y i ∂B∩S(y,υi t) ∂ρi (1) ∂2φ ∂ρi ∂ 2 φ (3) (0) θ (ρi ) [ϑ]i + Hi (ρi ) [φ]i + Hi (ρi ) + + ∂n i ∂n∂t i ∂n ∂t2 i

(1) +Hi

+

 ∂B∩S(y,υi t)

+

 t  

∂B∩S(y,υi t)

ρi

+ i

(2) Hi

∂ρi ∂φ da (x) (ρi ) ∂n ∂t i

Hi (ρi , τ ) ρi

  ∂θi ∂ϑ (x, t − τ ) − (ρi , τ ) ϑ (x, t − τ ) dτ da (x) θi (ρi , τ )  ∂n ∂n

 t 

∂φ (ρi ) ∂n

(0) θi

 

∂Hi ∂φ (x, t − τ ) − (ρi , τ ) φ (x, t − τ ) dτ da (x)  ∂n ∂n for i = 1, 2.

(8.3.78) Here, similarly to what was done in Section 8.1, the symbol [f ]i denotes the retarded value f (x, t − ρi ) of a function f (x, t) with respect to a point y. Also, S (y, υi t) denotes an open ball with its center at y and of radius υi t. With φi and ϑi defined, respectively, by the integrals (8.3.77) and (8.3.78), the relations (8.3.44) are formulas of the Kirchhoff type for the central system of eqns (8.3.1) with conditions (8.3.2). It follows from these formulas that, for a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the relations (8.3.1) and (8.3.2), for any time t > 0, the domain of influence of a thermomechanical loading applied at the boundary, specified by

232


the pair (f, g) appearing in the condition (8.3.3), is a boundary layer of width υ2 t (υ2 > υ1 ). 8.4 Integral equations for a potential–temperature problem Let (φ(I) , ϑ(I) ) be an “interior” solution of PTP in the G–L theory satisfying the relations 1 + t0

∂ ∂t

Γφ(I) = 0 on B × [0, ∞), ∂2 ϑ(I) = ∇2 − 2 φ(I) ∂t

φ(I) (·, 0) = φ˙ (I) (·, 0) = 0 ¯ on B, ϑ(I) (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (I) (·, 0) = 0,

(8.4.1)

(8.4.2)

and φ(I) = f, ϑ(I) = g

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(8.4.3)

Analogously, let (φ(E) , ϑ(E) ) be an “exterior” solution of PTP in the G–L theory satisfying the relations 1 + t0

∂ ∂t

Γφ(E) = 0 ¯ × [0, ∞), on E3 − B ∂2 (E) 2 (E) ϑ = ∇ − 2 φ ∂t φ(E) (·, 0) = φ˙ (E) (·, 0) = 0, ¯ on E3 − B, ϑ(E) (·, 0) = ϑ˙ (E) (·, 0) = 0,

(8.4.4)

(8.4.5)

and φ(E) = f, ϑ(E) = g

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(8.4.6)

Here, B is a bounded domain in E3 , while f and g are functions prescribed on ∂B × [0, ∞). In accordance with the formulas (8.3.38) and (8.3.39), the pair (φ(I) , ϑ(I) ) may be represented in the form KN ∗

(y) φ(I) (y, t) =

∂KN ∂φ(I) −f ∗ ∂n ∂n

∂B

∂φN ∂ϑ(I) −g∗ φN ∗ ∂n ∂n

+ ∂B

da (x) (8.4.7)

da (x) ,

Integral equations for a potential–temperature problem

ϑN ∗

(y) ϑ(I) (y, t) =

∂ϑN ∂ϑ(I) −g∗ ∂n ∂n

∂B

∂HN ∂φ(I) −f ∗ HN ∗ ∂n ∂n

+

233

da (x)

(8.4.8) da (x) .

∂B

Similarly, there hold these integral representations for the pair (φ(E) , ϑ(E) ) 0 (y) φ(E) (y, t) = −

KN ∗

∂KN ∂φ(E) −f ∗ ∂n ∂n

∂B

∂φN ∂ϑ(E) −g∗ φN ∗ ∂n ∂n

− ∂B

0 (y) ϑ(E) (y, t) = −

ϑN ∗

∂HN ∂φ(E) −f ∗ HN ∗ ∂n ∂n

−

da (x)

(8.4.9) da (x) ,

∂ϑN ∂ϑ(E) −g∗ ∂n ∂n

∂B

da (x)

(8.4.10) da (x) .

∂B

(y) and 0 (y) in eqns (8.4.7)–(8.4.10) are the characteristic functions of the sets ¯ respectively, that is B and E3 − B, (y) =

1 for

y ∈ B,

¯ 0 for y ∈ E3 − B, 0 for y ∈ B, 0 (y) = ¯ 1 for y ∈ E3 − B.

(8.4.11)

(8.4.12)

Furthermore, the kernels KN , ϑN , φN and HN are specified by the formulas (8.3.40)–(8.3.43). Now, adding eqn (8.4.7) to eqn (8.4.9) as well as eqn (8.4.8) to eqn (8.4.10), and introducing the notations ∂ (I) φ − φ(E) = µφ (x, t) ∂n ∀ (x, t) ∈ ∂B × [0, ∞), ∂ (I) (E) ϑ −ϑ = µϑ (x, t) ∂n

(8.4.13)

234


we obtain

(KN ∗ µφ + φN ∗ µϑ ) da (x)

φ (y, t) = ∂B

∀ (y, t) ∈ (E3 − ∂B) × [0, ∞),

(HN ∗ µφ + ϑN ∗ µϑ ) da (x)

ϑ (y, t) = ∂B

(8.4.14) where φ (y, t) =

(y, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞), ¯ × [0, ∞), (y, t) for (y, t) ∈ (E3 − B)

(8.4.15)

(y, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞), ¯ × [0, ∞). (y, t) for (y, t) ∈ (E3 − B)

(8.4.16)

φ(I) (y, t) for (E)

φ

and ϑ (y, t) =

ϑ(I) (y, t) for (E)

ϑ

One can show that the right-hand sides of eqn (8.4.14) are continuous functions ∀ (y, t) ∈ E3 × [0, ∞). Thus, passing with the point y in eqn (8.4.14) to the boundary, and using the conditions (8.4.3) or (8.4.6), we obtain the following integral equations for the unknown functions µφ and µϑ : [KN (x, y; t) ∗ µφ (x, t) + φN (x, y; t) ∗ µϑ (x, t)] da(x) = f (y, t) , ∂B

[HN (x, y; t) ∗ µφ (x, t) + ϑN (x, y; t) ∗ µϑ (x, t)] da(x) = g(y, t) ∂B

(8.4.17)

∀ (y, t) ∈ ∂B × [0, ∞).

Equations (8.3.17) represent a system of integral equations of the Fredholm type of the first kind. Knowing its solution, one can determine the unknown pairs (φ(I) , ϑ(I) ) and (φ(E) , ϑ(E) ) from the formula (8.4.14). In order to examine the character of singularities of the integral equations (8.4.17), observe that the kernels of these equations have the forms (recall eqns (8.3.54)–(8.3.57), (8.3.64), (8.3.66), (8.3.67), (8.3.69), (8.3.71), (8.3.72), (8.3.73) and (8.3.76)) KN =

2 .

(0)

Ki

(ρi ) δ (ζi ) + Ki (ρi , t) H (ζi ) ,

(8.4.18)

i=1

ϑN =

2 .

(0) θi (ρi ) δ (ζi ) + θi (ρi , t) H (ζi ) ,

i=1

(8.4.19)


φN =

2 .

235

ϕi (ρi , t) H (ζi ) ,

(8.4.20)

i=1

HN =

2 .

(0)

Hi

(1)

(ρi ) δ˙ (ζi ) + Hi

(ρi ) δ (ζi ) + Hi (ρi , t) H (ζi ) ,

(8.4.21)

i=1 (0)

(0)

(0)

(1)

where the kernels Ki , θi , Hi and Hi are smooth functions of ρi for every ρi > 0, while the kernels Ki (ρi , t) , θi (ρi , t) , ϕi (ρi , t), and Hi (ρi , t) are smooth functions for every (ρi , t) ∈ (0, ∞) × [ρi , ∞). Hence, using eqns (8.4.18)–(8.4.21), we reduce eqns (8.4.17) to the form  t 2  . (0) K (ρi ) [µφ ]i + Ki (ρi , τ ) µφ (x, t − τ ) dτ  i i=1

ρi

∂B∩S(y,υi t)

t ϕi (ρi , τ ) µϑ (x, t − τ ) dτ

+ ρi 2 . i=1

 

(0)

Hi



  

(1)

(ρi ) [µ˙ φ ]i + Hi

(8.4.22) da (x) = f,

(0)

(ρi ) [µφ ]i + θi (ρi ) [µϑ ]i

∂B∩S(y,υi t)

t

t

+ Hi (ρi , τ ) µφ (x, t − τ ) dτ + ρi

θi (ρi , τ ) µϑ (x, t − τ ) dτ ρi

  

da (x) = g

∀ (y, t) ∈ ∂B × [0, ∞), (8.4.23)

where S (y, υi t) is an open ball centered at y and of radius υi t, while [µ]i denotes the retarded value µ (x, t − ρi ) of a function µ (x, t) with respect to the point y. We now show that the following theorem holds. (0)

(0)

(0)

(1)

Theorem 8.1 The kernels Ki (ρi ) , θi (ρi ) , Hi (ρi ) and Hi (ρi ) possess for ρi → 0, while Ki (ρi , t) , ϕi (ρi , t) , Hi (ρi , t) and the singularity of order ρ−1 i for ρi → 0 for every t > ρi . θi (ρi , t) possess the singularity of order ρ−1 i (0)

(0)

(0)

(1)

Proof. The functions Ki , θi , Hi and Hi are defined by the formulas (recall eqns (8.3.64), (8.3.67), (8.3.72) and (8.3.73)) 1 (0) 1 ∓ βˆ exp (−ρi hi ) Mi , 8πυi 1 (0) (0) θi (ρi ) = 1 ± βˆ exp (−ρi hi ) Mi , 8πυi (0)

Ki

(ρi ) =

(8.4.24) (8.4.25)

236


−1 1 1 (0) − exp (−ρi hi ) Mi , 4πυi υ12 υ22 −1 (0) 1 1 (1) ˙ i − hi M(0) , Hi (ρi ) = ± − exp (−ρ h ) M i i i 4πυi υ12 υ22 (0)

Hi

(ρi ) = ±

(8.4.26) (8.4.27)

where (0)

Mi

˙ (0) ˙ i (ρi , ρi ) = Mi (ρi , ρi ) , M =M i

(8.4.28)

and (recall eqns (7.4.95) and (7.4.96)) M1 (ρ1 , t) =

ρ−1 1 J0

(βζ1 ) exp (α1 ζ1 ) +

∞ n ˆn . (−) λ

n! n=0

1 ω1n−1

t

gn(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 ) ds,

ρ1

(8.4.29) M2 (ρ2 , t) =

ρ−1 2 J0

ˆn λ 2 (βζ2 ) exp (α2 ζ2 ) + gn(2) (t − s) z2n−1 In−1 (z2 ) ds. n−1 n! ω ˆ 1 n=0 ∞ .

t

ρ2

(8.4.30) In the following, in order to find the partial derivatives of Mi (ρi , t), we will take advantage of the following recurrence relations for the Bessel functions d n [z Jn (z)] = z n Jn−1 (z) , dz ! d −n z Jn (z) = −z −n Jn+1 (z) , dz

(8.4.31)

and k 1 d [z n In (z)] = z n−k In−k (z), z dz k ! 1 d z −n In (z) = z −n−k In+k (z), z dz

(n = 0, 1, 2, ...

(8.4.32)

k = 0, 1, 2, ...) .

˙ 1 , we obtain Applying the above formulas to computeM ˙ 1 (ρ1 , t) = ρ−1 [α1 J0 (βζ1 ) − βJ1 (βζ1 )] exp (α1 ζ1 ) M 1 ∞ ∞ . . ˆn ˆn (−)n λ (−)n λ 1 (1) 1 n−1 g (0) z ˆ J (ˆ z ) + g˙ n(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 )ds. + n−1 1 1 n−1 n n−1 n! ω n! ω 1 1 n=0 n=0 t

ρ1

(8.4.33)


237

Since (recall eqns (7.4.82) and (7.4.86)) (i)

g0 (0) = 1 (i)

gn (0) = 0

for n ≥ 1 and i = 1, 2,

(8.4.34)

the formula (8.4.33) reduces to the form z1 ) ˙ 1 (ρ1 , t) = ρ−1 [α1 J0 (βζ1 ) − βJ1 (βζ1 )] exp (α1 ζ1 ) − ω1 J1 (ˆ M 1 zˆ1 t ∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 + g˙ n(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 )ds. n−1 n! ω 1 n=0

(8.4.35)

ρ1

In a similar way, upon differentiation of eqn (8.4.30) with respect to t, we find I1 (ˆ z2 ) ˙ 2 (ρ2 , t) = ρ−1 [α2 J0 (βζ2 ) − βJ1 (βζ2 )] exp (α2 ζ2 ) + ω M ˆ2 2 zˆ2 t ∞ . ˆn λ 2 + g˙ n(2) (t − s) z2n−1 In−1 (z2 )ds. n−1 n! ω ˆ 2 n=0

(8.4.36)

ρ2

Furthermore, differentiating eqns (8.4.35) and (8.4.36) with respect to t and using the relations (i)

(i)

g˙ 0 (0) = αi , g˙ 1 (0) =

α (i) , g˙ n (0) = 0, n ≥ 2, 2

(8.4.37)

we obtain ¨ 1 (ρ1 , t) = M ρ−1 1

α12 −

β2 2

J0 (βζ1 ) − 2α1 βJ1 (βζ1 ) +

+t ω12

ˆ1 J2 (ˆ z1 ) J1 (ˆ z1 ) α λ J0 (ˆ − ω1 α1 − z1 ) 2 zˆ1 zˆ1 2

∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 g¨n(1) (t − s) z1n−1 Jn−1 (z1 ) ds, n−1 n! ω 1 n=0 t

+

β2 J2 (βζ1 ) exp (α1 ζ1 ) 2

ρ1

(8.4.38)

238


and ¨ 2 (ρ2 , t) = M ρ−1 2

α22

β2 − 2

β2 J0 (βζ2 ) − 2α2 βJ1 (βζ2 ) + J2 (βζ2 ) exp (α2 ζ2 ) 2

+t ω ˆ 22

+

∞ .

n=0

ˆ2 I2 (ˆ z2 ) I1 (ˆ z2 ) α λ I0 (ˆ +ω ˆ 2 α2 + z2 ) 2 zˆ2 zˆ2 2

(8.4.39)

ˆn λ 2 g¨n(1) (t − s) z2n−1 In−1 (z2 ) ds. n! ω ˆ 2n−1 t

ρ2

From the formulas (8.4.29) and (8.4.30) we obtain M1 = M1 (ρ1 , ρ1 ) = ρ−1 1 , (0)

(8.4.40)

M2 = M2 (ρ2 , ρ2 ) = ρ−1 2 , (0)

while, on account of eqns (8.4.35) and (8.4.36), there follows ˙ 1 (ρ1 , ρ1 ) = α1 ρ−1 − ω1 , ˙ (0) = M M 1 1 2 ω ˆ (0) 2 −1 ˙ ˙ M . 2 = M2 (ρ2 , ρ2 ) = α2 ρ2 − 2 (0)

(0)

(8.4.41)

(0)

(1)

and Hi (recall Hence, given the definitions of kernels Ki , θi , Hi eqns (8.4.24)–(8.4.27)), we infer that the first part of Theorem 8.1 is true. In order to prove the second part, note that (recall eqns (8.3.66), (8.3.71), (8.3.76) and (8.3.69)) 1 ˙i∓ α (8.4.42) exp (−hi t) Ni ∓ βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi , Ki (ρi , t) = 8πυi −1 1 1 1 ϕi (ρi , t) = ± − 4πυi υ12 υ22   (8.4.43) t 0   × t exp (−hi t) Mi (ρi , t) + exp (−hi u) Mi (ρi , u) du , ρi

Hi (ρi , t) = ±

4πυi

and θi (ρi , t) =

1 1 − 2 υ12 υ2

−1

¨ i − 2hiM ˙ i + h2i Mi , (8.4.44) exp (−hi t) M

1 ˙i± α exp (−hi t) Ni ± βˆM ˆ − hi βˆ Mi , 8πυi

(8.4.45)


239

˙ i and M ¨ i are specified by the formulas (8.4.29), where the functions Mi , M (8.4.30), (8.4.35), (8.4.36), (8.4.38) and (8.4.39), while the functions Ni (i = 1, 2) are of the form (recall eqns (7.4.97) and (7.4.98)) ∞

N1 (ρ1 , t) = −ω1

ˆn J1 (ˆ z1 ) . (−)n λ 1 + n−1 zˆ1 n! ω 1 n=0

t n−1 h(1) Jn−1 (z1 ) ds, (8.4.46) n (t − s) z1 ρ1

∞ ˆn I1 (ˆ z2 ) . λ n−1 2 ˆ2 + h(2) In−1 (z2 ) ds. N2 (ρ2 , t) = ω n (t − s) z2 n−1 zˆ2 n! ω ˆ 2 n=0 t

(8.4.47)

ρ2

Since Ni (ρi , t) possesses a finite limit for ρi → 0 and t > 0, while Mi (ρi , t) and ˙ i (ρi , t) have a singularity of order ρ−1 for ρi → 0 and for t > 0, then, on account M i for ρi → 0 of eqn (8.4.42), the kernel Ki (ρi , t) also has a singularity of order ρ−1 i and for t > 0. We similarly prove that the kernels ϕi (ρi , t) and θi (ρi , t) have singularities of for ρi → 0 and for t > 0. order ρ−1 i ˙ i and Mi all have ¨ i, M Finally, in view of eqn (8.4.44) and the fact that M for the same singularity, we conclude that the kernel Hi (ρi , t) behaves like ρ−1 i ρi → 0 and for t > 0. It follows from Theorem 8.1 that an “internal” as well as an “external” potential–temperature problem of the G–L theory may be reduced to that of a system of singular integral equations with kernels of the type of a kernel of a single layer potential for every t > 0. Closing this chapter, we observe that each of these two problems may also be reduced to a solution of the system of singular integral equations with kernels of the type of a kernel of a double-layer potential. In this case, kernels of the integral equations contain first derivatives of the functions Mi and Ni with respect to ρi , as well as higher-order mixed derivatives of Mi (recall eqns (8.3.59)–(8.3.62)). These derivatives may be determined using the recurrence formulas (8.4.31) and (8.4.32). In particular, we find ∞ . ˆn (−)n λ 1 (ρ1 , t) = p1 (ρ1 , t) − ρ1 gn(1) (t − s) z1n−2 Jn−2 (z1 ) ds, (8.4.48) n−2 n! ω 1 n=1 t

M1

ρ1

and M2 (ρ2 , t) = p2 (ρ2 , t) − ρ2

∞ . n=1

ˆn λ 2 gn(2) (t − s) z2n−2 In−2 (z2 ) ds, (8.4.49) n! ω ˆ 2n−2 t

ρ2

240


where

( p1 (ρ1 , t) =

−ρ−2 1

1 + α1 ρ1 −

(8.4.50)

ω ˆ2 2 ρ2 J0 (βζ2 ) 2 )

(8.4.51)

ˆ1 αˆ λ ρ2 J2 (βζ1 ) exp (α1 ζ1 ) , β+ λ ρ 1 1 J1 (βζ1 ) + β 2 1

−ρ1 and

p2 (ρ2 , t) = −ρ2

ω1 2 ρ J0 (βζ1 ) 2 1 )

−ρ−2 2

( 1 + α2 ρ2 +

ˆ2 αˆ λ ρ2 J2 (βζ2 ) exp (α2 ζ2 ) . β− λ ρ 2 2 J1 (βζ2 ) + β 2 2

It follows from the formulas (8.4.48)–(8.4.51) that the functions Mi (ρi , t) for ρi → 0 and every t > 0, which is (i = 1, 2) have a singularity of order ρ−2 i the singularity of the kernel of a double-layer potential.

9 THERMOELASTIC POLYNOMIALS

9.1 Recurrence relations It was shown in Chapter 7 that the fundamental solutions of the G–L theory may be determined with the help of polynomial sequences on the time axis, the so-called polynomials of thermoelasticity. We now give a number of recurrence relations describing these polynomials (Ignaczak, 1983)). First, let us consider a function hn (t; λ, µ) specified by the formula (recall (7.1.50)–(7.1.54))     n p n , hn (t; λ, µ) = L−1 (9.1.1)  (p + µ)2 + λ2  where L is the Laplace transform, p is the parameter of transformation, while µ and λ are positive-valued parameters; n = 1, 2, 3, . . . . The function (9.1.1) may be represented in the form (recall eqns (7.1.57)–(7.1.59)) hn (t; λ, µ) = e−µt (An cos λt + Bn sin λt) ,

(9.1.2)

where the functions An = An (t; λ, µ) and Bn = Bn (t; λ, µ) are specified by the recurrence relations 1 µ (An,λ + tBn ) − (An,µ − tAn ) , An+1 = 2n λ (9.1.3) 1 µ (Bn,λ − tAn ) − (Bn,µ − tBn ) . Bn+1 = 2n λ Here, the comma preceding λ or µ indicates a partial differentiation with respect to λ or µ. For n = 1 we obtain A1 = 1,

B1 = −µλ−1 .

(9.1.4)

From this, on account of eqn (9.1.3), for n = 1, we find A2 =

t 1 − µ2 λ−2 , 2

B2 =

1 1 − µ2 λ−2 − 2µt . 2λ

(9.1.5)

242

Thermoelastic polynomials

In general, An (t; λ, µ) and Bn (t; λ, µ) are polynomials in t of degree (n − 1), and of the form [recall eqn (7.1.68)]  n−1 µ . 1    λ k tk , = akn A n  n−1  λ (2λ) (n − 1)! k=0 (9.1.6) n−1 µ  .  1   λ k tk , bkn  Bn = n−1 λ (2λ) (n − 1)! k=0 where akn (ζ) and bkn (ζ) are polynomials in ζ of degree ≤ n (ζ = µλ−1 ). The polynomials An and Bn are called the thermoelastic polynomials. In the following, in order to underline the dependence of hn , An and Bn on t and simplify the notation, we will be omitting λ, µ as arguments, and simply write An (t) and Bn (t). From eqn (9.1.1) we obtain hn (t) = h1 (t) ∗ hn−1 (t) for n ≥ 2.

(9.1.7)

Since the functions h1 (t) and hn−1 (t) (n ≥ 2) are continuous for every t ≥ 0, then, on account of eqn (9.1.7) hn (0) = 0 ∀n ≥ 2.

(9.1.8)

Hence, using eqn (9.1.2), we obtain An (0) = 0 ∀n ≥ 2.

(9.1.9)

¯ n (p) (n ≥ 1) we obtain Furthermore, given eqn (9.1.1), for the function h ! ¯ n (p) = h ¯ 1 (p) n , h (9.1.10) where p

¯ 1 (p) = h

2

(p + µ) + λ2

.

(9.1.11)

Next, differentiating eqn (9.1.10) with respect to p and multiplying through by p, we obtain p

¯n dh ¯ n − 2nph ¯ n+1 − 2nµh ¯ n+1 . = nh dp

(9.1.12)

Applying the operator L−1 to both sides of this equation, and noting that hn (0) = 0 for n ≥ 2, we obtain d (thn (t)) = nhn (t) − 2nh˙ n+1 (t) − 2nµhn+1 (t) dt from which there follows −

−hn (t) − th˙ n (t) = nhn (t) − 2nh˙ n+1 (t) − 2nµhn+1 (t)

∀n ≥ 1,

∀n ≥ 1,

(9.1.13)

(9.1.14)

Recurrence relations

243

where the dot indicates differentiation with respect to t. Since h1 (0) = A1 (0) = 1 and h2 (0) = 0, then, letting n = 1 and t = 0 in eqn (9.1.14), we obtain h˙ 2 (0) = 1.

(9.1.15)

Also, letting t = 0 in eqn (9.1.14) and employing eqn (9.1.8), we obtain h˙ n (0) = 0 for n ≥ 3.

(9.1.16)

Furthermore, we differentiate eqn (9.1.10) twice with respect to p and multiply through by p2 , so as to get p2

¯n d2 h ¯ n − 4n2 µh ¯ n+1 + 2nph ¯ n+1 − 4n (n + 1) λ2 h ¯ n+2 . (9.1.17) = n (n − 1) h dp2

The inverse transformation of eqn (9.1.17), and the use of eqn (9.1.8), yields ! d2 2 t hn (t) = n (n − 1) hn (t) − 4n2 µhn+1 (t) dt2 ∀n ≥ 1. +2nh˙ n+1 (t) − 4n (n + 1) λ2 hn+2 (t) Next, we note that

2 ¯ n = ph ¯ n−1 (p + µ) + λ2 h

∀n ≥ 2.

(9.1.18)

(9.1.19)

Applying L−1 to the above, and observing that hn (0) = 0 and h˙ n (0) = 0 for n ≥ 3 [recall eqns (9.1.8) and (9.1.16)], yields d d d2 hn (t) + 2µ hn (t) + µ2 + λ2 hn (t) = hn−1 (t) ∀n ≥ 3. (9.1.20) 2 dt dt dt The latter relation may be extended to the range n ≥ 2, in which the relation (9.1.19) holds. Indeed, for n = 2 the relation (9.1.19) takes the form ¯ 2 + µ2 + λ2 h ¯ 1. ¯ 2 + 2µph ¯ 2 = ph (9.1.21) p2 h Given that h2 (0) = 0 and h˙ 2 (0) = h1 (0) = 1, eqn (9.1.21) may be written as ¯ 1 − h1 (0) . ¯ 2 − ph2 (0) − h˙ 2 (0) + 2µ ph2 − h2 (0) + µ2 + λ2 h ¯ 2 = ph p2 h (9.1.22) Applying the operator L−1 to eqn (9.1.22) we infer that eqn (9.1.20) holds ∀n ≥ 2. Thus, in view of eqns (9.1.13), (9.1.18) and (9.1.20)–(9.1.22), we conclude that the following recurrence relations are true ∀n ≥ 2 d (thn ) = nhn − 2nh˙ n+1 − 2nµhn+1 , dt ¨ n+1 + 2µh˙ n+1 + µ2 + λ2 hn+1 = h˙ n , h

−

(9.1.23) (9.1.24)

d 2 t hn = n (n − 1) hn − 4n2 µhn+1 + 2nh˙ n+1 − 4n (n + 1) λ2 hn+2 . (9.1.25) dt2 2

244


Substituting hn = hn (t) given by eqn (9.1.2) into the system (9.1.23)–(9.1.25), and setting equal the coefficients of cos λt and sin λt on both sides of this system, ∀n ≥ 1 we obtain the three separated systems containing a pair (An , Bn ) 1 (n + 1) An + A˙ n − µAn + λBn t , A˙ n+1 + λBn+1 = 2n (9.1.26) 1 ˙ (n + 1) Bn + B˙ n − µBn − λAn t , Bn+1 − λAn+1 = 2n ¨ An+1 + 2λB˙ n+1 = A˙ n − µAn + λBn , (9.1.27) ¨n+1 − 2λA˙ n+1 = B˙ n − µBn + λAn , B 4n (n + 1) λ2 An+2 = 2n A˙ n+1 − (2n + 1) µAn+1 ! + t2 λ2 − µ2 + 4µt + (n + 1) (n − 2) An − 2t (2 − µt) A˙ n −t2 A¨n − 2λt2 B˙ n − 2λt (2 − µt) Bn + 2nλBn+1 , 4n (n + 1) λ2 Bn+2 = 2n B˙ n+1 − (2n + 1) µBn+1 ! + t2 λ2 − µ2 + 4µt + (n + 1) (n − 2) Bn − 2t (2 − µt) B˙ n ¨n + 2λt2 A˙ n + 2λt (2 − µt) An − 2nλAn+1 . −t2 B

(9.1.28)

These are accompanied by the following equivalence relations (9.1.23) ⇐⇒ (9.1.26) , (9.1.24) ⇐⇒ (9.1.27) ,

(9.1.25) ⇐⇒ (9.1.28) .

(9.1.29)

Observing that An (0) = 0 for ∀n ≥ 2 (recall eqn (9.1.9)) and letting t = 0 in eqns (9.1.26)2 and (9.1.28)2 , yields 2nB˙ n+1 (0) = (n + 1) Bn (0) , and

· 4n (n + 1) λ2 Bn+2 (0) = 2n B˙ n+1 (0) − (2n + 1) µBn+1 (0) + (n + 1) (n − 2) Bn (0)

∀n ≥ 1.

(9.1.30)

(9.1.31)

Eliminating B˙ n+1 (0) from the system (9.1.30) and (9.1.31), we obtain 4n (n + 1) λ2 Bn+2 (0) = −2n (2n + 1) µBn+1 (0) + n2 − 1 Bn (0) ∀n ≥ 1. (9.1.32) The relations (9.1.3) and (9.1.26)–(9.1.28) are not the only recurrence relations for the pair of polynomials (An , Bn ). Prior to deriving further recurrence relations, we shall transform the obtained relations to a more elegant form through the introduction of new variables (recall eqn (7.1.60)) ζ = µλ−1 , y = tλ.

(9.1.33)

Also, we introduce the notations ˆn = cn Bn , Aˆn = cn An , B

(9.1.34)


245

where cn = (2λ)

n−1

(n − 1)!

(9.1.35)

ˆn ), Employing the formulas (9.1.6), (9.1.34) and (9.1.35) for the pair (Aˆn , B we find Aˆn (y, ζ) =

n−1 .

akn (ζ) y k ,

ˆn (y, ζ) = B

k=0

n−1 .

bkn (ζ) y k .

(9.1.36)

k=0

ˆn ) will also be called a pair of thermoelastic polynomials, In the following (Aˆn , B and (akn , bkn ) will be called a pair of associated thermoelastic polynomials. ˆn ) is a function of two variables (y, ζ) in contradistinction to Clearly, (Aˆn , B the pair (An , Bn ), which is a function of three variables: (t; λ, µ). The functions ˆn are polynomials of degree (n − 1) with respect to y, while An and Aˆn and B Bn are polynomials of degree (n − 1) with respect to t. In view of the formula (7.1.55), the function hn specified by eqn (9.1.2) may be given in the form µ ∂ ∂ 1 − hn−1 ∀n ≥ 2. (9.1.37) hn = 2(n − 1) λ ∂λ ∂µ It follows from the formula (9.1.35) that cn = cn (λ) and, in view of eqn (9.1.2), an alternative form of hn is hn = [cn (λ)]

−1

ˆ n (y, ζ), h

(9.1.38)

where ˆ n (y, ζ) = e−ζy (Aˆn cos y + B ˆn sin y). h

(9.1.39)

The variables ζ and y, specified by the formula (9.1.33) can be treated as functions of the point (λ, µ) by writing ζ = ζ(λ, µ) ≡ µλ−1 ,

y = y(λ, µ) ≡ λt.

(9.1.40)

From this we obtain ∂ζ = −ζλ−1 , ∂λ

∂ζ = λ−1 , ∂µ

∂y = t, ∂λ

∂y = 0. ∂µ

On account of eqn (9.1.38), for the partial derivatives of hn we find ) ( ˆn ˆn ∂ h 1 ∂hn ∂ h −2 −1 ˆ n + [cn (λ)] = − [cn (λ)] cn (λ)h t+ (−ζ) , ∂λ ∂y ∂ζ λ , + ˆn 1 ˆn ∂h ∂hn ∂h −1 = [cn (λ)] ·0+ , ∂µ ∂y ∂ζ λ

(9.1.41)

(9.1.42)

(9.1.43)

246


from which it follows that

+

ˆn ˆn ∂h c ˆ ∂h −ζ − n λh y n ∂y ∂ζ cn

∂hn −1 = c−1 n λ ∂λ

, ,

(9.1.44)

and ˆ ∂hn −1 ∂ hn = c−1 . n λ ∂µ ∂ζ

(9.1.45)

On the other hand, in view of eqn (9.1.35), cn = 2n−1 (n − 1)!λn−1 .

(9.1.46)

λcn = 2n−1 (n − 1)!(n − 1)λn−1 ,

(9.1.47)

Therefore,

and λ

cn = n − 1, cn

(9.1.48)

and, given eqns (9.1.44) and (9.1.45), we obtain

∂ µ ∂ − λ ∂λ ∂µ

hn =

−1 c−1 n λ

∂ 2 ∂ ˆ n. − (1 + ζ ) − (n − 1)ζ h ζy ∂y ∂ζ

(9.1.49)

From this and eqn (9.1.37) we find ˆ ˆ e−ζy c−1 n (An cos y + Bn sin y) = ∂ −1 −1 −1 2 ∂ − (1 + ζ ) − (n − 2)ζ ζy [2(n − 1)] cn−1 λ ∂y ∂ζ

(9.1.50)

ˆn−1 sin y). ×e−ζy (Aˆn−1 cos y + B Since 2 (n − 1) cn−1 λ = cn ,

(9.1.51)

from eqn (9.1.50) we obtain ˆn sin y = Aˆn cos y + B (9.1.52) ∂ ∂ ˆn−1 sin y). − 1 + ζ2 − (n − 2) ζ e−ζy (Aˆn−1 cos y + B eζy ζy ∂y ∂ζ Equating the coefficients of cos y and sin y on both sides of eqn (9.1.52), we arrive ˆn ), an analog of eqn (9.1.3) for the at the recurrence formulas for the pair (Aˆn , B


247

pair (An , Bn ) ˆn , Aˆn+1 = Ln Aˆn + ζy B ˆn+1 = −ζy Aˆn + Ln B ˆn , B

(9.1.53)

where Ln = ζy

∂ ∂ − (1 + ζ 2 ) + y − (n − 1)ζ ∂y ∂ζ

∀n ≥ 1,

(9.1.54)

and ˆ1 = −ζ. Aˆ1 = 1, B

(9.1.55)

Note that the relations (9.1.53)–(9.1.55) may also be adopted as the definition ˆn ) ∀n ≥ 1. An immediate of a pair of the thermoelastic polynomials (Aˆn , B consequence of that definition is the following theorem. Theorem 9.1 The three successive polynomials Aˆn+2 , Aˆn+1 and Aˆn or ˆn+1 and B ˆn , treated as functions of y and ζ, satisfy the recurrence ˆn+2 , B B relations ζ −1 + ζ ˆ An+1 + L2n + ζ −1 Ln + ζ 2 y 2 Aˆn = 0, (9.1.56) Aˆn+2 − 2 Ln + 2 or

−1 ˆn+1 + L2 + ζ −1 Ln + ζ 2 y 2 B ˆn = 0, ˆn+2 − 2 Ln + ζ + ζ B B n 2

(9.1.57)

where Ln (n ≥ 1) is the operator specified by eqn (9.1.54), while L2n is its square. 1 The proof of eqn (9.1.56) (or eqn (9.1.57)) consists of the elimination of ˆn (respectively, Aˆn+1 and Aˆn ) from the recurrence ˆn+1 and B polynomials B formulas (9.1.53). Also, employing eqns (9.1.53)–(9.1.55), we obtain three further theorems as counterparts of the recurrence systems (9.1.26), (9.1.27) and (9.1.28). ˆn ), treated as a function of y, for any fixed ζ, Theorem 9.2 The pair (Aˆn , B satisfies the recurrence relations ˆn+1 = (n + 1)Aˆn + (Aˆn − ζ Aˆn + B ˆn )y, Aˆn+1 + B ˆn + (B ˆn − ζ B ˆn − Aˆn )y, ˆ − Aˆn+1 = (n + 1)B B n+1

(9.1.58)

where the prime denotes the derivative with respect to y. 1 One can show that ζ = 0 is not a singular point of the recurrence relations (9.1.56) and (9.1.57).

248


ˆn ), treated as a function of y, for any fixed ζ, Theorem 9.3 The pair (Aˆn , B satisfies the recurrence relations ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Aˆn+1 + 2B n+1 = 2n(An − ζ An + Bn ), (9.1.59) ˆ − 2Aˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ B n+1 n+1 = 2n(Bn − ζ Bn − An ). ˆn ), treated as a function of y, for any fixed ζ, Theorem 9.4 The pair (Aˆn , B satisfies the recurrence relations Aˆn+2 = Aˆn+1 − (2n + 1)ζ Aˆn+1 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 4ζy + (n + 1)(n − 2)]Aˆn ˆn − 2y(2 − ζy)B ˆn + B ˆn+1 , −2y(2 − ζy)Aˆn − y 2 Aˆn − 2y 2 B ˆ − (2n + 1)ζ B ˆn+1 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 4ζy + (n + 1)(n − 2)]B ˆn ˆn+2 = B B n+1 ˆ − y2 B ˆ + 2y 2 Aˆ + 2y(2 − ζy)Aˆn − Aˆn+1 . −2y(2 − ζy)B n n n (9.1.60) The relations (9.1.58) and (9.1.59) couple together two successive pairs of thermoelastic polynomials in two different ways. The relation (9.1.60) couples three successive pairs of thermoelastic polynomials. We end this section by giving the system of recurrence relations coupling four successive pairs of thermoelastic polynomials. ˆn ), treated as a function of y, for any fixed ζ, Theorem 9.5 The pair (Aˆn , B satisfies the recurrence relations Aˆn+3 + (2n + 3)ζ Aˆn+2 − [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + n(n + 2)]Aˆn+1 −(2ζy − 2n − 3)y 2 Aˆn + [2ζ 2 y 2 − (4n + 5)ζy + 3(n + 1)]y Aˆn ˆn = 0, −(2ζy − 2n − 3)y 2 B ˆn+3 + (2n + 3)ζ B ˆn+2 − [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + n(n + 2)]B ˆn+1 B

(9.1.61)

ˆn ˆn + [2ζ 2 y 2 − (4n + 5)ζy + 3(n + 1)]y B −(2ζy − 2n − 3)y 2 B +(2ζy − 2n − 3)y 2 Aˆn = 0. Proof. To prove the relations (9.1.61) we rewrite the recurrence relations (9.1.60) as ˆn+1 − (2n + 1)ζ Aˆn+1 Aˆn+2 = Aˆn+1 + B +[(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 4ζy + (n + 1)(n − 2)]Aˆn ˆn ) − y 2 (Aˆn + 2B ˆn ), −2y(2 − ζy)(Aˆn + B ˆ − Aˆn+1 − (2n + 1)ζ B ˆn+1 ˆn+2 = B B n+1 ˆn +[(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 4ζy + (n + 1)(n − 2)]B ˆn − Aˆn ) − y 2 (B ˆn − 2Aˆn ). −2y(2 − ζy)(B

(9.1.62)

Differential equation

249

Now, substituting the right-hand sides of eqns (9.1.58)1 and (9.1.58)2 in place of the underlined terms in eqns (9.1.62)1 and (9.1.62)2 , respectively, we obtain Aˆn+2 = −(2n + 1)ζ Aˆn+1 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + (n2 − 1)]Aˆn ˆn ) − y 2 (Aˆn + 2B ˆn ), −y(3 − 2ζy)(Aˆn + B ˆn+1 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + (n2 − 1)]B ˆn ˆn+2 = −(2n + 1)ζ B B

(9.1.63)

ˆ − Aˆn ) − y 2 (B ˆ − 2Aˆ ). −y(3 − 2ζy)(B n n n Interchanging n with n + 1 in eqn (9.1.63), yields Aˆn+3 = −(2n + 3)ζ Aˆn+2 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + n(n + 2)]Aˆn+1

ˆn+3 B

ˆn+1 ) − y 2 (Aˆ + 2B ˆ ), −y(3 − 2ζy)(Aˆn+1 + B n+1 n+1 ←−−−−−−−−−−→ ˆn+2 + [(1 − ζ 2 )y 2 + 3ζy + n(n + 2)]B ˆn+1 = −(2n + 3)ζ B

(9.1.64)

ˆ − Aˆn+1 ) − y 2 (B ˆ − 2Aˆ ). −y(3 − 2ζy)(B n+1 n+1 n+1 ←−−−−−−−−−−→ Finally, expressing the terms underlined by lines and arrows by the right-hand sides of eqns (9.1.58) and (9.1.59), respectively, leads to the recurrence relations (9.1.61). 9.2 Differential equation ˆn ) can In this section we show that a pair of thermoelastic polynomials (Aˆn , B be identified with an element of the null space of a linear ordinary differential operator. More specifically, we shall prove the following theorem. ˆn ) is a solution of the following system of Theorem 9.6 The pair (Aˆn , B ordinary differential equations ˆ ˆ ˆ y Aˆ n − (n − 3 + ζy)An + 2[(n − 1)ζ − y)]An + 2(n − 1)An ˆ − 2(n − 3 + ζy)B ˆ + 2(n − 1)ζ B ˆn = 0, +3y B n n ˆn + 2[(n − 1)ζ − y]B ˆn + 2(n − 1)B ˆn ˆn − (n − 3 + ζy)B yB

(9.2.1)

−3y Aˆn + 2(n − 3 + ζy)Aˆn − 2(n − 1)ζ Aˆn = 0. Proof. In the proof a key role is played by the relations (9.1.58) and (9.1.59). The first of these have the form ˆn+1 = Mn Aˆn + y B ˆn , Aˆn+1 + B (9.2.2) ˆ ˆn + Mn B ˆn , −Aˆn+1 + B = −y A n+1 where Mn = y

∂ − ζy + (n + 1). ∂y

(9.2.3)

250


Furthermore, the relations (9.1.59) can be rewritten as ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Aˆn+1 + 2B n+1 = 2n(An − ζ An + Bn ), ˆ = 2n(−Aˆn + B ˆ − ζB ˆn ). −2Aˆn+1 + B n n+1

(9.2.4)

Differentiating eqn (9.2.2)1 with respect to y, and combining the result with eqn (9.2.4)1 , yields ˆ ˆ ˆ Aˆn+1 + B n+1 = (Mn An + y Bn ) , ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ Aˆn+1 + 2B n+1 = 2n(An − ζ An + Bn ).

(9.2.5)

An analogous differentiation of eqn (9.2.2)2 with respect to y, in combination with eqn (9.2.4)2 , yields ˆ = (−y Aˆn + Mn B ˆn ) , −Aˆn+1 + B n+1 ˆ = 2n(−Aˆn + B ˆ − ζB ˆn ). −2Aˆn+1 + B n n+1

(9.2.6)

The system (9.2.5) is equivalent to ˆn ) + 2(Mn Aˆn + y B ˆn ) , Aˆn+1 = −2n(Aˆn − ζ Aˆn + B ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ B n+1 = 2n(An − ζ An + Bn ) − (Mn An + y Bn ) ,

(9.2.7)

while the system (9.2.6) is equivalent to ˆn ) , ˆn − ζ B ˆn ) + (−y Aˆn + Mn B Aˆn+1 = −2n(−Aˆn + B ˆn − ζ B ˆn ) + 2(−y Aˆn + Mn B ˆn ) . ˆ = −2n(−Aˆn + B B n+1

(9.2.8)

We now differentiate eqn (9.2.7)2 with respect to y and set the right-hand side of the resulting equation equal to the right-hand side of eqn (9.2.8)2 . Similarly, we differentiate eqn (9.2.8)1 with respect to y and set the right-hand side of the resulting equation equal to the right-hand side of eqn (9.2.7)1 . As a result, we find the system ˆn ) − (Mn Aˆn + y B ˆn ) ] [2n(Aˆn − ζ Aˆn + B ˆn − ζ B ˆn ) − 2(−y Aˆn + Mn B ˆn ) = 0, +2n(−Aˆn + B ˆ − ζB ˆn ) + (−y Aˆn + Mn B ˆn ) ] [−2n(−Aˆn + B n

(9.2.9)

ˆn ) − 2(Mn Aˆn + y B ˆn ) = 0. +2n(Aˆn − ζ Aˆn + B Given the definition (9.2.3) of the operator Mn , we conclude that eqn (9.2.9) is equivalent to eqn (9.2.1). Observe that the system (9.2.1) can be written in a matrix form Aˆn 0 Rn , Sn = , ˆ 0 −Sn , Rn Bn

(9.2.10)

Differential equation

251

where Rn = y

∂3 ∂2 ∂ + 2(n − 1), − (n − 3 + ζy) + 2[(n − 1)ζ − y] 3 2 ∂y ∂y ∂y 2 ∂ ∂ Sn = 3y 2 − 2(n − 3 + ζy) + 2(n − 1)ζ, ∂y ∂y

(9.2.11)

and the formula (9.2.1)⇐⇒(9.2.10) states that the pair of thermoelastic polyˆn ) is an element of the null space of a linear matrix operator nomials (Aˆn , B containing only the derivatives with respect to y. It follows from the relations (9.1.58)–(9.1.60) that such an element satisfies the following initial conditions of the Cauchy type , + * (0) Aˆn Aˆn ** , (9.2.12) = ˆn * ˆn(0) B B y=0 , + * (1) Aˆn ** Aˆn , (9.2.13) = ˆn * ˆn(1) B B y=0 , + * (2) Aˆn ** Aˆn , (9.2.14) = ˆn * ˆn(2) B B y=0 where (0) Aˆ1 = 1,

ˆn(0) B

Aˆ(0) n = 0 for n ≥ 2,

ˆ (0) = 1 + ζ 2 , ˆ (0) = −ζ, B B 1 2 ˆ (0) + (n − 3)(n − 1)B ˆ (0) = −(2n − 3)ζ B

(1) Aˆn

n−1

n−2

(1) (1) Aˆ1 = 0, Aˆ2 = 1 − ζ 2 , ˆ (0) − (n − 3)(n − 1)B ˆ (0) = (2n − 3)ζ B n−1

ˆ (1) = −2ζ, ˆ (1) = 0, B B 1 2

n−2

for n ≥ 3,

for n ≥ 3,

ˆn(1) = nB ˆ (0) for n ≥ 3, B n−1

(2) (2) (2) Aˆ1 = 0, Aˆ2 = 0, Aˆ3 = 2(1 − 3ζ 2 ), (2) ˆ (0) for n ≥ 4, Aˆn = −2nB n−1

ˆ (2) = 0, ˆ (2) = 0, B B 1 2

ˆn(2) = 2 (n − 2)ζ B ˆ (0) + 2(n − 1)B ˆ (0) B n−1 n−2

for n ≥ 3.

(9.2.15) (9.2.16)

(9.2.17) (9.2.18) (9.2.19)

(9.2.20)

We are thus led to the following theorem. ˆn ) is a solution of Theorem 9.7 The pair of thermoelastic polynomials (Aˆn , B the Cauchy problem described by the matrix equation (9.2.10) for y > 0 under the conditions (9.2.12)–(9.2.14) for y = 0.

252


9.3 Integral relation We now proceed to prove the following theorem. ˆn ) is selfTheorem 9.8 The pair of thermoelastic polynomials (Aˆn , B equilibrated on the semi-axis y > 0 in the following sense ∞ ˆk+1 (y, ζ) sin y dy = 0, e−ζy Aˆk+1 (y, ζ) cos y + B (9.3.1) 0 ∀ζ > 0 and ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... Proof. We proceed by induction. If we introduce the notation ˆk+1 (y, ζ) sin y , fk+1 (y, ζ) = e−ζy Aˆk+1 (y, ζ) cos y + B

(9.3.2)

the relation (9.3.1) takes the form ∞ fk+1 (y, ζ)dy = 0

(9.3.3)

∀ζ > 0 and ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...

0

First, we check that eqn (9.3.3) holds for k = 0. To this end, we employ the relations ∞ e−ζy cos ydy = ζ(ζ 2 + 1)−1 (ζ > 0) , 0 (9.3.4) ∞ −ζy 2 −1 e sin ydy = (ζ + 1) . 0

For k = 0 the left-hand side of eqn (9.3.3) becomes ∞ ∞ f1 (y, ζ)dy = e−ζy (cos y − ζ sin y)dy. 0

(9.3.5)

0

From this, on account of eqn (9.3.4), we infer that eqn (9.3.3) holds for k = 0: ∞ f1 (y, ζ)dy = 0. (9.3.6) 0

Furthermore, we verify that it also holds for k = 1. In that case, we obtain ∞ ∞ f2 (y, ζ)dy = e−ζy {(1 − ζ 2 )y cos y + [(1 + ζ 2 ) − 2ζy] sin y}dy. (9.3.7) 0

0

Differentiating eqns (9.3.4)1 and (9.3.4)2 with respect to ζ, we obtain, respectively ∞ ζ2 − 1 e−ζy y cos ydy = 2 , (ζ + 1)2 0 (9.3.8) ∞ 2ζ −ζy e y sin ydy = 2 . (ζ + 1)2 0

Integral relation

253

Thus, calculating the integral on the RHS of eqn (9.3.7) with the use of eqns (9.3.4) and (9.3.8), we find that eqn (9.3.3) holds for k = 1. Now, let us assume that ∞ fk (y, ζ)dy = 0 ∀ζ > 0 and k ≥ 3. (9.3.9) 0

In order to prove Theorem 9.8, it will suffice to show that eqn (9.3.9) implies ˆn ) is specified eqn (9.3.3). To this end, note from eqn (9.1.53) that the pair (Aˆn , B through the recurrence relations ˆk , Aˆk+1 = Lk Aˆk + ζy B ˆk+1 = −ζy Aˆk+1 + Lk B ˆk , B

(9.3.10)

where Lk is a first-order linear partial differential operator Lk = ζy

∂ ∂ − (1 + ζ 2 ) + [y − (k − 1)ζ] ∂y ∂ζ

∀k ≥ 1.

(9.3.11)

With the above relations, we represent the function fk+1 (y, ζ) given by eqn (9.3.2) in the form ˆk ) cos y + (−ζy Aˆk+1 + Lk B ˆk ) sin y]. fk+1 (y, ζ) = e−ζy [(Lk Aˆk + ζy B

(9.3.12)

Furthermore, we compute the integrals ∞ e−ζy (Lk Aˆk ) cos ydy 0 (9.3.13) ∞ ∂ ˆ −ζy 2 ∂ ˆ ˆ = + (k − 1)ζ Ak cos ydy ζy Ak + y Ak − (1 + ζ ) e ∂y ∂ζ 0 and =

∞

e 0

−ζy

∞

ˆk ) sin ydy e−ζy (Lk B

0

(9.3.14) ∂ ∂ ˆ 2 ˆk sin ydy. ˆk − (1 + ζ ) + (k − 1)ζ B ζy Bk + y B ∂y ∂ζ

Since

∞

e 0 ∞

−ζy

∂ ˆ ζy Ak cos ydy ∂y

e−ζy [(ζy − 1) cos y + y sin y]Aˆk dy

=ζ 0

(9.3.15)

254


and

∞

e

−ζy

0

∞

−ζy

e

=ζ

∂ ˆ ζy Bk sin ydy ∂y

(9.3.16)

ˆk dy, [−y cos y + (ζy − 1) sin y]B

0

upon carrying out the integration of eqn (9.3.12) from y = 0 to y = ∞, and using eqns (9.3.13)–(9.316), we obtain ∞ fk+1 (y, ζ)dy 0 (9.3.17) ∞ ∞ ∂ = −kζ fk (y, ζ)dy − (1 + ζ 2 ) fk (y, ζ)dy. ∂ζ 0 0 From this and eqn (9.3.9) it follows that eqn (9.3.3) is true.

9.4 Associated thermoelastic polynomials Consistent with the definition adopted in Section 9.1, the pair (akn , bkn ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1, appearing in eqn (9.1.36) is called the pair of associated therˆn ) with moelastic polynomials. This pair determines uniquely the pair (Aˆn , , B the help of relations Aˆn (y, ζ) = ˆn (y, ζ) = B

n−1 . k=0 n−1 .

akn (ζ) y k n ≥ 1. bkn (ζ) y

(9.4.1)

k

k=0

For n = 1, 2, 3 and 4 these relations take the form [recall eqns (7.1.61)–(7.1.64) and eqns (9.1.34) and (9.1.35)] ˆ1 = −ζ, (9.4.2) Aˆ1 = 1, B ˆ2 = (1 + ζ 2 ) − 2ζy, (9.4.3) Aˆ2 = 1 − ζ 2 , B Aˆ3 = 3ζ 1 + ζ 2 y + 1 − 3ζ 2 y 2 , (9.4.4) ˆ3 = −3ζ 1 + ζ 2 + 3 1 + ζ 2 y − ζ 3 − ζ 2 y 2 , B Aˆ4 = −3 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 y + 12ζ 1 + ζ 2 y 2 + 1 − 6ζ 2 + ζ 4 y 3 , ˆ4 = 3 1 + 6ζ 2 + 5ζ 4 − 12ζ 1 + ζ 2 y + 6 1 − ζ 4 y 2 − 4ζ 1 − ζ 2 y 3 . B (9.4.5) The above formulas show that the functions akn (ζ) and bkn (ζ) for 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1 are the polynomials in ζ of degree not greater than n.

Associated thermoelastic polynomials

255

A substitution of eqn (9.4.1) into a homogeneous form of eqns (9.1.53), and setting the coefficients of like powers of y to zero, leads to the following recurrence formulas specifying a pair (ak,n+1 , bk,n+1 ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n, in terms of (akn , bkn ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1, a0,n+1 = −(1 + ζ 2 )a0n − (n − 1)ζa0n b0,n+1 = −(1 + ζ 2 )b0n − (n − 1)ζb0n

(n ≥ 1) ,

ak,n+1 = −(1 + ζ 2 )akn −(n − 1 − k)ζakn + ak−1,n + ζbk−1,n bk,n+1 = −(1 + ζ 2 )bkn −(n − 1 − k)ζbkn + bk−1,n − ζak−1,n an,n+1 = an−1,n + ζbn−1,n bn,n+1 = bn−1,n − ζan−1,n

(1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1) ,

(9.4.6)

(n ≥ 1) ,

where the prime indicates the differentiation with respect to ζ. Similarly, substituting eqn (9.4.1) into a homogeneous form of eqns (9.1.58), and setting the coefficients of like powers of y to zero, yields [see eqn (7.1.69)] a1,n+1 + b0,n+1 = 0 (n ≥ 2) , b1,n+1 = (n + 1)b0n (k + 1)ak+1,n+1 + bk,n+1 = (n + k + 1)akn − ζak−1,n + bk−1,n (1 ≤ k ≤ n − 1) , (k + 1)bk+1,n+1 − ak,n+1 = (n + k + 1)bkn − ζbk−1,n − ak−1,n an,n+1 = an−1,n + ζbn−1,n (n ≥ 1) . bn,n+1 = bn−1,n − ζan−1,n

(9.4.7)

Also, substituting eqn (9.4.1) into a homogeneous form of eqns (9.1.59), and setting the coefficients of like powers of y to zero, yields (k + 1)(k + 2)ak+2,n+1 + 2(k + 1)bk+1,n+1 = 2n[(k + 1)ak+1,n − ζakn + bkn ], (k + 1)(k + 2)bk+2,n+1 − 2(k + 1)ak+1,n+1 = 2n[(k + 1)bk+1,n − ζbkn − akn ], an,n+1 = an−1,n + ζbn−1,n , bn,n+1 = bn−1,n − ζan−1,n ,

(0 ≤ k ≤ n − 2) .

(9.4.8)

256


Finally, substituting eqn (9.4.1) into eqn (9.2.1), we obtain (k + 1)(k + 2)(n − 3 − k)ak+2,n − ζ(k + 1)(2n − 2 − k)ak+1,n +(k + 1)(2n − 6 − 3k)bk+1,n − 2(n − 1 − k)(akn + ζbkn ) = 0, (k + 1)(k + 2)(n − 3 − k)bk+2,n − ζ(k + 1)(2n − 2 − k)bk+1,n −(k + 1)(2n − 6 − 3k)ak+1,n + 2(n − 1 − k)(ζakn − bkn ) = 0,

(9.4.9)

(0 ≤ k ≤ n − 3) , n(n − 1)(ζan−1,n + bn−1,n ) + 2(an−2,n + ζbn−2,n ) = 0, n(n − 1)(ζbn−1,n − an−1,n ) + 2(bn−2,n − ζan−2,n ) = 0, (n ≥ 2) . Clearly, the formulas (9.4.6)–(9.4.8) can be used for determination of a pair (akn , bkn ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1, with the help of (ak,n−1 , bk,n−1 ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 2. The relations (9.4.9) involving the pair (akn , bkn ), 0 ≤ k ≤ n − 1, can be employed in a general analysis of thermoelastic polynomials. Concluding this chapter we note that, by substituting eqn (9.4.1) into eqn (9.3.1), we obtain a global relation for the pair of associated thermoelastic polynomials k . ζ 1 di di i + b =0 (−) ai,k+1 (ζ) i (ζ) i,k+1 dζ ζ2 + 1 dζ i ζ 2 + 1 (9.4.10) i=0 ∀ζ > 0, ∀k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...

10 MOVING DISCONTINUITY SURFACES

In Section 7.4 an exact solution of the Nowacki type for the G–L theory, consisting of a superposition of two spherical waves of strong discontinuity of order n = −1 was obtained. The speeds and reduced damping coefficients of the “amplitudes” of these waves were identified on the basis of the exact solution. An analogous solution of the Danilovskaya type, consisting of a superposition of two plane waves of strong discontinuity of order n = −1, was considered in Section 7.5. In this chapter we analyze the moving discontinuity surfaces in models of the L–S and G–L type on the basis of a theory of propagation of singular surfaces in continuum mechanics (e.g. Gurtin, 1972), without solving any specific initialboundary value problems. In the first section of the chapter we shall introduce the concept of a singular surface propagating in a thermoelastic medium as well as the concept of a thermoelastic wave of order n (≷ 0), both of which are generalizations of such notions from classical linear isothermal elastodynamics (e.g. Ignaczak, 1985). In the second and third sections of the chapter we shall analyze the discontinuities of a plane stress–temperature wave of order n = 0 for the L–S body as well as the discontinuities of a plane displacement–temperature wave of order n = 2 in the G–L theory. 10.1 Singular surfaces propagating in a thermoelastic medium; thermoelastic wave of order n (≷ 0) Definition 10.1 The singular surface propagating in a thermoelastic medium 1 is a surface on which certain kinematic and thermal quantities possess discontinuities. Let us assume that a thermoelastic disturbance f = f (x, t) 2 is defined on B × [0, ∞), where B is a domain in E3 , while [0, ∞) is the time interval. 1

By a thermoelastic medium we mean here an L–S or G–L model. By a thermoelastic disturbance we mean a solution to an initial-boundary value problem for the L–S or G–L model. For example, the function f = f (x, t) may be identified with a pair (u, ϑ), where u and ϑ stand for the displacement and temperature, respectively. In particular, the pair may represent the first or second fundamental thermoelastic disturbance of the G–L theory (see Section 6.2). 2

258

Moving discontinuity surfaces

Furthermore, let W denote a singular surface appearing in Definition 10.1. That surface may be described by the equation t = ψ(x) for (x, t) ∈ B × [0, ∞),

(10.1.1)

where ψ is a scalar field on B, while t denotes time. If |∇ψ| = 0 on B, the surface moves in the direction m(x, t) =

∇ψ(x) , |∇ψ(x)|

(10.1.2)

c(x, t) =

1 . |∇ψ(x)|

(10.1.3)

at the speed

Thus, W is a smooth 3D manifold in the space-time E3 × [0, ∞), whose normal is the four-component vector of the form m(4) = (m, −c),

(10.1.4)

where |m| = 1 and c > 0. Definition 10.2 If f is a continuous function on B × [0, ∞) − W and f undergoes a jump-like discontinuity on W, then W is a singular surface of order n = 0 relative to f. The jump in f on W is given by the formula [[f ]] (x, t) = lim+ {f (x, t + h) − f (x, t − h)} .

(10.1.5)

h→0

Since the function f is continuous on both sides of W , one can compute [[f ]] by taking the limit along m(4) according to (10.1.6) [[f ]] ξ(4) = lim f ξ (4) − hm(4) − f ξ (4) + hm(4) , h→0+

where m(4) is given by the formula (10.1.4) and ξ (4) = (x, t) ∈ W . Thus, the jump in f is the difference between its values at two points of m(4) placed directly in front and behind of W . In order to prove that (10.1.5)⇐⇒(10.1.6), we use the definition (10.1.4) and obtain (10.1.7) f ξ (4) − hm(4) = f (x − hm, t + hc) , f ξ (4) + hm(4) = f (x + hm, t − hc) .

(10.1.8)

Singular surfaces propagating in a thermoelastic medium

259

Since f is continuous outside W , upon passing in eqns (10.1.7 and 10.1.8) to the limit h → 0, we obtain lim+ f ξ (4) − hm(4) = lim+ f (x, t + hc) , (10.1.9) h→0

h→0

lim f ξ (4) + hm(4) = lim f (x, t − hc) .

h→0+

h→0+

(10.1.10)

Subtracting eqn (10.1.9) from eqn (10.1.10), we infer that (10.1.6)⇒(10.1.5). The proof of the statement (10.1.5)⇒(10.1.6) follows from the fact that, given the continuity of f outside W , the expression {·} in eqn (10.1.5) may be replaced by the expression {·} in eqn (10.1.6). Remark 10.1 In the case when ψ depends on one variable only, say x1 = x, and when ψ possesses an inverse function, then the equation x = ψ −1 (t)

(10.1.11)

represents a plane moving in the positive direction of the x-axis with the speed * * *d !* −1 * υ=* ψ (t) ** , (10.1.12) dt and the jump of a function f = f (x, t) on that plane is a time-dependent function (recall eqn (10.1.5)) $ ! !% (10.1.13) [[f ]] (t) = lim f ψ −1 (t), t + h − f ψ −1 (t), t − h , h→0+

or (recall eqn (10.1.6)) [[f ]] (t) = lim

h→0+

$

! !% f ψ −1 (t) − h, t − f ψ −1 (t) + h, t .

(10.1.14)

Here, ψ −1 is a function inverse to ψ. Remark 10.2 If the function f depends on the radial co-ordinate ρ and the time t only, that is f = f (ρ, t),

(10.1.15)

where ρ = |x − y| and x, y ∈ E3 , and if the equation of a singular surface W is of the form ζ = 0,

(10.1.16)

where ζ = t − ρ, then the formula (10.1.6) becomes (recall eqn (7.4.123)) [[f ]] (t) = f (t − 0, t) − f (t + 0, t).

(10.1.17)

260


In that case, eqn (10.1.16) represents a spherical surface of order zero relative to f , with the center at y, which propagates in the direction m = ∇ρ at the unit velocity. 3 Definition 10.3

W is a singular surface of order n ≥ 1 relative to f, provided

(a) f is of class C n−1 on B × [0, ∞) and of class C n on B × [0, ∞) − W ; (b) the nth-order derivatives of f undergo jump discontinuities on W. Definition 10.4 W is a singular surface of order n = −1 relative to f, whenever W is a singular surface of order zero relative to 1 ∗ f . Here, ∗ denotes a convolution on the time axis, that is (1 ∗ f )(x, t) =

t

f (x, τ )dτ.

(10.1.18)

0

The latter definition offers a hint on how to specify a singular surface of order n = −k for k = 1, 2, 3, . . . Since a thermoelastic process taking place in the body B at any t ≥ 0 can be described in terms of various pairs of thermomechanical variables (recall Chapter 2), one may therefore consider a thermoelastic wave of order n corresponding to a given pair of such variables. In the following, we shall give the definition of a displacement–temperature thermoelastic wave of order n(≷ 0) for the G–L model, and the definition of a stress–temperature thermoelastic wave of order n ≥ 0 for the L–S model. Definition 10.5 The displacement–temperature thermoelastic wave of order n(≷ 0) for the G–L model is a solution of the field equations of the G–L theory for which there exists a moving singular surface of order n relative to the displacement and temperature fields. Definition 10.6 The stress–temperature thermoelastic wave of order n(≷ 0) for the L–S model is a solution of the field equations of the L–S theory for which there exists a moving singular surface of order n relative to the stress and temperature fields. Note that the existence of spherical and plane displacement–temperature waves of order n = −1 for the G–L model was proved in Sections 7.4 and 7.5, respectively. The existence of plane displacement–temperature waves of order n = 2 for the G–L model and the plane stress–temperature waves of order n = 0 for the L–S model will be proved in later sections of this chapter. Definition 10.7 The displacement–temperature wave of order n ≤ 1 in the G– L model is called a thermoelastic wave of strong discontinuity. The thermoelastic displacement–temperature wave of order n = 1 is called a shock wave, while 3

Note that the independent variables ρ and t of Remark 10.2 are dimensionless.

Propagation of a plane shock wave

261

the displacement–temperature wave of order n = 0 is called a thermoelastic dislocation wave. The displacement–temperature wave of order n ≥ 2 is called a thermoelastic wave of weak discontinuity. The thermoelastic displacement– temperature wave of order n = 2 is also called a thermoelastic acceleration wave. Remark 10.3

Definition 10.7 pertains to the G–L model only.

10.2 Propagation of a plane shock wave in a thermoelastic half-space with one relaxation time Let us consider a 1D thermoelastic process in the L–S theory, taking place in an isotropic thermoelastic half-space x1 = x ≥ 0 under the action of a discontinuousin-time thermomechanical loading applied at the boundary x = 0. Let us also assume that the process begins at time t = 0 from a certain state of the halfspace corresponding to the homogeneous initial conditions, and that there are neither heat sources nor body forces within the half-space. Upon the introduction of non-dimensional independent variables, thermomechanical fields and constitutive parameters, we conclude just like in Sections 4.1 (recall eqns (4.1.5–4.1.10)) and 6.1 (recall eqns (6.1.11–6.1.17)) that the process is described by the system of dimensionless functions (u, e, S, ϑ, η, q) defined for every (x, t) ∈ [0, ∞) × [0, ∞) and satisfying the following field equations: the strain–displacement equation e = ux ,

(10.2.1)

Sx = utt ,

(10.2.2)

ηt = −qx ,

(10.2.3)

S = e − ϑ,

(10.2.4)

η = e + ϑ,

(10.2.5)

q + t0 qt = −ϑx .

(10.2.6)

the equation of motion

the energy balance

the constitutive equations

Here, u, e and S denote, respectively, the displacement, strain and stress in the x direction, while ϑ, η and q stand for the temperature difference, the entropy and the heat flux, also along x. The parameters and t0 , appearing in eqns (10.2.5) and (10.2.6) represent, respectively, the thermomechanical coupling parameter and the relaxation time ( > 0, t0 > 0). Furthermore, the subscripts x and t indicate partial derivatives of a function f = f (x, t) fx =

∂f , ∂x

ft =

∂f . ∂t

(10.2.7)

262


If we introduce the particle velocity in the x-direction as υ = ut ,

(10.2.8)

the equation of motion (10.2.2) can be rewritten in the form S x = υt .

(10.2.9)

u = φx ,

(10.2.10)

It can also be shown that, if

where φ is a scalar field, then the pair (u, ϑ) corresponds to the process (u, e, S, ϑ, η, q), provided the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the 1D potential–temperature equations of the L–S theory, corresponding to zero body forces and heat sources (recall eqns (4.1.11) specialized to coupled fields dependent on x and t only). Since the thermomechanical boundary loading depends on time only, a plane thermoelastic wave in the form of a sum of plane waves propagates into the half-space. The fronts of these waves are given by x = t, (10.2.11) V where V > 0 is the speed of a given wavefront that propagates in the positive x-direction (recall eqns (10.1.11) and (10.1.12)). Let us now assume that the boundary loading gives rise to a superposition of plane thermoelastic waves of order n = 0 relative to the pair (S, ϑ) (recall Definition 10.6 of Section 10.1), that is, the waves for which [[S]] (t) = 0,

[[ϑ]] (t) = 0,

(10.2.12)

at the front given by eqn (10.2.11). In the relations (10.2.12) the symbol [[f ]] (t) denotes the jump of a function f = f (x, t) on the surface (10.2.11), which is given by (recall eqn (10.1.14)) [[f ]] (t) = f (V t − 0, t) − f (V t + 0, t).

(10.2.13)

It follows from the definition of a wave of order n = 0 relative to the pair (S, ϑ) that [[u]] (t) = 0

(10.2.14)

and, for an arbitrary surface x = x0 that does not coincide with the wavefront (10.2.11) at time t > 0, we have

[[

x υ(ξ, t)dξ (t) = 0,

]]

(10.2.15)

]](t) = 0,

(10.2.16)

x0

[[

x η(ξ, t)dξ x0


263

and

[[

t q(x, τ )dτ

]](t) = 0.

(10.2.17)

0

Furthermore, besides the relations (10.2.12), we have 4 [[e]] (t) = 0,

[[υ]] (t) = 0,

(10.2.18)

[[η]] (t) = 0,

[[q]] (t) = 0.

(10.2.19)

In order to demonstrate the existence of a wavefront (10.2.11) on which there hold the relations (10.2.12) and (10.2.14)–(10.2.19), we employ the fact that, for a function f = f (x, t) such that [[f ]] (t) = 0, [[ft ]] (t) = 0 and [[fx ]] (t) = 0, there holds the kinematic compatibility relation (Achenbach, 1968) d {[[f ]] (t)} = [[ft ]] (t) + V [[fx ]] (t). dt

(10.2.20)

The relation (10.2.20) is also true whenever any of the three jumps appearing in it vanishes. In what follows, for the sake of simplicity, we will simply write [[f ]] = [[f ]] (t). Now, let f be a function defined by

(10.2.21)

x

f (x, t) = f (x0 , t) +

υ(ξ, t)dξ,

(10.2.22)

x0

where x0 = V t, ∀t ≥ 0. Because [[f (x0 , t)]] = 0 and the condition (10.2.15) is satisfied, therefore [[f ]] = 0.

(10.2.23)

From this and eqn (10.2.20) we obtain [[ft ]] + V [[fx ]] = 0. On account of eqns (10.2.9) and (10.2.22) we find x ft (x, t) = ft (x0 , t) + υt (ξ, t)dξ = x0 x Sξ (ξ, t)dξ = ft (x0 , t) + S(x, t) − S(x0 , t). ft (x0 , t) +

(10.2.24)

(10.2.25)

x0 4 The conditions (10.2.14), (10.2.15), and (10.2.18) occur in the definition of a shock wave in linear isothermal elastodynamics. The concept of an isothermal shock wave has been extended in Section 10.2 to a thermoelastic shock wave by including the conditions (10.2.16), (10.2.17), and (10.2.19).

264


From this, given that x0 = V t, we arrive at [[ft ]] = [[S]] .

(10.2.26)

Moreover, differentiating eqn (10.2.22) with respect to x, we get fx = υ.

(10.2.27)

Thus, in view of eqns (10.2.24), (10.2.26) and (10.2.27), we find the following relation between the jumps [[S]] and [[υ]] [[S]] = −V [[υ]] .

(10.2.28)

This relation is identical with the compatibility condition for a plane isothermal shock wave [see p. 254 in (Gurtin, 1972)]. Let us now consider a function g = g(x, t) defined by x η(ξ, t)dξ. (10.2.29) g(x, t) = g(x0 , t) − x0

On account of eqn (10.2.16) and noting that x0 = V t, we obtain [[g]] = 0.

(10.2.30)

Differentiating this relation with respect to t and employing eqn (10.2.20), we find [[gt ]] + V [[gx ]] = 0. On account of eqns (10.2.3) and (10.2.29) we find x qξ (ξ, t)dξ = gt (x0 , t) + q(x, t) − q(x0 , t). gt (x, t) = gt (x0 , t) +

(10.2.31)

(10.2.32)

x0

From this, given that x0 = V t, we get [[gt ]] = [[q]] .

(10.2.33)

Also, on account of eqn (10.2.29) we obtain [[gx ]] = − [[η]] .

(10.2.34)

Thus, using eqns (10.2.31), (10.2.33) and (10.2.34) we obtain the following relation between the jumps [[η]] and [[q]] [[q]] = V [[η]] .

(10.2.35)

This relation is a thermal equivalent of the kinematic compatibility condition (10.2.28). Finally, we introduce the function Q = Q(x, t) through Q t = q + t 0 qt .

(10.2.36)


Integrating this relation with respect to time, we obtain t Q(x, t) − Q(x, 0) = q(x, τ )dτ + t0 [q(x, t) − q(x, 0)].

265

(10.2.37)

0

From this, given eqn (10.2.17), we find [[Q]] = t0 [[q]] .

(10.2.38)

Now, let us observe that the relations (10.2.6) and (10.2.36) imply the relation Qt = −ϑx ,

(10.2.39)

which is analogous to the relation (10.2.3) in the sense that the pair (η, q) corresponds to the pair (Q, ϑ). Thus, proceeding in the same manner as in the derivation of eqn (10.2.35), we obtain [[ϑ]] = V [[Q]] .

(10.2.40)

Hence, on account of eqn (10.2.38) we find the following relation between the jumps [[ϑ]] and [[q]] [[ϑ]] = t0 V [[q]] .

(10.2.41)

Furthermore, let us consider the constitutive relations (10.2.4) and (10.2.5). Operating with [[·]] on them, we find [[S]] = [[e]] − [[ϑ]] ,

(10.2.42)

[[η]] = [[e]] + [[ϑ]] .

(10.2.43)

[[υ]] = −V [[e]] ,

(10.2.44)

We also note the relation

which may be obtained by differentiating eqn (10.2.14) with respect to time and using eqns (10.2.1), (10.2.8) and (10.2.20). From the relations (10.2.28) and (10.2.44) we now get [[S]] = V 2 [[e]] .

(10.2.45)

Thus, eliminating the jump [[S]] from eqns (10.2.42) and (10.2.45) we obtain [[ϑ]] = −(V 2 − 1) [[e]] .

(10.2.46)

On the other hand, eliminating the jumps [[η]] and [[q]] from eqns (10.2.35), (10.2.41) and (10.2.43), we obtain 2 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) [[ϑ]] = −V [[e]] .

(10.2.47)

From this, on account of eqns (10.2.46) and (10.2.47), the necessary and sufficient condition for the propagation of a plane wave front described by eqn (10.2.11) is that V be a positive root of the algebraic equation 2 2 (V 2 − t−1 0 )(V − 1) − V = 0.

(10.2.48)

266


It can be shown that eqn (10.2.48) has two positive roots. Denoting these roots by υˆ1 = υˆ1 (t0 , ) and υˆ2 = υˆ2 (t0 , ), we obtain 1 υˆ1−2 = 1 + (1 + )t0 + [1 + (1 + )t0 ]2 − 4t0 , (10.2.49) 2 1 υˆ2−2 = 1 + (1 + )t0 − [1 + (1 + )t0 ]2 − 4t0 . (10.2.50) 2 Comparing the formulas (10.2.49)–(10.2.50) with eqns (6.3.1)1 and (6.3.1)2 for t1 = t0 , we conclude that the speeds υˆ1 and υˆ2 are identical, respectively, with the speeds of the first and second thermoelastic disturbances in the G–L theory in which t0 = t1 . Thus, we are led to the following theorem. Theorem 10.1 A discontinuous-in-time stress–temperature loading applied to the boundary of a half-space x ≥ 0 gives rise to a disturbance consisting of two plane stress–temperature waves of order n = 0 propagating in the positive direction of the x-axis with speeds of the first and second thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory in which t0 = t1 . Schematic graphs of the functions υˆ1 (t0 ) and υˆ2 (t0 ) for a fixed > 0 and t0 > 1.5 are shown in Fig. 6.7. The graphs of the functions υˆ1 () and υˆ2 () for a fixed t0 > 1 and > 0 are shown in Fig. 6.3 in which ξ = t0 . Let us now assume the boundary loading to be of the form S(0, t) = S0 H(t),

ϑ(0, t) = ϑ0 H(t),

(10.2.51)

where S0 and ϑ0 are constant, while H(t) is the Heaviside function. Since a total disturbance of the half-space is the sum of two plane waves of order zero relative to the pair (S, ϑ), some of the externally applied discontinuities propagate into the half-space at the speed υˆ1 , while other discontinuities propagate at the speed υˆ2 . Denoting these discontinuities by (S1 , ϑ1 ) and (S2 , ϑ2 ), for x = 0 and t = 0, we obtain S0 = S1 + S2 ,

ϑ0 = ϑ 1 + ϑ 2 .

(10.2.52)

Eliminating the jump [[e]] from eqns (10.2.45) and (10.2.47), and taking the result at t = x = 0 and V = υî (i = 1, 2), we obtain ϑ1 = − 2 ϑ2 = − 2 S2 . (10.2.53) −1 S1 , υˆ1 − t0 υˆ2 − t−1 0 In the above S0 = [[S]] (0),

ϑ0 = [[ϑ]] (0),

(10.2.54)

Si = [[S]]i (0),

ϑi = [[ϑ]]i (0),

(10.2.55)

and [[·]]i (t) is the jump at the ith wavefront (i = 1, 2). Equations (10.2.52) and (10.2.53) may be treated as a system of four linear equations for four unknowns S1 , S2 , ϑ1 and ϑ2 , whenever the pair (S0 , ϑ0 ) is


267

known. In the case when S0 = 0 and ϑ0 = 0, the solution of that system is υˆ12 − t−1 υˆ12 − t−1 0 0 S , S = − S0 , 0 2 υˆ12 − υˆ22 υˆ12 − υˆ22 S0 , ϑ2 = 2 S0 . ϑ1 = − 2 2 υˆ1 − υˆ2 υˆ1 − υˆ22

S1 =

(10.2.56) (10.2.57)

Because we have (recall eqn (6.3.25)) υˆ12 − t−1 0 < 0,

(10.2.58)

υˆ22 − t−1 0 > 0,

(10.2.59)

υˆ2 > υˆ1 ,

(10.2.60)

and, for t0 > 1, (recall Fig. 6.7)

then, in the case when S0 < 0, on account of eqns (10.2.56) and (10.2.57) we obtain S1 < 0,

S2 < 0,

(10.2.61)

ϑ1 < 0,

ϑ2 > 0.

(10.2.62)

It follows from the relations (10.2.46) and (10.2.48) that, for t0 > 0, [[ϑ]]i = −(ˆ υi2 − 1) [[e]]i ,

(10.2.63)

and [[ϑ]]i = −

υî2

ˆ υi2 [[e]]i − t−1 0

(i = 1, 2).

(10.2.64)

From this, in view of eqns (10.2.58) and (10.2.59) ∀t > 0 and t0 > 1 we obtain [[ϑ]]1 [[e]]1 > 0,

(10.2.65)

[[ϑ]]2 [[e]]2 < 0.

(10.2.66)

and

Thus, a rise in temperature at the wavefront t = x/ˆ υ1 ([[ϑ]]1 < 0) is accompanied by a compression ([[e]]1 < 0), while a rise in temperature at the wavefront t = x/ˆ υ2 ([[ϑ]]2 < 0) is accompanied by a tension ([[e]]2 > 0). We shall now show that the “amplitude” [[S]]i (or [[ϑ]]i ) decreases exponentially in time and the exponent describing that decay is identical with the reduced damping coefficient for the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory restricted to t1 = t0 (recall eqn (6.5.47)1 ).

268


Theorem 10.2 In the problem under consideration the amplitude [[S]]i (or [[ϑ]]i ) satisfies the linear ordinary first-order differential equation d ˆ i [[S]] = 0 +h ∀t ≥ 0, (10.2.67) i dt where (recall eqns (6.5.47) and (6.4.1)–(6.4.3)) ˆ i = 1 υˆ2 kî > 0 h (i = 1, 2), 2 i 1 ˆ 1/2 ) > 0, ˆ ∆ kˆ1,2 = (1 + ∓ α 2 ˆ α ˆ = [1 − − (1 + )2 t0 ]∆

−1

(10.2.68) (10.2.69)

,

(10.2.70)

ˆ = [1 − (1 − )t0 ]2 + 4t2 . ∆ 0

(10.2.71)

Proof. On account of eqn (10.2.20) we have d [[q]] = [[qt ]] + V [[qx ]] , dt

(10.2.72)

while from the formulas (10.2.3) and (10.2.5) we obtain [[qx ]] = − [[et ]] − [[ϑt ]] .

(10.2.73)

Furthermore, taking the jump in eqn (10.2.6), we find [[q]] + t0 [[qt ]] = − [[ϑx ]] .

(10.2.74)

Eliminating the amplitudes [[qt ]] and [[qx ]] from eqns (10.2.72)–(10.2.74), we get 1 1 d [[q]] + [[q]] + V [[et ]] = −V [[ϑt ]] − [[ϑx ]] . dt t0 t0

(10.2.75)

Also, given eqn (10.2.20) d [[ϑ]] = [[ϑt ]] + V [[ϑx ]] . dt This, together with the formula (10.2.47), leads to V 2 1 d − 2 [[e]] − [[ϑt ]] . [[ϑx ]] = V V − t−1 0 dt

(10.2.76)

(10.2.77)

Next, on account of eqns (10.2.41) and (10.2.47), we have [[q]] = −

V 2 [[e]] . t0 V (V 2 − t−1 0 )

(10.2.78)


269

Substituting the amplitudes [[ϑx ]] and [[q]] given by eqns (10.2.77) and (10.2.78), respectively, into eqn (10.2.75), we obtain 1 d 2 2 [[e]] + [[e]] − t0 V 2 (V 2 − t−1 V 0 ) [[et ]] dt t0 (10.2.79) 2 = t0 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) [[ϑt ]] .

Let us next consider the relation (recall eqn (10.2.20)) d [[S]] = [[St ]] + V [[Sx ]] , dt

(10.2.80)

which, in light of eqns (10.2.4) and (10.2.9), becomes d [[S]] = [[et ]] − [[ϑt ]] + V [[υt ]] . dt

(10.2.81)

Recalling eqn (10.2.28), we have [[S]] = −V [[υ]] ,

(10.2.82)

d [[S]] = −V {[[υt ]] + V [[υx ]]} , dt

(10.2.83)

so that

or, in view of eqns (10.2.1) and (10.2.8), d [[S]] = −V {[[υt ]] + V [[et ]]} . dt

(10.2.84)

Adding eqns (10.2.81) and (10.2.84), we find [[ϑt ]] = −2

d [[S]] − (V 2 − 1) [[et ]] . dt

(10.2.85)

Let us also note from eqn (10.2.45) that [[e]] = V −2 [[S]] .

(10.2.86)

Substituting [[ϑt ]] and [[e]] given by eqns (10.2.85) and (10.2.86), respectively, into eqn (10.2.79), we obtain 1 d 2 [[S]] + [[S]] − t0 V 2 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) [[et ]] dt t0 (10.2.87) d −1 2 2 2 = t0 (V − t0 ) −(V − 1) [[et ]] − 2 [[S]] . dt In view of eqn (10.2.48), this equation reduces to d ˆ [[S]] = 0, +h dt

(10.2.88)

270


where ˆ= h

. 2 2t0 [ + t0 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) ]

(10.2.89)

On account of eqns (10.2.88) and (10.2.89), for the ith front given by the equation t = x/ˆ υi we find d ˆ i [[S]] = 0, +h (10.2.90) i dt where î = h

. 2 2t0 [ + t0 (ˆ υi2 − t−1 0 ) ]

(10.2.91)

Employing eqns (10.2.48) and (10.2.89) one can show that 2 2 ˆ = V (1 + − V ) . h −1 2t0 t0 − V 4

(10.2.92)

From this and from the definitions of υî (recall eqns (10.2.49) and (10.2.50)) ˆ i is given by the formula and kî (recall eqns (10.2.69)–(10.2.71)) we infer that h (10.2.68). Remark 10.4 It follows from Theorem 10.2 that the amplitude [[S]]i is a decreasing function of t: ˆ i t}. [[S]]i (t) = [[S]]i (0) exp{−h

(10.2.93)

î = h ˆ i (t0 , ) with respect to t0 (for a Remark 10.5 A behavior of the function h fixed ) is determined by a behavior of υî (t0 ) and kî (t0 ), whose graphs are shown in Figs. 6.7 and 6.9, respectively. Also, it follows from eqns (10.2.49), (10.2.50) ˆ 2 → +∞ for t0 → 0. ˆ 1 → /2 and h and (10.2.91) that h 10.3 Propagation of a plane acceleration wave in a thermoelastic half-space with two relaxation times Consider a homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic half-space with two relaxation times, occupying a thermoelastic half-space x ≥ 0. Let us assume that the halfspace boundary is subjected to a time-dependent stress–heat-flux loading with the first derivatives discontinuous at t = 0. This means that the loading is specified in terms of a pair (S, q), where S and q denote, respectively, the stress and heat-flux vector aligned with x, whereby St and qt have discontinuities at t = x = 0 5 . Clearly, that loading gives rise to the propagation of a plane thermoelastic wave in the half-space. Adopting, just like in Section 10.2, dimensionless constitutive parameters and dimensionless independent and dependent variables, we conclude that this wave is described by a system of dimensionless 5

See the notations (10.2.7).

Propagation of a plane acceleration wave

271

functions (u, e, S, ϑ, η, q), defined for every (x, t) ∈ [0, ∞) × [0, ∞) and satisfying the 1D field equations of the G–L theory. Thus, we have: the strain–displacement equation e = ux ,

(10.3.1)

Sx = utt ,

(10.3.2)

ηt = −qx ,

(10.3.3)

S = e − ϑ − t1 ϑt ,

(10.3.4)

η = e + ϑ + t0 ϑt ,

(10.3.5)

q = −ϑx .

(10.3.6)

the equation of motion

the energy balance

the constitutive equations

Here, (t0 , t1 ) is a dimensionless pair of relaxation times in the G–L theory (t1 ≥ t0 > 0), while other symbols have the same meaning as in Section 10.2. Just like in Section 10.2, note that, if υ denotes the particle velocity in the x-direction υ = ut ,

(10.3.7)

then, in view of eqns (10.3.1) and (10.3.2), we obtain υx = et ,

(10.3.8)

S x = υt .

(10.3.9)

u = φx ,

(10.3.10)

It can also be shown that, if

where φ is a scalar field, then a pair (u, ϑ) corresponds to a process (u, e, S, ϑ, η, q), provided the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the 1D potential–temperature equations of the G–L theory corresponding to zero body forces and heat sources (recall eqns (4.2.7) specialized to coupled fields dependent on x and t only). In the following we show that the boundary stress–heat-flux loading gives rise to a superposition of plane thermoelastic waves of order n = 2 relative to a pair (u, ϑ) (recall Definition 10.5 of Section 10.1), that is, the waves for which [[utt ]] = 0

and

[[ϑtt ]] = 0,

(10.3.11)

at a front given by t= where V > 0.

x , V

(10.3.12)

272


It follows from the definition of a wave of order n = 2 relative to the pair (u, ϑ) that [[e]] = 0,

[[υ]] = 0,

[[S]] = 0,

(10.3.13)

[[ϑ]] = 0,

[[η]] = 0,

[[q]] = 0,

(10.3.14)

on the front described by eqn (10.3.12). In order to demonstrate the existence of a wavefront (10.3.12) on which there hold the relations (10.3.11), (10.3.13) and (10.3.14), we use the relation (recall (10.2.20)) d [[f ]] = [[ft ]] + V [[fx ]] , dt

(10.3.15)

where f = f (x, t) is an arbitrary function. Let us note here that the relations (10.3.1), (10.3.4)–(10.3.7), (10.3.13) and (10.3.14) imply [[ux ]] = 0,

[[ut ]] = 0,

(10.3.16)

[[ϑx ]] = 0,

[[ϑt ]] = 0.

(10.3.17)

Furthermore, differentiating eqns (10.3.13) and (10.3.14) with respect to time and using eqn (10.3.15), we obtain [[et ]] + V [[ex ]] = 0,

(10.3.18)

[[υt ]] + V [[υx ]] = 0,

(10.3.19)

[[St ]] + V [[Sx ]] = 0,

(10.3.20)

[[ηt ]] + V [[ηx ]] = 0,

(10.3.21)

[[qt ]] + V [[qx ]] = 0.

(10.3.22)

Of course, none of the jumps appearing in eqns (10.3.18)–(10.3.22) vanishes on the front specified by eqn (10.3.12). If we introduce the notation [[utt ]] = a,

(10.3.23)

then, on account of eqn (10.3.2), we get [[Sx ]] = a,

(10.3.24)

[[St ]] = −V a.

(10.3.25)

and hence, given eqn (10.3.20),

Next, taking note of eqns (10.3.1), (10.3.7) and (10.3.19), we obtain a + V [[et ]] = 0.

(10.3.26)


273

Hence, a . V This relation, along with eqn (10.3.18), implies a [[ex ]] = 2 . V Now, taking the jump in eqn (10.3.3), we find [[et ]] = −

[[qx ]] = − [[ηt ]] ,

(10.3.27)

(10.3.28)

(10.3.29)

which, in view of eqns (10.3.21), (10.3.5), and (10.3.17)1 , leads to [[qx ]] = V [[ηx ]] = V { [[ex ]] + t0 [[ϑtx ]]} ,

(10.3.30)

or, using eqns (10.3.6) and (10.3.28), gives a. (10.3.31) V Combining this equation with an equation equivalent to eqn (10.3.22) [[qx ]] + V t0 [[qt ]] =

1 [[qt ]] = 0, (10.3.32) V and solving the system (10.3.31) and (10.3.32) with respect to [[qx ]] and [[qt ]], yields a , (10.3.33) [[qx ]] = − V t0 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) [[qx ]] +

[[qt ]] =

a . t0 (V − t−1 0 ) 2

(10.3.34)

Furthermore, differentiating eqns (10.3.17)1 and (10.3.17)2 with respect to time and using eqn (10.3.15), we find [[ϑxt ]] + V [[ϑxx ]] = 0,

(10.3.35)

[[ϑtt ]] + V [[ϑtx ]] = 0.

(10.3.36)

From this, on account of eqn (10.3.6), we get [[ϑxt ]] = − [[qt ]] ,

(10.3.37)

[[ϑxx ]] = V −1 [[qt ]] ,

(10.3.38)

[[ϑtt ]] = V [[qt ]] .

(10.3.39)

It follows from eqns (10.3.37)–(10.3.39) and (10.3.33) and (10.3.34) that none of the jumps appearing on the left-hand sides of eqns (10.3.37)–(10.3.39) vanish so long as a = 0.

274


If we differentiate eqn (10.3.4) with respect to x, take the jump of the resulting equation and use eqns (10.3.24) and (10.3.17)1 , then we obtain a = [[ex ]] − t1 [[ϑtx ]] , from which, on account of eqns (10.3.28) and (10.3.37), we find 1 t1 [[qt ]] = 1 − 2 a. V

(10.3.40)

(10.3.41)

Therefore, substituting the amplitude [[qt ]] given by eqn (10.3.34) into eqn (10.3.41), we infer that the necessary and sufficient condition for the propagation of a plane displacement–temperature acceleration wave in the half-space is that V be a positive root of the algebraic equation 2 (V 2 − t−1 0 )(V − 1) −

t1 2 V = 0. t0

(10.3.42)

Similarly to what was done in Section 10.2, one can show that this equation has two positive roots. Denoting these roots by υ1.2 = υ1.2 (t0 , ζ) and ζ = t1 , we obtain 1 −2 1 + t0 + ζ ± ∆1/2 , (10.3.43) = υ1.2 2 where ∆ = (1 − t0 + ζ)2 + 4ζt0 .

(10.3.44)

Comparing the formulas (10.3.43) and (10.3.44) with eqns (6.3.1) and (6.3.2), we conclude that the speeds υ1 and υ2 are identical, respectively, with the speeds of the first and second fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory. Also, note that the relations (10.3.25) and (10.3.34) with a = 0 ∀t ≥ 0 correspond to a stress–heat-flux boundary loading with the first derivatives discontinuous at t = 0. Thus, we are led to the following theorem. Theorem 10.3 A stress–heat-flux loading with the first derivatives discontinuous at t = 0 and applied to the boundary of a half-space x ≥ 0 gives rise to a thermoelastic wave consisting of two plane displacement–temperature waves of order n = 2 propagating in the positive direction of the x-axis with speeds of the first and second fundamental thermoelastic disturbances of the G–L theory. Schematic graphs of functions υ1 (ζ) and υ2 (ζ) for a fixed t0 ≥ 1 and ζ > 0 are shown in Figs. 6.3 and 6.4. The graphs of functions υ1 (t0 ) and υ2 (t0 ) for a fixed ζ > 0 and t0 > 1.5 are shown in Fig. 6.6. Let us assume the boundary loading to be S(0, t) = S (0) (t),

q(0, t) = q (0) (t),

(10.3.45)


where the functions S (0) and q (0) satisfy the conditions q (0) (0) = 0, S (0) (0) = 0, (0) (0) St (0) = 0, qt (0) = 0. Furthermore, let us introduce the notations (0) (0) (0), q˙0 = qt (0). S˙ 0 = St

275

(10.3.46) (10.3.47)

(10.3.48)

The externally applied discontinuities (10.3.48) can be treated as superpositions of jumps (S˙ 1 , q˙1 ) and (S˙ 2 , q˙2 ) that correspond to the wavefronts at speeds υ1 and υ2 taken at x = t = 0. The pair (S˙ i , q˙i ) is defined here by the relations S˙ i = [[St ]]i (0)

q˙i = [[qt ]]i (0),

(10.3.49)

where [[·]]i (t) is the jump at the ith wavefront (i = 1, 2). Employing eqns (10.3.25) and (10.3.41), we now obtain the system of algebraic equations, which defines the pair (S˙ i , q˙i ) with the help of the pair (S˙ 0 , q˙0 ), namely S˙ 1 + S˙ 2 = S˙ 0 , υ12 − 1 ˙ S1 + t1 q˙1 = 0, υ13

q˙1 + q˙2 = q˙0 , υ22 − 1 ˙ S2 + t1 q˙2 = 0. υ23

(10.3.50)

In the case when S˙ 0 = 0 and q˙0 = 0, a solution of that system takes the form −3/2

t1 t0

q˙0 , −1/2 (υ2 − υ1 )(t0 + ζt−1 0 + 1) −3/2 t1 t0 q˙0 S˙ 2 = − , −1/2 (υ2 − υ1 )(t0 + ζt−1 0 + 1) υ2 (υ22 − t−1 0 )q˙0 q˙1 = , −1/2 (υ2 − υ1 )(t0 + ζt−1 0 + 1) 2 υ1 (t−1 0 − υ1 )q˙0 q˙2 = . −1/2 (υ2 − υ1 )(t0 + ζt−1 0 + 1) S˙ 1 =

(10.3.51)

Since (recall Fig. 6.6) υ2 − υ1 > 0,

υ22 − t−1 0 > 0,

2 t−1 0 − υ1 > 0,

(10.3.52)

on account of eqn (10.3.51) for q˙0 < 0 we obtain S˙ 1 < 0, q˙1 < 0,

S˙ 2 > 0, q˙2 < 0.

(10.3.53)

For an arbitrary t > 0, in view of eqns (10.3.25) and (10.3.41), we find [[St ]]1 [[qt ]]1 > 0,

[[St ]]2 [[qt ]]2 < 0.

(10.3.54)

276


It follows from these inequalities that, on a faster wavefront (υ = υ2 ), a decrease in the stress rate is accompanied by an increase in the heat-flux rate, whereas, on a slower wavefront (υ = υ1 ), an increase in the stress rate is accompanied by an increase in the heat-flux rate. We now show the following theorem concerning [[qt ]]i (or [[St ]]i ): Theorem 10.4 For every t ≥ 0 the amplitude [[qt ]]i satisfies the following linear first-order differential equation d + hi [[qt ]]i = 0, (10.3.55) dt where 6 1 2 υ ki (i = 1, 2) . (10.3.56) 2 i Here, υi is determined by the formulas (10.3.43) and (10.3.44) and (recall eqn (6.2.9)) hi =

k1.2 =

1 (1 + ∓ α∆1/2 ), 2

(10.3.57)

α = −[(1 + )(t0 + ζ) − (1 − )]∆−1 ,

(10.3.58)

∆ = (1 − t0 + ζ) + 4ζt0 .

(10.3.59)

2

Proof. First, let us observe that the constitutive equations (10.3.4) and (10.3.5) can be rewritten in the equivalent form η=

S = e − ϑ − t 1 ϑt , t0 t0 t0 ϑ − S. + e+ 1− t1 t1 t1

(10.3.60) (10.3.61)

Differentiating eqn (10.3.61) twice with respect to x, using eqn (10.3.6) and taking the jump at the wavefront of the thus-obtained equation, yields t0 t0 t0 [[ηxx ]] = [[qx ]] − [[Sxx ]] . + [[exx ]] − 1 − (10.3.62) t1 t1 t1 On the other hand, from eqns (10.3.30) and (10.3.32) we obtain 1 [[qt ]] . (10.3.63) V2 Differentiating this relation with respect to t and using eqn (10.3.15), gives [[ηx ]] = −

[[ηxt ]] + V [[ηxx ]] = −

1 d [[qt ]] , V 2 dt

(10.3.64)

6 According to the notations of Section 6.5 [see eqn (6.5.47)], the parameter h stands for i the reduced attentuation coefficient of the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance of the G–L theory.


277

or, on account of eqn (10.3.3), − [[qxx ]] + V [[ηxx ]] = −

1 d [[qt ]] , V 2 dt

(10.3.65)

which leads to an alternative form of eqn (10.3.62) [[ηxx ]] = −

1 d 1 [[qt ]] + [[qxx ]] . 3 V dt V

(10.3.66)

Furthermore, from eqn (10.3.15) we find d [[qx ]] = [[qxt ]] + V [[qxx ]] . dt

(10.3.67)

From this, in view of eqn (10.3.32), we obtain [[qxx ]] = −

1 d 1 [[qt ]] − [[qxt ]] . V 2 dt V

(10.3.68)

Substituting [[qxx ]] from the above into eqn (10.3.66), and setting the righthand sides of eqns (10.3.62) and (10.3.66) equal, we get t0 1 2 d [[qt ]] + 1− [[qt ]] = V 3 dt V t1 (10.3.69) t0 1 t0 [[Sxx ]] − + [[exx ]] − 2 [[qxt ]] . t1 t1 V On the other hand, differentiating eqn (10.3.60) twice with respect to x and using eqn (10.3.6) yields qxt =

1 (Sxx − exx − qx ) . t1

(10.3.70)

Taking the jump on both sides of the above, and using eqn (10.3.32), results in 1 1 [[Sxx ]] − [[exx ]] + [[qt ]] . (10.3.71) [[qxt ]] = t1 V Now, substituting [[qxt ]] from the above into the right-hand side of eqn (10.3.69) gives ! 1 2 d [[qt ]] + 3 1 + V 2 (t1 − t0 ) [[qt ]] = 3 V dt V t1 [1 − V 2 (t0 + t1 )] t0 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) [[S ]] + [[exx ]] . xx t1 V2 V 2 t1

(10.3.72)

278


Furthermore, differentiating eqns (10.3.27) and (10.3.28) with respect to time t and using eqn (10.3.15), we obtain 1 a, ˙ V 1 [[ext ]] + V [[exx ]] = 2 a. ˙ V

[[ett ]] + V [[etx ]] = −

(10.3.73) (10.3.74)

Eliminating the amplitude [[ext ]] from this, yields [[ett ]] − V 2 [[exx ]] = −

2 a, ˙ V

(10.3.75)

or, given the equation of motion (10.3.2) and eqn (10.3.34), gives [[Sxx ]] = V 2 [[exx ]] −

2 t0 (V 2 − t−1 0 ) d [[qt ]] . V dt

(10.3.76)

Finally, substituting [[Sxx ]] from the above into eqn (10.3.72), we infer that, on account of eqn (10.3.42), the coefficient in front of [[exx ]] vanishes and that the equation reduces to d + h [[qt ]] = 0, (10.3.77) dt in which [1 + V 2 (t1 − t0 )] −1 2 . 2 2t0 [t1 t−1 0 + t0 (V − t0 ) ]

h=

(10.3.78)

Clearly, since t1 ≥ t0 > 0 and > 0, it follows that h > 0. Also, if t1 = t0 ˆ where h ˆ is the reduced attenuation coefficient of the L–S theory then h = h, (recall Theorem 10.2). On the ith wavefront given by t = x/υi , on account of eqns (10.3.77) and (10.3.78), we have d + hi [[qt ]]i = 0, (10.3.79) dt where hi =

[1 + υi2 (t1 − t0 )] −1 2 , 2 2t0 [t1 t−1 0 + t0 (υi − t0 ) ]

(10.3.80)

with υi (i = 1, 2) determined by eqns (10.3.43) and (10.3.44). Finally, using eqn (10.3.42), it can be shown that h=

1 V 2 (1 + − V 2 ) . 4 2t0 (t−1 0 −V )

(10.3.81)


279

From this and the definition of υi , and ki (recall eqns (10.3.57)–(10.3.59)) we conclude that hi is given by eqn (10.3.56). Remark 10.6 It follows from Theorem 10.4 that the amplitude [[qt ]]i is a decreasing function of t: [[qt ]]i (t) = [[qt ]]i (0) exp{−hi t}.

(10.3.82)

Remark 10.7 It can be shown that the parameters υi and hi are identical with the speeds and the reduced attenuation coefficients for a plane wave propagating in the half-space x ≥ 0, which is determined by a solution of an initial-boundary value problem for small times using the Laplace transform method [see, e.g. (Chandrasekharaiah, 1981) for t1 > t0 > 0 and (Sherief and Dhaliwal, 1981) for t1 = t0 > 0]. The pair (υi , hi ) also determines the speeds and the reduced attentuation coefficients for the spherical and cylindrical waves generated in an infinite space by a point or line heat source, respectively [recall the solution of Nowacki type in Section 7.4 and the approximate solutions given in (Sherief, 1986) and (Sherief and Anwar, 1994)]. Remark 10.8 Problems of moving discontinuity surfaces in various generalizations of hyperbolic thermoelasticity, in particular, those dealing with the influence of thermal and piezo-electric fields on propagating elastic stress jumps, have gained momentum only recently (El-Karamany and Ezzat, 2004 and 2005).

11 TIME-PERIODIC SOLUTIONS

Similar to the situation in classical linear theory of dynamical coupled thermoelasticity, a relatively large number of problems satisfactorily solved so far in the L–S and G–L theories involve periodic-in-time thermoelastic disturbances. This is due to the fact that the assumption of periodicity allows one to reduce the field equations of both theories to classical Helmholtz equations with complex wave numbers and then to use the methods of classical elastodynamics in solving particular problems. In the case of each problem, a pair of complex wave numbers, associated with the central equation of the given theory (recall eqns (6.1.2) and (6.1.7)) generates a pair of phase velocities and a pair of damping coefficients, which are fundamental characteristics of a periodic thermoelastic wave. In this chapter we analyze several problems of periodic vibrations in the framework of the G–L theory. In Sections 11.1–11.3 the focus is on plane, spherical and cylindrical waves propagating in an unbounded thermoelastic medium. Section 11.4 is devoted to an integral representation and radiation conditions for the potential– temperature solutions of the G–L theory.

11.1 Plane waves in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times Upon elimination from eqns (10.3.1)–(10.3.6) of the strain, stress, entropy and heat flux fields, we obtain the following 1D displacement–temperature field equations with two relaxation times uxx − utt = ϑx + t1 ϑtx ,

(11.1.1)

ϑxx − t0 ϑtt − ϑt = uxt .

Here, u and ϑ denote, respectively, the displacement in the x-direction and the temperature difference; t0 and t1 are the relaxation times of the G–L theory (t1 ≥ t0 > 0), while is the parameter of thermoelastic coupling. We assume a pair (u, ϑ) to be defined for every (x, t) ∈ (−∞, ∞) × [0, ∞) through the relation (u, ϑ) = (u0 , ϑ0 ) exp[i(ωt − ηx)]

(i2 = −1),

(11.1.2)

Plane waves in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times

281

where ω is the prescribed frequency (ω > 0) and η is the wave number, 1 which is determined from the condition that the pair (u, ϑ) be a non-trivial solution of the system (11.1.1), and (u0 , ϑ0 ) is a constant non-vanishing pair. The solution (11.1.2) represents a plane periodic-in-time wave, propagating in the x-direction. Its speed is given as ω . (11.1.3) c= Re η Its damping coefficient is 2 q = −Im η.

(11.1.4)

2π , Re η

(11.1.5)

Its wavelength is 3 λ= and the period is 2π . (11.1.6) ω Here, Re η and Im η stand, respectively, for the real and imaginary parts of η. The relations (11.1.3) and (11.1.4) imply that this number may be given in the form ω (11.1.7) η = − iq. c If Re η > 0 and Im η > 0, the pair (u, ϑ) represents a damped wave propagating in the x-direction with the speed c > 0. Substituting eqn (11.1.2) into eqn (11.1.1), we see that the pair (11.1.2) is a nontrivial solution to eqn (11.1.1) if the pair (u0 , ϑ0 ) is a non-trivial solution of the linear homogeneous system of algebraic equations T =

u0 (ω 2 − η 2 ) + ϑ0 (iη − t1 ωη) = 0, u0 ωη + ϑ0 (η 2 − t0 ω 2 + iω) = 0.

(11.1.8)

In order for (u0 , ϑ0 ) to be a non-trivial solution of the system (11.1.8) it is necessary and sufficient for the number η to satisfy the equation (ω 2 − η 2 )(η 2 + iω − t0 ω 2 ) − η 2 (iω − t1 ω 2 ) = 0,

(11.1.9)

This equation can also be written in the form η 4 − η 2 ω[(1 + t0 + t1 )ω − (1 + )i] + ω 3 (t0 ω − i) = 0.

(11.1.10)

1 The symbol η in eqn (11.1.2) must not be confused with the entropy function of Section 10.3. 2 The symbol q in eqn (11.1.4) must not be confused with the heat-flux function of Section 10.3. 3 The symbol λ in eqn (11.1.5) must not be confused with the coefficient of convolution of Section 6.2.

282

Time-periodic solutions

Three cases can be identified here: (a) If t1 = t0 = 0, eqn (11.1.10) becomes a characteristic equation of the classical coupled thermoelasticity (e.g. Deresiewicz, 1957). (b) If t1 = t0 > 0, eqn (11.1.10) reduces to a characteristic equation of the L–S theory [e.g. (Nayfeh and Nemat-Nasser, 1971; Puri, 1973; Agarwal, 1979)]. (c) If = 0, eqn (11.1.10) reduces to a characteristic equation of the uncoupled generalized dynamical theory of thermal stresses. Recall that in a range of real materials, the non-dimensional relaxation time t0 satisfies the inequality 4 1 < t0 < 16.

(11.1.11)

We shall now demonstrate that, for t0 > 0 (t1 ≥ t0 ) and for arbitrary > 0 and ω > 0, one can find two closed-form solutions of eqn (11.1.10) corresponding, respectively, to two plane thermoelastic waves propagating in the positive x-direction. To this end, let us represent eqn (11.1.10) in the form (η 2 − η12 )(η 2 − η22 ) = 0,

(11.1.12)

η1.2 = −is1.2 (iω),

(11.1.13)

where

and (recall eqns (7.4.15) and (7.4.16)) p 1/2 {(1 + ) + (1 + t0 + t1 )p ± ∆1/2 [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 }1/2 . s1.2 (p) = 2 (11.1.14) The symbols α, β and ∆, appearing in eqn (11.1.14), are defined in Theorem 6.1 on decomposition of the G–L theory (recall eqns (6.2.4) and (6.2.5)), that is α = −[(1 + )(t0 + t1 ) − (1 − )]∆−1 , √ β = 2 [1 + (1 + )(t1 − t0 )]1/2 ∆−1 ,

(11.1.15)

∆ = (1 − t0 + t1 ) + 4t0 t1 . 2

It follows from the relations (11.1.15) that α2 + β 2 = (1 + )2 ∆−1 .

(11.1.16)

In order to write eqn (11.1.13) in the form of eqn (11.1.7), so as to allow the determination of the phase velocities and damping coefficients, we note the fact that, for an arbitrary pair of real numbers (a, b), such that b ≥ 0, the following is true √ √ 1 √ a + ib = ± √ ( ρ + a + i ρ − a), (11.1.17) 2 4

See Section 6.5 and (Tao and Prevost, 1984).


in which ρ=

a2 + b2 .

283

(11.1.18)

Since t0 > 1, the parameter α given by eqn (11.1.15)1 is negative (see footnote 5 of Section 6.5). Thus, setting a = α2 + β 2 − ω 2 ,

b = −2αω ≥ 0

(11.1.19)

in eqn (11.1.17), and restricting ourselves to the plus sign, we obtain √ 1 √ [(iω − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 = √ ( ρ + a + i ρ − a), 2

(11.1.20)

in which ρ = [(α2 + β 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4α2 ω 2 ]1/2 . From this, on account of eqn (11.1.14), we find iω (1 + ) + i(1 + t0 + t1 )ω s21.2 (iω) = 2 √ ∆1/2 √ ± √ ( ρ + a + i ρ − a) , 2

(11.1.21)

(11.1.22)

or s21.2 (iω) =

∆1/2 √ − (1 + t0 + t1 )ω ± √ ρ−a 2 1/2 ∆ √ +i (1 + ) ± √ ρ+a . 2 ω 2

(11.1.23)

In the formula (11.1.23) the signs + and − correspond, respectively, to the numbers s21 (iω) and s22 (iω). Of course, we have ∆1/2 √ ω 2 (1 + ) + √ ρ + a ≥ 0, (11.1.24) Im[s1 (iω)] = 2 2 and we shall now show that also ∆1/2 √ ω (1 + ) − √ ρ + a ≥ 0. Im[s22 (iω)] = 2 2

(11.1.25)

Indeed, it will suffice to show that (1 + )2 −

∆ (ρ + a) ≥ 0. 2

(11.1.26)

284


Denoting the left-hand side of inequality (1.1.26) by L and using eqns (11.1.16), (11.1.19) and (11.1.21), we obtain L=

∆ {(α2 + β 2 + ω 2 ) − [(α2 + β 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4α2 ω 2 ]1/2 }, 2

(11.1.27)

or L = 2∆ω 2 β 2 {(α2 + β 2 + ω 2 ) + [(α2 + β 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4α2 ω 2 ]1/2 }−1 .

(11.1.28)

From this we infer that L ≥ 0 and the inequality (11.1.25) holds true. The inequalities (11.1.24) and (11.1.25) imply that the square root of both sides of eqn (11.1.23) can be computed with the help of formulas (11.1.17) and (11.1.18). Thus, taking the square root of eqn (11.1.23) and using eqn (11.1.17) with the plus sign, we obtain √ √ ω √ [ ρ1.2 + a1.2 + i ρ1.2 − a1.2 ], (11.1.29) s1.2 (iω) = 2 where ∆1/2 √ ρ1.2 = {[(1 + t0 + t1 )ω ± √ ρ − a ]2 2 ∆1/2 √ +[(1 + ) ± √ ρ + a ]2 }1/2 , 2

(11.1.30)

∆1/2 √ a1.2 = −[(1 + t0 + t1 )ω ± √ ρ − a ]. 2

(11.1.31)

and

Here, the numbers a and ρ are defined, respectively, by eqns and (11.1.21). Finally, substituting eqn (11.1.29) into eqn (11.1.13), the sought roots of eqn (11.1.10) ω η1.2 = − iq1.2 , c1.2 with the phase velocities c1.2 and damping coefficients q1.2 given by √ c1.2 = 2 ω(ρ1.2 − a1.2 )−1/2 , √ ω (ρ1.2 + a1.2 )1/2 . q1.2 = 2

(11.1.19)1 we obtain (11.1.32)

(11.1.33) (11.1.34)

Passing with to zero in these relations and introducing the notations lim (ci , qi ) = (c0i , qi0 )

(i = 1, 2),

(11.1.35)

2ω[(1 + t20 ω 2 )1/2 + t0 ω]−1/2 , 4 ω 0 q1 = [(1 + t20 ω 2 )1/2 − t0 ω]1/2 , 2

(11.1.36)

→0

we obtain c01 =

√

(11.1.37)


285

with c02 = 1, (c01 , q10 )

q20 = 0.

(11.1.38)

(c02 , q20 )

and correspond, respectively, to a purely thermal and a The pairs purely elastic wave, both propagating in the positive x-direction, in accordance with the uncoupled generalized dynamical theory of thermal stresses. In general, the relations (11.1.2) and (11.1.32) imply that, for > 0, ω > 0 and t1 ≥ t0 > 1, a plane thermoelastic wave propagating in the positive x direction is described by the pair (u, ϑ) in which x x 0 0 + u2 exp(−q2 x) exp iω t − , u = u1 exp(−q1 x) exp iω t − c1 c2 (11.1.39) and x x 0 0 ϑ = ϑ1 exp(−q1 x) exp iω t − + ϑ2 exp(−q2 x) exp iω t − . (11.1.40) c1 c2 Here, c1.2 and q1.2 are specified by the formulas (11.1.33) and (11.1.34), respectively. Furthermore, u01 and u02 are arbitrary complex numbers, while ϑ01 and ϑ02 are related to u01 and u02 through (recall eqn (11.1.8)1 for u0 = u0i , ϑ0 = ϑ0i , η = ηi , i = 1, 2) ϑ01 =

ω 2 − η12 0 u , η1 (t1 ω − i) 1

ϑ02 =

ω 2 − η22 0 u , η2 (t1 ω − i) 2

(11.1.41)

with η1.2 given by eqn (11.1.32). In the case when a thermomechanical loading u(0, t) = u ˆ0 exp(iωt),

ϑ(0, t) = ϑˆ0 exp(iωt),

(11.1.42)

is applied to the half-space (x ≥ 0) at its boundary, where the pair (ˆ u0 , ϑˆ0 ) is 0 0 given, the constants u1 and u2 are uniquely specified by the following system of equations ˆ0 , u01 + u02 = u

ϑ01 + ϑ02 = ϑˆ0 ,

(11.1.43)

in which ϑ01 and ϑ02 are replaced by eqns (11.1.41)1 and (11.1.41)2 , respectively. Clearly, a plane thermoelastic wave propagating in the negative x-direction is represented by the pair (u, ϑ) in which x x 0 0 + u4 exp(q2 x) exp iω t + , (11.1.44) u = u3 exp(q1 x) exp iω t + c1 c2 and

x x ϑ = ϑ03 exp(q1 x) exp iω t + + ϑ04 exp(q2 x) exp iω t + . (11.1.45) c1 c2

Here, u03 and u04 are arbitrary constants, while ϑ03 =

ω 2 − ηˆ12 0 u , ηˆ1 (t1 ω − i) 3

ϑ04 =

ω 2 − ηˆ22 0 u , ηˆ2 (t1 ω − i) 4

(11.1.46)

286


with ηˆ1.2 given by ηˆ1.2 = −

ω + iq1.2 . c1.2

(11.1.47)

Clearly, a plane thermoelastic wave propagating in the layer |x| ≤ l (2l = nondimensional layer thickness) due to a displacement–temperature loading applied to its boundaries x = ±l is a superposition of the pairs defined by eqns (11.1.39), (11.1.40), (11.1.44) and (11.1.45), whereby the constants u01 , u02 , u03 and u04 are uniquely specified through the four displacement–temperature boundary conditions at x = ±l. Approximate formulas for the phase velocities and damping coefficients We now derive asymptotic formulas for the phase velocities ci and damping coefficients qi (i = 1, 2) in the three cases: (i) ω is small: ω 1, (ii) ω is large: ω 1, (iii) is small: 1. In the cases (i) and (ii) the relaxation times are assumed to satisfy the inequalities t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0,

(11.1.48)

which implies that we admit a passage with the relaxation times to zero. 5 First, let us consider the case (i). The square of si determining ηi (recall eqn (11.1.13)) can be written as p (11.1.49) s21.2 (p) = ϕ1.2 (p), 2 where ϕ1.2 (p) = (1 + ) + (1 + t0 + t1 )p ± ∆1/2 [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]1/2 .

(11.1.50)

Here, small values of p correspond to low frequencies ω. Thus, an asymptotic expansion of the function s21.2 (iω) for small ω corresponds to the Taylor series expansion of ϕ1.2 (p) in a small neighborhood of p = 0. Computing three subsequent derivatives of ϕ1.2 (p), we obtain ϕ1.2 (p) = (1 + t0 + t1 ) ± ∆1/2 (p − α)[(p − α)2 + β 2 ]−1/2 ,

(11.1.51)

ϕ1.2 (p) = ± ∆1/2 β 2 [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]−3/2 ,

(11.1.52)

1/2 2 β (p − α)[(p − α)2 + β 2 ]−5/2 . ϕ 1.2 (p) = ∓ 3∆

(11.1.53)

Since (recall eqn (11.1.16)) α2 + β 2 = (1 + )2 ∆−1 ,

(11.1.54)

5 Such a passage is not possible in eqns (11.1.33) and (11.1.34) since those relations were obtained under the hypothesis t0 > 1.


287

therefore letting p = 0 in eqns (11.1.51)–(11.1.53), we find ϕ1.2 (0) = (1 + t0 + t1 ) ∓ ϕ1.2 (0) = ±

α ∆, 1+

(11.1.55)

β2 ∆2 , (1 + )3

(11.1.56)

αβ 2 ∆3 . (1 + )5

(11.1.57)

ϕ 1.2 (p) = ± 3

Furthermore, on account of eqns (11.1.50) and (11.1.54), we obtain ϕ1 (0) = 2(1 + ),

ϕ2 (0) = 0.

(11.1.58)

Also note that, in view of eqn (11.1.15)1 , the formulas (11.1.55) reduce to the forms 2 , ϕ2 (0) = . (11.1.59) ϕ1 (0) = 2 t0 + t1 + 1+ 1+ Thus, the functions ϕ1 (p) and ϕ2 (p) can be approximated by 1 t0 + t1 + p ϕ1 (p) = 2(1 + ) 1 + 1+ 1+ β 2 ∆2 2 αβ 2 ∆3 3 4 + p + p + O(p ) , 4(1 + )4 4(1 + )6 and 2p ϕ2 (p) = 1+

(11.1.60)

β 2 ∆2 αβ 2 ∆3 2 3 1− p− p + O(p ) . 4(1 + )2 4(1 + )4

From this, given the asymptotic expansion x for x → 0, (1 + x)1/2 → 1 + 2 we find

ϕ1 (p) = 2(1 + ) 1 +

1 2(1 + )

t0 + t1 +

1+

(11.1.62) p

β 2 ∆2 2 3 + p + O(p ) , 8(1 + )4 and ϕ2 (p) =

4

2p 1+

1−

(11.1.61)

β 2 ∆2 αβ 2 ∆3 2 3 p − p + O(p ) . 8(1 + )2 8(1 + )4

(11.1.63)

(11.1.64)

288


Thus, the functions s1.2 (p) defined by eqn (11.1.49) have the expansions

s1 (p) =

√

√ 1+ p 1+

1 2(1 + )

β 2 ∆2 2 3 + t0 + t1 p + p + O(p ) , 1+ 8(1 + )4 (11.1.65)

and αβ 2 ∆3 2 β 2 ∆2 3 p− p + O(p ) . 1− 8(1 + )2 8(1 + )4

p s2 (p) = √ 1+

(11.1.66)

Letting p = iω in the above and using the identity √

1 i = √ (1 + i), 2

(11.1.67)

we obtain s1 (iω) =

√ √ 1 ω + t0 + t1 ω 1− 1+ √ 2(1 + ) 1 + 2

1 β 2 ∆2 β 2 ∆2 2 2 3 + t0 + t1 ω − ω +i 1+ ω +O(ω ) , − 8(1 + )4 2(1 + ) 1 + 8(1 + )4 (11.1.68) and s2 (iω) = √

ω 1+

αβ 2 ∆3 2 β 2 ∆2 3 + O(ω ω + i 1 + ω ) . 8(1 + )2 8(1 + )4

(11.1.69)

From this, given eqn (11.1.13), we find √ η1 = 1 + −i 1 −

4

ω 2

1+

1 2(1 + )

β 2 ∆2 2 + t0 + t1 ω − ω 1+ 8(1 + )4

β 2 ∆2 1 2 3 + t0 + t1 ω − ω + O(ω ) , 2(1 + ) 1 + 8(1 + )4 (11.1.70)

and ω η2 = √ 1+

β 2 ∆2 αβ 2 ∆3 2 3 ω −i ω + O(ω ) . 1+ 8(1 + )4 8(1 + )2

(11.1.71)


289

Therefore, on account of eqn (11.1.7), relations (11.1.70) and (11.1.71) yield the asymptotic formulas for phase velocities and damping coefficients for ω1 1 β 2 ∆2 ω 2 + t0 + t1 ω − 1− , ω c1 ≈ √ 2(1 + ) 1 + 8(1 + )4 1 + ω/2 (11.1.72) 2 √ β2∆ 1 2 + t0 + t1 ω + , q1 ≈ 1 + ω/2 1 − ω 2(1 + ) 1 + 8(1 + )4 (11.1.73) √ αβ 2 ∆2 2 c2 ≈ 1 + 1 − (11.1.74) ω , 8(1 + )4 q2 ≈

β 2 ∆2 ω 2 √ . 8(1 + )4 1 +

(11.1.75)

Letting t0 = t1 = 0 in these equations, and using the relations √ α = 1 − , β = 2 , ∆ = 1, we obtain

√ ω 2 ω 2ω , − 1− cˆ1 ≈ √ 2(1 + )2 2(1 + )4 1+ 4 qˆ1 ≈

ω(1 + ) 2

cˆ2 ≈

ω 2 ω 1− + 2(1 + )2 2(1 + )4

√

(11.1.76)

(11.1.77)

(1 − ) 2 1− ω , 2(1 + )4

,

(11.1.78)

1+

qˆ2 ≈

ω 2 √ . 2(1 + )2 1 +

(11.1.79)

(11.1.80)

The pairs (ˆ c1 , qˆ1 ) and (ˆ c2 , qˆ2 ) correspond, respectively, to a quasi-thermal and a quasi-elastic wave of classical thermoelasticity ( > 0, ω 1). We now turn to the case (ii): ω 1. First, let us transform eqn (11.1.49) to the form s21.2 (p) =

p2 ψ1.2 (u), 2

(11.1.81)

where u = p−1 ,

(11.1.82)

290


and ψ1.2 (u) = (1 + t0 + t1 ) + (1 + )u ± ∆1/2 [(1 − αu)2 + β 2 u2 ]1/2 .

(11.1.83)

Here, large values of ω correspond to small values of u. Thus, in order to analyze the behavior of functions s21.2 (p) for large p, we shall consider Taylor’s expansions of ψ1.2 (u) in a neighborhood of u = 0. The first derivative of ψ1.2 (u) is (u) = (1 + ) ± ∆1/2 [(α2 + β 2 )u − α][(1 − αu)2 + β 2 u2 ]−1/2 . ψ1.2

(11.1.84)

Letting u = 0 in eqns (11.1.83) and (11.1.84), we find ψ1.2 (0) = (1 + t0 + t1 ) ± ∆1/2 ,

(11.1.85)

(0) = (1 + ) ∓ α∆1/2 . ψ1.2

(11.1.86)

Comparing these formulas with eqns (6.2.9)1 and (6.2.9)2 , we find that −2 ψ1.2 (0) = 2υ1.2 ,

ψ1.2 (0) = 2k1.2 ,

(11.1.87)

where υi and ki (i = 1, 2) represent, respectively, the speed and damping of the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory (recall Section 6.2). From the above, on account of eqn (11.1.81), we obtain 2 k1.2 υ1.2 p2 2 as p → ∞. (11.1.88) 1+ s1.2 (p) ≈ 2 υ1.2 p Taking the square root of the above, and using the asymptotic formula (11.1.62), gives p h1.2 as p → ∞, (11.1.89) s1.2 (p) ≈ 1+ υ1.2 p where ki υi2 (i = 1, 2) (11.1.90) 2 is the reduced damping coefficient for the ith fundamental thermoelastic disturbance in the G–L theory (recall eqn (6.5.47)1 ). Finally, letting p = iω in eqn (11.1.89) and substituting the result in the righthand side of eqn (11.1.13), we obtain hi =

η1.2 ≈

ω h1.2 −i υ1.2 υ1.2

for

ω→∞

(11.1.91)

Thus, for high frequencies, the phase velocities and the corresponding damping coefficients are defined by the formulas c∞ i = υi ,

qi∞ = hi /υi

(i = 1, 2)

(11.1.92)

Prior to the analysis of the case (iii), where 1, let us note that the formulas (11.1.91) are true for each triplet of the constitutive parameters (t0 , t1 , )


291

satisfying the inequalities t1 ≥ t0 ≥ 0,

≥ 0.

(11.1.93)

Let us also note that the point (t0 , t1 , ) = (1, 1, 0) is a bifurcation point of the function c∞ i = υi (recall Fig. 6.4). Thus, the asymptotic expansion of the function ηi in a Taylor series with respect to in a neighborhood of = 0 is correct only outside of a neighborhood of that bifurcation point. Considering the case (iii): 1, we assume that t1 ≥ t0 > 1, i.e. we analyze such an “external” expansion only. 6 To that end, first reduce eqn (11.1.9) to the form (1 − X)[1 − X(t0 − σ)] = X(t1 − σ),

(11.1.94)

where X=

ω2 , η2

σ=

i , ω

ω > 0,

|η| > 0.

(11.1.95)

Two “external” solutions of eqn (11.1.94) are sought in the form X10 = 1 + a1 + a2 2 + a3 3 + ...,

(11.1.96)

d1 + b1 + b2 2 + b3 3 + ..., d2

(11.1.97)

X20 = where

d1 =

1 , t1 − σ

d2 =

t0 − σ , t1 − σ

(11.1.98)

and the sequences an and bn (n = 1, 2, 3, . . .) are chosen so that the numbers X10 and X20 satisfy eqn (11.1.94). Substituting X10 into eqn (11.1.94) and setting equal the coefficients of like powers of , we obtain a1 , a2 , a3 , . . . . Thus, we arrive at X10 = 1 +

d1 2 − + O(3 ). d2 − d1 (d2 − d1 )3

A similar procedure related to X20 yields d1 d2 2 0 3 1− X2 = − + O( ) . d2 d2 − d1 (d2 − d1 )3

(11.1.99)

(11.1.100)

Retaining the terms of order only, gives ω2 = X10 = 1 + , 2 η1 d2 − d1 d1 ω2 0 1− . = X2 = η22 d2 d2 − d1

(11.1.101) (11.1.102)

6 An “internal” expansion of the pair (c , q ) with respect to is obtained in (Tao and i i Prevost, 1984).

292


From this we obtain 2 2 η1 = ω 1 + η22

=ω

d2 − d1

2 d2

d1

1− d2 − d1

−1

=ω

−1 =ω

1− d2 − d1

2

2 d2

d1

+ O(2 ),

1+ d2 − d 1

(11.1.103)

+ O(2 ).

(11.1.104)

Substituting d1 and d2 from eqn (11.1.98) into eqns (11.1.103) and (11.1.104), we find ωt1 − i 2 2 + O(2 ), (11.1.105) η1 = ω 1 − ω(t0 − 1) − i ωt1 − i 2 2 −1 −1 + O(2 ). 1+ η2 = ω t0 1 − iω t0 (11.1.106) ω(t0 − 1) − i Taking square roots of both sides of these relations and using the asymptotic formula (11.1.62) (for small ), we obtain [ω 2 (t0 − 1)t1 + 1] + iω(t1 − t0 + 1) , (11.1.107) η1 = ω 1 − 2[ω 2 (t0 − 1)2 + 1] [ω 2 (t0 − 1)t1 + 1] + iω(t1 − t0 + 1) 1/2 −1 −1 1/2 . η2 = ωt0 (1 − iω t0 ) 1+ 2[ω 2 (t0 − 1)2 + 1] (11.1.108) Furthermore, assuming t1 ≥ t0 1,

(11.1.109)

we have t0 t 1 − t 1 ≈ t 0 t 1 ,

t0 − 1 ≈ t0 ,

whereby eqns (11.1.107) and (11.1.108) reduce to the form ω 2 t0 t1 + 1 (t1 − t0 + 1) η1 = ω 1 − − iω 2 , 2(ω 2 t20 + 1) 2(ω 2 t20 + 1) η2 =

1/2 ωt0

i 1− ωt0

(11.1.110)

(11.1.111)

ω(t1 − t0 + 1) ω 2 t0 t1 + 1 +i . (11.1.112) 1+ 2(ω 2 t20 + 1) 2(ω 2 t20 + 1)

1/2

If also we assume ω 1, then

i 1− ωt0

1/2 ≈1−

i , 2ωt0

(11.1.113)


293

and the formulas (11.1.111) and (11.1.112) take the form 1 t1 (t1 − t0 + 1) −i , η1 ≈ ω 1 − 2 t0 2t20 η2 ≈

1/2 ωt0

1 t1 t1 + 2 − 2t0 1 1+ − i 1/2 1 − . 2 t0 2t0 2t0

(11.1.114)

(11.1.115)

Thus, for t1 ≥ t0 1, ω 1 and 1, we obtain the following formulas for the phase velocities and damping coefficients t1 , (11.1.116) c1 ∼ 1 + 2t0 t 1 − t0 + 1 , 2t20 t1 −1/2 1− c2 ∼ t0 , 2t0 1 t1 + 2 − 2t0 q2 ∼ 1/2 1 − . 2t0 2t0 q1 ∼

(11.1.117)

(11.1.118)

(11.1.119)

These formulas imply that the pairs (c1 , q1 ) and (c2 , q2 ) correspond, respectively, to a quasi-elastic and a quasi-thermal wave, similarly to the case (ii) (ω 1). In comparison to the “purely” elastic wave, which propagates with a unit velocity and without damping, a quasi-elastic wave possesses a higher velocity and a damping. The latter depend on the parameter and both relaxation times of the G–L theory. On the other hand, the quasi-thermal wave possesses a lower velocity and a weaker damping than the corresponding “purely” thermal wave that propagates in an undeformed solid body. A comparison of asymptotic expansions for the cases (i)–(iii) implies that only for ω 1 (case (i)) does the pair (c1 , q1 ) correspond to a quasi-thermal wave, while the pair (c2 , q2 ) correspond to a quasielastic wave. In the cases (ii) and (iii) the pairs (c1 , q1 ) and (c2 , q2 ) represent, respectively, the quasi-elastic and quasi-thermal waves. Explicit formulas for the pair (ci , qi )(i = 1, 2) [see eqns (11.1.33) and (11.1.34)], together with the asymptotic relations obtained for the cases (i)–(iii), allow graphs of the functions ci and qi to be drawn in the parameter space (t0 , t1 , ; ω). The graphs of theses functions, with E and T indicating, respectively, the quasi-elastic and quasi-thermal wave, are shown in Figs. 11.1 and 11.2. Figure 11.1 displays the speeds cE and cT as −1/2 for = 0.073, ω = 105 , and t1 /t0 = 10.0. Figure 11.2 displays functions of t0

294


c(cE ,cT) 2.5 2.0

range of practical interest

1.5

cE

1.0 0.5

0.0

cT 0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

t0

2.5 −1/2

Figure 11.1 The speeds cE and cT as functions of t0 and t1 /t0 = 10.0.

−1/2

the damping coefficients qE and qT as functions of t0 parameters.

1

– –2

for = 0.073, ω = 105 ,

for the same set of input

11.2 Spherical waves produced by a concentrated source of heat in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times Consider an unbounded homogeneous isotropic thermoelastic body with two relaxation times, referred to a spherical co-ordinate system (R, θ, ϕ). At the origin of the co-ordinate system there is a concentrated heat source characterized by a frequency ω > 0. The source gives rise to the time-periodic q (qE , qT) 1.0 0.8 range of practical interest

0.6 qT

0.4 0.2

qE 1

0.0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

–– t0 2 −1/2

Figure 11.2 The damping coefficients qE and qT as functions of t0 same parameters as in Fig. 11.1.

for the

Spherical waves produced by a concentrated source of heat in an infinite

295

potential–temperature spherical disturbances in terms of a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the equations 7 ∂ δ(x)eiωt Γφ = − 1 + t0 ∂t on E3 , (11.2.1) 2 ∂ 2 0 ∂ ϑ ∇ − 2 φ= 1+t ∂t ∂t and appropriate radiation conditions at infinity. Here ∂2 ∂ ∂2 2 2 2 ∂ 0 ∂ Γ= ∇ − 2 − ∇ 1+t ∇ − t0 2 − ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t

(11.2.2)

is the central operator of the G–L theory (recall eqn (6.1.8)), where t0 and t0 are the relaxation times and is the parameter of thermoelastic coupling. Furthermore, δ = δ(x) in (11.2.1)1 denotes the Dirac delta in the Cartesian coordinate system xi (i = 1, 2, 3). The radial displacement uR and stresses σR , σθ and σϕ are generated through the pair (φ, ϑ) according to the formulas (recall eqns (7.4.6) and (7.4.7)) uR =

∂φ , ∂R

2(1 − 2ν) 1 ¨ uR + φ, 1−ν R ν ¨ 1 − 2ν 1 ∂ uR − 1 + t0 ϑ + σθ = φ, 1−ν R ∂t 1−ν

(11.2.3)

σR = −

(11.2.4)

σϕ = σθ , where ν is the Poisson ratio. Given the spherical symmetry of these waves, the pair (φ, ϑ) depends on R and t only, while the operator ∇2 appearing in eqns (11.2.1) and (11.2.2) takes the form ∇2 =

∂2 2 ∂ . + ∂R2 R ∂R

(11.2.5)

In the following, we assume t0 > 1 (recall the inequality (11.1.11)). It can now be shown that with the above assumptions the only solution to eqns (11.2.1) vanishing as R → ∞ and representing a wave propagating from the

7

See eqns (6.1.10) in which we let t1 = t0 , r = δ(x)eiωt .

296


origin x = 0 to infinity is the pair defined by eiωt (1 + iωt0 ) {exp[−Rs1 (iω)] − exp[−Rs2 (iω)]}, 2 4πR s1 (iω) − s22 (iω)

φ(R, t) = ϑ(R, t) =

$ 2 ! eiωt 1 s1 (iω) − (iω)2 exp [−Rs1 (iω)] 2 2 4πR s1 (iω) − s2 (iω) ! % − s22 (iω) − (iω)2 exp [−Rs2 (iω)] ,

(11.2.6)

(11.2.7)

where the functions s1.2 (iω) are given by the formulas (recall eqns (11.1.13) and (11.1.29)–(11.1.34)) s1.2 (iω) = q1.2 + i Here,

ω . c1.2

(11.2.8)

√

ω (ρ1.2 + a1.2 )1/2 , 2 √ = 2 ω(ρ1.2 − a1.2 )1/2 ,

q1.2 = c1.2

(11.2.9) (11.2.10)

in which ( )2 ( )2 1/2   1/2 1/2 ∆ ∆ (1 + t0 + t0 )ω ± √ (ρ − a)1/2 + (1 + ) ± √ (ρ + a)1/2 , ρ1.2 =   2 2 (11.2.11) and

) ∆1/2 1/2 . = − (1 + t0 + t )ω ± √ (ρ − a) 2 (

a1.2

0

(11.2.12)

The parameters ρ and a in eqns (11.2.11) and (11.2.12) are specified by the formulas ρ = [(α2 + β 2 − ω 2 )2 + 4a2 ω 2 ]1/2 ,

(11.2.13)

a = α2 + β 2 − ω 2 .

(11.2.14)

and

Finally, the symbols α, β and ∆ in eqns (11.2.11)–(11.2.14) are defined in Theorem 6.1 [recall eqns (6.2.4) and (6.2.5)]: α = −[(1 + )(t0 + t0 ) − (1 − )]∆−1 , √ β = 2 [1 + (1 + )(t0 − t0 )]1/2 ∆−1 , ∆ = (1 − t0 + t ) + 4t0 t . 0 2

0

(11.2.15)


297

It follows from the formulas (11.2.9) and (11.2.10) that c1.2 > 0

and

q1.2 > 0,

(11.2.16)

which, on account of eqns (11.2.6) and (11.2.8), implies that the pair (φ, ϑ) can be represented in the form (φ, ϑ) = (φ(1) , ϑ(1) ) + (φ(2) , ϑ(2) ) ,

(11.2.17)

where (φ(i) , ϑ(i) ) (i = 1, 2) corresponds to a spherical thermoelastic disturbance propagating from the origin of the co-ordinate system to infinity with the velocity ci and damping qi . Also, note that eqns (11.2.6) and (11.2.7) can be represented in an equivalent form eiωt φ(R, t) = 4πR ϑ(R, t) =

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

−1

1 + iωt0 [M 1 (R, iω) − M 2 (R, iω)], iω

(11.2.18)

eiωt ˆ {N 1 (R, iω) + N 2 (R, iω) + (ˆ α + βiω)[M 1 (R, iω) − M 2 (R, iω)]}, 4πR (11.2.19)

where the functions M i (R, p) and N i (R, p), as well as the parameters υ1.2 , α ˆ ˆ are given by (recall eqns (7.4.22)–(7.4.27)) and β, M i (R, p) = [(p − α)2 + β 2 ]−1/2 exp[−Rsi (p)], N i (R, p) = exp[−Rsi (p)] −2 υ1.2 =

(i = 1, 2),

1 (1 + t0 + t0 ± ∆1/2 ), 2

(11.2.20) (11.2.21) (11.2.22)

α ˆ = (1 + )∆−1/2 ,

(11.2.23)

βˆ = (t0 + t0 − 1)∆−1/2 .

(11.2.24)

From the above and the formula 1 [(iω − α)2 + β 2 ]−1/2 = √ [(ρ + a)1/2 − i(ρ − a)1/2 ], ρ 2

(11.2.25)

298


we infer that the pairs (φ(1) , ϑ(1) ) and (φ(2) , ϑ(2) ) are defined by the formulas (1)

φ

(R, t)

φ(2) (R, t) ϑ(1) (R, t) ϑ(2) (R, t)

m R (Aφ − iBφ ) exp −q1 R + iω t − , = 8πR c1 m R (Aφ − iBφ ) exp −q2 R + iω t − , =− 8πR c2 1 R (1 + Aϑ + iBϑ ) exp −q1 R + iω t − , = 8πR c1 1 R (1 − Aϑ − iBϑ ) exp −q2 R + iω t − , = 8πR c2

(11.2.26)

(11.2.27)

(11.2.28)

(11.2.29)

where the pairs (Aφ , Bφ ) and (Aϑ , Bϑ ) are real valued, specified through the following relations 1 Aφ = √ [ωt0 (ρ + a)1/2 − (ρ − a)1/2 ], ρ 2 1 Bφ = √ [(ρ + a)1/2 + ωt0 (ρ − a)1/2 ], ρ 2

(11.2.30)

1 ˆ − a)1/2 ], α(ρ + a)1/2 + ω β(ρ Aϑ = √ [ˆ ρ 2 (11.2.31) 1 ˆ + a)1/2 − α ˆ (ρ − a)1/2 ]. Bϑ = √ [ω β(ρ ρ 2 Furthermore, 2 m= ω

1 1 − 2 2 υ1 υ2

−1 .

(11.2.32)

Now, the pairs (φ(1) , ϑ(1) ) and (φ(2) , ϑ(2) ) allow a determination of the radial displacement uR as well as the stresses σR and σθ from the formulas (recall eqns (11.2.3) and (11.2.4)) (1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

uR = u R + u R , σ R = σR + σR , σ θ = σθ + σθ ,

(11.2.33)


299

where (i)

∂φ(i) (i = 1, 2) , ∂R 4κ = − u(i) + φ¨(i) (i = 1, 2) , R (i) u ∂ − 1 + t0 ϑ(i) + (1 − 2κ)φ¨(i) = 2κ R ∂t

uR = (i)

σR

(i)

σθ

(11.2.34) (11.2.35) (i = 1, 2) .

(11.2.36)

In the above κ=

1 − 2ν . 2 − 2ν

(11.2.37)

The expressions (11.2.17), (11.2.26)–(11.2.29) and (11.2.33)–(11.2.37) represent a complex-valued solution corresponding to a complex-valued concentrated heat source of the form δ(x) exp (iωt). If at the origin of the co-ordinate system acts a real-valued heat source of the form δ(x) cos(ωt), it will give rise to a thermoelastic disturbance described by real parts of these formulas. Introducing the notations φˆ = Reφ,

ϑˆ = Reϑ,

u ˆR = ReuR , σ ˆR = ReσR ,

σ ˆθ = Reσθ ,

(11.2.38) (11.2.39) (11.2.40)

by virtue of eqns (11.2.17), (11.2.26)–(11.2.29) and (11.2.33)–(11.2.36), we obtain φˆ = φˆ1 + φˆ2 ,

ϑˆ = ϑˆ1 + ϑˆ2 ,

(11.2.41)

where

m −q1 R R R ˆ e Aφ cos ω t − + Bφ sin ω t − , (11.2.42) φ1 (R, t) = 8πR c1 c1 m −q2 R R R ˆ e Aφ cos ω t − + Bφ sin ω t − , (11.2.43) φ2 (R, t) = − 8πR c2 c2 1 −q1 R R R e (1 + Aϑ ) cos ω t − − Bϑ sin ω t − , ϑˆ1 (R, t) = 8πR c1 c1 (11.2.44) 1 −q2 R R R e (1 − Aϑ ) cos ω t − + Bϑ sin ω t − , ϑˆ2 (R, t) = 8πR c2 c2 (11.2.45)

and (1)

(2)

ˆR + u ˆR , u ˆR = u

(11.2.46)

300


in which (1) u ˆR (R, t)

m −q1 R =− e 8πR2

Rω R (1 + q1 R)Aφ + Bφ cos ω t − c1 c1

Rω R , + (1 + q1 R)Bφ − Aφ sin ω t − c1 c1 (2) u ˆR (R, t)

m −q2 R = e 8πR2

(11.2.47)

Rω R (1 + q2 R)Aφ + Bφ cos ω t − c2 c2

R Rω . + (1 + q2 R)Bφ − Aφ sin ω t − c2 c2

(11.2.48)

For the radial stress σ ˆR and hoop stress σ ˆθ , respectively, we obtain (1)

(2)

σ ˆR = σ ˆR + σ ˆR ,

(11.2.49)

where (1)

σ ˆR (R, t) =

m −q1 R e 8πR3

6 ! Rω R 4κ(1 + q1 R) − ω 2 R2 Aφ + 4κ Bφ cos ω t − c1 c1 5 6 ! Rω R 2 2 + 4κ(1 + q1 R) − ω R Bφ − 4κ , Aφ sin ω t − c1 c1 5

×

(2)

σ ˆR (R, t) = −

m −q2 R e 8πR3

6 Rω R × 4κ (1 + q2 R) − ω R Aφ + 4κ Bφ cos ω t − c2 c2 5 6 ! R Rω + 4κ (1 + q2 R) − ω 2 R2 Bφ − 4κ , Aφ sin ω t − c2 c2 5

2

2

(11.2.50)

!

(11.2.51)

and (1)

(2)

σ ˆθ = σ ˆθ + σ ˆθ ,

(11.2.52)


301

where (1) σ ˆθ (R, t)

m −q1 R =− e 8πR3

7

! 2κ (1 + q1 R) + (1 − 2κ)ω 2 R2 Aφ

6 R Rω R2 0 1 + Aϑ − ωt Bϑ cos ω t − +2κ Bφ + 2κ c1 m c1 7 ! + 2κ(1 + q1 R) + (1 − 2κ)ω 2 R2 Bφ

(11.2.53)

6 Rω R2 R 0 0 , −2κ Aφ − 2κ (ωt + ωt Aϑ + Bϑ ) sin ω t − c1 m c1 (2) σ ˆθ (R, t)

m −q2 R = e 8πR3

7

! 2κ (1 + q2 R) + (1 − 2κ)ω 2 R2 Aφ

6 R Rω R2 0 1 − Aϑ + ωt Bϑ cos ω t − +2κ Bφ − 2κ c2 m c2 7 ! + 2κ(1 + q2 R) + (1 − 2κ)ω 2 R2 Bφ

(11.2.54)

6 Rω R2 R 0 0 . −2κ Aφ + 2κ (ωt − ωt Aϑ − Bϑ ) sin ω t − c2 m c2 ˆ ϑ, ˆ u Closed-form expressions of φ, ˆR , σ ˆR and σ ˆθ given, respectively, by eqns (11.2.41)1 , (11.2.41)2 , (11.2.46), (11.2.49) and (11.2.52) allow a complete (qualitative and quantitative) analysis of propagation of a spherical thermoelastic wave due to a concentrated heat source of the form δ(x) cos(ωt) in an infinite body. In particular, these formulas indicate that the wave treated as a function of R for R > 0 is a superposition of two spherical oscillating waves corresponding to the pairs (c1 , q1 ) and (c2 , q2 ) and vanishing at R → ∞. This conclusion is also true for an arbitrary choice of parameters (t, ω; t0 , t0 , ) satisfying the inequalities t > 0,

ω > 0,

t0 ≥ t0 > 1,

> 0.

(11.2.55)

In three special cases (i) ω 1, (ii) ω 1 and (iii) 1 the formulas (11.2.41)– (11.2.54) can substantially be simplified by using the asymptotic formulas from Section 11.1 for the pair (ci , qi ) (i = 1, 2).

302


11.3 Cylindrical waves produced by a line heat source in an infinite thermoelastic body with two relaxation times Let us now refer an unbounded thermoelastic body to the cylindrical co-ordinate system (r, ϕ, z) and assume a line heat source to act along the entire axis z, having a unit intensity, being periodic in time, and independent of ϕ. This source gives rise to cylindrical thermoelastic waves that propagate under conditions of a plane strain, parallel to the z = 0 plane and independent of ϕ. These waves are generated through a pair (φ, ϑ) satisfying the equations (recall eqns (11.2.1) and (11.2.2)) δ(r) 0 ∂ 1+t eiωt Γφ = − 2πr ∂t on E2 , (11.3.1) 2 ∂ ∂ ϑ ∇2 − 2 φ = 1 + t0 ∂t ∂t and appropriate radiation conditions at infinity. Here ∂2 ∂ ∂2 ∂ ∂ − ∇2 1 + t0 , ∇2 − t0 2 − Γ = ∇2 − 2 ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t ∂t

(11.3.2)

and ∇2 =

∂2 1 ∂ . + 2 ∂r r ∂r

(11.3.3)

Furthermore, δ = δ(r) is the Dirac delta, while the remaining symbols in eqns (11.3.1) and (11.3.2) are the same as in Section 11.2. The radial displacement ur as well as the stresses σr , σϕ , and σz are generated through the pair (φ, ϑ) according to the formulas (recall eqns (6.1.18) and (6.1.19), specialized to cylindrical co-ordinates for the case of plane strain, independent of ϕ) ur =

∂φ , ∂r

ur ¨ + φ, r ur ∂ ¨ σϕ = 2κ − 1 + t0 ϑ + (1 − 2κ)φ, r ∂t ∂ ¨ σz = −2κ 1 + t0 ϑ + (1 − 2κ)φ, ∂t

(11.3.4)

σr = −2κ

(11.3.5)

in which (recall eqn (11.2.37)) κ=

1 − 2ν , 2 − 2ν

(11.3.6)

Cylindrical waves produced by a line heat source in an infinite

303

ν being Poisson’s ratio. Similarly to what was done in Section 11.2, we assume that t0 > 1. Now, comparing the system of eqns (11.2.1) with eqn (11.3.1), we observe that latter can be obtained from the former upon integration along the axis z from −∞ to ∞. This observation allows us to find a solution (φ, ϑ) to the system (11.3.1) by a direct integration along z of the relations (11.2.18) and (11.2.19) in which (11.3.7) R = r2 + z 2 . Thus, using the relation 8 ∞ −∞

e−kR dz = 2K0 (kr) R

for

Re k > 0,

(11.3.8)

where K0 = K0 (x) is the modified Bessel function of the second kind and order zero and integrating eqns (11.2.18) and (11.2.19), we obtain φ(r, t) = φ(1) (r, t) + φ(2) (r, t),

(11.3.9)

ϑ(r, t) = ϑ(1) (r, t) + ϑ(2) (r, t),

(11.3.10)

where φ(1) (r, t) = φ(2) (r, t) = −

m iωt e (Aφ − iBφ )K0 [s1 (iω) r] , 4π

m iωt e (Aφ − iBφ )K0 [s2 (iω) r] , 4π

(11.3.11) (11.3.12)

ϑ(1) (r, t) =

eiωt (1 + Aϑ + iBϑ )K0 [s1 (iω) r] , 4π

(11.3.13)

ϑ(2) (r, t) =

eiωt (1 − Aϑ − iBϑ )K0 [s2 (iω) r] . 4π

(11.3.14)

Here (recall eqn (11.2.8)) s1.2 (iω) = q1.2 + i

ω , c1.2

(11.3.15)

and the real-valued pairs (Aφ , Bφ ) and (Aϑ , Bϑ ) as well as the constant m are specified by the formulas (11.2.30)–(11.2.32). On account of eqns (11.3.4), (11.3.9), (11.3.11) and (11.3.12), the radial displacement is given by (2) ur (r, t) = u(1) r (r, t) + ur (r, t), 8

See formula (7.201) in (Stakgold, 1968).

(11.3.16)

304


where u(1) r (r, t) = − u(2) r (r, t) =

m iωt e (Aφ − iBφ )s1 (iω) K1 [s1 (iω) r] , 4π

m iωt e (Aφ − iBφ )s2 (iω) K1 [s2 (iω) r] . 4π

(11.3.17) (11.3.18)

(i)

The knowledge of (ur , ϑ(i) ) (i = 1, 2) together with the function φ(i) (i = 1, 2) allows the determination of stresses σr = σr(1) + σr(2) , σϕ = σϕ(1) + σϕ(2) ,

(11.3.19)

σz = σz(1) + σz(2) , in which, for i = 1, 2, (i)

ur + φ¨(i) , r ) ( (i) ur 0 ∂ (i) − 1+t ϑ + (1 − 2κ)φ¨(i) , = 2κ r ∂t σr(i) = −2κ

σϕ(i)

σz(i)

(11.3.20)

0 ∂ ϑ(i) + (1 − 2κ)φ¨(i) . = −2κ 1 + t ∂t

The relations (11.3.9)–(11.3.20) describe cylindrical thermoelastic waves propagating in the body from the z-axis to infinity. Given the complicated form of these formulas, in the following we shall analyze the asymptotic form of these waves for r → ∞. To this end, let us recall the asymptotic formulas 4 π (sr)−1/2 exp(−sr), K0 (sr) ≈ 2 (11.3.21) 4 π −1/2 (sr) exp(−sr), K1 (sr) ≈ 2 which hold for any complex number s such that Res > 0 and for r → ∞. First, note that 1/2 ω 1/2 = q1 + i = C (1) + iD(1) , (11.3.22) [s1 (iω)] c1 1/2 ω 1/2 = q2 + i = C (2) + iD(2) , (11.3.23) [s2 (iω)] c2


305

where C

(1)

1 =√ 2

( q12

ω2 + 2 c1

)1/2

1/2

,

(11.3.24)

,

(11.3.25)

,

(11.3.26)

.

(11.3.27)

−1/2

−1/2 ω2 2 C (1) − iD(1) , = q1 + 2 c1

(11.3.28)

−1/2

−1/2 ω2 2 C (2) − iD(2) . = q2 + 2 c2

(11.3.29)

D

C

(1)

(2)

D

(2)

1 =√ 2 1 =√ 2 1 =√ 2

( q12

ω2 + 2 c1

q22

ω2 + 2 c2

( ( q22

ω2 + 2 c2

+ q1 )1/2

1/2 − q1

)1/2

1/2 + q2

)1/2

1/2 − q2

From the formulas (11.3.22)–(11.3.27) we get [s1 (iω)] and [s2 (iω)]

Substituting eqn (11.3.21)1 into eqns (11.3.11)–(11.3.14) and eqn (11.3.21)2 into eqns (11.3.17) and (11.3.18), and taking note of eqns (11.3.22)–(11.3.29), (i) we obtain asymptotic formulas for the functions φ(i) , ϑ(i) and ur valid in a neighborhood of r = ∞: m 1 √ (Aφ − iBφ ) C (1) − iD(1) φ(1) = 4 2πr (11.3.30) −1/2 ω2 r 2 , × q1 + 2 exp −q1 r + iω t − c1 c1 m 1 (Aφ − iBφ ) C (2) − iD(2) φ(2) = − √ 4 2πr (11.3.31) −1/2 ω2 r 2 , × q2 + 2 exp −q2 r + iω t − c2 c2 1 (1 + Aϑ + iBϑ ) C (1) − iD(1) ϑ(1) = √ 4 2πr (11.3.32) −1/2 ω2 r 2 , × q1 + 2 exp −q1 r + iω t − c1 c1

306


1 (1 − Aϑ − iBϑ ) C (2) − iD(2) ϑ(2) = √ 4 2πr −1/2 ω2 r 2 , exp −q2 r + iω t − × q2 + 2 c2 c2 and

(11.3.33)

m r (1) (1) √ exp −q1 r + iω t − (Aφ − iBφ ) C + iD , =− c1 4 2πr (11.3.34) m r (Aφ − iBφ ) C (2) + iD(2) exp −q2 r + iω t − . (11.3.35) = √ c 4 2πr 2

u(1) r

u(2) r

(i)

(i)

(i)

With the above, we can now determine σr , σϕ and σz from the formulas ∂ ϑ(i) + (1 − κ)φ¨(i) , σr(i) + σϕ(i) /2 = −κ 1 + t0 ∂t (i) (i) −1 (i) 0 ∂ ϑ(i) + κ φ¨(i) , σr − σϕ /2 = −2κr ur + κ 1 + t (11.3.36) ∂t ∂ ϑ(i) + (1 − 2κ)φ¨(i) . σz(i) = −2κ 1 + t0 ∂t The relations (11.3.30)–(11.3.36) describe the asymptotic form of complex thermoelastic disturbances propagating in the medium far away from the line heat source r = 0. If a real-valued heat source of the form [δ(r)/2πr] cos(ωt) acts along that line, the asymptotic form of disturbances is obtained by taking their real parts. Thus, denoting fˆ = Ref for any complex function f , we obtain −1/2 me−q1 r ω2 q12 + 2 φˆ(1) (r, t) = √ c1 4 2πr r (11.3.37) × Aφ C (1) − Bφ D(1) cos ω t − c1 r , + Aφ D(1) + Bφ C (1) sin ω t − c1 −1/2 me−q2 r ω2 (2) 2 ˆ q2 + 2 φ (r, t) = − √ c2 4 2πr r (2) (2) (11.3.38) cos ω t − × Aφ C − Bφ D c2 r (2) (2) sin ω t − , + Aφ D + Bφ C c2


−1/2 ω2 2 q1 + 2 c1 r × (1 + Aϑ ) C (1) + Bϑ D(1) cos ω t − c1 r (1) (1) + (1 + Aϑ ) D − Bϑ C sin ω t − , c1 −1/2 e−q2 r ω2 q22 + 2 ϑˆ(2) (r, t) = √ c2 4 2πr r (2) (2) cos ω t − × (1 − Aϑ ) C − Bϑ D c2 r + (1 − Aϑ ) D(2) + Bϑ C (2) sin ω t − , c2

307

e−q1 r ϑˆ(1) (r, t) = √ 4 2πr

(11.3.39)

(11.3.40)

and me−q1 r u ˆ(1) r (r, t) = − √ 4 2πr r r (1) (1) (1) (1) cos ω t − sin ω t − − Aφ D − Bφ C , × Aφ C + Bφ D c1 c1 (11.3.41) me−q2 r √ 4 2πr r r − Aφ D(2) − Bφ C (2) sin ω t − . × Aφ C (2) + Bφ D(2) cos ω t − c2 c2 (11.3.42) u ˆ(2) r (r, t) =

Moreover, from eqn (11.3.36) we obtain −1/2 e−q1 r ω2 σ ˆr(1) + σ q12 + 2 ˆϕ(1) /2 = − √ c1 4 2πr r r + β1 sin ω t − , × α1 cos ω t − c1 c1

where α1 = κ

1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ C (1) + (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))D(1)

+m(1 − κ)ω 2 (Aφ C (1) − Bφ D(1) ), β1 = κ 1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ D(1) − (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))C (1) +m(1 − κ)ω 2 (Aφ D(1) + Bφ C (1) ),

(11.3.43)

(11.3.44)

(11.3.45)

308


and −1/2 e−q2 r ω2 2 2=− √ q2 + 2 + c2 4 2πr r r + β2 sin ω t − , × α2 cos ω t − c2 c2

σ ˆr(2)

σ ˆϕ(2)

8

(11.3.46)

where α2 = κ

1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ C (2) − (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))D(2)

(11.3.47) −m(1 − κ)ω (Aφ C 2

β2 = κ

(2)

− Bφ D

(2)

),

1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ D(2) + (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))C (2)

(11.3.48) −m(1 − κ)ω (Aφ D 2

(2)

+ Bφ C

(2)

).

We also have −1/2 ω2 κe−q1 r 2 2= √ q1 + 2 − c1 4 2πr r r + δ1 sin ω t − × γ1 cos ω t − c1 c1

σ ˆr(1)

σ ˆϕ(1)

8

( 2 1/2 2 ω r 2 (1) (1) + m q1 + 2 (Aφ C + Bφ D ) cos ω t − r c1 c1 −(Aφ D

(1)

− Bφ C

(1)

(11.3.49)

) r , ) sin ω t − c1

where γ1 = 1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ C (1) + (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))D(1) −mω 2 (Aφ C (1) − Bφ D(1) ), δ1 = 1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ D(1) − (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))C (1) −mω 2 (Aφ D(1) + Bφ C (1) ),

(11.3.50)

(11.3.51)


309

and −1/2 ω2 κe−q2 r √ q22 + 2 c2 4 2πr r r + δ2 sin ω t − × γ2 cos ω t − c2 c2 ( 1/2 ω2 r 2 2 (2) (2) (Aφ C + Bφ D ) cos ω t − − m q2 + 2 r c2 c2 ) r , −(Aφ D(2) − Bφ C (2) ) sin ω t − c2 σ ˆr(2) − σ ˆϕ(2) /2 =

(11.3.52)

where γ2 = 1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ C (2) − (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))D(1) +mω 2 (Aφ C (2) − Bφ D(2) ), δ2 = 1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ D(2) + (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))C (2) +mω 2 (Aφ D(2) + Bφ C (2) ).

(11.3.53)

(11.3.54)

(i)

Finally, for the axial stresses σ ˆz (i = 1, 2) we obtain −1/2 e−q1 r ω2 2 q1 + 2 =− √ c1 4 2πr r r + ν1 sin ω t − , × µ1 cos ω t − c1 c1 σ ˆz(1)

where µ1 = 2κ

1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ C (1) + (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))D(1)

+m(1 − 2κ)ω 2 (Aφ C (1) − Bφ D(1) ), ν1 = 2κ 1 + Aϑ − ωt0 Bϑ D(1) − (Bϑ + ωt0 (1 + Aϑ ))C (1)

(11.3.55)

(11.3.56)

(11.3.57)

+m(1 − 2κ)ω 2 (Aφ D(1) + Bφ C (1) ), and −1/2 e−q2 r ω2 σ ˆz(2) = − √ q22 + 2 c2 4 2πr r r + ν2 sin ω t − , × µ2 cos ω t − c2 c2

(11.3.58)

310


where µ2 = 2κ

1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ C (2) − (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))D(2)

−m(1 − 2κ)ω 2 (Aφ C (2) − Bφ D(2) ), ν2 = 2κ 1 − Aϑ + ωt0 Bϑ D(2) + (Bϑ − ωt0 (1 − Aϑ ))C (2)

(11.3.59)

(11.3.60)

−m(1 − 2κ)ω 2 (Aφ D(2) + Bφ C (2) ). The closed forms of functions (11.3.37)–(11.3.60) allow an asymptotic analysis of the cylindrical thermoelastic waves as r → ∞ and for the parameters (t, ω; t0 , t0 , ) satisfying the inequalities t > 0,

ω > 0,

t0 ≥ t0 > 1,

> 0.

(11.3.61)

The above solution is one of the simplest axially symmetric ones in the G–L theory. A more complex axially symmetric problem of time-periodic longitudinal waves in an infinite cylinder of a circular cross-section was solved in (Erbay and S ¸ uhubi, 1986). 11.4 Integral representation of solutions and radiation conditions in the Green–Lindsay theory 11.4.1 Integral representations and radiation conditions for the fundamental solution in the Green–Lindsay theory Let B denote a bounded domain in a 3D Euclidean space E3 . According to the definition in Section 7.1, the kth fundamental solution in the G–L theory satisfies the relations (recall eqns (7.1.4)–(7.1.6)) ˆ k φk = 0 on B × [0, ∞), L

(11.4.1)

φk (·, 0) = φ˙ k (·, 0) = 0 on B,

(11.4.2)

φk = fk

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(11.4.3)

ˆ k (k = 1, 2) is the wave-type operator (recall formulas (7.1.2) and (7.1.3)), Here, L while fk is a function given on ∂B × [0, ∞). Let us now assume fk to be periodic in time, that is fk (x, t) = fk∗ (x)eiωt ,

(11.4.4)

where fk∗ (x) is a given function for every x ∈ ∂B and ω > 0. In order to find a solution of eqns (11.4.1)–(11.4.3), with fk given by eqn (11.4.4), we set φk (x, t) = ϕk (x, t) + φ∗k (x)eiωt ,

(11.4.5)

where ϕk represents a “transient” part of φk , while φ∗k is an “amplitude” of the harmonic part of φk . Substituting eqn (11.4.5) into eqns (11.4.1)–(11.4.3), we

Integral representation of solutions and radiation conditions

311

conclude that φk is a fundamental solution of the G–L theory if ϕk satisfies the relations ˆ k ϕk = 0 on B × (0, ∞), L ϕk (·, 0) = −φ∗k (·) ϕ˙ k (·, 0) = −iωφ∗k (·)

on B,

ϕk = 0 on ∂B × (0, ∞),

(11.4.6) (11.4.7) (11.4.8)

with the function φ∗k (x) being such that 2k φ∗k = 0 on B, φ∗k

=

fk∗

on ∂B.

(11.4.9) (11.4.10)

The operator 2k appearing in eqn (11.4.9) is defined by the formula 2k = ∇2 + ηk2 , where (recall eqns (11.1.13) and (11.1.32)) ω − iqk (k = 1, 2), ηk = ck

(11.4.11)

(11.4.12)

while ck and qk denote, respectively, the phase velocity and the damping coefficient of the kth fundamental solution, all specified by the relations (11.1.33) and (11.1.34). If we note the relation between ηk and sk (iω) (recall eqn (11.1.13)) sk (iω) = iηk

(k = 1, 2),

(11.4.13)

we find that a fundamental solution of the G–L theory, corresponding to a periodic-in-time boundary condition, is obtained by solving a Dirichlet problem for the Helmholtz equation with a complex wave number of the form (11.4.12). In the following we will drop the asterisk in eqns (11.4.9) and (11.4.10), that is, we will work with 2k φk = 0 on B,

(11.4.14)

φk = fk

(11.4.15)

on ∂B.

In order to obtain an integral representation of the function φk (x) satisfying eqn (11.4.14), consider now the systems of equations (recall eqns (8.1.7) and (8.1.8)) 2k φk = 0 on B,

(11.4.16)

2k Kk = −δ(x − y) on E3 ,

(11.4.17)

where δ = δ(x) is the Dirac delta and y is a fixed point in E3 . Multiplying eqn (11.4.16) through by Kk and eqn (11.4.17) by φk , subtracting one from

312


another and integrating over B, we obtain (recall eqns (8.1.10) and (8.1.11)) ∂ ∂ (11.4.18) (y)φk (y) = [Kk (x, y) φk (x)−φk (x) Kk (x, y)]da(x), ∂n ∂n ∂B

where

(y) =

1 for

y ∈B,

¯ 0 for y ∈E3 − B.

(11.4.19)

One can show that the only solution of eqn (11.4.17) satisfying a radiation condition, that is representing a wave propagating from y to infinity, is the function (recall eqn (8.1.12)) Kk (x, y) =

1 exp(−iηk R), 4πR

(11.4.20)

in which R = |x − y| .

(11.4.21)

Thus, we conclude that the following theorem is true. Theorem 11.2 (Helmholtz-type theorem for the fundamental solutions in the G–L theory) An arbitrary solution of eqn (11.4.16) in a bounded domain B can be represented by the surface integral −iηk R ∂ e 1 ∂ e−iηk R φk (x)−φk (x) da(x) ∀y ∈ B. φk (y) = 4π R ∂n ∂n R ∂B

(11.4.22) If we seek the kth fundamental solution of the G–L theory in the exterior of B, that is in Be = E3 − B, under the boundary condition (11.4.4), in order to find a harmonic part of that solution corresponding to a wave propagating from the boundary ∂B to infinity, we postulate the so-called radiation conditions of Sommerfeld type. ¯ and let Br denote a ball centered at x and having a radius Let x ∈ E3 − B sufficiently large that B is contained in Br . Next, let Vr denote a domain bounded by the surfaces ∂B and ∂Br , and consider the equations 2k φk = 0 on Vr ,

(11.4.23)

2k Kk = −δ(x − y) on E3 ,

(11.4.24)

with y being a fixed point of E3 . Combining these equations with one another, and integrating similarly to what was done in the case of formula (11.4.22), we

Integral representation of solutions and radiation conditions

313

obtain

1 φk (y) = 4π

e−iηk R R

∂B∪∂Br

∂ ∂ φk (x)−φk (x) ∂n ∂n

e−iηk R R

da(x)

∀y ∈ Vr .

(11.4.25) On the ball’s surface ∂Br : R = r and ∂/∂n = ∂/∂r, where r is a component of the spherical co-ordinate system (r, θ, ϕ) centered at y. Thus,

[·]da = ∂Br

e−iηk r r

−iηk r ∂ e + iηk φk dΣ+ φk dΣ, ∂r r2

∂Br

(11.4.26)

∂Br

where dΣ = r2 sin θdθdϕ,

0 ≤ θ ≤ π,

0 ≤ ϕ ≤ 2π.

(11.4.27)

Clearly, the integral (11.4.26) converges to zero for r → ∞ provided the function φk , referred to the system (r, θ, ϕ), satisfies the radiation conditions 9 re

−iηk r

∂ + iηk φk = o(1), ∂r

e−iηk r φk = o(1),

(11.4.28)

for every θ and ϕ satisfying the inequalities (11.4.27). 10 Therefore, passing in eqn (11.4.25) with r to infinity and given that Vr → E3 − B for r → ∞, we conclude that the following theorem is true. Theorem 11.2 An arbitrary solution of eqn (11.4.23) outside a bounded domain B, satisfying the radiation conditions (11.4.28), can be represented by the surface integral φk (y) =

1 4π

∂B

e−iηk R R

∂ ∂ φk (x)−φk (x) ∂n ∂n

e−iηk R R

da(x) (11.4.29)

∀y ∈ E3 − B.

This theorem implies that, in the presence of a periodic boundary condition (11.4.4), the harmonic part of the kth fundamental solution of the G–L theory, corresponding to a wave propagating from the boundary ∂B to infinity, has the form of a product φk (y) exp(iωt), where φk (y) is given by eqn (11.4.29).

The relation f (r) = o(1) means that f (r) → 0 as r → ∞. It is easy to show that φk = r −1 exp(−iηk r) satisfies the conditions (11.4.28), so that the function φk exp(iωt), ω > 0, represents a wave propagating from the point y = 0 to infinity. 9

10

314


11.4.2 Integral representations and radiation conditions for the potential–temperature solution in the Green–Lindsay theory According to the definition introduced in Section 4.2, the potential–temperature problem in the G–L theory consists in finding a pair (φ, ϑ) on B × [0, ∞) that satisfies the equations 0 Γφ = 2 ∂ ∂ ϑ ∇2 − 2 φ = 1 + t 0 ∂t ∂t ˙ 0) = 0 φ(·, 0) = φ(·, ˙ 0) = 0 ϑ(·, 0) = ϑ(·, φ=f

ϑ=g

on B × [0, ∞),

on B,

on ∂B × [0, ∞).

(11.4.30)

(11.4.31) (11.4.32)

Here, Γ is the central operator of the G–L theory (recall eqn (6.1.8)) while f and g are known functions. Assume these functions to have the form f (x, t) = f ∗ (x)eiωt ,

g(x, t) = g ∗ (x)eiωt ,

(11.4.33)

with f ∗ (x) and g ∗ (x) given on ∂B. In order to find a solution (φ, ϑ) of the system (11.4.30)–(11.4.33), we proceed similarly to what was done in Section 11.4.1. Thus, we assume the pair (φ, ϑ) to be specified by the formulas φ(x, t) = ϕ(x, t) + φ∗ (x)eiωt ,

(11.4.34)

ϑ(x, t) = θ(x, t) + ϑ∗ (x)eiωt ,

(11.4.35)

where the pair (ϕ, θ) represents a “transient” part of the sought solution, while (φ∗ , ϑ∗ ) is a harmonic “amplitude” of that solution. Inserting eqns (11.4.34) and (11.4.35) into eqns (11.4.30)–(11.4.32) and using eqn (11.4.33), we infer that the pair (φ, ϑ), given by eqns (11.4.34) and (11.4.35), satisfies eqns (11.4.30)– (11.4.32) provided the pairs (ϕ, θ) and (φ∗ , ϑ∗ ) satisfy the relations

∂2 ∇2 − 2 ∂t

Γϕ = 0 0 ∂ θ ϕ= 1+t ∂t

ϕ(·, 0) = −φ∗ (·), θ(·, 0) = −ϑ∗ (·),

on B × [0, ∞),

ϕ(·, ˙ 0) = −iωφ∗ (·) ˙ 0) = −iωϑ∗ (·) θ(·,

ϕ=θ=0

on B,

on ∂B × (0, ∞),

(11.4.36)

(11.4.37) (11.4.38)

and 21 22 φ∗ = 0 (∇2 + ω 2 )φ∗ = (1 + iωt0 )ϑ∗ φ∗ = f ∗ ,

ϑ∗ = g ∗

on B,

on ∂B.

(11.4.39) (11.4.40)

Integral representations and radiation conditions for the potential

315

It is clear that a solution of the original problem stated in terms of eqns (11.4.30)– (11.4.33) will depend on first solving the problem (11.4.39) and (11.4.40) and determining the initial conditions of the problem (11.4.63)–(11.4.38). The knowledge of the pair (φ∗ , ϑ∗ ) will allow us, in turn, to find the pair (ϕ, θ) using the expansion into a series of eigenfunctions via the method already proposed in Section 7.2. In the following we shall consider an integral representation of the pair (φ∗ , ϑ∗ ), whereby, for convenience, we drop the asterisks. Thus, we have 21 22 φ = 0 (∇2 + ω 2 )φ = (1 + iωt0 )ϑ φ = f,

ϑ=g

on B,

on ∂B,

(11.4.41) (11.4.42)

wherein the operators 2k (k = 1, 2) are defined by eqn (11.4.11). Together with eqns (11.4.41) and (11.4.42), let us consider the system 21 22 φN = −(1 + iωt0 )δ(x − y) (∇2 + ω 2 )φN = (1 + iωt0 )ϑN

on E3 ,

(11.4.43)

where y is a fixed point in E3 , while the pair (φN , ϑN ) satisfies suitable radiation conditions at infinity. It is easy to verify that the systems (11.4.41) and (11.4.43) can be obtained by setting p = iω, respectively, in the sys¯ ϑ), ¯ and the tems (8.3.10) and (8.3.12) and identifying the pair (φ, ϑ) with (φ, ¯ ¯ pair (φN , ϑN ) with (φN , ϑN ) of Section 8.3. This observation leads us to conclude that the following theorem is true. Theorem 11.3 (Helmholtz-type theorem for the pair (φ, ϑ)) An arbitrary solution of eqn (11.4.41) for a bounded domain B can be represented by the surface integrals ∂ ∂ KN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) KN (x, y) da(x) φ(y) = ∂n ∂n ∂B (11.4.44) ∂ ∂ φN (x, y) ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) φN (x, y) da(x), + ∂n ∂n ∂B

∂ ∂ ϑN (x, y) ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) ϑN (x, y) da(x) ϑ(y) = ∂n ∂n ∂B ∂ ∂ + HN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) HN (x, y) da(x) ∂n ∂n ∂B

for every point y ∈ B.

(11.4.45)

316


In the above, the kernels φN , ϑN , KN and HN are given by the formulas (recall eqns (8.3.25), (8.3.26), (8.3.29) and (8.3.37)) φN = − ϑN =

(1 + iωt0 ) e−iη1 R − e−iη2 R , 4πR η12 − η22

(η12 − ω 2 )e−iη1 R − (η22 − ω 2 )e−iη2 R , 4πR(η12 − η22 )

KN = −

(η22 − ω 2 )e−iη1 R − (η12 − ω 2 )e−iη2 R , 4πR(η12 − η22 )

HN =

iω 3 e−iη1 R − e−iη2 R , 4πR η12 − η22

(11.4.46) (11.4.47) (11.4.48) (11.4.49)

where (recall eqn (11.4.21)) R = |x − y| ,

(11.4.50)

and ηk (k = 1, 2) are complex numbers of the form (recall eqn (11.4.12)) ηk =

ω − iqk ck

(ck > 0, qk > 0).

(11.4.51)

One can show that a thermoelastic wave generated through the pair (φN , ϑN ) propagates from y to infinity, that is, it satisfies suitable Sommerfeld radiation conditions in E3 . Now, in connection with the construction of an integral representation of Helmholtz type for the pair (φ, ϑ) in the exterior of the domain B, we shall derive an explicit form of the said conditions. This construction will be analogous to that for the pair (φ, ϑ) defined by eqns (11.4.44) and (11.4.45). First, one can show that, if Vr is the domain introduced in Section 11.4.1 and y ∈ Vr , then ∂ ∂ KN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) KN (x, y) da(x) φ(y) = ∂n ∂n ∂B∪∂Br

∂ ∂ φN (x, y) ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) φN (x, y) da(x), ∂n ∂n

+ ∂B∪∂Br

ϑN (x, y)

ϑ(y) =

∂ ∂ ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) ϑN (x, y) da(x) ∂n ∂n

∂B∪∂Br

+

(11.4.52)

∂ ∂ HN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) HN (x, y) da(x), ∂n ∂n

∂B∪∂Br

where ∂Br is the surface of a ball introduced in Section 11.4.1.

(11.4.53)


317

In order to examine the right-hand sides of these relations for r → ∞ we note that, on account of eqns (11.4.46) and (11.4.48), the surface integral over ∂Br appearing in eqn (11.4.52), up to a constant, equals ( I1 = ∂Br

(η22 − ω 2 )e−iη1 r − (η12 − ω 2 )e−iη2 r r

)

∂ φ ∂r

∂ (η22 − ω 2 )e−iη1 r − (η12 − ω 2 )e−iη2 r ∂r r −iη1 r − e−iη2 r ∂ e ϑ +(1 + iωt0 ) r ∂r ∂ e−iη1 r − e−iη2 r −ϑ dΣ. ∂r r

−φ

(11.4.54)

This integral can be rewritten as

(

(η22

I1 =

e−iη1 r −ω ) r 2

) ∂ e−iη1 r + iη1 φ + φ ∂r r2

∂Br

e−iη2 r ∂ e−iη2 r + iη2 φ + −ω ) φ r ∂r r2 −iη1 r ∂ e e−iη2 r + iη1 ϑ + ϑ +(1 + iωt0 ) r ∂r r2 e−iη2 r e−iη2 r ∂ + iη2 ϑ − ϑ dΣ. − r ∂r r2

−(η12

2

(11.4.55)

Given that dΣ = r2 sin θdθdϕ [(recall eqn (11.4.27)], the integral I1 tends to zero as r → ∞, so long as the pair (φ, ϑ) satisfies the radiation conditions ! ∂ + iη1 (η22 − ω 2 )φ + (1 + iωt0 )ϑ re ∂r ! ∂ −iη2 r + iη2 (η12 − ω 2 )φ + (1 + iωt0 )ϑ = o(1), −re ∂r ! e−iη1 r (η22 − ω 2 )φ + (1 + iωt0 )ϑ ! −e−iη2 r (η12 − ω 2 )φ + (1 + iωt0 )ϑ = o(1). −iη1 r

(11.4.56)

(11.4.57)

318


Let us also note that, on account of eqns (11.4.47) and (11.4.49), the integral over ∂Br appearing in eqn (11.4.53), up to a constant, equals 2 (η1 − ω 2 )e−iη1 r − (η22 − ω 2 )e−iη2 r ∂ ϑ I2 = r ∂r ∂Br

∂ (η12 − ω 2 )e−iη1 r − (η22 − ω 2 )e−iη2 r −ϑ ∂r r −iη1 r ∂ e−iη1 r − e−iη2 r e − e−iη2 r ∂ 3 φ−φ dΣ. + iω r ∂r ∂r r

(11.4.58)

The above integral can be rewritten as −iη1 r ∂ e e−iη1 r I2 = + iη1 ϑ + (η12 − ω 2 ) ϑ r ∂r r2 ∂Br

e−iη2 r ∂ e−iη2 r + iη2 ϑ + −ω ) ϑ r ∂r r2 −iη1 r ∂ e−iη1 r 3 e + iη1 φ + +iω φ r ∂r r2 e−iη2 r ∂ e−iη2 r + iη2 φ − − φ dΣ. r ∂r r2

−(η22

2

(11.4.59)

A sufficient condition for the integral I2 to tend to zero as r → ∞ is that ! ∂ + iη1 (η12 − ω 2 )ϑ + iω 3 φ re−iη1 r ∂r (11.4.60) ! ∂ −iη2 r 2 2 3 + iη2 (η2 − ω )ϑ + iω φ = o(1), −re ∂r ! e−iη1 r (η12 − ω 2 )ϑ + iω 3 φ (11.4.61) ! −e−iη2 r (η22 − ω 2 )ϑ + iω 3 φ = o(1). The relations (11.4.56), (11.4.57), (11.4.60) and (11.4.61) are called the radiation conditions of Sommerfeld type for the pair (φ, ϑ) in the G–L theory. If a regular solution of the system of eqns (11.4.41) on E3 − B is defined as a pair (φ, ϑ) that satisfies eqns (11.4.41) on E3 − B subject to the radiation conditions (11.4.56), (11.4.57), (11.4.60) and (11.4.61), then, upon passing to the limit in the relations (11.4.52) and (11.4.53) as r → ∞, we obtain the following theorem. Theorem 11.4 (Helmholtz-type theorem for a pair (φ, ϑ)) An arbitrary solution (φ, ϑ) of the system (11.4.41), which is regular in E 3 − B, can be represented


319

by the surface integrals ∂ ∂ φ(y) = KN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) KN (x, y) da(x) ∂n ∂n ∂B

∂ ∂ φN (x, y) ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) φN (x, y) da(x), ∂n ∂n

+ ∂B

ϑN (x, y)

ϑ(y) = ∂B

+

(11.4.62)

∂ ∂ ϑ(x)−ϑ(x) ϑN (x, y) da(x) ∂n ∂n

∂ ∂ HN (x, y) φ(x)−φ(x) HN (x, y) da(x), ∂n ∂n

(11.4.63)

∂B

where the kernels φN , ϑN , KN and HN are defined, respectively, by the formulas (11.4.46), (11.4.47), (11.4.48) and (11.4.49). By analyzing a relation between the radiation conditions (11.4.28) for the kth fundamental solution of the G–L theory and the conditions (11.4.56), (11.4.57), (11.4.60) and (11.4.61), one can show that the following theorem is also true. Theorem 11.5 Let φ = φ1 + φ2 and ϑ = ϑ1 + ϑ2 , where φk is the kth fundamental solution of the G–L theory in E 3 − B and ϑk is the temperature associated with φk . Then, the pair (φ, ϑ) is a regular solution of the system (11.4.41) in E 3 − B. This theorem clearly shows that by looking for a pair (φ, ϑ) in E3 − B as a sum of the fundamental pairs (φk , ϑk ) subject to the radiation conditions (11.4.28), we also satisfy the coupled radiation conditions (11.4.56), (11.4.57), (11.4.60) and (11.4.61). 11 Remark 11.1 In this chapter we have analyzed plane, spherical and cylindrical harmonic waves propagating in an unbounded domain as well as the integral representation of a harmonic solution to a potential–temperature boundary value problem of the G–L theory. A comparison of plane harmonic waves propagating in an infinite body for the three thermoelastic theories: classical, L–S, and G–L, was presented in (Haddow and Wegner, 1996). Stability of plane harmonic generalized thermoelastic waves was discussed in (Leslie and Scott, 2000, 2004). Harmonic 11 The coupled radiation conditions (11.4.56), (11.4.57), (11.4.60) and (11.4.61) are less restrictive than the analogous radiation conditions of asymmetric isothermal elastodynamics proposed in (Ignaczak, 1970). Also, note that the radiation conditions for the kth fundamental solution of classical coupled thermoelasticity are given in (Ignaczak and Nowacki, 1962), while the coupled radiation conditions for a pair (φ, ϑ) in classical coupled thermoelasticity and in L– S theory are given in (Ro˙znowski, 1971, 1983). Finally, note that a general form of the radiation conditions for classical coupled thermoelasticity is proposed in the monograph (Kupradze et al., 1979).

320


thermoelastic vibrations of an infinite body with a spherical cavity within the G–L theory were discussed in (Erbay, Erbay, and Dost, 1991). Free harmonic vibrations of a solid thermoelastic sphere within the G–L theory were studied in (Soyucok, 1991). Propagation of harmonic waves in an unbounded thermoelastic domain with a thermal memory was discussed in (Shashkov and Yanovsky, 1994). Reflection and refraction of harmonic thermoelastic waves at an interface of two semi-infinite media with two relaxation times were analyzed in (Sinha and Elsibai, 1997). Axially symmetric thermoelastic waves produced by a time-harmonic boundary normal point load and thermal source in a half-space within the L–S and G–L theories, were discussed in (Sharma, Chauhan, and Kumar, 2000). A harmonic fundamental solution in the theory of micropolar thermoelasticity without energy dissipation was obtained in (Svanadze, Tibullo, and Zampoli, 2006). Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators with finite wave speeds was studied in (Khisaeva and Ostoja-Starzewski, 2006); see Section 12.4. Finally, the time-periodic, 2D cylindrical electro-magneto-thermoelastic waves in an annular region, within the thermoelasticity without energy dissipation, were studied in (Allam, Elsibai and Abouelregal, 2007).

12 PHYSICAL ASPECTS AND APPLICATIONS OF HYPERBOLIC THERMOELASTICITY

12.1 Heat conduction 12.1.1 Physics viewpoint and other theories The theories with one and two relaxation times discussed in this book are special cases of numerous theories proposed to deal with the wave-like transport of heat beginning with the work of Maxwell (1871). The activity in this direction was renewed following the experiments on second sound in liquid helium by Peshkov (1944), the term originating from the wave motion of heat being similar to the propagation of sound in air. This phenomenon – quantum mechanical in nature – involves heat transfer occurring by wave-like motion, rather than by diffusion. As a result, helium II has the highest thermal conductivity of any known material (several hundred times higher than copper). Peshkov then suggested that second sound might take place in materials that have a phonon gas. The constant t0 of the L–S theory may be interpreted as the time required to establish the steady state of heat conduction in a volume element suddenly subjected to a temperature gradient. Chester (1963) quantitatively estimated t0 in terms of measurable macroscopic parameters to be t0 =

3k , υ 2 ρc

(12.1.1)

where υ is the phonon velocity, k the thermal conductivity, ρ the mass density, and c the heat capacity per unit mass. It is important to mention that eqn (12.1.1) can only be used for a medium where the transport of heat occurs via the phonon gas, which is usually the case for micro- and nano-electromechanical systems (MEMS/NEMS). To the first approximation, υ can be replaced by the elastic wave velocity (Lifshitz and Roukes, 2000). It must be noted that we still do not possess a full understanding of classical Fourier-type heat conduction in terms of microscopic physics. This was observed by Peierls (1979) and still remains a challenge, see e.g. (Klages, 2007). However, there are many known cases where the phenomenon of second sound has been experimentally observed; this includes solid He3 and He4, bismuth, lithium fluoride, sodium fluoride, sodium iodide and crystals of quartz and sapphire; Caviglia et al. (1992) and Dreyer and Struchtrup (1993). Not surprisingly, thermal wave propagation is a low-temperature phenomenon, typically in the range 1–20 K. As pointed out by Caviglia et al. (1992), the thermal wave speed decreases

322

Physical aspects and applications of hyperbolic thermoelasticity

appreciably as the temperature increases and tends to an asymptotic value as absolute zero is approached. Also, Caviglia et al. (1992) discuss the experiments of Jackson et al. (1970) and McNelly et al. (1970) involving a pure crystal of NaF where three distinct waves are observed: a longitudinal quasi-elastic wave travelling fastest, followed by a transverse quasi-elastic wave and then a longitudinal quasi-temperature wave. It appears that the quasi-temperature and transverse waves travel at the same speed below 8 K. Much work was stimulated by the early papers of physicists and mechanicians, and several reviews have appeared in the past two decades: (Joseph and Preziosi, 1989, 1990) focusing on heat conduction with finite speeds in a rigid body and (Ignaczak, 1980, 1981, 1987; Chandrasekharaiah, 1986, 1998; Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 1999, 2000) focusing on generalized thermoelasticity. Very recently, Miller and Haber (2008) have used space-time finite elements to study continuous and discontinuous thermal waves in 2D problems with rapid and localized heating of the conducting medium governed by the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation. In a series of papers Green and Naghdi (1991, 1992, 1993) developed the following three thermoelasticity theories:

r Their (1991) paper developed a theory for describing the behavior of a thermoelastic body, which relies on an entropy balance law rather than on an entropy inequality. The novel quantity is a thermal displacement variable t T (X, τ )dτ + α0 , α= t0

in which T is the “empirical” temperature, with X being the spatial coordinate in the reference configuration of the body. r Their (1993) article developed another theory called thermoelasticity of type II allowing for heat transmission at finite speed without any energy dissipation. The displacement–temperature equations of that theory are ρ¨ ui = (Cijkh uk ,h ),j −(aij θ),j +ρfi , ï ,j +(kik θ,k ),i +ρr , cθ¨ = −aij u

(12.1.2)

with the elasticity tensor Cijkh assumed positive-definite; c > 0. Other authors who further pursued this theory are Chandrasekharaiah (1996a;b), Ie¸san (1998), Nappa (1998) and Quintanilla (1999). See also Section 12.5.1. r Their (1992) paper developed yet another thermoelasticity theory, based on their 1991 work, called thermoelasticity of type III allowing for heat transport at a finite speed but with dissipation taking place. The displacement– temperature equations of this theory are ρ¨ ui = (Cijkh uk ,h ),j −(aij θ),j +ρfi , ˙ k ),i +ρr , ¨ ï ,j +(kik θ,k ),i +(bik θ, cθ = −aij u with the elasticity tensor Cijkh assumed positive-definite.

(12.1.3)

Heat conduction

323

Quintanilla and Straughan (2000) provided new results (uniqueness, growth) for anisotropic linearized versions of thermoelasticity of type II and type III without requiring any definiteness whatsoever of the elasticity tensor, but only assuming Cijkh = Ckhij . This section would not be complete without noting a paper by Scott (2008) who studied classical and generalized anisotropic thermoelasticity (G–L model) from the standpoint of Whitham’s wave hierarchies; see also (Leslie and Scott, 2004). He casts the standard form of the displacement–temperature partial differential equations in four unknowns to a single equation in one variable, in terms of isothermal and isentropic wave operators. Now, let us note two interesting consequences, one stemming from classical physics considerations and another from modern continuum thermodynamics. 12.1.2 Consequence of Galilean invariance Let us begin with the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation, introduced in this book as (R1.1.8) ∂ ∂θ qi = −kij . (12.1.4) 1 + t0 ∂t ∂xj As observed recently by (Christov and Jordan, 2005), the presence of a partial derivative ∂/∂t in that equation leads to a violation of the Galilean invariance, and the problem is resolved by using, instead, a material derivative D/Dt. In the following, we retrace the arguments of these authors. First, restrict the attention to an isotropic rigid heat conductor (kij = kδij ) and consider a process of heat conduction in one dimension (x). In that case, qi = (q, 0, 0) and eqn (12.1.4) takes the form ∂θ ∂ q = −k . (12.1.5) 1 + t0 ∂t ∂x The balance equation for the internal energy is postulated in the form involving the material derivative D/Dt ∂q Dθ =− . Dt ∂x

(12.1.6)

D ∂ ∂ = +v Dt ∂t ∂x

(12.1.7)

ρcp where

and v = v(x, t) is the velocity of a material point in the x direction. By eliminating q from eqns (12.1.5) and (12.1.6), we obtain the hyperbolic equation for θ 2 ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ ∂2θ ∂ θ ∂ v + +v = κ 2, t0 + (12.1.8) 2 ∂t ∂t ∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x

324


where κ = k/ρcp . Clearly, in the case of a continuum at rest (v = 0), the above reduces to a damped wave equation t0

∂2θ ∂ 2 θ ∂θ = κ + . ∂t2 ∂t ∂x2

(12.1.9)

Next, introduce the dimensionless quantities x = x/l, t = t/t0 , θ = θ/θ0 , v = v/ κ/t0 , (12.1.10) √ where l = κt0 and θ0 > 0 denote the characteristic length and reference temperature, respectively. Upon substitution into eqn (12.1.8), and omitting all the primes for simplicity of notation, we obtain ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ ∂2θ ∂ ∂2θ v + +v = + . (12.1.11) 2 ∂t ∂t ∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x2 Let us now assume a rigid motion of a half-space (x ∈ [0, ∞)) occupied by the rigid heat conductor: translation along the x-axis with constant velocity v(x, t) = U . Then, eqn (12.1.11) leads to ∂θ ∂θ ∂2θ ∂2θ ∂2θ + + U = + U , ∂t2 ∂t∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x2

(12.1.12)

which exhibits a paradoxical property of the thermal wave speeds being nonlinear functions of U : 1 U ± U 2 + 4 , c1 > max(U, 0), c2 < min(U, 0). c1,2 = (12.1.13) 2 Furthermore, consider an initial-boundary value problem for eqn (12.1.12) with U = 0 in a half-space x ≥ 0 subject to a heat source at the boundary x = 0. Also, consider an analogous initial-boundary value problem for a half-space subject to a heat source at the boundary x = 0 but moving with the velocity U . According to Galileo’s principle of classical relativity, the propagation of second sound in the moving half-space should be exactly the same as that in the half-space at rest. Since the governing equations for these two problems are different, their solutions are also different, and Galileo’s principle is violated. To resolve the paradox, eqn (12.1.5) is replaced by ∂θ D q = −k . (12.1.14) 1 + t0 Dt ∂x Then, by eliminating q from eqns (12.1.6) and (12.1.14) we obtain ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ ∂θ ∂2θ ∂ ∂θ ∂ ∂2θ ∂ t0 2 + t 0 v + t0 v + t0 v v + +v =κ 2 ∂t ∂t ∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x ∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x (12.1.15)

Heat conduction

325

and, for the case of a constant velocity v(x, t) = U , the corresponding dimensionless equation is ∂θ ∂θ ∂2θ ∂2θ ∂2θ + +U = (1 − U 2 ) 2 . + 2U 2 ∂t ∂t∂x ∂t ∂x ∂x

(12.1.16)

In contradistinction to eqn (12.1.13), the wave speeds are c1,2 = U ± 1,

(12.1.17)

i.e. the sum or difference of the dimensionless frame velocity and thermal wave speed, as should be the case for a body moving with a velocity U . The argument can be extended to a 3D case, where, in place of eqn (12.1.4), we generally have ∂qi ∂qi D ∂θ + vj qi = −kij ≡ 1 + t0 , (12.1.18) q i + t0 ∂t ∂xj Dt ∂xj where vj is the velocity vector of a material particle. Clearly, in the case of a linear (small strains and temperature changes) thermoelasticity the convective term in the material derivative may be neglected, and this justifies the approach adopted throughout this book. 12.1.3 Consequence of continuum thermodynamics The Maxwell–Cattaneo equation, involving the material derivative postulated in Section 12.1.2, can be derived directly from thermodynamics (Ostoja-Starzewski, 2009c). In the following we adopt the thermodynamics with internal variables (TIV), see (Ziegler and Wehrli, 1987; Maugin, 1999). To this end, one needs to assume that the (specific, per unit mass) internal energy e is a function of the strains Eij , entropy η and heat flux qi e = e(Eij , η, qi ).

(12.1.19)

In other words, the state space needs to be extended to include qi (Maugin, 2008). Furthermore, the (specific, per unit mass) dissipation φ needs to be taken as a function of the strain rate, the heat flux and its rate: φ = φ(E˙ ij , qi , q˙i ).

(12.1.20)

We are focusing on thermoelasticity, so in the above we do not need to admit other fluxes. An overdot in this section denotes a material derivative, alternately written as D/Dt in Section 12.1.2. Now, the specific power of deformation is defined by l = Sij E˙ ij ,

(12.1.21)

ψ = e − θη,

(12.1.22)

while the classical relation holds

326


whereby, in view of eqn (12.1.19), we recognize that ψ = ψ(Eij , θ, qi )

and η = η(Eij , θ, qi ).

(12.1.23)

The first fundamental law takes the form e˙ = Sij E˙ ij − qi ,i ,

(12.1.24)

where E˙ ij is the deformation rate, while the second fundamental law is written in terms of the reversible (η ∗(r) ) and irreversible (η ∗(i) ) parts of the entropy production rate (η) ˙ q i ,i and η ∗(i) ≥ 0. (12.1.25) η˙ = η ∗(r) + η ∗(i) with η ∗(r) = − θ Proceeding just like in TIV, from eqns (12.1.24) and (12.1.25) we obtain qi θ,i − θη ∗(i) , e˙ − θη˙ = Sij E˙ ij − θ or

∂η ˙ ∂e ∂η ∂e −θ E˙ ij + −θ θ ∂Eij ∂Eij ∂θ ∂θ ∂η qi θ,i ∂e + θη ∗(i) . q˙i + −θ + ∂qi ∂qi θ

(12.1.26)

Sij E˙ ij =

(12.1.27)

If we consider the case of a rigid heat conductor, from eqn (12.1.27) at zero net flow of heat, we get ∂η ∂e =θ , ∂θ ∂θ

(12.1.28)

and since both sides are state functions (and hence independent of the particular process), this equation must be valid in general. Hence, in view of eqn (12.1.28), eqn (12.1.27) becomes ∂e ∂η ∂e ∂η qi θ,i ˙ ˙ + θη ∗(i) Eij + q˙i + −θ −θ Sij Eij = ∂Eij ∂Eij ∂qi ∂qi θ (12.1.29) ∂ψ ˙ ∂ψ qi θ,i + θη ∗(i) , = q˙i + Eij + ∂Eij ∂qi θ where eqn (12.1.22) has been employed. (q) At this point we split the stress tensor into the quasi-conservative (Sij ) and (d)

dissipative (Sij ) parts (q)

(d)

Sij = Sij + Sij ,

(q)

where Sij =

∂ψ , ∂Eij

(12.1.30)

Heat conduction

327

and, just like in all other thermodynamic theories, we let η=−

∂ψ . ∂θ

(12.1.31)

As a result, eqns (12.1.29) and (12.1.25)3 lead to the Clausius–Duhem inequality ∂ψ qi θ,i (d) Sij E˙ ij − − q˙i = θη ∗(i) ≥ 0, θ ∂qi

(12.1.32)

or, in the direct notation where ∇q stands for the gradient in the space of fluxes, ˙ − S(d) · E

q · ∇θ − ∇q ψ · q˙ = θη ∗(i) ≥ 0. θ

(12.1.33)

Thus, we have a dissipation inequality A(d) · v ≥ 0, where

S(d) , −

A(d) =

(12.1.34)

∇θ , −∇q ψ θ

is a vector of dissipative thermodynamic forces, and ˙ q, q˙ v = E,

(12.1.35)

(12.1.36)

is a vector of conjugate thermodynamic velocities. A general procedure based on the representation theory due to Edelen (1973, 1974) allows a derivation of the most general form of the constitutive relation subject to inequality (12.1.34). The following steps are involved: Assume A(d) to be a function of v, and determine it as A(d) = ∇v φ + U,

or

(d)

Ai

=

∂φ + Ui , ∂vi

(12.1.37)

where the vector U = (u1 , u2 ) does not contribute to the entropy production U · v = 0,

(12.1.38)

while the dissipation function is

1

v · A(d) (τ v)dτ,

φ=

(12.1.39)

0

and U is uniquely determined, for given A(d) , by ( ) 1 (d) (d) ∂Ai (τ v) ∂Aj (τ v) Ui = dτ. τ vj − ∂vj ∂vi 0

(12.1.40)

328


Also, the symmetry relations (d) ∂ Ai (τ v) − Ui ∂vj

=

(d) ∂ Aj (τ v) − Uj ∂vi

must hold, and these reduce to the classical Onsager reciprocity conditions (d)

(d) ∂Aj (τ v) ∂Ai (τ v) = ∂vj ∂vi

(12.1.41)

if and only if U = 0. In the following, we focus on a rigid heat conductor, i.e. E˙ ij ≡ 0 everywhere, (d) and hence Sij = 0. Also, we first consider a 1D situation (along the x-axis), so the vectors A(d) and v simplify, respectively, to ∂ψ θx , v = (q, q) ˙ . (12.1.42) A(d) = − , − θ ∂q The simplest expressions for U satisfying the above relations are λt0 λt0 q˙ , U2 = − q, θ θ whereby the dissipation function is a quadratic form U1 =

φ(v) ≡ φ(q, q) ˙ =

1 2 1 2 λq + Gq˙ . 2θ 2

(12.1.43)

(12.1.44)

On account of eqn (12.1.37), we obtain −

λt0 θx λq λ (d) ≡ A1 = + U1 = q + q, ˙ θ θ θ θ

∂ψ λt0 (d) − ≡ A2i = Gq˙ + U2 = Gq˙ − q. ∂q θ

(12.1.45)

Let us now make these observations: (i) Equation (12.1.45)1 immediately yields the Maxwell–Cattaneo law −kθx = ˙ with k = 1/λ; see eqn (12.1.14). q + t0 q, (ii) Equation (12.1.45)2 is satisfied identically provided a quadratic form of the t0 λq 2 , just like in eqn (R1.1.5), is adopted with θ being free energy ψ(q) = 2θ set equal to θ0 , along with G = 0. Regarding the latter, note that q˙ must still be kept as an argument of φ(q, q) ˙ in eqn (12.1.20). Interestingly, the assumption θ ∼ θ0 is involved in eqn (12.1.45)2 but not in eqn (12.1.45)1 . (iii) Other expressions for U and φ(q, q) ˙ – but then leading to non-linear heat conduction laws, and therefore to non-linear field equations – can be explored henceforth. At this point, one may consider various forms of homogeneous and quasi-homogeneous functions in place of λq 2 /θ (Ziegler and Wehrli, 1987). Regarding the quadratic form above, note that the factor

Thermoelastic helices and chiral media

329

1/2 could be incorporated into G in eqn (12.1.44) because φ is not required to equal the entropy production rate. (iv) Another derivation implying the Maxwell–Cattaneo law can be found in Edelen (1993), although that approach involves a dissipation function as a functional of forces [φ = φ(A(d) )] along with a split of thermodynamic velocities v = ∇A(d) φ + U with the condition U · A(d) = 0. Edelen, looking for v as a function of A(d) , adopts a dissipation function involving θ,i /θ ˙ and derives a non-linear partial differential equation for heat conducand θ, tion which in a third-order approximation becomes a telegraph equation. However, our approach based on TIV and the representation theory can be applied not only to thermoelastic (e.g. thermoelasticity theories with one or two relaxation times) but also to thermo-inelastic solids with second-sound effects. Also, the same vectors as in eqn (12.1.42) follow by using a rational thermodynamics instead of a TIV approach. (v) The derivation above may be generalized to 3D, where

v = (q, q) ˙ ,

(d)

A

∇θ , −∇q ψ , = − θ

U = (U1 , U2 ).

(12.1.46)

Now, U1i =

λij t0 q˙j , θ

λij t0 qj , θ

(12.1.47)

1 1 λij qi qj + Gij q˙i q˙j , 2θ0 2

(12.1.48)

u2i = −

and the dissipation function is φ(qi , q˙i ) =

which jointly lead to eqn (12.1.18). 12.2 Thermoelastic helices and chiral media 12.2.1 Homogeneous case Several years ago, an isothermal elastodynamic helix model has been generalized to account for coupled thermo-elastodynamic effects (Ostoja-Starzewski, 2003, 2008). The constitutive equations of such a helix are F = A1 ux + A2 ϕx , M = A3 ux + A4 ϕx .

(12.2.1)

Here, F is the axial force in the helix (normalized by the cross-sectional area A and the Young’s modulus E), M is the torque carried by the helix (normalized by the cube of radius R and the Young modulus E), ux is the axial strain, ϕx is the angle of twist per unit length, Fig. 12.1(a). [Recall that the notation fx = ∂f /∂x and ft = ∂f /∂t has already been introduced in Chapter 10.] The strain energy

330


(a)

X periodic cell

(b) X Thin interphases

0

h

X

(c) Figure 12.1 (a) A wire-rope made of several strands, each of the same helix angle. (b) A heterogeneous rod with a three-phase microperiodic structure (Vivar-Pèrez et al., 2006)). (c) A composite helix and its periodic cell, also showing a thin interphase of thickness h between the black and white phases (Vivar-Pèrez et al., 2008). density W = W (ux , ϕx ) is defined by W (ux , ϕx ) =

1 1 1 ux A11 ux + ux (A12 + A21 )ϕx + ϕx A22 ϕx , 2 2 2

(12.2.2)

and W (ux , ϕx ) is positive-definite iff A11 > 0,

A22 > 0,

A12 = A21 ,

A11 A22 − A12 A21 > 0.

(12.2.3)

Equations (12.2.1), together with the equations of motion, lead to a system of two coupled wave equations for the pair (u, ϕ) ρA¨ u = A1 uxx + A2 ϕxx , ρJ ϕ¨ = A3 uxx + A4 ϕxx ,

(12.2.4)

where ρ is the mass density and J is the mass polar moment of inertia. Accounting for the thermal expansion in the axial direction and using the basic model of Fourier conductivity along the strand’s axis, leads to the three coupled


331

equations governing a triplet (u, ϕ, θ) ρA¨ u = A1 uxx + A2 ϕxx − αEθx , ρJ ϕ¨ = A3 uxx + A4 ϕxx , ρcv θ˙ = Kθxx − αEθ0 u˙ x .

(12.2.5)

By letting (u, ϕ, θ) = (ˆ u0 , ϕˆ0 , θˆ0 ) exp[ik(x − ct)],

(12.2.6)

where (ˆ u0 , ϕˆ0 , θˆ0 ) is a constant triplet, and substituting eqn (12.2.6) into eqns (12.2.5), we obtain the characteristic equation for the velocities c in terms of the wave number k and all the material parameters * * * Aρc2 − A1 −A2 −iEα/k * * * * * −A3 Jρc2 − A4 0 * = 0. * (12.2.7) * cαEθ K c ** * 0 0 −i * * ρcv ρcv k This equation shows that the wave motion is not only dispersive [as in the mechanical model described by eqn (12.2.4)], but also damped. More specifically, eqn (12.2.7) leads to a fifth-order algebraic equation for the roots c, which can be solved numerically so as to assess the velocity c as a function of the wave number k, in the presence of weak thermal effects expressed by the dimensionless thermoelastic coupling constant (ε) and the thermal diffusivity at constant deformation (kv ) ε=

α2 Eθ0 , ρcv

kv =

K . ρcv

(12.2.8)

As a particular case, considering the values pertaining to an oceanographic steel cable (Samras et al., 1974), it was found that, with ε increasing from zero up, while keeping kv = 0, there are two velocities, c1 and c2 , that increase linearly. With ε in metals taking values up to 0.1, those speeds may easily go up by a few per cent. On the other hand, increasing kv from zero up, while keeping ε = 0, has no effect on c1 and c2 . Employing the Maxwell–Cattaneo model for heat conduction, with the relaxation time t0 > 0, we replace eqns (12.2.5) by ρA¨ u = A1 uxx + A2 ϕxx − αEθx , ρJ ϕ¨ = A3 uxx + A4 ϕxx , (12.2.9) ρcv ˙ αEθ 0 ¨ = (θ + t0 θ) (u˙ x + t0 u θxx − ¨x ) . K K While this leads to a sixth-order algebraic equation for the roots c, the ensuing numerical analysis has revealed that they are only weakly affected by t0 . We return to the setup of a 1D, chiral counterpart of the L–S theory in Section 12.2.3.

332


12.2.2 Heterogeneous case and homogenization The thermo-elastodynamics of a helix with a periodic structure has been studied in (Vivar-Pèrez et al., 2006). More precisely, the attention was focused on a bar composed of two, or more, locally homogeneous, thermoelastic materials distributed in periodic cells, and arranged sequentially as shown in Fig. 12.1(b). The length of this periodic cell is assumed to be very small as compared with the unit length taken, and this is expressed by a parameter ε 1. Thus, at each point x and for every t ≥ 0, we consider three field variables: the displacement u(x, t), the twist angle ϕ(x, t), and the temperature θ(x, t), as well as three flux variables: the axial and torsional stresses F (x, t) and M (x, t), and the negative of the heat flux through the cross-sectional area: −q(x, t). The constitutive equations governing these triplets are F = A1 ux + A2 ϕx − αE(θ − θ0 ), M = A3 ux + A4 ϕx ,

(12.2.10)

q + t0 qt = −Kθx , and the balance equations read Fx = ρAutt , Mx = ρJϕtt , −qx = αEθ0 utx + ρcv θt ,

(12.2.11)

where the coefficients A1 , A2 , A3 , A4 , ρ, J, cv , α, E, and K are periodic functions of x since we are dealing with a periodic helix, and t0 , θ0 are positive constants. Upon setting t0 = 0, we have the case of a parabolic heat conduction; otherwise, the equations describe a hyperbolic thermoelastic helix. By introducing the notations     u F v = ϕ, f =  M , θ −q       A1 A2 0 0 0 −αE 00 0 (12.2.12) Q0 =  A3 A4 0  , Q1 =  0 0 0  , T =  0 0 0  , 0 0 K 00 0 0 0 t0       0 00 ρA 0 0 00 0 P0 =  0 0 0  , P1 =  0 ρJ 0  , P2 =  0 0 0  , αEθ0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ρcv eqns (12.2.10) and (12.2.11) are both cast in the following compact form f +T

∂v ∂f = Q0 + Q1 v, ∂t ∂x ∂2v ∂2v ∂v ∂f = P0 + P 1 2 + P2 . ∂t ∂t∂x ∂t ∂t

(12.2.13)


333

With ε being a very small parameter, the asymptotic homogenization method (Bensoussan et al., 1978; Bakhvalov and Panasenko, 1989) can be used to obtain the homogenized rod equations Φ = A¯1 vx + A¯2 ψx − αEγ, M = A¯3 ux + A¯4 ψx ,

(12.2.14)

¯ x, −Θ − t0 Θt = Kγ and Φx = ρA vtt , (12.2.15)

Mx = ρJ ψtt , −Θx = αEθ0 vtx + ρcv γt .

Here, Φ, M , and Θ are the average fields of F, M, and q, respectively; v and ψ are the average fields of u and ϕ, respectively. Also, γ is the average temperature ¯ are given explicitly in terms field, while the effective coefficients A¯1 , A¯2 , . . . K of the properties of constituent phases (Vivar-Pèrez et al., 2006). These results are valid in the case of wavelengths much longer than the length of the unit cell. However, formulas for shorter wavelengths can be derived by admitting higherorder terms in the expansion. Vivar-Pèrez et al. (2008) discussed the isothermal elastodynamics of a helix made of a sequence of unit cells, each containing a thin imperfect interphase embedded within a finite number of other phases, Fig. 12.1(c). This analysis can be generalized to the case of a helix made of thermoelastic phases. 12.2.3 Plane waves in non-centrosymmetric micropolar thermoelasticity Plane harmonic waves in a helical-type (i.e. non-centrosymmetric or chiral) micropolar, isotropic linear thermoelastic material were studied over two decades ago, see, e.g. Nowacki (1986). One starts from the free energy density in a quadratic form 1 ce 2 1 γji ajikl γkl + κji cjikl κkl + γji bjikl κkl − ηji γji ϑ − ζji κji ϑ − ϑ , 2 2 2θ0 (12.2.16) and, using the classical relations (with S denoting the entropy, to avoid clash of notation with ηji ) F =

σji =

∂F , ∂γji

µji =

∂F , ∂κji

S=−

∂F , ∂ϑ

(12.2.17)

334


and assuming isotropy, finds (see also eqns (0.18) in Dyszlewicz, 2004) σji = (µ + α) γji + (µ − α) γij + (λγkk − ηϑ) δji + (χ + ν) κji + (χ − ν) κij + κδij κkk , µji = (χ + ν) γji + (χ − ν) γij + κγkk δij + (γ + ε) κji

(12.2.18)

+ (γ − ε) κij + (βκkk − ζϑ) δji , ce S = ηγkk + ζκkk + ϑ. θ0 This shows that, besides µ, λ, α, β, ε, γ for the non-centrosymmetric micropolar material, there are three additional (chiral) constants: χ, ν, and κ. Remark 12.1 (i) In the centrosymmetric case, α, β, ε, γ are four micropolar constants with ε here being, of course, different from the thermoelastic coupling constant ε used earlier. (ii) κ is just a material constant, as opposed to κij , which is the torsion-curvature tensor. Upon substituting the constitutive equations (12.2.18)1,2 into the linear and angular momentum balance equations ui , σji,j = ρ¨

eijk σkj + µji,j = J ϕï ,

(12.2.19)

and using the kinematic relations εji = uj,i − ekij ϕk ,

κij = ϕj,i ,

(12.2.20)

we obtain the equations of motion in displacements u, rotations ϕ, and temper˙ ature ϑ (where ∂t u ≡ u) 2 u + (λ + µ − α) grad (divu) + 2α (rotϕ) + (χ + ν) ∇2 ϕ + (χ − ν + κ) grad (divϕ) = η (gradϑ) , 4 ϕ + (β + γ − ε) grad (divϕ) + 2α (rotu)

(12.2.21)

+4v (rotϕ) + (χ + ν) ∇2 u + (χ − ν + κ) grad (divu) = ζ (gradϑ) . Here, 2 = (µ + α) ∇2 − ρ∂t2

and

4 = (γ + ε) ∇2 − 4α − J∂t2

(12.2.22)

denote the d’Alembert and Klein–Gordon operators, respectively. Regarding the heat conduction, we begin with Fourier’s law for an isotropic material qi = −Kϑ,i ,

(12.2.23)

where K denotes thermal conductivity, so as to avoid a clash of notation with the wave number k in eqn (12.2.26) below. Also, ϑ = θ − θ0 , with θ0 being the reference temperature. Using the expression for S, and recalling the energy balance θ0 S˙ = −qi,i , we arrive at the energy equation in terms of ui , ϕi , and ϑ K∇2 − ce ∂t ϑ − θ0 η u˙ i,i − θ0 ζ ϕ˙ i,i = 0, (12.2.24)


335

where, interestingly, the term ζ ϕ˙ i,i arises due to the non-centrosymmetry of the material, i.e. its helical microstructure. Here, ce = ρcv , with cv being the heat capacity. Assuming u and ϕ to depend on x1 and t only, we arrive at two disjoint systems of equations. The first of these involves wave motion of the triplet (u1 , ϕ1 , ϑ), and is written below ! (λ + 2µ) ∂12 − ρ∂t2 u1 + (κ + 2χ) ∂t2 ϕ1 − η∂1 ϑ = 0, ! (κ + 2χ) ∂12 u1 + (β + 2γ) ∂12 − 4α − J∂t2 ϕ1 − ζ∂1 ϑ = 0, (12.2.25) −1 2 −η∂1 ∂t u1 − ζ∂1 ∂t ϕ1 + θ0 K ∂1 − ce ∂t ϑ = 0. The second system involves transverse and rotational wave motions, uncoupled from the temperature field, and we shall not concern ourselves with them. Upon substituting the time- and space-harmonic wave forms u1 (x1 , t) = A exp [ik (x1 − ct)] , ϕ1 (x1 , t) = B exp [ik (x1 − ct)] , ϑ = C exp [ik (x1 − ct)] ,

(12.2.26)

where A, B, and C are constants, into eqn (12.2.25), we find the system of three homogeneous algebraic equations ! ! ρc2 k 2 − (λ + 2µ) k 2 A + − (κ + 2χ) k2 B − (ikη)C = 0, ! ! − (κ + 2χ) k2 A + − (β + 2γ) k 2 − 4α + iJc2 k 2 B − (iζk)C = 0, (12.2.27) K c e −cηk2 A − cζk2 B + − k 2 + i kc C = 0, θ0 θ0 which leads to a characteristic determinant/equation for the roots c in terms of k and all the material parameters (upon division by k 2 above) * * 2 * * ρc − (λ + 2µ) − (κ + 2χ) −iη/k * * * * 2 2 * * − (κ + 2χ) Jc − (β + 2γ) − 4α/k −iζ/k (12.2.28) * = 0. * * * ce K * * − i c/k * cη cζ * θ0 θ0 In essence, the wave motions described by (u1 , ϕ1 , ϑ) are dispersive and damped. Additionally, by comparison to the case of the 1D helix studied in Section 12.2.1, we note these principal differences: (i) In the determinant (12.2.28) in which the elements are denoted by Cij (i, j = 1, 2, 3), the terms C23 and C32 are non-zero. (ii) The term C22 contains 4α/k 2 , which, already in the simpler case of absence of thermal effects, leads to dispersive effects. A solution of eqn (12.2.28) has not been attempted due to the present difficulty of obtaining explicit values of material parameters χ, ν, κ, and ζ. Recently,

336


progress has been made on derivations of centrosymmetric micropolar parameters of composite materials from a microstructure (e.g. Ostoja-Starzewski, 2008a), but further work still needs to be done on the non-centrosymmetric case. Thus, at present, the analysis of the 1D helix in Section 12.2.1 provides guidance about plane waves in a 3D hemitropic thermoelastic continua. 12.3 Surface waves The relaxation times of a generalized dynamic coupled thermoelasticity, as opposed to the classical thermoelasticity, give rise to interesting effects on the propagation of surface waves. In the following, we review the results of Wojnar on stationary thermoelastic surface waves in an isotropic homogeneous half-space within the G–L theory (1986, 1988a, 1988b). The starting point is given by the field equations (2.1.11) of the mixed displacement–temperature problem in Chapter 2, which now become ˙ j = ρ¨ ui µui ,jj +(λ + µ)uj ,ji −γ(ϑ + t1 ϑ), on ˙ ¨ kϑ,ii = CE (ϑ + t0 ϑ) + γθ0 u˙ j ,j

B × [0, ∞),

(12.3.1)

where B stands for the domain: |x1 | < ∞, x2 ≥ 0, |x3 | < ∞, while γ = (3λ + 2µ)α0 ,

(12.3.2)

with α0 denoting the coefficient of linear thermal expansion. The boundary conditions at x2 = 0 involve (i) Si2 (x1 , 0, x3 , t) = 0 and (ii) a free heat transfer. Thus, in view of eqn (1.3.45) restricted to an isotropic body and assuming the fields independent of x3 , and u3 = 0, at the boundary we have ˙ = 0, λu1 ,1 +(λ + 2µ)u2 ,2 −γ(ϑ + t1 ϑ) for the constants η1 , η2 such that 1 ≥ η1 ≥ 0,

u1 ,2 +u2 ,1 = 0, η1 ϑ + η2 ϑ,2 = 0

η2 ≥ 0. (12.3.3)

To solve the generalized thermoelastic surface-wave problem, we let Aj = αj c1 /κ,

(12.3.4)

and substitute (u1 , u2 , ϑ) =

3 .

(U (j) , V (j) , ϑ(j) ) exp[−Aj x2 + i(kx1 − Ωt)]

(12.3.5)

j=1

into eqns (13.3.3). This leads to three linear homogeneous algebraic equations for (U (1) , U (2) , U (3) ), whose non-zero solution is assured by the following condition [qGη2 (α22 + α32 + ω 2 − q 2 + α2 α3 ) + η0 (q 2 − ω 2 + α2 α3 )]2 = (qGη0 + η2 α2 α3 )2 (α22 + α32 + α2 α3 ),

(12.3.6)

Surface waves

where η0 = η1 κ/c1 , ∗

ω = Ω/Ω ,

G= ∗

Ω =

q α1

c21 /κ,

c21

α12 + q 2 2q 2

337

2 κ = K/CE

,

= (λ + 2µ)/ρ,

(12.3.7) ∗

q = kc1 /Ω ,

and αi > 0 (i = 1, 2, 3) satisfy the relations α12 = q 2 − β 2 ω 2 ,

α22 + α32 = −P − Q − R,

α22 α32 = P Q − q 2 R,

(12.3.8)

where P = ω2 − q2 ,

Q = −q 2 + ω 2 τ0 + iω,

R = ω(i + ωτ1 ).

(12.3.9)

In eqns (12.3.8) and (12.3.9) the material parameters β, τ0 , τ1 , and are defined by β = c1 /c2 , ε = mhκ,

c22 = µ/ρ, τ0 = t0 Ω∗ , τ1 = t1 Ω∗ , h = γθ0 /K, m = γ/(λ + 2µ),

(12.3.10)

For the limiting value ε = 0, eqn (12.3.6) splits into the equations G2 = 1 − ω 2 /q 2 ,

q 2 = ω 2 τ0 + iω,

(12.3.11)

of which the first one is the classical equation of a Rayleigh wave, while the second one is the dispersion equation of a thermal wave. Another special case occurs for η1 = 0 and η2 = 1, whereby eqn (12.3.6) reduces to G2 [q 2 − ω 2 (τ0 + ετ1 ) − iω(1 + ε) + α2 α3 ]2 = (α22 α32 /q 2 )[2q 2 − ω(1 + τ0 + ετ1 ) − iω(1 + ε) + 2α2 α3 ].

(12.3.12)

From the above, for ω → 0 and q → 0 as ω/q → const, and for τ1 ≥ τ0 > 0, we recover the result of Lockett (1958) G2 = (1 + ε − ω 2 /q 2 )/(1 + ε).

(12.3.13)

With the notations i i , T1 = τ1 + , ω ω 4 β2 2 X / 1 − β2X , G ≡G = 1− 2

X = ω 2 /q 2 ,

T0 = τ 0 +

(12.3.14)

A2 ≡ (α2 α3 /q 2 )2 = (1 − X)(1 − XT0 ) − εXT1 , eqn (12.3.12) takes the form G[1 − X(T0 + εT1 ) + A]2 = A2 [2 − X − X(T0 + εT1 ) + 2A].

(12.3.15)

On the other hand, if the relaxation times are equal, τ1 = τ0 (that is, if T0 = T1 ), there holds the dispersion equation due to Nayfeh and Nemat-Nasser (1971)

338


for the L–S theory G[1 − (1 + ε)XT0 + A]2 = A2 [2 − X − (1 + ε)XT0 + 2A],

(12.3.16)

where A2 = (1 − X)(1 − XT0 ) − εXT0 .

(12.3.17)

This shows that an analogy first observed for the plane thermoelastic waves in the L–S and G–L theories (Agarwal, 1978) carries over to the surface waves. More specifically, that analogy says that, while there is no a priori correspondence between the L–S and G–L theories, the results for plane waves in the G–L theory carry over to those of the L–S theory provided τ0 = τ1 ; see also (Abd-Alla and Al-Dawy, 2001). Wojnar solved the dispersion equation (12.3.16) and his results are reproduced here in Fig. These graphs show the squared speed of√the surface wave, c2 = √ 12.2. 2 [1/Re(1/ X)] , and its damping coefficient, η = ωIm(1/ X), for four values of the ratio τ1 /τ0 , as functions of 1/τ0 , i.e. the reciprocal of the smaller of both relaxation times. Observe that, for decreasing values of τ1 , the solutions c2 tend to the straight asymptotes indicated by the broken lines. The horizontal line c2R = 0.2817 corresponds to the mechanical Rayleigh wave mode, while the linear relation c2 = 1/τ0 corresponds to the thermal mode. As discussed at length in (Wojnar, 1988), these results are consistent with the asymptotic analysis. The effect of coupled generalized thermoelastic material response versus the classical one has also been examined in a number of problems involving interaction of one or two half-spaces: rigid die sliding on a deformable body, surface or interface wave propagation, and dynamic thermoelastic fracture (Brock, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008a,b). In particular, Brock (2005) found that, when a rigid die slides with friction at constant subcritical speed on a thermoelastic half-space with one relaxation time, there is a clear dependence of the speeds of body waves and a Rayleigh wave on the thermoelastic coupling and the relaxation time. Furthermore, Brock (2006) examined a dynamic steady state occurring when the half-space is debonded from a rigid insulated substrate at constant speed by moving shear and normal line loads. He obtained the field variables on the debonded surface and the still-bonded interface for the sub-Rayleigh, superRayleigh/subsonic, lower and upper transonic, and supersonic speed ranges. These investigations have been extended in (Brock, 2007) to include thermoelasticity with two relaxation times (i.e. the G–L theory) in two half-spaces (1 and 2). Interestingly, it has been found that Stoneley waves can be generated by a thermal mismatch alone (i.e. without any mismatch in the elastic properties), in classical coupled thermoelasticity with the Fourier heat flow as well as in thermoelasticity with one or two relaxation times. Furthermore, an asymptotic analysis has shown that, for very long times after load application, a residual temperature for all three theories obeys the Fourier heat conduction. Also, a time step load gives rise to a propagating step in temperature for the Fourier and two relaxation time models, and to a propagating pulse for the single-relaxation

Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators

339

Figure 12.2 The squared speed c2 and damping coefficient η of a generalized surface wave treated as functions of 1/τ0 , for the coupling constant ε = 0.05, (which corresponds to a medium with a Poisson ratio ν = 1/4), for τ1 /τ0 = 1, 2, 5, 10 at the frequency ω = 105 ; from (Wojnar, 1988). time model (Brock, 2008a). These studies have now been extended to a dynamic thermoelastic fracture (Brock, 2008b). 12.4 Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators 12.4.1 Flexural vibrations of a thermoelastic Bernoulli–Euler beam High-frequency nano-electromechanical systems (so-called NEMS) attract widespread attention of many researchers due to a number of important applications, such as the ultrasensitive mass detection, mechanical signal processing, scanning probe microscopes, etc. The main challenges in fabrication and design of such devices include an increase of their natural frequency and a minimization of dissipation effects (Roukes, 2000). Thermoelastic damping, which results from coupling between the mechanical and temperature fields, is identified as one of the main mechanisms of internal dissipation in NEMS resonators and places a fundamental limit on their force sensitivity. While most work to date has focused on analysis of thermoelastic damping of beam resonators within the framework of the classical theory of thermoelasticity (e.g. Kinra and Milligan, 1994; Bishop

340


and Kinra, 1997; Roukes, 2000), in a recent paper we examined it from the standpoint of the L–S theory (Khisaeva and Ostoja-Starzewski, 2006). The energy balance equation of the L–S theory for a thermoelastic isotropic body is ρc ˙ Eα ϑ + t0 ϑ¨ + θ0 (u˙ k ,k +t0 u ¨k ,k ) , (12.4.1) ϑ,ii = k k(1 − 2ν) where ui is the displacement vector, ϑ is the temperature change, ρ is the mass density, c is the specific heat, E is Young’s modulus of the material, ν is Poisson’s ratio, α is the linear thermal expansion coefficient, θ0 is the absolute equilibrium temperature, and k is the isotropic thermal conductivity. The entropy production within the body per unit time per unit mass, in which a heat flow takes place, can be calculated from the entropy balance equation η˙ = −

1 qi θ,i , ρθ2

(12.4.2)

where η, θ, and qi denote the entropy, absolute temperature, and heat flux, respectively. Assuming small deviations of temperature from the equilibrium value, θ in the denominator can be replaced by θ0 . For a 1D case, in which ϑ = ϑ(y, t) and the temperature gradient is not equal to zero, elimination of qi = q(y, t)δi2 from eqn (12.4.2) and the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation leads to , + k ϑ˙ ϑ˙ (12.4.3) t0 η¨ + η˙ 1 + 2t0 − t0 = 2 (ϑ )2 , θ0 ϑ ρθ0 where the prime denotes a derivative with respect to y. The thermoelastic damping is defined as the ratio of the energy dissipated to the energy stored in the body over the same period of time; it is expressed as ∆W dV ψL W dV V = V , (12.4.4) ψL dV = ψ= W dV W dV V V V where ψL = ∆W/W is the local specific damping capacity, W is the elastic energy density stored in the body, given by W = 12 Sij Eij , and ∆W is the total work lost throughout the body, which can be related to the entropy generation by the following equation ∆W = ρθ0 η.

(12.4.5)

The interest being in a resonator, attention is focused on a thin homogeneous, isotropic, elastic beam of thickness h with a constant rectangular crosssection (Fig. 12.3) subjected to a steady-state displacement condition u(x, t) ≡ u2 (x, t) = U (x)eiωt at the neutral axis, where U (x) is a prescribed function and ω is the circular frequency in radians per second.

Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators

341

y

x z

h/2

–h / 2

Figure 12.3 The co-ordinate system and geometry of a beam. In the same vein, we take the dilatation and temperature fields as Ekk = −(1 − 2ν)Exx = −(1 − 2ν)(−yuxx ) = −(1 − 2ν)κ0 yeiωt , ϑ = θ0 (1 + i) + V (y)eiωt ,

(12.4.6)

where κ0 = 2σ/(hE), σ is the pressure on the beam’s surface, and V = V (y) is to be found. Since we note that the conduction of heat in the beam is much faster than the exchange of heat with the environment, the energy balance equation (12.4.1) becomes d2 ϑ∗ − π 2 Ωϑ∗ (i − γΩ) = −2π 2 ΩY (i − γΩ) . dY 2

(12.4.7)

Here, Y = y/h is the non-dimensional co-ordinate, ϑ∗ = ϑ/∆T is the normalized temperature (∆T being the change in temperature at the compressed upper surface of the beam by a constant stress σ under “adiabatic” conditions α α h σθ0 = ρc ∆T = − ρc 2 Eθ0 κ0 .) and Ω = ωτ is the normalized frequency, where 2 2 τ = ρch /π k is the characteristic time in Zener’s model of thermoelastic damping (Zener, 1948), while γ = t0 /τ is the normalized relaxation time. A general solution to eqn (12.4.3) for the entropy production per unit time per unit mass, in which ϑ is generated by ϑ∗ satisfying eqn (12.4.7), is ∆T 2 k ∂η 2 = 2 2 [BI sin(ωt) − BR cos(ωt)] ∂t ρh θ0 ω(1 + ω 2 t20 ) 2 1 (12.4.8) 2 sin(2ωt) BI − BR − BI BR cos(2ωt) −ωt0 2 +C1 e−t/t0 [BI sin (ωt) − BR cos (ωt)] , where BR and BI are, respectively the real and imaginary parts of the temperature gradient ∂ϑ∗ /∂Y and C1 is an arbitrary constant. Defining the period as t∗ = 2π/ω, the change of entropy over the period is ∆η =

2 π∆T 2 k 2 BI + BR , 2 2 + ω t0 )

ρh2 θ02 ω(1

(12.4.9)

342


so that, on account of eqn (12.4.5), we obtain the averaged damping across the beam thickness 1/2 2 3ψ0 2 BI + BR dY, (12.4.10) ψ= 2 2 2 π Ω(1 + γ Ω ) −1/2 where ψ0 is a characteristic Zener damping defined by ψ0 = 2πα2 Eθ0 /ρc. 12.4.2 Numerical results and discussion The average damping capacity of the beam resonator is plotted and analyzed in Fig. 12.4 according to the above formulas for three of the most common NEMS materials with various γ values: silicon, quartz and diamond. It is found that the temperature remains at the reference state at low frequencies and represents a line (adiabatic limit when Ω → ∞) analogously to the classical temperature distribution (Kinra and Milligan, 1994). At intermediate frequencies the L– S theory gives rise to a wave-like temperature distribution across the beam thickness with the temperature exceeding the adiabatic limit by 5 times for silicon and 20 times for diamond. Evidently, the nature of such a temperature distribution is defined by the difference in speed of propagation of mechanical and thermal waves. As in the classical case, at low frequencies, the system has enough time to relax and the temperature distribution doesn’t depend on Y ; at higher frequencies the system has no time to relax and the temperature curve represents a line – an adiabatic limit. When the frequency of vibration is in the intermediate range, thermal waves have time to propagate for some finite distance, which, as a result, produce a wave-like temperature distribution across the thickness of the beam.

Figure 12.4 A comparison of classical thermoelastic damping with a generalized thermoelastic damping for different values of the parameter γ.

Fractional calculus and fractals in thermoelasticity

343

An interesting observation is made for a real component of the complexvalued temperature. One can observe cooling instead of heating in the compressed surface of the beam for specific ranges of frequency (negative values of the temperature disturbances). Furthermore, the finite speed of thermal wave propagation results in the existence of not one damping peak as in the classical theory, but many peaks, with a decreasing amplitude as the frequency tends to infinity (Fig. 12.4). The maximum value of damping peaks exceeds the classical prediction by ∼ 5 (Si) to ∼ 33 (diamond) times. It is important to note that in the L–S theory the maximum damping occurs at much lower frequencies than in the classical theory, which may result in high energy losses if the frequency of operation falls into this range. Conversely, a higher frequency of operation will result in much lower damping than expectations of the classical model. The currently attainable frequencies for the fundamental flexural modes of thin nanobeams of dimension (0.1 × 0.01 × 0.01 µm) are in the range of 1.9 to 12 GHz, which corresponds to Ω = 0.0044–0.0279 for quartz, Ω = 0.0002–0.0013 for silicon and Ω = 0.000017–0.00011 for diamond. From examination of the graphical results, in light of real nanomechanical system vibrations, it can be concluded that, at frequencies attainable at present, second sound effect doesn’t have any significant influence on damping capacity of the resonators and therefore a good enough approximation can be obtained using the classical theory. However, in the frequency range of 1012 Hz, the modified heat-conduction equation (R1.1.8) gives completely different results from the classical one and needs to be employed. Remark 12.2 The thermoelastic damping of a beam whose material is governed by the G–L theory should next be studied. 12.5 Fractional calculus and fractals in thermoelasticity 12.5.1 Anomalous heat conduction There exist many materials and physical situations where classical thermoelasticity, based on a Fourier-type heat conduction, breaks down: low-temperature regimes, amorphous media, colloids, glassy and porous materials, man-made and biological materials/polymers, transient loading, etc. In such cases one needs to use a generalized thermoelasticity (and, more generally, thermo-viscoelasticity) theory, based on an anomalous heat-conduction model involving time-fractional (non-integer order) derivatives. A starting point of this brief review is the idea of Povstenko (2005a,b, 2008) who replaces the classical heat-conduction equation ρc ∂ϑ/∂t = k∇2 ϑ for a macroscopically homogeneous isotropic medium by an anomalous one, i.e. by an equation with time-fractional (strictly speaking, non-integer) derivatives ρc

∂αϑ = k∇2 ϑ, ∂tα

(12.5.1)

where the real parameter 0 < α ≤ 2, and ∇2 indicates a Laplacian in physical space.

344


Remark 12.3 (i) Clearly, the Newtonian calculus, to which we are overwhelmingly accustomed, employs derivatives of integer order α only. (ii) The term “fractional” is a misnomer as it accommodates any real, not just a rational number. Now, two important types of anomalous heat transport can be distinguished: (i) the subdiffusion regime, characterized by 0 < α < 1; (ii) the superdiffusion regime, characterized by 1 < α ≤ 2. In the language of statistical physics and stochastic processes (which, in fact, are the basis of all the diffusion phenomena), we would say that the particles of subdiffusion (respectively, superdiffusion) regime move slower (respectively, faster) than those of classical diffusion (α = 1). The limiting case of α = 2 is known as ballistic diffusion (Kimmich, 2002). The superdiffusion case of eqn (12.5.1) has its origin in a time-non-local dependence between the heat flux and temperature gradient

t

K(t − τ )∇ϑ(τ )dτ,

q(t) = −k

(12.5.2)

0

with the kernel K(t − τ ) =

1 (t − τ )α−2 , Γ(α − 1)

1 < α < 2,

(12.5.3)

where Γ is the gamma function. From the standpoint of individual particle motions, the anomalous diffusion is characterized by a mean-squared displacement having a power-law time dependence : x2 ∼ tα ,

9

α = 1.

(12.5.4)

The case of α = 1 corresponds to the classical Brownian process model. Several different random process models were proposed for the case of α = 1. The fractional derivative implied in eqn (12.5.1) is that of Caputo (1967, 1969):     

dα f (t) ≡ Dα f (t) =  dtα   

1 Γ(n − α)

t

(t − τ )n−α−1 0

dα f (t), dtα

dn f (τ ) dτ, n − 1 < α < n, dτ n α = n. (12.5.5)


345

This derivative offers several well-known advantages over the Riemann–Liouville derivative  t dn 1  n−α−1   (t − τ ) f (τ )dτ , n − 1 < α < n,  dtn Γ(n − α) dα 0 α f (t) ≡ DR f (t) =  dtα  dα   f (t), α = n; dtα (12.5.6) see also (Gorenflo and Mainardi, 1997, 1998). In order to model the quasi-static thermal stresses due to the temperature field governed by eqn (12.5.1), Povstenko uses ρc

∂αϑ = K∇2 ϑ, ∂tα

(12.5.7)

the equilibrium equation µui ,kk +(λ + µ)uk ,ki = β(λ + 2µ/3)ϑ,i

(12.5.8)

along with the stress–strain temperature relation of linear thermoelasticity Sij = 2µEij + [λEkk − β(λ + 2µ/3)ϑ]δij .

(12.5.9)

Here, to avoid a clash of notation, β/3 denotes the coefficient of linear thermal expansion (i.e. the same as α elsewhere in this book). Remark 12.4 Since the superdiffusion case of eqn (12.5.1) interpolates the heat-conduction equation (α = 1) and the wave equation (α = 2), the thermoelasticity with eqns (12.5.1) and (12.5.8 and 9) interpolates the classical quasistatic thermoelasticity and the quasi-static thermoelasticity without energy dissipation due to Green and Naghdi (1993). Several initial-boundary value problems for eqns (12.5.7)–(12.5.9) have been solved by Povstenko. To illustrate their salient features, we recall a 1D Cauchy problem (Povstenko, 2005b). In this case, eqns (12.5.7–9) are to be satisfied for |x| < ∞ and t > 0 together with the initial conditions t = 0 : ϑ = p δ(x) for 0 < α ≤ 2, ∂ϑ = 0 for 1 < α ≤ 2, t=0: ∂t

(12.5.10)

where p is a prescribed constant. Also, the boundary conditions ensuring vanishing at infinity are postulated lim u(x, t) = 0,

|x|→∞

lim ϑ(x, t) = 0,

|x|→∞

∀t > 0.

(12.5.11)

346


Figure 12.5 Dependence of temperature ϑ (denoted here by T ) and stress σyy on the similarity variable z, after Povstenko (2005b). The resulting temperature and stress distributions corresponding to various values of α (1/2, 2/3, 1, 4/3, 3/2) are shown in Fig. 12.5 for a similarity variable z = xa−1/2 t−α/2 where a = K/ρc, and m = β(3λ + 2µ)/3(λ + 2µ). To summarize, only the heat transfer alone (i.e. in a rigid conductor) and its effect on the diffusive strains/stresses has been studied within the quasi-static theory, but no extension of the quasi-static solution to include the inertia terms in eqn (12.5.8) has been obtained as yet. 12.5.2 Fractal media Continuum thermomechanics of fractal media Continuum mechanics is naturally suited to deal primarily with media exhibiting spatially homogeneous properties. If the materials are heterogeneous and random, then it is hoped that the statistics are describable by the conventional Euclidean geometry and, therefore, by the conventional calculus. Needless to say, such media are ubiquitous in nature, yet they fall outside the realm of classical continuum mechanics. Another consideration is that, as already in Section 12.5.1, the constitutive responses of many materials are best described by fractional calculus. In physics, the connection between transport phenomena in fractal geometries and fractional models has been known for quite some time (Feder, 2007). Although many advances have been made, a solution of boundary value problems of fractal media in the vein of continuum mechanics is still an open issue. However, a first step in that direction has recently been taken by Tarasov (2005a,b), who developed the continuum-type equations of conservation of mass, linear momentum and energy for fractals from the standpoint of dimensional regularization, and, on that basis studied some fluid mechanics and wave problems. This allowed the development of a continuum-type expression of the second law


347

of thermodynamics for fractal media in the setting of thermomechanics with internal variables (Ostoja-Starzewski, 2007a), from which followed a generalized energy balance equation coupling the temperature and mechanical fields (OstojaStarzewski, 2007b). First, let the mass m in a fractal medium obey the power law relation m (R) = kRD ,

D < 3,

(12.5.12)

where R is a box size (or a sphere radius, effectively a lengthscale of measurement), D is a fractal dimension of mass, and k is a proportionality constant. It follows that the power law (12.5.12) describes the scaling of mass with R. Focusing on fractal porous media, that law is rewritten as D R , (12.5.13) mD (R) = m0 Rp where Rp is the average pore radius, and m0 is the mass at Rp = R; this is a reference case. With eqn (12.5.13) we use D to denote the fractal dimension of mass in a domain W , while the boundary ∂W of W has dimension d. In general, d equals neither 2 nor D − 1. At this point, the conventional equation giving mass in a 3D region W ρ (r) d3 r (12.5.14) m (W ) = W

has to be generalized to 23−D Γ (3/2) mD (W ) = Γ (D/2)

D−3

ρ (r) |r − r0 |

d3 r,

(12.5.15)

W

where r0 is a fixed point of W . Assuming the fractal medium to be spatially homogeneous ρ (r) = ρ0 = const, eqn (12.5.14) is replaced by the fractional integral π25−D Γ (3/2) π25−D Γ (3/2) ρ0 ρ0 RD , RD−1 dR = mD (W ) = Γ (D/2) DΓ (D/2) W

(12.5.16)

(12.5.17)

where R = r − r0 and |R| = R. That is, the fractal medium with a non-integer mass dimension D is described using a fractional integral of order D. This allows an interpretation of the fractal (intrinsically discontinuous) medium as a continuum. In particular, the next step is Tarasov’s reformulation of the Green– Gauss Theorem f vk nk dAd = c−1 (12.5.18) 3 (D, R) div (c2 (d, R) f v) dVD , ∂W

W

348


where f is an arbitrary function, v is the velocity, and the infinitesimal surface (dAd ) and volume (dVD ) elements of the fractal body are related to the conventional infinitesimal elements dA2 (≡ dA) and dV3 (≡ dV ) by dAd = c2 (d, R) dA2 ,

dVD = c3 (D, R) dV3 .

(12.5.19)

On account of eqns (12.5.19), the left-hand side in eqn (12.5.18) is a fractional integral, equal to a conventional integral ∂W c2 (d, R) f v · ndA2 . Similarly, the right-hand side in eqn (12.5.18) is a fractional integral equal to a conventional integral W div (c2 (d, R) f v) dV3 . Tarasov (2005a,b) gave expressions for c2 and c3 based on a Riesz measure. These are very well suited for isotropic fractal media, and, as a result, the equations governing problems in 1D cannot be consistently obtained from the equations governing problems in 3D. For example, the one-dimensional fractal wave equation is not equivalent to that of a plane wave in three dimensions. That drawback can be removed by introducing a product measure instead, whereby a possible anisotropy is also incorporated, further ensuring that the mechanical approach to continuum mechanics is consistent with the energetic approach (Li and Ostoja-Starzewski, 2009). To this end, note that, while the mass distribution in conventional continuum mechanics is dµ(x) = ρ(x)dV3 ,

(12.5.20)

where ρ(x) is mass density and dV3 is the Lebesgue measure in R3 , the product measure we now introduce is dµk (xk ) = ρ(x)c1 (αk , xk )dxk ,

k = 1, 2, 3.

(12.5.21)

Thus, while eqn (12.5.20) applies to a non-fractal mass distribution M ∼ x1 x2 x3 , 1 α2 α3 eqn (12.5.21) applies to a fractal mass distribution M ∼ xα 1 x2 x3 , the total fractal dimension being D = α1 + α2 + α3 . For simplicity, here we adopt a form based on a Riemann–Liouville integral (k)

c1 =

|xk |αk −1 , Γ(αk )

k = 1, 2, 3,

(12.5.22)

so as to give (k)

(i) (j)

c3 =

(1) (2) (3) c1 c1 c1

c2 = c1 c1 =

|xi |αi −1 |xj |αj −1 , Γ(αi )Γ(αj )

i, j = k,

|x1 |α1 −1 |x2 |α2 −1 |x3 |α3 −1 . = Γ(α1 )Γ(α2 )Γ(α3 )

(12.5.23)


349

One can show that eqns (12.5.23) are consistent with eqns (12.5.19). The ensuing calculus of tensor fields, relying on eqn (12.5.18), involves the following operator (or, generalized derivative) of spatial gradient ∂ [c2 (d, R) f ] ∂xk −1 (k) ≡ c−1 ∇k f, 3 (D, R) ∇k [c2 (d, R) f ] = c1 −1 ∇D k f = c3 (D, R)

(12.5.24)

where the last equality follows from the relations (12.5.22) and (12.5.23). On the other hand, a derivation of the Reynolds transport theorem for fractal media undergoing finite motions (Ostoja-Starzewski, 2009a) ∂ d f + (f vk ) ,k dVD f (x, t) dVD = (12.5.25) dt W W ∂t dictates the conventional material derivative ∂f Df ∂f = + vk . Dt ∂t ∂xk

(12.5.26)

This is in contrast to (D/Dt)D = ∂f /∂t + c(D, d, R)vk f,k , with c (D, d, R) = c−1 3 (D, R) c2 (d, R), of Tarasov’s formulation, which was adopted rather intuitively. In consequence, in all previous results for mechanics of fractal media (D/Dt)D is to be simply replaced by the conventional material derivative D/Dt, thereby leading to certain simplifications. In particular, the balance equations of fractal media become:

r the fractional equation of continuity: Dρ = −ρ∇D k vk , Dt r the fractional equation of balance of linear momentum density: Dvk = ρfk + ∇D l Skl , Dt r the fractional equation of balance of internal energy density: ρ

ρ

Du = Skl vk,l − ∇D k qk , Dt

(12.5.27)

(12.5.28)

(12.5.29)

r the second law of thermodynamics (unchanged from TIV): (d)

(d)

Sij dij + βij α˙ ij −

θ,k qk ≥ 0. θ

(12.5.30)

In the above, Skl is the Cauchy stress (symmetric according to the balance of angular momentum, employed just like in non-fractal media), although a generalization to fractal micropolar media is possible. As usual, dij is the deformation (d) rate, αij is the internal parameter tensor, and βij is the dissipative internal

350


(k)

stress tensor. Note that, in a non-fractal medium (D = 3, d = 2) c2 = 1 and c3 = 1, whereby one recovers conventional forms of local relations of continuum mechanics. Thermodynamics and Thermoelasticity Constitutive laws of fractal media now follow from the above, and a number of key relations of Ziegler and Wehrli (1987) – such as laws governing complex and compound processes and the associated Onsager reciprocity conditions and Legendre transformations – carry over to fractal media. In particular, the energy balance equation of classical non-linear thermoelastodynamics, coupling the thermal and mechanical fields, is generalized to ρcp

θ ˙ θ = −(3λ + 2µ)αθE˙ (1) − ∇D i qi , θ0

(12.5.31)

where E˙ (1) is the first invariant of the strain rate tensor, cp is the specific heat at constant pressure, while θ0 > 0 is a reference temperature. In the special case of E˙ (1) = 0 we have the equation describing heat conduction in a fractal rigid conductor ρcp

θ ˙ θ = −∇D i qi . θ0

(12.5.32)

Assuming a Fourier-type heat flow everywhere in the fractal medium, a linearization of eqn (12.5.31) leads to the generalization of energy balance equation ∂θ k , (12.5.33) ρcp θ˙ = −(3λ + 2µ)αθ0 E˙ (1) + ∇D i ∂xi while eqn (12.5.32) becomes ∂θ D ˙ ρcp θ = ∇i k , ∂xi

(12.5.34)

where k is the thermal conductivity of the material. Turning to the second sound in a rigid conductor with fractal geometry, following Sections 12.1.2 and 12.1.3 we first adopt the Maxwell–Cattaneo equation (12.1.14). Given the remarks following eqns (12.5.24) and (12.5.26), this leads to a telegraph equation for fractal materials (a generalization of eqn (12.1.15)) −1 ∂ 2 θ (k) k 2, t0 ρcp θ¨ + ρcp θ˙ = c1 ∂x (k)

(12.5.35)

with the coefficient c1 accounting for the fractal structure in one dimension, recall eqn (12.5.22). In this vein, the entire approach may be extended to


351

hyperbolic thermoelasticity in fractal deformable materials, which, however, is a subject matter presently outside this book. On the other hand, some progress has already been made on other topics in mechanics of fractal media: transport equations, extremum and variational principles in elastic and inelastic materials, turbulence and fracture mechanics (Ostoja-Starzewski, 2008b, 2009a,b; Ostoja-Starzewski and Li, 2009).

13 NON-LINEAR HYPERBOLIC RIGID HEAT CONDUCTOR OF THE COLEMAN TYPE

In Chapters 1–11 an emphasis on the mathematical development of the linear hyperbolic theory of thermoelasticity was made, while Chapter 12 focused on several physical aspects and micromechanical applications of the theory. In the present chapter a rigid but non-linear hyperbolic heat conductor; that obeys the law of conservation of energy, the dissipation inequality, Cattaneo’s equation, and a generalized energy–entropy relation with a parabolic variation of the energy and entropy along the heat flux axis (Coleman et al., 1982, 1983, 1986); is analyzed. In Section 13.1 the basic field equations for a 1D case are recalled, while in Section 13.2 a number of closed-form solutions to the non-linear governing equations are obtained. Finally, in Section 13.3 a method of weakly non-linear geometric optics is applied to obtain an asymptotic solution to the Cauchy problem with a weakly perturbed initial condition associated with the non-linear model (Ignaczak and Doma´ nski, 2008). 13.1 Basic field equations for a 1D case A 1D non-linear homogeneous isotropic rigid heat conductor proposed by Coleman et al. (1982, 1986) obeys the following field equations. The law of conservation of energy ∂q ∂e =− + r. ∂t ∂x

(13.1.1)

∂s ∂ q r ∂σ ≡ + − ≥ 0. ∂t ∂t ∂x T T

(13.1.2)

The dissipation inequality

Cattaneo’s equation ∂q ∂T = −k . ∂t ∂x

(13.1.3)

τ q de = ds + dq, T k T2

(13.1.4)

q+τ The energy–entropy relation

Basic field equations for a 1D case

353

where τ 1 2 q , kT 1τ 1 2 q , s = s(T, q) = s0 (T ) + 2 k T2 e = e(T, q) = e0 (T ) +

(13.1.5) (13.1.6)

and de0 de0 = ds0 , = ρc. (13.1.7) T dT In eqns (13.1.1)–(13.1.7), T = T (x, t) and q = q(x, t) represent the absolute temperature and heat flux, respectively; e = e(x, t) and s = s(x, t) denote the internal energy and entropy, respectively; σ = σ(x, t) and r = r(x, t) are the entropy production and external heat source, respectively; τ and k are the relaxation time and thermal conductivity, respectively; while ρ and c represent the density and specific heat, respectively. The material parameters obey the inequalities τ > 0,

k > 0,

ρ > 0,

c > 0.

Note that an equivalent form of eqn (13.1.4) reads ∂e ∂s ∂s τ q 1 ∂e dT + dq = dT + dq + dq, T ∂T ∂q ∂T ∂q k T2 or ∂s 1 ∂e = , T ∂T ∂T and ∂s τ q 1 ∂e = + . T ∂q ∂q k T 2

(13.1.8)

(13.1.9)

(13.1.10)

(13.1.11)

By substituting e and s from eqns (13.1.5) and (13.1.6), respectively, into eqns (13.1.10) and (13.1.11), and using eqn (13.1.7) we find that eqns (13.1.10) and (13.1.11) are identically satisfied. Therefore, the energy–entropy relation (13.1.4) is identically satisfied. Also, note that the dissipation inequality (13.1.2) is satisfied in the following sense. By dividing eqn (13.1.1) by T > 0 and using eqn (13.1.3) we obtain 1 ∂q r ∂ q 1 ∂T r 1 ∂e =− + =− − 2 q+ T ∂t T ∂x T ∂x T T ∂x T (13.1.12) q ∂ q r ∂q − + . q + τ =− ∂x T T kT 2 ∂t Next, it follows from eqns (13.1.5)–(13.1.7) that 1 ∂e ∂s τ q ∂q = + . T ∂t ∂t k T 2 ∂t

(13.1.13)

354

Non-linear hyperbolic rigid heat conductor of the Coleman type

Hence, substituting eqn (13.1.13) into eqn (13.1.12) we obtain ∂s ∂ q r q2 ∂σ ≡ + − = ≥ 0. ∂t ∂t ∂x T T kT 2

(13.1.14)

Note that if the second term on the RHS of eqn (13.1.4) as well as the second terms on the RHSs of eqns (13.1.5) and (13.1.6) are ignored, we arrive at a classical rigid heat conductor of Cattaneo’s type for which the dissipation inequality (13.1.2) is satisfied in an approximate form [see p. 290 in (Ignaczak, 1989a)]. Finally, note that by substituting eqn (13.1.5) into eqn (13.1.1) and combining the result with eqn (13.1.3), the following non-linear field equations in terms of a pair (T, q) are obtained τ q ∂q ∂q τ q 2 ∂T +2 + = r, ρc − k T 2 ∂t k T ∂t ∂x (13.1.15) ∂q ∂T 1 q+τ + = 0, k ∂t ∂x or

τ q2 ∂q ∂ ρcT + + = r, ∂t k T ∂x ∂q ∂T 1 q+τ + = 0. k ∂t ∂x

(13.1.16)

If we introduce the dimensionless fields θ=

T , T0

Q=

q , q0

R=

r , r0

(13.1.17)

and the dimensionless variables x , x0

t t¯ = , t0

x0 =

2κ , vν0

κ=

k , ρc

2κ , ν02 4 k ν0 = , τ

x ¯=

(13.1.18)

where

q0 =

kν0 To , κ

t0 =

r0 =

ρcT0 , t0

(13.1.19)

(13.1.20) (13.1.21)

Closed-form solutions

355

and T0 is a reference temperature, and omit the bars over the variables, we arrive at the dimensionless form of eqns (13.1.16) Q2 ∂Q ∂ θ+ + = R, ∂t θ ∂x (13.1.22) ∂θ ∂Q + 2Q + = 0. ∂t ∂x If R = 0, eqns (13.1.22) reduce to eqns (21) and (22) from (Bai and Lavine, 1995). Also, note that ν0 in eqn (13.1.20) represents a “thermal propagation speed,” and ν0 → ∞ as τ → 0 + 0. Therefore, a dimensionless heat-conduction process (θ, Q) corresponds to a physical heat-conduction process (T, q) for which x0 → 0, t0 → 0, q0 → 0 and r0 → 0 as τ → 0 + 0. In addition, ν0 = x0 /t0 → ∞ as τ → 0 + 0. Since the non-linear model is expected to transmit thermal waves with finite speeds when τ is small, a thermal wave obeying eqns (13.1.22) is to propagate with a dimensionless speed ν < ν0 . 13.2 Closed-form solutions 13.2.1 Closed-form solution to a time-dependent heat-conduction Cauchy problem We let R(x, t) ≡ R(t) = R0 exp(−αt),

(13.2.1)

where R0 > 0

and α > 0,

(13.2.2)

and formulate the following Cauchy problem. Find a pair [θ(t), Q(t)] that satisfies d + 2 Q = 0 for t > 0, (13.2.3) dt d dt

Q2 θ+ =R θ

for t > 0,

(13.2.4)

subject to the initial conditions θ(0) = θ0 ,

Q(0) = Q0 ,

(13.2.5)

where θ0 and Q0 are prescribed dimensionless constants such that θ0 > Q0 > 0.

(13.2.6)

We are to show that there is a unique solution to the non-linear initial problem (13.2.3)–(13.2.6), and the solution is expressed in terms of elementary functions. First, we note that a solution Q = Q(t) of eqn (13.2.3) subject to the initial

356


condition (13.2.5)2 takes the form Q(t) = Q0 exp(−2t)

for t ≥ 0,

(13.2.7)

Next, integrating eqn (13.2.4) over the interval [0, t] and using eqns (13.2.1) and (13.2.5)1 , we obtain θ+

Q2 R0 Q2 = θ0 + 0 + [1 − exp(−αt)] θ θ0 α

for

t ≥ 0.

(13.2.8)

Finally, substituting Q = Q(t) from eqn (13.2.7) into the LHS of eqn (13.2.8), and solving the resulting quadratic equation in θ, we obtain 1 R0 θ0 2 2 θ(t) = [1 − exp(−αt)] θ + Q0 + 2θ0 0 α 1/2 (13.2.9) 2 R0 θ0 1 2 2 2 2 [1 − exp(−αt)] − 4θ0 Q0 exp(−4t) θ0 + Q0 + . + 2θ0 α The second solution of the quadratic equation in θ with minus in front of the square root has to be rejected because the solution vanishes as t → ∞, and only positive temperatures are admissible for every t ≥ 0. To show that θ = θ(t) given by eqn (13.2.9) is a solution of eqn (13.2.8), we note that an equivalent form of eqn (13.2.8) reads (θ − θ∗ )2 = (θ∗ )2 − Q20 exp(−4t), where

1 R0 θ0 2 2 [1 − exp(−αt)] . θ = θ (t) = θ + Q0 + 2θ0 0 α ∗

∗

(13.2.10)

(13.2.11)

Also, note that ϕ(t) ≡ (θ∗ )2 − Q20 exp(−4t) > 0 for t ≥ 0,

(13.2.12)

since ϕ(0) =

1 2 (θ − Q20 )2 > 0 θ02 0

(13.2.13)

and ϕ (t) = R0 θ∗ (t) exp(−αt) + 4Q20 exp(−4t) > 0 for t ≥ 0.

(13.2.14)

Therefore, the only solution θ = θ(t) of eqn (13.2.10) that is positive for t ≥ 0 takes the form θ(t) = θ∗ (t) + [θ∗ (t)]2 − Q20 exp(−4t) (13.2.15)


357

that is identical to eqn (13.2.9). This completes the proof that θ = θ(t) given by eqn (13.2.9) satisfies eqn (13.2.8). Since θ∗ (0) =

1 2 (θ + Q20 ), 2θ0 0

(13.2.16)

therefore, letting t = 0 in eqn (13.2.15), we obtain θ(0) =

! 1 θ02 + Q20 + |θ02 − Q20 | . 2θ0

(13.2.17)

This, together with the inequalities (13.2.6), implies that θ = θ(t) also satisfies the initial condition (13.2.5)1 . As a result, the pair [θ(t), Q(t)] in which Q(t) and θ(t) are given by eqns (13.2.7) and (13.2.9), respectively, represents a solution to the Cauchy problem. Note that the solution possesses the properties [θ(t), Q(t)] → (θ0 , Q0 )

t→0

(13.2.18)

t → ∞,

(13.2.19)

> θ0 > 0.

(13.2.20)

as

and [θ(t), Q(t)] → (θ∞ , 0) where θ∞ =

1 θ0

θ02 + Q20 +

as

R0 θ0 α

Since θ (t) > 0

for

t ≥ 0,

(13.2.21)

therefore the temperature θ = θ(t) is a monotonically increasing function of time. On the other hand, by eqn (13.2.7) Q (t) < 0

for

t ≥ 0,

(13.2.22)

and, therefore, Q = Q(t) is a monotonically decreasing function of time. Plots of the functions Q = Q(t) and θ = θ(t) are shown in Fig. 13.1. The following corollary, in which a new physical property of the non-linear heat-conduction model of Coleman’s type is revealed, holds true. Corollary 13.1 In the non-linear theory of a rigid heat conductor proposed by Coleman et al. (1982, 1983, 1986) there is a closed-form time-dependent heatconduction process [θ(t), Q(t)] that represents a homogeneous heating with a zero spatial temperature gradient during which the entropy production rate is positive for every t ≥ 0.

358


3.5 3 2.5

Ë

2

Q0 = 1, R0 = 1, · = 2

1.5

Ë0 = 2, Ë¥ = 3

1

Q

0.5 0 0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

t

Figure 13.1 Plot of the functions Q = Q(t) and θ = θ(t) over the time interval [0, ∞). 13.2.2 Travelling-wave solutions The travelling-wave solutions are related to eqns (13.1.22) with R = 0: Q2 ∂Q ∂ θ+ + = 0, ∂t θ ∂x (13.2.23) ∂θ ∂Q + 2Q + = 0. ∂t ∂x By letting θ = θ(ξ),

Q = Q(ξ),

(13.2.24)

where ξ = x − vt,

|x| ≤ ∞,

t ≥ 0,

(13.2.25)

and v > 0 is a dimensionless velocity, and substituting eqns (13.2.24) into eqns (13.2.23), the following non-linear ordinary differential equations are obtained 2 −2 ˙ ˙ − 2vQθ−1 ) = 0, θ[v(Q θ − 1)] + Q(1 θ˙ − v Q˙ = −2Q,

or, equivalently,

Q 1 2vQ 2 − θ v , θ˙ = 1 Q 1 Q 2 − −1 − +1 v θ v θ v 2 Q 1 2vQ − 2 θ v , Q˙ = 1 Q 1 Q 2 − −1 − +1 v θ v θ v

(13.2.26)

(13.2.27)


359

provided

Q 1 − θ v

2 − 1 = 0.

(13.2.28)

In eqns (13.2.26) and (13.2.27) the superimposed dot represents the derivative with respect to ξ (· = d/dξ); and the straight lines of the (θ, Q)-plane 1 Q = + 1, θ v

Q 1 = −1 θ v

(13.2.29)

represent the characteristics of eqns (13.2.27) at which θ˙ and Q˙ become unbounded. Also note that, if θ is treated as a function of Q, that means if θ = θ(Q), then it follows from eqns (13.2.27) that 1 θ Q 1− dθ θ 2v Q = 2 2 , (13.2.30) dQ Q −1 θ provided Q2 − 1 = 0. θ2

(13.2.31)

Therefore, the straight lines of the (θ, Q)-plane Q = 1, θ

Q = −1 θ

(13.2.32)

are the characteristic lines for eqn (13.2.30) at which dθ/dQ becomes unbounded. Moreover, if 0 0.

(13.2.48)

Finally, substituting eqn (13.2.44) into the RHS of eqn (13.2.47), and computing the integrals we obtain * * * U (U0 − U1 )(U0 − U2 ) * *. * (13.2.49) |Q| = Q0 * U0 (U − U1 )(U − U2 ) * In the following we let Q > 0.

(13.2.50)

1 One can prove that, for v ≥ 1/2, a travelling wave propagates with an infinite velocity as τ → 0 + 0.

362


Q* (U) 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0

1

U2

2

3

4

U1

5

6

U

7

Figure 13.3 Plot of the function Q∗ (U ) = Q(U )/Q∗0 for U > 0. Then, it follows from the definition of U [see eqn (13.2.38)] that U > 0, and from eqn (13.2.49) we obtain Q = Q∗0

U , |(U − U1 )(U − U2 )|

(13.2.51)

where Q∗0 =

Q0 |(U0 − U1 )(U0 − U2 )| . U0

(13.2.52)

A plot of function Q∗ = Q∗ (U ) = Q(U )/Q∗0 for U > 0 is shown in Fig. 13.3. Note that, by selecting U0 in the form ; 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 + + U0 = + − 1 for Q0 > 0, (13.2.53) 2 v Q0 4 v Q0 we obtain Q∗0 = 1.

(13.2.54)

U0 = U0 (Q0 )

(13.2.55)

Also, note that

and U0 → U1

as

Q0 → ∞,

(13.2.56)

U0 → ∞

as

Q0 → 0.

(13.2.57)

From now on, we assume that the condition (13.2.54) holds true. It follows then from Fig. 13.3 that Q∗ = Q(U ) is unbounded at U = U1 and U = U2 ; and it is invertible on each of the four intervals: (i) 0 < U < U2 , (ii) U2 < U ≤ 1,


363

(iii) 1 ≤ U < U1 , and (iv) U > U1 . Hence, on each of the four intervals U = U (Q),

(13.2.58)

θ = QU (Q).

(13.2.59)

or, equivalently,

Case (i) : 0 < U < U2 . In this case we obtain ; 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 + − + −1 U= 2 v Q 4 v Q Case (ii) : U2 < U ≤ 1. In this case ; 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 − − − −1 U= 2 v Q 4 v Q

for

Q > 0,

Q≥

for

1 , 1/v − 2

(13.2.60)

(13.2.61)

and U → U2 U →1

as

as

Q → ∞,

Q→

Case (iii) : 1 ≤ U < U1 . In this case ; 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 − + − −1 U= 2 v Q 4 v Q

(13.2.62)

1 . 1/ν − 2

(13.2.63)

Q≥

for

1 , 1/v − 2

(13.2.64)

and U → 1 as U → U1

Q→ as

1 , 1/v − 2

(13.2.65)

Q → ∞.

Case (iv) : U > U1 . In this case ; 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 + + + −1 U= 2 v Q 4 v Q

for

(13.2.66)

Q > 0,

(13.2.67)

and U → U1 U →∞

as as

Q → ∞,

(13.2.68)

Q → 0.

(13.2.69)

364


The temperature fields corresponding to the cases (i), (ii), (iii), and (iv), respectively, are represented by the formulas: For 0 < θ < U2 Q; Q > 0 ; 2 Q Q 1 1 1+ − 1+ θ= − Q2 . (13.2.70) 2 v 4 v For U2 Q ≤ θ ≤ Q; Q ≥ 1/(1/v − 2) 1 θ= 2

; 2 Q 1 Q −1 − − 1 − Q2 . v 4 v

(13.2.71)

For Q ≤ θ ≤ U1 Q; Q ≥ 1/(1/v − 2) 1 θ= 2 For θ ≥ U1 Q; Q > 0 1 θ= 2

; 2 Q 1 Q −1 + − 1 − Q2 . v 4 v

; 2 Q Q 1 1+ + 1+ − Q2 . v 4 v

(13.2.72)

(13.2.73)

The formulas (13.2.70)–(13.2.73) may be used to construct travelling-wave solutions. In the following we are to obtain a travelling-wave solution associated with the temperature (13.2.73). To this end we transform eqn (13.2.26)2 to the form 1 dθ dξ = − − v dQ. (13.2.74) 2Q dQ Substituting θ = θ(Q) from eqn (13.2.73) into eqn (13.2.74) we obtain   ; 2  1  1 − 2v 2 2v d Q 1 dξ = − + 1+ − Q2 dQ. (13.2.75)  4v  Q Q dQ 4 v Integrating this equation we arrive at the travelling-wave solution represented by Q = Q(ξ): 4 Q(ξ) 2v d 1 q 2 1 1 − 2v 2 + 1+ (13.2.76) − q 2 dq, ξ − ξ0 = − 4v Q(ξ0 ) q q dq 4 v where ξ0 is a fixed point of the ξ-axis and Q(ξ0 ) > 0. Clearly, eqn (13.2.76) defines Q = Q(ξ) in an implicit form, and together with eqn (13.2.73) represents a travelling-wave solution [θ(ξ), Q(ξ)] on the interval ξ1 ≤ ξ ≤ ξ2 over which there is a unique function Q = Q(ξ) that satisfies eqn (13.2.76). Also, note that an alternative form of eqn (13.2.76) is obtained by computing the integrals on the RHS of eqn (13.2.76) in a closed form. To this end, note that


365

by integrating by parts we obtain 4 Q(ξ) q 2 1 d 1 2 1+ − q dq = q dq 4 v Q(ξ0 ) ; ; 2 2 Q(ξ) Q(ξ0 ) 1 1 1 1 2 1+ 1+ − Q (ξ) − − Q2 (ξ0 ) Q(ξ) 4 v Q(ξ0 ) 4 v Q(ξ) 4 q 2 1 1 2 1+ − q dq. + q2 4 v Q(ξ0 ) (13.2.77) To compute the integral on RHS of this equation we observe that 4 q 2 1 1 1+ − q2 = 1 − 4v 2 (q + q1 )(q + q2 ), (13.2.78) 4 v 2v where q1 = and

1 , 1/v − 2

q2 =

1 1/v + 2

(13.2.79)

1 1 (q + q1 )(q + q2 )dq = − (q + q1 )(q + q2 ) 2 q q (q + q1 )(q + q2 ) + q + (q1 + q2 )/2 + ln (13.2.80) q1 + q 2 q . ln + √ ! √ √ 2 q1 q2 (q + q1 )(q + q2 ) + q (q1 + q2 )/2 q1 q2 + q1 q2 Therefore, 4 q=Q(ξ) 4 q 2 q 2 1 1 1 2 2 2v 1+ 1+ − q dq = −2v −q 4 v q 4 v Q(ξ0 ) q=Q(ξ0 ) +v (1/v)2 − 4  4 q=Q(ξ)   2 q q 1 1 2  × ln  1+ − q2 + (1/v) − 4 +   4 v 2 2 2v (1/v) − 4

Q(ξ)

1 q2

+ ln q − ln

(4

q 2 1 q 1 1+ + − q2 + 4 v 2v 2

q=Q(ξ0 )

)q=Q(ξ) , q=Q(ξ0 )

(13.2.81) and eqn (13.2.76) takes the form ψ(Q) = exp(−4vξ),

(13.2.82)

366


where 2

ψ(Q) = Q2(1−v ) [M (Q)]v and

√

(1/v)2 −4

[N (Q)]−1

; 2 Q Q 1 2 1+ M (Q) = − Q2 + (1/v) − 4 + 4 v 2

(13.2.83)

1 , 2 2v (1/v) − 4 (13.2.84)

; 2 Q 1 Q 1 1+ + . − Q2 + N (Q) = 4 v 2v 2

(13.2.85)

Therefore, a travelling wave in the non-linear hyperbolic rigid heat conductor is represented by a pair [θ(ξ), Q(ξ)] in which θ = θ(ξ) is expressed in terms of Q = Q(ξ) by eqn (13.2.73) and Q = Q(ξ) = ψ −1 [exp(−4vξ)]; and the inequalities θ ≥ U1 Q, Q > 0 hold true. 13.3 Asymptotic method of weakly non-linear geometric optics applied to the Coleman heat conductor In this section a Cauchy problem with a weakly perturbed initial condition for the non-linear hyperbolic heat conduction model is analyzed. The field equations are taken in the form [see eqns (13.2.23)] Q2 ∂Q ∂ θ+ + = 0, ∂t θ ∂x (13.3.1) ∂θ ∂Q + 2Q + = 0, ∂t ∂x where θ = θ(t, x),

Q = Q(t, x),

t ≥ 0,

|x| < ∞.

An alternative form of eqns (13.3.1) reads Q2 ∂θ Q ∂Q ∂Q 1− 2 +2 + = 0, θ ∂t θ ∂t ∂x ∂θ ∂Q = − 2Q + . ∂t ∂x

(13.3.2)

(13.3.3)

Therefore, substituting ∂Q/∂t from eqn (13.3.3)2 into eqn (13.3.3)1 , and dividing the resulting equation by (1 − Q2 /θ2 ), we transform eqns (13.3.3) to the nonhomogeneous quasi-linear matrix partial differential equation of the first order for an unknown vector u = (θ, Q)T ∂ ∂ u + A(u) u = f (u), ∂t ∂x

(13.3.4)

Asymptotic method of weakly non-linear geometric optics

where

+ u=

θ Q

,

+ ,

f (u) = 2Q

and

+ A(u) =

2U/(1 − U 2 )

, ,

−1

−2U/(1 − U 2 ) 1

U=

1/(1 − U 2 ) 0

367

Q , θ

(13.3.5)

.

(13.3.6)

,

We are going to study the following initial value problem for eqn (13.3.4): Find a solution u = u(t, x) to the equation ∂ ∂ u + A(u) u = f (u), ∂t ∂x

t ≥ 0,

|x| < ∞,

(13.3.7)

subject to the initial condition u(0, x)= u0 + εu∗ (x, x/ε),

|x| < ∞,

(13.3.8)

where ε is a small positive number, u∗ = u∗ (x, y) is a prescribed function on the x − y plane, and u0 is a constant vector defined in terms of a dimensionless constant temperature θ0 > 0: + , θ0 . (13.3.9) u0 = 0 It follows from eqns (13.3.4)–(13.3.6) that the problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) is nonlinear and highly singular as the functions f1 = f1 (u), A11 = A11 (u) and A12 = A12 (u) are non-linear and become unbounded for |U | = 1. This is a reason why a smooth solution to the problem should be sought in a region of the (θ, Q)-plane excluding the lines θ = |Q| > 0. The following Lemmas hold true: Lemma 13.1 The matrix equation (13.3.4) is strictly hyperbolic and genuinely non-linear in the sense of Lax provided |U | = 1. Proof. One can show that the matrix A(u) has two real eigenvalues λ1 (u) and λ2 (u) corresponding to the right eigenvectors r1 (u) and r2 (u), respectively, and they are given by 1 1 1 , r1 (u) = , (13.3.10) λ1 (u) = 1+U 1 + (1 + U )2 1 + U 1 1 1 λ2 (u) = − , r2 (u) = . (13.3.11) 1−U 1 + (1 − U )2 −(1 − U ) This implies that the matrix equation (13.3.4) is strictly hyperbolic for |U | = 1 (Lax, 1957). To show that the matrix equation (13.3.4) is genuinely nonlinear,

368


we compute the gradient of λi (u) with respect to u(i = 1, 2) and obtain 1 1 U ∂λ1 /∂u1 = (13.3.12) ∇u λ1 (u) = ∂λ1 /∂u2 u1 (1 + U )2 −1 and

∇u λ2 (u) =

∂λ2 /∂u1 ∂λ2 /∂u2

=−

1 1 u1 (1 − U )2

−U 1

.

(13.3.13)

Therefore, by virtue of eqns (13.3.10)–(13.3.13), we obtain 1 1 1 2 u1 1 + (1 + U ) (1 + U )2

(13.3.14)

1 1 1 . 2 u1 1 + (1 − U ) (1 − U )2

(13.3.15)

[∇u λ1 (u)] · r1 (u) = − and [∇u λ2 (u)] · r2 (u) = Since [∇u λ1 (u)] · r1 (u) = 0 and

[∇u λ2 (u)] · r2 (u) = 0

|U | = 1, (13.3.16)

for

the matrix equation (13.3.4) is genuinely non-linear for |U | = 1 (Lax, 1957). Lemma 13.2 The matrix A(u) has two real eigenvalues λ1 (u) and λ2 (u) corresponding to the left eigenvectors l1 (u) and l2 (u), respectively, and they are given by 1 1 1−U 2 , l1 (u) = , (13.3.17) 1 + (1 + U ) λ1 (u) = 1 1+U 2 1 1 λ2 (u) = − , l2 (u) = 1 + (1 − U )2 1−U 2

1+U −1

.

(13.3.18)

In addition lα · rβ = δαβ

α, β = 1, 2.

(13.3.19)

Proof. It is easy to show that lα (u) [A(u)−λα I] = 0

α = 1, 2,

(13.3.20)

where I is a unit tensor, and the pairs [λ1 (u), l1 (u)] and [λ2 (u), l2 (u)] are given by eqns (13.3.17) and (13.3.18), respectively. Also, using eqns (13.3.10), (13.3.11), (13.3.17), and (13.3.18) we check that the orthogonality conditions (13.3.19) hold true. Using the methods of weakly non-linear geometric optics (WNGO) one can prove the following theorem (Hunter and Keller, 1983; DiPerna and Majda, 1985; Doma´ nski, 2000).


369

Theorem 13.1 An asymptotic solution to the problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) that represents a non-linear hyperbolic small-amplitude and high-frequency heat wave propagating along the x-axis takes the form 2 . x − λα t rα (u0 ) + O(ε3 ), σα t, x, (13.3.21) u(t, x) = u0 + ε ε α=1 where λ1 = 1,

λ2 = −1,

1 r1 (u0 ) = √ 2

1 , 1

1 r2 (u0 ) = √ 2

1 −1

(13.3.22)

and the functions σα = σα (t, x, η) satisfy the transport equations ∂σ1 1 ∂σ12 ∂σ1 + + σ1 − = 0, ∂t ∂x 2 ∂η

(13.3.23)

∂σ2 1 ∂σ22 ∂σ2 − + σ2 + = 0, (13.3.24) ∂t ∂x 2 ∂η √ and, without any loss of generality, we let θ0 = 1/ 2 in eqn (13.3.9). Proof. We are to discuss the following asymptotic initial-value problem. Find a solution uε = uε (t, x) to the equation ∂ ε ε ∂ u + A(u ) uε = f (uε ), ∂t ∂x subject to the initial condition

t ≥ 0,

|x| ≤ ∞,

(13.3.25)

uε (0, x) = u0 + εu∗ (x, x/ε),

|x| ≤ ∞.

(13.3.26)

By looking for the solution in the form uε (t, x) = u0 + ε[u1 (t, x; η) + εu2 (t, x; η)] + O(ε3 ),

(13.3.27)

where x − λα t , λα = λα (u0 ), ε and letting η=

and

α=1

or

α = 2,

u ˜ (t, x; η) = u1 (t, x; η) + εu2 (t, x; η),

(13.3.28)

(13.3.29)

and using Taylor’s expansions, we obtain f (uε ) = f (u0 + ε˜ u) = f (u0 ) + ε[∇u f (u0 )]˜ u + ...

(13.3.30)

and f (uε ) = f (u0 ) + ε[∇u f (u0 )](u1 + εu2 + ...) = f (u0 ) + ε[∇u f (u0 )]u1 + ε2 [∇u f (u0 )]u2 ....

(13.3.31)

370


In a similar way, for the matrix A(uε ) Taylor’s expansion reads A(uε ) = A(u0 ) + ε[∇u A(u0 )](u1 + εu2 + ...).

(13.3.32)

Hence, we obtain ∂ ε u ∂x ∂ ∂ = A(u0 ) ε (u1 + εu2 ) + ε[∇u A(u0 )](u1 + εu2 ) ε (u1 + εu2 ) + ... ∂x ∂x ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ u1 + u2 + ε[∇u A(u0 )]u1 u1 + O(ε2 ) = A(u0 ) u1 + εA(u0 ) ∂η ∂x ∂η ∂η (13.3.33) and ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ ε u = −λα u1 + ε u1 − λα u2 + ε2 u2 + .... (13.3.34) ∂t ∂η ∂t ∂η ∂t

A(uε )

Substituting eqns (13.3.31), (13.3.33), and (13.3.34) into eqn (13.3.25), and dividing both sides by ε, we obtain ε−1 [A(uε ) − λα I]

∂ u1 ∂η

∂ ∂ ∂ ∂ +ε0 [A(u0 ) − λα I] u2 + [∇u A(u0 )]u1 u1 + A(u0 ) u1 + u1 ∂η ∂η ∂x ∂t +O(ε) = ε−1 f (u0 ) + [∇u f (u0 )]u1 + O(ε2 ). (13.3.35) By equating the coefficients of ε−1 and ε0 in eqn (13.3.35), we obtain, respectively, ∂ u1 = f (u0 ), ∂η

(13.3.36)

∂ u2 + gα = hα , ∂η

(13.3.37)

[A(u0 ) − λα I] and [A(u0 ) − λα I] where gα = [∇u A(u0 )]u1

∂ ∂ ∂ u1 + A(u0 ) u1 + u1 , ∂η ∂x ∂t

(13.3.38)

hα = [∇u f (u0 )]u1 .

(13.3.39)

and

To obtain a solution ∂u1 /∂η of eqn (13.3.36) the following solvability condition must be satisfied lα (u0 ) · f (u0 ) = 0

α = 1, 2.

(13.3.40)


371

Similarly, there is a solution ∂u2 /∂η of eqn (13.3.37) provided lα (u0 ) · (gα − hα ) = 0

α = 1, 2.

(13.3.41)

Since by virtue of eqns (13.3.5) and (13.3.9) f (u0 ) = 0, therefore eqn (13.3.40) is identically satisfied, and eqn (13.3.36) reduces to [A(u0 ) − λα I]

∂ u1 = 0. ∂η

(13.3.42)

A solution to eqn (13.3.42) can be taken in the form u1 (t, x; η) = σα (t, x; η)rα (u0 ).

(13.3.43)

Therefore, substituting eqn (13.3.43) into eqns (13.3.38) and (13.3.39), respectively, we obtain ∂ σα ∂η ∂ ∂ +A(u0 )rα (u0 ) σα + rα (u0 ) σα ∂x ∂t

(13.3.44)

hα = [∇u f (u0 )]rα (u0 )σα .

(13.3.45)

gα = [∇u A(u0 )]rα (u0 )rα (u0 )σα

and

In components, eqns (13.3.44) and (13.3.45), respectively, take the form ∂ σα ∂η ∂ ∂ (α) (α) +Aδβ (u0 )rβ (u0 ) σα + rδ (u0 ) σα ∂x ∂x (α)

gδ

(α)

= Aδβ,γ (u0 )rγ(α) (u0 )rβ (u0 )σα

(13.3.46)

and (α)

hδ

(α)

= fδ,β (u0 )rβ (u0 )σα ,

(13.3.47)

where fδ,β (u0 ) =

∂fδ (u0 ), ∂uβ

Aδβ,γ (u0 ) =

∂Aδβ (u0 ), ∂uγ

α, β, γ, δ = 1, 2

and for an arbitrary vector aα the following notation is used + (α) , a1 (α) aα ≡ a = (α) a2

(13.3.48)

(13.3.49)

and in eqns (13.3.46) and (13.3.47) the summation convention over the indices β and γ is observed.

372


Also, note that

1 1 1 1 , r2 (u0 ) = √ , r1 (u0 ) = √ 2 1 2 −1 1 1 1 1 l1 (u0 ) = √ , l2 (u0 ) = √ , 2 1 2 −1

(13.3.50)

and f1,1 (u0 ) = 0,

f1,2 (u0 ) = 0,

f2,1 (u0 ) = 0,

f2,2 (u0 ) = −2.

(13.3.51)

Therefore, by virtue of eqns (13.3.39), (13.3.43), and (13.3.51) we obtain + (1) , 0 0 0 0 u1 hα = = −2σ (13.3.52) = α (1) (α) (1) 0 −2 r2 −2u2 u2 and (α) (α)

lα (u0 ) · hα = l2 h2

(α) (α)

= −2σα l2 r2

= −σα .

(13.3.53)

Also, it follows from eqn (13.3.50) that lα (u0 ) · rα (u0 ) = 1,

lα (u0 ) · [A(u0 ) rα (u0 )] = λα (u0 )

(13.3.54)

and Γ(α) = lα · [∇u A(u0 )] rα (u0 ) rα (u0 ) λα (u0 ) (α) = lµ(α) (u0 )Aµβ,γ (u0 )rγ(α) (u0 )rβ (u0 ) = − √ . θ0 2

(13.3.55)

Finally, using eqns (13.3.53)–(13.3.55) we reduce eqns (13.3.41) to the transport equations ∂σ1 1 ∂σ12 ∂σ1 + + σ1 − √ = 0, ∂t ∂x 2 2 θ0 ∂η

(13.3.56)

∂σ2 1 ∂σ22 ∂σ2 − + σ2 + √ = 0. (13.3.57) ∂t ∂x 2 2 θ0 ∂η √ Hence, if we let θ0 = 1/ 2, we arrive at eqns (13.3.23) and (13.3.24). In the following, we are to prove that there is a unique closed-form asymptotic solution to the problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) if the initial data are suitably restricted. To this end we introduce the notation x (13.3.58) y = , |y| ≤ ∞, ε and assume that u∗ = u∗ (x, x/ε) in eqn (13.3.8) takes the form u∗ = u∗ (x, x/ε) = u∗ (x/ε) ≡ u∗ (y),

|y| < ∞,

(13.3.59)

where u∗ = u∗ (y) is a prescribed function. The following theorem holds true.


373

Theorem 13.2 Suppose that the function u∗ = u∗ (y) satisfies the conditions e < r1 (u0 ) · u∗ (y) ≤ r2 (u0 ) · u∗ (y) < ∞,

|y| < ∞,

(13.3.60)

where e is the base of natural logarithms (e = 2.7182). Then there is a unique closed-form asymptotic solution to the problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) in which the initial condition (13.3.8) is replaced by the condition u(0, x) = u0 + ε u∗ (y)

(13.3.61)

and this solution is represented by u(t, x) = u0 + ε

2 .

σα (t, ηα ) rα (u0 ) + O(ε2 ),

(13.3.62)

α=1

where x − λα t , λ1 = 1, λ2 = −1 ε 1 1 1 1 , r2 (u0 ) = √ r1 (u0 ) = √ 2 1 2 −1 ηα =

(13.3.63) (13.3.64)

and the functions σα = σα (t, η) (α = 1, 2) are determined implicitly by the formulas σ1 (t, η) = Y1 [t + ln σ1 (t, η)] + η − y

0 ≤ t < τ1 ,

|η| < ∞,

|y| < ∞, (13.3.65)

σ2 (t, η) = Y2 [t + ln σ2 (t, η)] − η + y

0 ≤ t < τ2 ,

|η| < ∞,

|y| < ∞, (13.3.66)

in which the functions Yα = Yα (y) are defined by Yα =

rα (u0 ) · u∗ (y) , ln[rα (u0 ) · u∗ (y)]

(13.3.67)

and τα is a blow-up time of the amplitude σα = σα (t, ηα ) given by τ α = Yα

ln Yα − 1 , ε−1 − Yα

e < Y1 ≤ Y2 < ε−1 .

(13.3.68)

Moreover, 0 < τ1 ≤ τ2 < ∞.

(13.3.69)

Proof. It follows from Theorem 13.1 that u(t, x) given by eqn (13.3.62) is an asymptotic solution to eqn (13.3.7) provided the functions σα = σα (t, η) (α =

374


1, 2) satisfy the transport equations 1 ∂σ12 ∂σ1 + σ1 − = 0, ∂t 2 ∂η

(13.3.70)

1 ∂σ22 ∂σ2 + σ2 + = 0. ∂t 2 ∂η

(13.3.71)

Also, it is easy to check that σ1 = σ1 (t, η) and σ2 = σ2 (t, η) satisfy eqns (13.3.70) and (13.3.71), respectively. Hence, u(t, x) given by eqns (13.3.62)–(13.3.67) is an asymptotic solution to eqn (13.3.7); and it satisfies the initial condition (13.3.61) provided 2 .

σα (0, y) rα (u0 ) = u∗ (y),

(13.3.72)

α=1

or, equivalently, σα (0, y) = rα (u0 ) · u∗ (y).

(13.3.73)

By letting t = 0 and η = y in eqns (13.3.65) and (13.3.66) and using eqn (13.3.67) we find that eqn (13.3.73) is identically satisfied. As a result, u(t, x) is an asymptotic solution to eqn (13.3.7) subject to the initial condition (13.3.61). To show that τ1 is a blow-up time of the amplitude σ1 = σ1 (t, η1 ) we differentiate eqn (13.3.65) with respect to t and η, respectively, and obtain σ1 (t, η) ∂σ1 (t, η) = Y1 ∂t σ1 (t, η) − Y1

(13.3.74)

σ1 (t, η) ∂σ1 (t, η) = . ∂η σ1 (t, η) − Y1

(13.3.75)

and

By letting η = η1 = (x − t)/ε in eqns (13.3.74) and (13.3.75) we find that the first partial derivatives [∂σ1 /∂t](t, η1 ) and [∂σ1 /∂η](t, η1 ) become unbounded if t → τ1 , where τ1 satisfies the equation x − τ1 = Y1 . σ 1 τ1 , (13.3.76) ε Let τ1 be a solution of eqn (13.3.76). Substituting t = τ1 , η = (x − τ1 )/ε in eqn (13.3.65) we obtain x − τ1 x x − τ1 x − τ1 = Y1 τ1 + ln σ1 τ1 , + − . (13.3.77) σ1 τ 1 , ε ε ε ε Hence, by eliminating σ1 [τ1 , (x−τ1 )/ε] from eqns (13.3.76) and (13.3.77) we obtain τ1 = ϕ(Y1 ),

(13.3.78)


375

where the function ϕ = ϕ(Y ) is defined by ϕ(Y ) = Y

ln Y − 1 , ε−1 − Y

e < Y < ε−1 .

(13.3.79)

Similarly, to show that τ2 is a blow-up time of σ2 = σ2 (t, η2 ) we differentiate eqn (13.3.66) with respect to t and η, respectively, and obtain σ2 (t, η) ∂σ2 (t, η) = Y2 ∂t σ2 (t, η) − Y2

(13.3.80)

σ2 (t, η) ∂σ2 (t, η) = − . ∂η σ2 (t, η) − Y2

(13.3.81)

and

Therefore, [∂σ2 /∂t](t, η2 ) and [∂σ2 /∂η](t, η2 ) become unbounded if t → τ2 , where τ2 satisfies the equations x + τ2 = Y2 , (13.3.82) σ 2 τ2 , ε x + τ2 x x + τ2 x + τ2 σ2 τ2 , = Y2 τ2 + ln σ2 τ2 , − + . (13.3.83) ε ε ε ε By eliminating σ2 [τ2 , (x + τ2 )/ε] from eqns (13.3.82) and (13.3.83), we obtain τ2 = ϕ(Y2 ),

(13.3.84)

where the function ϕ = ϕ(Y ) is defined by eqn (13.3.79) for every Y ∈ (e, ε−1 ). To show the inequalities (13.3.68) and (13.3.69), consider the function ψ = ψ(z) defined by z , e < z < ∞. (13.3.85) ψ(z) = ln z By differentiating with respect to z we obtain ψ (z) =

1 ( ln z − 1). (ln z)2

(13.3.86)

Hence, ψ (z) > 0 ,

e < z < ∞,

(13.3.87)

which means that ψ = ψ(z) is an increasing function of z for z ∈ (e, ∞). Therefore, e < ψ(z1 ) ≤ ψ(z2 ) < ∞

for

e < z1 ≤ z2 < ∞.

∗

(13.3.88)

∗

By letting z1 = r1 (u0 ) · u (y) and z2 = r2 (u0 ) · u (y) in eqn (13.3.88), and using the notations (13.3.67) and (13.3.85), as well as the hypothesis (13.3.60), we arrive at the inequalities e < Y1 ≤ Y2 < ε−1

(ε → 0).

(13.3.89)

376


This completes the proof of inequality (13.3.68). To show that inequalities (13.3.69) hold true, recall eqn (13.3.79) in the form ϕ(Y ) = Y

ln Y − 1 , ε−1 − Y

e < Y < ε−1 .

(13.3.90)

By differentiating eqn (13.3.90) with respect to Y we obtain ϕ (Y ) = (ε−1 − Y )−2 (ε−1 ln Y − Y ).

(13.3.91)

1 −Y > − , ε

(13.3.92)

Since

therefore 1 1 ln Y − Y > (ln Y − 1) > 0 ε ε

as

Y > e.

(13.3.93)

Hence, ϕ (Y ) > 0 for e < Y < ε−1 ,

(13.3.94)

which means that 0 < ϕ(Y1 ) ≤ ϕ(Y2 ) < ∞ for e < Y1 ≤ Y2 < ε−1

(ε → ∞).

(13.3.95)

Therefore, by virtue of eqns (13.3.78), (13.3.84), and (13.3.68), we arrive at the inequality (13.3.69). Remark 13.1 The hypothesis (13.3.60) is satisfied provided the vector field u∗ = u∗ (y) satisfies the inequalities √ (13.3.96) e 2 < u∗1 (y) + u∗2 (y) ≤ u∗1 (y) for |y| < ∞. Therefore, a pair of shock heat waves, occurring in the non-linear initial value problem is due to a small but high-frequency initial temperature and a small but high-frequency initial negative heat flux that are imposed on an isothermal state of the rigid heat conductor. The inequalities (13.3.69) imply that the asymptotic solution accommodates a shock heat wave in which a steepening of the σ1 profile is followed by a steepening of the σ2 profile. Theorem 13.2 reveals the typical feature of a non-linear hyperbolic wave motion that even when we start with smooth initial data we may end up with a shock wave. The following result shows that for an even function u∗ = u∗ (y) there is a single shock thermal wave for the Cauchy problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) in which the initial condition (13.3.8) is replaced by eqn (13.3.61).


377

Theorem 13.3 Suppose that the function u∗ = u∗ (y) satisfies the conditions u∗ (y) = [ϑ(y), 0]T ,

|y| < ∞,

(13.3.97)

|y| < ∞, √ ϑ (y0 ) > 2,

(13.3.98)

ϑ(y) = ϑ(−y) ≥ 0, ∃ y0 > 0 :

(13.3.99)

where ϑ = ϑ(y) is a prescribed function. Then, an asymptotic solution to the problem (13.3.7)–(13.3.9) in which the initial condition (13.3.8) is replaced by eqn (13.3.61) takes the form (13.3.62)–(13.3.64), where σα = σα (τ, ζ), α, β = 1, 2 are given by σ1 (τ, ζ) = exp(−τ )σ(τ, ζ), 0 ≤ τ < τ0 ,

|ζ| < ∞,

σ2 (τ, ζ) = exp(−τ )σ(τ, −ζ), 0 ≤ τ < τ0 ,

|ζ| < ∞,

(13.3.100) in which 1 σ(τ, ζ) = √ ϑ(ζ + σ − σ exp(−τ )), 2

0 ≤ τ < τ0 , |ζ| < ∞,

and τ0 > 0 is a blow-up time such that * * * * ∂σα * * * ∂τ (τ, ζ)* → ∞ as τ → τ0 − 0, * * * * ∂σα * * * ∂ζ (τ, ζ)* → ∞ as τ → τ0 − 0,

(13.3.101)

|ζ| < ∞, (13.3.102) |ζ| < ∞.

Proof. First, we check that σ1 = σ1 (τ, ζ) and σ2 = σ2 (τ, ζ), respectively, satisfy the equations ∂σ ∂σ1 ∂σ1 ∂σ + σ1 − σ 1 = exp(−τ ) −σ exp(−τ ) (τ, ζ) (13.3.103) ∂τ ∂ζ ∂τ ∂ζ and ∂σ2 ∂σ2 + σ2 + σ 2 = exp(−τ ) ∂τ ∂ζ

∂σ ∂σ −σ exp(−τ ) (τ, −ζ). ∂τ ∂ζ

Next, by differentiating eqn (13.3.101) we obtain 1 − exp(−τ ) ∂σ ∂σ √ −σ exp(−τ ) = 0 ϑ (·) − 1 ∂τ ∂ζ 2

(13.3.104)

(13.3.105)

for any point (τ, ζ) of the region 0 ≤ τ < τ ∗,

|ζ| < ∞

over which the LHS of eqn (13.3.105) makes sense.

(13.3.106)

378


Therefore, σ1 = σ1 (τ, ζ) and σ2 = σ2 (τ, ζ) satisfy eqns (13.3.70) and (13.3.71), respectively, provided 1 − exp(−τ ) √ ϑ (·) − 1 = 0, 0 ≤ τ < τ ∗ , |ζ| < ∞ (13.3.107) 2 and σ = σ(τ, ζ) satisfies the equation ∂σ ∂σ −σ exp(−τ ) = 0, ∂τ ∂ζ

0 ≤ τ < τ ∗ , |ζ| < ∞.

(13.3.108)

By letting y0 = ζ0 + [1 − exp(−τ0 )]σ(τ0 , ζ0 ),

τ0 > 0, |ζ0 | < ∞,

(13.3.109)

we find that the condition 1 − exp(−τ0 ) √ ϑ (y0 ) − 1 = 0 2

(13.3.110)

is equivalent to the existence of τ0 > 0 of the form τ0 = ln

ϑ (y0 ) √ . ϑ (y0 ) − 2

(13.3.111)

Therefore, the asymptotic solution to the Cauchy problem takes the form (13.3.62)–(13.3.64), where σα = σα (τ, ζ), 0 ≤ τ < τ0 , |ζ| < ∞, α, β = 1, 2, are given by eqns (13.3.100) and (13.3.101), provided the initial condition is satisfied σα (0, ζ) = rα (u0 ) · u∗ (ζ),

|ζ| < ∞,

(13.3.112)

or, equivalently, 1 |y| < ∞, σ1 (0, y) = σ(0, y) = √ ϑ(y), 2 1 1 σ2 (0, y) = σ(0, −y) = √ ϑ(−y) = √ ϑ(y), |y| < ∞. 2 2

(13.3.113)

It is easy to show that the hypothesis (13.3.97)–(13.3.99) together with the definition of the eigenvector rα (u0 ) imply eqn (13.3.112). Finally, to show that the asymptotic solution blows up as τ → τ0 − 0, we calculate the first partial derivatives of σα = σα (τ, ζ) given by eqns (13.3.100) and (13.3.101) and obtain −1 1 − exp(−τ ) ∂σ1 1 √ = ϑ (·) − 1 1 − √ ϑ (·) σ1 , (13.3.114) ∂τ 2 2 −1 1 − exp(−τ ) 1 ∂σ1 √ √ ϑ (·) exp(−τ ), =− ϑ (·) − 1 (13.3.115) ∂ζ 2 2


and

−1 1 − exp(−τ ) ∂σ2 1 √ = ϑ (·) − 1 1 − √ ϑ (·) σ2 , ∂τ 2 2 −1 1 − exp(−τ ) ∂σ2 1 √ √ ϑ (·) exp(−τ ). =− ϑ (·) − 1 ∂ζ 2 2

379

(13.3.116) (13.3.117)

By letting τ → τ0 − 0 in eqns (13.3.114)–(13.3.117) we find that the limit relations (13.3.102) hold true, and as a result the asymptotic solution (13.3.62)– (13.3.64) blows up as τ → τ0 − 0. Clearly, it follows from Theorem 13.3 that the asymptotic solution is unique if there is a unique implicit function σ = σ(t, η) defined by eqn (13.3.101). One can prove the following theorem. Theorem 13.4 form

Suppose that the function ϑ = ϑ(y) of Theorem 13.3 takes the 1 ϑ(y) = √ y 2 , 2

|y| < ∞.

(13.3.118)

Then there is the unique explicit function σ = σ(τ, ζ) that complies with eqns (13.3.101) and (13.3.118) 1 1/2 1 − ζ[1 − exp(−τ )] − {1 − 2ζ[1 − exp(−τ )]} σ(τ, ζ) = [1 − exp(−τ )]2 (13.3.119) for 0 ≤ τ < τ0∗ ,

1 1 1

Proof. The function ϑ = ϑ(y) is an even function of y for every |y| < ∞ √ √ (13.3.124) ϑ (y) = y 2, ϑ (y) = 2, |y| < ∞

380


and ϑ (y) √ > 1 for y > 1, 2

(13.3.125)

that means the condition (13.3.99) of Theorem 13.3 is satisfied for any point y > 1. By letting y(τ, ζ) = ζ + [1 − exp(−τ )]σ(τ, ζ)

(13.3.126)

in eqn (13.3.101) we obtain y−ζ 1 = √ ϑ(y). 1 − exp(−τ ) 2

(13.3.127)

Substituting ϑ = ϑ(y) from eqn (13.3.118) into eqn (13.3.127) we arrive at the quadratic equation for y 2 1 1 = {1 − 2ζ[1 − exp(−τ )]} . (13.3.128) y− 1 − exp(−τ ) [1 − exp(−τ )]2 Note that there are two real-valued solutions to this equation ∗ y1.2 =

1 1 1/2 ± {1 − 2ζ[1 − exp(−τ )]} , 1 − exp(−τ ) 1 − exp(−τ )

(13.3.129)

provided 1 − 2ζ[1 − exp(−τ )] > 0,

1 − exp(−τ ) > 0

and

σ1∗

(13.3.130)

σ2∗

and, by eqn (13.3.126), there are the two functions and corresponding to y1∗ and y2∗ , respectively 1 1/2 ∗ 1 − ζ[1 − exp(−τ )] ± {1 − 2ζ[1 − exp(−τ )]} . σ1.2 = [1 − exp(−τ )]2 (13.3.131) Also, note that of the two functions σ1∗ and σ2∗ only σ2∗ ≡ σ(τ, ζ) with “minus” in front of the square root is finite at τ = 0, since σ2∗ (τ, ζ) →

1 2 ζ 2

as

τ → 0 + 0.

(13.3.132)

Therefore, the function σ = σ(τ, ζ) takes the form (13.3.119)–(13.3.123) where τ0∗ is the only root of the equation 1 − 2ζ[1 − exp (−τ0∗ )] = 0 for ζ > 1/2.

(13.3.133)

Theorems 13.3 and 13.4 imply the following result.


381

Theorem 13.5 An asymptotic solution to the Cauchy problem (13.3.7)– (13.3.9) in which the initial condition (13.3.8) is replaced by eqn (13.3.61) and u∗ = u∗ (y) satisfies the conditions (13.3.97) and (13.3.118) takes the unique explicit closed-form (13.3.62)–(13.3.64), where σα = σα (t, ηα ) are defined by the formulas σ1 (t, η1 ) = σ(t, η1 ) exp(−t)

(13.3.134)

σ2 (t, η2 ) = σ(t, −η2 ) exp(−t).

(13.3.135)

1 1 − η1 (1 − e−t ) − [1 − 2η1 (1 − e−t )]1/2 −t 2 (1 − e ) 1 1 1 < η1 ≤ , for 0 ≤ t < τ1∗ , 2 2 1 − e−t

(13.3.136)

1 τ1∗ = − ln 1 − 2η1

(13.3.137)

1 1 + η2 (1 − e−t ) − [1 + 2η2 (1 − e−t )]1/2 −t 2 (1 − e ) 1 1 1 − < η2 ≤ , for 0 ≤ t < τ2∗ , −t 21−e 2

(13.3.138)

and

Here, σ(t, η1 ) =

where

and

σ(t, −η2 ) =

where τ2∗

1 = − ln 1 + 2η2

.

(13.3.139)

As a result, the asymptotic solution of Theorem 13.5 experiences the two blows-up at the times t = τ1∗ and t = τ2∗ . Since τ1∗ > τ2∗ , the asymptotic solution represents a heat shock wave in which σ2 blows up earlier than σ1 . A plot of the function σ = σ(t, η) ≡ Σ(ψ, η) for fixed values of η, and ψ = ψ(t) defined by 1 , (13.3.140) t = − ln 1 − ψ 1 1 < η < ψ < ∞, 2 2

(13.3.141)

is shown on Fig. 13.4. A blow-up of the function Σ = Σ(ψ, η) at a fixed point of the ψ-axis is clearly seen from this figure. Remark 13.2 A method of WNGO is used in (Oncu et al., 1994) to study the 1D non-linear hyperbolic thermoelastic waves in a semi-space subject to a

382


”(¯,Á) 13 12 11 10 9 8 Á = 5/2

7 Á = 4/2

6 5 4

Á = 3/2

3 2

Á =1

1 0 1

2

3

4

5

6

¯

Figure 13.4 Plot of the function σ(t, η) ≡ Σ(ψ, η) for fixed values of η. small strain-temperature load on its boundary. Also, a number of interesting results on non-linear hyperbolic thermoelastic waves include those based on a thermoelasticity with internal variables (see: Kosi´ nski, 1974 and 1975; Hetnarski and Ignaczak, 1996) as well as those dealing with well-posedness of the governing equations (Tarabek et al., 1992; Chrz¸eszczyk et al., 1993a,b).

REFERENCES

Abd-Alla, A.N. and Al-Dawy, A.A.S. (2001). Thermal relaxation times effect on Rayleigh waves in generalized thermoelastic media. J. Thermal Stresses 24(4), 367–382. Abramowitz, M. and Stegun, I. (1965). Handbook of Mathematical Functions. Dover Publ. Achenbach, J.D. (1968). The influence of heat conduction on propagating stress jumps. J. Mech. Phys. Solids 16, 273–283. Agarwal, V.K. (1979). On plane waves in generalized thermoelasticity. Acta Mech. 31, 185–198. Al-Qahtani, H.M. Datta, S.K. and Mukdadi, O. M. (2005). Laser- generated thermoelastic waves in an anisotropic infinite plate: FEM analysis. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 1099–1122. (2008). Laser-generated thermoelastic waves in an anisotropic infinite plate: Exact analysis. J. Thermal Stresses 31, 569–583. Bai, C. and Lavine, A.S. (1995). On hyperbolic heat conduction and the second law of thermodynamics. ASME J. Heat Transfer 117, 256–263. Bakhvalov, N. and Panasenko, G. (1989). Homogenisation: Averaging Processes in Periodic Media. Kluwer, Dordrecht. Bem, Z. (1982a). Existence of a generalized solution in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 5(2), 195–206. (1982b). Existence of a generalized solution in thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. Part I. J. Thermal Stresses 5(3–4), 395–404. (1983). Existence of a generalized solution in thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. Part II. J. Thermal Stresses 6(2–4), 281–299. Bensoussan, A. Papanicolaou, G.C. and Lions, J.L. (1978). Asymptotic Analysis for Periodic Structures. North-Holland Publishing Company, Amsterdam. Bialy, J. (1983). Domain of Influence in Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds. Ph.D. Thesis (in Polish), Kielce University of Technology, Kielce, Poland. Bishop, J.E. and Kinra, V.K. (1997). Elastothermodynamic damping in laminated composites. Int. J. Solids Struct. 34, 1075. Boley, B.A. (1955). The Applications of Saint-Venant’s principle in dynamical problems. J. Appl. Mech. 22(2), 204–206. (1972). Approximate analysis of thermally induced vibrations of beams and plates. ASME J. Appl. Mech. 39, 212–216. and Barber, A.D. (1957). Dynamical response of beams and plates subject to rapid heating. ASME J. Appl. Mech. 24, 413–416. and Hetnarski, R.B. (1968). Propagation of discontinuities in coupled thermoelastic problems. ASME J. Appl. Mech. 35, 489–494. and Weiner, J.H. (1960). Theory of Thermal Stresses, Dover Pub., New York. Brock, L. M. (2005). Thermal relaxation effects in rapid sliding contact with friction. Acta Mech. 176, 185–196.

384

References

Brock, L. M. (2006). Debonding of a thermoelastic material from a rigid substrate at any constant speed: thermal relaxation effects. Acta Mech. 184, 185–196. (2007). Stoneley waves generation in joined materials with and without thermal relaxation due to thermal mismatch. ASME J. Appl. Mech. 74, 1019–1025. (2008a). Stoneley signals in perfectly bonded dissimilar thermoelastic half-spaces with and without thermal relaxation. J. Mech. Mater. Struct., in press. (2008b). Dynamic crack extension along the interface of materials that differ in thermal properties: Convection and thermal relaxation. ASME J. Appl. Mech. 75, 021018-1-7. Brun. L. (1975). L’onde simple thérmoélastique linéaire. J. Méc. 14(5), 863–885. Carlson, D.E. (1972). Linear Thermoelasticity, in Encyclopedia of Physics VIa/2, Mechanics of Solids II, Springer-Verlag. Caputo, M. (1967). Linear models of dissipation whose Q is almost frequency independent. Part II. Geoph. J. R. Astron. Soc. 13, 529–539. (1969). Elasticit` a e Dissipazione. Zanichelli, Bologna. Cattaneo, C. (1948). Sulla condizione del calore. Atti. del Seminario Mat. e Fis. Univ. Modena 3, 83–101. Caviglia, G., Morro, A. and Straughan, B. (1992). Thermoelasticity at cryogenic temperatures. Int. J. Non-Lin. Mech. 27, 251–263. Chadwick, P. (1960). Thermoelasticity, The Dynamical Theory, Progress in Solid Mechanics 1 (ed. I.N. Sneddon and R. Hill), 263–328, North-Holland. Chandrasekharaiah, D.S. (1981). Wave propagation in a thermoelastic half-space. Ind. J. Pure Appl. Math. 12(2), 226–241. (1984). A uniqueness theorem in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Tech. Phys. 25 (3–4), 345–350. (1986). Thermoelasticity with second sound: A review. Appl. Mech. Rev. 39(3), 355–376. (1998). Hyperbolic thermoelasticity: A review of recent literature. Appl. Mech. Rev. 51(12), 705–729. Chester, M. (1963). Second sound in solids. Phys. Rev. 131(5), 2013–2015. Chirita, S. (1995). Saint-Venant’s principle in linear thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 18, 485–496. (2007). Spatial behavior of the strongly elliptic anisotropic thermoelastic materials. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 859–873. Christov, C.I. and Jordan, P.M. (2005). Heat conduction paradox involving secondsound propagation in moving media. Phys. Rev. Lett. 94, 154301-1-4. Chrz¸eszczyk, A. (1993a), Initial-boundary value problems for nonlinear equations of generalized thermoelasticity and elasticity, Math. Meth. Appl. Sci. 16, 49–60. (1993b), Well-posedness of the equations of generalized thermoelasticity, J. Elast. 16, 69–80. Coleman, B.D., Fabrizio, M. and Owen, D.R. (1982). On the thermodynamics of second sound in dielectric crystals. Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 80(2), 135–158. (1986). Thermodynamics and the constitutive relations for second sound in crystals, in: New Perspectives in Thermodynamics. J. Serrin, ed., 171–185, Berlin. Coleman, B.D. and Owen, D.R. (1983). On the nonequilibrium behavior of solids that transport heat by second sound. Comp. Math. Appls. 9(3), 527–546.

References

385

Dai, W., Wang, H., Jordan, P.M., Mickens, R.E. and Bejan, A. (2008). A mathematical model for skin burn injury induced by radiation heating. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer 51(23–24), 5497–5510. Danilovskaya, V.I. (1950). Thermal stresses in an elastic half-space due to sudden heating of its boundary (in Russian). Prikl. Mat. Mech. 14(3). Day, W.A. (1985). Heat Conduction within Linear Thermoelasticity. Springer Tracts in Natural Philosophy 30, Springer-Verlag, New York. Deresiewicz, H. (1957). Plane waves in a thermoelastic solid. J. Acoust. Soc. Am. 29(2), 204–209. Dhaliwal, R.S. and Singh, A. (1980). Dynamic Coupled Thermoelasticity, Hindustan Publ. Corp. Delhi, India. DiPerna, R. and Majda, A. (1985). The validity of geometric optics for weak solutions of conservation laws. Comm. Math. Phys. 98, 313–347. Doma´ nski, W. (2000). Weakly nonlinear elastic plane waves in a cubic crystal. Contemporary Mathematics, Am. Math. Soc., 255, pp. 45–61. Dreyer, W. and Struchtrup, H. (1993). Heat pulse experiments revisited. Continuum Mech. Thermodyn. 5, 3–50. Edelen, D.G.B. (1973). On the existence of symmetry relations and dissipative potentials. Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 51, 218–227. (1974a). Primitive thermodynamics: A new look at the Clausius-Duhem inequality. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 12, 121–141. (1974b). On the characterization of fluxes in nonlinear reversible thermodynamics. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 12, 397–411. (1993). The College Station Lectures on Thermodynamics, a collection of the lectures presented at Texas A&M University, sponsored by the Department of Aerospace Engineering. El-Karamany, A.S. and Ezzat, M.A. (2004). Discontinuities in generalized thermoviscoelasticity under four theories. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 1187–1212. (2005). Propagation of discontinuities in thermopiezoelectric rod. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 997–1030. Erbay, S. and S ¸ uhubi, E.S. (1986). Longitudinal wave propagation in a generalized thermoelastic cylinder. J. Thermal Stresses 9, 279–295. Eringen, A.C. and S ¸ uhubi, E.S. (1975). Elastodynamics, II Linear Theory. Academic Press. Feder, J. (2007). Fractals (Physics of Solids and Liquids). Springer. Fichera, G. (1997). A boundary value problem connected with response of semi-space to a short laser pulse. Rend. Mat. Acc. Lincei 8(9), 197–228. Francis, P.H. (1972). Thermo-mechanical effects in elastic wave propagation, A survey. J. Sound Vib. 21(2), 181–192. Gladysz, J. (1982). Convolutional Variational Principles in Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds (in Polish). Ph.D. Thesis, Wroclaw University of Technology, Wroclaw, Poland. Gorenflo, R. and Mainardi, F. (1997). Fractional calculus: Integral and differential equations of fractional order. Arch. Mech. 50, 377–388. (1998). Fractional calculus and stable probability distributions. in Fractals and Fractional Calculus in Continuuum Mechanics, eds. A. Carpinteri and F. Mainardi, 223–290.

386

References

Green, A.E. (1972). A note on linear thermoelasticity. Mathematika 19, 69–75. Green, A.E. and Laws, N. (1972). On the entropy production inequality. Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 45, 47–53. and Lindsay, K.A. (1972). Thermoelasticity. J. Elast. 2(1), 1–7. and Naghdi, P.M. (1991). A re-examination of the basic postulates of thermomechanics. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 432, 171–194. (1992). On undamped heat waves in an elastic solid. J. Thermal Stresses 15, 253–264. (1993). Thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Elast. 31, 189–208. Gurtin, M.E. (1972). The linear theory of elasticity, in Encyclopedia of Physics VIa/2, Mechanics of Solids II, Springer-Verlag. Hetnarski, R.B. and Ignaczak, J. (1993). Generalized thermoelasticity: Closed form solutions. J. Thermal Stresses 16(4), 473–498. (1999). Generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 451–476. (2000). Nonclassical dynamical thermoelasticity. Int. J. Solids Struct. 37 (1–2), 215–224. (2004). Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. Taylor and Francis, New York. Hunter, J.K. and Keller, J. (1983). Weakly nonlinear high frequency waves, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 36, 547–569. Ie¸san, D. (1966). Principes variationnels dans la théorie de la thérmoélasticité couplee. Ann. Stiint. Univ. A.I. Cuza, Iasi, Sect. I, Matematica 12, 439–456. (1998). On the theory of thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 295–307. (2004). Thermoelastic Models of Continua. Kluwer Academic Pub., Dordrecht. Ignaczak, J. (1970). Radiation conditions of Sommerfeld type for elastic materials with microstructure. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., S´ er. Sci. Tech. 18(6), 251–257. (1974). Domain of influence theorem for stress equations of motion of linear elastodynamics. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., S´ er. Sci. Tech. 22(9). (1976). Thermoelastic counterpart to Boggio’s theorem of linear elastodynamics. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., S´ er. Sci. Tech. 24(3), 129–137. (1978a). Decomposition theorem for thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses 1(1), 41–52. (1978b). Domain of influence theorem in linear thermoelasticity. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 16, 139–145. (1978c). A uniqueness theorem for stress-temperature equations of dynamic thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 1(2), 163–170. (1979). Uniqueness in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 2(2), 171–175. (1980a). A variational description of stress and heat flux in dynamic thermoelasticity. Collected Articles. Kielce College of Education, Kielce, Poland. (1980b). Thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds – a survey, in Thermal Stresses in Severe Environments, ed. D.P.H. Hasselman and R.A. Heller. Plenum Press, New York and London, 15–30. (1981a). On a three-dimensional solution of dynamic thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 4(3–4), 357–385. (1981b). Linear dynamic thermoelasticity – A survey. Shock Vib. Dig. 13(9), 3–8. (1982). A note on uniqueness in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 5(3–4), 257–263.

References

387

(1983). Thermoelastic polynomials. J. Thermal Stresses 6(1), 45–55. (1985). A strong discontinuity wave in thermoelasticity with relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 8(1), 25–40. (1987). Linear dynamic thermoelasticity – A survey: 1981–1984. Shock Vib. Dig. 19(6), 11–17. Ignaczak, J. (1989a). Generalized thermoelasticity and its applications, in Thermal Stresses III (ed. R.B. Hetnarski), 279–354, North-Holland, Amsterdam. (1989b). Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds. Lecture Notes (in Polish). Ossolineum, Wroclaw-Warszawa, Krak´ ow, Gda´ nsk, L´ od´z, 1–104. (1991). Domain of influence results in generalized thermoelasticity – a survey. Appl. Mech. Rev. 44(9), 375–382. (1998). Saint-Venant type decay estimates for transient heat conduction in a composite rigid semi-space. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 185–204. (2001). Dual-phase-lag model of rigid heat conductor revisted. in Proc. Fourth Int. Cong. Thermal Stresses - TS2001, Osaka Institute of Technology, Osaka, Japan, 511–514. (2002). Saint-Venant’s principle for a microperiodic composite thermoelastic semi-space: The dynamical refined averaged theory. J. Thermal Stresses 25(12), 1065–1079. (2006). Nonlinear hyperbolic heat conduction problem: Closed-form solutions. J. Thermal Stresses 29(11), 999–1018. and Bialy, J. (1980). Domain of influence in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 3(3), 391–399. Carbonaro, B. and Russo, R. (1986). A domain of influence theorem in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 9(1), 79–91. and Doma´ nski, W. (2008). Nonlinear hyperbolic rigid heat conductor of the Coleman type. J. Thermal Stresses 31(5), 416–437. and Nowacki, W. (1962). The Sommerfeld radiation conditions for coupled problems of thermoelasticity. Arch. Mech. Stos. 14(1), 3–14. Jackson, H. E., Walker, C. T. and McNelly, T. F. (1970). Second sound in NaF. Phys. Rev. Lett. 25, 26–29. Jakubowska, M. (1982). Kirchhoff ’s Formula for a Thermoelastic Body, Ph.D. Thesis (in Polish), Inst. Fund. Tech. Res., Polish Academy of Sciences, Warsaw, Poland. Kaliski, S. (1965). Wave equations in thermoelasticity. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., Sér. Sci. Tech. 13, 253–260. Khisaeva, Z.F. and Ostoja-Starzewski, M. (2006). Thermoelastic damping in nanomechanical resonators with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 201–216. Kimmich, R. (2002). Strange kinetics, porous media, and NMR. Chem. Phys. 284, 253–285. King, A.C., Needham, D.J. and Scott, N.H. (1989). The effects of weak hyperbolicity on the diffusion of heat. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 454, 1659–1679. Kinra, V.K. and Milligan, K.B. (1994). A second law analysis of thermoelastic damping. J. Appl. Mech. 61, p. 71. Klages, R. (2007). Microscopic Chaos, Fractals and Transport in Nonequilibrium Statistical Mechanics. World Scientific, Singapore. Kosi´ nski, W. (1974). Behaviour of the acceleration and shock waves in materials with internal state variables. Int. J. Non-Linear Mech. 9, 481–499.

388

References

Kosi´ nski, W. (1975). One-dimensional shock waves in solids with internal state variables. Arch. Mech. 27, 445–458. Kupradze, V.D., Gegelia, T.G., Basheleishvili, M.O. and Burchuladze, T.V. (1979). Three-Dimensional Problems of Mathematical Theory of Elasticity and Thermoelasticity. North-Holland, Amsterdam. Landau, L. (1941). J. Phys. 5, 71. Lax, P.D. (1957). Hyperbolic systems of conservation laws. Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 10, 537–566. Lebon, G. (1982). A generalized theory of thermoelasticity. J. Tech. Physics 23, 37–46. Leslie, D.J. and Scott, N.H. (2004). Wave stability for constrained materials in anisotropic generalized thermoelasticity. Math. Mech. Solids 9, 513–542. Li, J. and Ostoja-Starzewski, M. (2009). Fractal solids, product measures, and continuum mechanics, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 465, 2521–2536. Lifshitz, R. and Roukes, M.L. (2000). Thermoelastic damping in micro- and nanomechanical systems. Phys. Rev. B 61, 5600–5609. Lord, H.W. and Shulman, Y. (1967). A generalized dynamical theory of thermoelasticity, J. Mech. Phys. Solids 15, 299–309. Maugin, G.A. (1999). The Thermomechanics of Nonlinear Irreversible Behaviors – an Introduction, World Scientific, Singapore. Maugin, G.A. (2008). Private Communication. Maxwell, J.C. (1867). On the dynamical theory of gases. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond. 157, 49–88. McNelly, T.F., Rogers, S.J., Channin, D.J., Rollefson, R.J., Goubau, W.M., Schmidt, G.E., Krumhansl, J.A. and Pohl, R.O. (1970). Heat pulses in NaF: Onset of second sound. Phys. Rev. Lett. 24, 100–102. Mikusi´ nski, J. (1957). Operational Calculus, PWN-Polish Scientific Publishers. English translation (1967) Pergamon Press. Miller, S.T. and Haber, R.B. (2008). A spacetime discontinuous Galerkin method for hyperbolic heat conduction. Comp. Meth. Appl. Mech. Eng. 198, 194– 209. M¨ uller, I. (1971). The coldness, a universal function in thermoelastic bodies. Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 41, 319–331. and Ruggeri, T. (1993). Extended Thermodynamics, Springer-Verlag. (1998). Rational Extended Thermodynamics, Springer-Verlag. Nappa, L. (1998). Spatial decay estimates for the evolution equations of linear thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 581–592. Nayfeh, A. and Nemat-Nasser, S. (1971). Thermoelastic waves in solids with thermal relaxation. Acta Mech. 12, 53–69. Nickell, R.E. and Sackman, J.L. (1968). Variational principles for linear coupled thermoelasticity. Quart. Appl. Math. 26, 11–26. Nowacki, Witold (1957). A dynamical problem of thermoelasticity. Arch. Mech. Stos. 9(3), 325–334. (1962). Thermoelasticity. Pergamon Press. (1975). Dynamic Problems of Thermoelasticity. Noordhoff; translated from the Polish edition (1966), PWN-Polish Scientific Publishers. (1986). Theory of Asymmetric Elasticity, Pergamon Press. Oxford/PWN-Polish Scientific Publishers, Warsaw.

References

389

Ostoja-Starzewski, M. (2003). Thermoelastic waves in a helix with parabolic or hyperbolic heat conduction. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 1205–1219. (2007a). Towards thermomechanics of fractal media. J. Appl. Math. Phys. (ZAMP) 58(6), 1085–1096. (2007b). Towards thermoelasticity of fractal media. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 889–896. Ostoja-Starzewski, M. (2008a). Microstructural Randomness and Scaling in Mechanics of Materials, Chapman & Hall/CRC Press/Taylor & Francis. (2008b). On turbulence in fractal porous media. J. Appl. Math. Phys. (ZAMP) 59(6), 1111–1117. (2009a). Continuum mechanics models of fractal porous media: Integral relations and extremum principles, J Mech. Mater. Struct., in press. (2009b). Extremum and variational principles for elastic and inelastic media with fractal geometries, Acta Mech. 205, 161–170. (doi:10.1007/s00707-009-0169-0) (2009c). A derivation of the Maxwell-Cattaneo equation from the free energy and dissipation potentials. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 47, 807–810. (doi:10.1016/j.ijengsci.2009. 03.002) and Li, J. (2009d). Fractal materials, beams and fracture mechanics, ZAMP, in press. (doi:10.1007/s00033-009-8120-8) Parkus, H. (1959). Instation¨ are W¨ armespannuungen. Springer, 96–97. Pao, Y.-H. and Banerjee, D.K. (1978). A theory of anisotropic thermoelasticity at low reference temperature. J. Thermal Stresses 1(1), 99–112. Peierls, R. (1979). Surprises in Theoretical Physics. Princeton Series in Physics. Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ. Peshkov, V. (1944). “Second sound” in helium II. J. Phys. U.S.S.R. 8, 131. Podstrigach, Y.S. and Kolano, Y.M. (1976). Generalized Thermomechanics (in Russian), Izdat. Nauk, Dumka, Kiev. Povstenko, Y.Z. (2005a). Fractional heat conduction equation and associated thermal stress. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 83–102. (2005b). Stresses exerted by a source of diffusion in a case of a non-parabolic diffusion equation. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 43, 977–991. (2008). Two-dimensional axisymmetric stresses exerted by instantaneous pulses and sources of diffusion in an infinite space in a case of time-fractional diffusion equation. Int. J. Solids Struct. 44, 2324–2348. Prevost, J.H. and Tao, D. (1983). Finite element analysis of dynamic coupled thermoelasticity problems with relaxation times. J. Appl. Mech. 50, 817–822. Puri, P. (1973). Plane waves in generalized thermoelasticity. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 11, 735– 744; Errata ibid. 12, 339–340. Quintanilla, R. (1999). On the spatial behaviour in thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 213–224. (2001). End effects in thermoelasticity. Math. Meth. Appl. Sci. 24(2), 93–102. and Straughan, B. (2000). Growth and uniqueness in thermoelasticity. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 456, 1419–1429. Roukes, M.L. (2000). Nanoelectromechanical Systems, Technical Digest of the 2000 Solid-State Sensor and Actuator Workshop, p. 1. Ro˙znowski, T. (1971). Radiation conditions of Sommerfeld type for coupled thermoelasticity. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., S´ er. Sci. Tech. 19(7–8), 287–290. (1983). Integral representation and uniqueness theorems in generalized thermoelasticity. Arch. Mech. Stos. 35(1), 17–36.

390

References

Samras, R.K., Skop, R.A. and Millburn, D.A. (1974). An analysis of coupled extensional-torsional oscillations in wire rope. ASME J. Eng. Ind. 96, 1130–1135. Scott, N.H. (2008). Thermoelasticity and generalized thermoelasticity viewed as wave hierarchy. IMA J. Appl. Math. 73, 123–136. Sherief, H.H. (1986). Fundamental solution of the generalized thermoelastic problem for short times. J. Thermal Stresses 9, 151–164. and Anwar, M.N. (1994). Two-dimensional generalized thermoelasticity problem for an infinitely long cylinder. J. Thermal Stresses 17(2), 213–227. and Dhaliwal, R.S. (1981). Generalized one-dimensional thermal shock problem for small times. J. Thermal Stresses 4, 407–420. Stakgold, I. (1968). Boundary Value Problems of Mathematical Physics II. McMillan Co. Sternberg, E. (1954). On Saint-Venant’s Principle. Quart. Appl. Math. 11(4), 393–402. Strikverda, J.C. and Scott, A.M. (1984). Thermoelastic response to a short laser pulse. J. Thermal Stresses 7(1), 1–17. S ¸ uhubi, E.S. (1975). Thermoelastic solids, in Continuum Physics 2(2) (ed. Eringen, A.C.), Academic Press. (1982). A generalized theory of simple thermomechanical materials. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 20, 365–371. Tao, D. and Prevost, J.H. (1984). Relaxation effects on generalized thermoelastic waves. J. Thermal Stresses 7(1), 78–89. Tarabek, M.A. (1992). On the existence of smooth solutions in one-dimensional nonlinear thermoelasticity with second sound, Quart. Appl. Math. 50, 727–742. Tarasov, V.E. (2005a). Continuous medium model for fractal media. Phys. Lett. A 336, 167–174. (2005b). Fractional hydrodynamic equations for fractal media. Ann. Phys. 318(2), 286–307. Tzou, D.Y. (1997). Macro – To Microscale Heat Transfer; The Lagging Behavior. Taylor & Francis, Washington, DC. Vernotte, P. (1958). Les paradoxes de la théorie continue de l’équation de la chaleur. C.R. Acad. Sci. 246 (22) 3154–3155. Vivar-Pèrez, J.M., Bravo-Castillero, J., Rodriguez-Ramos, R. and Ostoja-Starzewski, M. (2006). Homogenization of a micro-periodic helix with parabolic or hyperbolic heat conduction. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 467–483. (2008). The effect of imperfect contact on the homogenization of a micro-periodic helix. Mathematics and Mechanics of Solids, in press. Watson, G.N. (1958). A Treatise on the Theory of Bessel Functions. Cambridge University Press. Wilma´ nski, K. (1998). Thermomechanics of Continua, Springer-Verlag. Wojnar, R. (1984). The plane stress state in thermoelasticity with relaxation times (in Polish). Biuletyn WAT 33(1), 105–113. (1985a). Uniqueness of displacement-heat flux and stress-temperature problems in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 8, 351–364. (1985b). Uniqueness of the displacement-heat flux problem in thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., Sér. Sci. Tech. 33(5–6), 217–227. (1985c). Uflyand-Mindlin’s plate equations in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. Bull. Acad. Polon. Sci., S´ er. Sci. Tech. 33(7–8), 325–349.

References

391

(1985d). Uflyand-Mindlin’s plate equations in thermoelasticity with relaxation times. J. Tech. Physics 26(3–4), 377–403. (1986). Rayleigh waves in thermoelasticity with relaxation times. 2nd Int. Conf. on Surface Waves in Plasmas and Solids, Yugoslavia (1985), World Scientific, Singapore, 682–685. Wojnar, R. (1988a). Surface waves in thermoelasticity with relaxation times, in Recent Developments in Surface Acoustic Waves, Euromech 226 (ed. G.F. Parker and G.A. Maugin), Springer-Verlag, 335–341. (1988b). Surface waves in thermoelasticity with relaxation times (in Polish). Theor. Appl. Mech. 1, 55–72. Yourgrau, W., Treatise on Irreversible and Statistical Thermophysics: an Introduction to Nonclassical Thermodynamics, New York, MacMillan, 1966. Zaremba, S. (1915). Sopra un theorema d’unicita relativo alla equazione delle onde sferiche. Atti. Reale Accad. Lincei., Cl. Sci. Fis. e Mat. Natur. [5] 24, 904. Zener, C. (1948). Elasticity and Anelasticity of Metals, University of Chicago Press, Chicago. Ziegler, H. and Wehrli, C. (1987). The derivation of constitutive relations from the free energy and the dissipation functions. Adv. Appl. Mech. 25 (ed. T.Y. Wu and J.W. Hutchinson), 183–238, Academic Press, New York.

ADDITIONAL REFERENCES

Abbas, I. (2008). Finite element method of thermal shock problem in a nonhomogeneous isotropic hollow cylinder with two relaxation times. Eng. Res. 72(2), 101–110. Abd-Alla, A.N. and Abbas, I. (2002). A problem of generalized magnetothermoelasticity for an infinitely long, perfectly conducting cylinder. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 1009–1025. Achenbach, J.D. (2005). The thermoelasticity of laser-based ultrasonics. J. Thermal Stresses 28(6–7), 713–727. Agarwal, V.K. (1979). On plane electromagneto-thermoelastic plane waves. Acta Mech. 34, 181–191. Al-Huniti, N.S. and Al-Nimr, M.A. (2000). Behavior of thermal stresses in a rapidly heated thin plate. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 293–307. (2004). Thermoelastic behavior of a composite slab under a rapid dual-phaselag heating. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 607–623. and Megdad, M.M. (2003). Thermal induced vibrations in a thin plate under wave heat conduction model. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 943–962. Allam, M.N., Elsibai, K.A. and Abouelregal, A.E. (2002). Thermal stresses in a harmonic field for an infinite body with a circular cylindrical hole without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 57–67. Allam, M.N.M., Elsibai, K.A. and Abouelregal, A.E. (2007). Electromagnetothermoelastic plane waves without energy dissipation for an infinitely long annular cylinder in a harmonic field. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 195–210. Al-Nimr, M.A. and Al-Huniti, N.S. (2000). Transient thermal stresses in a thin elastic plate due to a rapid dual-phase-lag heating. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 731–746. Anderson, C.V.D.R. and Tamma, K.K. (2006). Novel heat conduction model for bridging different space and time scales. Phys. Rev. Lett. 96, 184301-1-4. Anwar, M.N. (1991). Problem in generalized thermoelasticity for a half-space subject to smooth heating of its boundary. J. Thermal Stresses 14, 241–254. and Sherief, H.H. (1988). State space approach to generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 11, 353–365. (1994a). Boundary integral equation formulation for thermoelasticity with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 17(2), 257–270. (1994b). State-space approach to two-dimensional generalized thermoelasticity problems. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 567–590. Aouadi, M. (2006). Thermomechanical interactions in a generalized thermomicrostretch elastic half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 511–528. (2007). Eigenvalue approach to linear micropolar thermoelasticity under distributed loading. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 421–440. (2007). Uniqueness and reciprocity theorems in the theory of generalized thermoelastic diffusion. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 665–678.

Additional references

393

Aouadi, M. (2008). Generalized theory of thermoelastic diffusion for anisotropic media. J. Thermal Stresses 31, 270–285. and El-Karamany, A.S. (2003). Plane waves in generalized thermoviscoelastic material with relaxation time and temperature dependent properties. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 197–222. Arcisz, M. and Kosi´ nski, W. (1996). Hugoniot relations for different heat conduction laws. Int. J. Non-Linear Mech. 19, 17–38. Bagri, A. and Eslami, M.R. (2004). Generalized coupled thermoelasticity of disks based on the Lord-Shulman model. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 691–704. (2007a). A unified generalized thermoelasticity formulation: Application to thick functionally graded cylinders. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 911–930. (2007b). Analysis of thermoelastic waves in functionally graded hollow spheres based on the Green-Lindsay theory. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 1175–1193. (2007c). A unified generalized thermoelasticity; solution for cylinders and spheres, Int. J. Mech. Sci. 49, 1325–1335. Taheri, H., Eslami, M.R. and Fariborz, S. (2006). Generalized coupled thermoelasticity of a layer. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 359–370. Baksi, A. and Bera, R.K. (2006). Relaxation effects on plane wave propagation in rotating magneto-thermo-viscoelastic medium. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 753–769. Bassiouny, E. and Youssef, H.M. (2008). Two-temperature generalized thermopiezoelectricity of finite rod subjected to different types of thermal load. J. Thermal Stresses 31, 237–245. Bem, Z. (1988). Existence theorem for the stress–heat-flux equations in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. Bull. Pol. Acad. Sci, Tech. Sci. 36(7–9), 493–499. Brorson, S.D., Fujimoto, J.G. and Ippen, E.P. (1987). Femtosecond electronic heat transport dynamics in thin gold film. Phys. Rev. Lett. 59, 1962–1965. Brun, L. and Molinari, A. (1980). Unidimensional progressive waves in generalized thermoelasticity, J. Thermal Stresses. 3, 67–76. Burchuladze, T.V. (1979). Nonstationary initial boundary value contact problems of generalized elastothermodiffusion. Georgian Math. J. 4, 1–18. Carbonaro, B. and Ignaczak, J. (1987). Some theorems in temperature-rate dependent thermoelasticity for unbounded domains. J. Thermal Stresses 10(1), 193–220. Chandrasekharaiah, D.S. (1984). A temperature-rate-dependent theory of thermopiezoelectricity. J. Thermal Stresses 7, 293–306. (1987). Complete solutions of a coupled system of partial differential equations arising in thermoelasticity. Quart. Appl. Math. 45(3), 471–480. (1996a). A uniqueness theorem in the theory of thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 267–272. (1996b). One-dimensional wave propagation in the linear theory of thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 695–710. (1998). Variational and reciprocal principles in thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. (Math. Sci.) 108, 209–215. (2003). Author’s Response to “Comments on the articles “Hyperbolic thermoelasticity: A review of recent literature” (Chandrasekharaiah D.S. 1998, Appl Mech Rev 51(12), 705–729) and “Thermoelasticity with second sound: A review” (Chandrasekharaiah D.S., 1986) Appl. Mech. Rev. 39 (3), 355–376)”. Appl. Mech. Rev. 51(12), 453.

394


Chandrasekharaiah, D.S. and Srinath, K.S. (1997). Thermoelastic plane waves without energy dissipation in a half-space due to time-dependent heating of the boundary. J. Thermal Stresses 20, 659–676. Chattopadhyay, N.C. and Biswas, M. (2007). Study of thermal stress generated in an elastic half-space in the context of generalized thermoelasticity theory. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 107–129. Chen, J.K., Beraun, J.E. and Tzou, D.Y. (2002). Thermomechanical response of metals heated by ultrashort-pulsed lasers. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 537–558. Chen, T.C. and Weng, C.J. (1989). Generalized coupled transient thermoelastic problem of a square cylinder with elliptical hole. J. Thermal Stresses 12, 305–320. Chirita, S. (1988). Some applications of the Lagrange identity in thermoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 11, 207–231. Choudhary, S. and Deswal, S. (2008). Distributed loads in an elastic solid with generalized thermo-diffusion. Arch. Mech. 60(2), 139–160. Choudhuri, S.K. (2007). On a thermoelastic three-phase lag model. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 231–238. Christov, C. I. (2008). On the evolution of localized wave packets governed by a dissipative wave equation. Wave Motion 45, 154–161. Ciancio, V. and Quintanilla, R. (2007). Thermodynamics of materials with internal variables in the context of the Green and Naghdi theories. Balk. J. Geom. Appl. 12(1), 16–31. Ciarletta, M. (1996). Thermoelasticity of non-simple materials with thermal relaxation. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 731–748. (1999). A theory of micropolar thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 581–594. Scalia, A. and Svanadze, M. (2007). Fundamental solution in the theory of micropolar thermoelasticity for material with voids. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 213–227. Ciumasu, S.G. and Vieru, D. (1993). Uniqueness and variational theorems of linear generalized thermoelasticity with microstructure. Bull. Inst. Polit. Iasi 39(1–4), 121–127. Coleman, B.D. and Newman, D.C. (1988). Implications of nonlinearity in the theory of second sound in solids. Phys. Rev. B. 37(4), 1492–1498. and Lai, P.H. (1993). Calculations for bismuth of consequences of nonlinearities in the theory of second sound. Phys. Rev. B. 190, 247–255. (1994a). Nonstationary interference patterns in the theory of second sound in solids. Physica B 198, 361–368. (1994b). Waves of discontinuity and sinusoidal waves in the theory of second sound in solids. Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 126, 1–20. De Cicco, S. and Diaco, M. (2002). A theory of thermoelastic materials with voids and without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 493–503. and Nappa, L. (1999). On the theory of thermomicrostretch elastic solids. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 565–580. Deng, A.S. and Liu, J. (2003). Non-Fourier heat conduction effect on prediction of temperature transients and thermal stresses in skin preservation. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 779–798.


395

Dhaliwal, R.S. and Rokne, J.G. (1988). Green’s functions in generalized micropolar thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 11, 257–271. (1989). One-dimensional thermal shock problem with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 12, 259–279. Saxena, H.S. and Rokne, J.G. (1991). Generalized magneto-thermoelastic waves in an infinite elastic solid with a cylindrical cavity. J. Thermal Stresses 14, 353–369. and Wang, J. (1993). Green’s functions in generalized micropolar thermoelasticity. Appl. Mech. Rev. 46(11, Pt. 2), S316–S326. (1995). Small-time Green’s function in temperature rate-dependent thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 18, 13–24. Ding, X.F., Furukawa, T. and Nakanishi, H. (2001). Analysis of the shear-focusing effect in a solid cylinder subject to instantaneous heating based on the generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 383–394. Dyszlewicz, J. (2004). Micropolar Theory of Elasticity. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. El-Karamany, A.S. (2003). Boundary integral equation formulation in generalized thermoviscoelasticity with rheological volume and density in material having temperature dependent properties. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 123–147. (2007). Constitutive laws, uniqueness theorem and Hamilton’s principles in linear micropolar thermopiezoelectric/piezomagnetic continuum with relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 59–80. El-Maghraby, N.M. (2004). Two-dimensional problem in generalized thermoelasticity with heat sources. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 227–239. (2005). A two-dimensional problem for a thick plate with heat sources in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 1227–1241. (2008). A two-dimensional generalized thermoelasticity problem for a half-space under the action of a body force. J. Thermal Stresses 31(6), 557–568. Erbay, H.A., Erbay, S. and Dost, S. (1991). Green’s function in temperature-rate dependent thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 14, 161–171. Ezzat, M.A. (1997). Generation of generalized magneto-thermoelastic waves by thermal shock in a perfectly conducting half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 20, 617–633. and El-Karamany, A.S. (2002a). The uniqueness and reciprocity theorems for generalized thermoviscoelasticity for anisotropic media. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 507–522. (2002b). Magnetothermoelasticity with thermal relaxation in a conducting medium with variable electric and thermal conductivity. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 859–875. (2006). Propagation of discontinuities in magneto-thermoelastic half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 331–358. and Samaan, A.A. (2001). State-space formulation of generalized thermoviscoelasticity with thermal relaxation. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 823–846. and Zakaria, M. (2003). The relaxation effects of the volume properties of viscoelastic material in generalized thermoelasticity with thermal relaxation. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 671–690. Ezzat, M.A. and Othman, M.I. (2002). State-space approach to generalized magnetothermoelasticity with thermal relaxation in a medium of perfect conductivity. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 409–429.

396


Ezzat, M.A. and Othman, M.I. and El-Karamany, A.S. (2001a). Electro-magnetothermoelastic plane waves with thermal relaxation in a medium of perfect conductivity. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 411–432. (2001b). The dependence of the modulus of elasticity on the reference temperature in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 1159–1176. (2002). State-space approach to two-dimensional generalized thermoviscoelasticity with one relaxation time. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 295–316. Falques, A. (1982). Thermoelasticity and heat conduction with memory effects. J. Thermal Stresses 5, 145–160. Fatori, L.H., Lueders, E. and Mu˜ noz Rivera, J.E. (2003). Transmission problem for hyperbolic thermoelastic systems. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 739–763. Fichera, G. (1992). Is the Fourier theory of heat propagation paradoxical? Rendiconti del Circolo Matematico di Palermo, Serie II, 41, 5–28. Fox, N. (1969). Generalized thermoelasticity. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 7, 437–445. Gawinecki, J. (1987). Existence, uniqueness and regularity of the first initial-boundary value problem for hyperbolic equations of temperature-rate dependent solids. Bull. Pol. Acad., Sci. Tech. Sec. 35 (7–8), 411–419. (1987). The Cauchy problem for the linear hyperbolic equations system of the theory of thermoelasticity. Bull. Pol. Acad. Sci., Tech. Sci. 35(7–8), 421–433. Gawinecki, J.A., Sikorska, B. Nakamura, G. and Rafa, J. (2007). Mathematical and physical interpretation of the solution to the initial-boundary value problem in linear hyperbolic thermoelasticity. ZAMM 87 (10), 715–746. Ghaleb, A.F. (1986). A model of continuum thermoelastic media within the frame of extended thermodynamics. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 24(5), 765–771. and El-Deen Mohamedein, M.Sh. (1989). A heat conduction equation with three relaxation times. Particular Solutions. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 27(11), 1367–1377. Ghoneim, H. and Dalo, D.N. (1987). Thermoviscoplasticity with second sound effects. J. Thermal Stresses 10, 357–366. Gladysz, J. (1985). Convolutional variational principles for thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses 8, 205–226. (1986). Approximate one-dimensional solution in linear thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses. 9, 45–57. Gorman, M.J. (1993). Numerical Analysis of One-Dimensional Waves in Generalized Thermoelasticity. M.Sc. Thesis, Dept. Mech. Eng., Rochester Institute of Technology, Rochester, NY. Gurtin, M.E. and Pipkin, A.C. (1969). A general theory of heat conduction with finite wave speeds. Arch. Rational Mech. Analysis 31, 113–126. Haddow, J.B. and Wegner, J.L. (1996). Plane harmonic waves for three thermoelastic theories. Math. Mech. Solids 1, 111–127. He, T. and Li, S. (2006). A two-dimensional generalized electromagneto-thermoelastic problem for a half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 683–698. Hector, L.G., Kim, W.S. and Ozisik, M.N. (1992). Hyperbolic heat conduction due to a mode locked laser pulse train. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 30(12), 1731–1744. Hetnarski, R.B. and Eslami, M.R. (2009). Thermal Stresses – Advanced Theory and Applications. Springer-Verlag. and Ignaczak, J. (1994). Generalized thermoelasticity: Response of semi-space to a short laser pulse. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 377–396.


397

(1995). Soliton-like waves in a low-temperature nonlinear rigid heat conductor. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 33, 1725–1741. (1996). Soliton-like waves in a low-temperature nonlinear thermoelastic solid. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 34, 1767–1787. (1997). On soliton-like thermoelastic waves. Appl. Anal. 65, 183–204. Ie¸san, D. (1983). Thermoelasticity of nonsimple materials. J. Thermal Stresses 6, 167–188. Ignaczak, J. (1989). Solitons in a nonlinear rigid heat conductor. J. Thermal Stresses 12, 403–423. (1990). Soliton-like solutions in a nonlinear dynamic coupled thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 13, 73–98. (2005). The second law of thermodynamics for a two-temperature model of heat transport in metal films. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 929–942. (2006). Nonlinear hyperbolic heat conduction: closed-form solutions. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 999–1018. and Mr´ owka-Matejewska, E. (1990). Green’s function in temperature-rate dependent thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 11, 257–271. Iovane, G. and Passarella, F. (2004). Saint-Venant’s principle in dynamic porous thermoelastic media with memory heat flux. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 983–999. Irschik, H. and Gusenbauer, M. (2007). Body force analogy for transient thermal stresses. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 965–975. Ivanov, T.P. (1987). Propagation of one-dimensional waves in generalized thermomechanics (in Russian). Adv. Mech. 10(4), 131–166. Jakubowska, M. (1982). Kirchhoff’s formula for a thermoelastic solid. J. Thermal Stresses 5, 127–144. (1984). Kirchhoff’s type formula in thermoelasticity with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses 7, 259–283. Jordan, P.M. and Puri, P. (2001). Thermal stresses in a spherical shell under three thermoelastic models. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 47–70. Jou, D., Casas-Vazquez, J. and Lebon, G. (1996). Extended Irreversible Thermodynamics, Springer-Verlag, Berlin. Joseph, D.D. and Preziosi, L. (1989). Heat waves. Rev. Mod. Phys. 61, 41–73. (1990). Addendum to the paper “Heat waves” [Rev. Mod. Phys. 61, 41–73]. Rev. Mod. Phys. 62, 375–391. Kawamura, R., Tanigawa, Y. and Kusuki, S. (2008). Fundamental thermo-elasticity equations for thermally induced flexural vibration problems for inhomogeneous plates and thermoelastic dynamical responses to a sinusoidally varying surface temperature. J. Eng. Math. 61(2–4), 143–160. Karakostas, G. and Massalas, C.V. (1991). Some basic results on the generalized theory of linear thermoelasticity proposed by Green and Lindsay. Eur. J. Mech. A/Solids 10, 193–211. Kosi´ nski, W. and Frischmuth, K. (2001). Thermomechanical coupled waves in a nonlinear medium. Wave Motion 34, 131–131–141. Kosi´ nski, W. and Szmit, K. (1977). On waves in elastic materials at low temperature: Part I. Hyperbolicity in thermoelasticity; Part II. Principal waves. Bull. Acad. Pol. Sci., Ser. Tech. Sci. 25, 23–30.

398


Kumar, R. and Ailawalia, P. (2006). Time harmonic sources at micropolar thermoelastic medium possessing cubic symmetry with one relaxation time. Europ. J. Mech. A: Solids 25(2), 271–282. and Rani, L. (2004). Deformation due to mechanical and thermal sources in generalized thermoelastic half-space with voids. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 123–145. Lakusta, K.V. and Lenyuk, M.P. (1980). Estimates of the validity range for the hyperbolic equation of heat-conduction in homogeneous symmetric continuous bodies, J. Eng. Phys. 39(5), 930–935. and Timofeev, M.P. (1980). Estimating the range of applicability of the hyperbolic thermal conductivity equation, J. Eng. Phys. 37(2), 366–370. Lazzari, B. and Nibbi, R. (2007). On the energy decay of a linear hyperbolic thermoelastic system with dissipative boundary. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 1159–1172. Leseduarte, M.C. and Quintanilla, R. (2006). Thermal stresses in type III thermoelastic plates. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 485–503. Leslie, D.J. and Scott, N.H. (2000). Wave stability for near-incompressibility at uniform temperature or entropy in generalized isotropic thermoelasticity. Math. Mech. Solids 5, 157–202. Lockett, F.J. (1958). Effect of thermal properties of a solid on the velocity of Rayleigh waves. J. Mech. Phys. Solids 7, 71–75. Mallik, S.H. and Kanoria, M. (2008). A two-dimensional problem for a transversely isotropic generalized thermoelastic thick plate with spatially varying heat source. Eur. J. Mech. A-Solid 27(4), 607–621. Maruszewski, B.T., Drzewiecki, A. and Starosta, R. (2007). Anomalous features of the thermomagnetoelastic field in a vortex array in a superconductor: Propagation of Love waves. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 1049–1065. McDonough, J.M., Kunadin, I., Kumar, R.R. and Yang, T. (2006). An alternative discretization and solution procedure for the dual-phase-lag equation. J. Comp. Phys. 219, 103–171. Misra, J.C., Chattopadhyay, N.C. and Chakravorty, A. (2000). Study of thermoelastic wave propagation in a half-space using G-N theory. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 327–351. and Samanta, S.C. (1982). Thermal shock in a viscoelastic half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 5, 365–375. Morro, A. and Ruggeri, T. (1987). Second sound and internal energy in solids. Int. J. Non-Linear Mech. 22(1), 27–36. Mukhopadhyay, S. (1999). Relaxation effects in thermally induced vibrations in a generalized thermoviscoelastic medium with a spherical cavity. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 829–840. (2000). Effects of thermal relaxations on thermoviscoelastic interactions in an unbounded body with a spherical cavity subject to a periodic boundary load. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 675–684. (2002a). Thermoelastic interactions in a transversely isotropic elastic medium with a cylindrical hole subject to ramp-type increase in boundary temperature or load. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 341–362. Mukhopadhyay, S. (2002b). Thermoelastic interactions without energy dissipation in an unbounded medium with a spherical cavity due to a thermal shock at the boundary. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 877–887.


399

Naji, M., Al-Nimr, M.A. and Mallouh, M. (2003). Thermal stresses under the effect of the microscopic heat conduction model. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 41–53. and Al-Huniti, N.S. (2001). Thermal stresses in a rapidly heated plate using the parabolic two-step heat conduction equation. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 399–410. Nappa, L. (1998). Spatial decay estimates for the evolution equations of linear thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 581–592. Nayfeh, A. (1977). Propagation of thermoelastic disturbances in non-Fourier solids. AIAA J. 15, 957–960. Noda, N., Furukawa, T. and Ashida, F. (1989). Generalized thermoelasticity of an infinite solid with a hole. J. Thermal Stresses 12, 385–402. Oncu, T.S. and Moodie, T.B. (1991). Padé-extended ray series expansions in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 14, 85–99. (1994). Asymptotic analysis of a nonlinear problem in thermoelasticity. Stud. Appl. Math. 93, 163–186. Orisamolu, I.R., Singh, M.N.K. and Singh, M.C. (2002). Propagation of coupled thermomechanical waves in uniaxial inelastic solids. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 927–949. Othman, M.I.A. (2002). Lord-Shulman theory under the dependence of the modulus of elasticity on the reference temperature in two-dimensional generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 1027–1045. Payne, L.E. and Song, J.C. (2002). Growth and decay in generalized thermoelasticity. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 40, 385–400. Puri, P. and Jordan, P.M. (2003). Comments on the articles “Hyperbolic thermoelasticity: A review of recent literature” (Chandrasekhariah, D.S. 1998, Appl. Mech. Rev. 51(12), 705–729) and “Thermoelasticity with second sound: A review” (Chandrasekharaiah, D.S., 1986) Appl. Mech. Rev. 39(3), 355–376). Appl. Mech. Rev. 56(4), 451–453. Qunitanilla, R. (1999). On the spatial behavior in thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 213–229. (2002). Existence in thermoelasticity with energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 195–202. (2003). A condition on the delay parameters in the one-dimensional dual-phase-lag thermoelasticity theory. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 713–721. (2008a). A well-posed problem for the dual-phase-lag heat conduction. J. Thermal Stresses 31, 260–269. (2008b). Type II thermoelasticity. A new aspect. J. Thermal Stresses 31, in press. and Straughan, B. (2002). Explosive instabilities in heat transmission. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 458, 2833–2837. Racke, R. (2003). Asymptotic behavior of solutions in linear 2D or 3D thermoelasticity with second sound. Quart. Appl. Math. 61, 315–328. Rossikhin, Y.A. and Shitikova, M.V. (2007). Analysis of a hyperbolic system modelling the thermoelastic impact of two rods. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 943–963. Roychoudhuri, S.K. (2007). One-dimensional thermoelastic waves in elastic half-space with dual phase-lag effects. J. Mech. Mater. Struct. 2(3), 488–503. Rubin, M.B. (1972). Hyperbolic heat conduction and the second law. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 30, 1665–1676.

400


Rychlewska, J., Szymczak, J. and Wo´zniak, C. (2004). On the modelling of the hyperbolic heat transfer problems in periodic lattice-type conductors. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 825–841. Saleh, H.A. (2005). Problem in generalized thermoelasticity for a half-space under the action of a body force. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 253–266. Sare, H.D.F., Rivera Mu˜ noz, J.E. and Racke, R. (2008). Stability for a transmission problem in thermoelasticity with second sound. J. Thermal Stresses, in press. Saxena, H.S., Dhaliwal, R.S. and Rokne, J.G. (1991). Half-space problem in onedimensional generalized magneto-thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 14, 65–84. Saxton, K. and Saxton, R. (2006). Phase transmission and change of type in lowtemperature heat propagation. SIAM J. Appl. Math. 66 (5), 1689–1702. Sharma, J.N. (1997). An alternative state space approach to generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 20, 115–127. Sharma, M.D. (2006). Wave propagation in anisotropic generalized thermoelastic media. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 629–642. (2007). Propagation of inhomogeneous waves in a generalized thermoelastic anisotropic medium. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 679–691. Sharma, J.N. and Chauhan, R.S. (2001). Mechanical and thermal sources in a generalized thermoelastic half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 651–675. and Kumar, R. (2000). Time-harmonic sources in a generalized thermoelastic continuum. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 657–674. and Kumar, V.(1996). On the axisymmetric problems of generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 781–794. and Chand, D. (2003). Reflection of generalized thermoelastic waves from the boundary of a half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 925–942. Kumar, S. and Sharma, Y.D. (2008). Propagation of Rayleigh surface waves in microstretch thermoelastic continua under inviscid fluid loading. J. Thermal Stresses 31, 18–39. and Patania, V. (2005). Propagation of leaky surface waves in thermoelastic solids due to inviscid fluid loadings. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 485–519. and Sharma, P.K. (2002). Free vibration analysis of homogeneous transversely isotropic thermoelastic cylindrical panel. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 169–182. and Gupta, S.K. (2004). Steady-state response to moving loads in thermoelastic solid media. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 931–951. Sharma, Y.D. and Sharma, P.K. (2008). On the propagation of elastothermodiffusive surface waves in heat-conducting materials. J. Sound Vib. 315(4–5), 927–938. and Singh, D. (2002). Circular crested thermoelastic waves in homogeneous isotropic plates. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 1179–1193. and Kumar, R. (2004). Propagation of generalized viscothermoelastic Rayleigh-Lamb waves in homogeneous isotropic plates. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 645–668. Thankur, N. and Singh, S. (2007). Propagation characteristics of elasticthermodiffusive surface waves in a semiconductor material half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 357–380. Sharma, J.N., and Walia, V. (2006). Straight and circular crested Lamb waves in generalized piezothermoelastic plates. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 529–551.


401

Shashkov, A.G. and Yanovsky, S.Y. (1994). Propagation of harmonic thermoelastic waves in general theory of heat conduction with finite wave speeds. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 101–114. Sherief, H.H. (1987). On uniqueness and stability in generalized thermoelasticity. Quart, Appl. Math. 44(4), 773–778. (1993). State space formulation for generalized thermoelasticity with one relaxation time including heat sources. J. Thermal Stresses 16, 163–180. and Anwar, M.N. (1986). A problem in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 9, 165–181. (1986). Two-dimensional problem of a moving heated punch in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 9, 325–343. (1992). Generalized thermoelasticity problem for a plate subjected to moving heat sources on both sides. J. Thermal Stresses 15, 489–505. and Darwish, A.A. (1998). A short time solution for a problem in thermoelasticity of an infinite medium with a spherical cavity. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 811–828. and El-Maghraby, N.M. (2003). An internal penny-shaped crack in an infinite thermoelastic solid. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 333–352. (2005). A mode-I crack problem for an infinite space in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 465–484. Elmisiery, A.E.M. and Elhagary, M.A. (2004). Generalized thermoelastic problem for an infinitely long hollow cylinder for short times. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 885–902. and Ezzat, M.A. (1994). Solution of the generalized problem of thermoelasticity in the form of a series of functions. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 75–95. and Hamza, F.A. (1994). Generalized thermoelastic problems of a thick plate under axisymmetric temperature distribution. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 435–452. (1996). Generalized two-dimensional thermoelastic problems in spherical regions under axisymmetric distributions. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 55–76. and El-Sayed, A.M. (2005). Theory of generalized micropolar thermoelasticity and an axisymmetric half-space problem. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 409–437. Saleh, H.A. (2004). The theory of generalized thermoelastic diffusion. Int. J. Eng. Sci.. 42, 591–608. and Helmy, K.A. (1999). A two-dimensional generalized thermoelasticity problem for a half-space. J. Thermal Stresses 22, 897–910. (2002). A two-dimensional problem for a half-space in magnetothermoelasticity with thermal relaxation. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 40, 587–604. and Yosef, H.M. (2004). Short-time solution for a problem in magnetothermoelasticity with thermal relaxation. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 537–559. Singh, M.C. and Tran, D.V.D. (1994). Propagation of waves in nonlinear uniaxial coupled thermoelastic solids. J. Thermal Stresses 17, 21–44. Sinha, S.B. and Elsibai, K.A. (1996). Thermal stresses for an infinite body with a spherical cavity with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 267–272. (1996). Reflection of thermoelastic waves at a solid half-space with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 19, 749–762. Sinha, S.B. and Elsibai, K.A. (1997). Reflection and refraction of thermoelastic waves at an interface of two semi-infinite media with two relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 20, 129–145.

402


Sinha, S.B. and Elsibai, K.A. (1998). Effect of the second relaxation time on the propagation of Stoneley waves. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 41–53. Soyucok, A. (1991). Free vibrations of a generalized thermoelastic sphere. J. Thermal Stresses 11, 173–192. Strunin, D.V. (2001). On characteristic times in generalized thermoelasticity. J. Appl. Mech. 68, 816–817. Melnik, R.V.N. and Roberts, A.J. (2001). Coupled thermomechanical waves in hyperbolic thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 121–140. Suh, C.S. and Burger, C.P. (1998). Thermoelastic modeling of laser-induced stress waves in plates. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 829–897. Sumi, N. (2001). Numerical solutions of thermoelastic wave problems by the method of characteristics. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 509–530. (2007). Two-dimensional thermo-mechanical wave propagation in generalized coupled theory of thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 897–909. and Ashida, F. (2003). Solution for thermal and mechanical waves in a piezoelectric plate by the method of characteristics. J. Thermal Stresses 26, 1113–1123. Svanadze, M., Tibullo, V. and Zampoli, V. (2006). Fundamental solution in the theory of micropolar thermoelasticity without energy dissipation. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 57–66. Taheri, H., Fariborz, S. and Eslami, M.R. (2004). Thermoelasticity solution of a layer using the Green-Naghdi model. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 795–809. (2005). Thermoelastic analysis of an annulus using the Green-Naghdi model. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 911–927. Tamma, K.K. and Nambura, R.R. (1997). Computational approaches with applications to nonclassical and classical thermomechanical problems. Appl. Mech. Rev. 50(9), 514–551. and Zhou, X. (1998). Macroscale and microscale thermal transport and thermomechanical interactions: Some noteworthy perspectives. J. Thermal Stresses 21, 405–449. Tao, D.D.J. (1988). A numerical technique for dynamic coupled thermoelasticity problems with relaxation times. J. Thermal Stresses 12, 483–487. Tehrani, P.H. and Eslami, M.R. (2000). Boundary element analysis of Green-Lindsay theory under thermal mechanical shock in a finite domain. J. Thermal Stresses 23, 773–792. and Azari, S. (2006). Analysis of thermoelasticity crack problems using Green-Lindsay theory. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 317–330. Tran, D.V.D. and Singh, M.C. (2004). Nonlinear uniaxial thermoelastic waves by the method of characteristics. J. Thermal Stresses 27, 741–777. (2007). Nonlinear uniaxial thermoelastic waves with second sound by finite difference-flux corrected transport method. J. Thermal Stresses 30, 239–268. Tzou, D.Y., Chen, J.K. and Beraun, J.E. (2005). Recent development of ultra fast thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 563–594. Verma, K.L. and Hasebe, N. (2001). Wave propagation in plates of general anisotropic media in generalized thermoelasticity. Int. J. Eng. Sci. 39, 1739–1764. (2002). On the dynamic response with or without energy dissipation in the thermoelastic rotating media. Int. J. Appl. Mech. Eng. 7, 1329–1348.


403

Vick, B., and Ozisik, M.N. (1983). Growth and decay of a thermal pulse predicted by the hyperbolic heat conduction equation. J. Heat Transfer 105, 902–907. Wang, J. and Dhaliwal, R.S. (1993). Uniqueness in generalized thermoelasticity in unbounded domains. J. Thermal Stresses 16, 1–9. (1993). Fundamental solutions of the generalized thermoelastic equations. J. Thermal Stresses 16, 135–161. Wang, X. and Xu, X. (2002). Thermoelastic wave in a metal induced by ultrafast laser pulses. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 457–473. Wilhelm, H.E. and Choi, S.H. (1975). Nonlinear hyperbolic theory of thermal waves in metals. J. Chem. Phys. 63, 2119–2123. Wo´zniak, C., Wierzbicki, E. and Wo´zniak, M. (2002). A macroscopic model for the heat propagation in the microperiodic composite solids. J. Thermal Stresses 25, 283–293. Yilbas, B.S. and Ageeli, N. (2006). Thermal stress development due to laser step input pulse heating. J. Thermal Stresses 29, 721–751. Youssef, H.M. (2005). Generalized thermoelasticity of an infinite body with a cylindrical cavity and variable material properties. J. Thermal Stresses 28, 521–532. Zhou, X., Tamma, K.K. and Anderson, C.V.D.R. (2001). On a new C- and F-processes heat conduction model and the associated generalized theory of dynamic thermoelasticity. J. Thermal Stresses 24, 531–564.

NAME INDEX

Abbas, I. 392 Abd-Alla, A.N. 338, 383, 392 Abouelregal, A.E. 320, 392 Abramowitz, M. 188, 383 Achenbach, J.D. 263, 383, 392 Agarwal, V.K. 113 n. 1, 282, 338, 383, 392 Ageeli, N. 216, 403 Ailawalia, P. 398 Al-Dawy, A.A.S. 338 Al-Huniti, N.S. 216, 392, 399 Allam, M.N. 320, 392 Allam, M.N.M. 320, 392 Al-Nimr, M.A. 216, 392, 399 Al-Qahtani, H.M. 216, 383 Anderson, C.V.D.R. 392, 403 Anwar, M.N. 279, 389, 392, 401 Aouadi, M. xviii, 392, 393 Arcisz, M. 393 Ashida, F. 399, 402 Azari, S. 402 Bagri, A. 393 Bai, C. 355, 383 Bakhvalov, N. 333, 383 Baksi, A. 393 Banerjee, D.K. 11 n. 9, 389 Barber, A.D. xvi, 383 Basheleishvili, M.O. 10, 319 n. 11, 387 Bassiouny, E. 393 Bejan, A. xiii, 385 Bem, Z. 46 n. 10, 48 n. 11, 49, 50, 383, 393 Bensoussan, A. 333, 383 Bera, R.K. 393 Beraun, J.E. 216, 394, 402 Bialy, J. 26 n. 19, 54 n. 6, 66 n. 14, 70, 71 n. 17, 72 n. 19, 80 n. 21, 383, 387 Bishop, J.E. 339, 383 Biswas, M. 394 Boley, B.A. xi, xvi, 191 n. 22, 383 Bologna, M. 390 Bravo-Castillero, J. 330, 332, 323, 390 Brock, L.M. 338, 339, 383, 384 Brorson, S.D. 393 Brun, L. 116, 126, 157 n. 5, 384 Burchuladze, T.V. 50, 387, 393 Burger, C.P. 216, 402 Carbonaro, B. 80, 84, 387, 393 Carlson, D.E. 1, 30, 30 n. 1, 31, 97, 384

Caputo, M. 344, 384 Casas-Vazquez, J. 397 Cattaneo, C. xii, 384 Caviglia, G. 321, 322, 384 Chadwick, P. 149, 384 Chakravorty, A. 398 Chand, D. 400 Chandrasekharaiah, D.S. xii, 43, 50, 85, 110, 279, 322, 384, 393 Channin, D.J. 322, 388 Chattopadhyay, N.C. 394, 398 Chauhan, R.S. 320, 400 Chen, J.K. 216, 394, 402 Chen, T.C. 394 Chester, M. 321, 384 Chirita, S. xvi, 50, 384, 394 Choi, S.H. 403 Choudhary, S. 394 Choudhuri, S.K. 394, 399 Christov, C.I. xvi, 323, 384 Chrz¸eszczyk, A. 382, 384 Ciancio, V. 394 Ciarletta, M. 394 Ciumasu, S.G. 109, 394 Coleman, B.D. xviii, 352, 357, 384, 394 Dai, W. xiii, 385 Dalo, D.N. 396 Danilovskaya, V.I. 192 n. 23, 385 Darwish, A.A. 401 Datta, S.K. 216, 383 Day, W.A. 385 De Cicco, S. 50, 394 Deng, A.S. 394 Deresiewicz, H. 282, 385 Deswal, S. 394 Dhaliwal, R.S. xiii, 50, 279, 385, 390, 400, 401 Diaco, M. 50, 394 Ding, X.F. 395 DiPerna, R. 368, 385 Doma´ nski, W. 352, 368, 385, 387 Dost, S. 320, 395 Dreyer, W. 321, 385 Drzewiecki, A. 398 Dyszlewicz, J. 334, 395 Edelen, D.G.B. 327, 329, 385 Elhagary, M.A. 401

Name Index

El-Deen Mohamedein, M.Sh. 396 El-Karamany, A.S. 50, 110, 216, 279, 393, 395, 396 El-Maghraby, N.M. 395, 401 Elmisiery, A.E.M. 401 El-Sayed, A.M. 401 Elsibai, K.A. 320, 392, 401 Erbay, H.A. 18, 310, 320, 395 Erbay, S. 320, 385, 395 Eringen, A.C. 54, 82, 385, 390 Eslami, M.R. 393, 396, 402 Ezzat, M.A. 50, 216, 279, 395, 401 Fabrizio, M. 384 Falques, A. 396 Fariborz, S. 393, 402 Fatori, L.H. 396 Feder, J. 346, 385, 396 Fichera, G. 216, 385, 396 Fox, N. 396 Francis, P.H. 149, 385 Frischmuth, K. 397 Fujimoto, J.G. 393 Furukawa, T. 395, 399 Gawinecki, J.A. 50, 346 Gegelia, T.G. 10, 319 n. 11, 387 Ghaleb, A.F. 396 Ghoneim, H. 396 Gladysz, J. 89, 90, 91 n. 2, 94, 97, 98, 110, 385, 396 Gorenflo, R. 345, 385 Gorman, M.J. 396 Goubau, W.M. 322, 388 Green, A.E. xvi, 18, 20 n. 14, 25 n. 18, 322, 345, 385 Grigolini, P. 390 Gupta, S.K. 400 Gurtin, M.E. 54 n. 6, 82, 97, 103, 257, 264, 386, 396 Gusenbauer, M. 397 Haber, R.B. 322, 388 Haddow, J.B. 319, 396 Hamza, F.A. 401 Hasebe, N. 403 Hasselman, D.P.H. 386 He, T. 396 Hector, L.G. 216, 396 Heller, R.A. 386 Helmy, K.A. 401 Hetnarski, R.B. xi, xiii, 7 n. 5, 109, 191 n. 22, 216, 322, 382, 383, 386, 396 Hunter, J.K. 368, 386 Ie¸san, D. xiii, 31, 34, 50, 87, 322, 386, 397 Ignaczak, J. xiii, xvi, 7 n. 5, 11 n. 9, 15 n. 11, 16 n. 12, 24 n. 17, 39 n. 1,

405

40 n. 3, 43 n. 5, 54 n. 6, 60 n. 10, 65, 71 n. 16, 80, 82, 84, 85, 93, 109, 116, 117, 118, 126, 152 n. 1, 170, 191, 216, 241, 257, 319 n. 11, 322, 352, 354, 382, 386, 387, 393, 396, 397 Irschik, H. 397 Iovane, G. 397 Ippen, E.P. 393 Ivanov, T.P. 397 Jackson, H.E. 322, 387 Jakubowska, M. 177, 387, 397 Jordan, P.M. xvii, 323, 384, 385, 397, 399 Joseph, D.D. xii, 151, 322, 397 Jou, D. 397 Kaliski, S. 11 n. 9, 387 Kanoria, M. 398 Karakostas, G. 50, 397 Kawamura, R. 397 Keller, J. 368, 386 Khisaeva, Z.F. 320, 340, 387 Kim, W.S. 396 Kimmich, R. 344, 387 King, A.C. 387 Kinra, V.K. 339–340, 342, 383, 387 Klages, R. 321, 387 Kolano, Y.M. x, xiii, 389 Kosi´ nski, W. 382, 387, 393, 397, 398 Krumhansl, J.A. 388 Kumar, R. 320, 398, 400 Kumar, R.R. 398 Kumar, S. 400 Kumar, V. Kunadin, I. 398 Kupradze, V.D. 10, 319 n. 11, 387 Kusuki, S. 397 Lai, P.H. 394 Lakusta, K.V. 398 Landau, L. 150–151, 388 Lavine, A.S. 355, 384 Laws, N. 18 n. 13, 385 Lax, P.D. 367, 368, 388 Lazzari, B. 398 Lindsay, K.A. xvi, 18, 20 n. 14, 25 n. 18, 385 Lebon, G. 11 n. 9, 388, 397 Lenyuk, M.P. 398 Leseduarte, M.C. 398 Leslie, D.J. 319, 323, 388, 398 Li, S. 348, 396 Liu, J. 394 Lifshitz, R. 321, 388 Lions, J.L. 383 Lockett, F.J. 337, 398 Lord, H.W. xvi, 11, 388 Lueders, E. 396

406

Name Index

Mainardi, F. 345, 385 Majda, A. 368, 385 Mallik, S.H. 398 Mallouh, M. 399 Maruszewski, B.T. 398 Massalas, C.V. 50, 397 Maugin, G.A. 325, 388, 391 Maxwell, J.C. xii, xiii, 11, 321, 388 McDonough, J.M. 398 McNelly, T.F. 322, 387–388 Megdad, M.M. 216, 392 Melnik, R.V.N. 402 Mickens, R.E. xiii, 385 Mikusi´ nski, J. 88, 117, 123, 156–157, 157 n. 5, 168, 182, 185, 388 Millburn, D.A. 331, 389 Miller, S.T. 322, 388 Milligan, K.B. 339, 387 Misra, J.C. 398 Molinari, A. 393 Morro, A. 384, 398 Moodie, T.B. 399 Mr´ owka-Matejewska, E. 397 Mukdadi, O.M. 216, 383 Mukhopadhyay, S. 398–399 M¨ uller, I. xiii, 18 n. 13, 388 Mu˜ noz Rivera, J.E. 396 Naghdi, P.M. xvii, 322, 345, 385 Naji, M. 399 Nakamura, G. 396 Nakanishi, H. 395 Nambura, R.R. 402 Nappa, L. 322, 388, 394, 399 Nayfeh, A. 282, 337, 388, 399 Needham, D.J. 387 Nemat-Nasser, S. 282, 337, 388 Newman, D.C. 394 Nibbi, R. 398 Nickell, R.E. 7, 30 n. 1, 31, 34, 388 Noda, N. 399 Nowacki, Witold 1 n. 1, 10, 30, 175, 176 n. 15, 319 n. 11, 333, 387, 388 Oncu, T.S. 381, 399 Orisamolu, I.R. 399 Ostoja-Starzewski, M. 320, 329, 336, 340, 347–349, 351, 387–390 Othman, M.I. 396 Othman, M.I.A. 399 Owen, D.R. 384 Ozisik, M.N. 396, 403 Panasenko, G. 333, 383 Pao, Y.-H. 11 n. 9, 389 Papanicolaou, G.C. 383 Parkus, H. 176 n. 15, 389

Passarella, F. 397 Patania, V. 400 Payne, L.E. 399 Peierls, R. 321, 389 Peshkov, V. 321, 389 Pipkin, A.C. 396 Podstrigach, Y.S. xiii, 389 Pohl, R.O. 322, 388 Povstenko, Y.Z. 343, 345–346, 389 Prevost, J.H. 282 n. 4, 291 n. 6, 389–390 Preziosi, L. xii, 151, 322, 397 Puri, P. 282, 389, 397, 399 Quintanilla, R. xvi, 50, 322–323, 389, 394, 398 Racke, R. 399–400 Rafa, J. 396 Rani, L. 398 Rivera Munoz, J.E. 396, 400 Roberts, A.J. 402 Rodriguez-Ramos, R. 390 Rogers, S.J. 388 Rokne, J.G. 395, 400 Rollefson, R.J. 388 Rossikhin, Y.A. 399 Roukes, M.L. 321, 339–340, 388–389 Roychoudhuri, S.K. 399 Ro˙znowski, T. 319 n. 11, 389 Rubin, M.B. 400 Ruggeri, T. xiii, 388, 398 Russo, R. 387 Rychlewska, J. 400 Sackman, J.L. 7, 30 n. 1, 31, 34, 388 Saleh, H.A. 400–401 Samaan, A.A. 395 Samanta, S.C. 398 Samras, R.K. 331, 389 Sare, H.D.F. 400 Saxena, H.S. 395, 400 Saxton, K. 400 Saxton, R. 400 Scalia, A. 394 Schmidt, G.E. 388 Scott, A.M. 197, 216, 390 Scott, N.H. 319, 323, 387–389, 398 Sharma, J.N. 400–401 Sharma, M.D. 400 Sharma, P.K. 400 Sharma, Y.D. xviii, 400 Shashkov, A.G. 320, 401 Sherief, H.H. xviii, 50, 279, 389, 392, 401 Shitikova, M.V. 399 Shulman, Y. 388 Sikorska, B. 396 Singh, A. xiii, 385

Name Index

Singh, D. 400 Singh, M.C. 399, 401 Singh, M.N.K. 399 Singh, S. 400 Sinha, S.B. 320, 401 Skop, R.A. 389 Song, J.C. 399 Soyucok, A. 320, 402 Srinath, K.S. 394 Stakgold, I. 153, 172, 303 n. 8, 390 Starosta, R. 398 Stegun, I. 188, 383 Sternberg, E. xvi, 390 Straughan, B. 50, 323, 384, 389, 399 Strikverda, J.C. 197, 216, 390 Struchtrup, H. 321, 385 Strunin, D.V. 402 Suh, C.S. 216, 402 S ¸ uhubi, E.S. 18 n. 13, 54 n. 6, 82, 310, 390 Sumi, N. 402 Svanadze, M. 320, 394, 402 Szmit, K. 398 Szymczak, J. 400

Verma, K.L. 403 Vick, B. 403 Vieru, D. 109, 394 Vivar-P` erez, J.M. 330, 332–333, 390

Taheri, H. 393, 402 Tao, D. 282 n. 4, 291 n. 6, 389–390 Tamma, K.K. 392, 402–403 Tanigawa, Y. 397 Tao, D.D.J. 402 Tarabek, M.A. 382, 390 Tarasov, V.E. 346, 348, 390 Tehrani, P.H. 402 Thankur, N. 400 Tibullo, V. 320, 420 Timofeev, M.P. 398 Tran, D.V.D. 401–402 Tzou, D.Y. 16, 18, 216, 390, 394, 402

Yang, T. 398 Yanovsky, S.Y. 320, 401 Yilbas, B.S. 216, 403 Yosef, H.M. 401 Yourgrau, W. 391 Youssef, H.M. 393, 403

Walia, V. 401 Walker, C. T. 387 Wang, H. xiii, 385 Wang, J. 50, 395, 403 Wang, X. 216, 403 Watson, G.N. 181 n. 19, 300 Wegner, J.L. 396 Wehrli, C. 325, 350, 391 Weiner, J.H. xvi, 383 Weng, C.J. 394 West, B.J. 390 Wierzbicki, E. 403 Wilhelm, H.E. 403 Wilma´ nski, K. xiii, 390 Wojnar, R. 43 n. 5, 338–339, 390–391 Wo´ zniak, C. 400, 403 Wo´ zniak, M. 403 Xu, X. 216, 403

Zakaria, M. 395 Zampoli, V. 320, 402 Zaremba, S. xiii, 54 n. 6, 66, 391 Zener, C. 341–342, 391 Zhou, X. 402–403 Ziegler, H. 325, 328, 350, 391

407

SUBJECT INDEX

absolute temperature 2, 340, 353 acceleration wave xvii, 261, 270, 274 acoustic tensor 81 adiabatic elastodynamics 81 admissible process 93–94, 97–98, 100–101 alternative descriptions of a thermoelastic process xvi, 93 amplitude of a thermoelastic wave 310 anomalous diffusion 344 associated thermoelastic polynomials xvii, 245, 254, 256 asymptotic domain of influence xvi asymptotic behavior of solutions xi, xviii, 352, 369, 372–374, 376–379, 381 asymptotic method in homogenization 333 in non-linear rigid heat conductor 366 ballistic diffusion 344 Bernoulli–Euler thermoelastic beam-flexural vibrations 339 body anisotropic 80, 85 inhomogeneous 4, 23 thermoelastic 2–3 bifurcation point 131, 291 blow-up time 373–375, 377, 379 Boley’s number xvi bounds for velocities quasi-mechanical wave 83 quasi-thermal wave 83–84, 293 Brownian process 344 Cauchy problem xiv, xv, xviii, 54, 251, 345, 352, 355, 357, 376, 378, 381 central equation L–S theory 114 G–L theory 112, 114 central operator L–S theory 112, 114 G–L theory 112–114, 119, 165, 176, 192, 222, 295, 315 characterization of a thermoelastic process conventional xvi, 31–36, 87, 89, 93 non-conventional xvi, 31–36, 87, 89, 93, 107, 109 chiral media xvii classical

thermoelastic body 2, 5, 9–10, 22, 47, 49, 57, 87, 97, 119, 149, 289, 336, 342–343 thermoelastic process 46–47 thermoelastic solution 47–49 Clausius–Duhem inequality 327 coefficient of linear thermal expansion 336, 345 Coleman-type rigid heat conductor 352–366 compatibility conditions for a thermoelastic wave 263–264 complex wave number 263, 283, 311 compliance tensor 4 concept of a thermoelastic body 13, 412 constitutive laws for fractal media 347, 349 constitutive relations of thermoelasticity classical model 343 L–S model 16, 80, 83, 260 G–L model 83, 84, 260–261, 323 continuum thermodynamics rational xiii, 329, 344 with internal variables xvii, 325, 347 conventional thermoelastic process 31–34, 86–94, 96–103, 106–107, convolutional coefficient and kernel 143–151 convolutional variational principles 86–110 damping coefficient 180, 257, 267, 280–282, 284, 286, 289, 290, 293, 294, 311, 338 damping of the fundamental disturbance 180, 267, 290 decomposition theorem for a central equation of the G–L theory 112–114 dislocation-type wave 191, 261 displacement vector 34, 53, 113, 170, 173, 197, 340 displacement–temperature characterization of a thermoelastic process 6, 13, 15 n. 11, 31, 33, 34, 51, 65, 80–85, 98, 190, 196, 197, 261, 322, 323, 336 dispersion relation for the thermoelastic surface waves 338 dissipation inequality classical model 19 extended thermoelasticity 12, 13 G–L model 18 L–S model 11, 319 n. 11, domain of influence definition 54, 56, 58, 64, 68, 74, 78, 82, 84

Subject Index

theorem 51, 54, 54 n. 6, 56, 58, 60–66, 66 n. 14, 70, 72, 72 n. 19, 80, 80 n. 21, 82–84, potential–temperature problem 51–65 natural stress–heat-flux problem 65–71 natural stress–temperature problem 71–80 mixed displacement–temperature problem 80 dynamic equilibrium equations 1, 11 dual-phase-lag model 16 eigenvalue 154, 172, 217, 367, 368 eigenfunction 153, 153 n. 2, 172, 217, 315 elasticity tensor 3, 322 elastic compliance tensor 4 elliptic rigid heat conductor 16 energy conservation law 1, 2, 11, 12 entropy classical model density 2 L–S model 261, 340 G–L model 197 exact aperiodic-in-time thermoelatic solutions 152–216 existence theorem for a stress–heat-flux initial-boundary value problem xvi, 30–36, 103 extended second law of thermodynamics 12 extended energy conservation law 12 exterior fundamental solutions 220–222 externally applied load discontinuities 1 field variables 1 n. 2, 6, 30–31, 332, 338, finite element method 110 first law of thermodynamics 2, 12–13 formulation of the initial-boundary value problems 191 Fourier law of heat conduction 21 n. 16 fractal media 346–351 fractal porous media 347 fractional calculus xiii, xvii, 343–351 heat conduction xiii, xvii, 343–346 balance equations 332, 334, 349 integral 347, 348 free energy 2, 3, 12, 19–20, 328, 333 free harmonic vibrations of a thermoelastic sphere 320 fundamental solutions 152–164, 217–222, 241, 312 fundamental thermoelastic disturbance 127–143, 150, 153, 180, 257 n. 2, 267, 274, 276 n. 6, 290 Galilean invariance 323–325 G–L model of a thermoelastic body 257 n. 1 generalization of classical dissipation inequality 19

409

generalized energy–entropy relation 352 energy identity 56, 61, 67 n. 16, 73 free energy 19 thermoelasticity xiv, xviii, 85, 109, 322, 343 thermoelastic process 7 global displacement–temperature energy conservation law 33–34 stress–heat-flux energy conservation law 10, 16 stress–temperature energy conservation law 31, 33, 38, 39, 41, 42 relation for associated thermoelastic polynomials 245, 254–256 Green–Naghdi thermoelastic model 322, 345 Green’s function for the wave-like equation with convolution 114–127 growth and uniqueness in thermoelasticity 323 half-space xvii, 191 n. 22, 192 n. 24, 196, 197–216, 261–270 274, 279, 280, 320, 336, 338 Hamilton’s principle 110 heat conductor anomalous xiii, xvii, 343–346 Fourier 343 Maxwell–Cattaneo 150, 322–323, 325, 331 non-linear hyperbolic xvii, 352–382 heat-conduction equation 343, 345 heat conductivity 82, 84 heat flux xii, xvi, xviii, 2, 3, 6, 10 n 8, 12, 16 n. 12, 32, 34, 45, 51, 65–71, 94, 101, 103, 105, 106, 113, 169, 197, 261, 270, 271, 274, 276, 280, 282 n. 2, 325, 332, 340, 344, 352, 353, 376 heat flux and temperature gradient phase lags 16 heat supply field 81 Helmholtz-type theorem fundamental problem 312, 315, 318 potential–temperature problem 311 helix 329, 330, 332, 333, 335, 336 helical media thermoelastic 329–336 with periodic structure 330, 332 homogeneous heating with positive entropy production rate 329 isotropic medium 51, 343 homogenization 332–336 hyperbolic thermoelasticity G–L model 83–84, 257 nn. 1, 2, 260, 261, 323 L–S model 16, 80–83, 260

410

Subject Index

hyperbolic . . . (cont.) heat conductor xviii, 353–382 fractal media xvii, 346–351 hyperbolicity and genuine non-linearity in the sense of Lax 367

Lord–Shulman theory 51–59 linear extended thermoelasticity 12–13 space of admissible processes 94 thermoelastic solid 2, 3, 20–22

inhomogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic body 80 initial-boundary value problems G–L theory 24, 33–36, 83, 103, 106, 170, 257 n. 2 L–S theory 31, 103 mixed xvi, 31–35, 37, 80, 83 solutions xiv, 104, 108, 163, 168, 170, 176, 177, 198, 257 n. 2, 279 integral equations xvii, 217–240 integral representation of fundamental solution xvii, 217–220, 310–313 potential–temperature solution xvii, 280, 314–320 interaction of two thermoelastic half-spaces 338 interior fundamental solution 220, 221 internal energy 2, 12, 323, 325, 349, 353 variables xvii, 325, 347, 382 invariant 18, 350 isotropic material 334 thermoelastic body 5, 15 n. 11, 16 n. 12, 26 n. 19, 40 n. 3, 43 n. 4, 51, 59 n. 9, 294

magneto-thermoelastic waves with thermal relaxation 320 material chiral xvii, 329–336 thermoelastic 81, 151, 332, 333, 338 material functions of a thermoelastic solid 5 material time derivative xvii maximum speed of a thermoelastic wave in non-homogeneous anisotropic L–S model 80–83 non-homogeneous anisotropic G–L model 83–84 model with small acoustic and conductivity tensor fields 83–84 Maxwell–Cattaneo equation xvii, 13, 16, 322–323, 325, 340, 350 micro-electro-mechanical systems 321 microperiodic thermoelastic composite 330, 332 mixed initial-boundary value problems G–L theory 33–34 L–S theory 31–33 mode-locked laser pulse train 216 model with a quiescent past 18 moving discontinuity surfaces 257–279

Jeffrey’s isotropic rigid heat conductor 16 kernel of a double-layer potential 239, 240 a wave-like equation with convolution xvii, 114–127, 152, 164 kinematically and thermally admissible process 98 Kirchhoff-type formulas 217–240 Klein–Gordon operator 334 Lam´ e moduli 5 Landau estimate of the second sound 150–151 Laplace transform xv, 87, 89, 103–104, 107, 117, 123, 156, 157, 166, 177, 180–181, 193–194, 198–199, 217–219, 223, 225, 241, 279 laser laser-based ultrasonics 392 laser irradiation on a half-space xvii, 197–216 laser-induced heat 216 thermoelastic waves 216

nanomechanical resonators xvii, 320, 339–343 nanoelectromechanical systems 321 natural initial-boundary value problem L–S theory 65–71 G–L theory 71–80 stress–heat-flux problem xvi, 65–70, 106 natural non-conventional thermoelastic process 103–110 Neumann-type series representation 182 Newtonian calculus 344 Newtownian mechanics 30 non-conventional characterization of a thermoelastic process xvi, 30–34 thermoelastic process xvi, 31, 35, 38–50, 103–110 non-homogeneous anisotropic thermoelastic solid 82, 84 non-linear highly singular heat-conduction problem 328, 357 hyperbolic rigid heat conductor 352–382 hyperbolic thermoelastic waves 381–382 numerical results 342–343

Subject Index

one-dimensional problems 172 Onsager reciprocity conditions 328, 350 orthogonality conditions 368 parabolic heat conductor 16 Peshkov experiment 321 periodic-in-time thermoelastic waves cylindrical 302 plane 281 spherical 294 phase velocity 280, 282, 284, 286–294, 311 shift 16, 18 lags xiii, 16, 18 phonon gas 321 plane acceleration wave xvii, 270–276 wave of a negative order 192–196 polynomials of thermoelasticity; see also thermoelastic polynomials xvii, 161, 241–256 potential–temperature disturbances 51, 64, 65, 152 potential–temperature problem G–L theory 51, 59–65, 152, 153 n. 3, 232, 239, 314, 319 L–S theory 51–59, 65, 111, 114 problem of Danilovskaya type 192 n. 23, 196 Nowacki type 175, 176 n. 15, 191, 192 processes of thermoelasticity 16 quasielastic wave 289, 293, 322 linear matrix partial differential equation 366 thermal wave 83, 84, 293 radiation conditions asymmetric isothermal elastodynamics 319 n. 11 G–L theory xvii, 280, 310–320 L–S theory xvii, 319, 319 n. 11 coupled 280, 319 n. 11 classical dynamic thermoelasticity xii random processes 344 reduced relaxation time 23 attenuation coefficient 150, 278, 279 convolution coefficient 180, 183, 186 reference temperature 3, 81, 324, 334, 350, 355 reflection and refraction of thermoelastic waves 320

411

relaxation times G–L theory 18, 23, 24, 33, 40, 43, 110, 338, 336 L–S model 11, 16, 43, 83, 261 retarded value of a function 220, 231, 235 Riemann–Liouville derivative 345, 348 rigid heat conductor with fractal geometry 16, 80, 83, 150, 151, 323, 324, 326, 328, 352–382 Saint-Venant’s Principle xvi second law of thermodynamics classical model 12, 343 G–L theory L–S model 12, 13 second sound in liquid helium 321 in thermoelastic solid 150, 151 speed xii, 197, 216 series expansions of Neumann’s type 150, 153 n. 3, 163, 179, 182, 184, 185, 216 shock heat wave with two steepening profiles 376 thermoelastic wave 191, 260 short-laser pulse xii, 197, 216 singular surface of order n relative to a thermoelastic field 260 a negative order 175–191 solution of Danilovskaya type 192–196 Nowacki type 175–191 potential–temperature problem 164–169 thermoelastic layer problem 170–175 solvability condition 370 Sommerfeld-type radiation conditions 312, 316, 318 space of the constitutive variables 127–139 space-time discontinuous Galerkin method for hyperbolic heat conduction 388 specific heat at zero strain 3, 81 zero stress 4 speed of the fundamental disturbance 64, 127–139 spherical dislocation-type thermoelastic wave 191, 261 negative-order thermoelastic wave 175–191 shock thermoelastic wave 191, 260, 263 n. 4 stability 319 strain–displacement relations 1, 11, 97, 98, 100, 101

412

Subject Index

stress–heat flux admissible process 101, 105 characterization of a thermoelastic process 30–36 stress–strain relation 345 stress–temperature admissible process 100 characterization of a thermoelastic process 30–36 response of half-space to short laser pulse 215, 216 tensor 3, 82 strictly hyperbolic non-linear matrix partial differential equation 367 subdiffusion 344 superdiffusion 344, 345 support of a thermomechanical load 53 surface thermoelastic waves 388 telegraph equation for fractal media 350 temperature speed tending to infinity xvi theory of propagation of singular surfaces 257 thermal conductivity coefficient 5 conductivity tensor 3, 82, 84 displacement variable 322 expansion tensor 4 resistivity tensor 4 thermoelastic beam 339–343 concept 1, 13, 51 n. 1, 257 coupling 64, 111, 149, 248, 261, 280, 295, 331, 334, 338, 339, 350 damping in nanomechanical resonators xvii, 320, 339–343 domain of influence 343 energy of higher order in time 15 layer xvii, 170–175, 286 polynomials differential equation 249–251 integral relation 252–254 recurrence relations 241–249 process 97–103, 106–111, 114, 170, 171, 260, 261 response of half-space to laser irradiation xvii, 197–216 shock wave xvii, 191, 260–270 wave of strong discontinuity 260 wave of weak discontinuity 261 wave of negative order 175–196 thermoelasticity theory classical coupled quasi-static 1 n. 1 coupled dynamic 1, 1 n. 1 static 1 n. 1, 345, 346

uncoupled quasi-static 1 n. 1 uncoupled dynamic 1 n. 1 at cryogenic temperatures generalized xii, xiii, xvii, xviii, 18, 43, 46, 85, 109, 319, 320, 323, 336, 338, 342, 343, 350 Green–Lindsay 86–103, 106–127 hyperbolic 321–351 Lord–Shulman xvi, 111–114 micropolar 320, 333–336 of type II 322, 323 of type III 322 without energy dissipation 110, 320, 345 with internal variables xvii, 325, 347, 382 with one relaxation time xvi, xvii, 12–18, 39 n. 1, 40 n. 1, 65, 261–270, 338 with two relaxation times xvi, xvii, 18–29, 33, 40, 41, 43, 43 n. 5, 270–279, 280–310, 388 with finite wave speeds xiii, xvi, 1–29, 111–151 thermomechanical loading 1, 32–36, 46, 47, 53, 58, 60, 66, 71, 79, 85, 87, 171, 173, 175, 192, 231, 261, 285 travelling non-linear heat waves 358, 366 ultrafast phonon–electron interaction model 18 processes of thermoelasticity 16 uniqueness theorems xvi, 37–50 conventional problems 30 n. 1 non-conventional problems xvi, 37–50 mixed initial-boundary value problems xvi wave-like equation with convolution problems xvii, 114–127 variational principles convolutional xvi, 86–110 Hamilton’s type 110 wave acceleration xvii, 261, 270–279 aperiodic 152–216 attenuation 215–216, 278–279 electro-magneto-thermoelastic 1, 320 equation with dissipation xv–xviii Fichera theory of laser-induced thermoelastic 216 front 85, 190, 196, 213, 262–263, 267, 271–272, 275–276 Hetnarski–Ignaczak laser-induced thermoelastic 216 laser-induced heat thermoelastic 216 number 1, 51, 280–281, 311, 331, 333, 334, 338, 382 periodic-in-time 280–320 quasi-mechanical 83

Subject Index

quasi-thermal 83–84, 289, 293 shock xvii, 191, 260–270, 376, 381 surface xvii, 190, 257–279, 336–339 thermoelastic xiii, xvi–xvii, 1–29, 51, 80–85, 111–151, 175, 191, 197–216, 257, 260–310, 320, 322, 329–336, 338–343, 381, 382 travelling 322, 358–366 weak discontinuity 191, 261

413

wave-like equation with convolution xvii, 114–127 wave-like operator with convolution 127, 183, 186 weakly non-linear geometrical optics 366–382 well-posedness of the governing equations 382 Whitham’s wave hierarchies 323

Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Damage Mechanics with Finite Elements

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Structural analysis with finite elements

Wave Processes in Solids With Microstructure

Building Better Products with Finite Element Analysis

Finite element methods with B-splines

Finite Element Methods with B-Splines

Finite Element Analysis with Error Estimators

Finite element methods with B-splines

Crime Wave

Crime Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Genesis Wave

Shock Wave

Wave Motion

The Wave

Genesis Wave

Heat Wave

Crime Wave

Wave phenomena

Fright Wave

Sneaker Wave

Shock Wave

Thermoelasticity with Finite Wave Speeds

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Damage Mechanics with Finite Elements

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Structural Analysis with Finite Elements

Structural analysis with finite elements

Wave Processes in Solids With Microstructure

Building Better Products with Finite Element Analysis

Finite element methods with B-splines

Finite Element Methods with B-Splines

Finite Element Analysis with Error Estimators

Finite element methods with B-splines

Crime Wave

Crime Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Shock Wave

Genesis Wave

Shock Wave

Wave Motion

The Wave

Genesis Wave

Heat Wave

Crime Wave

Wave phenomena

Fright Wave

Sneaker Wave

Shock Wave

Recommend Documents